rfg040208 PDF

D059/D060/D061
SERVICE MANUAL
(Book 1 of 2) 004971MIU
MAINFRAME
D059/D060/D061
SERVICE MANUAL
D059/D060/D061
SERVICE MANUAL
004971MIU
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained
within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best
interest of Ricoh Americas Corporation and its member companies.
NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION.
All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including

desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered
trademarks or the property of their respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion
only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of
any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other
affiliation with Ricoh products.
© 2009 RICOH Americas Corporation. All rights reserved.

WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh Americas Corporation.
Users of this manual should be either service
trained or certified by successfully completing a
Ricoh Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing

information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property or loss of warranty
protection.
Ricoh Americas Corporation

LEGEND
PRODUCT COMPANY
CODE GESTETNER LANIER RICOH SAVIN
D059 Pro 907EX Pro 907EX Pro 907EX Pro 907EX
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS
* 07/2009 Original Printing
D059/D060/D061
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALLATION ........................................................................... 1-1
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS............................................................ 1-1
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT ............................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 POWER REQUIREMENTS............................................................... 1-2
1.1.3 MACHINE LEVEL ............................................................................. 1-3
1.1.4 CONFIGURATION RULES ............................................................... 1-4
Configuration 1 ..................................................................................... 1-4
Configuration 2 ..................................................................................... 1-5
1.1.5 SPACE REQUIREMENTS ................................................................ 1-8
Space Around....................................................................................... 1-8
Total Space Required........................................................................... 1-8
1.1.6 BEFORE YOU BEGIN... ................................................................. 1-11
1.2 MAIN MACHINE (D059/D060/D061)........................................................ 1-13
1.2.1 ACCESSORIES .............................................................................. 1-13
1.2.2 INSTALLATION .............................................................................. 1-16
Rating Voltage for Peripheral Units at Connection Points .................. 1-16
External Tape and Retainers.............................................................. 1-16
Internal Tape and Retainers: Paper Trays ......................................... 1-18
Internal Tape and Retainers: Fusing Unit ........................................... 1-19
Internal Tape and Retainers: Transfer Unit ........................................ 1-20
Internal Tape and Retainers: Drum Cleaning Unit.............................. 1-20
Pouring Developer.............................................................................. 1-22
Reinstalling the Development Unit ..................................................... 1-23
Operation Panel ................................................................................. 1-24
Filters, Original Exit Tray .................................................................... 1-30
Initializing the Machine ....................................................................... 1-31
Power Cord, Breaker Switch Test ...................................................... 1-32
Connecting the Tray Heaters of the Main Machine ............................ 1-32
1.2.3 COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION.............................................. 1-35
SM i D059/D060/D061
Setting Paper Sizes for the Paper Trays ............................................ 1-35
TCRU Safety Label for Fusing Unit .................................................... 1-36
1.2.4 CONTROLLER BOX, PSU BOX REMOVAL................................... 1-38
Removing the Controller Box.............................................................. 1-38
Removing the PSU Box...................................................................... 1-40
1.2.5 TRANSPORTING THE MAIN MACHINE ........................................ 1-43
Before Moving the Main Machine ....................................................... 1-43
After Moving the Main Machine .......................................................... 1-44
1.3 A3/11"X17" TRAY UNIT TK5010 (B331-14) ............................................ 1-45
1.3.1 ACCESSORIES .............................................................................. 1-45
1.3.2 INSTALLATION .............................................................................. 1-46
1.4 LCIT RT5030 (D452-17) .......................................................................... 1-50
1.4.1 ACCESSORIES .............................................................................. 1-50
1.4.2 INSTALLATION .............................................................................. 1-51
Tapes, Retainers ................................................................................ 1-51
Docking .............................................................................................. 1-52
Height Adjustment .............................................................................. 1-54
1.4.3 IMAGE POSITION SENSOR, PAPER REGISTRATION
ADJUSTMENT ......................................................................................... 1-54
1.4.4 LCIT (D452) TRAY HEATERS........................................................ 1-55
Accessories ........................................................................................ 1-55
Installation .......................................................................................... 1-56
1.5 LCIT RT5040 (D453-17) .......................................................................... 1-59
1.5.1 ACCESSORIES .............................................................................. 1-59
1.5.2 INSTALLATION .............................................................................. 1-60
Tapes, Retainers ................................................................................ 1-60
Docking .............................................................................................. 1-61
ADJUSTMENT ......................................................................................... 1-63
1.5.4 COATED PAPER AND NCR........................................................... 1-64
Coated Paper ..................................................................................... 1-64
NCR ................................................................................................... 1-64
1.5.5 LCIT (D453) TRAY HEATERS........................................................ 1-65
Accessories ........................................................................................ 1-65
Installation .......................................................................................... 1-67
D059/D060/D061 ii SM
1.6 MULTI BYPASS TRAY BY5000 (B833-17).............................................. 1-70
1.6.1 ACCESSORIES .............................................................................. 1-70
1.6.2 INSTALLATION .............................................................................. 1-71
Before Installing the Multi Bypass Tray .............................................. 1-71
LCIT (D452)........................................................................................ 1-71
LCIT (D453)........................................................................................ 1-73
Both LCIT Units .................................................................................. 1-74
1.7 DECURL UNIT DU5000 (D457-17).......................................................... 1-77
1.7.1 ACCESSORIES .............................................................................. 1-77
1.7.2 INSTALLATION .............................................................................. 1-78
Tapes ................................................................................................. 1-78
Mylars................................................................................................. 1-79
Docking .............................................................................................. 1-80
1.8 PERFECT BINDER (D391) ...................................................................... 1-82
1.9 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY CI5010 (B835) ......................................... 1-83
1.9.1 ACCESSORIES .............................................................................. 1-83
1.9.2 INSTALLATION .............................................................................. 1-84
Tapes ................................................................................................. 1-84
Attaching the Black Mylar to the Downstream Unit............................. 1-85
Sponge Strip, Paper Guide, Ground Plate ......................................... 1-85
Docking the Tray Transport Unit to the Decurl Unit (D457) ................ 1-85
Docking .............................................................................................. 1-87
Dock the Downstream Peripheral Device ........................................... 1-89
Mounting the Tray Unit ....................................................................... 1-89
1.10 MULTI FOLDING UNIT (D454) .......................................................... 1-92
1.10.1 ACCESSORIES ........................................................................ 1-92
1.10.2 INSTALLATION......................................................................... 1-93
Tapes ................................................................................................. 1-93
Paper Guide, Sponge Strip................................................................. 1-94
Ground Plate ...................................................................................... 1-94
Docking .............................................................................................. 1-95
Removing Parts for the Cover Interposer Tray (B835) ....................... 1-97
Power Cord, Breaker Switch Test ...................................................... 1-98
Check for Skew and Correct Side-to-Side Registration...................... 1-98
SM iii D059/D060/D061
Proof Tray Auxiliary Plate ................................................................... 1-99
1.11 RING BINDER (D392)...................................................................... 1-100
1.12 HIGH CAPACITY STACKER (D447)................................................ 1-101
1.12.1 ACCESSORIES ...................................................................... 1-101
1.12.2 INSTALLATION....................................................................... 1-102
Shipping Tapes ................................................................................ 1-103
Paper Guide, Sponge Strip, Ground Plate ....................................... 1-104
Docking ............................................................................................ 1-105
Lock Hasps....................................................................................... 1-107
Height Adjustment ............................................................................ 1-108
Power Cord, Breaker Switch Test .................................................... 1-108
Check for Skew and Correct Side-to-Side Registration.................... 1-108
Docking: Downstream ...................................................................... 1-109
Roll-Away Cart (D456) ..................................................................... 1-109
1.13 BOOKLET FINISHER SR5020 (D434-17)........................................ 1-111
1.13.1 ACCESSORIES ...................................................................... 1-111
1.13.2 INSTALLATION....................................................................... 1-112
Tapes, Retainers, Shipping Plates ................................................... 1-112
Ground Plate, Sponge Strip.............................................................. 1-115
Booklet Tray, Shift Tray.................................................................... 1-116
Docking ............................................................................................ 1-117
Height Adjustment ............................................................................ 1-119
Power Cord, Breaker Switch Test .................................................... 1-119
Auxiliary Trays.................................................................................. 1-120
1.13.3 PUNCH UNIT PU5020 NA, EU, SC (D449-17, -27, -28) ......... 1-121
Accessories ...................................................................................... 1-121
1.13.4 INSTALLATION....................................................................... 1-122
1.14 TRIMMER UNIT TR5020 (D455-17) ................................................ 1-131
1.14.1 ACCESSORIES ...................................................................... 1-131
1.14.2 INSTALLATION....................................................................... 1-132
Tapes, Stopper Plate........................................................................ 1-132
Output Tray ...................................................................................... 1-133
Ground Plate .................................................................................... 1-134
Preparing the Booklet Finisher (D434) for Docking .......................... 1-134
Docking ............................................................................................ 1-136
D059/D060/D061 iv SM
Rev. 10/06/2009
1.15 FINISHER SR5000 (B830) ............................................................... 1-138
1.15.1 ACCESSORIES ...................................................................... 1-138
1.15.2 INSTALLATION....................................................................... 1-139
Preparing the Finisher ...................................................................... 1-139
Docking ............................................................................................ 1-141
1.15.3 PUNCH UNIT PU5000 NA, EU, SC (B831-01, -02, -03) ......... 1-142
Accessories ...................................................................................... 1-142
Installation ........................................................................................ 1-143
1.16 KEY COUNTER ............................................................................... 1-148
1.16.1 ACCESSORIES ...................................................................... 1-148
1.16.2 INSTALLATION....................................................................... 1-149
Assembling....................................................................................... 1-149
Installing ........................................................................................... 1-149
Attaching the Key Counter to the LCIT............................................. 1-151
User Tool and SP Mode Settings ..................................................... 1-153
1.17 OPTIONAL COUNTER I/F TYPE A (B870) ...................................... 1-154
1.18 COMMON ADJUSTMENTS ............................................................. 1-156
1.18.1 HEIGHT AND LEVEL ADJUSTMENT ..................................... 1-156
Before you begin: ............................................................................. 1-156
Setting the Leveling Shoes............................................................... 1-156
1.18.2 LCIT ADJUSTMENTS ............................................................. 1-157
1.18.3 SKEW AND SIDE-TO-SIDE REGISTRATION ........................ 1-159
Overview .......................................................................................... 1-159
Checking Side-to-Side Registration.................................................. 1-164
Correcting Side-to-Side Registration ................................................ 1-165
Detecting Paper Skew...................................................................... 1-165
Correcting Skew ............................................................................... 1-166
1.18.4 BREAKER SWITCH TESTING................................................ 1-169
1.19 MFP OPTIONS................................................................................. 1-170
1.19.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................. 1-172
1.19.2 MERGING APPLICATIONS ON ONE SD CARD .................... 1-172
Overview .......................................................................................... 1-172
Merging Applications ........................................................................ 1-172
Undo Exec........................................................................................ 1-173
1.19.3 COMMON PROCEDURES FOR MFP OPTIONS ................... 1-174
SM v D059/D060/D061
Rev. 10/06/2009
Storing SD Application Cards on Site............................................... 1-174
Removing Slot Covers...................................................................... 1-175
1.19.4 PRINTER/SCANNER UNIT TYPE 1357 (D451-01) ................ 1-176
Accessories ...................................................................................... 1-176
Installation ........................................................................................ 1-176
1.19.5 IEEE1284 INTERFACE BOARD TYPE A (B679-17)............... 1-178
Accessories ...................................................................................... 1-178
1.19.6 POSTSCRIPT3 UNIT TYPE 1357 (D451-05).......................... 1-178
Accessories ...................................................................................... 1-178
Installation ........................................................................................ 1-178
1.19.7 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT TYPE H (D377-06)..... 1-180
Accessories ...................................................................................... 1-180
Before You Begin….......................................................................... 1-178
Seal Check and Removal ................................................................. 1-181
Installation ........................................................................................ 1-181
1.19.8 BROWSER UNIT TYPE E (D430-05)...................................... 1-183
Accessories ...................................................................................... 1-183
Installation ........................................................................................ 1-183
1.19.9 VM CARD TYPE J (D463-01).................................................. 1-184
Accessories ...................................................................................... 1-184
Installation ........................................................................................ 1-184
1.19.10 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER TYPE C (D377-04)............... 1-185
Accessories ...................................................................................... 1-185
Installation ........................................................................................ 1-186
1.19.11 IEEE802.11A/G INTERFACE UNIT TYPE J (377-01) ......... 1-187
Accessories ...................................................................................... 1-187
SP Mode Settings for 802.11a/g Wireless LAN ................................ 1-188
1.19.12 BLUETOOTH INTERFACE UNIT TYPE 3245 (B826-17) .... 1-189
Accessories ...................................................................................... 1-189
Installation ........................................................................................ 1-189
1.19.13 GIGABIT ETHERNET TYPE B (D377-21) ........................... 1-190
Accessories ...................................................................................... 1-190
1.19.14 COPY DATA SECURITY UNIT TYPE F (B829-07) ............. 1-191
Accessories ...................................................................................... 1-191
Installation ........................................................................................ 1-191
1.19.15 HDD ENCRYPTION UNIT TYPE A (D377-16) .................... 1-193
D059/D060/D061 vi SM
Rev. 10/06/2009
Accessories ...................................................................................... 1-193
Before You Begin the Procedure...................................................... 1-193
Seal Check and Removal ................................................................. 1-194
Installation Procedure....................................................................... 1-195
Recovery from a Device Problem..................................................... 1-195
Restoring the encryption key ............................................................ 1-195
Clearing the NVRAM ........................................................................ 1-196
1.19.16 IPDS UNIT TYPE 1357 EX (451-08) ................................... 1-197
Accessories: ..................................................................................... 1-197
Installation ........................................................................................ 1-197
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ................................................... 2-1
2.1 PM PARTS................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1 PM COUNTER.................................................................................. 2-1
Displaying the PM Counter................................................................... 2-1
PM Parts Screen Details ...................................................................... 2-2
Number Button Submenu ..................................................................... 2-2
Parts list for PM Yield Indicator ............................................................ 2-3
2.1.2 PM COUNTERS ............................................................................... 2-4
Accessing the PM Counters ................................................................. 2-4
All PM Parts List ................................................................................... 2-5
Parts List for PM Yield Indicator ........................................................... 2-7
Parts Exceeding Target Yield ............................................................... 2-7
Counter Clear for Parts Exceeding Target Yield................................... 2-7
Clear All PM Settings ........................................................................... 2-8
Counter List Print Out........................................................................... 2-8
2.2 PM TABLES: MAIN .................................................................................. 2-10
2.2.1 MAIN MACHINE PM PARTS .......................................................... 2-11
ADF .................................................................................................... 2-19
2.3 PM TABLES: OPTIONS........................................................................... 2-21
2.3.1 1. LCIT RT5030 (D452-17) ............................................................. 2-21
2.3.2 2. LCIT RT5040 (D453-17) ............................................................. 2-22
2.3.3 3. MULTI-BYPASS TRAY (B833) ................................................... 2-22
2.3.4 4. DECURL UNIT DU5000 (D457-17)............................................. 2-23
2.3.5 5. PERFECT BINDER/INSERTER (D391)...................................... 2-23
SM vii D059/D060/D061
Inserter Unit........................................................................................ 2-25
Horizontal Paper Path ........................................................................ 2-26
Signature Path.................................................................................... 2-27
Stacking Tray ..................................................................................... 2-28
Main Grip Unit .................................................................................... 2-28
Gluing Unit.......................................................................................... 2-29
Cover Registration Unit ...................................................................... 2-29
Signature Rotation Unit ...................................................................... 2-29
Trimming Unit ..................................................................................... 2-29
Other .................................................................................................. 2-30
2.3.6 6. COVER INTERPOSER TRAY CI5000 (B835) ............................ 2-30
2.3.7 7. MULTI-FOLDING UNIT FD5000 (D454) ..................................... 2-31
2.3.8 8. RING BINDER (D392)................................................................. 2-31
2.3.9 9. HIGH CAPACITY STACKER SK5010 (D447)............................. 2-32
2.3.10 10. BOOKLET FINISHER SR5020 (D434) ................................ 2-33
Main ................................................................................................... 2-33
Punch Unit.......................................................................................... 2-34
Staplers .............................................................................................. 2-34
2.3.11 11. TRIMMER UNIT TR5020 (D455)......................................... 2-34
2.3.12 12. FINISHER SR5000 (B830) .................................................. 2-35
Punch Unit PU5000 B831 .................................................................. 2-35
2.3.13 LUBRICATION POINTS ............................................................ 2-36
Transfer .............................................................................................. 2-36
Fusing ................................................................................................ 2-36
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 3-1
3.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS .............................................................................. 3-1
3.1.1 DRUM ............................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 DRUM UNIT...................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.3 TRANSFER BELT UNIT ................................................................... 3-2
3.1.4 SCANNER UNIT ............................................................................... 3-2
3.1.5 LASER UNIT..................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.6 CHARGE CORONA .......................................................................... 3-2
3.1.7 DEVELOPMENT............................................................................... 3-3
D059/D060/D061 viii SM
3.1.8 CLEANING........................................................................................ 3-3
3.1.9 FUSING UNIT ................................................................................... 3-4
3.1.10 PAPER FEED.............................................................................. 3-4
3.1.11 USED TONER............................................................................. 3-4
3.2 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS....................................................... 3-5
3.2.1 SPECIAL TOOLS.............................................................................. 3-5
3.2.2 LUBRICANTS ................................................................................... 3-5
3.3 COMMON PROCEDURES ........................................................................ 3-6
3.3.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT DRAWER..................................................... 3-6
Pulling the Drawer Out ......................................................................... 3-6
Closing the Drawer............................................................................... 3-8
3.3.2 FRONT DOORS ............................................................................. 3-11
3.3.3 RIGHT COVERS............................................................................. 3-12
3.3.4 LEFT COVERS ............................................................................... 3-13
3.3.5 CONTROLLER BOX ....................................................................... 3-14
Opening the Controller Box ................................................................ 3-14
Removing the Controller Box Upper Cover ........................................ 3-14
Removing the Controller Box.............................................................. 3-15
3.3.6 PSU BOX ........................................................................................ 3-18
Opening the PSU Box ........................................................................ 3-18
Removing the PSU Box...................................................................... 3-18
3.3.7 REAR UPPER COVER ................................................................... 3-21
3.4 DOCUMENT FEEDER............................................................................. 3-22
3.4.1 ADF COVERS................................................................................. 3-22
3.4.2 ADF ORIGINAL TRAY .................................................................... 3-23
Original Tray....................................................................................... 3-23
Original Table Cover .......................................................................... 3-23
Bottom Plate....................................................................................... 3-23
3.4.3 FEED UNIT AND SEPARATION ROLLER ..................................... 3-24
3.4.4 FEED BELT .................................................................................... 3-25
3.4.5 PICK-UP ROLLER .......................................................................... 3-26
3.4.6 ADF SENSORS .............................................................................. 3-27
Entrance Sensor and Length Sensor ................................................. 3-27
Registration Sensor............................................................................ 3-27
Width Sensors .................................................................................... 3-28
Exit Sensor, Inverter Sensor............................................................... 3-29
SM ix D059/D060/D061
3.4.7 TRANSPORT BELT ........................................................................ 3-30
3.4.8 ADF MOTORS ................................................................................ 3-31
Bottom Plate Motor, Pick-up Motor..................................................... 3-31
Feed-in, Transport, Feed-out Motors.................................................. 3-31
3.4.9 FEED-IN CLUTCH .......................................................................... 3-33
3.5 SCANNER UNIT ...................................................................................... 3-35
3.5.1 EXPOSURE GLASS ....................................................................... 3-35
3.5.2 LENS BLOCK ................................................................................. 3-36
3.5.3 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS ........................................................... 3-37
3.5.4 EXPOSURE LAMPS ....................................................................... 3-38
3.5.5 LAMP REGULATORS .................................................................... 3-39
3.5.6 OPTICS DUST FILTER................................................................... 3-40
3.5.7 SCANNER HP SENSOR ................................................................ 3-41
3.5.8 SCANNER MOTOR ........................................................................ 3-42
3.5.9 SCANNER DRIVE WIRES.............................................................. 3-43
Preparation......................................................................................... 3-43
Front, Rear Scanner Drive Wires ....................................................... 3-44
Reinstallation...................................................................................... 3-44
3.5.10 SIB ............................................................................................ 3-46
3.6 LASER UNIT ............................................................................................ 3-47
3.6.1 CAUTION DECALS ........................................................................ 3-47
3.6.2 LD UNIT .......................................................................................... 3-48
3.6.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR ........................................................ 3-50
3.6.4 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR .................................... 3-51
3.7 AROUND THE DRUM.............................................................................. 3-52
3.7.1 CLEANING UNIT, PCU, DRUM ...................................................... 3-52
3.7.2 PTL (PRE-TRANSFER LAMP) ....................................................... 3-54
3.7.3 PRE-CHARGE UNIT....................................................................... 3-55
3.7.4 CHARGE CORONA UNIT............................................................... 3-58
3.7.5 DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR ........................................................ 3-62
3.7.6 PICK-OFF PAWLS.......................................................................... 3-63
3.7.7 ID SENSOR .................................................................................... 3-64
3.7.8 CLEANING BRUSH ........................................................................ 3-66
3.7.9 CLEANING BLADES ...................................................................... 3-67
3.7.10 CLEANING UNIT FILTERS ....................................................... 3-68
3.7.11 TONER FILTER ........................................................................ 3-69
D059/D060/D061 x SM
3.7.12 QUENCHING LAMP SHIELD GLASS ....................................... 3-69
3.8 DEVELOPMENT AND TONER SUPPLY................................................. 3-70
3.8.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT REMOVAL ................................................. 3-70
3.8.2 TONER HOPPER REMOVAL......................................................... 3-71
3.8.3 DEVELOPER REPLACEMENT ...................................................... 3-72
Initializing the Machine ....................................................................... 3-73
3.8.4 CLEANING THE DOCTOR BLADE ................................................ 3-75
3.8.5 DEVELOPMENT ENTRANCE, FRONT, REAR SIDE SEALS ........ 3-78
3.8.6 TONER DENSITY SENSOR........................................................... 3-79
3.8.7 TONER HOPPER SENSOR ........................................................... 3-80
3.8.8 TONER SUCTION BOTTLE ........................................................... 3-81
3.8.9 TONER SUCTION MOTOR ............................................................ 3-82
3.8.10 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR UNIT................................................ 3-83
3.8.11 TONER PUMP MOTOR, TONER PUMP MOTOR SENSOR .... 3-85
3.8.12 DEVELOPMENT ROLLER SHAFT CLEANING ........................ 3-86
3.9 TRANSFER BELT UNIT .......................................................................... 3-87
3.9.1 TRANSFER BELT UNIT REMOVAL ............................................... 3-87
3.9.2 TRANSFER BELT........................................................................... 3-89
3.9.3 TRANSFER BELT/BIAS ROLLER CLEANING BLADE .................. 3-91
3.9.4 TRANSFER BELT BIAS BRUSH .................................................... 3-92
3.10 PAPER FEED..................................................................................... 3-93
3.10.1 PAPER TRAYS ......................................................................... 3-93
Tandem Tray ...................................................................................... 3-93
Universal Tray .................................................................................... 3-94
3.10.2 PAPER FEED ROLLERS .......................................................... 3-95
3.10.3 PAPER FEED UNITS 1, 2, 3 ..................................................... 3-96
3.10.4 PAPER FEED, PAPER END, TRAY LIFT SENSOR ................. 3-98
3.10.5 REAR FENCE RETURN SENSOR ........................................... 3-99
3.10.6 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR ................................................... 3-100
3.10.7 1ST TRAY RIGHT PAPER SENSOR ...................................... 3-101
3.10.8 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE .................................................. 3-102
3.10.9 PAPER DUST TRAY, REGISTRATION SENSOR,
DOUBLE-FEED SENSORS ................................................................... 3-104
3.10.10 LIFT MOTORS..................................................................... 3-106
1st Tray Lift Motor ............................................................................ 3-106
2nd, 3rd Tray Lift Motors .................................................................. 3-107
SM xi D059/D060/D061
3.10.11 2ND, 3RD TRAY SIZE SWITCHES ..................................... 3-108
3.10.12 FEED MOTORS .................................................................. 3-108
Vertical Relay Motor ......................................................................... 3-108
Feed Motor, Grip Motor .................................................................... 3-109
3.10.13 UPPER RELAY MOTOR ..................................................... 3-110
3.10.14 REGISTRATION MOTOR.................................................... 3-111
3.10.15 DEVELOPMENT FAN MOTOR ........................................... 3-112
3.10.16 REGISTRATION UNIT......................................................... 3-113
3.10.17 LCT RELAY AND RELAY SENSORS.................................. 3-114
3.10.18 IMAGE POSITION SENSORS............................................. 3-115
Image position sensor unit (Tray) ..................................................... 3-115
Image position sensor unit (Duplex) ................................................. 3-115
CIS Image Position Adjustment: LED Strength ................................ 3-116
CIS in the Duplex Unit ...................................................................... 3-117
CIS Image Position Adjustment: Normal Paper................................ 3-117
3.10.19 TANDEM FEED TRAY PAPER SIZE CHANGE .................. 3-119
Setting the Paper Size for the Right Tandem Tray ........................... 3-119
Setting the Paper Size for the Left Tandem Tray ............................. 3-120
3.10.20 TANDEM TRAY SIDE REGISTRATION .............................. 3-122
3.11 FUSING UNIT .................................................................................. 3-123
3.11.1 REMOVING THE FUSING UNIT............................................. 3-123
3.11.2 REINSTALLING THE FUSING UNIT ...................................... 3-125
3.11.3 FUSING UNIT COVERS ......................................................... 3-126
3.11.4 FUSING CLEANING UNIT ...................................................... 3-127
Disassembling the Fusing Cleaning Unit .......................................... 3-127
Fabric Pressure Roller...................................................................... 3-128
Reassembling the Fusing Cleaning Unit .......................................... 3-128
3.11.5 HOT ROLLER UNIT ................................................................ 3-130
3.11.6 HOT ROLLER ......................................................................... 3-131
Removing the Fusing Lamps............................................................ 3-131
Disassembling the Hot Roller ........................................................... 3-133
Re-installing the Fusing Lamps ........................................................ 3-134
3.11.7 PRESSURE ROLLER ............................................................. 3-136
3.11.8 CLEANING ROLLER: PRESSURE ROLLER.......................... 3-138
3.11.9 HOT ROLLER STRIPPERS .................................................... 3-139
3.11.10 PRESSURE ROLLER STRIPPER ....................................... 3-140
D059/D060/D061 xii SM
3.11.11 FUSING EXIT SENSOR ...................................................... 3-141
3.11.12 FUSING UNIT THERMOSTATS, THERMISTOR ................ 3-142
3.11.13 FUSING PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT.................................. 3-144
3.11.14 JOB TIME SENSOR ............................................................ 3-145
3.12 DUPLEX UNIT.................................................................................. 3-146
3.12.1 DUPLEX UNIT......................................................................... 3-146
3.12.2 DUPLEX UNIT INNER COVER............................................... 3-147
3.12.3 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR................................................. 3-147
3.12.4 DUPLEX SWITCHBACK AND TRANSPORT MOTORS ......... 3-148
3.12.5 DUPLEX ENTRANCE GUIDE UNIT........................................ 3-149
3.12.6 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR, INVERTER SENSOR ......... 3-150
3.12.7 DUPLEX TRANSPORT SENSORS 1, 2, 3.............................. 3-151
3.12.8 INVERTER RELAY SENSOR ................................................. 3-152
3.13 TONER BANK .................................................................................. 3-153
3.13.1 TONER COLLECTION BOTTLE ............................................. 3-153
3.13.2 TONER BANK UNIT................................................................ 3-154
3.13.3 ACCESS TO INSIDE THE TONER BANK .............................. 3-159
3.14 BOARDS .......................................................................................... 3-160
3.14.1 MCU ........................................................................................ 3-160
3.14.2 OPU ........................................................................................ 3-161
3.14.3 IOB .......................................................................................... 3-162
IOB ................................................................................................... 3-162
IOB Unit............................................................................................ 3-163
3.14.4 PSU-E (ENGINE): A, B............................................................ 3-164
3.14.5 PPG, CGB POWER PACKS ................................................... 3-166
3.14.6 AC DRIVE BOARD.................................................................. 3-168
3.14.7 CONTROLLER BOARD, NVRAM ........................................... 3-169
Board Removal................................................................................. 3-169
NVRAM Replacement ...................................................................... 3-171
3.14.8 BICU........................................................................................ 3-173
3.14.9 HDD ........................................................................................ 3-177
3.14.10 PSU-C.................................................................................. 3-179
3.14.11 URB ..................................................................................... 3-180
3.15 MOTORS.......................................................................................... 3-181
3.15.1 DRUM MOTOR ....................................................................... 3-181
3.15.2 DUPLEX MOTOR.................................................................... 3-184
SM xiii D059/D060/D061
3.15.3 FUSING MOTOR .................................................................... 3-185
3.15.4 EXIT MOTOR .......................................................................... 3-186
3.16 OZONE FILTER ............................................................................... 3-187
3.17 COPY IMAGE ADJUSTMENT: PRINTING/SCANNING................... 3-188
3.17.1 PRINTING ............................................................................... 3-188
Registration – Leading Edge ............................................................ 3-188
Registration – Side-to-Side............................................................... 3-188
Blank Margin .................................................................................... 3-189
Magnification Adjustment ................................................................. 3-190
3.17.2 PARALLELOGRAM IMAGE ADJUSTMENT ........................... 3-192
3.17.3 SCANNING ............................................................................. 3-194
Registration: Platen Mode ................................................................ 3-194
Magnification .................................................................................... 3-195
3.17.4 ADF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT.................................................... 3-196
Registration ...................................................................................... 3-196
TROUBLESHOOTING
4. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 4-1
4.1 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD .......................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 OVERVIEW....................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 RECOVERY METHODS ................................................................... 4-1
4.1.3 DOWNLOAD ERROR CODES ......................................................... 4-2
4.2 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS .................................................................. 4-8
4.2.1 SERVICE MODE LOCK/UNLOCK.................................................... 4-8
4.2.2 SERVICE CALL LEVELS.................................................................. 4-9
4.2.3 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS............................................................ 4-10
4.3 SC TABLES: 1XX..................................................................................... 4-11
4.4 SC TABLES: 2XX..................................................................................... 4-20
4.5 SC TABLES: 3 ......................................................................................... 4-24
4.6 SC TABLES: 4 ......................................................................................... 4-28
4.7 SC TABLES: 5XX..................................................................................... 4-37
4.8 SC TABLES: 6XX..................................................................................... 4-46
4.9 SC TABLES: 7XX-1 ................................................................................. 4-52
4.10 SC TABLES: 7XX-2............................................................................ 4-78
4.11 SC TABLES: 7XX-3.......................................................................... 4-108
4.12 SC TABLES: 7XX-4.......................................................................... 4-139
D059/D060/D061 xiv SM
Rev. 06/23/2010
4.13 SC TABLES: 7XX-5 .......................................................................... 4-168

4.14 SC TABLES: 8XX ............................................................................. 4-203
4.15 SC TABLES: 9XX ............................................................................. 4-218
4.16 PSU PROTECTION CIRCUITS........................................................ 4-226
4.16.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................. 4-226
4.16.2 AC INPUT MODULE ............................................................... 4-228
4.16.3 CONVERTER CONTROL MODULE ....................................... 4-230
4.16.4 OUTPUT MODULE ................................................................. 4-232
4.16.5 PSU LED DISPLAY ................................................................. 4-234
4.16.6 PSU-E REPLACEMENT.......................................................... 4-235
4.17 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ......................................................... 4-236
4.17.1 MAIN MACHINE (D059, D060, D061) ..................................... 4-236
4.17.2 DECURL UNIT DU5000 (D457-17) ......................................... 4-243
4.17.3 LCIT RT5030 (D452-17) .......................................................... 4-243
4.17.4 LCIT RT5040 (D453-17) .......................................................... 4-244
4.17.5 BOOKLET FINISHER SR5010 (D434-17) ............................... 4-246
4.17.6 HIGH CAPACITY STACKER SK5010 (D447-17) .................... 4-248
4.17.7 MULTI FOLDING UNIT FD5000 (D454-17)............................. 4-250
4.17.8 TRIMMER UNIT TR5020 (D455-17) ....................................... 4-250
4.18 JAM DETECTION ............................................................................ 4-252
SERVICE TABLES
5. SERVICE TABLES........................................................................5-1
5.1 SP TABLE KEY .......................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN ...................................................................... 5-1
Service Mode Lock/Unlock ................................................................... 5-1
Operators, Skilled Operators ................................................................ 5-1
5.1.2 SERVICE TABLE KEY ...................................................................... 5-3
5.2 SYSTEM SP1-NNN FEED ......................................................................... 5-4
5.3 SYSTEM SP2-NNN DRUM: 1 .................................................................. 5-25
5.4 SYSTEM SP2-NNN DRUM: 2 .................................................................. 5-51
5.5 SYSTEM SP3-NNN PROCESSING ......................................................... 5-78
5.6 SYSTEM SP4-NNN SCANNER ............................................................... 5-86
5.7 SYSTEM SP5-NNN MODE: 1 .................................................................. 5-99
5.8 SYSTEM SP5-NNN MODE: 2 ................................................................ 5-119
5.9 SYSTEM SP5-NNN MODE: 3 ................................................................ 5-142
SM xv D059/D060/D061
5.10 SP5-NNN MODE: 4.......................................................................... 5-176
5.11 SYSTEM SP6-NNN PERIPHERALS: 1 ............................................ 5-199
5.16 SYSTEM SP7-NNN DATA LOGS: 1 ................................................ 5-273
5.19 SYSTEM SP8-NNN: DATA LOG2: 1................................................ 5-309
5.20 SP8-NNN: DATA LOG2: 2................................................................ 5-332
5.21 PRINTER SP TABLES ..................................................................... 5-356
5.22 SCANNER SP TABLES ................................................................... 5-363
5.23 USER SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES................................. 5-365
5.23.1 ADJUSTMENT SETTINGS FOR OPERATORS ..................... 5-365
5.23.2 ADJUSTMENT SETTINGS FOR SKILLED OPERATORS...... 5-366
5.24 INPUT CHECK ................................................................................. 5-370
5.24.1 MAIN MACHINE INPUT CHECK: SP5803 .............................. 5-370
5.24.2 ADF INPUT CHECK: SP6007 ................................................. 5-379
5.24.3 OTHER INPUT CHECKS ........................................................ 5-381
5.25 OUTPUT CHECKS........................................................................... 5-382
5.26 SPECIAL OPERATIONS.................................................................. 5-383
5.26.1 FIRMWARE UPDATE ............................................................. 5-383
Before You Begin….......................................................................... 5-383
Updating Firmware ........................................................................... 5-383
Updating Browser Firmware ............................................................. 5-389
Updating the LCDC for the Operation Panel .................................... 5-390
Downloading Stamp Data................................................................. 5-391
Installing Another Language............................................................. 5-392
Handling Firmware Update Errors .................................................... 5-395
5.26.2 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ................................... 5-397
Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card ................................... 5-397
Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM ............................................... 5-397
5.26.3 SMC LISTS ............................................................................. 5-398
5.26.4 MEMORY ALL CLEAR: SP5801 ............................................. 5-399
5.26.5 SOFTWARE AND COPY SETTING RESET ........................... 5-401
D059/D060/D061 xvi SM
Software Reset................................................................................. 5-401
Resetting the System ....................................................................... 5-401
Resetting Copy/Document Server Features Only............................. 5-401
Resetting Scanner Features Only .................................................... 5-401
5.26.6 USING THE DEBUG LOG....................................................... 5-402
Overview .......................................................................................... 5-402
Switching On and Setting Up Save Debug Log ................................ 5-402
Retrieving the Debug Log from the HDD .......................................... 5-407
Recording Errors Manually ............................................................... 5-407
New Debug Log Codes .................................................................... 5-408
5.26.7 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION........................................... 5-409
DETAILS
6. DETAILS ...................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 OVERVIEW................................................................................................ 6-1
6.1.1 OVERALL MACHINE LAYOUT......................................................... 6-1
6.1.2 PAPER PATH ................................................................................... 6-3
6.1.3 COPY PROCESS ............................................................................. 6-4
6.1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT................................................................................ 6-6
6.1.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS................................ 6-7
Copier Engine....................................................................................... 6-7
ADF .................................................................................................... 6-26
6.2 ADF.......................................................................................................... 6-29
6.2.1 OVERVIEW..................................................................................... 6-29
6.2.2 PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE......................................................... 6-30
6.2.3 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT .................................................................... 6-31
6.2.4 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION......................................................... 6-32
6.2.5 ORIGINAL FEED ............................................................................ 6-33
6.2.6 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION ........................................................ 6-34
Original Length ................................................................................... 6-34
Original Width..................................................................................... 6-34
Original Width Sensor Location .......................................................... 6-35
Detectable Paper Sizes...................................................................... 6-35
6.2.7 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT................................................................ 6-36
6.2.8 ORIGINAL SKEW CORRECTION .................................................. 6-37
SM xvii D059/D060/D061
6.2.9 ORIGINAL INVERSION AND FEED-OUT ...................................... 6-38
General Operation.............................................................................. 6-38
Original Inversion ............................................................................... 6-38
Original Exit (Single-Sided Original Mode) ......................................... 6-39
Original Exit (Double-Sided Original Mode)........................................ 6-39
6.2.10 ADF JAM CONDITIONS............................................................ 6-41
Feed-in ............................................................................................... 6-41
Feed-out ............................................................................................. 6-41
Inversion............................................................................................. 6-41
6.2.11 SCANNING ............................................................................... 6-42
Overview ............................................................................................ 6-42
6.2.12 SCANNER DRIVE..................................................................... 6-45
Magnification and Reduction .............................................................. 6-45
6.2.13 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION................................................... 6-46
6.2.14 AUTO IMAGE DENSITY (ADS)................................................. 6-50
6.3 BOARD STRUCTURE ............................................................................. 6-51
6.3.1 BLOCK DIAGRAMS........................................................................ 6-51
IOB ..................................................................................................... 6-51
BICU................................................................................................... 6-51
Controller............................................................................................ 6-52
6.3.2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS..................................................... 6-53
PCBs .................................................................................................. 6-53
6.4 IMAGE PROCESSING............................................................................. 6-55
6.4.1 IMAGE PROCESSING OVERVIEW ............................................... 6-55
6.4.2 IMAGE PROCESSING FLOW ........................................................ 6-56
6.4.3 ADJUSTMENTS ............................................................................. 6-58
Independent Dot Erase, Background Color Dropout .......................... 6-58
6.4.4 ORIGINAL TYPE SETTINGS.......................................................... 6-59
Manual Gamma Adjustment with SP4918 .......................................... 6-59
6.5 LASER EXPOSURE ................................................................................ 6-61
6.5.1 OVERVIEW..................................................................................... 6-61
6.5.2 LASER EXPOSURE MECHANISM ................................................ 6-62
6.5.3 LD SAFETY SWITCHES................................................................. 6-63
6.5.4 MULTI-BEAM LINE EXPOSURE .................................................... 6-64
6.5.5 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR ........................................................ 6-65
6.5.6 1200-DPI RESOLUTION................................................................. 6-66
D059/D060/D061 xviii SM
6.5.7 OPTICAL PATH .............................................................................. 6-68
6.6 DRUM UNIT ............................................................................................. 6-69
6.6.1 OVERVIEW..................................................................................... 6-69
6.6.2 DRUM DRIVE ................................................................................. 6-71
6.6.3 DRUM CHARGE............................................................................. 6-72
Overview ............................................................................................ 6-72
Cleaning the Corona Wires ................................................................ 6-73
6.6.4 DRUM CLEANING .......................................................................... 6-76
Overview ............................................................................................ 6-76
Main Cleaning Blade .......................................................................... 6-76
2nd Cleaning Blade ............................................................................ 6-77
Detecting the Status of the 2nd Cleaning Blade ................................. 6-77
SP 2930 Adjustments......................................................................... 6-77
Timing Sequence for Operation of the 2nd Cleaning Blade ............... 6-79
Cleaning Unit Drive ............................................................................ 6-80
Cleaning Blade Pressure and Side-to-Side Movement ...................... 6-81
6.6.5 AIR FLOW AROUND THE DRUM .................................................. 6-82
6.6.6 DRUM PICK-OFF PAWLS .............................................................. 6-83
6.6.7 DRUM QUENCHING ...................................................................... 6-84
6.6.8 PROCESS CONTROL .................................................................... 6-85
6.7 DEVELOPMENT ...................................................................................... 6-91
6.7.1 OVERVIEW..................................................................................... 6-91
6.7.2 DEVELOPMENT MECHANISM ...................................................... 6-93
6.7.3 DRIVE ............................................................................................. 6-94
6.7.4 CROSS-MIXING ............................................................................. 6-95
6.7.5 DEVELOPMENT BIAS.................................................................... 6-96
6.7.6 DEVELOPMENT UNIT TONER SUCTION ..................................... 6-97
6.7.7 TONER HOPPER ........................................................................... 6-98
Toner Supply ...................................................................................... 6-98
Toner Hopper Empty Detection .......................................................... 6-99
6.7.8 TONER DENSITY CONTROL ...................................................... 6-100
Overview .......................................................................................... 6-100
Toner Supply Timing ........................................................................ 6-100
Sensor Control Mode ....................................................................... 6-101
Image Pixel Count Control................................................................ 6-104
6.8 TONER SUPPLY AND RECYCLING ..................................................... 6-105
SM xix D059/D060/D061
6.8.1 OVERVIEW................................................................................... 6-105
6.8.2 TONER BANK............................................................................... 6-107
Toner Bottle Switching Mechanism .................................................. 6-107
Toner Near-end, Toner End, Bottle Replacement ............................ 6-108
Toner Bottle Sensors........................................................................ 6-110
6.8.3 SUPPLYING TONER TO THE DEVELOPMENT UNIT ................ 6-111
6.8.4 TONER RECYCLING AND TONER COLLECTION...................... 6-115
Overview .......................................................................................... 6-115
Toner Recycling ............................................................................... 6-116
Toner Collection Bottle ..................................................................... 6-117
6.9 PAPER FEED ........................................................................................ 6-119
6.9.1 OVERVIEW................................................................................... 6-119
6.9.2 DRIVE ........................................................................................... 6-121
Layout .............................................................................................. 6-121
Tray Components (Example: 3rd Tray) ............................................ 6-122
Vertical Paper Path .......................................................................... 6-123
6.9.3 PAPER LIFT – TRAYS 2 & 3 ........................................................ 6-124
6.9.4 PICK-UP AND FEED – TRAYS 1, 2, 3 ......................................... 6-126
Overview .......................................................................................... 6-126
Pick-up and Feed ............................................................................. 6-127
Separation Roller Release................................................................ 6-128
6.9.5 REMAINING PAPER/PAPER END DETECTION (TRAY 2, 3) ..... 6-129
Remaining Paper Detection.............................................................. 6-129
End Detection................................................................................... 6-129
6.9.6 PAPER SIZE DETECTION ........................................................... 6-130
Tandem Tray (Tray 1) ...................................................................... 6-130
Universal Cassettes (Tray 2, 3) ........................................................ 6-130
6.9.7 TRAY LOCK – TRAY 2, 3 ............................................................. 6-133
6.9.8 TANDEM FEED – TRAY 1............................................................ 6-133
Overview .......................................................................................... 6-133
Connecting the Left and Right Sides of the Tray .............................. 6-134
Paper Lift/Remaining Paper Detection: Tray 1 ................................. 6-135
Feed and Lift: Tray 1 ........................................................................ 6-137
Side Fence Drive: Tray 1.................................................................. 6-138
Rear Fence Drive ............................................................................. 6-139
Tray Positioning................................................................................ 6-140
D059/D060/D061 xx SM
6.9.9 VERTICAL TRANSPORT ............................................................. 6-141
6.9.10 LCT GUIDE PLATE ................................................................. 6-142
6.9.11 PAPER REGISTRATION ........................................................ 6-143
Overview .......................................................................................... 6-143
Registration Drive............................................................................. 6-144
Jam Removal at Paper Registration................................................. 6-145
6.9.12 IMAGE POSITION CORRECTION.......................................... 6-146
6.9.13 DOUBLE-FEED DETECTION ................................................. 6-147
6.9.14 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATERS (OPTIONS)..................... 6-150
6.10 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION............................ 6-151
6.10.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................. 6-151
6.10.2 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION................... 6-152
6.10.3 TRANSFER BELT UNIT LIFT ................................................. 6-155
6.10.4 PAPER TRANSPORTATION AND BELT DRIVE.................... 6-156
6.10.5 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING................................................ 6-157
6.10.6 TONER COLLECTION ............................................................ 6-158
6.10.7 DRUM ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER ............................... 6-158
6.11 FUSING............................................................................................ 6-159
6.11.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................. 6-159
6.11.2 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE.................................................. 6-160
6.11.3 FUSING UNIT DRIVE ............................................................. 6-161
6.11.4 FUSING LAMP AND FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL... 6-162
Overview .......................................................................................... 6-162
Normal, High, and Low Temp Modes ............................................... 6-163
Fusing Temperature Control and Machine Status - Overview .......... 6-165
Fusing Temperature Control at Power On (Cold/Warm Starts) ........ 6-165
Fusing Temperature Control During Standby and in Energy Saver
Mode ................................................................................................ 6-166
Fusing Temperature Control During Machine Operation.................. 6-167
Fusing Temperature Control for Low Power Mode (During and
Immediately After) ............................................................................ 6-171
Low Speed Mode (CPM Down) ........................................................ 6-172
6.11.5 FUSING CLEANING UNIT ...................................................... 6-173
Mechanism ....................................................................................... 6-173
Additional Notes about Fusing Cleaning Unit Operation .................. 6-174
Calculating Cleaning Fabric Service Life.......................................... 6-175
SM xxi D059/D060/D061
Fabric Near-End ............................................................................... 6-176
6.11.6 PAPER COOLING................................................................... 6-177
6.11.7 FUSING PRESSURE .............................................................. 6-178
6.11.8 HOT ROLLER STRIPPER RELEASE ..................................... 6-179
6.12 PAPER EXIT/DUPLEX ..................................................................... 6-180
6.12.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................. 6-180
Inversion/Duplex Components ......................................................... 6-180
Straight-Through Path (No Inversion, No Duplexing) ....................... 6-181
Inversion Path (Face-down Output, No Duplexing) .......................... 6-182
Inverting/Duplexing Path .................................................................. 6-183
6.12.2 INVERTER/DUPLEXING JUNCTION GATES ........................ 6-184
6.12.3 DUPLEX DRIVE MECHANISM ............................................... 6-186
6.12.4 SWITCHBACK IDLE ROLLER OPERATION .......................... 6-187
6.12.5 PAPER EXIT MECHANISM .................................................... 6-188
6.12.6 BASIC DUPLEX FEED OPERATION...................................... 6-189
Length up to A4/Letter LEF .............................................................. 6-189
Longer than A4/Letter LEF ............................................................... 6-191
6.13 BOARDS .......................................................................................... 6-194
6.13.1 LEDS ....................................................................................... 6-194
BCU.................................................................................................. 6-194
MCU ................................................................................................. 6-194
IOB ................................................................................................... 6-194
SIB ................................................................................................... 6-195
OPU ................................................................................................. 6-195
IPU ................................................................................................... 6-196
Controller Board ............................................................................... 6-197
ADF Main Board LEDs ..................................................................... 6-198
6.13.2 DIP SWITCHES ...................................................................... 6-199
MCU ................................................................................................. 6-199
IOB ................................................................................................... 6-199
ADF Main Board............................................................................... 6-200
Controller Board ............................................................................... 6-201
6.13.3 TEST POINTS......................................................................... 6-203
ADF Main Board............................................................................... 6-203
6.13.4 FUSES .................................................................................... 6-203
ADF Main Board............................................................................... 6-203
D059/D060/D061 xxii SM
6.13.5 VARIABLE RESISTORS ......................................................... 6-203
ADF Main Board............................................................................... 6-203
6.14 ENERGY CONSERVATION MODES .............................................. 6-204
6.14.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................. 6-204
6.14.2 ENERGY SAVER MODE ........................................................ 6-205
6.14.3 LOW POWER MODE .............................................................. 6-206
6.14.4 OFF MODE ............................................................................. 6-207
6.14.5 SLEEP MODE ......................................................................... 6-208
SPECIFICATIONS
7. SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................ 7-1
7.1 SPECIFICATIONS: MAIN .......................................................................... 7-1
7.1.1 MAIN MACHINE ............................................................................... 7-1
Engine .................................................................................................. 7-1
ADF (B301) ........................................................................................ 7-10
7.2 SPECIFICATIONS: OPTIONS-1 .............................................................. 7-11
7.2.1 A3/DLT TRAY KIT B331 (OPTION) ................................................ 7-11
7.2.2 LCIT RT5030 (D452) (OPTION) ..................................................... 7-11
7.2.3 LCIT RT5040 (D453) (OPTION) ..................................................... 7-14
7.2.4 MULTI-BYPASS TRAY (B833) (OPTION) ...................................... 7-16
7.2.5 DE-CURL DU5000 UNIT (D457) (OPTION).................................... 7-18
General .............................................................................................. 7-18
De-Curler Unit .................................................................................... 7-19
Purge Tray.......................................................................................... 7-19
7.2.6 PERFECT BINDER D391 ............................................................... 7-20
Cover Interposer (Inserter) D391........................................................ 7-20
Perfect Binder (D391)......................................................................... 7-21
7.2.7 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY CI5010 (B835) ................................ 7-24
7.2.8 MUTLI-FOLDING UNIT FD5000 (D454) ......................................... 7-25
General .............................................................................................. 7-25
Tray Capacity ..................................................................................... 7-29
7.2.9 RING BINDER RB5000 (D392)....................................................... 7-35
7.3 SPECIFICATIONS: OPTIONS-2 .............................................................. 7-37
7.3.1 HIGH CAPACITY STACKER SK5010 (D447)................................. 7-37
General .............................................................................................. 7-37
SM xxiii D059/D060/D061
Shift Tray ............................................................................................ 7-38
Proof Tray........................................................................................... 7-38
7.3.2 BOOKLET FINISHER SR5020 (D434) ........................................... 7-39
General .............................................................................................. 7-39
Shift Tray ............................................................................................ 7-40
Proof Tray........................................................................................... 7-40
Corner Stapling .................................................................................. 7-41
Booklet Stapling ................................................................................. 7-43
Punch Unit PU5020 (D449) (Option) .................................................. 7-44
7.3.3 TRIMMER UNIT TR5020 (D455) (OPTION) ................................... 7-45
7.3.4 FINISHER SR5000 (3K FINISHER B830)....................................... 7-47
Proof Tray........................................................................................... 7-47
Shift Tray ............................................................................................ 7-47
Stapler ................................................................................................ 7-48
Punch Unit PU5000 (B831) ................................................................ 7-50
B830 FINISHER SR5000

SEE SECTION B830 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
B833 MULTI BYPASS TRAY BY5000

SEE SECTION B833 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
D434 BOOKLET FINISHER SR5020

SEE SECTION D434 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
D447 HIGH CAPACITY STACKER SK5010

D452 LCIT RT5030

D059/D060/D061 xxiv SM
D453 LCIT RT5040
D454 MULTI-FOLDING UNIT FD5000

D455 TRIMMER UNIT TR5020

D457 DECURL UNIT DU5000

D391/D392 PERFECT BINDER GB5000/RING BINDER

RB5000
D391 and D392 Service Manual not included in this book. It can be found on
RFG-eSource under Content ID number rfg033501
SM xxv D059/D060/D061
INSTALLATION
POSITION 1
TAB
POSITION 2
TAB
D452 LCIT RT5030
POSITION 3
D453 LCIT RT5040
TAB
TROUBLESHOOTING
B830 FINISHER SR5000
POSITION 4
D434 BOOKLET FINISHER SR5020
TAB
D447 HIGH CAPACITY STACKER SK5010
D454 MULTI-FOLDING UNIT FD5000
D455 TRIMMER UNIT TR5020
D457 DECURL UNIT DU5000
POSITION 5
SERVICE TABLES
TAB
DETAILS
B833 MULTI BYPASS TRAY BY5000 POSITION 6
TAB
SPECIFICATIONS
POSITION 7
TAB
POSITION 8
TAB
Read This First
SAFETY, CONVENTIONS, TRADEMARKS
SAFETY
PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY
Before disassembling or assembling parts of the machine and peripherals, make sure that
they are unplugged.
The plug should be near the machine and easily accessible.
Note that some components of the machine and the paper tray unit are supplied with
electrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.
If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open while
the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically driven
components.
If the [Start] key is pressed before the machine completes the warm-up period (the [Start]
key starts blinking red and green ), keep hands away from the mechanical and the
electrical components as the machine starts making copies as soon as the warm-up period
is completed.
The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the machine is
operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands.
Always connect the power cord directly into a wall outlet. Never use an extension cord.
Inspect the power cord for damage. Never cut or attempt to modify the power cord in any
way.
Keep the machine away from dust and high humidity. Never expose the machine to
corrosive gases.
Never use flammable liquids or aerosols around the machine.
Never handle the power cord or plug with wet hands.
HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS
Never operate the machine without the ozone filters installed.
Always replace the ozone filters with the specified types at the proper intervals.
Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes by accident, it
may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye drops or flush with water as
first aid. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.
This machine employs an LED array in the scanner and image writing unit.
This machine is rated as a Class 1 LED Device. It is safe for both office and
EDP use.
OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS

The machine and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a customer service
representative who has completed the training course on those models.
The NVRAM on the controller board has a lithium battery which can explode if replaced
incorrectly. Replace the NVRAM only with an identical type. However, the manufacturer
recommends replacing the entire NVRAM, not just the battery. Never recharge or
incinerate a used NVRAM battery. Dispose of a used NVRAM or NVRAM battery in
accordance with local regulations.
The danger of explosion exists if the battery on the controller board is incorrectly replaced.
Replace the battery only with the equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Discard the used controller board battery in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions and local regulations.
Test the breaker switches on the main machine and all peripheral devices at least once a
year.
SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL
Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly when
exposed to an open flame.
Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors in accordance with local
regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not put more than
100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not sealing them apart may lead to
chemical reactions and heat build-up.
The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
CONVENTIONS AND TRADEMARKS

CONVENTIONS
Symbol What it means
Core Tech Manual
Screw
Connector
E-ring
C-ring
= Harness clamp
The notations "SEF" and "LEF" describe the direction of paper feed. The arrows indicate
the direction of paper feed.
In this manual "Horizontal" means the "Main Scan Direction" and "Vertical" means the "Sub
Scan Direction" relative to the paper feed direction.
SWITCHES AND SYMBOLS

Where symbols are used on or near switches on machines for Europe and other areas, the
meaning of each symbol conforms with IEC60417.
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, NOTES
In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used.
A Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Warning

could result in death or serious injury.
A Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Caution

could result in minor or moderate injury or damage to the machine or other
property.
Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds, damage to originals,

loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine
This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine.
POINTS TO CONFIRM WITH OPERATORS
At the end of installation or a service call, instruct the user about use of the machine.
Emphasize the following points.
Show operators how to remove jammed paper and troubleshoot other minor problems
by following the procedures described in the operating instructions.
Point out the parts inside the machine that they should never touch or attempt to
remove.
Confirm that operators know how to store and dispose of consumables.
Make sure that all operators have access to an operating instruction manual for the
machine.
Confirm that operators have read and understand all the safety instructions described
in the operating instructions.
Demonstrate how to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the
plug, not the cord) if any of the following events occur:
1. Something has spilled into the product.
2. Service or repair of the product is necessary.
3. The product cover has been damaged.
Caution operators about removing paper fasteners around the machine. They should
never allow paper clips, staples, or any other small metallic objects to fall into the
machine.
Caution operators about storing extra toner cartridges. To prevent clumping on one
end of the toner cartridge, it should always be stored horizontally on a flat service. A
toner cartridge should never be stored on its end vertically.
TRADEMARKS
Microsoft®, Windows®, and MS-DOS® are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and /or other countries.
PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be
trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with
those marks.
WHAT'S NEW?
This is a brief summary about the new features of this system.
MAIN MACHINE
Here is a list of differences between the new machine (D059) and the previous machine
(B234/D101).
GENERAL CHANGES
New operation panel. This is a new installation procedure.
Board layout. The rear of the machine has changed to accommodate the
re-arrangement of the PCBs at the back of the machine. The shape of the controller
box door has also changed. The board removal and replacement procedures are new.
Paper weight. Heavier paper can be used with this machine, up to 300 g/m2. Also,
coated paper can be used with this machine.
Paper size. Accommodates paper widths of up to 19.2 in.
DETAILED CHANGES
Paper Feed
Feed rollers. Feed roller replacement has been improved for TCRU. Handles have
been redesigned on the paper tray drawers for easier handling during TCRU.
Double-feed detection. To improve detection of double-feeding, the translucence
detection sensors have been replaced with ultra-sonic wave sensors.
Development Unit
Auger. The angle of the oval plate of the auger screw has been changed to prevent
the deterioration of images at the leading edges.
TD sensor. A mylar has been attached to the detection surface of the TD sensor to
better control the density of images. This prevents accumulation of residual toner
which can cause dark images.
The development units of the previous machine and this machine are not
compatible because the configuration of the connectors is different.
If the development unit of the previous machine is installed in this machine, it
will cause an error.
Around the Drum
Drum thickness. To improve the durability of the drum, the thickness of the drum
surface membrane has been increased from 0.035 mm to 0.045 mm (an increase of
0.010 mm). Service life has been extended to 2500K (from 2000K).
Color change. The color of the plate behind the OPC has been changed from black to
gray. This distinguishes the OPC of the new unit from the old unit (which is black).
PTL stay. The shape of the PTL stay has been changed, so thicker paper can be used
in the new machine.
The drum units of the previous machine and this machine are not compatible
(the configuration of the connectors is different).
If the drum unit of the previous machine is installed in this machine, the
machine will issue an error.
If the D101 drum is installed in the D059:
Image density will be unstable. (Processing control is slightly different for these
machines.)
Service life of the drum will be shorter.
If the D059 drum is installed in the D101:
Image density will be unstable. (Processing control is slightly different for these
machines.)
After 150K drum cleaning will become unstable.
Drum Cleaning
1st cleaning blade. To improve the efficiency of drum cleaning, the base material of
the 1st cleaning blade has been changed to make it harder.
The 1st blade of the D059 can be installed and used in the D101.
The 1st blade of the D101 machine can be installed in the D059, but dirty
backgrounds may appear earlier.
Fusing Unit
Web unit. In the new machine the web is longer and the web take-up speed is faster.
This change was implemented to improve cleaning of A3 paper as well as smaller
paper sizes.
The web unit of the previous machine can be installed in the new machine, but
its yield will be lower. If the D101 web is installed on the D059 the yield will be
650K, not 750 K. If the D059 web unit is installed on the D101 service life will
be extended to 27 m (from 24 m), but the D059 web unit is more expensive.
The lot numbers for the web units are different. (D101: Green, D059: Black)
The lot number of an installed unit is visible on the D059 unit but not visible on
the D101 unit.
Fusing guide. To improve paper transport the shape of the fusing guide plate has
been changed (it has a more convex shape), and the shape of the slot where paper
enters the fusing unit has also been changed.
New anti-static brush. An anti-static brush has been added. This new brush
discharges static from the pressure roller to reduce black spotting and other problems
caused by static offset.
Paper Output
Transport guide. The band on the transport guide has been eliminated. (The band
scraped coated paper and caused discoloration in prints so it was eliminated.)
Better cooling. To prevent formation of dew, the transport guide is perforated and a
fan has been added.
Transport rollers, belt. The material of the transport rollers and belt has been
changed from black to gray. This prevents dirty images and roller tracks on printed
sheets.
Driver rollers. Polyurethane is used for some of the drive rollers. This prevents roller
swelling due to moisture and the high temperature of the paper. (Swollen rollers in the
previous machine did not return to their normal size after cooling.)
Idle rollers. The material of the idle rollers has also changed to polyurethane to
prevent the rollers from transferring streaks to printed sheets.
Duplex Unit
Transport rollers. The color of the transport rollers has been changed from black to
gray to prevent dirty images and roller tracks on prints.
Drive, idle rollers. Polyurethane material is used on some of the drive rollers and idle
rollers. This prevents roller swelling due to moisture and the high temperature of the
paper. (Swollen rollers in the previous machine did not return to their normal size after
cooling.)
Guide plate. A mylar covers the complete surface of the guide plate to improve paper
transport.
Control
Line speed. The line speed when feeding large sizes has been increased by
shortening the gap between sheets to improve PPM with large paper sizes.
PERIPHERAL UNITS
Legacy Peripheral Units
These are the peripheral units that can be used with either the previous machine or the
new machine:
Multi Bypass Tray BY5000 (B833-17)
Transit Pass Unit Type GB5000 (D391-19)
Perfect Binder GB5000 (D391-17)
Cover Interposer Tray Type GB5000 (D391-18) (for Perfect Binder)
Cover Interposer Tray CI5010 (B835)
Ring Binder RB5000 (D392-17)
Finisher SR5000 (B830)
Punch Unit PU5000 NA, EU, SC (B831-01, -02, -03) (for Finisher SR5000)
NEW PERIPHERALS
These are new peripherals, but have only minor differences with previous units:
LCIT RT5030 (D452-17). Nearly identical to the LCIT RT5000 (A4/LT). One cooling fan
has been added.
LCIT RT5040 (D453-17). Nearly identical to the LCIT RT5010 (A3/DLT). Seven
cooling fans have been added: 1 fan inside the LCIT, 6 fans for the trays. (Each tray
has two fans, one for the front and one for the back.)
These are new peripherals for this system:
Decurl Unit DU5000 (D457-17). Installed on the left side of the main machine. A nip
between a large soft roller and small metal roller removes paper curl. Also, if a paper
jam occurs in any downstream peripheral device, this unit drops two plates to shunt
paper into a purge tray and stops copying.
Multi-Folding Unit FD5000 (D454-17). Performs six types of folds on up to three
sheets of paper.
High Capacity Stacker SK5010 (D447-17). Stacks up to 5,000 sheets of large-size
paper, or 2,500 sheets of small-size paper on a pull-away cart. Two of these units can
be installed in the same line, depending on which other finishing options are installed.
Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434-17). Performs booklet center folding and stapling in
addition to corner stapling.
Punch Unit PU5020 NA, EU, SC (D449-17, -27, 28) (for Booklet Finisher SR5020).
This is a "smart punch" that automatically adjusts its position above the paper before
punching.
Trimmer Unit TR5020 (D455-17). Trims the fore edges of folded/stapled booklets sent
from the Booklet Finisher SR5020. The trimmer unit is used with the SR5020 only (it
cannot be used with the SR5000).
For more details about the peripheral units, please refer to the descriptions of possible
configurations described in the installation procedures.
INSTALLATION
SECTION 1 INSTALLATION REVISION HISTORY
Page Date Added/Updated/New

23 04/19/2010 Corrected Pouring Developer
24 ~ 25 04/19/2010 Operation Panel Installation corrected
28 11/16/2009 Operation Panel
29 06/23/2010 Operation Panel – Change Screws from 2 to 4
32 ~ 33 04/19/2010 Connecting Tray Heaters of the Main Machine corrected
32 ~ 33 01/06/2011 Connecting Tray Heaters of the Main Machine corrected
37 04/19/2010 Operating Instructions Holder Attachment added
46 ~ 49 04/20/2010 Corrected Tray Unit TK5010 Installation
79 04/19/2010 Corrected Decurl Unit - Mylars
84 ~ 85 04/19/2010 Corrected Cover Interposer Tray - Mylars
95 ~ 96 04/20/2010 Corrected Multi Folding Unit - Docking
98 04/20/2010 Corrected Multi Folding Unit – Power Cord, Breaker Test
108 04/20/2010 Corrected High Capacity Stacker – Power Cord, Brk Test
125 ~ 126 4/18/2012 Punch Unit
149 04/20/2010 Corrected Key Counter
153 04/20/2010 Corrected Key Counter
154 ~ 198 10/06/2009 Optional Counter I/F Type A
154 ~ 155 04/20/2010 Corrected Optional Counter I/F Type A (B870)
156 09/14/2009 LCIT
157 ~ 158 04/20/2010 Corrected LCIT Adjustments
175 ~ 178 04/19/2010 Corrected Printer/Scanner Unit Type 1357
199 ~ 202 04/19/2010 Added Copier Connection Kit (B328)
Installation Requirements
Installation
1. INSTALLATION
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
1. Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 89.6°F)
2. Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH
3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight or strong
light)
4. Ventilation: Room air should turn over at least 3 times per hour per person
5. Ambient Dust: Less than 0.075 mg/m3
6. If the place of installation is air-conditioned or heated, do not place the machine where
it will be:
1) Subjected to sudden temperature changes
2) Directly exposed to cool air from an air-conditioner
3) Directly exposed to heat from a heater
7. Do not place the machine where it will be exposed to corrosive gases.
8. Do not install the machine at any location over 2,000 m (6,500 feet) above sea level.
9. Place the machine on a strong and level base.
10. Do not place the machine where it may be subjected to strong vibrations.
11. Do not connect the machine to a power source shared with another electrical
appliance.
12. The machine can generate an electrical field which could interfere with radio or
television reception.
SM 1-1 D059/D060/D061
1.1.2 POWER REQUIREMENTS
1. Make sure that the power outlets are near the main machine and peripherals and are
easily accessible.
2. Make sure the plugs are firmly inserted in the outlet.
3. Avoid multi-wiring.
4. Be sure to ground the main machine and peripheral units.
5. Never set anything on a power cord.
Separate power cords are provided for the main machine and the following optional
peripheral units. Each power cord requires an independent power outlet:
6. Perfect Binder (D391)
7. Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434-17)
8. High Capacity Stacker SK5010 (D447-17)
9. Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434-17)
10. Multi-Folding Unit FD5000 (D454-17)
11. Trimmer Unit TR5020 (D455-17)
Input Voltage Level: Main Machine (and Peripheral Units)
Area
Machine
NA Europe/Asia
D059
208-240V 60 Hz 220-240V 50/60 Hz
D060
Minimum 20A Minimum 16A
D061
10%
Permissible voltage fluctuation:
(Trimmer Unit TR5020 only: -10% to +6%)
D059/D060/D061 1-2 SM
Installation
12. Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing. To avoid
damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power switch to switch the
power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the main power switch off.
The Main Power LED () lights or flashes at the following times:
13. While the platen cover or ADF is open
14. While the main machine is communicating with the network server
15. While the machine is accessing the hard disk or memory when reading or writing data.
There are two power switches on the machine:
Main Power Switch
Located on the front left corner of the machine and covered by a plastic cover. This switch
should always remain on unless the machine is being serviced.
Operation Power Switch
Located on the right side of the operation panel. This is the switch normally used by the
customer to power the machine on and off.
1.1.3 MACHINE LEVEL
1. Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
2. Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
1. The machine legs can be raised or lowered in order to level the machine. Set a
carpenter's level on the exposure glass.
SM 1-3 D059/D060/D061
1.1.4 CONFIGURATION RULES

Configuration 1
[1] Main Machine (D059/D060/D061)
[2] LCIT RT5030 (D452-17)
[3] LCIT RT5040 (D453-17)
[4] Multi Bypass Tray BY5000 (B833-17)

2. The multi bypass tray can be installed on either LCIT.
3. The multi bypass tray must be installed on the LCIT before the LCIT is docked
to the mainframe.
[5] Decurl Unit DU5000 (D457-17)
[6] Transit Pass Unit Type GB5000 (D391-19)
[7] Perfect Binder GB5000 (D391-17)
[8] Cover Interposer Tray Type GB5000 (D391-18)
[9] Cover Interposer Tray CI5010 (B835)

4. The base of the cover interposer tray is narrow and cannot support the tray
unit standing alone. (After installation, the top of the cover interposer tray unit
rests on top of the downstream unit.)
5. To prevent the cover interposer tray from falling during installation, dock the
next downstream unit to the base of the cover interposer tray before installing
the tray unit on top of the cover interposer tray base.
[10] Multi-Folding Unit FD5000 (D454-17)
[11] Ring Binder RB5000 (D392-17)
[12] High Capacity Stacker SK5010 (D447-17)
D059/D060/D061 1-4 SM
Installation
[13] Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434-17)
[14] Punch Unit PU5020 NA, EU, SC (D449-17, -27, 28)
[15] Trimmer Unit TR5020 (D455-17)
Rules for This Configuration

1. Either LCIT (D452) [2] or LCIT (D453) [3] (not both) can be installed on the right side of
the main machine.
2. The Multi Bypass Tray BY5000 (B833) [4] can be installed on top of either the LCIT
(D452) [2] or LCIT (D453) [3].
3. The Decurl Unit (D457) [5], if installed, is the first downstream unit (left side of the main
machine).
4. Either the Perfect Binder (D391) ([6], [7] [8]) or the Ring Binder (D392) [11] can be
installed. Both cannot be installed in the same line.
5. Two High Capacity Stacker units (D447) [12] can be installed in the same line, but only
one is allowed if Multi Folding Unit (D454) [10] is installed.
6. If two high capacity stackers are to be installed in the same line, the second stacker
must be installed on the left side of the first stacker.
7. The High Capacity Stacker (D447) [12] can be installed as the last unit downstream,
but only if Multi Folding Unit (D454) [10] is not installed.
8. If Multi Folding Unit (D454) [10] is installed, the Booklet Finisher (D434) [13] must be
installed as the last unit downstream.
9. The Trimmer Unit (D455) [15] can be attached only to the Booklet Finisher (D434) [13]
Configuration 2
SM 1-5 D059/D060/D061
[1] Main Machine (D059/D060/D061)
[2] LCIT RT5030 (D452-17)
[3] LCIT RT5040 (D453-17)
[4] Multi Bypass Tray BY5000 (B833-17)

10. The multi bypass tray can be installed on either LCIT.
11. The multi bypass tray must be installed on either LCIT before the LCIT is
docked to the mainframe.
[5] Decurl Unit DU5000 (D457-17)
[6] Transit Pass Unit Type GB5000 (D391-19)
[7] Perfect Binder GB5000 (D391-17)
[8] Cover Interposer Tray Type GB5000 (D391-18)
[9] Cover Interposer Tray CI5010 (B835)

12. The base of the cover interposer tray is narrow and cannot support the tray
unit standing alone. (After installation, the top of the cover interposer tray unit
rests on top of the downstream unit.)
13. To prevent the cover interposer tray from falling during installation, dock the
next downstream unit to the base of the cover interposer tray before installing
the tray unit on top of the cover interposer tray base.
[10] Multi-Folding Unit FD5000 (D454-17)
[11] Ring Binder RB5000 (D392-17)
[12] High Capacity Stacker SK5010 (D447-17)
[13] Finisher SR5000 (B830)
[14] Punch Unit PU5000 NA, EU, SC (B831-01, -02, -03)
D059/D060/D061 1-6 SM
Installation
1. Either LCIT (D452) [2] or LCIT (D453) [3] (not both) can be installed on the right side of
the main machine.
2. The Multi Bypass Tray BY5000 (B833) [4] can be installed on top of either the LCIT
(D452) [2] or LCIT (D453) [3].
3. The Decurl Unit (D457) [5], if installed, is the first downstream unit (left side of the main
machine.
4. Only one of the following units can be installed in the same line: Perfect Binder (D391)
([6], [7], [8]), Ring Binder (D392) [11] or High Capacity Stacker (D447) [12].
5. The High Capacity Stacker (D447) [12] can be installed as the last unit downstream,
but only if Multi Folding Unit (D454) [10] is not installed.
6. If Multi Folding Unit (D454) [10] is installed, the Finisher SR5000 (B830) [14] must be
the last unit downstream.
SM 1-7 D059/D060/D061
1.1.5 SPACE REQUIREMENTS

Space Around
The machine requires the minimum amount of space around the installation as shown
above.
1. The controller box door [A] and PSU door [B] on the back of the main machine swing
open and can be removed.
2. Both doors can be removed to allow the machine to pass through a narrow doorway.
Total Space Required

In the two tables below:
3. The depth (D) and height (H) measurements of the main machine ([1] in the table
below) are the minimum depth and height required for the installation of all peripheral
units as well as the main machine.
4. Determine the number of peripheral units to be installed, then refer to the table below.
Add the widths (W) of the main machine and each peripheral device to determine the
maximum amount of space to accommodate the entire length of the installation.
5. Be sure to add the distance required for "space around" (see the previous section) to
determine the total amount of space required.
D059/D060/D061 1-8 SM
Installation
Configuration 1
Dimensions: mm (in.)
No.
W D H
[1] D059 870 (35) 859 (34) 1476 (59)
[2] D453 850 (34) --- ---
[3] D452 540 (22) --- ---
[4] D457 160 (7) --- ---
[5] D391 1090 (43) --- ---
[6] B835 164 (7) --- ---
[7] D454 460 (19) --- ---
[8] D392 860 (34) --- ---
[9] D447 900 (36) --- ---
[10] D434 650 (26) --- ---
[11] D455 1120 (45) --- ---
SM 1-9 D059/D060/D061
Configuration 2
Dimensions: mm (in.)
No.
W D H
[1] D059 870 (35) 859 (34) 1476 (59)
[2] D453 850 (34) --- ---
[3] D452 540 (22) --- ---
[4] D457 160 (7) --- ---
[5] D391 1090 (43) --- ---
[6] B835 164 (7) --- ---
[7] D454 460 (19) --- ---
[8] D392 860 (34) --- ---
[9] D447 900 (36) --- ---
[10] B830 800 (32) --- ---
D059/D060/D061 1-10 SM
Installation
1.1.6 BEFORE YOU BEGIN...
Follow the order of presentation in this installation manual to install the main machine,
peripheral units, and MFP options.
1. The installation procedures for the Perfect Binder (D391) and Ring Binder (D392) are
not included in this installation guide.
2. For more about the installation procedures for these peripheral units, please refer to
the "Perfect Binder Machine Code: D391 Service Manual" or "Ring Binder Machine
Code: D392 Service Manual ".
The table below lists some special points about installation of the peripheral units that you
should know before you begin installation.
No. Name Skew S-to-S Other Brk SW PC
D452 LCIT Yes IPS S
D453 LCIT Yes IPS S
D059 Main Yes Yes
D457 Decurler
D391 Perfect Binder Yes Yes Yes
B835 Cover Interposer Yes Yes
D454 Multi Fold Unit Yes Yes Yes Yes
D392 Ring binder Yes Yes Yes
D447 Stacker Yes Yes Yes Yes
D434 Booklet Finisher Yes Yes Yes Yes
B830 Finisher Yes Yes
SM 1-11 D059/D060/D061
Table Key
3. "Yes" indicates that a special procedure is required.
4. "Skew", "S-to-S"
Paper "Skew" and "Side-to-Side Registration". After each peripheral device is installed,
test paper output to determine the presence of skew and to make sure that side-to-side
registration is correct.
5. "IPS S"
This is "Image Position Sensor Strength" calibration, required for either the LCIT
(D452) or LCIT (D453).
6. "Brk SW"
This means "Breaker Switch". The breaker switch must be tested at installation. After
installation, the breaker switch must be tested at least once a year.
7. "PC"
"Power Cord". These peripheral units each have a separate power cord that requires
an independent power supply.
MFP Controller Options
8. Only one slot is available for applications. If more than one application is to be installed,
all the applications must be moved onto the same SD card.
9. If the PS3 option will be installed, the applications must be copied onto the PS3 SD
card.
10. After an SD card is copied, it cannot be used in another machine. However, copied SD
cards serve as proof of purchase by the customer; therefore, copied SD cards must be
stored on site inside the main machine.
D059/D060/D061 1-12 SM
Main Machine (D059/D060/D061)
Installation
1.2 MAIN MACHINE (D059/D060/D061)
1.2.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following
illustration and list.
SM 1-13 D059/D060/D061
No. Description Q'ty
1. Operating Instructions Holder 1
2. ADF Exit Tray 1
3. Dust Filter 1
4. Optics Dust Filter 1
5. Leveling Shoes 4
6. Ferrite Core 1
7. Cable Clamp (Metal) 1
8. Cable Clamp (Nylon) 1
9. Screws M3x10 2
10. Screws M4x8 37
11. Face-Up Decals 1
12. Power Off Instruction Decals 1
13. Paper Loading Decals 4
14. Fusing Unit Removal Instruction Decals 1
15. Paper Size Decals 2
16. Operation Panel 1
17. Arm 1
18. Long Harness 1
19. Operation Panel Base 1
20. Angle Adjustment Lever 1
21. Connector Cover 1
22. Spacer 1
D059/D060/D061 1-14 SM
Installation
23. Lock Plates 2
24. Swivel Plate 1
25. Arm Adjustment Spacer 1
26. Base Bottom Cover 1
27. Base Top Cover 1
28. Arm Cover – Top Front 1
29. Arm Cover – Top Center 1
30. Cap 1
31. Arm Cover – Top Rear 1
32. Arm Cover – Bottom Left 1
33. Arm Cover – Bottom Right 1
34. Arm Cover – Bottom Front 1
35. Arm Connection Cover 1
SM 1-15 D059/D060/D061
1.2.2 INSTALLATION
Rating Voltage for Peripheral Units at Connection Points
1. Be sure to plug the cables into the correct sockets.
External Tape and Retainers

The installation procedure is not packed with the main machine. Always bring this service
manual with you.
2. Before performing the following procedures, make sure that the machine is unplugged
from the power source.
D059/D060/D061 1-16 SM
Installation
3. Remove all tape from the exterior [A].
4. Remove the tape and retainers from the power cord and cables [B].
5. Keep the shipping retainers after installing the machine. They can be reused if the
machine is moved to another location in the future.
6. Remove all tape and retainers from under the ADF [A].
SM 1-17 D059/D060/D061
7. Remove the A3 paper [B].
8. Set the leveling shoes [C] (x 4) under the feet [D], then level the machine.
Internal Tape and Retainers: Paper Trays
9. Pull out the tandem tray (1st tray) completely, remove the tray lock plate [A] ( x 1),
and remove the cushion [B].
10. Push in the right tray of the tandem tray, then remove the cushion [C].
11. Pull out the 2nd tray and remove the lock plate [D] ( x 1).
12. Be sure the re-attach the screw to the same hole. Do not discard the screw.
13. Pull out the 3rd tray and remove the lock plate [E] ( x 1).
14. Be sure to re-attach the screw to the same hole. Do not discard the screw.
D059/D060/D061 1-18 SM
Installation
Internal Tape and Retainers: Fusing Unit
1. Open the front doors and remove all visible tape and retainers from inside the machine
[A].
2. Press down lever D2 [B], pull out the fusing unit [C], and remove all tape and retainers
from the fusing unit:
3. (1) Retainer ( x1)
4. (2) Tape, retainers (x2)
5. (3) Raise D3.
6. (4) Remove retainer.
7. (5) Raise D4.
8. (6) Remove retainer.
9. (7) Protective sheet
10. Push in the fusing unit.
SM 1-19 D059/D060/D061
Internal Tape and Retainers: Transfer Unit
1. Lower the lever C1 [A].

2. Remove all tape, tags [B], and retainers [C] from the transfer unit ( x1).
Internal Tape and Retainers: Drum Cleaning Unit
1. Open the right front door.

2. Remove the black screws at (1) ( x3).
3. Take off the inner cover (2).
4. These illustrations show removal using the hex driver provided to the customer. This
tool is not required for removal of these screws. You can use a common Phillips head
(plus) screwdriver to remove these screws.
5. This cover functions as a duct in the ventilation path of the machine. It must be
reinstalled.
D059/D060/D061 1-20 SM
Installation
6. Remove the ground plate ( x1) (3).
7. Remove the faceplate.

(1) Lower C1
(2) Screw ( x1)
(3) Remove the knob.
8. Remove the faceplate.
9. Pull the purple handle toward you until the drawer stops.
10. The development unit (1) will shift slightly to the right as you pull the drawer out.
11. Remove the drum cleaning unit.
12. Raise the purple lever (1) and pull the cleaning unit to the left until it disengages the
lever
13. Lift the unit out of the drawer
14. Grasp the cleaning unit by its handles as shown and lift it straight up.
SM 1-21 D059/D060/D061
15. Remove the retainer [A] from the cleaning unit ( x1).
Pouring Developer
1. Lift the development unit [A] by its purple handle and hold it level as you remove it.
2. Remove the shipping tape from the inner cover [B].
3. Place the development unit on the spread paper as shown.

4. Remove the bracket [A] ( x1).
5. Disconnect the toner hopper [B] ( x1,  x2).
6. Tilt the hopper slightly when you remove it.
D059/D060/D061 1-22 SM
Rev. 04/19/2010 Main Machine (D059/D060/D061)
Installation
⇒ 7. Pour the developer into the development unit.
• Take a note of the developer lot numbers on the developer packet. These
numbers will be required for the developer initialization.
• Move the developer packet [A] from side to side while you pour a small amount of
developer across the length of the gap.
• Stop pouring and turn the knob [B] so that the developer settles into the
development unit.
• Repeat this sequence until the packet is empty.
8. Reattach the hopper to the development unit. ( x1,  x2)
• Confirm that the TD harness is connected properly.

• Confirm that the harness is not pinched.
9. Set the connected harnesses between the toner hopper and the metal plate.
10. Re-attach the bracket [A] removed at Step 4 ( x1).
Reinstalling the Development Unit
SM 1-23 D059/D060/D061
Main Machine (D059/D060/D061) Rev. 04/19/2010
1. When you reinstall the development unit, handle it carefully.

2. Never allow the development roller to hit the OPC drum or any other part of the frame
of the development unit drawer.
3. Scratches or other damage to either the drum or development roller will adversely
affect the operation of the machine.
4. Align the triangular reference marks of the development unit and drawer frame.
5. Place the holes on the edge of the development unit over the pegs on the drawer
frame.
6. Push the development unit drawer into the machine, reattach the faceplate and inner
cover, then close the right front door.
Operation Panel
Right Upper Cover
1. Remove the right upper cover [A] ( x4).

⇒ Operation Panel Arm Installation and Length Adjustment
1. Insert spacer [A].
2. Route harness [B] as shown.
3. Attach nylon clamp [C].
D059/D060/D061 1-24 SM
Installation
4. Set arm [A] in sleeve [B].
5. Fasten the arm:
(1) Front ( x2)
(2) Side ( x4)
(3) Rear ( x3)
6. Connect harness [C] ( x1).
7. Fasten metal clamp [D] ( x1).
8. Attach connector cover [E] ( x1).
9. Attach arm connection cover [F] ( x3).
As shown in the next two sections, the length of the operation panel arm can be adjusted:
• The length of the arm has three positions: short, medium, long.
• When the machine is shipped from the factory, the arm is set at the short position.
• This adjustment is optional. Discuss this adjustment with the operators before
changing the length of the arm.
SM 1-25 D059/D060/D061
Medium Extension
1. Remove the four screws.

2. Slide the arm extension [A] forward and set it as shown.
3. Re-attach the four screws.
Long Extension
4. Remove the four screws.

5. Slide the arm extension [A] forward and set it as shown.
6. Set the arm adjustment spacer [B] over the holes.
7. The long extension requires the spacer. The medium extension does not require the
spacer.
D059/D060/D061 1-26 SM
Installation
8. Re-attach the four screws.
Completing Operation Panel Installation
9. Attach:
[A] Top front arm cover ( x2)
[B] Bottom front arm cover ( x2)
10. Attach:
[A] Bottom left arm cover ( x1)
[B] Bottom right arm cover ( x2)
SM 1-27 D059/D060/D061
11. Attach:
[A] Top center arm cover ( x2)
[B] Top rear arm cover ( x1)
12. If the arm adjustment spacer was not used to extend the arm to its maximum length,
store the spacer here [C] for future use.
13. Snap on cap [D].
⇒ 14. Set the spacers (1, 2, 3). Note: Spacer 1 is installed felt side down.
15. Insert operation panel base [A] into the end of the arm.
16. Screw on angle adjustment lever [B].
17. Attach long harness bracket [C] to the operation panel base ( x1).
D059/D060/D061 1-28 SM
Installation
18. Attach ferrite core [A].
⇒ 19. Attach the operation panel [B] to base [C] ( x 4,  x 1).
20. Attach:
[A] Base top cover ( x 2)
[B] Base bottom cover ( x 2).
SM 1-29 D059/D060/D061
Filters, Original Exit Tray
1. Set the drum dust filter [A].

2. Loosen the bottom knob, adjust the view angle of the operation panel, then tighten the
knob.
3. Loosen the side knob, adjust the tilt of the operation panel, then tighten the knob.
4. Set the optics dust filter [A].

5. Loosen the two screws of the bracket [B].
6. Attach the original exit tray at [C] ( x 2) and [D] ( x 1)
7. Re-tighten the screws of the bracket [B] ( x 2).
D059/D060/D061 1-30 SM
Installation
8. Re-attach the right upper cover ( x 4).
9. Remove the tape from the operating instructions holder and attach it to one of the front
doors.
10. At the back of the machine, connect the ADF to the main machine body.
Initializing the Machine
Follow this procedure carefully.

Do not switch on the machine until you are instructed to do so.
Carefully follow the instructions about opening and closing the front doors.
1. Make sure that the machine is OFF.
2. Make sure that the ADF is connected.
3. Open the front doors.
4. Make sure that all tapes, clamps, and other shipping materials have been removed.
5. Connect the main power cord and turn on the machine.
6. Enter the SP mode.
The front doors must be open before you turn the machine on and enter the SP
mode.
If you switch on the machine with the front doors closed and do not enter the SP
mode, auto processing control will automatically execute and start initialization for
conditions around the drum, but initialized settings for the toner density and TD
sensor will not be correct.
7. Close the front doors.
You must close the front doors now.

If you fail to close the front doors, the following SP codes (executed in the following
steps) will not execute: SP2801-001 (TD Sensor Initial Setting), SP2207-002
(Toner Supply: Toner Bank Setup), SP2962 (Auto Process Control Execution).
8. Do SP2801-002.
Open the soft keyboard on the operation panel.
Enter the developer lot numbers and touch [OK]. (Lot numbers are embossed on
the top edges of the developer packets.)
SM 1-31 D059/D060/D061
If you do not enter the 7-digit lot numbers first, you will not be able to execute
SP2801-001 (pressing [EXECUTE] will have no effect).
9. Do SP2801-001.
Touch [EXECUTE] on the operation panel to initialize the TD sensor. Initialization
requires about 1 minute after you press [EXECUTE].
Do not switch off the machine or open the front doors until you are instructed to do
so.
10. Set the toner bottles.
Do not shake the toner bottles.
Set the lower toner bottle first then the upper bottle.
11. Do SP2207-002.
Touch [EXECUTE] on the operation panel.
If the SP execution ends within about 2 sec., or if the process is interrupted by an
SC code alert, execute this SP again. The process should take about 5 min.
12. Do SP2962 and touch [EXECUTE]. This executes auto process control.
13. Do SP6008-003 and execute a free run for at least 3 minutes. Be sure to touch [OFF]
before you exit the SP mode.
14. Clean the transport belt above the exposure glass.
Power Cord, Breaker Switch Test

1. Test the breaker switch ( Section 1.17.4).
Connecting the Tray Heaters of the Main Machine

⇒ The machine comes from the factory without the tray heaters installed. Tray heater
installation is optional. The heaters should be connected if the location has high humidity.
Consult with the customer before connecting the tray heaters.
Doing this procedure connects the following anti-condensation heaters inside the main
machine at the following locations:
One unit below the transfer unit (if installed)
Two units in the paper tray unit (if installed)
One unit in the scanner unit (if installed)
One unit in the LCIT (if installed)
D059/D060/D061 1-32 SM
Installation
1. Switch off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord from the power
source.
2. Open the PSU box [A] ( x 2).
To set the connector
3. Connect the white connector [B] to CN602 on the AC drive board [C].
Connect the large connector clamped beneath the board.
To supply power 24 hours a day

Doing the connection in the previous procedure assures that power is supplied to the
machine for the heaters even after the main machine is switched. However, with only this
connection, the heaters do not operate while the main machine is operating.
⇒ Another connection can be done so the heaters in the paper tray will stay on continuously.
The 24 hours a day connection applies only to the tray heaters, not to the transfer and
scanner units.
SM 1-33 D059/D060/D061
10. Remove the small connector [A] from the relay connector, then connect it to connector
CN606.
11. Clamp the relay connector [B] to bracket of the AC drive board.
12. Connect the large connector [C] to connector CN602 as described in the previous
procedure.
D059/D060/D061 1-34 SM
Installation
1.2.3 COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION
Setting Paper Sizes for the Paper Trays
1. Set the required paper sizes for all paper trays.
Unit Name No. Setting
1st Tray 1 SP5019 -2
Main Machine 2nd Tray 2 Automatic side fence detection.
3rd Tray 3 Automatic side fence detection.
1st Tray 4 Paper size dial at rear of tray
LCIT (D452) 2nd Tray 5 Paper size dial at rear of tray.
3rd Tray 6 SP5019 -7
1st Tray 4 Automatic side fence detection.
LCIT (D453) 2nd Tray 5 Automatic side fence detection.
3rd Tray 6 Automatic side fence detection.
Bypass Tray (B833) --- 7 Automatic side fence detection.
1st, 2nd
Cover Inserter (B835) --- Automatic side fence detection.
Tray
2. If the customer wants to use a custom size, they must:

3. Press the Tray Paper Settings button.
4. Press the icon for the appropriate tray.
5. Press the "Paper Size" tab, select "Custom Size".
6. Enter the required paper size.
7. Attach the appropriate paper size decal to each tray (decals are provided in the
accessories bag).
8. Attach the face-up decal to the ADF.
9. Check copy quality and machine operation.
10. The first time the ADF is used, dust on the ADF transport belt will transfer to the
SM 1-35 D059/D060/D061
exposure glass. To remove this dust, perform SP6008-3 (DF Output Check) for 3
minutes, then check the exposure glass for dust and remove it.
11. Input the supply name with SP5841.
12. Install the stamp data (SP5853).
13. Input the following telephone numbers with SP 5812.
14. Service technician telephone number: SP5812 -1
15. Service technician fax number: SP5812 -2
16. For ordering consumables: SP5812 -3
17. Sales representative: SP5812 -4
18. Install the language firmware if necessary.
TCRU Safety Label for Fusing Unit
19. Find the safety decal (1 of 7 languages) included with the TCRU material provided at
installation.

21. Pull out the fusing unit [A].
22. Attach the safety decal at [B].
D059/D060/D061 1-36 SM
Installation
Both ends of the fusing unit [A] near the handles become hot during operation. The
safety decal cautions the operator about removing the fusing unit for TCRU
procedures.
⇒ Operating Instructions Holder Attachment
1. If the LCT RT5030 or RT5040 is NOT installed on the right side of the mainframe, the
operating instruction holder could be attached to the right hand side of the mainframe
with two newly added screws or any location with the double sided tapes. (There are
two screw holes [A] for the operation instruction holder on the right side of the
mainframe.)
2. If the LCT RT5030 or RT5040 is installed on the right side of the mainframe, operating
instruction holder could be attached to any location excluding the right side of the
mainframe. Use the double sided tapes on the operation instruction holder to attach it
to the mainframe.
SM 1-37 D059/D060/D061
1.2.4 CONTROLLER BOX, PSU BOX REMOVAL

Remove the controller box and PSU box only if the machine is too large to pass through a
narrow door or passageway.
Removing the Controller Box
1. Open the controller box [A] ( x 5).
2. Disconnect ground wire [A] ( x1).

3. Remove plate [B] ( x2).
4. Remove plate [C] ( x2).
5. Remove sponge [D].
D059/D060/D061 1-38 SM
Installation
6. Remove harness cover [A] ( x4).
7. Disconnect the three harnesses ( x3, x6, x8).
SM 1-39 D059/D060/D061
8. Lift off the following parts:

[A] Upper half of the controller box
[B] Lower half of the controller box
Removing the PSU Box
1. Remove:
[A] Upper hinge cover ( x1)
[B] Lower hinge cover ( x1)
D059/D060/D061 1-40 SM
Installation
2. Open the PSU box [A] ( x2)
3. Disconnect ground wire [A] ( x 1).

4. Remove duct [B] ( x 2)
SM 1-41 D059/D060/D061
5. Disconnect the four harnesses ( x8, x 11).
6. Lift the PSU box [A] off its hinges.
D059/D060/D061 1-42 SM
Installation
1.2.5 TRANSPORTING THE MAIN MACHINE
To prevent blockages in the toner supply path, always follow the procedure below before
transporting the main machine. If this procedure is not done, SC592 (Toner Bank Motor
Error) or SC495 (Toner Bottle Unit Error) may be displayed, requiring replacement of the
toner transport hose and screw.
1. To prevent damaging the toner supply coil inside the toner hose, never bend the toner
hose. If the coil is bent, SC592 will be displayed and the hose must be replaced.
Before Moving the Main Machine
2. Use SP5804-41 (Upper Bottle) and SP5804-42 (Lower Bottle) to close the toner caps.
3. Turn off the operation switch.
4. If you turn off the main power switch, you cannot remove the toner bottles.
5. Then remove the toner bottles from the bank.
6. Remove the rear cover.
7. Open the PSU box and controller box (do not remove them!).
8. Remove the left upper cover, left lower cover, and right upper cover.
9. Remove the two screws [A] securing the toner supply cylinder.
10. Cover the end of the toner transport coil tube [B] with a plastic bag.
11. Turn on the operation switch.
12. Execute SP5804-38 and SP5804-39 to actuate the toner bank motor and toner supply
coil clutch for 2 minutes and remove all toner in the supply hose.
13. Re-install all removed parts except the toner bottles.
14. Make sure that three tubes are connected to the toner supply cylinder when putting it
SM 1-43 D059/D060/D061
back.
After Moving the Main Machine

15. Turn the main power switch on.
16. Load the toner bottles into the toner bank.
17. Start to supply toner from the toner bank to the toner hopper:
1) Select SP2207-2.
2) Press "Execute" on the LCD.
This procedure supplies toner to the toner hopper and the toner transport path.
It will stop automatically in about 6 minutes.
18. If SP2207-2 fails after SP2801 is completed (an SC code is displayed), repeat only
SP2207-2.
D059/D060/D061 1-44 SM
A3/11"x17" Tray Unit TK5010 (B331-14)
Installation
1.3 A3/11"X17" TRAY UNIT TK5010 (B331-14)
1.3.1 ACCESSORIES
1. A3/DLT Tray 1
2. Paper Size Decal 2
3. Short Connector 1
4. Pin Bracket 1
5. Screw 2
SM 1-45 D059/D060/D061
A3/11"x17" Tray Unit TK5010 (B331-14) Rev. 04/20/2010
1.3.2 INSTALLATION
Switch the machine OFF and unplug it from the power source before starting the
following procedure.
1. Remove the stay [A] ( x 2).

2. Remove the retainers [B] [C] and the shipping material [D] ( x 1).
3. Check the position of the front and back side fences and make sure that they are set for
DLT or A3.
4. If you need to adjust the positions of the side fences for the paper to be loaded in the
tray, remove the front panel [E] ( x 4).
5. Remove the fences and adjust their positions for the paper to be loaded: front fence [F]
( x 1), back fence [G] ( x 1), and end fence [H] ( x 1)
D059/D060/D061 1-46 SM
Rev. 04/20/2010 A3/11"x17" Tray Unit TK5010 (B331-14)
Installation
7. Pull out the tandem feed tray [A] completely.
8. Push the right tandem tray [B] into the machine.
9. Remove the left tandem tray [C] ( x 2 left,  x 3 right).
10. From the left tandem tray, remove the front cover [A] ( x 3).
11. Pull out the right tandem tray [B] then remove it ( x 2).
SM 1-47 D059/D060/D061
A3/11"x17" Tray Unit TK5010 (B331-14) Rev. 04/20/2010
12. Insert the short connector [A] into the socket inside the machine [B].
Hold the connector as shown in the illustration.
13. Using the screw removed in Step 9, attach the pin bracket [C] to the center rail.
14. Using the screws removed in Steps 11 for the right rail and screws provided in the
accessories for the left rail, install the tray [B] on the right rail [C], center rail [D], left rail
[E].
Make sure that three screw holes [F] are visible before tightening the tray.
D059/D060/D061 1-48 SM
Rev. 04/20/2010 A3/11"x17" Tray Unit TK5010 (B331-14)
Installation
⇒
If one [G] of three screw holes is not visible, the paper tray cannot be opened once
the paper tray is closed.
Tighten the screw holes indicated by triangle marks.
Make sure that the pin on the bracket [C] is put through the hole in the bottom
plate of the tray [D].
15. Re-install the front cover [A] ( x 3).

16. Use SP5019-2 to select the paper size for Tray 1 (A3 or DLT).
17. After selecting the paper size, switch the machine off and on to change the indicator on
the operation panel.
SM 1-49 D059/D060/D061
LCIT RT5030 (D452-17)
1.4 LCIT RT5030 (D452-17)
1.4.1 ACCESSORIES
illustration and list:
1. Leveling Shoes 3
2. Decal – Paper Set 3
3. Tab Paper End Fence 1
4. Decal – Paper Size 2
5. Lower Joint Pins 2
6. Upper Joint Pins 2
7. Philips Screw - M4 x 8 1
Installation Procedure – English (not shown) 1
1. The tab paper end fence (3) is located in the LCIT unit, mounted on hooks behind the
front door.
D059/D060/D061 1-50 SM
LCIT RT5030 (D452-17)
Installation
1.4.2 INSTALLATION
1. Make sure that the main machine is switched off and that its power cord is
disconnected before doing the following procedure.
Tapes, Retainers
2. From the left side [A], remove the visible tape and other items.
3. At the front [B], open the trays and remove the tapes and retainers.
4. Open the front door and remove the tapes attached to the levers.
SM 1-51 D059/D060/D061
LCIT RT5030 (D452-17)
Docking
1. Remove the covers [A] from the right upper side on main unit.
2. Remove the covers [B] from the right lower side on main unit.
3. Install the pins with the grooved rings [C] on the right upper cover on main unit.
4. Install the other pins [D] on the right lower cover on main unit.
5. Remove the lower stay [A] ( x 4) on LCIT.

6. Remove the two screws that secure the ground plate [B].
7. Turn over the ground plate and use the screws to fasten it to the same holes as shown
( x 2).
D059/D060/D061 1-52 SM
LCIT RT5030 (D452-17)
Installation
8. If you are going to install the Multi Bypass Tray B833, it must be installed before the
LCIT is docked to the mainframe.
9. Move the LCIT to the right side of the main machine.

10. Fasten the ground wire [A] ( x 1).
11. Remove cover [B].
12. Open the LCIT front door and remove screw [C] ( x 1).
13. Align the LCIT on the joint pins, and dock the LCIT with the right side of the main
machine.
14. Fasten screw [C] to lock the LCIT to the side of the main machine.
15. Attach connector [D].
SM 1-53 D059/D060/D061
LCIT RT5030 (D452-17)
Height Adjustment
1. Set the leveling shoes [A]. ( Section 1.17.1 "Common Adjustments")

2. Adjust the height of the unit and make sure that it is level.
3.

ADJUSTMENT
1. Calibrate the image position sensor. (Section 1.17.2 and 1.17.3 "Common
Adjustments")
2. Check side-to-side registration and adjust if necessary.
D059/D060/D061 1-54 SM
LCIT RT5030 (D452-17)
Installation
1.4.4 LCIT (D452) TRAY HEATERS
Accessories
Check the accessories against the list below.
No. Description Qty
1. Cover Plate 1
2. Heaters (230V 18W) 2
3. Screws (M4x6) 7
4. Harness Clamps (small) 2
5. Harness Clamps (large) 2
6. Relay Harness (long) 1
7. Relay Harness (short) 1
1. The accessory kit contains the accessories for both the LCIT D452 and LCIT D453.
Only the items shown below are required for the LCIT D452.
SM 1-55 D059/D060/D061
LCIT RT5030 (D452-17)
Installation
2. If the LCIT is already installed, disconnect the LCIT:
3. Lock bar ( x1)
4. Interface cable
5. Ground wire ( x1)
6. Remove the right cover [A] ( x6).

7. Open the bottom tray [B], remove all the paper, then pull out the tray completely.
8. Do not remove any tray.
D059/D060/D061 1-56 SM
LCIT RT5030 (D452-17)
Installation
9. Attach the front heater [A] ( x2).
10. Attach the rear heater [B] ( x2).
11. Pass the relay harness [C] through the right side of the LCIT and connect it to the
heaters ( x2).
12. Attach the cover plate [D] ( x3).
13. Load paper in the bottom paper tray.
14. Push the bottom paper tray into the LCIT.
15. Reattach the right cover ( x6).
16. Attach the three harness clamps.
17. Harness clamps and are already attached to the unit. Harness clamp is provided
SM 1-57 D059/D060/D061
LCIT RT5030 (D452-17)
with the accessory kit.
18. Set the harnesses in the clamps, then close them ( x3).
19. Attach the LCIT relay harness [A] to the mainframe.

20. Reconnect the ground wire [B] to the mainframe ( x1).
21. Dock the LCIT to the mainframe.
23. Interface cable
24. Confirm that the relay harness and the ground wire are not pinched between the
mainframe and the LCIT.
D059/D060/D061 1-58 SM
LCIT RT5040 (D453-17)
Installation
1.5 LCIT RT5040 (D453-17)
1.5.1 ACCESSORIES
1. Leveling Shoes 4
2. Philips Screw - M4 x 8 1
3. Upper Joint Pins 2
4. Lower Joint Pins 2
5. Knob Screws 4
6. Decal – Paper Set 3
7. Postcard fence – tray 4 or 6 (with the main machine) 1
8. Postcard fence – tray 4 or 6 (with the main machine) 1
9. Tab Paper End Fence 1
10. Postcard fence – tray 5 (with the main machine) 1
SM 1-59 D059/D060/D061
LCIT RT5040 (D453-17)
11. Postcard fence – tray 5 (with the main machine) 1
12. Decals – Paper Size 2
Installation Procedure – English (not shown) 1
1. The tab paper end fence (9) is located in the LCIT unit, mounted on hooks behind the
front door.
1.5.2 INSTALLATION
Tapes, Retainers
2. On the left side [A], remove all the visible and packing materials.
3. At the front [B], remove all visible tapes.
4. Open the trays and remove the tape inside.
D059/D060/D061 1-60 SM
LCIT RT5040 (D453-17)
Installation
5. Open the front door and remove the tape.
Docking
6. Remove the covers [A] from the right upper side on main unit.
7. Remove the covers [B] from the right lower side on main unit.
8. Install the pins with the grooved rings [C] on the right upper cover on main unit.
9. Install the other pins [D] on the right lower cover on main unit.
SM 1-61 D059/D060/D061
LCIT RT5040 (D453-17)
10. Remove the two screws that secure the ground plate [A].
11. Turn over the ground plate and use the screws to fasten it to the same holes as shown
( x 2).
12. If you are going to install the Multi Bypass Tray B833, it must be installed before the
13. Move the LCIT to the right side of the main machine.
14. Open the LCIT front cover and remove screw [A] (x 1).
D059/D060/D061 1-62 SM
LCIT RT5040 (D453-17)
Installation
15. Fasten the ground wire [B] ( x 1).
16. Remove cover [C] from the back side of the mainframe.
17. Attach connector [D].
18. Align the LCIT on the joint pins, and dock the LCIT with the right side of the main
machine.
19. Fasten screw [A] to lock the LCIT to the side of the main machine.
Height Adjustment
20. Set the leveling shoes [A] ( Section 1.17.1 "Common Adjustments").

ADJUSTMENT
1. Calibrate the image position sensor. (Section 1.17.2 and 1.17.3 "Common
Adjustments")
2. Check side-to-side registration and adjust if necessary.
SM 1-63 D059/D060/D061
LCIT RT5040 (D453-17) Rev. 09/24/2009
1.5.4 COATED PAPER AND NCR

Coated Paper
If operators intend to use coated paper, replace the parts listed below at installation.
Replace the following three parts at the feed station in the A3/DLT LCIT where coated
paper is being fed.
Name Part Number
Pick-up roller AF030071
⇒ Feed roller AF031041
⇒ Separation roller AF032041
1. Please remember that the durability and service lives of these rollers for coated paper
is lower than the replaced rollers.
NCR
If operators intend to use NCR paper, install the auxiliary guide plate.
Name Part Number
Guide Plate: Reverse Auxiliary D4532552
D059/D060/D061 1-64 SM
LCIT RT5040 (D453-17)
Installation
The auxiliary plate ensures smooth feeding of NCR paper.
2. The plate is installed near the feed rollers.
3. Consult the customer and determine which feed tray will be used to feed NCR paper.
4. Do the procedure for feed roller replacement on the tray where the plate will be
installed (do not remove the rollers). Please refer to the LCIT replacement instructions,
or TCRU guide for details.
5. Install the plate [A] as shown above.
6. The illustration above shows the plate installed correctly.
1.5.5 LCIT (D453) TRAY HEATERS

Accessories
Check the accessories against the list below.
SM 1-65 D059/D060/D061
LCIT RT5040 (D453-17)
No. Description Qty
1. Cover Plate 1
2. Heaters (230V 18W) 2
3. Screws (M4x6) 7
4. Harness Clamps (small) 2
5. Harness Clamps (large) 2
6. Relay Harness (long) 1
7. Relay Harness (short) 1
1. The accessory kit contains the accessories for both the LCIT D452 and LCIT D453.
Only the items shown below are required for the LCIT D453.
D059/D060/D061 1-66 SM
LCIT RT5040 (D453-17)
Installation
Installation
2. If the LCIT is already installed, disconnect the LCIT:
4. Interface cable
5. Ground wire ( x1)
6. Remove the right cover [A] ( x6).

7. Open the 2nd tray [B] and bottom tray [C], remove all the paper, then pull out the trays
until they stop.
8. Do not remove either tray.
9. Attach the front heater [A] ( x2).
SM 1-67 D059/D060/D061
LCIT RT5040 (D453-17)
10. Attach the rear heater [B] ( x2).

11. Pass the relay harness [C] through the right side of the LCIT and connect it to the
heaters ( x2).
12. Attach the cover plate [D] ( x3).
13. Load paper in the paper trays.
14. Push the trays into the LCIT.
15. Reattach the right cover ( x6).
16. Attach the four harness clamps to the LCIT.
17. Be sure to use the correct type of clamps. On the left use type [A], and on the right use
type [B].
18. Set the harnesses in the clamps, then close them ( x4).
19. Attach the LCIT relay harness [A] to the mainframe.
D059/D060/D061 1-68 SM
LCIT RT5040 (D453-17)
Installation
20. Reconnect the ground wire [B] to the mainframe ( x1).
21. Dock the LCIT to the mainframe.
23. Interface cable
24. Confirm that the relay harness and the ground wire are not pinched between the
mainframe and the LCIT.
SM 1-69 D059/D060/D061
1.6 MULTI BYPASS TRAY BY5000 (B833-17)
1.6.1 ACCESSORIES
1. Tab Sheet Fence 1
2. Sponge Strip 1
3. Bracket 1
4. Joint Pins 2
5. Tapping Screws 4
6. End Fence 1
1. The Multi Bypass Unit must be installed on top of the LCIT D453 or D452 before the
2. If the LCIT is already installed, it must be disconnected from the mainframe before
installation of the Multi Bypass Unit B833.
D059/D060/D061 1-70 SM
Installation
1.6.2 INSTALLATION
The Multi Bypass Tray B833 can be installed on either the LCIT RT5000 D452 or the LCIT
RT5010 D453.
Before Installing the Multi Bypass Tray

If the LCIT is connected to the machine, disconnect it.
To prevent damage to the connectors and ground wire, before pulling the LCIT away from
the mainframe:
2. Pull the LCIT about 20 cm (8") away from the main machine.
3. Disconnect the connectors and the ground wire ( x 1)
4. Pull the LCIT completely away from the machine.
LCIT (D452)
1. Remove the accessory packet [A].

2. Remove all other tape and shipping materials.
3. Remove the paper slot cover [B] ( x 2) and discard the screws.
4. Use the edge of a fine tip flathead screwdriver to remove the three smaller covers [C].
SM 1-71 D059/D060/D061
5. Screw in the guide pins [A].

6. Attach the bracket [B] ( x 1).
7. Grip the bypass tray unit handle [A] and place your hand under the corner [B] diagonal
to the handle, lift the unit and set it on top of the LCIT.
8. Align the embossed arrows on the top left cover [C] of the bypass tray with the arrows
on the LCIT top.
9. Fasten the bypass tray to the right bracket [D] ( x 1).
D059/D060/D061 1-72 SM
Installation
LCIT (D453)
1. Remove the accessory packet [A].

2. Remove all other tape and shipping materials.
3. Remove the paper slot cover [B] ( x 2) and discard the screws.
4. Use the edge of a fine tip flathead screwdriver to remove the four smaller covers [C].
5. Screw in the guide pins [A].

6. Attach the bracket [B] ( x 1).
7. Open Tray 1 [C].
8. Remove the right cover [D] ( x 6).
9. Grip the bypass tray unit handle [E]. Then place your hand under the corner [F]
diagonal to the handle, then lift the unit and set it on top of the LCIT.
SM 1-73 D059/D060/D061
10. Align the embossed arrows on the top left cover [G] of the bypass tray with the arrows
on the LCIT top.
11. Under the top of the LCIT, attach the lock screw [H].
12. Close Tray 1, then reattach the right cover.
Both LCIT Units
1. Remove the handle [A] ( x 2). Keep these screws.

2. Remove the cover [B] ( x 4).
3. Use the screws removed above to attach the handle [C] to the front frame.
4. Fasten the bypass tray rear frame [D] to the LCIT ( x 1).
5. Fasten the bypass tray front frame [E] to the LCIT ( x 1).
D059/D060/D061 1-74 SM
Installation
6. Connect the bypass tray harness [A] to the LCIT ( x4).
7. Re-attach cover [B] removed at Step 2.
8. Remove the tape from the sponge strip [A] and attach it to the top left cover of the
bypass tray.
9. Position the strip in the center above the three roller housings [B].
10. The sponge strip prevents paper or other objects from accidentally falling between the
output tray and the left cover.
11. Attach the end fence (follow the instructions on the decal attached to the top of the
bypass tray).
SM 1-75 D059/D060/D061
12. Open the LCIT front door. Hang the tab sheet fence on the hooks [A] on top of the LCIT
tab fence. When feeding tab sheets from the bypass tray, follow the decal instructions
on the tab fence to install the fence.
D059/D060/D061 1-76 SM
Decurl Unit DU5000 (D457-17)
Installation
1.7 DECURL UNIT DU5000 (D457-17)
1. The decurl unit is top heavy and has an extremely narrow base. It can fall over easily.
Work carefully to avoid knocking it over.
2. Do not set this unit upright until you are ready to install it and dock it to the side of the
main machine.
3. Never leave this unit standing upright and unattended in the work area during
installation.
1.7.1 ACCESSORIES
1. Screws M3x6 3
2. Screws M4x8 5
3. Leveling Shoes 3
4. Joint Bracket – L 1
5. Joint Bracket – R 1
6. Small Bracket 1
7. Sponge Strip 1
SM 1-77 D059/D060/D061
8. Paper Guide 1
9. Mylar – Black 1
10. Mylar – Transparent 1
1.7.2 INSTALLATION
Tapes
2. Open the front door [A].

3. Remove tape and retainer [B].
4. Remove tape and cover [C].
D059/D060/D061 1-78 SM
Rev. 04/19/2010 Decurl Unit DU5000 (D457-17)
⇒ Mylars
Installation
1. Disassemble the paper guide for this peripheral unit [A] ( x2).
2. Attach transparent mylar [B].
3. Remove the paper guide of the downstream peripheral device.

4. Disassemble the paper guide [A] ( x2).
5. Attach the black mylar [B].
If a new peripheral is to be installed between the Decurl Unit and installed
downstream unit, prepare an additional mylar and then use it for a new peripheral.
Never remove and reuse the attached mylar from the installed downstream unit.
6. Reassemble the paper guide ( x2).
SM 1-79 D059/D060/D061
Docking
1. This peripheral unit must be connected to the main machine.

2. Remove the interface connector cover [A] from the main machine.
3. Attach the following to the main machine:
[B] Left joint bracket, marked "L" ( x2, M4x8).
[C] Right joint bracket, marked "R" (x2, M4x8)
4. Attach the paper guide [A] ( x2 M3x6).

5. Peel the tape from the sponge strip [B] and attach it to the top right edge of the unit.
D059/D060/D061 1-80 SM
Installation
7. Remove the screw of the lock bar [B]. Keep this screw.
8. Pull out the lock bar until it stops.
9. Push the decurl unit [C] against the main machine so that the lock bar is below the joint
brackets [D].
10. Connect the I/F cable [E] to the main machine.
11. Push in the lock bar and fasten it with the screw removed in Step 6.
Height Adjustment
12. Set the leveling shoes [A] (Section 1.17.1 "Common Adjustments").
SM 1-81 D059/D060/D061
Perfect Binder (D391)
1.8 PERFECT BINDER (D391)
These units are installed the Perfect Binder installation:

1. Perfect Binder (D391)
2. Transit Pass Unit Type GB5000 (D391-19)
3. Cover Interposer Tray Type GB5000 (D391-18)
The installation procedures for these units are not described in this service manual. For
more about how to install the Perfect Binder, see this manual: "Perfect Binder Machine
Code: D391 Service Manual".
D059/D060/D061 1-82 SM
Installation
1.9 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY CI5010 (B835)
1.9.1 ACCESSORIES
1. Spacer 1
2. Black Mylar 1
3. Relay Guide Plate 1
4. "L" Hinge Pins (Tray Unit Front Cover) 2
5. Sponge Strip 1
6. Leveling Shoes 4
7. Rear Joint bracket (Left bracket) 1
8. Front Joint bracket (Right bracket) 1
9. Flat Knob Screw 1
SM 1-83 D059/D060/D061
Cover Interposer Tray CI5010 (B835) Rev. 04/19/2010
10. Screw (M4 x 8) 4
11. Screw (M3 x 6) 2
12. Screw (M4 x 14) 4
13. Knob Screw 3
14. Base Cover (Tray Unit) 1
15. Rear Cover 1
16. Screw (M3 x 8) Not used 1
17. Relay Guide Plate Not used 1
1.9.2 INSTALLATION
• Make sure that the main machine is switched off and that its power cord is
Tapes
D059/D060/D061 1-84 SM
Rev. 04/19/2010 Cover Interposer Tray CI5010 (B835)
Installation
1. Remove all the tape and shipping materials from the tray unit [A].
2. Remove cover [B].
3. Remove all tape and shipping materials from the transport unit [C].
4. Remove tape and covers from both connectors [D].
Attaching the Black Mylar to the Downstream Unit
⇒ NOTE: If a new peripheral is to be

installed between the Cover Interposer
Tray and installed downstream unit,
prepare an additional mylar and then
use it for a new peripheral. Never
remove and reuse the attached mylar
from the installed downstream unit.
1. Remove the paper guide of the downstream unit and disassemble it ( x2).
2. Attach the black mylar [A] to the relay guide plate [B].
3. Re-attach the paper guide to the downstream unit.
Sponge Strip, Paper Guide, Ground Plate
1. Peel the tape from the back of the sponge strip [A] and attach it as shown.
2. Attach the paper guide [B] ( x2).
3. Remove the ground plate [C] from the bottom cross-piece ( x2).
4. Turn the ground plate over.
5. Reattach the ground plate with the same screws as shown ( x2).
Docking the Tray Transport Unit to the Decurl Unit (D457)

Skip this section and go to the next section if you are docking directly to the main machine.
SM 1-85 D059/D060/D061
This section shows docking to the decurler as an example. It is also possible to have the
Perfect Binder at this location. The procedure in this case is basically the same.
1. At the back of the docked de-curler unit, remove:

[A] Rear upper cover ( x2)
[B] Rear lower cover ( x2)
2. At the back of the cover interposer tray, remove:

[A] Upper cover ( x4)
[B] Lower cover ( x2)
D059/D060/D061 1-86 SM
Installation
3. Attach the small bracket [A] to the cover interposer tray [B].
4. Dock the cover interposer tray (see the next section).
5. Do not re-attach the rear covers yet.
Docking
1. If the upstream unit is the main machine, remove the interface connector cover [A].
2. To the upstream unit (main machine or de-curler unit), attach:
[B] Left bracket ( x2).
[C] Right bracket ( x2).
3. Loosen the screws for the rear runner [D] and front runner [E].
4. Push the runners in and re-fasten them again with the screws.
SM 1-87 D059/D060/D061
5. Open the front door of the cover interposer tray.

6. Remove the screw of the lock bar [A]. Keep this screw.
8. Push the cover interposer tray [B] against the upstream unit so that the lock bar is
below the joint brackets [C].
9. Connect the cover interposer tray cable [D] to the decurl unit or main machine.
10. Push in the lock bar [A] and fasten it with the screw removed in Step 6.
11. Close the front door.
This completes the procedure for docking to the main unit.
If you have docked to the Decurl Unit (D457), do the steps below to complete the
procedure.
12. The following steps are required only if the upstream unit is the decurl unit.
13. With the rear covers of both the decurl unit and cover interposer unit removed, use a
short screwdriver to loosen bracket [A] ( x3).
D059/D060/D061 1-88 SM
Installation
14. Fasten the bracket to the de-curler unit at [B] ( x1).
15. Tighten the screws ( x3).
16. Re-attach the rear covers.
Dock the Downstream Peripheral Device

The tray unit of the cover interposer tray is supported by the cover interposer transport unit
and the top of the downstream peripheral unit. The next peripheral device downstream
must be docked to the cover interposer tray relay unit (the base) before the tray unit can be
installed.
Go to the appropriate section to dock the next downstream peripheral unit before installing
the tray unit of the cover interposer tray:
1. Multi Folding Unit (D454)
2. Ring Binder (D392)
3. High Capacity Stacker (D447)
4. Booklet Finisher (D434)
5. Finisher SR5000 (B830)
6. Never attempt to mount the cover interposer tray until the next downstream peripheral
unit has been docked to the transport unit (base) of the cover interposer tray.
7. To prevent bending the frame of the tray unit and damaging its alignment, always
remove the tray unit from the cover interposer tray transport unit at the following times:
1) Before disconnecting either the cover interposer tray or the next downstream
peripheral unit, or 2) Before doing any maintenance on either the cover interposer tray
or the next downstream peripheral unit.
Mounting the Tray Unit
1. If the next downstream unit is the Multi Folding Unit (D454), three parts must be
removed from the Multi Folding Unit before the tray unit of the cover interposer tray can
be installed. ( Multi Folding Unit (D454). Do this now.
SM 1-89 D059/D060/D061
2. Remove the rear cover [A] ( x2).

3. Confirm that the connectors [B] are free.
4. Place the tray unit [C] on top of the cover interposer transport unit and the downstream
unit.
5. Attach the knob screw [D] ( x1).
6. Connect the harness connectors [E] ( x5)
7. Reattach the rear cover.
8. Remove the front inner cover [A] from the dual tray ( x2).
D059/D060/D061 1-90 SM
Installation
9. Fasten the tray unit to the top of the transport unit with the knob screws [B] ( x2).
10. Attach the base cover [C] ( x1).
11. Make sure the holes in the cover are matched with the positions of the reference pins.
12. Re-attach the front inner cover [D] (removed at [A] above).
13. Position the tray unit front door [E] so its hinges match the posts on the frame of the
tray unit.
14. Hold the lower L-pin [F] as shown, insert it halfway, push it up, then rotate it into its
groove.
15. Hold the upper L-pin [G] as shown, insert it halfway, push it down, then rotate it into its
groove.
16. Attach the spacer [A] to the rear of the transport unit ( x2).
17. Set the leveling shoes [B].
SM 1-91 D059/D060/D061
Multi Folding Unit (D454)
1.10 MULTI FOLDING UNIT (D454)
1.10.1 ACCESSORIES
1. Joint Bracket 1
2. Paper Guide – Long (for D059/D060/D061) 1
3. Paper Guide – Short (for D062/D064/D065/D066) 1
4. Proof Tray Auxiliary Plate 1
5. Ground Plate 1
6. Screws M3x6 2
7. Screws M3x6 2
8. Screws M4x14 4
9. Leveling Shoes 5
10. Power Cord 1
11. Sponge Strip 1
D059/D060/D061 1-92 SM
Installation
1.10.2 INSTALLATION
1. The unit must be connected to a power source that is close to the unit and easily
accessible.
Tapes
3. Remove tape from front [A] and rear [B].

5. Remove all tape and shipping material from inside [B].
SM 1-93 D059/D060/D061
Paper Guide, Sponge Strip
1. Select the long paper guide for this installation.

2. Two paper guides are provided.
3. The short paper guide is for another machine (D062/D063/D065/D066).
4. If the upstream peripheral device is the Cover Interposer Tray (B835), attach the black
mylar provided with the cover interposer tray to this paper guide.
5. Attach the long paper guide [A] ( x2 M3x6).
6. Peel the tape from the sponge strip [B] and attach the strip to the top right edge of the
unit.
Ground Plate
1. Attach the ground plate [A] to the lower right edge of the unit ( x2 M3x6).
D059/D060/D061 1-94 SM
Rev. 04/20/2010 Multi Folding Unit (D454)
Installation
Docking
⇒ 1. Fasten the joint bracket [A] to the left side of the upstream unit ( { is the decurl unit, as
an example, | is the main machine) ( x4: M4x14 x 3, And M4x20 x 1)
• The screw [B] (front-upper) must be "M4x20". The other three screws must be
"M4x14".Otherwise, these screws may interfere with the upstream unit.
• In the illustration above, { is the Decurl Unit (D457) and | is the main machine.
2. At the front right corner, remove the screw of the lock bar [B] ( x1 M3x6). Keep this
screw.
3. Push in the lock bar.
4. Slowly push the unit [C] against the left side of the upstream unit (or main machine) so
that the lock bar is directly and squarely under the arms of the joint bracket.
5. Pull out the lock bar so it slides up into the notches in the arms on both ends of the joint
bracket [D].
SM 1-95 D059/D060/D061
Multi Folding Unit (D454) Rev. 04/20/2010
6. Fasten the lock bar by re-attaching the screw removed in Step 2 ( x1).
7. Connect the I/F cable [E] to the upstream unit (or main machine).
• If you are connecting to the main machine, you must first remove the plastic cap
on the I/F cable connection point.
8. Remove:
9. Use a short screwdriver to loosen bracket [A] ( x3).

10. Fasten the bracket to the upstream unit at [B] ( x1).
D059/D060/D061 1-96 SM
Installation
Removing Parts for the Cover Interposer Tray (B835)
Three parts must be removed before the tray unit of the cover interposer tray can be
mounted on top of the Multi Folding Unit.
1. Open the front door.
2. The following parts require removal only if the upstream unit is the Cover Interposer
Tray (B835).
3. These parts must be removed so that the tray unit of the Cover Interposer Tray will fit
on top of the Multi Folding Unit.
4. Remove:
[A] Bracket ( x1)
[B] Cross-piece ( x2)
[C] Metal plate from the door ( x2)
5. After removing [B] and [C], reattach [A].
SM 1-97 D059/D060/D061
Multi Folding Unit (D454) Rev. 04/20/2010
Height Adjustment
1. Set the leveling shoes [A] ( Section 1.17.1 "Common Adjustments").

1. Insert the power cord socket [A] into the power connection point.
2. Connect the power supply cord plug into a power outlet.
3. Test the breaker switch [B] (Section 1.17.4 "Common Adjustments")
Check for Skew and Correct Side-to-Side Registration

1. Load some B4 paper in Tray 2 of the main machine.
2. Make several copies that will exit to the upper tray.
3. Watch each sheet as it exits the machine to check for the presence of skew, and check
that the side-to-side registration is correct. (Section 1.17.3 "Common Adjustments")
D059/D060/D061 1-98 SM
Installation
Proof Tray Auxiliary Plate
4. Install the proof tray auxiliary plate at [A].

5. Set the plate in the center aligned with the diagonal groove.
6. The back should be flat against the end fence.
7. When the plate is not being used, open the front door and store it at [B] inside the inner
cover.
8. The plate should be used when Z-folded paper (all sizes) is output to the proof tray.
9. If the plate is not used with Z-folded output, the pages could mix and overlap.
SM 1-99 D059/D060/D061
Ring Binder (D392)
1.11 RING BINDER (D392)
Installation of the Ring Binder (D392) is not described in this manual.

For more about installation of the Ring Binder, see this manual: "Ring Binder Machine
Code: D392 Service Manual".
D059/D060/D061 1-100 SM
High Capacity Stacker (D447)
Installation
1.12 HIGH CAPACITY STACKER (D447)
1.12.1 ACCESSORIES
illustrations and lists.
1. Power Cord 1
2. Leveling Shoes 4
3. Ground Plate 1
4. Lock Hasp – Left*1 1
5. Lock Hasp – Right 1
6. Joint Bracket 1
7. Sponge Strip 1
8. Paper Guide 1
9. Screws M4x8 2
10. Screws M3x6 4
11. Screws M4x6 2
12. Screws M4x14 4
*1: A lock is not provided.
SM 1-101 D059/D060/D061
Roll-Away Cart Type 5010 (456-17)
1. Paper Tray 1
2. Tray Cart Handle 1
3. Tray Cart Base 1
4. Screws M10x25 2
5. Paper Press Lever 1
1. If two high capacity stackers are to be installed in the same line, the second stacker
must be installed on the left side of the first stacker.
1.12.2 INSTALLATION
D059/D060/D061 1-102 SM
Installation
Shipping Tapes
2. Remove all visible tape from the front [A] and back [B].
3. Open the front panel [A] and remove all visible tapes.
4. Open the front door [B] and remove all visible tapes.
SM 1-103 D059/D060/D061
Paper Guide, Sponge Strip, Ground Plate
1. Remove the tape from the sponge strip [A] and attach the strip to the top right edge of
the unit.
2. The sponge strip closes the gap between the D447 and the upstream unit to prevent
paper or other objects from falling between the units.
3. Fasten the paper guide [B] to the right side of the unit ( x2).
4. If the upstream peripheral device is the Cover Interposer Tray (B835), attach the black
mylar provided with the cover interposer tray to this paper guide.
5. Attach the ground plate [A] to the bottom right edge of the unit ( x2 M3x6).
D059/D060/D061 1-104 SM
Installation
Docking
1. Fasten the joint bracket [A] to the upstream unit ( is the de-curler/purge unit, as an
example, and is the main machine) ( x4).
3. Remove the front right cover [A] ( x2).
SM 1-105 D059/D060/D061
4. In the illustration above, is the Decurl Unit (D457) and is the main machine.
5. At the front right corner, remove the screw of the lock bar [A] ( x1 M3x6). Keep this
screw.
6. Pull the lock bar toward you until it stops.
7. Slowly push the unit [B] against the left side of the upstream unit (or main machine) so
that the lock bar is directly and squarely under the arms of the joint bracket [C].
8. Push the lock bar in completely so that it slides up into the notches in the arms on both
ends of the joint bracket.
9. Fasten the lock bar by re-attaching the screw removed in Step 4. ( x1).
10. Attach the I/F cable [D] to the upstream unit.
11. Remove the right rear lower cover [A] ( x4).
D059/D060/D061 1-106 SM
Installation
Lock Hasps
1. Fasten left lock hasp [A] ( x2) to the door.

2. Fasten right lock hasp [B] to the door frame ( x2).
SM 1-107 D059/D060/D061
High Capacity Stacker (D447) Rev. 04/20/2010
Height Adjustment
1. Set the leveling shoes [A] (Section 1.17.1 "Common Adjustments").

1. Insert the socket of the power cord [A] into the power connection point.
3. Test the breaker switch [B] (Section 1.17.4 "Common Adjustments")

1. Load some A3/DLT paper in Tray 2 of the main machine.
2. Make several copies that will exit to the top tray.
that the side-to-side registration is correct. (Section 1.17.3 "Common Adjustments")
D059/D060/D061 1-108 SM
Rev. 04/20/2010 High Capacity Stacker (D447)
Installation
Docking: Downstream
Do this procedure only if a second high capacity stacker unit will be installed.
1. Remove the left exit cover [A] from the left side of the unit ( x2).
2. The joint bracket of the downstream unit will be attached here ( x4).
3. Peel the tape from the back of the sponge strip [B] and attach the strip as shown
above.
Roll-Away Cart (D456)
1. Align the holes in the brackets of the paper tray [A] with the studs of the tray base [B].
2. Set the holes over the studs.
3. Set the paper press lever [C] into the recessed cut-out in the paper tray.
SM 1-109 D059/D060/D061
4. Insert the ends of the tray cart handle [D] into the handle holes. One end of the handle
passes through the paper press lever on the paper tray.
5. Lay the assembly down with the handles on the floor.

6. Fasten the end of each handle ( x1 each M10x25).
7. Make sure that both screws [E] are fastened securely.
8. Set the cart upright on its casters.

10. Push the tray cart [B] into the unit and close the door.
D059/D060/D061 1-110 SM
Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434-17)
Installation
1.13 BOOKLET FINISHER SR5020 (D434-17)
1.13.1 ACCESSORIES
1. Screws M4x14 (Joint Bracket) 4
2. Screws M3x8 (Shift Tray) 4
3. Screws M3x6 (Ground Plate) 2
4. Screws M3x6 (Paper Guide) 2
5. Leveling Shoes 4
6. Ground Plate 1
SM 1-111 D059/D060/D061
7. Power Cord 1
8. Joint Bracket 1
9. Sponge Strip 1
10. Paper Guide 1
11. Auxiliary Tray – Glossy Paper 1
12. Auxiliary Tray – Z-Fold Paper 1
13. Auxiliary Tray Holder – Glossy Paper 1
14. Auxiliary Tray Holder – Z-Fold Paper 1
15. Booklet Tray 1
16. Shift Tray 1
1.13.2 INSTALLATION
Tapes, Retainers, Shipping Plates
2. The shipping plates prevent the staple unit from moving during transport. The plates
should be kept and re-attached before the unit is transported to another location.
D059/D060/D061 1-112 SM
Installation
3. Remove tapes:
[A] Left
[B] Rear
[C] Front

5. Remove:
[B] Tapes, retainers inside
[C] Tag, wire, shipping plate ( x2)
SM 1-113 D059/D060/D061
6. Loosen the screws of the caster cover [A] ( x2).

7. Push the caster [B] down until it touches the floor.
8. With the caster touching the floor, tighten the caster cover screws.
9. This prevents the unit from tipping over when you pull out the staple unit.
10. Grip handle [A] and slowly pull the staple unit out until it stops.
11. Remove:
[B] All tapes, retainers
[C] Tag, wire, shipping plate ( x1)
[D] Tag, wire, shipping plate ( x1)
D059/D060/D061 1-114 SM
Installation
12. Remove:
[A] Tapes, retainer
[B] Tapes
Ground Plate, Sponge Strip
1. Attach the ground plate [A] to the bottom right edge of the unit ( x2).
SM 1-115 D059/D060/D061
2. Attach paper guide [A] ( x2).

3. Peel the tape from the sponge strip [B] and attach the strip to the top right edge of the
unit.
Booklet Tray, Shift Tray
1. Attach the booklet tray [A] to the notch in the left cover (no screws).
2. Attach the shift tray [B] to the left side of the unit ( x4 M3x8).
D059/D060/D061 1-116 SM
Installation
Docking
4. Fasten the joint bracket [A] to the upstream unit ( x4).
6. Open the front door [A] of the unit.
7. At the front right corner, remove the screw of the lock bar [B] ( x1 M3x6). Keep this
screw.
9. Slowly push the unit [C] against the left side of the upstream unit (or main machine) so
that the lock bar is directly and squarely under the arms of the joint bracket [D].
11. Fasten the lock bar by re-attaching the screw removed in Step 2. ( x1)
SM 1-117 D059/D060/D061
12. Attach the I/F cable [E] to the upstream unit.
13. Remove:

D059/D060/D061 1-118 SM
Installation
Height Adjustment
1. Set the leveling shoes [A] ( p. Section 1.17.1 "Common Adjustments").

2. Adjust the height of the unit and make sure that it is level. .
1. Insert the socket of the power cord [A] into the power connection point.
3. Test the breaker switch [B] ( p. Section 1.17.4 "Common Adjustments")
SM 1-119 D059/D060/D061
Auxiliary Trays
1. Attach to the rear cover:

[A] Z-fold auxiliary tray holder, and tray
[B] Glossy paper auxiliary tray holder, and tray
2. These tray holders can be installed on the front door if the auxiliary trays will be used
frequently.
3. Instruct the operator about when to use these auxiliary trays, as explained below.
4. Before feeding glossy paper, pull out the extension [A] of the shift tray and mount the
glossy paper auxiliary tray [B].
5. Before feeding Z-folded paper from the Multi Folding Unit (D454), set the Z-fold
auxiliary tray [C] on the shift tray.

2. Make several copies that will exit to the shift tray.
D059/D060/D061 1-120 SM
Installation
that the side-to-side registration is correct. ( p Section 1.17.3 "Common Adjustments")
1.13.3 PUNCH UNIT PU5020 NA, EU, SC (D449-17, -27, -28)

Accessories
1. Punch Drive Unit 1
2. Punch Unit 1
3. Punch Registration Unit 1
4. Punch Control Board 1
5. Sensor Arm and Sensor 1
SM 1-121 D059/D060/D061
6. Punch-out Hopper 1
7. Harness: Long 1
8. Harness: Board Relay 1
9. Spring 1
10. Step Screw 1
11. Screws M3x6 9
1.13.4 INSTALLATION
Shipping Materials
2. Remove motor protector plate [A] ( x4).

Rear Cover
D059/D060/D061 1-122 SM
Installation
1. Remove upper rear cover [A] ( x4).
Right Upper Panel
1. Remove the right upper panel [A] ( x4).

Punch Registration Unit
SM 1-123 D059/D060/D061
1. Use a pair of nippers to remove knockouts [A].
2. Raise and open lever "RB3" [B].
3. Remove plate [A] and discard it ( x4).
4. Insert the harness connectors [A] through the hole [B].

5. Make sure the harness connectors are through the hole completely and visible at the
rear of the machine.
6. Set and fasten the punch registration unit [C] ( x4, 2 screws each at front and back).
D059/D060/D061 1-124 SM
Rev. 04/18/2012 Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434-17)
Installation
7. Clamp harness [A] (= x1).
8. Clamp harness [B] (= x2).
Sensor Arm
1. Attach sensor arm [A] ( x1 Step Screw, Spring x1).

2. Make sure the sensor arm swings freely on the step screw and spring.
3. Attach harness [B] to the sensor on top of the arm.
SM 1-125 D059/D060/D061
Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434-17) Rev. 04/18/2012
⇒ Punch Drive Unit, Punch Unit
1. On the punch unit, connect harness [A] ( x1, = x1).
EU and NA NE
2. Attach the punch mechanism [A] to the rails of the punch unit ( x1).
3. If you are installing the punch unit for Europe and North America, connect the harness
[B] ( x1, = x2).
4. The punch unit for North Europe has no punch switching motor, so this harness is not
required.
D059/D060/D061 1-126 SM
Installation
5. At the front, insert the punch unit [A] into the finisher and fasten it ( x4).
6. Remove the shoulder screw with red tag [B], and detach the tag and wire.
7. After removing the screw from hole , re-attach it at hole .
8. This screw must remain attached to the punch unit.

9. Before removing the punch unit from the finisher, the screw must be removed from hole
and re-attached at hole . This stabilizes the punch unit and prevents it from wobbling
from side to side while it is being removed and handled after removal.
10. At the front, slide the punch-out hopper [A] into the finisher.
SM 1-127 D059/D060/D061
11. Route the harnesses from the CIS unit [A] through the hole.
12. Connect the harnesses at and ( x2).
13. If you are installing the punch unit for North America, fasten the extra connector (not
used) at ( x1).
14. Finish clamping the harnesses as shown above.

Punch Control Board
D059/D060/D061 1-128 SM
Installation
1. Install the punch control board (Standoffs x4, no screws).
2. Connect the punch relay harness to the punch control board and punch main control
board .
Final Connection
1. Fasten the connectors to the punch unit PCB [A] ( x2).
SM 1-129 D059/D060/D061
2. Release harness [A] from the frame ( x2).
3. Connect harness [A] to the punch control board ( x1).

4. Gather harness [A] and the board relay harness [B] and clamp them ( x3).
D059/D060/D061 1-130 SM
Trimmer Unit TR5020 (D455-17)
Installation
1.14 TRIMMER UNIT TR5020 (D455-17)
1.14.1 ACCESSORIES
1. Output Tray*1 1
2. Joint Bracket – Left (Marked "L") 1
3. Joint Bracket – Right (Marked "R") 1
4. Ground Plate 1
5. Sponges 2
6. Screws (M3x6 for Ground Plate) 2
7. Screws (M4x10 for Joint Bracket) 4
8. Leveling Shoes 4
9. Power Cord 1
*1: Screws (x2) for the output tray are attached to the left side of the unit.
SM 1-131 D059/D060/D061
1.14.2 INSTALLATION
Tapes, Stopper Plate
2. Remove the tape on the right side to free the I/F cable [A].
3. Remove the tape from the left side [B].
4. Open the front door and remove the retainer [A].

5. Remove the stopper plate [B] ( x1).
6. Keep the stopper plate. It should be re-installed before transporting the unit to a new
location.
D059/D060/D061 1-132 SM
Installation
Output Tray
1. Make sure that the front door [A] is open.

2. Remove:
[B] Left upper cover( x2)
[C] Left lower cover ( x2)
3. Remove the screws and from the left side.

4. Use the removed screws to attach the output tray [A].
5. Connect the output tray at [B].
6. Remove the sheet [C] of paper.
7. Do not remove this sheet [C] of paper before connecting the output tray to the trimmer
unit.
8. Reattach the left lower cover and left upper cover.
SM 1-133 D059/D060/D061
Ground Plate
1. Attach the ground plate [A] to the right bottom edge ( x2 M3x6).
Preparing the Booklet Finisher (D434) for Docking
1. Open the front door [A] of the finisher.

2. Pull out the staple unit [B].
D059/D060/D061 1-134 SM
Installation
3. At the rear of the finisher, remove:
4. Unfasten the booklet tray sensor actuator arm [A] ( x2).

5. Disconnect the actuator arm [B] and remove it ( x5,  x1).
6. Store the actuator arm in a safe location for future use.
SM 1-135 D059/D060/D061
Docking
1. Attach:
[A] Left joint bracket, marked "L" ( x2, M4x10)
[B] Right joint bracket, marked "R" (x2, M4x10)
2. Peel the tape from the back of the sponges and attach sponge and .
3. At the rear, remove screw from plate [A].

4. Loosen screw and lower the plate so you can see the lock bar [B].
5. Remove lock bar screw ( x1 M3x6). Keep this screw.
6. Push the lock bar [B] until it is unlocked.
7. Slowly push the unit [C] against the left side of the finisher so that the lock bar is directly
and squarely under the arms of the joint brackets.
8. At the rear, pull lock bar [B] toward you so that it slides up into the notches in the arms
D059/D060/D061 1-136 SM
Installation
of the joint brackets.
9. Fasten the lock bar by re-attaching the screw removed in Step 5. ( x1).
10. Connect the unit I/F cable [D] to the finisher.
11. Connect the plug of the power cord to the power source.
12. Set a leveling shoe [A] under each corner of the unit.
13. At each corner, turn the nut to lower the bolt onto each shoe.
14. Use a level to check each side of the unit.
15. Turn each nut to adjust the height of each corner until each side is level.
SM 1-137 D059/D060/D061
1.15 FINISHER SR5000 (B830)
1.15.1 ACCESSORIES
1. Sponge Strip 1
2. Entrance Guide Plate 1
3. Ground Plate 1
4. Joint Bracket 1
5. Shift Tray 1
6. Leveling Shoes 4
7. Tapping Screws – M4 x 12 4
D059/D060/D061 1-138 SM
Installation
10. Support Plate Pocket 1
11. Support Plate 1
12. Side Tray 1
- Support Plate for Proof Tray 1
1.15.2 INSTALLATION
Preparing the Finisher
SM 1-139 D059/D060/D061
2. Unpack the finisher and remove all tapes and shipping retainers.
3. Open the front door and remove the shipping retainers.
4. Remove the brackets, tags, and wires in this order: [A] [B] [C] ( x 2 each).
5. Install the ground plate [A] ( x 2) (M3 x 6).
6. Set the ground plate so that there is no gap between the plate and the bottom frame of
the finisher (as shown).
7. Install the side tray [B] ( x 2) (M4 x 8).
8. The edge of the side tray should be aligned with the edge of the finisher.
9. Attach the cushion [C] to the right side of the upper cover.
10. Install the entrance guide plate [D] ( x 2) (M3 x 6).
11. Insert the shift tray [A] into the grooves and fasten it ( x 4) (M3 x 6).
D059/D060/D061 1-140 SM
Installation
Docking
1. Fasten the joint bracket [A] to the upstream peripheral unit ( is the decurl unit, as an
example, and is the main unit).
2. Open the front door of the unit.

3. At the front right corner, remove the screw of the lock bar [A] ( x1 M3x6). Keep this
screw.
5. Slowly push the unit [B] against the left side of the upstream unit (or main machine) so
that the lock bar is directly and squarely under the arms of the joint bracket [C].
6. Check that the top edges of the finisher are parallel with edges of the upstream unit (or
main machine) to the right.
SM 1-141 D059/D060/D061
8. Fasten the lock bar by re-attaching the screw removed in Step 3. ( x1)
9. Connect the finisher I/F cable [D] to the main machine
10. Close the front door.
11. Set the leveling shoes [A] ( p.1-154 "Common Adjustments").

12. Adjust the height of the unit and make sure that it is level ( p.1-154 "Common
Adjustments").

2. Make several copies that will exit to the shift tray.
that the side-to-side registration is correct. ( p.1-154 "Common Adjustments")
1.15.3 PUNCH UNIT PU5000 NA, EU, SC (B831-01, -02, -03)

Accessories
D059/D060/D061 1-142 SM
Installation
1. Punch Unit 1
2. Punch-out Hopper 1
3. Spacer (1 mm) 2
4. Spacer (2 mm) 1
5. Knob 1
6. Step Screw 1
7. Screw (M4 x 6) Black 1
8. Screw (M3 x 10) 2
9. Spring 1
10. Sensor Arm and Sensor 1
Installation
SM 1-143 D059/D060/D061
2. This punch unit cannot be used with the D061 main machine (135 cpm).
3. If the finisher is connected to the machine, disconnect it.

4. Open the front door and remove the rear cover ( x 2).
5. Unpack the punch unit and remove the motor protector plate [A] ( x 4).
6. Remove the cam lock plate [B] ( x 2).
7. Remove the inner cover [A] ( x 3).

8. Behind the inner cover at [B] and [C], press the lock tab to the right to release the inner
cover from the frame.
9. Remove the plastic knockouts [D].
D059/D060/D061 1-144 SM
Installation
10. Remove the paper guide [A] ( x 4).
11. Install the sensor arm [A] ( x 1, small step screw M3 x 4).
12. Make sure that the sensor arm swings freely on the step screw.
13. Attach the spring [B].
SM 1-145 D059/D060/D061
14. Position the 2 mm spacer [A] and attach the punch unit [B] ( x 2, M3 x 10).
15. Use one of the screws removed from the motor protector plate to fasten the remaining
two spacers to the frame as shown.
16. These extra spacers can be used to adjust the position of the punch holes (front to rear,
across the page).
17. At the front, fasten the punch unit knob [A] ( x 1).
D059/D060/D061 1-146 SM
Installation
18. Connect the PCB harness connector [A] to CN135 of the finisher PCB and to CN600 of
the punch unit PCB.
19. Connect the harness [B] to CN136 of the finisher PCB.
20. Connect the single end of the hopper full sensor connector cable [C] to the hopper full
sensor on the arm ( x 1,  x 2).
21. No special DIP switch settings are required for this punch unit. A signal from the punch
identifies itself by sending a signal to the main machine.
22. Slide the punch-out hopper [A] into the finisher.

23. Re-attach the inner cover and rear cover.
24. Close the front door and re-connect the finisher to the machine.
SM 1-147 D059/D060/D061
Key Counter
1.16 KEY COUNTER
1.16.1 ACCESSORIES
No. Description Q’ty
1. Key Counter Cover 1
2. Key Counter Plates 2
3. Key Counter Bracket 1
4. Machine Screw M3 x 6 1
5. Shoulder Screw M3 x 4 1
6. Tapping Screws M4 x 8 3
7. Machine Screws M3 x 20 2
8. External Screw M3 x 20 1
9. Machine Screw (Flathead) M4 x 16 1
10. Extension Cable (for LCIT Installation) 1
11. Extension Cable Clamps (for LCIT Installation) 6
D059/D060/D061 1-148 SM
Rev. 04/20/2010 Key Counter
Installation
1.16.2 INSTALLATION
Make sure that the main machine is switched OFF and that its power cord is
Assembling
1. While holding the key counter plates [A] inside the key counter bracket [B], insert the
key counter holder [C]
2. Fasten the key counter holder [C] through the bracket plate to the counter plates [A] (
x 2).
3. Fasten the cover [D] to the key counter bracket [B] ( x 2).
Installing
1. Attach the key counter to the main machine if the LCIT is not installed.
SM 1-149 D059/D060/D061
Key Counter
2. On the right side of the main machine, remove the small cover [A].
3. Remove the jumper connector [B].
4. Fasten the shoulder screw [C] to the side of the machine.
5. Connect the key counter assembly [D].
6. Fit the keyhole of the key counter bracket [E] over the head of the shoulder screw, then
slide it back.
7. Fasten the key counter assembly [F] to the main machine ( x 1).
8. Do the User Tool and SP mode settings described at the end of this section.
D059/D060/D061 1-150 SM
Key Counter
Installation
Attaching the Key Counter to the LCIT
1. On the LCIT right cover, remove the cover [A] ( x 2).

2. Remove the LCIT right cover [B] ( x 6).
3. Remove the LCIT rear cover [C] ( x 3).
4. On the right side of the LCIT, attach 2 clamps [D].
5. Attach the extension cable [E] to the 2 clamps.
6. On the rear side of the LCIT, attach 2 clamps [A].
SM 1-151 D059/D060/D061
Key Counter
7. Route the cable [B] as shown.
8. On the left side of the LCIT, attach 2 clamps [C].
9. Route the cable [D] as shown.
10. If the cable from the right cover is too long, loop it [E] to make it shorter.
11. Re-attach the right LCIT cover.

12. Fasten the shoulder screw [A] to the side of the LCIT.
13. Connect the key counter assembly [B].
14. Fit the keyhole of the key counter bracket [C] over the head of the shoulder screw, then
slide it back.
15. Fasten the key counter assembly [D] to the LCIT ( x 1).
16. On the right side of the main machine, remove the small cover [E].
17. Remove the jumper connector [F].
D059/D060/D061 1-152 SM
Rev. 04/20/2010 Key Counter
Installation
18. Connect the extension cable [A] from the LCIT to the main machine.
19. Dock the LCIT to the main machine.
User Tool and SP Mode Settings

1. Instruct the key operator to enable the key counter with the User Tools setting:
User Tools> System Settings> Administrator Tools> Key Counter Management> ON
Then select and enable the items for the counter (Main machine, Document Server,
Printer, Scanner).
2. Enter the SP mode
Confirm that the setting for SP5121 is “0” (Default: Paper Feed Count). This sets
the counter for paper feed ("1" sets for paper exit).
Confirm that the setting for SP5113 is "0".
SM 1-153 D059/D060/D061
Optional Counter I/F Type A (B870) Rev. 04/20/2010
⇒ 1.17 Optional Counter I/F Type A (B870)

1.17.1 INSTALLATION
1. Remove the screws ( x5).

2. Swing open the controller box [A] in the direction of the arrow.

4. Swing open the PSU box [A] in the direction of the arrow.
D059/D060/D061 1-154 SM
Rev. 04/20/2010 Optional Counter I/F Type A (B870)
Installation
5. Install the key counter interface board [A] onto the rear of the mainframe ( x4: M3x6).
6. Connect the harness [B] to CN333 on the IOB.
7. Make a loop with the harness [B], and then clamp it.
8. Connect the harness [B] to CN3 on the key counter interface board.
9. Route a key counter cable [C], and then connect the key counter cable to CN4 on the
key counter interface board ( x2).
10. Attach the ground cable [D] ( x1: M4x6).
11. Remove the cutout [A] from cover, and route the key counter cable [B] ( x1).
If the cable cannot be put through the hole on the cover, remove the cover first (
x1).
SM 1-155 D059/D060/D061
Common Adjustments
1.18 COMMON ADJUSTMENTS
1.18.1 HEIGHT AND LEVEL ADJUSTMENT

Before you begin:
1. The main machine should be installed first and adjusted to level within less than 5 mm
front-to-back, and side-to-side.
2. Due to the length of the paper path with all optional peripheral units installed, it is
extremely important that every unit be level.
3. The height and level of each peripheral unit must be adjusted at installation.
4. The height and level of each unit must be adjusted before testing for the presence of
skew and checking that side-to-side registration is correct.
Setting the Leveling Shoes
1. Do this procedure near each caster where an adjustable bolt is provided.

2. The number of leveling shoes will differ, depending on which unit you are leveling.
3. Turn the lower nut to lower the bolt.
4. The upper bold is spot-welded to the frame and does not move.
5. Set a leveling shoe below the bolt.
D059/D060/D061 1-156 SM
Rev. 04/20/2010 Common Adjustments
Installation
6. Continue to turn the lower nut until it stops against the shoe.
7. Set a level on the front, rear, and side edges to determine if the unit is level.
8. Adjust the height at each corner until the unit is level.
1.18.2 LCIT ADJUSTMENTS

The CIS (Contact Image Sensor) above the paper path of the LCIT must be calibrated at
installation. This must be done for the LCIT (D452 or D453) at installation.
The two CIS assemblies inside the main machine are calibrated at the factory. This is
not possible for the LCIT because the LCIT and main machine are not together at the
factory.
1. Turn OFF the main power switch.
2. Disconnect the LCIT from the mainframe.
SM 1-157 D059/D060/D061
Common Adjustments Rev. 04/20/2010
3. With the LCIT [A] separated from the mainframe, reconnect the LCIT cable to the
mainframe.
4. Turn ON the main power switch.
5. Insert one sheet of plain white paper [B] in the paper path.
6. Make sure that the paper covers the entire area below the image position sensor (CIS)
[C].
7. Enter the SP mode and do SP1910 -2 (CIS Image Position Adjustment: LED Strength -
LCIT). This calibrates the amount of light to be emitted from the CIS.
8. Do SP1909 -2 (CIS Image Position Adjustment: PWM After Adjustment - LCIT).
⇒
If the displayed value is between Ah {10} and 28h {40}, the CIS is calibrated
successfully. (The display is in hexadecimal code. The values in {} are decimal.)
If the value is outside this range, do SP 1910 -2 and 1909 -2 again. If the value does
not come between Ah and 28h, the CIS may be defective.
9. Exit the SP mode and turn off the main power switch.
10. Remove the paper from the machine.
11. Reattach the LCIT to the side of the main machine.
12. Turn on the main power switch.
13. Push [User Tools]> [Adjust Settings for Operators].
14. Do [0111] 4 to 7 for Trays 4, 5, 6, 7 and set the value for each tray to "Off".
15. Enter the SP mode menu.
16. Adjust the image positions in the main scan direction.
Do SP2902 -3, select Pattern 27, then print the trimming pattern.
Do SP1002 and adjust the image position in the main scan direction for Trays 4, 5,
6, and 7.
Print the trimming pattern from each tray of the LCIT and from the bypass tray (if
installed).
To do this, touch "Copy Window" in the SP display, select a tray, then push [Start].
The distance of the test pattern line from the paper edge for each tray must be 2
mm. If it is not 2 mm, adjust with SP1002-4 to -7, depending on which tray is not
within the specified 2 mm.
17. Print the trimming pattern (Pattern 27) one more time from Tray 4.
18. Do SP1912 -2 (CIS Image Position Adjustment: Normal Paper). This sets the CIS for
operation with standard copy paper.
19. Exit the SP mode.
21. Do [0111] 4 to 7 again and reset the values for Trays 4, 5, 6, and 7 to "On".
D059/D060/D061 1-158 SM
Common Adjustments
Installation
1.18.3 SKEW AND SIDE-TO-SIDE REGISTRATION
Overview
The paper feed path is extremely long when many peripheral units are installed. In such a
long path, the cumulative effect of paper skew or deviation in side-to-side registration may
require adjustment.
1. Skew occurs when the trailing edge of the paper rotates away from the direction of
paper feed.
2. If side-to-side registration occurs, the sheet remains straight but shifts left or right away
from center.
SM 1-159 D059/D060/D061
Common Adjustments
Skew and side-to-side registration are checked with graduated scales (shown above)
where paper exits the units. The scales are provided so that you can visually check and
measure the amount of skew or deviation in side-to-side registration.
A scale for detecting skew and checking side-to-side registration ("S-to-S") is provided on
the following peripheral units.
Name Skew S-to-S Comment
LCIT (D452) X O Side-to-side registration

only; CIS adjustment
LCIT (D453) X O
Perfect Binder (D391) O O
Cover Interposer (B835) O O
Multi Folding Unit (D454) O O

Correction for both skew and
Ring Binder (D392) O O side-to-side registration are
possible.
High Capacity Stacker (D447) O O
Booklet Finisher (D434) O O
Finisher (B830)
D059/D060/D061 1-160 SM
Common Adjustments
Installation
Use either the rear scale or front scale, depending on the type of paper used in your area:
3. Rear: DLT SEF (LT LEF for Ring Binder (D392))
4. Front: A3 SEF (A4 LEF for Ring Binder (D392))
The illustrations below show where the scale for each peripheral unit is located:
The illustration above shows the scale on the left side of the Booklet Finisher tray. The
same scale is at approximately the same position (paper exit) for the following units:
5. Multi Folding Unit (D454): Proof Tray
6. Ring Binder (D392): Left Exit
7. High Capacity Stacker (D447): Proof Tray
8. Booklet Finisher (D434): Shift Tray Exit
In the illustration below, the red lines indicate the joint brackets where adjustments are
done to eliminate skew and to correct side-to-side registration.
SM 1-161 D059/D060/D061
Common Adjustments
Here are some general rules for testing and adjusting for paper skew or a shift in
side-to-side registration.
9. After installation of each peripheral device, do some test prints and check for the
presence of skew, and check that side-to-side registration is correct.
10. LCIT (D452)
11. LCIT (D453)
12. Multi Folding Unit (D454)
13. Ring Binder (D392)
14. High Capacity Stacker (D447)
15. Booklet Finisher (D434)
16. Finisher SR5000 (B830)
17. If you detect a problem with skew or side-to-side registration, do the adjustment on the
joint bracket attached to the peripheral unit upstream of the unit where the problem
occurred.
18. There is no adjustable joint bracket upstream of the following peripheral units. No
adjustment is possible upstream of these units:
19. Decurl Unit (D457)
20. Transit Pass Unit Type (D391-19)
21. Cover Interposer (B835)
22. Trimmer Unit TR5020 (D455-17)
D059/D060/D061 1-162 SM
Common Adjustments
Installation
23. Side-to-side registration is corrected by shifting the upstream joint bracket left or right.
24. Skew is eliminated by inserting spacers (shims) under the rear or front end of the joint
bracket. These spacers are provided with the peripheral units, attached by screws to
the units at the factory.
Checking Side-to-Side Registration

Do this procedure to confirm that the paper is centered in the paper path.
1. Make sure that the I/F cable of the unit is connected to the upstream unit.
2. Disconnect the unit to the left of the unit to be tested.
3. Execute a run by feeding paper from Tray 2 of the host machine.
4. If you are testing the Ring Binder (D392), execute the run by feeding paper (A4 or LT
LEF) from Tray 2 of the host machine (punching only, no ring binding).
5. Feed A3 SEF for other units.
6. When each sheet exits, check the position of the paper on the scale to see if the paper
is centered.
7. Read the rear scale for DLT-size paper
8. Read the front scale for A3-size paper.
9. If you are testing the ring binder, read the rear scale for LT LEF paper and the front
scale for A4 LEF paper. The paper does not exit. It will switch back and feed to the
punch unit.
10. The scale lines are spaced 2 mm apart.
11. The paper must not deviate more than ±2 mm on the scale.
[A] Leading/trailing edges centered. No adjustment necessary.
Leading/trailing edges offset to the rear by more than 2 mm. Adjustment

[B]
required.
SM 1-163 D059/D060/D061
Common Adjustments
Leading/trailing edges offset to the front by more than 2 mm. Adjustment

[C]
required.
If the edge of the paper is on the scale at the center [A], no adjustment is required.
-or-
If the edge of the paper is ±2 mm off the center line on the scale, adjustment is
required. Do the procedure in the next section.
Correcting Side-to-Side Registration

1. Disconnect the peripheral unit from the upstream unit.
2. On the joint bracket attached to the upstream unit, loosen screws , , , and .
3. Remove bracket [A] ( x1), rotate it 90 degrees, and re-fasten the screw. Changing the
position of this bracket aligns the oval cut-out horizontally and frees the joint bracket so
it can slide from side to side.
4. Look at the scale [B].
5. Slide the bracket to the left or right and tighten the screw.
6. If the deviation from center was toward the front, slide the bracket to the rear and
tighten the screw .
-or-
If the deviation from center was toward the rear, side the bracket to the front and
D059/D060/D061 1-164 SM
Common Adjustments
Installation
tighten the screw .
7. Tighten screws , , and
8. Do another test run, so that you can check the results of the adjustment.
Detecting Paper Skew

Do this check to detect the presence of skew in the paper path.
1. Make sure that the I/F cable of the unit is connected to the upstream unit.
2. If a peripheral unit is connected on the left side, disconnect it and pull it away.
3. Execute a straight-through run.
4. Check the scale where each sheet exits.
5. The rear scale is for DLT-size paper.
6. The front scale [2] is for A3-size paper.
7. Be sure to read the correct scale for the paper size in use.
[A] Centered. No adjustment necessary.
Trailing edge skew to the front, total skew more than ±2 mm. Adjustment
[B]
required.
Trailing edge skew to the rear, total skew more than ±2 mm. Adjustment
[C]
required.
SM 1-165 D059/D060/D061
Common Adjustments
Correcting Skew
1. Disconnect the peripheral unit from the upstream unit.
2. Locate and remove the spacers from the peripheral unit where the problem occurred.
Locating and Removing Spacers
The photos below show where you can find the spacers for each unit.
Ring Binder (D392)
3. Look at the right side.

4. Remove the spacers (x2).
D059/D060/D061 1-166 SM
Common Adjustments
Installation
6. Remove the right lock hasp [A] ( x2).
7. Remove right front cover [B] ( x2).
8. Remove the spacers ( x1).
Booklet Finisher (D434)
1. Open the front door ( x1).

SM 1-167 D059/D060/D061
Common Adjustments
3. Look at the right side ( x1).

Inserting Spacers
5. Loosen the screws ( x4) of the joint bracket attached to the peripheral upstream of the
unit where the problem occurred.
6. Insert a spacer and tighten the screws.
If the trailing edge of the paper is skewing toward the front of the machine, insert a
spacer [A] under the rear end of the bracket and tighten the screws.
-or-
If the trailing edge is skewing toward the rear of the machine, insert a spacer [B]
under the front end of the bracket and tighten the screws.
7. Do another run to check the adjustment. If skew is still present, insert another spacer.
D059/D060/D061 1-168 SM
Common Adjustments
Installation
8. Each spacer is 2 mm thick.
9. Only two spacers are provided, so the maximum adjustment is 4 mm (using two
spacers).
1.18.4 BREAKER SWITCH TESTING

1. Plug the power cord of the main machine or peripheral unit to be tested into its power
source.
2. Do not turn on the main machine or the peripheral to be tested.

3. The main machine and the peripheral to be tested must be off.
4. Use the tip of a small screwdriver or pen to push the breaker test button [A].
5. The breaker switch should flip to the "O" position [B]. This indicates that the breaker
switch is operating normally.
6. If the breaker switch does not flip to the "O" position, the switch must be replaced.
7. Return the switch to the "|" position [C] for normal operation.
8. The main machine will not turn on if the breaker switch is not returned to the "|"
position.
9. All breaker switches must be checked at installation, and once a year.
SM 1-169 D059/D060/D061
MFP Options
1.19 MFP OPTIONS
1.19.1 OVERVIEW
Two slots for boards and two slots for SD cards are provided on the controller box. Each
board or SC card must be inserted into its assigned slot. The slot assignment of each item
is listed in the table below. A decal with the same information is attached to the controller
box cover.
MFP Option Slot/Card Assignment
D059/D060/D061 1-170 SM
MFP Options
Installation
Slot Name on Decal Description
10. IEEE1284 Interface Board Type A (B679-17)

11. File Format Converter Type C (D377-04)
A Option 12. IEEE 802.11a/g Interface Unit Type J (377-01)
13. Bluetooth Interface Unit Type 3245 (B826-17)
Note: Only one of these boards can be inserted at a time.
B Tandem 14. Copy Connector Type 3260 (B328-11)
C External CTL/GIGA 15. Gigabit Ethernet Type B (D377-21)
16. Printer/Scanner Unit Type 1357 (D451-01)

17. PostScript3 Unit Type 1357 (D451-05)
18. HDD Encryption Unit Type A (D377-16)
19. Data Overwrite Security Unit Type H (D377-06)
1 Option
20. IPDS Unit Type 1357EX (451-12)
Note: This is the only SD card slot available for
applications. If more than one application is to be used,
the applications must be merged onto one SD card.
21. VM Card Type J (D463-01)

2 Service 22. For machine firmware update by the technician.
23. Also for installing Browser Unit Type E (D430-05)
Other Connection Points

24. USB 2.0 (On Board)
25. Ethernet (10/100 On Board)
26. USB Host 2 Ch (On Board)
1. The Copy Data Security Unit is a separate PCB. It is attached directly to the controller
board. There is no system SD card used with this machine.
SM 1-171 D059/D060/D061
MFP Options
1.19.2 MERGING APPLICATIONS ON ONE SD CARD

Overview
The machine has two SD card slots:
1. Slot 1 is used for application programs
2. Slot 2 is used for servicing (firmware updates)
Only one SD card slot is available for SD card applications. If the customer wants to use
more than one application, the applications must be copied onto the same SD card.
3. Authentication is transferred with the application program to the target SD card.
4. Do not use an SD card if it was used with a computer before this time. Correct
operation is not guaranteed if this type of SD card is used.
5. The SD card is the only evidence that the customer is licensed to use the application
program. Also, the technician may occasionally need to check the SD card and its data.
For these reasons, store the unused SD cards in the front cover of the main machine.
6. A licensing agreement prohibits copying of the PostScript SD card. However, you can
copy any application from another SD card to the PS3 SD card.
7. After an SD card has been used to move other applications onto that card, that SD card
cannot be used for a different function.
8. Before uploading to an SD card, always make sure that the write-protect switch is OFF.
(It is very easy to accidentally turn on the write-protect switch when inserting or
removing an SD card.)
Merging Applications
Do this procedure to put more than one application on one SD card.
1. Turn off the main machine.
2. Remove the SD card slot cover ( x1).
3. Put the Source SD card in Slot 2 (service slot). This card contains the application that
you want to copy.
4. The PS3 SD card cannot be the source card (it cannot be copied).
5. Make sure that the target SD write-protect switch is OFF.
6. Put the Target SD card in Slot 1. The application on the card in Slot 2 will be copied to
this card.
8. Turn the main machine on.
9. Go into the SP mode and select SP5873 -1.
10. Touch "Execute".
D059/D060/D061 1-172 SM
MFP Options
Installation
11. Follow the instructions on the display and touch "Execute" to start copying.
12. When the display tells you copying is completed, touch "Exit".
13. Turn the main machine off.
14. Remove the Source SD card from Slot 2. Keep the target SD card in Slot 1.
15. Turn the main machine on.
16. Go into the User Tools mode and make sure that all the applications on the SD card in
Slot 1 are enabled:
User Tools> System Settings> Administrator Tools> Firmware Version
17. Turn the main machine off again, then:
18. Reattach the SD card slot cover.
19. Attach the rear cover of the machine.
20. Store the SD cards that were copied.
21. After an SD card has been copied, it cannot be used. However, it must be stored in the
machine to serve as proof of purchase by the customer.
22. The original card can also be used to perform an undo procedure (SP 5873 -2). Before
you store an SD card, label it carefully so it can be identified easily if you need to do the
undo procedure (see below).
Undo Exec
23. Turn the main switch off.
24. Put the SD card holding the merged applications in SD Card Slot 2.
25. Put the original destination SD card (the one removed from storage) into Slot 1.
26. The SD card in Slot 1 must be the original SD card of the application you want to move
from Slot 2 to Slot 1. You cannot use a blank SD card in Slot 1.
27. Turn the main switch on.
28. Go into the SP mode and do SP5873-2 (Undo Exec)
29. Follow the messages on the operation panel to complete the procedure.
30. Turn the main switch off.
31. Remove the SD cards from the slots.
32. Turn the main switch on.
SM 1-173 D059/D060/D061
MFP Options
1.19.3 COMMON PROCEDURES FOR MFP OPTIONS

Storing SD Application Cards on Site
1. Open both front doors of the main machine.

2. Remove the emblem cover [A] ( x2)
3. Set the copied SD card [B] in one of the compartments.
4. Reattach the emblem cover and close the front doors.
D059/D060/D061 1-174 SM
Rev. 04/19/2010 MFP Options
Installation
Removing Slot Covers
The slot covers on the side of the controller board box are held in place by screws:
• Slot [A] ( x2)
• Slot [B] ( x2)
• Slot [C] ( x1)
• SD card slots { and | ( x1)
SM 1-175 D059/D060/D061
MFP Options Rev. 04/19/2010
1.19.4 PRINTER/SCANNER UNIT TYPE 1357 (D451-01)

Accessories
1. Caution Decal 1
2. Printer/Scanner SD Card 1
3. Printer Keytops (English/Symbol) 2
4. Scanner Keytops (English/Symbol) 2
5. EULA Sheet 1
6. FCC Decal 1
7. Memory Chips 128 MB 2
8. Memory Chip 256 MB 1
• Only one Slot 1 is available for applications on SD cards. If more than one
application is will be used, the applications must be moved onto one SD card with
SP5873 -1.
Installation
• Make sure that the main machine is switched OFF and that its power cord is
D059/D060/D061 1-176 SM
Installation
1. Switch the machine OFF.
2. Remove the controller box cover.
3. Insert the memory DIMMs in either slot [A].
4. Re-attach the controller box cover.
5. Insert the SD Card into Slot 1.
• Push the SD Card in to release it for removal.

• Make sure the SD Card is inserted and locked in place. If it is partially out of the
slot, push it in gently until it locks in place.
6. On the operation panel, remove the dummy keytops [A] and discard them.
7. Install the “Printer” keytop [B] then the “Scanner” keytop [C]. Select either the English
set or Symbol set for installation. The correct order is:
• Printer (upper)
• Scanner (lower)
SM 1-177 D059/D060/D061
8. Attach the serial number decal [D] to the main machine.

9. Plug in the power cable and turn the main power switch ON.
⇒ 10. Change SP5985 -1 and -2 from ‘2’ to ‘1’.
11. Turn the main power switch OFF and ON.
12. Follow the procedures in the Operation Instructions to complete the installation for the
printer/scanner option.
1.19.5 IEEE1284 INTERFACE BOARD TYPE A (B679-17)

Accessories
1. IEEE 1284 Centronics Board 1
1. Switch the machine off.

2. Remove the cover from Slot A ( x 2).
3. Insert the board and fasten it with the screws.
1.19.6 POSTSCRIPT3 UNIT TYPE 1357 (D451-05)

Accessories
1. PostScript3 Emulation SD Card 1
2. Decal 1
1. Only Slot 1 is available for applications on SD cards. If more than one application is will
be used, the applications must be merged onto one SD card with SP5873 -1.
Installation
2. Remove the SD card slot cover ( x 1).
3. Insert the PS3 SD Card into Slot 1.
D059/D060/D061 1-178 SM
MFP Options
Installation
4. Pushing in the SD Card releases it for removal.
5. Make sure the SD Card is inserted and locked in place.
6. If it is partially out of the slot, push it in gently until it locks in place.
7. Switch the machine on.
SM 1-179 D059/D060/D061
MFP Options
1.19.7 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT TYPE H (D377-06)

Accessories
1. Data Overwrite Security SD Card 1
2. Operating Instructions CD-ROM 1
3. Comments Sheet (17 languages) 2
Before You Begin…

1. Confirm that the Data Overwrite Security unit SD card is the correct type for the
machine. The correct type for this machine is type "H".
2. Make sure that the following settings are not at the factory default settings:
3. Supervisor login password
4. Administrator login name
5. Administrator login password
6. These settings must be set up by the customer before the Data Overwrite Security unit
can be installed.
7. Confirm that "Admin. Authentication" is on:
[User Tools]> "System Settings"> "Administrator Tools"> "Administrator Authentication
Management"> "Admin. Authentication"> "On"
If this setting is "Off", tell the customer that this setting must be "On" before you can do
the installation procedure.
8. Confirm that "Administrator Tools" is selected and enabled:
Management"> "Available Settings
9. "Available Settings" is not displayed until Step 2 is done.

If this setting is not selected, tell the customer that this setting must be selected before
you can do the installation procedure.
D059/D060/D061 1-180 SM
MFP Options
Installation
Seal Check and Removal
1. Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power supply cord.
2. Check the two box seals [A] on the corners of the box.
3. Make sure that the seals are attached at both corners.
4. The surfaces of the tapes must be blank. If you see “VOID” on the tapes, do not install
the components in the box. Contact your sales division.
5. If the surfaces of the tapes do not show “VOID”, remove them from the corners of the
box.
6. After you remove each seal, the “VOID” marks [B] become visible. This prevents them
from being reattached to the box.
Installation
1. The DOS SD card must be inserted in SD card Slot 1.

2. If the PostScript3 option is also installed, you must move the DOS application to the
PostScript3 SD card with SP5873 -1.
3. If the machine is on, turn off the main power switch.
4. Disconnect the network cable.
6. Turn the operation switch and main power switch off.
8. Insert the SD card into SD card Slot 1.
9. Reconnect the network cable.
11. Do SP5878-001 and push [EXECUTE].
SM 1-181 D059/D060/D061
MFP Options
12. Go out of the SP mode.
13. Turn the operation switch off, then turn the main power switch off.
14. Turn on the machine power.
15. Do SP5990-5 to print an SMC report.
16. Make sure the ROM number and firmware version in area [a] of the diagnostic report
are the same as those in area [b].
17. Area [a]: “ROM Number/Firmware Version” – “HDD Format Option”
18. Area [b]: “Loading Program” - “GW4a_zoffyx”
“ROM No. / Firmware

Diagnostic Report: “Loading Program” [b]
Version” [a]
HDD Format Option: GW4a_zoffyx:

DataOverwriteSecurity Unit
D3775902A / 1.01x D3775902A / 1.01x
19. The same two numbers must be listed in both sections of the SMC report
If the numbers are not identical, this means the option was not installed correctly.
20. Confirm that the label on the box of the DOS option says "H".
21. Do the Data Overwrite Security unit installation again.
22. Turn "Auto Erase Memory Setting" on:
[User Tools]> "System Settings"> "Administrator Tools"> "Auto Erase Memory
Setting"> "On"
23. Exit User Tools.
24. Check the display and make sure that the overwrite erase icon [A] is displayed.
25. Make a Sample Copy.

26. Check the overwrite erase icon.
27. The icon [B]: This icon is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten, and blinks
during overwriting.
D059/D060/D061 1-182 SM
MFP Options
Installation
28. The icon [C]: This icon is lit when there is no temporary data to be overwritten.
1.19.8 BROWSER UNIT TYPE E (D430-05)

Accessories
1. Browser Unit D430 SD Card 1
Installation
3. Insert the SD card into SD card Slot 1.
4. Pushing in the SD Card also releases it for removal.

7. Turn the machine on.
8. Push [User Tools].
9. Push [Login/Logout] on the operation panel
10. Login with the administrator user name and password.
11. Touch "Extended Feature Settings".
12. Touch "Extended Feature Settings" again.
13. Touch "SD Card".
14. Touch the "Browser" line.
15. Under "Install to:" touch "Machine HDD" and touch "Next"
16. When you see "Ready to Install" check the information on the screen to confirm you
previous selection.
17. Touch "OK". You will see "Installing…" then "Completed".
18. Touch "Exit" twice to return to the copy screen.
20. Replace the 6th key slot cover with the "Other Function" key cover.
22. After the Copy screen appears, wait 30 sec. then press the "Other Function" key.
23. When you see this message: "The MFP Browser was successfully installed", switch the
machine off and remove the SD card.
SM 1-183 D059/D060/D061
MFP Options
1.19.9 VM CARD TYPE J (D463-01)

Accessories
1. VM Card B861 SD Card 1
2. Decal 1
Installation
2. Remove the SD card slot cover.
3. Insert the SD card into Slot 2.
4. Pushing in the SD Card releases it for removal.

7. Switch the machine on. The installation will start automatically.
8. The installation will take 5 to 10 minutes.

9. Replace the sixth key-slot cover with the “Other function” key.
10. Wait five minutes, and then press the “Other function” key. You will hear two beeps.
11. If the screen does not change, this means the installation is not finished yet. Wait a few
more minutes and then press the “Other function” key again.
12. When the installation is finished, the following screen will appear:
13. Set the heap size and stack size for the application.
14. Install the application using the installation procedure provided with the application.
D059/D060/D061 1-184 SM
MFP Options
Installation
1.19.10 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER TYPE C (D377-04)
Accessories
1. File Format Converter (MLB: Media Link Board) 1
Installation
2. Remove the cover of Slot A ( x 2).
3. Insert the file format converter board into Slot A and fasten it with the screws.
5. Set SP5836-3 to “1” to enable the print backup feature.
6. Confirm or set the following SP codes with the values in the table listed below.
SP No. Setting SP No. Setting
5-836-1 1 5-836-73 0
5-836-2 0 5-836-85 1
5-836-3 1 5-836-86 2
5-836-72 0 5-836-91 50
7. Set the following SP codes according to the customer’s needs.
SP No. Setting Comment
Selects JPEG2000 file format for documents copied from

the document server to Palm2.
2
Note: Files backed up to Palm2 in J2K format cannot be
SP5-836-94 edited by other software applications.
Selects the TIFF file format for documents copied from the
0 document server to Palm2.
Note: Select this so the backed up files can be used with
SM 1-185 D059/D060/D061
MFP Options
SP No. Setting Comment
other software applications (editing, OCR, etc.) with only

slight loss in image quality.
Applies dot correction and eliminates ghost images

transferred from the back sides of double-sided originals
when files are copied to Palm2. This selection also reduces
1 the size of the file.
Note: This function is applied to both J2K and TIFF files and
is particularly useful for copying large J2K documents
SP-5836-98 quickly with only a slight loss in image quality.
Does not apply the features of the “1” setting when files are
copied to Palm2.
Note: This setting preserves the quality of the original
0
image, especially with J2K files, but also requires more time
for copying and requires more disk space to store the larger
files.
D059/D060/D061 1-186 SM
MFP Options
Installation
1.19.11 IEEE802.11A/G INTERFACE UNIT TYPE J (377-01)
Accessories
Description Qty
1. Wireless LAN PCB (GW-WLAN) 1
2. Card (GW-WLAN) 1
3. Wireless LAN Instructions 1
1. Remove the cover of Slot A [A] ( x 2).

2. Touch a metal surface to discharge any static electricity from your hands.
3. Put the interface board [B] in Slot A.
4. Confirm that the board is inserted completely, then fasten it ( x 2).
5. Pull the antennas away from machine and make sure that they are not tangled.
6. Look at the markings on the antenna bracket.
7. ANT1. Antenna 1 transmits and receives. The ferrite core on the Antenna 1 cable is
black.) It must be installed on the left rear corner of the main machine where it will not
be obstructed by the operation panel.
8. ANT2. Antenna 2 only receives. It is installed on the right rear corner of the machine.
9. Attach ANT1 [C] to the left rear corner.
10. Attach ANT2 [D] to the right rear corner.
11. Route the cables and use the clamps to attach them as shown.
SP Mode Settings for 802.11a/g Wireless LAN

The following SP commands can be set for 802.11a/g
SM 1-187 D059/D060/D061
MFP Options
12. Go into the SP mode
13. Touch "Copy SP" on the touch-panel to open the SP command selection screen.
14. Do SP5840-11.
SP No. Name Function
5840 011 WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00).
D059/D060/D061 1-188 SM
MFP Options
Installation
1.19.12 BLUETOOTH INTERFACE UNIT TYPE 3245 (B826-17)
Accessories
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories.
1. Bluetooth card 1
2. Bluetooth card cover 1
3. Bluetooth board 1
4. Bluetooth card adapter 1
Installation

2. Remove the cover of Slot A [A] ( x2).
3. Touch a metal surface to discharge any static charge from your hands.
4. With both labels facing up, insert the Bluetooth card [B] into the adapter [C].
5. With the labels facing down, insert the adapter [C] into the Bluetooth board [D].
6. Insert the interface board (with card and adapter inserted) into Slot B2.
7. Attach the card cover [E] (used to prevent static electricity).
8. Confirm that Bluetooth is installed correctly:
SM 1-189 D059/D060/D061
MFP Options
User Tools> Printer Features> List/Test Print> Configuration Page
1.19.13 GIGABIT ETHERNET TYPE B (D377-21)

Accessories
1. Gigabit Ethernet B381 1
2. Ferrite Core (not used for D059/D060/D061) 1

2. Remove the cover Slot A ( x 2).
3. Insert the Gigabit Ethernet Board [B] into Slot A and fasten it with the screws.
4. Print a configuration page to confirm that the machine recognizes the installed board
for USB2.0:
User Tools > Printer Features > List/Test Print > Configuration Page
D059/D060/D061 1-190 SM
MFP Options
Installation
1.19.14 COPY DATA SECURITY UNIT TYPE F (B829-07)
Accessories
1. Copy Data Security Unit Type F (B829-07) 1
2. Screws 5
3. FFC 1
4. Harness Clamp 1
5. Harness 1
1. For this installation you need only items (1) and (2) ( x2).
Installation
Board Attachment
SM 1-191 D059/D060/D061
MFP Options
1. Remove cover [A] ( x5).
2. The board connector is at [A] to the left of the HDD unit [B].
3. Attach the board [C] to the connector and fasten ( x2).
Do the Setup Procedure
5. Login in as the System Administrator.
6. Push [User Tools].
7. Touch "System Settings".
8. Touch "Administrator Tools".
9. Touch next 2 or 3 times until you see "Data Security for Copying".
10. Touch "ON".
11. Touch "OK" to enable the setting.
12. Before removing the ICIB-2 board, repeat the setup procedure above and set "Data
Security for Copying" to "OFF".
13. The machine will issue an SC error if the machine is powered on with the ICIB-2
removed and the "Data Security for Copying" feature set to "ON".
D059/D060/D061 1-192 SM
MFP Options
Installation
1.19.15 HDD ENCRYPTION UNIT TYPE A (D377-16)
Accessories
1. SD Card 1
Before You Begin the Procedure

1. Make sure that the following settings are not at the factory default settings:
2. Supervisor login password
3. Administrator login name
4. Administrator login password
5. These settings must be set up by the customer before the encryption option can be
installed.
6. Confirm that "Admin. Authentication" is on:
Management"> "Admin. Authentication"> "On"
If this setting is "Off" tell the customer that this setting must be "On" before you can do
the installation procedure.
7. Confirm that "Administrator Tools" is selected and enabled:
Management"> "Available Settings
8. "Available Settings" is not displayed until "Admin. Authentication" is switched on.

If this setting is not selected tell the customer that this setting must be selected before
you can do the installation procedure.
SM 1-193 D059/D060/D061
MFP Options
Seal Check and Removal
1. You must check the box seals to make sure that they were not removed after the items
were sealed in the box at the factory before you do the installation.
2. Check the box seals [A] on each corner of the box.
3. Make sure that a tape is attached to each corner.
4. The surfaces of the tapes must be blank. If you see "VOID" on the tapes, do not install
the components in the box.
5. If the surfaces of the tapes do not show "VOID", remove them from the corners of the
box.
6. You can see the "VOID" marks [B] when you remove each seal. In this condition, they
cannot be attached to the box again.
Installation Procedure
2. Insert the SD in SD Slot 1.
5. Select SP5878-2 (Option Setup – Encryption Option), and then touch [Execute].
6. Turn off the main power switch.
7. Remove the SD card.
8. Attach the slot cover [A] ( x 1).
D059/D060/D061 1-194 SM
MFP Options
Installation
Recovery from a Device Problem
Restoring the encryption key

When replacing the controller board for a model in which the HDD encryption unit has been
installed, updating the encryption key is required.
1. Prepare an SD card which is initialized.
2. Make the "restore_key" folder in the SD card.
3. Make an "nvram_key.txt" file in the "restore_key" folder in the SD card.
4. Ask an administrator to input the encryption key (this has been printed out earlier by the
user) into the "nvram_key.txt" file.
5. Remove only the HDD unit.
7. Confirm that the prompt on the LCD tells you to install the SD card (storing the
encryption key) in the machine.
9. Insert the SD card that contains the encryption key into slot 2.
10. Turn on the main power switch, and the machine automatically restores the encryption
key in the flash memory on the controller board.
11. Turn off the main power switch after the machine has returned to normal status.
12. Remove the SD card from slot 2.
13. Reinstall the HDD unit.
SM 1-195 D059/D060/D061
MFP Options
Clearing the NVRAM

When replacing the controller board for a model in which the HDD encryption unit has been
installed and a customer has lost the encryption key, clearing the NVRAM is required to
recover the HDD encryption unit.
1. Prepare an SD card which is initialized.
2. Make the "restore_key" folder in the SD card.
3. Make an "nvram_key.txt" file in the "restore_key" folder in the SD card.
4. Input "nvclear" into the "nvram_key.txt" file.
6. Confirm that the prompt on the LCD tells you to install the SD card (storing the
encryption key) in the machine.
8. Insert the SD card that contains "nvclear" into slot 2.
9. Turn on the main power switch, and the machine automatically restores the encryption
key in the flash memory on the controller board.
10. Turn off the main power switch after the machine has returned to normal status.
11. Remove the SD card from slot 2.
13. Initialize the NVRAM (SP5801-1) and HDD unit (SP5832-1) with SP mode.
14. The user must enable the HDD encryption unit with a user tool.
D059/D060/D061 1-196 SM
MFP Options
Installation
1.19.16 IPDS UNIT TYPE 1357 EX (451-08)
Accessories:
1. IPDS Emulation SD Card 1
2. Decal 1
Important: Only one slot (C2) is available for SD cards that contain applications. If you
want to use more than one application, merge all applications into one SD card
(SP5873-001).
Installation
1. Check the software version.
2. Make sure the following versions are installed:
3. Operation Panel
NA: D0591521B / Ver1.01 or later
EU: D0591522B / Ver1.01 or later
4. System/ Copy
5. D0595552C / Ver1.01.1 or later
6. NCS
7. D0595553C / Ver8.58.1 or later
8. Printer
9. D4515521C / Ver1.02 or later
10. D0595554B / Ver1.03 or later
11. If necessary, update the firmware to the version(s) listed above.
12. Turn OFF the main switch.
SM 1-197 D059/D060/D061
MFP Options
14. Insert the IPDS SD Card [A] into Slot C2.

15. NOTE: Pushing in the SD Card releases it for removal. Make sure the SD Card is
inserted and locked in place. If it is partially out of the slot, push it in gently until it locks
in place.
16. Turn ON the main switch.
17. Do the following setting “A” or “B” to enable the IPDS function.
18. A. [Enable the IPDS function via telnet]
19. 1. Connect the machine via telnet.
20. 2. Execute the following commands:
21. msh> set ipds up
22. ***If you want to stop the function.
23. msh> set ipds down
24. B. [Enable the IPDS option via WebImageMonitor]
25. 1. Log in to WebImageMonitor.
26. 2. Change the setting to enable IPDS.
D059/D060/D061 1-198 SM
Installation
⇒ 1.19.17 COPIER CONNECTION KIT (B328)
Accessories
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list:
1. Connection PCB 2
2. Power Repeater Cable 2
3. Interface Cable 1394 3
4. Repeater Hub 1394 2
5. Ferrite Core 1
6. "Other Function" Keytops: Short (NA, EU 1 ea.) 2
"Printer/Other Function" Keytops (NA, EU 1 ea.) Not used for

7. 2
this model
"Other Function" Keytops: Long (NA, EU 1 ea.) Not used for

8. 2
this model
SM 1-199 D059/D060/D061
Preparation
Before you begin the installation procedure, you must first:
Determine the distance between the machines to be connected.
Determine whether the printer/scanner option is installed on the machines.
Measure the distance between the machines, then decide how many cables and repeater
hubs are required.
Distance Power Repeater Hubs Interface Cables
Up to 4.5 m
None 1
(14.8 ft.)
4.5 to 9.0 m
1 2
(14.8 to 29.5 ft)
9.0 to 13.5 m
2 3
(29.5 to 112.5 ft.)
Two sets of keytops (2 per set, 1 for NA, 1 for EU) are provided for each machine, but you
need to install only one keytop on each machine.
Install the key labeled “Other Function” (or its equivalent symbol keytop for EU) on a
machine without the printer/scanner option.
Installation Procedure
Switch the machine OFF and unplug the machine before starting the following
procedure.
D059/D060/D061 1-200 SM
Installation
1. Switch the main power switch OFF.
2. Remove the controller box upper cover ( x5).
3. Remove the cover [A] from slot B ( x2).
4. Align the PCB [B] with the bottom groove, and push the connection PCB into the slot.
Make sure that the edge of the PCB is in the groove before you push the card
into the machine.
5. Fasten the PCB with the attached screws.
6. Connect the power repeater cable [C] to the mother board at CN149.
7. Connect the other end of the power repeater cable the connection PCB [B].
8. Re-attach the controller box upper cover ( x5).
9. Repeat Steps 1 to 8 to install the connection PCB on the slave machine.
10. Insert one end of the interface cable [D] to the connection PCB inserted in slot B.
11. If additional interface cables are required, connect the cables [E] with the repeater
hubs [F].
12. Attach the ferrite core [G] to the interface cable [D].
SM 1-201 D059/D060/D061
13. On the operation panel of the both machines, remove the right-bottom cover [A] (or
Printer key).
14. Install an appropriate key for each machine:
Attach the “Other Function” key [B] (or its equivalent symbol keytop for EU) if the
printer/scanner is not installed in the machine.
15. Attach the other end of the connection cable to the connection PCB installed in the
other machine.
D059/D060/D061 1-202 SM
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
P a ge Date A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
None
PM Parts
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2.1 PM PARTS
Maintenance
Preventive
2.1.1 PM COUNTER
The PM Counter main menu and submenu allows you to review the PM counts for both
units and individual components.
Displaying the PM Counter

Enter the SP mode.
Touch [PM Counter].
All PM Parts List. Displays all PM items (all PM items, not only PM units). Lists all PM
items regardless of PM yield indicator settings.
Parts list for PM yield indicator. Displays on the items with their PM yield indicator
settings set to "Yes".
SM 2-1 D059/D060/D061
PM Parts
Clear all PM settings. Resets all PM counter settings to "0" at the same time. PM items
can be reset one by one with the [Clear] button.
Counter list print out. Prints the PM counter on paper.
PM Parts Screen Details

All PM Parts list: Main Menu
The "All PM Parts list" displays all PM units and individual items. This list shows all PM
items, regardless of their "PM yield indicator settings".
[A]: Number buttons. Pressing a number button opens a submenu.

[B]: Descriptions. The # mark denotes a "unit" (not individual item).
[C]: PM yield buttons. Function is the same as the "PM yield indicator settings" button.
[D]: Current PM counter value.
[E]: Target PM interval. This can be changed by pressing a number button [A].
[F]: PM counter clear button. Function is the same as the [Clear current counter] button.
Number Button Submenu

Press any number button to open the submenu for a part. In the example below, the
number button [001] #Development Unit was pressed.
D059/D060/D061 2-2 SM
PM Parts
[A]
Maintenance
Preventive
[A]: Clear current counter. Press to reset the selected PM counter (in this example 001
#Development Unit) to "0". You can also clear the settings by pressing the [Clear] button on
the right side of the PM Counter Main Menu ([F] in the previous section).
[B]: Change target yield. Press the change the target PM yield. To change the setting:
Press [Change target yield]
Enter the number for the new target with the 10-key pad.
Press [#] on the operation panel.
[C]: PM yield indicator settings. [Yes] is the default. Press [No] to remove the current item
from the "Parts list for PM yield indicator".
When set to "Yes", items marked with the # mark (# = a unit) will not have their
individual items displayed automatically in the "Parts list for PM yield indicator list".
When set to "No", items marked with the # mark (# = a unit) only the individual
components will appear in the list (the units will not appear).
[D]: PM counter history. This is a summary of the most recent counts
Latest 1. The latest PM count since the unit (or part) was replaced.
Latest 2. The previous PM count since the unit (or part) was replaced.
Latest 3. The 2nd previous PM count since the unit (or part) was replaced.
Parts list for PM Yield Indicator

This list shows the PM Parts Main Menu with only items set to "Yes" displayed.
SM 2-3 D059/D060/D061
PM Parts
Note the following:

The # mark denotes a unit.
Items without the # (for example, 065 ITB) denote individual components.
An asterisk will appear in the Exceed column [A] to show items that have exceeded
their target PM yields.
2.1.2 PM COUNTERS
Accessing the PM Counters
Each PM part has a counter which counts up at the appropriate time. (For example, the
counter for the hot roller counts up every copy, and the counter for a feed roller counts up
when paper is fed from the corresponding tray.) These counters should be used as
references for part replacement timing.
Enter the SP mode.
D059/D060/D061 2-4 SM
PM Parts
Press [PM Counter] on the display.
The following menu appears on the display.
Maintenance
Preventive
All PM Parts List
Displays all the counters for PM parts.
On this screen, the current counter and the target yield of each PM part can be checked.
Additionally, the PM yield indicator setting can be changed. To change the setting press
[Yes/No] key in the "PM yield" column.
When "Parts list for PM yield" is selected in the parts replacement menu, only the parts with
[Yes] in the "PM yield" are listed.
To clear a counter, press [Clear] on the display. The following appears.
SM 2-5 D059/D060/D061
PM Parts
Then press [Yes] to clear the counter.

If one of the keys in the "No" column is pressed, the following appears on the display.
On this screen, the records of the last three part replacements are displayed. When 'Clear
current counter' is pressed, the current counter is cleared, the current counter is
overwritten to "Latest 1", the Latest 1 counter is overwritten to "Latest 2", and the Latest 2
counter is overwritten to "Latest 3".
Additionally, the target yield can be changed on this screen. To change the target yield
setting, do the following:
Press [Change target yield] on the screen.
Input the target yield using the ten-key pad.
Press the # key.
D059/D060/D061 2-6 SM
PM Parts
Parts List for PM Yield Indicator
Maintenance
Preventive
On this screen, only the parts selected in the "All PM parts list" screen are displayed.
Normally, the PM parts counters should be checked on this screen.
If the current counter exceeds the target yield, there is a * mark in the "Exceed" column.
Each counter can also be cleared on this screen. To clear all counters on this screen at
once, see ‘Counter Clear for Parts Exceeding Target Yield’ on the next page.
Parts Exceeding Target Yield

Only the parts whose counters are exceeding the target yield are displayed. If none of the
PM counters is exceeding the target yield, this item cannot be selected from the parts
replacement menu.
Counter Clear for Parts Exceeding Target Yield

Clears all the counters which are exceeding the target yield. When this item is selected, the
following appears on the display.
SM 2-7 D059/D060/D061
PM Parts
Press [Yes] to clear the counters.
Clear All PM Settings

Clears all the PM counters and returns all the settings (PM parts list and target yield) to the
defaults. When this item is selected, the following appears.
Press [Yes] to clear the settings.
Counter List Print Out

Prints a list of all the PM part counters. When this item is selected, the following appears on
the display.
D059/D060/D061 2-8 SM
PM Parts
Maintenance
Preventive
Press [Print] to print out the counter list.
SM 2-9 D059/D060/D061
PM Tables: Main
2.2 PM TABLES: MAIN
The amounts mentioned (K=1,000) as the PM interval indicate the number of prints or
copies unless stated otherwise. These numbers are based on the PM counter.
Symbol Key for PM Tables
I: Inspect. Clean, replace, or lubricate as needed.
A: Adjust
C: Cleaning required.
R: Replacement required.
L: Lubrication required.
Exp: Expected service life.
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before performing any
procedure in this section. Laser beams can seriously damage the eyes.
D059/D060/D061 2-10 SM
PM Tables: Main
2.2.1 MAIN MACHINE PM PARTS
OPTICS 500K 1000K 3000K Note
Exposure glass I R Dry cloth.
Maintenance
Preventive
1st-3rd mirrors I Optics cloth.
APS sensors I Dry cloth.
Scanner rail I Dry cloth
Optics dust filter C Blower brush.
Toner shield glass C Optics cloth.
Scanner Wire Tension Adjustment A Scanner Positioning Pin.
DEVELOPMENT 500K Exp Note
Side seals (x2) C Blower brush, dry cloth
Development Cleaning required when developer is replaced.

C
roller Use a dry cloth. *1
Cleaning required when developer is replaced.

Development
C Insert the paper dust cleaner behind the blade to
doctor blade
rub away the paper dust.
Entrance seal C
Blower brush or dry cloth
Toner hopper
I
(outside)
Gears (all) I Blower brush
SP2801 (TD Sensor Initial Setting). Before

Developer R execution, be sure to enter the Lot No. for the new
developer.
Toner collection 650K Discard the waste toner when a near end or end
bottle *1 alert is displayed.
SM 2-11 D059/D060/D061
PM Tables: Main
DEVELOPMENT 500K Exp Note
About
Toner suction
3000K Replace when near end or end alert is displayed.
bottle
*1
About
Toner suction
2500K Replace when near end or end alert is displayed.
motor
*1
*1: K count assumes copying and printing on A4 LEF with 6% test chart.
AROUND THE
500K 550K 1100K Exp
DRUM
Side seals I Blower brush, dry cloth
Conductivity check.
Ground plate screw I
Alcohol or water
Drum dust filter C Blower brush
Toner filter R
Cleaning unit I
Cleaning brush
I
seal Blower brush, dry cloth
Cleaning entrance
C
seal
Replacement and
Cleaning brush R Adjustment – Around the
Drum – Cleaning Brush.
Main cleaning
R
blade
Cleaning unit filters R Two filters
Pre-transfer lamp C Dry cloth
D059/D060/D061 2-12 SM
PM Tables: Main
AROUND THE
500K 550K 1100K Exp
DRUM
ID sensor C
Maintenance
Drum potential
Preventive
C Blower brush
sensor
Quenching lamp
C Blower brush, dry cloth
shield glass
Corona wire casing C Dry cloth
Grid plate (charge) R
Charge corona wire R
Corona wire
R
cleaner (charge)
Wire cushion
R
(charge)
Pre-charge corona
R
wire
Pre-charge grid
R
plate
Drum pick-off pawls R
Transfer unit
C
entrance stay
Transfer belt R
Transfer belt bias

C Blower brush
brush
Transfer belt and

Replace at the same time as
bias roller cleaning R
the transfer belt
blades
SM 2-13 D059/D060/D061
PM Tables: Main
AROUND THE
500K 550K 1100K Exp
DRUM
Rear casing guide C Dry cloth
Blower brush when transfer

Exit bias plate C
belt is replaced.
Belt drive roller C Alcohol, when transfer belt

is replaced.
Belt roller C
Alcohol, when transfer belt

is replaced. Apply
Transfer bias roller C
conductive grease to
electrical contacts.
Cleaning when Transfer belt

Cleaning bias roller C
cleaning blade is replaced
Ozone filter 15000K
Carrier catcher I Dry cloth
FUSING UNIT 500K 700K 750K
Pressure roller, cleaning

I Inspect only
roller bearings
Fusing lamps (x3) I Inspect only
Dry cloth (water or

Pressure roller cleaning
C alcohol can also be
roller
used if necessary)
Fusing entrance guide

C Water or alcohol
plate (lower)
NA R Replacement and
Fusing cleaning fabric
Adjustment – Fusing
EU/ASIA R
D059/D060/D061 2-14 SM
PM Tables: Main
NA R Unit – Fusing
Fabric pressure roller
Cleaning Unit
EU/ASIA R
Maintenance
Preventive
NA R
Supply roller stopper
EU/ASIA R
Hot roller R
Dry cloth
Cleaning required
when fusing cleaning
Hot roller strippers R
fabric is replaced.
Should be replaced
with hot roller.
Hot roller ball bearings I Inspect only
When replacing hot

roller, lubricate with
Hot roller bushings I Barrierta 55L or
S552R on the
bushings.
Lubricate with
Grease Barrierta –
Hot roller gears C/L
JFE5 5/2
(A2579300)
Lubricate with
Barrierta 55L or
Pressure roller R
S552R on the
bushings.
Pressure roller ball

I
bearings
Pressure roller bushings I Inspect only
SM 2-15 D059/D060/D061
PM Tables: Main
Pressure roller strippers I Dry cloth
Fusing exit roller I Water, alcohol
Fusing exit guide plates

I
(upper, lower) Dry cloth wrapped
around a metal scale
Cooling entrance guide
I
plate
D059/D060/D061 2-16 SM
PM Tables: Main
Exit Roller C
Maintenance
Vertical Relay
Preventive
C
Roller-Duplex
Vertical Relay Roller C
Horizontal Exit Roller C
Transport Roller
Driven :Horizontal Guide C
Dry cloth
plate
Transport
Roller-Driven :Entrance C
Guide
Transport
Roller-Driven :Guide C
Plate-Exit
Cooling Transport Belt C
Discharge Brush :Cooling

I
Transport Belt Blower Brush
Discharge Brush :Entrance I
Discharge Brush :Exit

I
Guide Plate
Job Time Sensor I

Blower Brush
Exit Sensor I
Drive Shaft C
Dry Cloth
Cooling pipe C
Exit Motor C Grease
SM 2-17 D059/D060/D061
PM Tables: Main
Barrierta-JFE 5 5/2
PAPER FEED 500K 1000K Note
Paper feed rollers x3 R
Pick-up rollers x3 R Replace together.
Separation rollers x3 R
Grip rollers C Damp cloth
Relay rollers C Damp cloth
Paper feed guide plate I Damp cloth
Upper and lower registration rollers C Damp cloth
Registration sensor C Blower brush
Relay sensor C Blower brush
Paper dust remover C Remove paper dust.
Paper feed sensors C Blower brush
DUPLEX UNIT 500K Note
Transport rollers C
Feed rollers C
Reverse transport roller C

Damp cloth
Reverse feed roller C
Inverter feed rollers C
Inverter transport rollers C
Entrance sensor C Blower brush
D059/D060/D061 2-18 SM
PM Tables: Main
DUPLEX UNIT 500K Note
Anti-static brush I
Blower brush, inspect feeler

Duplex inverter sensor C
Maintenance
movement.
Preventive
Duplex transport sensor C Blower brush
Horizontal transport feed roller (resin

C Damp cloth
roller)
GW CONTROLLER 500K
Controller filter C Blower brush
PSU 500K
PSU filter C Blower brush
Exterior 500K
Heat pipe cooling fan suction duct C Blower brush
OTHERS 1 Year
Test the operation of the two breaker switches (main body,

Breaker switches I
z-folder) once every year.
ADF
The PM interval is for the number of originals that have been fed.
80K 120K 140K Note
Transport belt R Clean with damp cloth, or alcohol
Feed belt R
SM 2-19 D059/D060/D061
PM Tables: Main
80K 120K 140K Note
Separation roller R
Pick-up roller R
Sensors I I Blower brush
Drive gears I I Lubricate with a very small amount of G501.
D059/D060/D061 2-20 SM
PM Tables: Options
2.3 PM TABLES: OPTIONS
2.3.1 1. LCIT RT5030 (D452-17)

The PM interval is for the number of sheets that have been fed.
Maintenance
Preventive
Part 500K 1000K Note
Transport guide plate IC
Grip rollers (drive, idle rollers) IC
Paper feed rollers x3 IC R Clean with damp, clean

cloth
Pick-up rollers x3 IC R
Separation rollers x3 IC R
CIS IC IC
Part 1000K 3000K 5000K Notes
Pickup Solenoids IR 4th, 5th, 6th Tray
Separation Solenoids IR 4th, 5th, 6th Tray
Lift Motors IR 4th, 5th Tray
Lift Motor IR 6th Tray
Inspect the solenoids and motors.

Display the PM Counters for these solenoids and motors.
Replace if "Target" has been exceeded.
SM 2-21 D059/D060/D061
PM Tables: Options
2.3.2 2. LCIT RT5040 (D453-17)

Transport rollers IC
Clean with
Pick-up rollers (4th, 5th, 6th tray) IC IR damp, clean
cloth
Paper feed roller (4th, 5th, 6th tray) IC IR
Separation rollers (4th, 5th, 6th tray) IC IR
CIS IC IC
At 1000K, display the PM Counts for the pick-up, feed, and separation rollers.
2.3.3 3. MULTI-BYPASS TRAY (B833)

Pick-up roller IC IR
Paper feed roller IC IR
Separation roller IC IR
At 1000K, display the PM Counts for the pick-up, feed, and separation rollers.
D059/D060/D061 2-22 SM
PM Tables: Options
2.3.4 4. DECURL UNIT DU5000 (D457-17)
Part 500K Note
Maintenance
Preventive
De-curler rollers (drive, idle roller IC Clean with damp (alcohol or
water) cloth
Transport rollers (drive, idle roller) IC
Purge tray paper sensors (x3) IC
2.3.5 5. PERFECT BINDER/INSERTER (D391)
SM 2-23 D059/D060/D061
PM Tables: Options
No. Area
1 Inserter Unit
2 Vertical Path (Covers from Inserter)
3 Horizontal Paper Path
4 Signature Path
5 Stacking Tray
6 Main Grip Unit
7 Gluing Unit
8 Cover Registration Unit
9 Signature Rotation Unit
10 Trimming Unit
11 Trimming Buffer Unit
12 Trimmings Box
13 Book Buffer
14 Book Output
D059/D060/D061 2-24 SM
PM Tables: Options
Inserter Unit
Part Clean PM Comments
Maintenance
Feed Roller 40 K sheets 100 K sheets Spurious noise, feed jams
Preventive
1,000 K 1,000 K
Magnetic Clutch Cover skews, jams
sheets sheets
Pickup Roller 40 K sheets 100 K sheets Feed slippage, feed jams
Spurious noise, double

Separation Roller 40 K sheets 100 K sheets
feeds
Separation Roller Torque 1,000 K Spurious noise, double

Limiter sheets feeds
Skew
Cover Unit Drive Roller 1 EM
Predicted: 30,000 K Sheets
Skew
Cover Unit Drive Roller 2 EM
Predicted: 30,000 K Sheets
SM 2-25 D059/D060/D061
PM Tables: Options
Horizontal Paper Path
Interval
Part Comments
EM Predicted Clean
Anti-Static Brush: Cover, signature misaligned due to

2,000 K
Horizontal Path: EM large amount of static charge on
sheets
Small cover
Drawer Harness 20 K Book detected in tray, book

EM
(Female Connector) books stacking tray error
Drawer Harness 20 K Book detected in tray, book

EM
(Male Connector) books stacking tray error
30,000 K 1,000 K Jam, skew due to deterioration in

Entrance Roller EM
sheets sheets feed capability
Horizontal Exit 30,000 K 1,000 K Jam, skew due to deterioration in

EM
Roller 1 sheets sheets feed capability
Horizontal Exit 30,000 K 1,000 K Jam, skew due to deterioration in

EM
Horizontal Transport 30,000 K 1,000 K Jam, skew due to deterioration in

EM

EM

EM

EM

EM
Relay Reflective Clean 200 K 200 K Jams, sensor adjustment error (if
D059/D060/D061 2-26 SM
PM Tables: Options
Interval
Part Comments
EM Predicted Clean
Sensor Mirrors: sheets sheets not cleaned)
Maintenance
Large
Preventive
1,000 K 1,000 K Pressure on paper becomes loose,
Ripple Rollers EM
sheets sheets paper cannot exit
Signature Path
Part Interval Predicted Comments
Due to large amount of discharge, excessive

Anti-Static Brush 2,000 K
EM amount of spill around trimmer unit. Poor
1: Signature Path sheets
stacking in stacking tray.
Due to large amount of discharge, excessive

Anti-Static Brush 2,000 K
EM amount of spill around trimmer unit. Poor
2: Signature Path sheets
stacking in stacking tray.
SM 2-27 D059/D060/D061
PM Tables: Options
Stacking Tray
Part Interval Predicted Clean Comments
Trailing edge of paper does not return

Switchback 1,000 K
EM (Trailing edge does not align correctly
Roller sheets
in stacking tray)
TE Press Roller: 1,000 K

EM Stack edge does not align correctly
Large sheets
TE Press Roller: 1,000 K

EM Stack edge does not align correctly
Small sheets
15,000 K Jogger motor error, signature stack

Jogger Motors EM
sheets does not align correctly
Anti-Static Due to large amount of discharge,

2,000 K
Brush: Stacking EM excessive amount of spill around
sheets
Tray trimmer unit Poor stacking
Rollers: 1,000 K Jam, skew due to deterioration in feed

Clean
Stacking Tray sheets capability
Main Grip Unit
Part Interval Predicted Replace Comments
Main Grip 100 K Main grip motor error, PCB damaged

EM
Motors signatures (blown fuse)
Signature thickness sensor error.

Signature
50 K Use the Service Board DIP switches
Thickness PM
signatures to adjust the signature thickness for
Sensor
25 mm.
D059/D060/D061 2-28 SM
PM Tables: Options
Gluing Unit
Part PM Comments
Glue Vat Unit Heater 2,000 hours Heater error, warm-up time not within specification
Maintenance
Preventive
Cover Registration Unit
Part Interval Predicted
1,000 K Poor paper return, causes jams,

Buffer Roller EM
sheets skewing
Anti-Static Brush: Cover 2,000 K Increase in amount of trimmings

EM
Registration: Horizontal Path sheets spillover, trimming unit
Signature Rotation Unit
Part Interval Predicted Replace
20 K Ball screw cannot

Ball Screw Unit EM
times apply pressure
Torque Diode (Signature 50 K

PM Inaccurate cutting
Rotation Unit for Trimming) signatures
Trimming Unit
Part Interval Comments
Blade PM Set the machine in Replacement Mode for

replacement.
5.5 K cuts
Blade Cradle PM Note: Blade and cradle are always
replaced together.
SM 2-29 D059/D060/D061
PM Tables: Options
Part Interval Comments
Signature Exit 100 K Jams, sensor adjustment error (if not

Clean
Sensors (E/R) signatures cleaned)
Trimmings Buffer 50 K
PM
Motor signatures
Set the machine in Replacement Mode for

Trimmings Catcher PM 40 K cuts
replacement.
Other
Part Interval Predicted
Deodorization Filters EM 1,000 K sheets Glue odor noticeable
Deodorization Filters (Gluing Unit) EM 1,000 K sheets Glue odor noticeable
2.3.6 6. COVER INTERPOSER TRAY CI5000 (B835)

Part 60K As Needed Note
Drive rollers C
Idle rollers C
Feed belt R Dry cloth
Separation roller R
Pick-up roller R
Sensors C Blower brush.
Lubricate with very small amount

Drive gears I
of G501.
D059/D060/D061 2-30 SM
PM Tables: Options
2.3.7 7. MULTI-FOLDING UNIT FD5000 (D454)
Part PM Visit Notes
Maintenance
Rollers (drive, idle rollers) IC
Preventive
Alcohol, clean cloth
Anti-static brush IC
Shafts IC Lubricate with silicone oil if noisy.
Sensors IC Blower brush
Positioning roller IC Inspect for scratches or nicks
Fold rollers (1st, 2nd, 3rd) IC

Crease rollers (drive, idle roller) IC
2.3.8 8. RING BINDER (D392)

Periodically inspect and clean the parts listed in the table below.
Item Action
Horizontal Transport Path
Anti-static brushes Blower brush
Horizontal transport path sensors Blower brush
Drive rollers, idle rollers Damp cloth
Switchback Unit
Anti-static brushes Blower brush
Switchback area sensors Blower brush
Binder Unit
Paddle roller Blower brush
SM 2-31 D059/D060/D061
PM Tables: Options
Item Action
Transport path sensors Blower brush
2.3.9 9. HIGH CAPACITY STACKER SK5010 (D447)
Part 500K PM Visit
Rollers (drive, idle rollers) IC IC

Anti-static brush IC IC
Lubricate with silicone oil if

Shafts IC IC
noisy.
Sensors IC IC Blower brush
Sub jogger fences IC IC
Main jogger fences IC IC Alcohol, clean cloth
LE stopper IC IC
D059/D060/D061 2-32 SM
PM Tables: Options
2.3.10 10. BOOKLET FINISHER SR5020 (D434)

Main
Maintenance
Part 5000K 25000K
Preventive
Rollers (drive, idle) IC
Discharge brush IC
Lubricate with silicone oil if

Shafts IC
noisy
Jogger fences IC Tighten screws
Staple trimmings hopper IC Empty hopper
Alignment brush roller IR
Positioning roller IR See below
Drag roller (sponge)*1 IR
At 25000K, display the PM Counts for the alignment brush roller, positioning roller, and
drag sponge roller.
SM 2-33 D059/D060/D061
PM Tables: Options
Punch Unit
Part 20000K
Display PM Count for punch unit.

Punch unit IC
Staplers
Part 50000K 200000K
Corner stapler IR Display PM Count.

Replace if "Target"
Booklet Staplers (x2) IR exceeded.
2.3.11 11. TRIMMER UNIT TR5020 (D455)
Part PM Visit
Rollers (drive, idle rollers) IC

Water, clean cloth
Belts IC
Discharge brush IC Cloth, blower brush
Roller shafts Lubricate with silicone oil if noisy
Empty, make sure the operator knows how

Paper trimmings hopper IC
to empty the hopper
Replace the blade after 400K. SP7989

Trimming Blade R
(Trim Count) displays the total count.
D059/D060/D061 2-34 SM
PM Tables: Options
2.3.12 12. FINISHER SR5000 (B830)
500K 2500K 3000K Exp Note
Maintenance
Driver rollers I Alcohol, dry cloth
Preventive
Idle rollers I Alcohol, dry cloth
Discharge brush I Alcohol, dry cloth
Alignment brush
R
roller
Lubricate with Silicone or Launa oil

Bushings
if noisy.
Sensors I Blower brush.
Jogger fences I Make sure screws are tight.
500K
Staple unit Staple
Sheets
Positioning roller R
Shift positioning
R
roller
Punch Unit PU5000 B831
Exp
Punch unit B531 1 million punches
SM 2-35 D059/D060/D061
PM Tables: Options
2.3.13 LUBRICATION POINTS

Types of Grease
a Grease – KS660 – SHIN-ETSU
b Grease Barrierta – JFE 5 5/2
Transfer
No. Lubrication Point Type of Grease
1 Upper part of the bias roller terminal a
2 Rear end of the bias roller a
Fusing
No. Lubrication Point Type of Grease
3 Outer, inner surfaces of bushings b
Inner surface of both ends of the pressure roller where it

4 b
contacts the ball bearing
5 Fusing unit drive gears b
D059/D060/D061 2-36 SM
PM Tables: Options
Maintenance
Preventive
SM 2-37 D059/D060/D061
88 04/29/2010 Development Motor Unit
88 ~ 89 06/23/2010 Development Motor Unit Serial Number Information
144 08/25/2010 Updated - Reinstalling the Fusing Lamps
147 ~ 148 06/23/2010 Added Adjustment for Reducing Black Dots on the Output
154 10/21/2010 Corrected Fusing Pressure Adjustment
184 ~ 186 10/21/2010 Corrected BICU
General Cautions
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
3.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS
Do not turn off either of the power switches while any of the electrical components are
active. Doing so might cause damage to units such as the transfer belt, drum, and
development unit when they are pulled out of or put back into the main machine.
3.1.1 DRUM
Replacement
Adjustment
An organic photoconductor (OPC) drum is more sensitive to light and ammonia gas than a
selenium drum. Follow the cautions below when handling an OPC drum.
1. Never expose the drum to direct sunlight.
2. Never expose the drum to direct light of more than 1,000 Lux for more than a minute.
3. Never touch the drum surface with bare hands. When the drum surface is touched with
a finger or becomes dirty, wipe it with a dry cloth or clean it with wet cotton. Wipe with a
dry cloth after cleaning with wet cotton.
4. Never use alcohol to clean the drum; alcohol dissolves the drum surface.
5. Store the drum in a cool, dry place away from heat.
6. Take care not to scratch the drum, because the drum layer is thin and is easily
damaged.
7. Never expose the drum to corrosive gases such as ammonia gas.
8. Always keep the drum in the protective sheet when keeping the drum unit, or the drum
itself, out of the main machine. This avoids exposing it to bright light or direct sunlight,
and will protect it from light fatigue.
9. Dispose of used drums in accordance with local regulations.
10. When installing a new drum, execute SP2962 (Auto Process Control Execution).
3.1.2 DRUM UNIT

1. Before pulling out the drum unit, place a sheet of paper under the drum unit to catch
any spilt toner.
2. Make sure that the drum unit is set in position and the drum stay is secured with a
screw before the main switch is turned on. If the drum unit is loose, poor contact of the
drum connectors may cause electrical noise, resulting in unexpected malfunctions
(RAM data change is the worst case).
3. To prevent drum scratches, remove the development unit before removing drum unit.
SM 3-1 D059/D060/D061
General Cautions
3.1.3 TRANSFER BELT UNIT

1. Never touch the transfer belt surface with bare hands.
2. Take care not to scratch the transfer belt, because the surface is easily damaged.
3. Before installing the new transfer belt, clean all the rollers and the inner part of the
transfer belt with a dry cloth to prevent the belt from slipping.
3.1.4 SCANNER UNIT

1. When installing the exposure glass, make sure that the white paint is at the rear left
corner.
2. Clean the exposure glass with alcohol or glass cleaner to reduce the amount of static
electricity on the glass surface.
3. Use a cotton pad or optical cloth to clean the mirrors and lens.
4. Do not bend or crease the exposure lamp flat cable.
5. Do not disassemble the lens unit. This will put the lens and copy image out of focus.
6. Do not turn any of the CCD positioning screws. This will put the CCD out of position.
3.1.5 LASER UNIT

1. Do not loosen the screws that secure the LD drive board to the laser diode casing. This
will put the LD unit out of adjustment.
2. Do not adjust the variable resistors on the LD unit, because they are adjusted in the
factory.
3. The polygon mirror and F-theta lenses are very sensitive to dust. Do not open the
optical housing unit.
4. Do not touch the glass surface of the polygon mirror motor unit with bare hands.
5. After replacing the LD unit, do the laser beam pitch adjustment. Otherwise, an SC
condition will be generated.
3.1.6 CHARGE CORONA

1. Clean the corona wires with a dry cloth. Never use sandpaper or solvent.
2. Clean the charge corona casing with water first to remove NOx based compounds.
Then clean it with alcohol if any toner still remains on the casing.
3. Clean the end block with a blower brush first to remove toner and paper dust. Then
clean with alcohol if any toner still remains.
4. Do not touch the corona wires with bare hands. Oil stains from fingers may cause
uneven image density on copies.
D059/D060/D061 3-2 SM
General Cautions
5. Make sure that the wires are correctly between the cleaner pads and that there is no
foreign material (iron filings, etc.) on the casing.
6. When installing new corona wires, do not bend or scratch the wire surface. Doing so
may cause uneven charge. Also be sure that the corona wires are correctly positioned
in the end blocks.
7. Clean the grid plate with a blower brush (not with a dry cloth).
8. Do not touch the charge grid plate with bare hands. Also, do not bend the charge grid
plate or make any dent in it. Doing so may cause uneven charge.
3.1.7 DEVELOPMENT
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Be careful not to nick or scratch the development roller.
2. Place the development unit on a sheet of paper after removing it from the main
machine.
3. Never disassemble the development roller assembly. The position of the doctor plate is
set with special tools and instruments at the factory to ensure the proper gap between
the doctor blade and the development roller.
4. Clean the drive gears after removing used developer.
5. Dispose of used developer in accordance with local regulations.
6. Never load types of developer and toner into the development unit other than specified
for this model. Doing so will cause poor copy quality and toner scattering.
7. Immediately after installing new developer, the TD sensor initial setting procedure
should be performed with SP2801 (TD Sensor Initialization) to avoid damage to the
main machine. Do not perform the TD sensor initial setting with used developer. Do not
make any copies before doing the TD sensor initial setting.
8. When using a vacuum cleaner to clean the development unit casing, always ground
the casing with your fingers to avoid damaging the toner density sensor with static
electricity.
9. When replacing the TD sensor, replace the developer, then execute SP2801 (TD
Sensor Initialization) and SP2962 (Auto Process Control Execution).
3.1.8 CLEANING
1. When servicing the drum cleaning section, be careful not to damage the edges of the
drum cleaning blade and 2nd cleaning blade.
2. Do not touch the cleaning blade with bare hands.
3. Before disassembling the cleaning section, place a sheet of paper under it to catch any
toner falling from it.
SM 3-3 D059/D060/D061
General Cautions
3.1.9 FUSING UNIT

1. After installing the fusing thermistor, make sure that it is in contact with the hot roller
and that it is movable.
2. Be careful not to damage the edges of the hot roller strippers or their tension springs.
3. Do not touch the fusing lamp and rollers with bare hands.
4. Make sure that the fusing lamp is positioned correctly and that it does not touch the
inner surface of the hot roller.
3.1.10 PAPER FEED

1. Do not touch the surface of the pick-up, feed, and separation rollers.
2. To avoid paper misfeeds, the side fences and end fence of the paper tray must be
positioned correctly to align with the actual paper size.
3.1.11 USED TONER

1. We recommend checking the amount of used toner at every EM.
2. Dispose of used toner in accordance with local regulations. Never throw toner into an
open flame, because toner dust may ignite.
D059/D060/D061 3-4 SM
Special Tools and Lubricants
3.2 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS
3.2.1 SPECIAL TOOLS
Part No. Description
A0069104 Scanner Positioning Pin (4 pcs./set)
A2929500 Test Chart – S5S (10 pcs./set)
Replacement
Adjustment
A0299387 Digital Multimeter – FLUKE 87
B6455010 SD (Secure Digital) Card – 64 MB
G0219350 Loop Back Connector
3.2.2 LUBRICANTS
Part No. Description
A2579300 Grease Barrierta – JFE 5 5/2
52039502 Silicon Grease G-501
SM 3-5 D059/D060/D061
Common Procedures
3.3 COMMON PROCEDURES
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before attempting any
procedure in this section.
3.3.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT DRAWER
Pulling the Drawer Out
These illustrations show removal with the hex driver provided to the customer, but
the screws can be removed with any Phillips head (+) screwdriver.

2. Remove the black screws ( x 3).
3. Remove inner cover [A].
This cover functions as a duct in the ventilation path of the machine. It must
always be reinstalled.
D059/D060/D061 3-6 SM
Common Procedures
Replacement
Adjustment
4. Remove the ground plate ( x 1).
5. Gently lower Lever C1 {.

6. Remove the black screw ( x 1).
7. Rotate the black knob } clockwise and remove it.
8. Pull the purple handles toward you and remove the faceplate.
SM 3-7 D059/D060/D061
Common Procedures
9. Pull the purple handle toward you until the drawer stops.
The development unit will shift slightly to the right when you pull the drawer
out.
Use a sheet of clean paper to cover the slit in the PCU where the drum is visible.
This protects the photo-sensitive surface of the drum from overhead light and
direct sunlight.
Closing the Drawer
1. Gently and firmly push the purple handle into machine until the drawer stops and locks.
D059/D060/D061 3-8 SM
Common Procedures
2. Mount the faceplate holes over the pegs.
Replacement
Adjustment
3. Push in on each corner and edge of the faceplate to make sure that it is locked and
mounted correctly.
4. In this order:
Attach knob
Fasten screw
Gently rotate lever C1 up.
SM 3-9 D059/D060/D061
Common Procedures
5. Reattach the ground plate ( x 1).
6. Mount the inner cover.

Attach screw { first but do not tighten.
Attach the other screws , }.
Tighten all the screws.
7. Close the right front door.
D059/D060/D061 3-10 SM
Common Procedures
3.3.2 FRONT DOORS
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Open the left door [A].
2. Bracket [B] ( x 1).
3. Lift up the left door and remove it.
4. Open the right door [C].
5. Bracket [D] ( x 1).
6. Lift up the right door and remove it.
SM 3-11 D059/D060/D061
Common Procedures
3.3.3 RIGHT COVERS
1. Right upper cover [A] ( x 4).

2. Right lower cover [B] ( x 4).
D059/D060/D061 3-12 SM
Common Procedures
3.3.4 LEFT COVERS
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Disconnect the optional finisher, if it is installed.
2. If the optional finisher was installed:
Remove the front joint bracket ( x 2).
Remove the end rear joint bracket ( x 2).
3. Left upper cover [A] ( x 4)
4. Left lower cover [B] ( x 4).
SM 3-13 D059/D060/D061
Common Procedures
3.3.5 CONTROLLER BOX
Opening the Controller Box
1. Remove the screws ( x 5).

2. Swing open the controller box [A] in the direction of the arrow.
Removing the Controller Box Upper Cover
1. Remove the screws ( x 5).

2. Remove the controller box upper cover [A].
D059/D060/D061 3-14 SM
Common Procedures
Removing the Controller Box
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Open the controller box [A] ( x 5).
2. Disconnect ground wire [A] ( x1).

3. Remove plate [B] ( x2).
4. Remove plate [C] ( x2).
5. Remove sponge [D].
SM 3-15 D059/D060/D061
Common Procedures
6. Remove harness cover [A] ( x4).
7. Disconnect the three harnesses ( x3,  x6,  x8).
D059/D060/D061 3-16 SM
Common Procedures
Replacement
Adjustment
8. Lift off the following parts:
[A] Upper half of the controller box
[B] Lower half of the controller box
SM 3-17 D059/D060/D061
Common Procedures
3.3.6 PSU BOX
Opening the PSU Box

2. Swing open the PSU box [A] in the direction of the arrow.
Removing the PSU Box
1. Remove:
[A] Upper hinge cover ( x1)
[B] Lower hinge cover ( x1)
D059/D060/D061 3-18 SM
Common Procedures
Replacement
Adjustment
2. Open the PSU box [A] ( x2)
3. Disconnect ground wire [A] ( x 1).

4. Remove duct [B] ( x 2)
SM 3-19 D059/D060/D061
Common Procedures
5. Disconnect the four harnesses ( x8,  x 11).
6. Lift the PSU box [A] off its hinges.
D059/D060/D061 3-20 SM
Common Procedures
3.3.7 REAR UPPER COVER
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Rear upper cover [A] ( x4)
SM 3-21 D059/D060/D061
Document Feeder
3.4 DOCUMENT FEEDER
3.4.1 ADF COVERS
1. ADF front cover [A] ( x 2).

2. ADF rear cover [B] ( x 2).
3. Left cover [C] ( x 2,  x 2).
4. Original exit tray. ( p.3-40 "Optics Dust Filter")
5. Right cover [D] ( x 4,  x 2).
6. Upper exit cover [E] ( x 1).
D059/D060/D061 3-22 SM
Document Feeder
3.4.2 ADF ORIGINAL TRAY
Replacement
Adjustment
Original Tray
1. Remove the ADF front and rear covers.
2. Original tray [A] ( x 4).
Original Table Cover

2. Remove the original tray [A].
3. Original table cover [B] ( x 2).
Bottom Plate
2. Remove the original tray [A].
3. Bottom plate [C] ( x 1,  x 1).
SM 3-23 D059/D060/D061
Document Feeder
3.4.3 FEED UNIT AND SEPARATION ROLLER
1. Open the left cover.

2. Clip [A].
3. Remove the feed unit [B]. Pull the feed unit to the front, release the shaft at the rear,
and release the front bushing.
4. Separation roller cover [C].
5. Torque limiter [D] and separation roller [E] ( x 1).
D059/D060/D061 3-24 SM
Document Feeder
3.4.4 FEED BELT
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Feed unit ( p.3-24
2. Pick-up roller unit [A].
3. Feed belt holder [B].
The springs [C] come off the feed belt cover easily.
4. Feed belt [D].
When reinstalling the pick-up roller unit, make sure that levers [E] and [F] on the
front and rear original guides are resting on the pick-up roller unit cover.
SM 3-25 D059/D060/D061
Document Feeder
3.4.5 PICK-UP ROLLER
1. Open the left cover.

2. Feed unit ( p.3-24)
3. Snap rings [A] ( x 2).
4. Two bushings [B].
5. Pick-up roller [C].
When reinstalling the pick-up roller, make sure that the one-way clutch [D] is not
on the gear side.
D059/D060/D061 3-26 SM
Document Feeder
3.4.6 ADF SENSORS
Entrance Sensor and Length Sensor
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Left cover.
2. Guide plate [A] ( x 5).
3. Entrance sensor [B] ( x 1).
4. Length sensor bracket [C] ( x 2).
5. Length sensor [D] ( x 1).
Registration Sensor
1. ADF front cover.

2. ADF left cover.
3. Release the entrance guide [A] ( x 2).
SM 3-27 D059/D060/D061
Document Feeder
4. Release the transport belt unit [B] ( x 3).

5. Sensor bracket [C] ( x 1).
6. Registration sensor [D] ( x 1,  x 1).
Width Sensors
1. ADF front cover.

2. Feed unit. ( p.3-24
3. Stopper screw [A].
4. Guide plate [B] ( x 2).
5. Release the front end of the upper transport roller [C] (bushing x 1,  x 1).
6. Sensor bracket [D] ( x 1).
7. Width sensors [E] ( x 1 each).
D059/D060/D061 3-28 SM
Document Feeder
Exit Sensor, Inverter Sensor
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Front and rear covers.
2. Original tray. ( p.3-23)
3. Exit guide unit [A] ( x 5,  x 1).
4. Exit sensor [B] ( x 1).
When reinstalling the exit guide unit, make sure that the guide plate [C] on the
exit unit is over the exit gate [D].
5. Right cover [E]
6. Guide plate [F] ( x 3).
7. Inverter sensor [G] ( x 1).
SM 3-29 D059/D060/D061
Document Feeder
3.4.7 TRANSPORT BELT
1. ADF front cover.

2. Release the entrance guide [A] ( x 2).
3. Release the transport belt unit [B] ( x 3).
4. Fold the transport belt assembly extension [C].
5. Transport belt [D].
When installing the transport belt, make sure that the belt passes under the
upper and lower belt guide spacers [E].
6. Execute SP6009 (DF Free Run) to do an ADF free run for 3 minutes. After the free run
is finished, clean off any dust on the exposure glass.
D059/D060/D061 3-30 SM
Document Feeder
3.4.8 ADF MOTORS
Bottom Plate Motor, Pick-up Motor
Replacement
Adjustment
1. ADF rear cover.
2. Bottom plate motor [A] ( x 2,  x 1).
3. Pick-up motor [B] ( x 2,  x 1).
Feed-in, Transport, Feed-out Motors
1. ADF rear cover.

2. Feed-in motor [A] ( x 4,  x 2).
3. Connector [B]
SM 3-31 D059/D060/D061
Document Feeder
4. Fins [C]
5. Transport motor [D] ( x 4,  x 2).
6. Grounding wire [E] ( x 1).
7. Feed-out motor assembly [F] ( x 2,  x 2).
8. Feed-out motor [G] ( x 2).
D059/D060/D061 3-32 SM
Document Feeder
3.4.9 FEED-IN CLUTCH
Replacement
Adjustment
1. ADF rear cover.
2. Remove screw [A].
3. Timing belt [B].
4. Pulley [C] and bearing [D] from the feed-in drive shaft ( x 1, pin x 1).
5. Pulley [E] and bushing [F] from the pick-up roller cam shaft ( x 1, pin x 1)
6. Bearings [G] from the feed belt drive shaft ( x 1).
7. Feed-in clutch assembly [H] ( x 5,  x 1).
SM 3-33 D059/D060/D061
Document Feeder
1. Two bearings [A] from the feed-in clutch shaft ( x 1 each).

2. Pulley [B] ( x 1), pin and timing belt [C].
3. Feed-in clutch [D].
When re-installing the feed-in clutch, put the stopper screw [E] in the clutch hook.
D059/D060/D061 3-34 SM
Scanner Unit
3.5 SCANNER UNIT
3.5.1 EXPOSURE GLASS
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Left scale [A] ( x 3).
2. Rear scale [B] ( x 2). Slide in the direction of the arrow to remove.
3. Exposure glass [C].
When positioning the exposure glass for re-installation, make sure that the white
dot [D] is at the rear left corner.
3.5.2 LENS BLOCK
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before performing this
procedure. Laser beams can seriously damage the eyes.
SM 3-35 D059/D060/D061
Scanner Unit
1. Exposure glass ( p.3-35).

2. Lens cover [A] ( x 5).
3. Lens block [B] ( x 4,  x2,  x 4).
Hold the board to disconnect connectors (1), (2) (They are difficult to disconnect if
you do not hold the board.)
Disconnect the connectors from the relay board (3), (4) then remove the lens
block.
4. After reassembly, do the scanner and printer copy adjustments. ( p.3-199 "Copy
Image Adjustment: Printing/Scanning")
There are no field adjustments for the lens block.
D059/D060/D061 3-36 SM
Scanner Unit
3.5.3 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS
Turn off the main switch and unplug the machine before performing this procedure.
Laser beams can seriously damage the eyes.
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Exposure glass. ( p.3-35)
2. Lens block. ( p.3-35)
3. Original width sensor [A] ( x 1,  x 1).
4. Original length sensor 1 [B] ( x 1,  x 1).
5. Original length sensor 2 [C] ( x 1,  x 1).
6. After re-assembly, do the scanner and printer copy adjustments. ( p.3-199 "Copy
SM 3-37 D059/D060/D061
Scanner Unit
3.5.4 EXPOSURE LAMPS
1. Exposure glass. ( p.3-35).

2. Open the front door, then remove the front upper cover. ( p.3-42 "Scanner Motor")
3. Exposure lamp unit [A] ( x to ,  x 2)
4. 1st exposure lamp [B] ( x 2,  x 1,  x4).
5. 2nd exposure lamp [C] ( x 2,  x 1,  x3).
6. Exposure lamps [D] ( x1).
D059/D060/D061 3-38 SM
Scanner Unit
3.5.5 LAMP REGULATORS
Replacement
Adjustment
2. Open the front door, then remove the top front cover. ( p.3-42 "Scanner Motor")
3. Remove
[A]: Left inner cover ( x 2)
[B]: Right inner cover ( x 2)
[C]: Middle inner cover ( x 2)
[D]: Lamp regulator cover ( x 2)
[E]: Left lamp regulator ( x 2,  x 2)
[F]: Right lamp regulator ( x 2,  x 2)
SM 3-39 D059/D060/D061
Scanner Unit
3.5.6 OPTICS DUST FILTER
1. Original exit tray [A] ( x 4).

2. Optics dust filter [B].
D059/D060/D061 3-40 SM
Scanner Unit
3.5.7 SCANNER HP SENSOR
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Front upper cover ( p.3-42"Scanner Motor")
2. Left lamp regulator ( p.3-39)
3. Scanner HP sensor bracket [A] ( x 1).
4. Scanner HP sensor [B] ( x 1, Pawls x4).
SM 3-41 D059/D060/D061
Scanner Unit
Page intentionally left blank
D059/D060/D061 3-42 SM
Scanner Unit
3.5.8 SCANNER MOTOR
Replacement
Adjustment
2. Left upper cover. ( p.3-39 "Lamp Regulators").
3. Top upper cover [A] ( x 7).
4. Remove the MCU [B] cover ( x 3).
5. Scanner motor assembly [C] ( x2,  x 2,  x 3).
6. Scanner motor from the bracket [D] ( x 3).
7. After reassembly, do the copy image adjustments. ( p.3-199 "Copy Image
Adjustment: Printing/Scanning")
SM 3-43 D059/D060/D061
Scanner Unit
3.5.9 SCANNER DRIVE WIRES
Preparation
1. Remove the ADF ( x 2).

2. Original exit tray [A] ( x 4).
3. Exposure glass ( p.3-35)
4. Top front cover [B] ( x 7).
5. Top rear cover [C] ( x 7).
6. Top right cover [D] ( x 4)
7. Filter [E]
8. Bracket [F] ( x 4).
9. Scanner frame [G] ( x 12,  x1).
D059/D060/D061 3-44 SM
Scanner Unit
Front, Rear Scanner Drive Wires
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Wire tension bracket [A] ( x 1).
2. Front scanner wire bracket [B].
3. Front scanner wire.
Reinstallation
1. Scanner wire pulley [C] ( x 1).
2. While making sure of the direction, place the beads on the middle of the wire on the
pulley openings. Then wind the wire (ball side) 3 times and the other side (ring side)
once as shown . Secure the pulley with tape to keep this condition.
3. Install the pulley on the scanner drive shaft ( x 1).
4. Wind the end of the wire with the ball as shown (, , ).
5. Wind the end of the wire with the ring as shown (, , ).
6. Install the tension spring on the tension bracket, and slightly tighten the tension bracket
( x 1).
SM 3-45 D059/D060/D061
Scanner Unit
7. Install the 1st scanner and adjust the position with the positioning tools [A].
8. Secure the 1st scanner with the scanner wire bracket [B] ( x 1).
9. Tighten the tension bracket [C] and remove the tape.
10. Remove the positioning tools. After sliding the scanner to the right and left several
times, set the positioning tools to check the scanner wire bracket and the tension
bracket again.
11. Reassemble the scanner and do the scanner and copy adjustments ( pp.3-199
"Copy Image Adjustment: Printing/Scanning")
The tension of the scanner wire must be adjusted every 3000K. To do this
adjustment, set the positioning tools [A], then loosen the screw [B] and
retighten it.
D059/D060/D061 3-46 SM
Scanner Unit
3.5.10 SIB
Replacement
Adjustment
Remove: ( p.3-42 "Scanner Motor")
Original exit tray
Top right cover
Filter
Bracket
SIB [A] ( x4,  x9)
SM 3-47 D059/D060/D061
Scanner Unit
D059/D060/D061 3-48 SM
Laser Unit
3.6 LASER UNIT
This laser unit employs 8 laser beams produced by two Class III LDA with a
wavelength of 788 nm and intensity of 15 mW. Direct exposure to the eyes could
cause permanent blindness.
Before doing any replacement or adjustment of the laser unit, press the main
power switch to power the machine off then unplug the machine from the power
source. Allow the machine to cool for a few minutes. The polygon motor continues
Replacement
Adjustment
to rotate for approximately one to three minutes.
Never power on the machine with any of these components removed: 1) LD unit,
2) polygon motor cover, 3) synchronization detect sensor.
3.6.1 CAUTION DECALS

Two caution decals are provided for the laser section.
SM 3-49 D059/D060/D061
Laser Unit
3.6.2 LD UNIT
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before attempting this
procedure. Laser beams can seriously damage the eyes.
To avoid damaging the board with static electricity, never touch the printed circuit
board.
2. Lens block cover and lens block. ( p.3-35 "Lens Block")
3. Ground wire [A] ( x 1).
4. Flat film connector guide [B] ( x 3,  x 2).
5. LD cover [C] ( x 4,  x 1).
6. LD unit [D] ( x 2,  x 4).
Four spacers, each of a different colour, are placed under the LD unit in the factory
in order to do a fine positioning adjustment on the LD unit position. Before you
remove the LD unit, take a careful note of where these spacers are. When
replacing the LD unit, these spacers must be in exactly the same position.
Be sure to remove the mylar from the underside of the old LD unit and attach it to
the new one.
7. After installing the LD unit, execute SP2115 001~009 to input the pitch settings for the
main scan beams.
D059/D060/D061 3-50 SM
Laser Unit
The correct settings for these SP codes are printed on a decal attached to the
mounting bracket [C] of the LD unit.
The 7 numbers printed on the label correspond to the correct settings of the SP codes
shown in the diagram above.
Here is an example
Replacement
-10/-2/+10/-100/+0/+100/-10/
Adjustment
To enter these numbers, you would execute
SP2115 001 [*] 1 0 [#]
SP2115 002 [*] 2 [#]
SP2115 003 1 0 [#]
SP2115 004 [*] 1 0 0 [#]
SP2115 005 0 [#]
SP2115 006 1 0 0 [#]
SP2115 007 [*] 1 0 [#]
Press  to enter the minus sign.

Press  after each entry.
A key press is not required for the plus sign.
This example is for instructional purposes only. When you do this adjustment,
you must enter the numbers printed on the label attached to the LD unit.
8. Do SP2962 (Auto Process Control Execution).
9. Make some test copies and check that the magnification is correct. If not correct,
please do the printer copy adjustments. ( p.3-187 "Copy Image Adjustment:
Printing/Scanning")
SM 3-51 D059/D060/D061
Laser Unit
3.6.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR
To avoid damaging the polygon motor, switch the machine off and wait 3 minutes
to allow the motor to stop rotating before removing it.
1. Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine.
3. Lens block cover and lens block. ( p.3-36 "Lens Block")
You do not need to remove the lens block completely. Lift it gently and move it
to the right.
4. LD cover [A] ( x 4,  x 1).
5. Polygon mirror motor [B] ( x 3,  x 1).
When reinstalling, make sure that the polygon mirror opening faces the right.
Never touch the glass surface of the polygon mirror motor with bare hands.
6. After reassembly, do the scanner and printer copy adjustments. ( p.3-199 "Copy
D059/D060/D061 3-52 SM
Laser Unit
Replacement
Adjustment
SM 3-53 D059/D060/D061
Laser Unit
3.6.4 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR
1. Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine.
2. Exposure glass ( p.3-35)
3. Lens block cover and lens block. ( p.3-35 "Lens Block").
You do not need to remove the lens block completely. Lift it gently and move it
to the right.
4. Detector cover [A] ( x 1).
5. Laser synchronization detector [B] ( x 1,  x 1).
D059/D060/D061 3-54 SM
Laser Unit
Replacement
Adjustment
SM 3-55 D059/D060/D061
Around The Drum
3.7 AROUND THE DRUM
3.7.1 CLEANING UNIT, PCU, DRUM
1. Pull out the development unit drawer.

2. Remove the cleaning unit.
Raise the purple lever (1) and pull the cleaning unit to the left (2) until it
disengages the lever
Lift the unit out of the drawer
Grasp the cleaning unit by its handles as shown and lift it straight up.
3. Lift the PCU by its purple handles and remove it.
D059/D060/D061 3-56 SM
Around The Drum
Replacement
Adjustment
4. Remove the drum.
5. Cover the drum with a sheet of clean paper to protect its photosensitive surface.
If you leave the drum exposed to direct sunlight or strong overhead light, this
can cause its photosensitive surface to deteriorate and shorten its service life.
Re-installing the Drum
SM 3-57 D059/D060/D061
Around The Drum
Apply a sufficient amount of setting powder to the drum as far as the edges.
You need to only apply the powder where the drum will be exposed to the cleaning
blades.
Use clean toner if drum setting powder is not available.
Never touch the surface of the drum with bare hands.
1. Set the drum in the PCU.
2. Cover the area of the drum [A] that will be under the cleaning blades with drum setting
powder as shown above.
3. Do SP3905 (OPC drum initial setting) and SP2962 (Auto process control execution) for
the new drum.
3.7.2 PTL (PRE-TRANSFER LAMP)

1. Remove the cleaning unit, PCU, and drum ( p.3-56 "Cleaning Unit, PCU, Drum")
Wrap a protective sheet or a few sheets of paper around the drum to protect it
from light.
2. Remove the screws from both ends of the PTL holder ( x2).
3. Disconnect the PTL connector [A] and separate it from the thermistor connectors.
D059/D060/D061 3-58 SM
Around The Drum
4. Push the harnesses [A] down through the gap between the stay and mylar.
Replacement
Adjustment
5. Remove the PTL.
3.7.3 PRE-CHARGE UNIT
Remove the inner cover.

1. Pre-charge unit [A] ( x 1)
2. Grid [B] ( x 1 M4 x 6).
SM 3-59 D059/D060/D061
Around The Drum
Hold the grid carefully at both ends.

Do not touch the wire mesh and avoid bending it.
3. Front lock plate [C] (Pawls x2)
4. Front cover [D].
5. Rear lock plate [E] (Pawls x2).
6. Rear cover [F].
7. Move the wire cleaner [A] to the home position.

8. Spring [B].
9. Corona wire [C] from the hook of the rear spring [D].
D059/D060/D061 3-60 SM
Around The Drum
Always hold the wire by the eyelets on both ends.

Never touch any other part of the wire.
Handle the wire carefully to avoid bending it.
10. Do SP2962 after replacing the Pre-Charge Unit.
Replacement
Adjustment
SM 3-61 D059/D060/D061
Around The Drum
3.7.4 CHARGE CORONA UNIT

Inner cover ( p.3-7 "Pulling the Drawer Out")
1. Charge corona unit [A]
2. Grid [B] ( x 1 M4 x 8)
Always handle the grid carefully by its edges.

Never touch any part of the wire mesh. Handle it carefully to avoid bending it.
3. Front lock plate [C] (Pawls x2)
D059/D060/D061 3-62 SM
Around The Drum
Replacement
Adjustment
4. Terminal plate [D].
5. Front cover [E].
6. Slide off the rear lock plate, (1) to (2) above, (Pawls x4) and remove it with the spring
[F].
7. Rear cover [G].
8. Corona wire [A] (Spring x1)

9. Two cushions [B].
Always hold the wire by its metal fitting and its opposite end.
Never touch any other part of the wire.
Handle the corona wire carefully to avoid bending it.
SM 3-63 D059/D060/D061
Around The Drum
10. Turn the gear [C] to move the cleaner assembly [D] to a location where the cleaner is
easy to access.
11. Cleaner pad [E] ( x1).
12. Re-assemble the charge corona unit.
D059/D060/D061 3-64 SM
Around The Drum
Make sure the corona wire [A] and cleaning pad [B] are positioned as shown.
Make sure that the lip of the snap ring [C] faces down toward the grid wire.
13. After installing new wires, reset SP codes SP2001 001 to 2001 006 (Corona Voltage
and Current) to their defaults.
14. Execute SP2962 (Auto Process Control Execution).
Replacement
Adjustment
SM 3-65 D059/D060/D061
Around The Drum
3.7.5 DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR
1. Remove the drum ( p.3-56)

2. Remove:
[A] Drum potential sensor cover ( x2, Hook x1)
[B] Drum potential sensor
[C] Drum potential sensor unit ( x5,  x1)
[D] Drum potential sensor PCB ( x2, Hook x1)
Do not attempt to disconnect the drum potential sensor harness [E] from the PCB.
Reinstallation
The drum potential sensor is fragile. Handle it carefully.

First, insert the drum potential sensor and harness through the hole (1).
Next, fasten the drum potential sensor to its cover (2).
Execute SP2962 (Auto Process Control Execution).
After replacing the drum potential sensor, you must always execute SP2962.
D059/D060/D061 3-66 SM
Around The Drum
3.7.6 PICK-OFF PAWLS
Replacement
Adjustment
Remove:
Drum ( p.3-56)
1. Cover [A] ( x2)
2. Pick-off pawl unit screws (1), (2) ( x2)
3. Pick-off pawl unit [B].
SM 3-67 D059/D060/D061
Around The Drum
3.7.7 ID SENSOR
1. Detach the front end of the shaft [A] ( x1), then lift the shaft out of the grooves.
2. Rotate the pick-off pawl [B] 45 degrees, then remove it.
3. Install a new pick-off pawl by rotating it onto the shaft.
4. Do not forget to hook the tension springs [C].
5. Follow the same procedure to replace the other pick-off pawl.
Do not allow the pawl springs to catch inside the pick-off pawl.
After replacing the pick-off pawls, press down on each one to confirm that it
moves freely.
6. Drum ( p.3-56)
7. Cover ( p.3-66 "Drum Potential Sensor")
D059/D060/D061 3-68 SM
Around The Drum
8. Pick-off pawl unit [ x2].

9. ID sensor [A] ( x2,  x1,  x1)
After installing a new ID sensor, do SP3001 002 (ID Sensor Settings – ID Sensor
Initialization).
Replacement
Adjustment
SM 3-69 D059/D060/D061
Around The Drum
3.7.8 CLEANING BRUSH
Remove
Cleaning unit ( p.3-52 "Cleaning Unit, PCU, Drum")
1. Coupling [A] ( x1)
2. Bushing [B] ( x1)
3. Pull the cleaning brush shaft to the rear to release the cleaning brush [C], then remove
it.
Never touch the soft surface of the cleaning brush.

When installing the cleaning brush, avoid bending or damaging the entrance
seal with the cleaning brush.
D059/D060/D061 3-70 SM
Around The Drum
3.7.9 CLEANING BLADES
Replacement
Adjustment
Remove the drum cleaning unit. ( p.3-52 "Cleaning Unit, PCU, Drum")
1. 2nd cleaning blade [A] ( x1).
2. Cleaning blade [B] ( x2).
SM 3-71 D059/D060/D061
Around The Drum
3.7.10 CLEANING UNIT FILTERS
Drum cleaning unit. ( p.3-56 "Cleaning Unit, PCU, Drum")

2nd cleaning blade ( x1) ( p.3-71 "Cleaning Blades").
1. Front filter bracket [A] (Pawls x2)
2. Rear filter bracket [B] (Pawls x2)
3. Front filter [C]
4. Rear filter [D]
When you install the new filters, confirm that the notched corners [E] of the
filters fit tightly to the beveled corners of the plastic below.
D059/D060/D061 3-72 SM
Around The Drum
Page internally left blank
Replacement
Adjustment
SM 3-73 D059/D060/D061
Around The Drum
3.7.11 TONER FILTER
Remove:
Remove the inner cover.
1. Drum filter [A].
3.7.12 QUENCHING LAMP SHIELD GLASS

1. Pull the development unit drawer out.
2. Stopper [A] ( x1).

3. Quenching lamp shield glass [B].
D059/D060/D061 3-74 SM
Development and Toner Supply
3.8 DEVELOPMENT AND TONER SUPPLY
3.8.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT REMOVAL
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Pull out the development unit drawer.
2. Lift the development unit [A] by its purple handle and hold it level when you remove it.
Hold the development unit level to prevent spillage.

3. Place the development unit on some paper.
Re-installing the Development Unit
When you reinstall the development unit, handle it carefully.

Never allow the corner of the development roller to hit the OPC drum or any
other part of the frame of the development unit drawer.
Scratches or other damage to either the drum or development roller will
adversely affect the operation of the machine.
To reinstall the development unit
SM 3-75 D059/D060/D061
4. Align the triangular reference marks of the development unit and drawer frame.
5. Place the holes on the edge of the development unit over the pegs on the drawer
frame.
6. Push the development unit drawer into the machine, reattach the faceplate and inner
cover, then close the right front door.
3.8.2 TONER HOPPER REMOVAL
Development unit ( p.3-75 "Development Unit Removal")

[A]: Bracket ( x1)
[B]: Toner hopper ( x2,  x1)
D059/D060/D061 3-76 SM
3.8.3 DEVELOPER REPLACEMENT
Replacement
Adjustment
Development unit ( p.3-75)
Toner hopper ( p.3-76)
1. Top cover [A] ( x2)
2. Turn the development unit [B] upside down.
3. Rotate the knob [C] counter-clockwise to push out the developer.
When you dispose of the developer, obey the local laws and regulations
regarding the disposal of such items.
4. Remove the entrance seal [A] ( x2) and clean it.

5. Clean the side seals [B].
SM 3-77 D059/D060/D061
Handle the side seal carefully to avoid twisting or bending it.

6. Clean the development sleeves.
7. If you are installing a new development unit, go to the next step.
-or-
If you are only replacing the developer, clean the doctor blade before you pour in the
developer ( p.3-80 "Cleaning the Doctor Blade").
8. While turning knob [A] pour in one pack of developer evenly across the width of the
development unit.
9. Reinstall the top cover and toner hopper.
Initializing the Machine
Follow this procedure carefully.

Do not switch on the machine until you are instructed to do so.
Carefully follow the instructions about opening and closing the front doors.
1. Make sure that the machine is OFF.
3. Make sure that all tapes, clamps, and other shipping materials have been removed.
4. Connect the main power cord and turn on the machine.
D059/D060/D061 3-78 SM
The front doors must be open before you turn the machine on and enter the
SP mode.
If you switch on the machine with the front doors closed and do not enter the
SP mode, auto processing control will automatically execute and start
initialization for conditions around the drum, but initialized settings for the
toner density and TD sensor will not be correct.
6. Close the front doors.
Replacement
You must close the front doors now.
Adjustment
If you fail to close the front doors, the following SP codes (executed in the
following steps) will not execute: SP2801-001 (TD Sensor Initial Setting),
SP2207-002 (Toner Supply: Toner Bank Setup), SP2962 (Auto Process
Control Execution).
7. Do SP2801-002.
Open the soft keyboard on the operation panel.
Enter the developer lot numbers and touch [OK]. (Lot numbers are embossed on
the top edges of the developer packets.)
If you do not enter the 7-digit lot numbers first, you will not be able to execute
SP2801-001 (pressing [EXECUTE] will have no effect).
8. Do SP2801-001.
Touch [EXECUTE] on the operation panel to initialize the TD sensor. Initialization
requires about 1 minute after you press [EXECUTE].
Do not switch off the machine or open the front doors until you are instructed
to do so.
9. Set the toner bottles.
Do not shake the toner bottles.
Set the lower toner bottle first then the upper bottle.
10. Do SP2207-002.
Touch [EXECUTE] on the operation panel.
If the SP execution ends within about 2 sec., or if the process is interrupted by an
SC code alert, execute this SP again. The process should take about 5 min.
11. Do SP2962 and touch [EXECUTE]. This executes auto process control.
12. Clean the transport belt above the exposure glass.
SM 3-79 D059/D060/D061
3.8.4 CLEANING THE DOCTOR BLADE

The doctor blade must be cleaned:
At every PM visit.
When replacing developer.
This procedure may need to be done more often if the customer is using paper that
contains a large amount of paper dust.
The dust tends to collect at the front and on the back side of the blade, causing the doctor
gap to become narrower. Cleaning is required when:
There is toner scatter from both ends of the development unit.
White lines appear on copies.
Faint reproduction of the image appears around the edges of the paper.
To do this procedure, you need a special tool.
Part Number Description
A2949560 Paper Dust Cleaner - 5pcs/set
The tool is made of flexible plastic and can be re-used. However, before you use it,
make sure that it is perfectly flat.
D059/D060/D061 3-80 SM
Always clean the doctor blade before refilling the development unit with new
developer.
The paper dust cleaner is made of soft, thin plastic.
Always make sure that the dust cleaner is completely horizontal before you use it.
1. Development unit ( p.3-75)
2. Toner hopper ( p.3-77)
3. Entrance seal ( p.3-77 "Developer Replacement")
4. Flatten the paper dust cleaner [A] before you use it.
Replacement
5. Hold the paper dust cleaner perfectly level.
Adjustment
6. Insert the dust cleaner into the gap until the flap [B] is not visible.
7. Gently pull the dust cleaner toward you slowly until you feel slight resistance. Then
the flap catches and flips up on the rear side of the doctor blade.
If you pull with too much force, the flap will lose contact with the rear side of
the blade or could break.
8. Continue to pull gently on the dust cleaner so that it remains in contact with the back
side of the blade. At the same time, slide the cleaning tool 5 times completely to the left
and right. This removes paper dust from the back of the blade.
9. When you are ready to remove the dust cleaner [A]:

Push in the dust cleaner slightly about 10 mm (1/2") . This releases the flap from
the back of the blade and allows it to lie flat.
Tilt the dust cleaner up to about a 45-degree angle , then slowly pull it out of the
slit .
Turn the dust cleaner slightly to the left or right if you feel any resistance.
SM 3-81 D059/D060/D061
10. After removing the dust cleaner, rotate the development roller toward you about 10 mm
(1/2").
11. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove toner dust or developer.
Collect all of the paper dust and developer.

Never touch the front surface of the development roller.
12. Repeat the cleaning steps 5 or 6 times.
13. Hold the development unit upside down, and shake it gently to remove any remaining
paper dust or developer.
14. Clean the work area thoroughly with the vacuum cleaner.
D059/D060/D061 3-82 SM
3.8.5 DEVELOPMENT ENTRANCE, FRONT, REAR SIDE SEALS
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Remove the developer and keep it.
2. Replace the developer entrance seal [A] ( x 2, hooks x 2).
3. Replace the front side seals [B].
4. Replace the rear side seals [C].
Reassembly
When re-assembling the development unit, make sure the edges of the new side seals
align with the edges.
SM 3-83 D059/D060/D061
3.8.6 TONER DENSITY SENSOR
Remove the developer. ( p.3-77)

1. Remove the TD sensor [A] ( x 2,  x1).
2. Thoroughly clean the development unit, so no carrier particles remain in the gap
between the TD sensor and the development unit casing.
3. Install the new TD sensor ( x1,  x 2).
4. Install new developer and reassemble the development unit. ( p.3-77)
5. Use the keys on the screen to enter the Developer Lot No with SP2801-002, and
“Execute” the TD initial setting with SP2801-001
6. Execute SP2962 (Auto Process Control Execution).
Do not make any copies until you have executed SP2801 (TD Sensor Initial
Setting).
D059/D060/D061 3-84 SM
3.8.7 TONER HOPPER SENSOR
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Take out the toner hopper. ( p.3-76)
2. Toner hopper sensor [A] ( x 2).
Keep the toner hopper level.

Clean the mounting location of the toner hopper before installing it.
SM 3-85 D059/D060/D061
3.8.8 TONER SUCTION BOTTLE
1. Remove the right upper cover.

3. Tap the hose [A] to clear toner from the opening of the hose.
4. Bracket [B] ( x 1).
5. Toner suction bottle [C] (hose x 1).
During transport and disposal of the used bottle, make sure that toner does
not spill from top opening [D].
6. After replacing or emptying the toner suction bottle, do SP2972 and reset it to "0".
D059/D060/D061 3-86 SM
3.8.9 TONER SUCTION MOTOR
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Right upper cover ( x 4).
2. Toner suction motor unit [A] ( x 2, hoses x 2,  x 2)
3. After replacing the toner suction motor, do SP2973 and reset it to "0".
SM 3-87 D059/D060/D061
Development and Toner Supply Rev. 06/23/2010
3.8.10 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR UNIT

⇒ There are two different categories of models for Development Motor Unit in the field. The
replacement or removal procedure is slightly different between two categorized models.
Refer to the following table and check which categorized model the machine is.
Serial No.:
Model No. Serial No.: Modified Models
Non-modified Models
D060 Before V5100100038 V5100100038 or later
D061 Before V5200100020 V5200100020 or later
Refer to TSB# D059/D060/D061 – 006 for more information.
Open the PSU box ( p.3-18)

Rear upper cover ( "Rear Upper Cover")
1. Remove:
[A]: Flywheel ( x3)
[B]: Harness bracket ( x5,  x4)
[C]: Left duct unit ( x2,  x1)
D059/D060/D061 3-88 SM
Rev. 06/23/2010 Development and Toner Supply
⇒ 2. For non-modified models, disconnect the harness from the registration motor.
• For modified models, this step is not required.
Development motor
Registration motor
Replacement
Adjustment
3. Remove development motor unit [A] ( x4,  x5,  x1)
SM 3-89 D059/D060/D061
3.8.11 TONER PUMP MOTOR, TONER PUMP MOTOR SENSOR
Development motor unit ( p.3-88)

1. Remove toner pump motor unit [A] ( x3,  x1)
2. Remove:
[B]: Toner pump unit ( x3,  x1)
[C]: Disconnect the tube.
Keep end of the tube pointing upwards, so that toner does not come out.
[D]: Toner pump motor sensor ( x1)
D059/D060/D061 3-90 SM
3.8.12 DEVELOPMENT ROLLER SHAFT CLEANING
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Remove the development unit.
2. Use Teflon tape to remove toner and developer from the development roller shafts.
SM 3-91 D059/D060/D061
Transfer Belt Unit
3.9 TRANSFER BELT UNIT
3.9.1 TRANSFER BELT UNIT REMOVAL
1. Turn off the main switch.

2. Remove the inner cover.
3. Remove the transfer belt unit cover [A] ( x 2).
4. Remove the transfer belt unit holder [B] ( x 1).
5. Connector [C] ( x 1).
6. While turning the lever [D] counterclockwise, take out the transfer belt unit.
Never touch the transfer belt with bare hands.

Work carefully to avoid scratching the drum with the transfer belt unit.
Reassembly:
1. Rotate the lever [D] fully counterclockwise, then install the transfer belt unit.
2. Insert the gear [E] into the opening [F] in the rear frame.
3. Place the slot [G] in the transfer belt unit on the rail.
4. Connect the connector [C] ( x 1).
D059/D060/D061 3-92 SM
Transfer Belt Unit
Replacement
Adjustment
5. Attach the transfer belt unit holder [A] ( x 1).
Align the three holes with the three projections as shown with the arrows.
6. After installation, check the following points:
The transfer belt unit must move up and down smoothly.
The transfer belt unit must be behind the drum stay.
SM 3-93 D059/D060/D061
Transfer Belt Unit
3.9.2 TRANSFER BELT
1. Remove the transfer belt unit. ( p.3-92)

2. Raise knob [A], then disconnect the connectors [B] ( x 2).
3. Turn the transfer belt upper unit [C] 90 degrees counterclockwise, then raise and
remove it.
4. Remove the screws (1), (2) ( x 2).
D059/D060/D061 3-94 SM
Transfer Belt Unit
Replacement
Adjustment
5. Turn the belt drive roller holder [A] clockwise (front view) and remove the transfer belt
[B].
6. Clean both sides of the transfer belt with a dry cloth.
Do not use alcohol.

Before Installing or Replacing the Transfer Belt
1. Clean the following items with alcohol:
[C] Belt drive roller
[D] Belt roller
[E] Bias roller
Installing the Transfer Belt
1. Position the transfer belt at the center of the belt roller [D] so both marks [F] are visible.
2. Position the transfer belt under the bias terminals [G].
SM 3-95 D059/D060/D061
Transfer Belt Unit
3.9.3 TRANSFER BELT/BIAS ROLLER CLEANING BLADE
Remove the transfer belt unit. ( p.3-92)

1. Transfer belt /bias roller cleaning blade [A] ( x 2).
2. Clean the cleaning bias roller [B].
Before vacuuming, remove the power pack connectors (1), (2) to protect the
transfer power pack from static electricity.
3. Install the new cleaning blade.
Never touch the edge of the cleaning blade. If the setting powder on the blade
edge is accidentally removed at some point, apply setting powder or toner at
that point before installation.
D059/D060/D061 3-96 SM
Transfer Belt Unit
3.9.4 TRANSFER BELT BIAS BRUSH
Replacement
Adjustment
Remove the transfer belt. ( p.3-94)
1. Remove:
[A] Stopper ( x1)
[B] Transfer belt bias brush unit
SM 3-97 D059/D060/D061
Paper Feed
3.10 PAPER FEED
3.10.1 PAPER TRAYS
Tandem Tray

2. Open tandem feed tray [A] so the right tandem tray [B] fully separates from the left tray.
3. Push in the right tandem tray.
4. Left tandem tray [C] ( x 5).
D059/D060/D061 3-98 SM
Paper Feed
5. Right tandem tray [A] ( x 2).
When re-installing the right tandem tray, make sure that the wheels (1), (2)
ride on the slide rail [B].
When re-installing the right tandem tray, make sure that the tandem tray
stopper [C] is set behind the stopper [D] on the main machine frame.
Use M3 x 4 screws to secure the right tandem tray. Screws longer than 4 mm
will prevent the right tandem tray from sliding out and in smoothly.
Universal Tray
Replacement
1. Pull open tray 2 or tray 3 [A]. Adjustment
2. Lift the tray [B] out of the drawer.
SM 3-99 D059/D060/D061
Paper Feed
3.10.2 PAPER FEED ROLLERS

2. Remove the paper tray for the appropriate feed unit. ( p.3-98 "Paper Trays")
3. Pick-up roller [A] ( x 1).
4. Feed roller [B] ( x 1).
5. Remove separation roller [C] from the torque limiter [D] ( x 1).
The feed rollers of the main machine and the LCT are not interchangeable
because they turn in different directions.
After replacing a feed roller in the main machine, always make sure that it
turns counterclockwise in the direction of paper feed.
Do not touch the surface of the rollers with your bare hands.
6. Reset the PM count to zero for the new rollers
D059/D060/D061 3-100 SM
Paper Feed
3.10.3 PAPER FEED UNITS 1, 2, 3
Replacement
Adjustment
This procedure uses the 1st feed unit as an example. The procedures for the 2nd
and 3rd trays are the same.
2. Remove right front door.
3. Remove right lower cover.
If the LCT is installed, disconnect it.

4. Toner collection bottle ( p.3-164)
5. Lift the vertical transport guide [A] and remove it.
6. Remove knob [B] ( x 1).
7. Remove knob [C] ( x 1).
8. Pull out the three trays and remove the paper tray unit inner cover [D] ( x 2).
9. Upper gear bracket [A] ( x 2)

10. Inner vertical transport guide [B] ( x 2).
SM 3-101 D059/D060/D061
Paper Feed
When re-installing the inner vertical transport guide, set the pin [C] of the inner
vertical transport guide into the slot on the main body.
11. 1st paper feed unit [A] ( x 2,  x1).
12. Lower gear bracket [A] ( x3,  x1).

13. 2nd or 3rd paper feed unit [B] ( x 2,  x1).
D059/D060/D061 3-102 SM
Paper Feed
3.10.4 PAPER FEED, PAPER END, TRAY LIFT SENSOR
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Remove the paper feed unit ( p.3-101)
2. Remove:
[A]: Tray lift sensor ( x 1,  x 1).
[B]: Paper end sensor assembly ( x 1,  x 1)
[C]: Paper end sensor
[D]: Paper feed sensor ( x 1,  x 1)
[E]: Vertical transport sensor ( x 1,  x 1)
SM 3-103 D059/D060/D061
Paper Feed
3.10.5 REAR FENCE RETURN SENSOR

2. Pull out the left tandem tray.
3. Rear bottom plate [A] ( x 1).
4. Rear fence return sensor [B] ( x 1).
D059/D060/D061 3-104 SM
Paper Feed
3.10.6 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR
Replacement
Adjustment
2. Pull out the left tandem tray.
4. Rear fence transport gear [B] ( x 1).
5. Move the rear fence [C] to the right.
6. Rear fence HP sensor [D] ( x 1).
SM 3-105 D059/D060/D061
Paper Feed
3.10.7 1ST TRAY RIGHT PAPER SENSOR

2. Right tandem tray. ( pp.3-98 "Paper Trays")
3. Tandem tray cover [A] ( x 2).
4. Side fences [B] ( x 1 each).
When re-installing the side fences, make sure that the position of the side
fences is correct.
A4: Outer, LT: Inner
5. Bottom plate [C] ( x 4).
6. Right 1st tray paper sensor [D] ( x 1,  x 1).
D059/D060/D061 3-106 SM
Paper Feed
3.10.8 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE
Replacement
Adjustment
Before replacing the rear bottom plate lift wire, remove the front bottom plate lift
wire. The procedure for the two wires is the same.
Remove:
Right tandem tray. ( p.3-98 "Paper Trays")
Tandem tray cover ( x 2). ( p.3-106 "1st Tray Right Paper Sensor")
1. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 3) (Front Only).
2. Slightly lift the front bottom plate and unhook the wire stoppers [B], remove stopper [C]
and actuator [D].
3. Wire covers [E] ( x 1 each).
4. Bracket [F] ( x 1,  x 1, bushing x 1) (Front Only).
5. Gear [G] (Front Only).
6. Bottom plate lift wire [H].
SM 3-107 D059/D060/D061
Paper Feed
Re-installation
When re-installing the bottom plate lift wire:

1. Set the positioning pin [A] in the hole [B].
2. Set the projection [C] in the hole [D].
3. Position the wire as shown [E].
Do not cross the wires.
D059/D060/D061 3-108 SM
Paper Feed
3.10.9 PAPER DUST TRAY, REGISTRATION SENSOR,

DOUBLE-FEED SENSORS
Replacement
Adjustment
2. Remove cover [A] ( x 3)
3. Open the development unit drawer and remove ( p.3-56 "Cleaning Unit, PCU,
Drum")
Cleaning unit
Development unit
PCU
4. Remove:
[A] Screw ( x 1)
[B] Lower double-feed sensor bracket
SM 3-109 D059/D060/D061
Paper Feed
5. Remove:
[A] Screw ( x 1)
[B] Upper double-feed sensor bracket
6. From the upper double-feed sensor bracket, remove the paper dust tray.
[A] Front ( x 1)
[B] Rear ( x 1)
7. Use a clean dry cloth to remove paper dust from the paper dust tray.
8. Use a blower brush to clean:
D059/D060/D061 3-110 SM
Paper Feed
[A] Lower double-feed sensor
[B] Upper double-feed sensor
[C] Registration sensor
The lower double-feed sensor is the LED (emitter) of the sensor pair.
The upper double-feed sensor is the receptor of the sensor pair.
If you need to replace one or both sensors, replace them with the correct type.
3.10.10 LIFT MOTORS
Replacement
Adjustment
1st Tray Lift Motor
1. Remove AC drive unit (* p.3-179 "AC Drive Board")

2. 1st feed motor unit ( p.3-115 "Feed Motors")
3. 1st tray lift motor [A] ( x3,  x1)
SM 3-111 D059/D060/D061
Paper Feed
2nd, 3rd Tray Lift Motors
1. Remove the IOB unit [A] ( p.3-173 "IOB")

2. 2nd tray lift motor [B] ( x 1,  x 2).
3. 3rd tray lift motor [C] ( x 1,  x 2).
D059/D060/D061 3-112 SM
Paper Feed
Replacement
Adjustment
SM 3-113 D059/D060/D061
Paper Feed
3.10.11 2ND, 3RD TRAY SIZE SWITCHES
Take the IOB Unit out ( p.3-173 "IOB")

1. 2nd/3rd tray size switch bracket [A] ( x2,  x1)
2. 2nd/3rd tray size switch [B] ( x1,  x1)
D059/D060/D061 3-114 SM
Paper Feed
3.10.12 FEED MOTORS
Vertical Relay Motor
Replacement
Adjustment
Remove the AC drive unit ( x4,  x9,  x3) ( .3-179 "AC Drive Board")
1. Vertical relay motor unit [A] ( x3 M4x6,  x1)
2. Rotate the drive shaft [B] until the drive pin [C] is pointing up, then remove the motor
unit.
3. Remove the vertical relay motor [D] ( x2, Timing belt x1)
SM 3-115 D059/D060/D061
Paper Feed
Feed Motor, Grip Motor
1. Remove the paper feed unit:

[A]: 1st tray ( x3,  x2)
[B]: 2nd tray ( x3,  x2)
[C]: 3rd tray ( x3,  x2)
Rotate the drive shaft [D] until the drive pin [E] is pointing up, then remove the
motor unit.
2. Feed motor [F] ( x3, Spring x1, Timing belt x1)
3. Grip motor [G] ( x3, Spring x1, Timing belt x1)
D059/D060/D061 3-116 SM
Paper Feed
3.10.13 UPPER RELAY MOTOR
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Open the PSU box ( x 2). ( p.3-18 "PSU Box")
2. Remove the rear upper cover.
3. Flywheel ( x 3).
4. Upper relay motor unit [A] ( x 3,  x 1).
5. Upper relay motor [B] ( x3, Timing belt x1, Spring x1)
SM 3-117 D059/D060/D061
Paper Feed
3.10.14 REGISTRATION MOTOR
1. Open the PSU box. ( x 2). ( p.3-18)

2. Remove the rear upper cover.
3. Flywheel ( x 3).
4. Timing belt [A].
5. Registration motor unit [B] (Spring x1,  x 3,  x 1).
6. Registration motor [C] ( x 3, timing belt x 1, spring x 1).
D059/D060/D061 3-118 SM
Paper Feed
3.10.15 DEVELOPMENT FAN MOTOR
Replacement
Adjustment
Right upper cover ( x 4)
1. Tube cover [A] ( x 1)
2. Fan motor unit [B] ( x 1,  x 1)
3. Fan motor ( x 2)
SM 3-119 D059/D060/D061
Paper Feed
3.10.16 REGISTRATION UNIT
1. Remove:
Development fan motor ( p.3-119)
Toner suction pump motor ( p.3-76 "Toner Hopper Removal")
Upper relay motor [A] ( p.3-117)
Guide plate solenoid [B] ( x1,  x1)
2. Registration motor [C] ( p.3-112)
3. Registration unit [D] ( x4,  x3)
D059/D060/D061 3-120 SM
Paper Feed
3.10.17 LCT RELAY AND RELAY SENSORS
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Remove right upper cover ( x 4).
2. LCT relay sensor bracket [A] ( x 1,  x 1).
3. LCT relay sensor [B].
4. Upper relay sensor bracket [C] ( x 1,  x 1).
5. Upper relay sensor [D].
SM 3-121 D059/D060/D061
Paper Feed
3.10.18 IMAGE POSITION SENSORS
Image position sensor unit (Tray)

Remove right upper cover ( x 4).
[A]: Image position sensor unit (Tray) ( x2,  x1)

[B]: Stopper ( x1)
[C]: Image position sensor
The left screws (1), (3) are for paper widths of 140 – 330 mm.
The right screws (2), (4) are for paper widths of less than 140 mm.
Image position sensor unit (Duplex)

Registration unit ( p.3-120)
1. Remove:
[A]: Image position sensor unit (duplex) ( x2,  x1)
D059/D060/D061 3-122 SM
Paper Feed
[B]: Stopper ( x1)

[C]: Image position sensor
The left screws (2), (4) are for paper widths of 140 to 330 mm.
The right screws (1), (3) are for paper widths of less than 140 mm.
2. After replacement, the CIS must be calibrated. (See below.)
CIS Image Position Adjustment: LED Strength

Replacement
2. Remove the right upper cover.
Adjustment
4. Insert one sheet of plain white paper [A] in the paper path.
[B].
6. Enter SP mode and do SP1910 001 (CIS Image Position Adjustment: LED Strength).
This calibrates the amount of light to be emitted from the CIS.
7. Do SP1909 (CIS Image Position Adjustment: PWM After Adjustment).
8. If the displayed value is between 10 (0Ah) and 40 (28h), the CIS was calibrated
successfully. (The display is in hexadecimal code.)
9. If the value is outside this range, do SP1910 001, 1909 001 again. If the value does not
come between 10 and 40, the CIS may be defective.
10. Exit SP mode.
11. Do the "CIS Image Position Adjustment: Normal Paper" (described below).
SM 3-123 D059/D060/D061
Paper Feed
CIS in the Duplex Unit

2. Remove the duplex inner cover. ( p.3-157)

4. Insert one sheet of plain white paper [A] in the paper path.
[B].
6. Enter SP mode and do SP1910 003 (CIS Image Position Adjustment: LED Strength).
This calibrates the amount of light to be emitted from the CIS.
7. Do SP1909 003 (CIS Image Position Adjustment: PWM After Adjustment).
If the displayed value is between 10 (0Ah) and 40 (28h), the CIS was calibrated
If the value is outside this range, do SP1910 003, 1909 003 again. If the value
does not come between 10 and 40, the CIS may be defective.
8. Exit SP mode.
9. Do "CIS Image Position Adjustment: Normal Paper" (see the next section below).
D059/D060/D061 3-124 SM
Paper Feed
CIS Image Position Adjustment: Normal Paper

2. Do "0111-04 to -07" for Trays 1, 2, 3, duplex and set the value for each tray to "Off".
3. Exit from SP 1911 and return to the SP mode menu.
4. Adjust the image positions in the main scan direction (Tray 1, 2, 3).
Do SP2902 003, select Pattern 27, then print the trimming pattern.
Do SP1002 001, 002 and 003 and adjust the image position in the main scan
direction for Trays 1, 2, 3.
Replacement
Print the trimming pattern from each tray.
Adjustment
mm. If it is not 2 mm, adjust with SP1002 001, 002 and 003, depending on which
tray is not within the specified 2 mm.
5. Adjust the image positions in the main scan direction (Duplex).
Do SP2902 003, select Pattern 27, then print the trimming pattern.
Do SP1002 008 and adjust the image position in the main scan direction for
duplex.
Print the trimming pattern for duplex from Tray 1.
mm. If it is not 2 mm, adjust with SP1002 008, depending on which tray is not
within the specified 2 mm.
6. Print the duplex print from Tray 1 one more time.
7. Do SP1912 001 and 003 (CIS Image Position Adjustment: Normal Paper). This sets
the CIS for operation with standard copy paper.
8. Exit SP mode.
SM 3-125 D059/D060/D061
Paper Feed
10. Do "0111-04 to -07" again (CIS Image Position Adjustment: Feed Setting), and reset
the values for Trays 1, 2, 3, duplex to "On".
D059/D060/D061 3-126 SM
Paper Feed
3.10.19 TANDEM FEED TRAY PAPER SIZE CHANGE
Replacement
Adjustment
This tray is set up for A4 or LT LEF at the factory. Only A4 or LT LEF paper can be
used for tandem feed.
1. Open the front cover.
2. Pull out the tandem feed tray and remove the left [A] and right [B] tandem trays. (
p.3-92 "Paper Trays")
Setting the Paper Size for the Right Tandem Tray

1. Right tandem inner cover [C]. ( x 2)
2. Re-position the side fences [D] ( x 1 each).
Outer: A4, Inner: LT.

3. Re-install the right tandem inner cover [C].
SM 3-127 D059/D060/D061
Paper Feed
Setting the Paper Size for the Left Tandem Tray
1. Tray cover [A] ( x 3).

2. Motor cover [B] ( x 4).
3. Re-position the side fences [C] ( x 4 each).
Outer: A4, Inner: LT.

4. Re-install the motor cover and the tray cover.
D059/D060/D061 3-128 SM
Paper Feed
Replacement
Adjustment
6. Re-position the return position sensor bracket [B] ( x 1). To use the paper tray for A4
size, put the screw in the left hole.
For LT size, the screw should be placed on the right.

7. Re-install the rear bottom plate.
8. Change the paper size for the 1st Tray (Tandem Tray) with SP5019 002.
SM 3-129 D059/D060/D061
Paper Feed
3.10.20 TANDEM TRAY SIDE REGISTRATION

Normally the side registration of the image can be adjusted in the SP mode.
If the punch hole positions are not aligned from a particular feed station, however, you can
manually adjust the side registration by changing the tray cover position for that tray, and
then adjust the side registration of the image ( p.3-115 "Image Position Sensors")
1. Remove the right tandem tray ( p.3-92). (You do not need to remove the left tandem
tray.)
2. Use a stubby driver to remove the screws ( x 2)
3. Open Tray 2 slightly.

4. Slide the plate [A] to the front or rear and set it at the mark on the scale [B].
5. You may need to turn screw [C] clockwise so the plate pointer as full range of
movement on the scale.
6. Position the plate pointer on the scale [B].
D059/D060/D061 3-130 SM
Paper Feed
7. Turn screw [A] counter-clockwise until it stops and holds the new plate position.
Replacement
8. Re-attach the screws removed in Step 2.
Adjustment
Re-attach the left screw [B] at its original position.
Re-attach the right screw [C] through the oval hole (not the original round hole)
and tighten it.
SM 3-131 D059/D060/D061
Fusing Unit
3.11 FUSING UNIT
3.11.1 REMOVING THE FUSING UNIT
To prevent electrical shock, switch off the main power switch and disconnect the
power cord from the power source.
Disconnect all other cables (USB, network, etc.) if they are connected.
The fusing unit becomes extremely hot during operation, so to prevent minor
burns, switch the machine off and allow it to cool for at least 30 minutes before you
remove the fusing unit.
The fusing unit weighs approximately 14 kg (30.9 lb.) so handle it carefully when
you remove it to avoid dropping it and causing damage or minor injuries.
Confirm that the replacement fusing unit is the correct type for the machine.
A fusing unit with a black top is for the D059 (90 ppm) or D060 (110 ppm).
A fusing unit with a yellow top is for the D061 (135 ppm only).
If you install the incorrect fusing unit for the machine, the machine will display a
message and the machine will not operate until a correct fusing unit is installed.
1. Open the left front door [A] and right front door [B].
2. Grasp handle D2 [C] of the fusing unit drawer [D] and pull out the drawer gently until it
stops.
D059/D060/D061 3-132 SM
Fusing Unit
Replacement
Adjustment
3. Raise lever D3 [A] until it stops.
4. Firmly grip the purple handles [B] of the fusing unit [C] with both hands, lift the fusing
unit and remove it.
The fusing unit weighs approximately 14 kg (31 lb.). Handle it carefully when
you lift it and set it down.
5. Set the fusing unit down on its bottom.
SM 3-133 D059/D060/D061
Fusing Unit
3.11.2 REINSTALLING THE FUSING UNIT
1. Raise lever D3.

2. Hold the new fusing unit [A] so the triangular reference marks are aligned as shown
3. Lower the new fusing unit onto the frame.
4. Make sure that holes of the fusing unit are properly mounted onto the pegs below.
D059/D060/D061 3-134 SM
Fusing Unit
3.11.3 FUSING UNIT COVERS
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Remove:
[A]: Top cover ( x1)
[B]: Fusing cleaning unit cover (fabric unit) ( x2)
[C]: Front cover ( x3)
[D]: Rear lower cover ( x2)
[E]: Rear upper cover ( x3)
SM 3-135 D059/D060/D061
Fusing Unit
3.11.4 FUSING CLEANING UNIT
Disassembling the Fusing Cleaning Unit
1. Pull out the fusing unit drawer ( p.3-132 "Removing the Fusing Unit")
2. Remove the fusing cleaning unit [A] ( x1).
3. Fusing entrance guide [B] ( x1).
4. Bearings (1), (2).

5. Fusing cleaning fabric supply roller [A].
6. Bushings (3), (4).
7. Gear Z50 [B].
8. Cleaning fabric take-up roller [C].
9. Gear Z23 [D] off the shaft to remove the gear.
10. Remove the stopper [E].
D059/D060/D061 3-136 SM
Fusing Unit
Fabric Pressure Roller
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Remove:
[A]: Fabric pressure roller (Bushing x2, Spring x2)
Reassembling the Fusing Cleaning Unit
Checklist Before You Begin

Gear [A] rotates only counter-clockwise?
Is the plastic [B] straight and not bent?
1. Insert the take-up roller [C]. Insert the front end then the rear end .
SM 3-137 D059/D060/D061
Fusing Unit
Handle the rollers carefully to keep them clean.

2. Set the bushings , on the shaft of the take-up roller.
3. Attach Gear Z50 [D]. Its teeth must mesh with the teeth of the small gear below.
4. Mount the take-up roller shaft (with the bushings attached).
5. Mount the cleaning fabric supply roller [E] (apply some pressure to position it
correctly).
6. Set the bearings , on the shaft of the supply roller.
7. Gear Z23 [F]
Engage the key of the gear with its groove.
Attach it to the notch in the outer plate on the cleaning fabric supply side.
Turn the gear to take up the slack of the cleaning fabric.
8. Rotate Gear Z50 [D] clockwise 3 times.
9. Apply a small amount of grease (Barrierta S552R) to Gear Z50 [D].
Checklist
Cleaning fabric is not riding up on the metal plate?
Is the pressure lever down on the back of the fabric?
Gear Z50 clicks normally when it is turned?
No slack in the cleaning fabric between the supply and take-up rollers?
10. Place the frame unit above the fusing entrance guide plate, push it forward, then attach
it ( x1).
Attach the guide plate inside without allowing any of the 4 bearings or
bushings to slip off.
11. Make sure that the fusing entrance guide plate is installed without riding up on the
pawls (x2) on the bottom of the plate.
12. If a new fabric is installed:
Execute SP1902 001 (Fabric Motor Control> Fabric Consumption), and set the
value to 0. Switch the machine off/on after changing the setting.
D059/D060/D061 3-138 SM
Fusing Unit
3.11.5 HOT ROLLER UNIT
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Remove the fusing cleaning unit [A] ( x1). ( p.3-128 "Fusing Unit Covers")
2. Top cover [B] ( x1).
The top cover of the D059/D060 is Black, the cover of the D061 is Yellow.
3. Front cover [C] ( x3).
4. Rear upper cover [D] ( x3).
5. Insert a screwdriver [E] and turn 90 degrees in the direction of the arrow to release the
nip between the hot roller and the pressure roller.
SM 3-139 D059/D060/D061
Fusing Unit
6. Turn the hot roller stripper unit [A] 90 degrees in the direction of the arrow, then slide it
to the front and remove it.
7. Remove the metal clamp at the front.
8. Hot roller unit [B] ( x4).
D059/D060/D061 3-140 SM
Fusing Unit
3.11.6 HOT ROLLER
Removing the Fusing Lamps
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Hot roller unit ( p.3-139)
2. Entrance plate [A] ( x2).
3. Clean the front surface of the entrance guide plate [B] with a dry cloth.
4. Harness terminal bracket [A]. ( x2)

5. Disconnect the rear fusing lamp cables [B]. (Red, White [(D061): Yellow], Blue x 1
each)
6. Disconnect the front fusing lamp cables [C]. (White x 3)
7. Front lamp holder [D]. ( x4)
8. Rear lamp holder [E]. ( x1)
SM 3-141 D059/D060/D061
Fusing Unit
9. Fusing lamps [F], one at a time.
Never touch the glass surface of a fusing lamp with bare fingers. Handle the
lamps carefully to avoid breaking them.
Disassembling the Hot Roller
1. Position the hot roller as shown.

2. Remove:
[A]: C-ring
[B]: Gear
[C]: Bushing
[D]: Bearing
D059/D060/D061 3-142 SM
Fusing Unit
3. Remove:
[E]: C-ring
[F]: Bushing
[G]: Bearing
4. Remove the hot roller [H].
Reinstallation
Replacement
Adjustment
When you install the new hot roller, make sure that you install the correct type.
The shape of the end (1) of the hot roller for the D059/D060 is different from the D061
(2).
Lubricate the outer and inner surfaces of bushings [C] and [F] with Barrierta JFE55/2.
Re-installing the Fusing Lamps
1. Insert each fusing lamp [A], [B], [C] into the rear of the hot roller, then gently push the
fusing lamps into the roller.
Never touch the glass surface of a fusing lamp with bare fingers. Handle the
lamps carefully to avoid breaking them.
SM 3-143 D059/D060/D061
Fusing Unit Rev. 08/25/2010
2. Lay the tip of each fusing lamp into any round hole in the front holder [D] and fasten the
holder ( x1).
3. Insert the tip of each fusing lamp into a round hole in the rear holder [E] and fasten the
holder ( x1).
Make sure the lamps are perfectly parallel inside the hot roller.
4. Attach the connectors. Refer to the table below.
⇒ D059/D060 D061
Front Connector Rear Connector Front Connector Rear Connector
White Red White Red
White White Yellow Yellow
White Blue White Blue
5. Make sure the ends of the fusing lamps fit snugly into the holes in the bracket.
6. Connect hooks [A] of the harness terminal brackets [B] to the slots in the frame at two
points and fasten ( x2).
D059/D060/D061 3-144 SM
Fusing Unit
Checklist
Replacement
End of each fusing lamp securely inserted into holders at each end?
Adjustment
Connectors connected properly (refer to previous table)?
Are all the connectors tightly fastened?
Are the cables all secured properly by the 4 terminal bracket clamps as shown?
7. Attach the fusing entrance guide [C] ( x2).

8. Clean the entire fusing unit with a blower brush. Rotate the hot roller gear while
vacuuming.
Checklist
Is the surface of the hot roller clean and free of dirt, scratches, dust?
Are the holes on the top of the fusing entrance guide plate free?
9. If you change the entrance guide, check for a stamp on both ends of the entrance
guide, to make sure that you install the correct type of entrance guide:
N: North America
No stamp: EU/AA
SM 3-145 D059/D060/D061
Fusing Unit
3.11.7 PRESSURE ROLLER
1. Hot roller unit ( p.3-139)

2. Pressure roller stripper unit [A] ( x1,  x2)
3. Pressure roller cleaning unit [B] ( x1).
4. Pressure roller [C].
5. On both ends of the pressure roller [D] remove:
(1) C-rings (1 front/back)
(2) Bearings (1 front/back)
(3) Bushings (1 front/back)
Reinstallation
Lubricate the inner surface at both ends of the pressure roller with Barrierta – JFE55/2.
D059/D060/D061 3-146 SM
Rev. 06/23/2010 Fusing Unit
3.11.8 CLEANING ROLLER: PRESSURE ROLLER
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Pressure roller cleaning unit [A] ( x1). ( p.3-136 "Fusing Cleaning Unit")
2. Remove:
[A] Cover and anti-static brush.
[B]: Plate ( x1)
[C]: Bushing x1
[D]: Bearings (x2)
[E]: Cleaning roller
3. Clean the cleaning roller with a clean cloth.
⇒ Adjustment for Reducing Black Dots on the Output

1. Pressure roller cleaning unit ( "Pressure Roller" described above)
2. Remove the discharge brush [A] ( x 2).
SM 3-147 D059/D060/D061
3. Install the screw in the hole (marked 2.0) [A] for each edge (front [B] and rear [C]), and
then tighten it when attaching the discharge brush to the pressure roller cleaning unit.
If this adjustment is not satisfactory, install the screw in the hole (marked 1.5) [D]
for each edge (front [B] and rear [C]), and then tighten it again.
3.11.9 HOT ROLLER STRIPPERS
1. Hot roller stripper unit ( p.3-136 "Fusing Cleaning Unit")

2. Spring [A].
3. Spread the left and right sides of the holder as shown, then remove the hot roller
stripper [B].
4. Follow the same procedure to remove the stripper pawls at four other locations.
D059/D060/D061 3-148 SM
Fusing Unit
3.11.10 PRESSURE ROLLER STRIPPER

Fusing unit
Front cover
Fusing Unit Covers
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Raise the hot roller stripper unit [A].
2. Pressure roller stripper unit [B] ( x2,  x1).

3. Pressure roller stripper [C] ( x1, Spring x1).
Make sure that the spring is not deformed.

Make sure the spacer is attached on the other side.
SM 3-149 D059/D060/D061
Fusing Unit
3.11.11 FUSING EXIT SENSOR
1. Pressure roller stripper unit ( p.3-149 "Pressure Roller Stripper")

2. Remove the fusing exit sensor [A] ( x1,  x1,  x4)
D059/D060/D061 3-150 SM
Fusing Unit
Replacement
Adjustment
SM 3-151 D059/D060/D061
Fusing Unit
3.11.12 FUSING UNIT THERMOSTATS, THERMISTOR

Fusing unit ( p.3-132)
Hot roller unit ( p.3-139)
Fusing unit front cover, rear cover ( p.3-135 "Fusing Unit Covers")
D059/D060/D061 3-152 SM
Fusing Unit
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Remove thermostat covers [A] ( x1 each)
2. Remove thermostat unit [B] ( x3).
3. Remove thermistor [C] ( x1,  x1).
Reinstallation
Make sure the harnesses are positioned as shown below.
SM 3-153 D059/D060/D061
3.11.13 FUSING PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT
⇒ The nip width 12.0 ±0.5 mm (the difference between front and rear measurements
should be less than 0.5 mm).
1. Execute SP1109 (Fusing Check) to enter the fusing nip band check mode.
2. Make a copy using an A4/LT OHP sheet. Copying will start. It will stop in the fusing unit
for 30 seconds and then will exit.
3. Measure the nip band widths (the shiny band) at center and both ends.
4. If one of the nip band widths is not within specifications at center and both ends:
Loosen the lock nuts (1), (2)
Turn screws (3), (4) to adjust pressure (clockwise increases the pressure,
counterclockwise decreases the pressure).
Re-tighten the nuts (1), (2) after adjusting.
5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 to check the nip band widths.
After doing this procedure, switch off SP1109. If this SP remains on, this will
cause paper to jam in the fusing unit (SC559).
D059/D060/D061 3-154 SM
Fusing Unit
3.11.14 JOB TIME SENSOR

1. Pull out the fusing unit drawer. ( p.3-132 "Removing the Fusing Unit")
Replacement
Adjustment
2. Raise the upper guide plate [A].
3. Job time sensor bracket [B] ( x1)
4. Job time sensor [C] ( x1,  x1)
SM 3-155 D059/D060/D061
Duplex Unit
3.12 DUPLEX UNIT
3.12.1 DUPLEX UNIT
1. Open the left and right front doors and pull out the duplex unit [A].
2. Remove the shoulder screws [B] ( x 2).
3. Lift up the duplex unit.
When re-installing the duplex unit, align the cutouts (1) with projections (2) on
the slide rail.
D059/D060/D061 3-156 SM
Duplex Unit
3.12.2 DUPLEX UNIT INNER COVER
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Open both front doors.
2. Pull out the duplex unit.
3. Duplex unit inner cover [A] ( x 3, Knob x 1).
3.12.3 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR
1. Remove:
Duplex inner cover. ( p.3-157 "Duplex Unit Inner Cover")
[A]: Duplex inverter motor ( x3,  x4,  x2, Spring x1)
SM 3-157 D059/D060/D061
Duplex Unit
3.12.4 DUPLEX SWITCHBACK AND TRANSPORT MOTORS
Remove:
1. Duplex inner cover. ( p.3-157)
2. Duplex grip handle [A] ( x2)
3. Duplex transport motor unit [B] ( x3,  x1, Timing belt x1,  x2)
4. Duplex transport motor [C] ( x2)
5. Switchback motor unit [D] ( x3,  x1, Timing belt x1)
6. Switchback motor [E] ( x2)
Re-assembly
Push the duplex transport motor bracket [F] slightly to the left to put some tension on the
timing belt, then tighten the screw.
D059/D060/D061 3-158 SM
Duplex Unit
3.12.5 DUPLEX ENTRANCE GUIDE UNIT
Replacement
Adjustment
Remove:
1. Duplex inner cover. ( p.3-157 "Duplex Unit Inner Cover")
[A]: Ground (earth) wire ( x1)
[B]: Duplex entrance guide unit ( x1,  x1,  x2,  x2)
SM 3-159 D059/D060/D061
Duplex Unit
D059/D060/D061 3-160 SM
Duplex Unit
3.12.6 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR, INVERTER SENSOR

Remove:
1. Duplex entrance guide unit ( p.3-159)
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]: Cover ( x8)
[B]: Front side plate ( x5,  x1)
[C]: Rear side plate ( x6, Spring x1)
[D]: Lower entrance guide ( x1)
[E]: Duplex entrance sensor ( x1,  x1)
[F]: Lower entrance guide cover ( x2)

[G]: Inverter sensor ( x1)
SM 3-161 D059/D060/D061
Duplex Unit
3.12.7 DUPLEX TRANSPORT SENSORS 1, 2, 3
1. Open both front doors.

2. Pull out the duplex unit.
3. Remove:
(1): Duplex transport sensor 1 ( x1)
D059/D060/D061 3-162 SM
Duplex Unit
3.12.8 INVERTER RELAY SENSOR
Replacement
Adjustment
Remove:
1. Duplex entrance guide unit ( p.3-159)
[A]: Relay sensor ( x1,  x1)
SM 3-163 D059/D060/D061
Toner Bank
3.13 TONER BANK
3.13.1 TONER COLLECTION BOTTLE
1. Toner bank door [A] (pins x 2).

2. Waste toner bottle cover [B] ( x Knob 1).
3. Toner collection bottle [C].
D059/D060/D061 3-164 SM
Toner Bank
3.13.2 TONER BANK UNIT
Work carefully to avoid spilling toner during removal.

1. Execute SP5804 041 (upper bottle) and 042 (lower bottle) to close the caps,.
2. Turn off the operation switch on the operation panel.
You will not be able to remove the toner bottles if you switch of the main power
switch on the front of the machine.
Replacement
Adjustment
3. Remove the toner bottles from the bank.
5. Open the controller box ( x 3).
6. Open the PSU box ( x 2).
7. Left lower cover, right upper cover.
8. Remove the toner supply cylinder [A]. ( x 2, tubes x 2)
Work carefully to avoid spilling toner.

9. Cover the end of the toner transport coil tube [B] with a plastic bag.
To avoid toner spillage, hold the end of the disconnected tube up.
Do not to bend the toner transport coil tube [B].
If it is bent, this could overload, lock, or damage the coil.
SC592 (Toner Bank Motor Error) will be displayed, and the coil (screw) inside
should be replaced.
SM 3-165 D059/D060/D061
Toner Bank
10. Turn on the operation switch and execute SP5804 038 and 039 to discharge toner
from the toner bank.
11. Turn off the main switch and unplug the power cord.
12. Toner bank motor [A] ( x 2,  x 1)

13. Connectors [B] ( x2,  x 3).
14. Harness clamp bracket [A] ( x 2,  x 3).

15. Toner transport coil casing [B].
D059/D060/D061 3-166 SM
Toner Bank
Replacement
Adjustment
16. Snap ring [A]
17. Slide coupling [B] to the left.
18. Toner bank door [A] (pins x 2)

19. Toner bank inner covers [B] ( x 3, Knob screw x1)
SM 3-167 D059/D060/D061
Toner Bank
20. Remove:
[A] Switch bracket ( x 2)
[B] Microswitch ( x 2,  x2)
21. Remove screw (1) and screws (2), (3), (4) that secure the toner bank unit.
D059/D060/D061 3-168 SM
Toner Bank
Replacement
Adjustment
22. Screw [A] securing the toner recycling and collection casing [B]
23. Remove the interlock switch unit ( x 1,  x 1,  x 1).
24. Lift the toner recycling and collection casing [B], pull out the pin [C] from the hole under
the case, then pull out the toner bank unit.
When pulling out the toner bank unit, toner may leak out of the junction
between the tube and toner bank.
Place a cloth on the machine bottom plate so that the plate does not become
dirty.
Set the toner bank unit on a sheet of paper or cloth.
Make sure that the clamp is not released when pulling out the toner bank unit.
Pull out the paper tray about 20 cm before pulling out the toner bank unit.
After Re-installing the Toner Bank Unit
1. Remove the plastic bag from the toner transport coil tube. Re-connect the toner supply
cylinder to the toner transport coil tube ( x 2, tubes x 3).
3. Load the toner bottles into the toner bank.
4. Start to supply toner from the toner bank to the toner hopper:
1) Select SP2207 002 (Toner Bank Toner Setup).
SM 3-169 D059/D060/D061
Toner Bank
2) Press “Execute” on the LCD.
This procedure supplies toner to the toner hopper and the toner transport path. It will
stop automatically in about 6 minutes. If SP2207 002 fails after SP2801 is completed
(an SC code is displayed), repeat only SP2207 002.
3.13.3 ACCESS TO INSIDE THE TONER BANK
The toner bottle sensors and toner collection bottle sensor are inside the toner
bank.
1. Toner bank. ( p.3-165)
2. Toner release link bracket [A] ( x 2).
3. Left side plate [B], disconnect two links ( x8 M4x8,  x2 M3x6,  x1,  x1)
When re-attaching the links [C], place the front pin [D] under the lock plate [E].
4. Toner bottle bottom plates [F] (x 3 each).
D059/D060/D061 3-170 SM
Boards
3.14 BOARDS
3.14.1 MCU
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Remove:
Remove the exposure glass ( p.3-35)
Remove the top cover.
Remove the MCU cover
[A]: MCU board ( x3,  x7)
SM 3-171 D059/D060/D061
Boards
3.14.2 OPU
1. Remove:
Upper right cover
[A]: OPU unit ( x4,  x5)
[B]: OPU ( x5)
D059/D060/D061 3-172 SM
Boards
3.14.3 IOB
IOB
1. Open:
Controller box ( p.3-14)
PSU box ( p.3-18)
Replacement
Adjustment
The IOB is at the bottom center.
2. Remove the IOB (x31,  x6)
SM 3-173 D059/D060/D061
Boards
IOB Unit
1. Open:
Controller box ( p.3-14)
PSU box ( p.3-18)
2. Remove center stay [A] ( x4).
3. Remove:
[A] PSU box positioning plate ( x2)
[B] IOB bracket ( x5,  x31)
D059/D060/D061 3-174 SM
Boards
3.14.4 PSU-E (ENGINE): A, B
Before replacing any part of the PSU (especially PSU Ea, PSU Eb), switch the
machine off, disconnect it from the power source, and allow the machine to stand
at least 10 minutes before you open the PSU box.
Letting the machine stand for 10 minutes allows residual charges to dissipate from
the large capacity electrolytic condensers on PSU Ea, Eb.
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Open the PSU box [A] ( x 2). ( p.3-18)
2. Remove
[B]: Duct, ground wire ( x3)
[C]: PSU cover ( x3,  x1)
SM 3-175 D059/D060/D061
Boards
[A]: Fan motor unit ( x3,  x2)

[B]: PSU-Ea ( x7,  x10, Standoffs x5)
[C]: PSU-Eb ( x6, Standoffs x4,  x2)
D059/D060/D061 3-176 SM
Boards
3.14.5 PPG, CGB POWER PACKS

Preparation
Open the controller box ( x5) ( p.3-14)
Open the PSU box ( p.3-18)
Remove rear upper cover ( x4)
Remove rear lower cover ( x5)
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Remove bracket [A] ( x4).
2. Remove power pack fan [B] ( x2,  x1)
SM 3-177 D059/D060/D061
Boards
3. Remove:
[A] Power pack unit ( x2, x5)
[B] CGB power pack ( x4, x1)
[C] PPG power pack ( x4, x1)
D059/D060/D061 3-178 SM
Boards
3.14.6 AC DRIVE BOARD
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Open the PSU box ( x 2). ( p.3-18)
2. AC drive board [A] ( x6,  x3, Standoffs x3)
SM 3-179 D059/D060/D061
Boards
3.14.7 CONTROLLER BOARD, NVRAM
When replacing the old controller board with a new controller board, make sure
that the type of the new controller board corresponds with the machine type
(D059: type a/ D060: type b/ D061: type c).
Board Removal
1. Remove the controller box upper cover ( x5).
2. Disconnect the board ( x3).
D059/D060/D061 3-180 SM
Boards
Replacement
Adjustment
3. Disconnect faceplate [A] ( x5).
4. Slowly remove the faceplate [A] with the board attached.
SM 3-181 D059/D060/D061
Boards
5. Disconnect the board from the faceplate ( x6).
NVRAM Replacement
The NVRAM [A] is located at the corner.
D059/D060/D061 3-182 SM
Boards
Replacement
1. Press both sides of the NVRAM [A] to release the tabs and remove it.
Adjustment
SM 3-183 D059/D060/D061
Boards Rev. 04/21/2010
⇒3.14.8 BICU
1. Remove the upper half of the controller box ( p.3-15 "Removing the Controller
Box").
2. Pull out the faceplate [A] ( x 5).
3. Disconnect the BICU from the bracket ( x9).
D059/D060/D061 3-184 SM
Rev. 04/21/2010 Boards
⇒ When reinstalling the BICU
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Fasten four screws indicated in circles halfway on the BICU [A].
Do not fasten screws completely. Fasten halfway so that the board has room to
move. Screw heads should appear above the board.
2. While maintaining the previous condition (step 1), insert the face plate of the BICU into
the controller box.
3. Attach the BICU board connector to the controller board connector by hands.
SM 3-185 D059/D060/D061
Boards Rev. 04/21/2010
4. Fasten the faceplate [A] with screws indicated in circles ( x5).

There is no order for fastening screws on the faceplate.
5. Completely fasten the BICU board [A] with screws indicated in circles ( x8).
Make sure that both connectors (BICU [A] and controller board [B]) are firmly
connected.
6. Reassemble the removed parts and harness and install the controller box into the
mainframe.
D059/D060/D061 3-186 SM
Boards
Replacement
Adjustment
SM 3-187 D059/D060/D061
Boards
3.14.9 HDD
1. Remove the controller box upper cover ( x5). The HDD is at [A].
2. Disconnect the HDD bracket ( x4,  x2).
3. Lift the bracket off its hooks and remove it.
D059/D060/D061 3-188 SM
Boards
Replacement
4. Remove the HDD from the bracket:
Adjustment
[A] Top ( x2)
[B] Bottom ( x2)
SM 3-189 D059/D060/D061
Boards
3.14.10 PSU-C
1. Remove the controller box upper cover [A] ( x5). The PSU-C [B] is below the HDD
[C].
2. Disconnect and remove the board ( x8,  x3).
The screws at { and are silver screws.

These are ground screws and must be re-attached at the same positions.
D059/D060/D061 3-190 SM
Boards
3.14.11 URB
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Remove right upper cover ( x4).
2. Remove:
[A] Plate ( x1)
[B] Fan ( x1,  x1)
3. Remove:
[A] Cover (Hooks x4)
[B] URB ( x4,  x1)
SM 3-191 D059/D060/D061
Motors
3.15 MOTORS
3.15.1 DRUM MOTOR

1. Open the PSU box (* p.3-18)
2. Open the controller box (* p.3-14)
3. Remove the rear cover
4. Remove:
Fly wheel [A]
Harness bracket [B]
Duct unit [C]
D059/D060/D061 3-192 SM
Motors
Replacement
Adjustment
5. Remove PPG and CBG power pack unit [A] ( p.3-177)
6. Fan motor unit [A] ( x2,  x1)

7. Right duct unit [B] ( x1)
8. Timing belts (1), (2), (3) (Springs x3,  x 2)
SM 3-193 D059/D060/D061
Motors
9. Flywheel holder [A] ( x2)

10. Drum pulley [B] ( x3)
11. Cleaning drive pulley [C] ( x1, Pin x1)
12. Drum motor plate [D] (Tapping  x4,  x3)
13. Drum motor unit [A] ( x2,  x2,  x5)

14. Drum motor ( x4)
D059/D060/D061 3-194 SM
Motors
3.15.2 DUPLEX MOTOR
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Open the controller box ( p.3-14)
2. Remove the duplex motor unit [A] ( x4,  x1)
SM 3-195 D059/D060/D061
Motors
3.15.3 FUSING MOTOR
1. Controller box upper cover (* Removing the Controller Box Upper Cover under p.3-14
"Controller Box")
2. Open the controller box. (* p.3-14)
3. Relay board [A] ( x2,  x3,  x1)
4. Timing belt [B] (Loosen  x1, Spring x1)
5. Fusing motor unit [C] ( x4,  x2, x2)
D059/D060/D061 3-196 SM
Motors
3.15.4 EXIT MOTOR
Replacement
Adjustment
2. [A]: Exit motor ( x4,  x2)
SM 3-197 D059/D060/D061
Ozone Filter
3.16 OZONE FILTER

2. Open the PSU box. (* p.3-18)
[A]: Right duct unit ( x1)

[B]: Ozone filter
D059/D060/D061 3-198 SM
Copy Image Adjustment: Printing/Scanning
3.17 COPY IMAGE ADJUSTMENT:
PRINTING/SCANNING
You need to perform these adjustments after replacing any of the following parts:
Scanner Wires, Lens Block, Scanner Motor, Polygon Mirror Motor, Paper Side
Fences, Memory All Clear. For more details about accessing SP modes, refer to
section 4.
Replacement
Adjustment
3.17.1 PRINTING
Make sure the paper is installed correctly in each paper tray before you start these
adjustments.
Use the Trimming Area Pattern (SP2902 003, No. 27) to print the test pattern for
the following procedures.
Set SP2902 003 to 0 again after completing these printing adjustments.
Registration – Leading Edge

1. Check the leading edge registration using the Trimming Area Pattern, and adjust it
using SP1001 if necessary. The specification is: 0 ±3 mm.
Registration – Side-to-Side
Do the parallel image adjustment after the side-to-side registration adjustment.
Using SP Mode
SM 3-199 D059/D060/D061
A: Leading Edge Registration
B: Side-to-side Registration
1. Check the side-to-side registration for each paper feed station using the Trimming Area
Pattern. Adjust them using the following SP modes if necessary. For more details, refer
to "Image Position Sensors" (* Paper Feed - Image Position Sensors)
SP mode Specification
1st paper feed SP1002 001
2nd paper feed SP1002 002 SP1912 001
3rd paper feed (Optional PFU tray 1) SP1002 003
4th paper feed (LCT) SP1002 004

2 ± 1.5 mm
SP1912 002
7th Tray (Bypass) SP1002 007
Duplex SP1002 008 SP1912 003
Blank Margin
If the leading edge/side-to-side registration cannot be adjusted within the

specifications, adjust the leading/left side edge blank margin.
D059/D060/D061 3-200 SM
A: Trailing Edge Blank Margin
B: Right Edge Blank Margin
C: Leading Edge Blank Margin
D: Left Edge Blank Margin
1. Check the trailing edge and right side edge blank margins using the Trimming Area
Pattern, and adjust them using the following SP modes if necessary.
SP mode Specification
Trailing edge SP2101 002 3 ± 2 mm
Replacement
Adjustment
Right edge SP2101 004 2 ± 1.5 mm
Leading edge SP2101 001 4 ± 2 mm
Left edge SP2101 003 2 ± 1.5 mm
Magnification Adjustment
1. Enter SP mode and access SP2902 003.

2. Select pattern 4 (Alternating Dot pattern – 1024 dots) and make a print using A3 (DLT)
paper.
3. Check the length between the edges of the black squares. The length should be 130
mm in the sub scan direction.
If the magnification in the sub scan direction is not within 100 ±1.0%, adjust using
SM 3-201 D059/D060/D061
SP2910.
After main scan adjustment, use SP2909 (Main Scan Magnification) 001 (Copy),
002 (Printer) to adjust main scan magnification for the copy and print images.
Next, use SP4008 (Scanner Sub Scan Magnification) to adjust magnification in the
sub scan direction.
If the magnification in the main scan direction is not within 100 ± 0.5%, adjust
using SP2910.
Check the magnification after the paper cools.
D059/D060/D061 3-202 SM
3.17.2 PARALLELOGRAM IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

If a parallelogram type image is printed while using a trimming area pattern, do the
following to adjust the printing registration or the printing margin.
The following procedure should be done after adjusting the side-to-side

registration for each paper tray.
This adjustment is only effective for a parallelogram image caused by the printer. It
should not be applied if the skew is caused by the scanner.
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Check whether a parallelogram image appears as shown on the next page when
printing a trimming area pattern (SP2902 003, No. 27). If it appears, do the following.
2. Remove the exposure glass (see Replacement and Adjustment – Exposure Glass
Removal).
3. Remove the original exit tray and the scanner right cover. (See Replacement and
Adjustment – Scanner Drive Wires)
4. Peel away the mylar [A] covering the opening in the frame.
5. Loosen the three screws [B] that hold the laser unit.
SM 3-203 D059/D060/D061
Make a note of the position of the laser unit using the scale [A].
6. Adjust the laser unit position using a flat screwdriver [B] as shown.
If the right side of the trimming area pattern is down by about 1 mm as shown [C], the
laser unit should be rotated about one graduation in the direction of the black arrow. If
the opposite side is down, adjust in the opposite direction.
7. Tighten the three screws to secure the laser unit.
8. Print the trimming area pattern to check the image. If it is still the same, repeat steps 2
to 7.
D059/D060/D061 3-204 SM
3.17.3 SCANNING
Before doing the following scanner adjustments, check the printing

registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment.
Use an OS-A3 test chart to perform the following adjustments.
Registration: Platen Mode

1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed
Replacement
Adjustment
stations.

2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration, and adjust them using the
following SP modes if necessary.
SP mode
Leading Edge SP4010
Side-to-side SP4011
SM 3-205 D059/D060/D061
Leading Edge (SP4010):
Use the  key to enter the minus (–) before entering the value.
A minus setting moves in the direction of the leading edge. A larger value shifts the image
away from the leading edge, and a smaller value shifts the image toward the leading edge.
Side-to-side (SP4011):
(–): The image disappears at the left side.
(+): The image appears at the left side.
Use the  key to enter the minus (–) before entering the value.
Magnification
Use an OS-A3 test chart to perform the following adjustment.

Scanner Sub Scan Magnification
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed
stations.
A: Sub Scan Magnification

2. Check the magnification ratio, and adjust it using the following SP mode if necessary.
The specification is within ±1%.
SP mode
Scanner Sub Scan Magnification SP4008
D059/D060/D061 3-206 SM
3.17.4 ADF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
Registration
Make a temporary test chart as shown below left, using A3/DLT paper.
1. Place the temporary test chart on the ADF and make a copy from one of the feed
stations.
2. Check the registration, and adjust using the following SP modes if necessary.
Replacement
Adjustment
SP mode
Side-to-side Registration SP6006 001
Leading Edge Registration (Thin original mode) SP6006 003
Leading Edge Registration (Single-sided/Duplex: front) SP6006 005
Leading Edge Registration (Duplex: rear) SP6006 006

SM 3-207 D059/D060/D061
TROUBLESHOOTING
108 ~ 202 06/25/2010 Corrected various pages for SC7xx3 thru SC7xx5
245 06/23/2010 Corrected LCIT RT5040 Leading edge of NCR bent.
252 ~ 277 06/23/2010 Added Jam Detection
Program Download
4. TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
4.1.1 OVERVIEW
Here are some important points to keep in mind when downloading software:
If an error interrupts download processing, the machine cannot operate normally with
the program software only partially downloaded.
When download processing execution starts, “Downloading…” is displayed and when
downloading has completed successfully, the message is cleared.
If the download is interrupted when the “Downloading …” message is displayed, the
machine does not attempt a re-try.
The program that downloads firmware from an SD card is part of the GW controller
shooting
Trouble-
software. If downloading this software is interrupted, the program stored in the
machine may be corrupted. Because of this, it may not be possible to restart the
downloading program. (In addition, if the GW controller software cannot be
downloaded, other software on other SD cards cannot be downloaded.) However, it
may be possible to restart the program without replacing the board by setting DIP SW
1 on the controller to ON, and re-starting.
4.1.2 RECOVERY METHODS

When an error occurs during downloading, an error code is displayed on the operation
panel.
If the download procedure can be re-started, re-start the download procedure.
If the download procedure cannot be downloaded for other than the GW controller,
replace the board where the downloaded program is stored.
If the download procedure cannot be downloaded for the GW controller, set DIP SW 1
to ON. Power the machine off and on to start the downloading program. After
downloading has completed, set the DIP SW to OFF then power the machine off and
on again.
SM 4-1 D059/D060/D061
Program Download
4.1.3 DOWNLOAD ERROR CODES
Display Details Recovery
Reboot Controller ROM update error 1

after card
insert
E01 When the update break data is stored in Use the correct
01
NVRAM, the break module information and card
Module the decompression module capable of writing
ID do not match.
Card No.
xx/xx
Download Controller ROM update error 2.

Error E02 Cycle the machine
02
Power Error occurs during ROM update program off/on to rewrite
off/on initialization.
Download Controller ROM update error 3 Cycle the machine

Error E03 off/on
03
Power The ROM for the write operation does not Install the missing
off/on exist. ROM DIMM
Controller ROM update error 4 Cycle the machine

off/on
Download Set DIP SW 1 to
Error E04 ON and retry
04
Power GZIP data confirmation fails. (CRC value Replace the RAM
off/on check) DIMM
Replace the
controller board
Controller ROM update error 5 Cycle the machine

Download
off/on
Error E05
05 Set DIP SW 1 to
Power
Error occurs when writing to the device. ON and retry
off/on
Replace the RAM
D059/D060/D061 4-2 SM
Program Download
DIMM
Replace the
controller board
Controller ROM update error 6 Turn the machine

power off/on.
Set controller
Download DIPSW-1 to ON to
Error E06 force the machine
06
Power to write to ROM.
CPU clock error.
off/on If you cannot force
the machine to
write, replace the
shooting
Trouble-
controller board.
Download Controller ROM update error 7

Error E19
19 Software defective
Power Schedule data is unclear.
off/on
Down System error 1 (+SC991) Cycle the machine

Error E20 off/on and re-try
20
Power The physical address cannot be mapped. Replace the
Off/On Software/hardware is defective controller board
System error 2 (+SC991) Cycle the machine

Download
off/on and re-try.
Error E21
21 Replace the RAM
Power
There is not sufficient memory to download. Replace the
Off/On
controller board
22 Download System error 3 (+SC991) Cycle the machine

Error E22 off/on and re-try.
Module Replace the card
ID Data fails to decompress. Card defective. Replace the
Card No controller board
SM 4-3 D059/D060/D061
Program Download
xx/xx
System error 4 Cycle the machine

off/on and re-try
Set DIP SW 1 to
SC991
“Selfupdate” does not execute. Software ON and re-try
defective. Replace the
controller board
System error 5 Cycle the machine

Download
off/on and re-try
Error E24
23 Replace the card
Power Card read/write error. Software or card
defective. Replace the
Off/On
controller board
Download dysfunction 1 HDD defective

No Valid HDD harness
30 Print download is not possible. Cannot
Data E30 disconnected,
download to HDD because HDD not installed
defective
or defective.
Reboot Download dysfunction 2

After
Card
Insert Set the correct
31 E31 Download continuity error with more than one cards in the correct
Module card. The second or later card is not order
ID compatible.
Card No.
xx/xx
Reboot Download dysfunction 3 Use the correct

After card
Card If power failure
32
Insert Download interrupted because card is not caused the failure,
E32 correct, or power failure interrupted download. remove the card
Module and insert another.
D059/D060/D061 4-4 SM
Program Download
ID
Card No.
xx/xx
Download dysfunction 4
No Valid Use the correct
33 Card version error. Attempted to download
Data E33 card
program using a card with the wrong version
number.
34
Data E34 Specification error. DOM card set in EXP card
machine, or vice versa.
shooting
Trouble-
35
Data E35 Wrong model. The inserted card is for another card
model.
Download dysfunction 7 Use the correct

card, inserted
No Valid Module error. The program that you are correctly
36
Data E36 attempting to download does not exist on the Install a ROM
machine, or the contact points at the card and DIMM if none is
the machine slot are not connected. installed
No Valid Use an unused
37
Data E37 Edit option card error. You attempted to card
employ a used card.
Download Download result failure 1

Error E40
Module Cycle the machine
40
ID off/on and re-try
Engine download failure.
Card No.
xx/xx
SM 4-5 D059/D060/D061
Program Download

Error E41
41
Fax download failure.
Card No.
xx/xx

Error E42
42 Operation panel or language download failed.
For this error, sometimes the message may
Card No. not be displayed.
xx/xx

Error E43
43
Print download failed.
Card No.
xx/xx
Download result failure 5 Turn the machine

power off.
Replace the SD
card with the
start-up SD card
Download
that has the source
Error E44
data.
44 Module
The data targeted for the write operation could Set controller
ID Card
not be accessed. DIPSW-1 to ON to
No.
force the machine
to write.
Turn the machine
on.
If you cannot force
D059/D060/D061 4-6 SM
Program Download
the machine to
write, replace the
controller board.
Download invalid
No Valid Use the correct SD
50
Data E50 The source data for the update could not be card.
authenticated.
Remote ROM update failure 1

Turn the machine
(no
51 The source data for the ROM update is power off/on and try
display)
corrupted because the machine is operating again.
and an SC code has been issued.
shooting
Trouble-
Remote ROM update failure 2
(no Try again with the
52 The source data received for the ROM update
display) correct data.
is corrupted; it failed a SUM check due to its
abnormal length.
Download result failure 6

(no Do the download
53
display) The previous download in progress was procedure again.
cancelled.
SM 4-7 D059/D060/D061
Service Call Conditions
4.2 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
4.2.1 SERVICE MODE LOCK/UNLOCK

At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer cannot
operate the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off. This function
makes sure that work on the machine is always done with the permission of the
Administrator.
If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the Operator Tool
and then set “Service Mode Lock” to OFF. After he or she logs in:
Operator Tools > System Settings > Administrator Tools > Service Mode Lock > OFF
This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
The CE can do servicing on the machine and turn the machine off and on. It is not
necessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the machine is turned
on.
If you must use the printer bit switches, go into the SP mode and set SP 5169 to “1”.
After machine servicing is completed:
Change SP 5169-001 from “1” to “0”.
Turn the machine off and on. Tell the administrator that you completed servicing
the machine.
The Administrator will then set the “Service Mode Lock” to ON.
D059/D060/D061 4-8 SM
4.2.2 SERVICE CALL LEVELS

There are 4 levels of service call conditions.
Level Definition Reset Procedure
Enter SP mode, then

Fusing unit SCs displayed on the operation panel. The
A turn the main power
machine is disabled. The operator cannot reset the SC.
switch off and on.
SCs that disable only the features that use the defective
item. These SCs are not shown to the operator under Turn the main power
B
normal conditions. They are displayed on the operation switch off and on.
panel only when the defective feature is selected.
SCs that are not shown on the operation panel. They are
shooting
C Logging only
Trouble-
internally logged.
Turn the operation

Turning the operation switch (or main power switch) off then
switch (or main
D on resets these SCs. These SCs are displayed on the
power switch) off
operation panel and displayed again if the error reoccurs.
and on.
SM 4-9 D059/D060/D061
4.2.3 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS
If a problem concerns a circuit board, disconnect and reconnect the connectors

and then test the machine. Often a loose or disconnected harness is the cause of
the problem. Always do this before you decide to replace the PCB.
If a motor lock error occurs, check the mechanical load before you decide to
replace the motor or sensors.
When a Level “A” or “B” SC occurs while in an SP mode, the machine cannot
display the SC number. If this occurs, check the SC number after leaving the SP
mode.
If you set SP 5875 to ‘on’, the machine reboots automatically when the machine
issues a Level “B&D” SC code. This is done for Level “D” SC codes only.
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing. To
avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation switch to switch the
power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the main power switch
off.
The main power LED () lights or flashes while the platen cover or ARDF is
open, while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile or the network
server, or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or memory for reading or
writing data.
D059/D060/D061 4-10 SM
SC Tables: 1xx
4.3 SC TABLES: 1XX
Exposure Lamp Error
The standard white level was not detected properly when scanning the
white plate.
Exposure lamp defective

Lamp stabilizer defective
SC101 B
Exposure lamp connector defective
Scanner motor control unit (MCU board) defective
SBU board defective
Dirty white plate
Dirty scanner mirror
Scanner mirror or lens block out of position
shooting
Trouble-
Scanner Home Position Error 1
The scanner home position sensor does not detect the OFF condition
during initialization or copying
Scanner home position sensor defective

SC120 B Poor connection between HP sensor and MCU board
Scanner motor control unit (MCU board) defective
Scanner wire, timing belt, pulleys, or carriage out of position
Scanner motor defective
Poor connection or defective harness between MCU board and
scanner motor
SM 4-11 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 1xx
Scanner Home Position Error 2
Scanner home position sensor does not detect ON.
Scanner home position sensor defective

Poor connection between MCU board and scanner home position
SC121 B sensor
Harness between MCU board and sensor defective
MCU board defective
Scanner wire, timing belt, pulleys, or carriage out of position
Scanner drive motor defective
Harness between MCU board and scanner motor disconnected
Encoder Signal Error
The scanner motor encoder connector is not set correctly, or the encoder
signal was not input.
Scanner motor encoder connector disconnected

SC124 B Scanner motor lead connector disconnected
MCU board defective (scanner motor control unit)
Scanner wire, timing belt, pulleys, or carriage installation incorrect
Power supply connector disconnected (+38V ±24V)
Power supply unit (PSU-E board) defective
Scanner Motor Error 1
Scanner motor stopped before feedback from scanner HP sensor

detected, or motor speed too slow when detected at scanner HP sensor.
SC125 B
Scanner motor defective (high torque)

Overload on scanner drive mechanism
MCU board defective (scanner motor unit control)
D059/D060/D061 4-12 SM
SC Tables: 1xx
The scanner motor does not stop within 15 mm after the scanner home
position sensor turns on when the scanner returns.
SC126 B
Scanner motor defective (low torque)

Overload on scanner drive mechanism
The scanner motor rotates in the opposite direction to the signal from the
SC127 B MCU board.
Scanner motor defective (motor lead connected incorrectly)
shooting
Trouble-
The scanner motor speed does not reach the target speed by the time
the scanning start point is reached.
SC128 C
Overload on scanner mechanism
PSU-Eb board defective
The scanner motor speed is abnormal. The machine will not stop
scanning even after the machine detects that motor speed is abnormal.
SC129 C
Scanner drive mechanism defective
PSU-Eb board defective
SM 4-13 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 1xx
Black level detection error
When the scanner was turned on, AGC (automatic gain control) failed to
achieve the target value of 10 ±3.
SC141 B
SBU BICU harnesses defective

SBU defective
BICU defective
White level detection error
When the scanner was turned on, the second sampling by AGC
(automatic gain control) failed to achieve a value within the range –7 to 0
of the target value 128.
SC142 B
Standard white plate defective, dirty
Moisture inside the scanner unit
SBU to BICU harnesses defective
SBU defective
BICU defective
SBU Error 1
When the scanner was turned on, the SBU (Sensor Board Unit) level
adjustment, black level check, and final SBU white level check failed.
SC143 C SBU defective

BICU defective
Harness between the SBU and BICU defective
Standard white plate not installed correctly, or is dirty
Scanner mirrors and/or lenses are dirty or installed incorrectly
D059/D060/D061 4-14 SM
SC Tables: 1xx
SBU Error 2
At power on:
The SYDI terminal signal did not go HIGH within 1 s
The specified SBU (Sensor Board Unit) ID (GASBUP and
SC144 B
LM98513) could not be read after 3 tries
SBU defective
BICU defective
Harness between SBU and BICU defective
IPU Error:
At power on, or when the machine returns from an energy save
shooting
Trouble-
mode, the self-diagnostic program returned an IPU error (LSYNC
abnormal).
SC161-1 D
Connector or harness between SBU and IPU loose, broken, or

defective
SBU connector or harness loose, broken, or defective
BICU defective
IPU Error 2
Initialization after power on failed because an error occurred on the

SC161-2 B
IPU
Replace BICU
SM 4-15 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 1xx
Illegal Copy Data Security Error
The "Data Security for Copying Feature" in the User Tools is set to "ON"
without the ICIB-2 installed.
Copy Data Security Unit option board not installed, or not installed
correctly
SC165 A Copy Data Security Unit board is defective
Note:
The "Data Security for Copying" feature in the User Tools must be
set to "OFF" before the ICIB-2 is removed.
To switch this feature off/on: [User Tools]> System Settings>
Administrator Tools> Next.> Data Security for Copying> Select
Off/On.
Scanner Unit Fan Error: Scanner Intake Fan
The MCU issued a lock signal from the scanner intake fan (rear, right).
SC180 B Fan, MCU, SIB harnesses loose or defective

Scanner intake fan motor defective
MCU defective
SIB defective
Scanner Unit Fan Error: Lamp Regulator Fan (Right)
The MCU issued a lock signal for the lamp regulator fan (front, right).
SC181 B Fan, MCU harness loose, defective

Lamp regulator (right) fan motor defective
MCU defective
SIB defective
D059/D060/D061 4-16 SM
SC Tables: 1xx
Scanner Unit Fan Error: SBU Cooling Fan
The MCU issued a motor lock signal for the SBU cooling fan in the
scanner unit
SC182 B Scanner unit harness loose, defective

Fan, MCU harness loose, defective
SBU Fan motor defective
MCU defective
SIB defective
Scanner Unit Fan Error: Lamp Regulator Fan (Left)
The MCU issued a lock signal for the lamp regulator fan (front, left).
shooting
Trouble-
Scanner unit harness loose, defective
SC183 B
Lamp regulator (left) fan motor defective
MCU defective
SIB defective
Exposure Lamp 1 Lamp Regulator (Right) Error
The MCU detected a defect in the lamp regulator (right) when the 1st
exposure lamp lit. .
1st exposure lamp defective

SC185 B
1st lamp FFC (flat film cable) loose or defective
MCU lamp regulator (left) harness defective
Lamp regulator (left) is defective
MCU defective
SIB defective
SM 4-17 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 1xx
Exposure Lamp 2 Lamp Regulator (Left) Error
The MCU detected a defect in the lamp regulator (left) when the 2nd
exposure lamp lit. .
2nd exposure lamp defective

SC186 B
2nd lamp FFC (flat film cable) loose or defective
MCU lamp regulator (left) harness defective
Lamp regulator (left) is defective
MCU defective
SIB defective
Scanner Unit Fan Error: Scanner Unit Exhaust Fan
The MCU issued a lock signal for the scanner unit exhaust fan (rear, left).

SC187 B
Scanner unit exhaust fan motor defective
MCU defective
SIB defective
Scanner Unit Fan Error: Scanner Motor Cooling Fan
The MCU issued a lock signal for the scanner motor cooling fan.

SC188 B
Scanner unit exhaust fan motor defective
MCU defective
SIB defective
D059/D060/D061 4-18 SM
SC Tables: 1xx
Main Machine Model Entry Error
The 11-digit serial number stored in memory is not the correct number
for this model.
SC195 B
Check the entered serial number with SP5811.
If the serial number is incorrect, contact your supervisor.
NVRAM defective
BICU replaced without original NVRAM on the Controller board.
shooting
Trouble-
SM 4-19 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 2xx
4.4 SC TABLES: 2XX
Polygon Motor Error 1: ON Timeout
The polygon mirror motor did not reach its operating speed within 20 s
after the polygon motor switched on.
SC202 B Connection between the polygon mirror motor control board and the
motor is loose, broken, or defective
Polygon mirror motor defective
Polygon mirror motor control board defective
BICU defective
Polygon Motor Error 2: OFF Timeout
The polygon mirror motor did not turn off within 3 s after the motor was
switched off.
SC203 B Connection between polygon mirror motor and its drive board is
loose, broken, or defective
Polygon mirror motor drive board defective
BICU defective
D059/D060/D061 4-20 SM
SC Tables: 2xx
Polygon Motor Error 3: XSCRDY Signal Error
The machine detected that the polygon mirror motor XSCRDY signal
went inactive :
While an image was being created
During the output of a synchronous laser detection signal
SC204 B Switch the machine off/on (problem was probably due to electronic
noise)
Replace the harness if cycling the machine off/on does not solve the
problem
Polygon motor defective
BICU defective
shooting
Trouble-
Polygon Motor Error 4: Unstable Timeout
The machine detected that the polygon mirror motor signal went inactive
at some time other than:
While an image was being created
During the output of a synchronous laser detection signal
SC205 B Switch the machine off/on (problem was probably due to electronic
noise)
Replace the harness if cycling the machine off/on does not solve the
problem
Polygon motor defective
BICU defective
SM 4-21 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 2xx
Synchronization Detector Error 1: LD0
When LD0 fired with the polygon mirror motor rotating at normal speed,
an synchronous detection signal was not output within 250 ms. This can
occur when the machine recovers from the energy save mode and there
is no paper available.
Make sure there is paper in the trays

SC220 B
Cycle the machine off/on
Harness connector of the laser synchronization detector board is
loose, broken, defective
Laser synchronization detection board defective or installed
improperly
LD unit defective
BICU defective
Synchronization Detection Error 2: LD1
When LD1 fired with the polygon mirror motor rotating at normal speed, a
synchronous detection signal was not output.
Note: This can occur when the machine recovers from the energy save
mode and there is no paper available.
Make sure there is paper in the trays

SC221 B
Harness connector of the laser synchronization detector board is
loose, broken, defective
Laser synchronization detection board defective or installed
improperly
LD unit defective
BICU defective
D059/D060/D061 4-22 SM
SC Tables: 2xx
FGATE Error 1: Signal Failed to Turn On
The FGATE signal did not switch on within 1 s of when the lasers were
supposed to start writing the image.
SC230 B Cycle the machine off/on

Check the harnesses, connectors of the BICU, Controller
GAVD on the BICU defective
Controller defective
BICU defective
FGATE Error 2: Signal Failed to Turn Off
The FGATE signal did not switch off within 7 s of when the lasers started
shooting
Trouble-
writing the image, or remained off at the beginning of the next job.

Check the harnesses, connectors of the BICU, Controller
GAVD on the BICU defective
BICU defective
LD Error
The LD error terminal of the LDB asserted an error.

LDB harness connectors loose, broken, defective
LDB defective
BICU defective
SM 4-23 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 3
4.5 SC TABLES: 3
Charge Corona Error 1: Charge Leak
An abnormal detection signal (H) was detected for more than 60 ms.
During this time, the detected voltage remained below –4V for more than
50 ms.)
SC300 B
CGB power pack harness connectors loose, broken, defective
Corona wire caps loose, missing
CGB power pack defective
Charge corona unit connectors loose, broken, defective
Charge Corona Error 2: Grid Leak
A high feedback voltage (H) for the charge corona 60 ms. Also, during this
time, the voltage of the charge grid remained less than –400V
SC304 B

Charge unit set incorrectly (not locked in place)
Charge unit connector loose, broken, defective
Charge Corona Wire Cleaner Error
One of these occurred after the charge corona cleaner motor was
switched on:
The charge corona wire cleaner motor remained locked within 10 sec
SC305 C after the motor switched on.
The charge corona wire cleaner motor failed to lock within 45 s after the
start of cleaning.

Charge corona wire cleaner motor defective
D059/D060/D061 4-24 SM
SC Tables: 3
Pre-Charge Output Error 1: Leak
An abnormal signal (H) was detected continuously for 60 ms. During this
time the pre-charge unit voltage remained less than –3 kV for more than
SC312 C
50 ms.
Pre-charge unit set incorrectly.

Pre-charge unit contact is broken or defective.
Pre-Charge Output Error 1: Grid Output
An abnormal signal (H) was detected continuously for 60 ms. During this
time the pre-charge grid voltage remained less than –400V for more than
SC313 C
50 ms.
Pre-charge unit set incorrectly
shooting
Trouble-
Pre-charge unit contact is broken or defective
Development Bias Error
An abnormal detection signal (H) was detected continuously for 60 ms.

During this time the voltage exceeded –90µA for more than 50 ms.
SC320 D
Development power pack connectors loose, broken, defective

Development unit connectors loose, broken, defective
Development power pack defective
Development Unit Set Error
The development is not installed, or it is installed incorrectly. The

development unit set switch is checked every time the machine is turned
on and when the front doors are closed.
SC344 C
Pull out the development unit.

Install it again.
Close the front doors
SM 4-25 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 3
TD Sensor Output Error 1: Vt Above Upper Limit
The result of the check of the TD sensor output (Vt) after every copy for
10 continuous copies was Vt ≥ 4.0V (out of range).
SC360 C
TD sensor dirty or defective
TD sensor connector to BICU loose, broken, defective
IOB defective
BICU defective
TD Sensor Output Error 2: Vt Below Lower Limit
The result of the check of the TD sensor output (Vt) after every copy for
10 continuous copies was Vt ≤ 0.5V (out of range).
SC364 C
TD sensor dirty or defective
TD sensor connector to BICU loose, broken, defective
IOB defective
BICU defective
TD Sensor Adjustment Error 1
The value for Vref could not be set because:

The target voltage could not reach 2.5V with maximum PWM (255)
application
The target voltage exceeded 2.5V with minimum PWM (0)
SC368 D
application.
TD sensor connector or harness to the IOB loose, broken, defective

TD sensor defective
IOB defective
BICU defective
D059/D060/D061 4-26 SM
SC Tables: 3
TD Sensor Adjustment Error 2
The TD sensor output voltage is not adjusted to 2.5 ± 0.1 V within 3 min.
during initialization of the TD sensor with SP2801.
Note: When an abnormal condition occurs, “0” is displayed for SP2906
SC372 D
(Vcont Manual Setting).
TD sensor connector, harness loose, broken, defective

TD sensor defective
IOB defective
Drum Motor Error
The drum motor lock signal is longer than 2 s while the drum motor is on.
shooting
Trouble-
SC396 B Drum motor connector, harness loose, broken, defective
Drum motor defective
Mechanical problem with the drum unit, transfer belt, toner collection
unit
SM 4-27 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 4
4.6 SC TABLES: 4
ID Sensor Error 1: Background Adjustment Error
One of the following ID sensor output voltages was detected for Vsg (the
reading of the bare drum surface) at ID sensor initialization.
The reading was less than 4V at PWM=255 (Maximum PWM).
The reading was over 4V at PWM=0 (Minimum PWM)
Note: The most recent correct PWM value is used for control.
The value displayed by SP3103 (ID Sensor Output Display) is the actual,
SC400 C incorrect value.
ID sensor harness, connector was loose, broken, defective

ID sensor dirty
ID sensor defective
IOB defective
BICU defective
LD unit defective
CGB/PPG power pack defective
SC401 C ID Sensor Error 2: Background Output Error
One of the following conditions was detected when checking the ID

sensor pattern:
Vsg ≤ 2.5 V
Vsg= 0 V
The ID sensor output voltage = 5.0 V and PWM signal input to ID
sensor = 0
Notes:
Vsg is the ID sensor output after checking the bare drum surface in
the ID sensor pattern.
The SC code is not displayed; only the logging data is incremented.
When this SC is issued, only the toner density sensor output (Vt)
(even for jobs less than 10 copies) and Vref is not updated.
After an abnormal condition is detected, SP3103 (ID Sensor Output
Display) shows "Vsp = Vsg = 0" (or "5.0V").
D059/D060/D061 4-28 SM
SC Tables: 4
If the next ID sensor pattern check is normal, this restores normal

operation.
ID sensor harness, connector is loose, broken, or defective

ID sensor dirty
ID sensor defective
IOB defective
LD Unit defective
BICU defective
CGB/PPG power pack defective
ID Sensor Error 3: ID Sensor Pattern Error
One of the following ID sensor output voltages was detected when

checking the covered area of the ID sensor pattern:
shooting
Trouble-
Vsp ≥ 2.5 V
Vsp = 0 V
Notes:
SC402 C
operation.

ID sensor dirty
ID sensor defective
IOB defective
LD Unit defective
BICU defective
SM 4-29 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 4
ID Sensor Error 4: ID Sensor Pattern Not Detected
At the ID sensor pattern check of the covered area of the ID sensor

pattern, the value of the edge voltage was not 2.5 V for 1.5 seconds.
Notes:
SC406 C
operation.

ID sensor dirty
ID sensor defective
IOB defective
LD Unit defective
BICU defective
Drum Potential Sensor Error 1: Vd Adjustment Error
When Vd (drum potential of the latent ID sensor pattern before exposure)

was adjusted during auto process control:
After 5 adjustments by Vg (voltage output of the charge corona unit) Vd
failed to attain the value of SP2001 006 (total corona voltage for Photo
Mode at normal speed) or Vd failed to attain the value of SP2001 012 for
SC420 C the CPM down mode (but not Photo Mode).
Drum potential sensor harness, connector is loose, broken, defective

Drum potential sensor dirty
Drum potential sensor defective
Drum connector, harness loose, broken, defective
BICU defective
D059/D060/D061 4-30 SM
SC Tables: 4
Drum Potential Sensor Error 2: VL Error
At the beginning of auto process control, the VL detected after creation of

the ID sensor pattern was greater than 550.
Note: VL is the drum potential after maximum laser exposure,
SC424 C determined by reading the white patches of the potential sensor pattern.
To change VL, the machine adjusts the input current of the laser diodes.
Poor drum ground connection

Drum worn
LD unit dirty
Drum Potential Sensor Error 3: Vh Adjustment Error
shooting
Trouble-
The correct value for Vh (standard drum potential for halftones) could not
be detected after 45 consecutive adjustments of LD power:
The value for SP3904-1 could not be attained for normal speed, or the
value of SP3904-2 could not be attained for low speed mode.
The LD power adjustments exceeded the upper and lower limits
(+185 and –70).
SC428 C
Drum potential sensor harness, connector is loose, broken, defective

Drum potential sensor dirty
Drum unit connector, harness loose, broken, defective
LD unit defective
BICU defective
SM 4-31 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 4
PCU Set Error
The PCU is not installed, or it is installed incorrectly. The PCU unit set
switch is checked every time the machine is turned on and when the front
doors are closed.
SC435 C
Pull out the PCU unit.

Install it again.
Drum Potential Sensor Error 4: Vd Detection Error
During execution of auto process control for normal speed and CPM
SC437 C down mode when VD was detected VG= -900V
Do SP3902 001 to determine if auto process control has been turned

off. If this SP is off, turn it on.
Drum Potential Sensor Error 5: ID Sensor Pattern Potential
When the ID sensor potential (Vp) was measured after a cold start, or at
the end of a job, the total of this reading and the value of the setting of
SP2201-4 did not exceed 900V (development unit power pack output)
after 3 samplings.

SC438 B BICU defective
IOB defective
Poor drum unit connection or connectors defective
LD defective
Poor drum cleaning ground connection
Drum worn
Dirty laser optics
D059/D060/D061 4-32 SM
SC Tables: 4
Drum Potential Sensor Error 6: Vh Abnormal
When the LD power was adjusted during auto process control, the first
value detected for the Vh pattern (used to set standard drum potential for
SC439 B halftones) exceeded 720V.
Drum potential sensor harness, connector loose, broken, defective

LD unit defective (pattern could not be created)
Transfer Output Error
One of the following conditions was detected for 17 counts (about 100
ms) when the transfer voltage was applied with the main motor operating:
shooting
Trouble-
The value for the transfer current was set for 70µA, but the feedback
voltage was less than 0.75V (less than 1.5 KV).
When the feedback current was less than 0.16V (10µA), the feedback
voltage was less than 0.15V (less than 300V) due to a poor input
SC440 B
connection.
When the feedback current was less than 0.16V (10µA), the feedback
voltage was less than 3.05V (over 6.1 KV) due to a poor output
connection.
Transfer power pack harness, connectors loose or broken

Transfer power pack harness or connectors have short circuited
Transfer power pack is defective
Development Motor Lock
While the motor is operating, the motor lock signal remained LOW for 2 s
SC441 D
Development motor lock due to overload

IOB defective
SM 4-33 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 4
Toner Collection Unit Lock
The toner collection coil rotation sensor did not detect rotation of the coil
within 5 s after the drum motor turned on due to toner clumping in the
collection unit.
Notes:
The drive gear that drives the cleaning and toner transport
mechanism is equipped with a torque limiter. If the rotation of the
toner collection coil becomes overloaded, the torque limiter
SC487 B
disengages the drive gear.
The sensor (a photo interrupter) detects the change in the position of
the gear triggers the error.
This SC code occurs after 8K pages have been fed after a message
alerts the operator that the toner collection unit needs replacement.
After the 8K pages have fed, the machine will stop.
Enter "0" for SP2950-1 then cycle the machine off/on

Empty or replace the toner collection bottle.
2nd Cleaning Blade Operation Error
The push-switch signal from

2nd blade solenoid connector loose,
SC488 C the cleaning blade solenoid
broken defective
was incorrect. The signal is
2nd blade solenoid defective
detected 1 sec. after the
Release mechanism defective
solenoid operates.
Drum Cleaning Unit Set Error
The drum cleaning unit is not set

Remove the drum cleaning unit
SC489 C properly. The drum cleaning unit set
Install it again.
switch is checked every time the
machine is turned on and when the
front doors are closed.
D059/D060/D061 4-34 SM
SC Tables: 4
Polygonal Mirror Motor Cooling Fan Motor Lock
The polygonal mirror motor cooling fan motor lock signal remains HIGH
for 5 s while the polygonal mirror motor cooling fan motor is on.
SC491 B
Drive mechanism overload

Obstruction has stopped the fan
Fan connector loose, broken, defective
Development Unit Suction Motor Lock
While the development unit toner suction motor is operating, the lock
SC492 D sensor output did not change for 1 s An electrical overload in the PCB
inside the motor unit has caused the motor to malfunction.
shooting
Trouble-
Replace the motor.
Toner Transport Unit Error
One of the following has occurred during toner transport from the toner
bank to the toner supply cylinder:
An obstruction (clumped toner, other foreign material) is blocking the
toner supply coil
The coil torque limiter is broken
Toner bottle end sensor is broken
SC494 B

Clean the toner transport coil, tubing, toner supply clutch, torque
limiter
Defective toner supply coil
Defective toner supply tube
Defective toner supply clutch
Defective torque limiter
SM 4-35 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 4
Toner Bottle Unit Error
During toner transport from the toner supply cylinder to the toner hopper,
the toner hopper sensor cannot detect toner even after the toner supply
pump switches on for 2 s and switches off 10 times during copying.
Toner supply pump motor harness, connector loose, broken,

defective
SC495 B
Toner supply pump motor defective
Blockage in the toner supply tube
Toner supply tube disconnected
Blockage in the toner supply cylinder
Toner-end sensor in the toner supply cylinder defective
Agitator in the toner supply cylinder defective
Toner supply cylinder agitator motor defective
OPC Temperature Sensor Error
The OPC temperature sensor detected a temperature of less than -20°C

or greater than 60°C.
-or-
At temperature detection, the A/D input voltage was less than 0.05V or
SC498 B
was greater than 4.95V
OPC temperature sensor dirty

OPC temperature sensor harness or connector loose, broken,
defective
OPC temperature sensor or PCB defective
D059/D060/D061 4-36 SM
SC Tables: 5xx
4.7 SC TABLES: 5XX
1st Tray Lift Mechanism
One of the following conditions is detected in the 1st tray (tandem tray) of
the main machine:
The 1st tray lift sensor is not activated for 10 s after the 1st tray lift
motor turned on.
Upper limit is not detected within 10 s while the paper tray is lifting
during paper feed.
SC501 D
The 1st tray lift sensor is already activated when the 1st tray is placed
in the machine.
Poor 1st tray lift motor connection

Remaining paper or another obstruction has stopped the tray and
shooting
Trouble-
motor
1st pick-up solenoid connector is loose
1st pick-up solenoid is blocked by an obstruction
2nd Tray Lift Malfunction
One of the following conditions is detected in the 2nd tray of the main
machine:
The 2nd tray lift sensor is not activated for 10 s after the 2nd tray lift
motor turned on.
during paper feed.
SC502 D
The 2nd tray lift sensor is already activated when the 2nd tray is
placed in the machine.
Poor 2nd tray lift motor connection

motor
2nd pick-up solenoid connector is loose
2nd pick-up solenoid is blocked by an obstruction
SM 4-37 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 5xx
3rd Tray Lift Malfunction
One of the following conditions is detected in the 3rd tray of the main
machine:
The 3rd tray lift sensor is not activated for 10 s after the 3rd tray lift
motor turned on.
during paper feed.
SC503 D
The 3rd tray lift sensor is already activated when the 3rd tray is
placed in the machine
Poor 3rd tray lift motor connection

motor
3rd pick-up solenoid connector is loose
3rd pick-up solenoid is blocked by an obstruction
4th Tray (LCT Tray 1) Lift Malfunction
One of the following conditions is detected in the 4th tray:

The LCT 1st lift sensor is not activated for 10 s after the LCT 1st tray
lift motor turned on.
during paper feed.
SC504 D The LCT 1st lift sensor is already activated when the LCT 1st tray is
Poor LCT 1st tray lift motor connection

motor
LCT 1st pick-up solenoid connector is loose
LCT 1st pick-up solenoid is blocked by an obstruction
D059/D060/D061 4-38 SM
SC Tables: 5xx
One of the following conditions is detected in the 5th tray:

The LCT 2nd lift sensor is not activated for 10 s after the LCT 2nd
tray lift motor turned on.
during paper feed.
SC505 D The LCT 2nd lift sensor is already activated when the LCT 2nd tray is
Poor LCT 2nd tray lift motor connection

motor
LCT 2nd pick-up solenoid connector is loose
shooting
Trouble-
LCT 2nd pick-up solenoid is blocked by an obstruction
One of the following conditions is detected in the 6th tray.

The LCT 3rd lift sensor is not activated for 20 s after the LCT 3rd tray
lift motor turned on.
during paper feed.
SC506 D The LCT 3rd lift sensor is already activated when the LCT 3rd tray is
Poor LCT 3rd tray lift motor connection

motor
LCT 3rd pick-up solenoid connector is loose
LCT 3rd pick-up solenoid is blocked by an obstruction
SM 4-39 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 5xx
7th Tray (Bypass Tray) Lift Mechanism
One of the following conditions is detected in the optional bypass tray.

The bypass tray lift sensor is not activated for 10 s after the tray lift
motor turned on.
during paper feed.
SC507 D The bypass tray lift sensor is already activated when the bypass tray
was placed in the machine.
Poor bypass tray lift motor connection

motor
Bypass tray pick-up solenoid connector is loose
Bypass tray pick-up solenoid is blocked by an obstruction
Exit Junction Gate HP Sensor Error
SC529 C The exit junction gate did not return to its home position.
Fusing Motor Lock
A fusing motor lock signal is detected for more than 2 s during operation
SC531 B
due to an electrical overload in the motor driver board.
Motor driver board defective. Replace motor.
D059/D060/D061 4-40 SM
SC Tables: 5xx
SC532-1 B 4th Tray Front Fan Error
SC532-2 B 4th Tray Rear Fan Error

LCIT (D453)
A problem has occurred with a fan and it is not operating. The tray
where the fan is not operating cannot feed paper until the problem has
been corrected.
Note:
shooting
Trouble-
Each tray has two fans. These fans are used to help separate the
paper from the top of the stack.
Paper separation will not occur unless both fans are operating
correctly.
Only the tray where the error occurred cannot feed paper. The
other trays can continue to feed paper.
Fan is disconnected
Fan harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Fan defective.
Fusing Thermistor Open
The fusing temperature detected by the thermistor was below 7°C for 15
SC541 A s.
Fusing thermistor defective or out of position

Poor thermistor terminal connection
SM 4-41 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 5xx
Fusing Temperature Warm-up Error
One of the following occurred:

D059/D060: Hot roller did not reach target operation temperature
within 360 sec. after the machine was powered or after the doors
were closed.
D061: Hot roller did not reach target operation temperature within 465
sec. after the machine was powered on after the doors were closed.
Fusing temperature rose only 5°C toward the fusing temperature
SC542 A
within 20 s after the machine was powered on, or after the doors were
closed.
Fusing temperature rose only 5°C toward the fusing temperature
within 20 s after thermistor started monitoring hot roller temperature.
(The thermistors start monitoring 25 s after the hot roller starts
rotating.)
Fusing lamp(s) disconnected

Thermistor out of position
Fusing Overheat Error 1: Software
A fusing temperature of over 210°C is detected for 5 s by the fusing

thermistor. This prevents the fusing lamps from switching on without a
SC543 A fusing lamp trigger signal.
AC drive board defective (TRIAC short)

BICU defective
BICU firmware defective
D059/D060/D061 4-42 SM
SC Tables: 5xx
Fusing Overheat Error 2: Hardware
The fusing temperature monitoring circuit detects abnormal fusing

temperature.
SC544 A
AC drive board defective (TRIAC short)

BICU defective
BICU firmware defective
Fusing Overheat Error 3: Continuous Lamp On
After warm-up and while the hot roller is not rotating, the fusing lamps
SC545 A remain on at full power for 45 s (D059/D060) 90 s (D061).
Fusing thermistor out of position
shooting
Trouble-
One or more fusing lamp is disconnected
Zero-Cross Signal Not Detected
The applied bandwidth was not within range:

Where the power supply is 50 Hz, the detected bandwidth was below
45 Hz or above 54 Hz.
SC547 A Where the power supply is 60 Hz, the detected bandwidth was below
55 Hz or above 65 Hz.
Noise on the ac power line

If the problem continues, install a noise filter
Zero-Cross Signal Over
Noise was detected on the power supply line.

SC557 C

If the problem continues, install a noise filter
SM 4-43 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 5xx
Fusing Unit Jam Error
The paper cooling job time sensor detected paper late for 3 counts.
This SC only occurs if SP1159 is on, and a jam occurred in the fusing unit
SC559 A for three consecutive sheets of paper.
Remove the paper that is jammed in the fusing unit.

Make sure that the fusing unit is clean and has no obstructions in the
paper feed path.
De-curl effect adjustment motor error Decurl Unit (D457)
The stepper motor in the de-curler/purge unit that applies the pressure on
the de-curler soft roller to adjust the de-curling effect did not return the
de-curler roller to its home position at the end of the operation.
SC584 B A foreign object is interfering with operation of the motor

Motor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Soft roller HP sensor dirty
Sensor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Sensor defective
Double-Feed Detection Error
Double-feed detection components failed the initial check. The initial

check is done when:
The main machine is turned on
SC585 C The main machine returns to full operation from energy save mode
The front doors are opened and closed.
Harness or connector loose, broken, defective

URB defective
Double-feed sensor defective
D059/D060/D061 4-44 SM
SC Tables: 5xx
High-precision registration CIS error LCIT (D452/D453)
The CIS mounted above the paper path in the LCIT issued a paper
SC586 C detection signal when there was no paper in the LCIT paper path.
Exposed surface of CIS dirty

Clean the CIS
Toner Bank Motor Error
An abnormal signal was received from the toner bank motor.

SC592 B
Toner bank motor defective
Bank motor connector loose
shooting
Trouble-
Mechanical overload on the drive mechanism
Toner Suction Motor Replace Alert
The total operation time of the motor exceeded 600 hours.

SC593 D Note: A near-end message appears on the operation panel when the
service life of the motor exceeds 570 hours.
The toner suction motor has reached the end of its service life.
SM 4-45 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 6xx
4.8 SC TABLES: 6XX
Communication Error Between BICU and MCU
One or more of the following occurred:

The BICU cannot communicate with the MCU within 100 ms after
power on after 3 tries.
A BREAK signal was detected after connection between the BICU
SC601 B and MCU.
After a communication error, three tries to communicate with the
MCU failed.
Poor connection between BICU and MCU

BICU defective
MCU defective
ADF Communication Error
No reponse from the ADF to the ACK signal issued by the IPU.
Poor connection between the IPU and ADF

SC620 B Electrical noise interfering with communication between electrical
components
ADF harness or connector loose, broken, defective
ADF defective
IPU on BICU defective
D059/D060/D061 4-46 SM
SC Tables: 6xx
Communication Error Between BICU and Finisher
The BICU cannot communicate with the finisher properly. There was no
response from the ADF 100 ms after the ACK signal was sent to the ADF.
SC625 B Three attempts to resend the data failed.
Finisher door was opened while stacking/stapling was in progress.

Poor connection between the BICU board and the finisher main
board
Communication Error Between BICU and Finisher
A break signal (LOW) was detected.
Poor connection between the BICU board and the finisher main board
SC626 B
Finisher main board defective
shooting
Trouble-
BICU board defective
External electrical noise on the interface cable caused the serial line to
become unstable
SC632 B Charge Unit Device Error 1 Japan Only GW
Engine-to-controller communication error GW
The controller sent a frame to the main machine engine but there was
no response as demanded by RAPI protocol. The frame was sent 3
times at 100 ms intervals. This SC was issued after the 3rd attempt
SC641 B
failed.
Examine the connection between the controller and the engine

board.
Replace the engine board if the error is frequent.
SM 4-47 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 6xx
NRS Modem Communication Error GW
One of the following factors could be the cause of this error:

In the User Tools, check the settings for the dial-up user name and
dial-up password.
Modem has been disconnected.
SC650 D Modem board disconnected.
Check the following for a machine that is using Cumin (NRS modem):
An error was returned during the dialup connection
A network was detected at startup
At startup, the machine detected that the NIB was disabled, or did not
detect a modem board
For more details about this SC code error, execute SP5990 to print an SMC report so you
can read the error code. The error code is not displayed on the operation panel. Here is a
list of error codes:
D059/D060/D061 4-48 SM
SC Tables: 6xx
Error Problem Solution
In the User Tools, check the dial-up user and

1 Failure to certify dial-up
dial-up password settings
Check the setting of SP5816 160 to determine

whether the setting for the AT command is
4 Illegal modem setting
correct. If this SP setting is correct, then the
problem is a bug in the software.
The problem is on the external power supply

Poor connection due to low power
5 line, so there is no corrective action on the
supply on the line.
machine.
Data in the NVRAM became
shooting
Trouble-
corrupted when the network Use SP5985 1 and set the NIC to "0" (Disable)
11
enable switch and Cumin-M were to disable the network board.
enabled at the same time.
The modem board could not

12 Replace the modem board.
enable the NIB.
Illegal Remote Service Dial-up GW
An expected error occurred when Cumin-M dialed up the NRS Center.

SC651 C
Software bug
No action is required because only the count is logged
SM 4-49 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 6xx
Engine Startup Error GW
At power on or after the machine leaves the energy conservation mode:

ENGRDY signal does not assert
IPURDY signal does not assert
After power on and the prescribed time has elapsed:
No EC response from the engine
No PC response from the engine
No SC response from the engine
SC670 B During machine operation mode:
Write to Rapi drive failure (could not locate destination on the PCI)
After the /ENGRDY signal asserts with no effect.
BICU Controller Board disconnected

BICU board defective
Controller board defective
Mother board defective
Software error; switch off/on, if that fails, change the engine firmware
PSU-E or PSU-C defective
Illegal Engine Board GW
SC671 D An illegal engine board was detected by the firmware at power on.
Replace BICU
D059/D060/D061 4-50 SM
SC Tables: 6xx
Controller Startup Error GW
The line between the controller board and the operation panel does not
open correctly when the machine is powered on, or after the machine was
powered on communication between the controller and operation panel is
suspended.
The controller board and operation panel could not exchange the
SC672 B handshake (FDH) and acknowledge (FEH) signals within 15 s of the
operation panel reset after power on, or after 2 retries there was no
response to the transmission line confirmation command issued every 30
s from the operation panel to the controller board.

Controller board installed incorrectly
shooting
Trouble-
Operation panel harness connection loose or incorrect
SM 4-51 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-1
4.9 SC TABLES: 7XX-1
ADF Pickup Roller Release Malfunction
The pick-up roller HP sensor does not activate or de-activate when the
pick-up motor turns on.
SC701 B HP sensor connector, harness loose, broken, defective

Pick-up motor connector, harness loose, broken defective
Pick-up roller HP sensor defective
Pick-up motor defective
ADF main control board defective
ADF Feed-In Motor Error
While the feed motor is operating, the encoder pulse signal is not
received within the specified time, or the paper size length encoder signal
cannot be detected within the specified time (the encoder is built into the
feed-in motor).
SC702 B
Feed-in motor connector, harness loose, broken, defective

Paper length sensor connector, harness loose, broken, defective
Feed-in motor defective
Paper length sensor or encoder is defective
D059/D060/D061 4-52 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-1
ADF Transport Belt Motor Error
The encoder pulse signal did not change within 100 ms after 3 attempts to
detect a change, causing a "P1" jam error.
SC703 B
Transport belt motor defective

Poor connection between the transport motor and ADF main board
ADF main board defective
ADF Feed-Out Motor Error
The encoder pulse signal did not change within 80 ms after 3 attempts to
detect a change, causing a "P2" jam error.
SC704 B
shooting
Trouble-
Feed-out motor defective
Poor connection between the feed-out motor and ADF main board
ADF Original Table Lift Malfunction
One of the following conditions was detected.

The bottom plate position sensor did not activate within 2.5 s when
the bottom plate motor lifted the original table.
The bottom plate HP sensor did not activate within 2.5 s when the
bottom plate motor lowered the original table.
SC705 B
The harnesses, connectors of the bottom plate position sensor,

bottom plate HP sensor, bottom plate motor loose, broken, defective
Bottom plate position sensor defective
Bottom plate HP sensor defective
Bottom plate motor defective
SM 4-53 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-1
Entrance Roller Motor Error Booklet Finisher (D434)
Motor stopped operating, due to a physical obstruction or another

problem.
SC720-1 B
Check for and remove any physical obstructions around the motor
and timing belts
Motor defective
Junction Gate Motor Error Booklet Finisher (D434)
One or both motors at the junction gates (stapler junction gate motor,
proof tray junction gate motor) stopped operating, due to a physical
obstruction or another problem.
SC720-2 B
Check for and remove any physical obstructions around the motor
and timing belt
Motor defective
Punch Roller Motor (Rear) Error Booklet Finisher (D434)

problem.
SC720-3 B Check for and remove any physical obstructions around the motor
and timing belts
Motor defective
D059/D060/D061 4-54 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-1
Registration Motor Error Booklet Finisher (D434)

problem.
SC720-4 B Check for and remove any physical obstructions around the motor
and timing belts
Motor defective
Front Jogger Fence Motor Booklet Finisher (D434)
The system did not detect the front jogger fence at its home position (or
shooting
Trouble-
out of its home position) within the prescribed time. The 1st occurrence
causes a jam, and the 2nd occurrence causes this SC code.
Check for and remove any obstructions around the jogger fence
SC721-1 B Motor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Front jogger fence HP sensor dirty
Front jogger fence HP sensor harness or connector loose, broken,
defective
Front jogger fence HP sensor defective
Front jogger fence motor defective
SM 4-55 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-1
Rear Jogger Fence Motor Booklet Finisher (D434)
The system did not detect the rear jogger fence at its home position (or
out of its home position) within the prescribed time. The 1st occurrence
Check for and remove any obstructions around the jogger fence
SC721-2 B Motor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Rear jogger fence HP sensor dirty
Rear jogger fence HP sensor harness or connector loose, broken,
defective
Rear jogger fence HP sensor defective
Rear jogger fence motor defective
Positioning Roller Rotation Motor Error Finishers B830/D434
The motor that drives the rotation of the positioning sponge roller is not
operating.

Check for and remove any obstruction that blocks the operation of the
roller or roller arm
SC723 D
Motor harness loose, defective
Positioning roller HP sensor dirty
Positioning roller HP sensor harness or connector loose, broken,
defective
Motor defective
Sensor defective
D059/D060/D061 4-56 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-1
Positioning Roller Motor Finishers B830/D434
The motor that lowers and raises the positioning roller above the stapling
tray not operating.

Check for and remove any obstruction that blocks the operation of the
roller arm
SC724 D
Motor harness loose, defective
Positioning roller HP sensor harness or connector loose, broken,
defective
Motor defective
Sensor defective
shooting
Trouble-
Exit Guide Motor Error Finishers B830/D434
The motor that opens and closes the exit guide at the shift tray exit is not
operating correctly.

Check for and remove any obstruction that interferes with the
SC725 D operation of the exit guide
Exit guide plate HP sensor dirty
Exit guide plate HP sensor harness or connector loose, broken,
defective
Motor defective
Sensor defective
SM 4-57 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-1
Shift Jogger Retraction Motor Error 1 Finishers B830/D434
The drag roller arm with the sponge roller did not return to its home
position within the prescribed time.
SC726 D Arm blocked by an obstruction

Motor harness loose, broken defective
HP sensor harness loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
HP sensor defective
Shift Jogger Retraction Motor Error 2 Finishers B830/D434
The side fences at the exit of the finisher did not leave (or arrive at) their
home positions within the prescribed time. The 1st occurrence causes a
jam, and the 2nd occurrence causes this SC code.
If the motor is rotating, positioning roller HP sensor loose, broken,

SC728 D defective
If the motor is not rotating:
Remove any obstruction blocking movement
Positioning roller motor overloaded due to obstruction
Positioning roller motor disconnected, defective
Main control board connectors loose, broken, defective
D059/D060/D061 4-58 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-1
Lower Transport Motor Error Finishers B830
No encoder pulse signal is detected for the lower transport motor within
the prescribed time. The 1st failure issues an original jam message, and
the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
SC730 D
Lower transport motor disconnected, defective
Finisher connection to lower transport motor loose, defective
Lower transport motor blocked by an obstruction
Lower transport motor defective
Proof (Upper) Tray Exit Motor Error Finishers B830/D434
Motor drive board output abnormal, or short circuit detected on the board.
shooting
Trouble-
The 1st failure issues this SC code.
SC731 B
Motor disconnected, defective
Finisher connection to motor loose, defective
Motor blocked by an obstruction
Motor defective
Shift Tray Exit Motor Error Finishers B830/D434
The shift tray exit motor is not operating.
SC732 D Motor harness loose, broken, defective

Motor is blocked by an obstruction
Motor defective
SM 4-59 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-1
Stapler Exit Motor Error Finishers B830/D434
The stapler exit motor is not operating.
SC733 D Motor harness loose, broken, defective

Motor defective
Proof Tray Junction Gate Motor Error Finishers B830/D434
The proof tray JG HP sensor did not detect the junction gate at (or out of)
its home position within 2 s.
Proof junction gate HP sensor dirty

SC734 B Sensor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Proof junction gate motor harness or connector loose, broken,
defective
Sensor defective
Motor defective
Stapler Junction Gate Motor Error Finishers B830/D434
The stapler JG HP sensor did not detect the stapler junction gate at (or
out of) its home position within the prescribed time. The 1st occurrence
Stapler junction gate HP sensor dirty

SC735 B
Stapler junction gate motor harness or connector loose, broken,
defective
Sensor defective
Motor defective
D059/D060/D061 4-60 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-1
Pre-Stack Junction Gate Motor Error Finishers B830
The pre-stack junction gate sensor did not detect the pre-stack junction
gate in (or out of) its home position within the prescribed time.
Pre-stack junction gate HP sensor dirty

SC736 D Sensor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Pre-stack junction gate motor harness or connector loose, broken,
defective
Sensor defective
Motor defective
Pre-Stack Motor Error Finishers B830/D434
shooting
Trouble-
The pre-stack motor that moves the pre-stack roller is not operating.
Motor harness loose, broken, defective

SC737 D Pre-stack roller HP sensor dirty
Pre-stack roller HP sensor harness or connector loose, broken,
defective
Motor defective
Sensor defective
SM 4-61 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-1
Pre-Stack JG Motor Error Finishers B830/D434
The pre-stack JG motor that operates the pre-stack junction gate is not
operating. The pre-stack junction gate sensor did not detect the junction
gate in (or out of) its home position within the prescribed time.
SC738 D Pre-stack JG motor harness or connector loose, broken, defective

Pre-stack JG HP sensor dirty
Motor defective
Sensor defective
Finisher Corner Stapler Motor Error Finishers B830/D434
The stapler motor did not switch off within the prescribed time. The 1st
detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC
code.
Number of sheets in the stack exceeded the limit for stapling

SC740 D If error occurred during stapling, stapler rotation sensor 1 defective
(replace stapler)
If error did not occur during stapling: staple jam:
1. Motor blocked by an obstruction
2. Stapler motor harness loose, broken, defective
3. Corner stapler motor defective
4. Finisher main board defective
D059/D060/D061 4-62 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-1
Finisher Corner Stapler Rotation Motor Error Finishers B830/D434
The stapler did not return to its home position (or did not leave its home
position) within the specified time. The 1st occurrence causes a jam, and
the 2nd occurrence causes this SC code.
If the motor is running,

SC741 D 1. Stapler rotation home position sensor harnesses are broken,
loose, or defective
2. Stapler rotation home position sensors are defective
If the motor is not running:
1. Motor is blocked by an obstruction
2. Motor harness is loose, broken, defective
3. Motor is defective
shooting
Trouble-
Corner Stapler Movement Motor Error Finishers B830/D434
The stapler did not return to its home position (or leave its home position)
within the specified time after stapling. The 1st occurrence causes a jam,
and the 2nd occurrence causes this SC code.
If the motor is running,

SC742 D 1. Stapler home position sensor harness is broken, loose, or
defective
2. Stapler home position sensor is defective
If the motor is not running:
1. Motor is blocked by an obstruction
2. Motor harness is loose, broken, defective
3. Motor is defective
SM 4-63 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-1
Booklet Stapler Motor Error Booklet Finisher (D434)
The booklet stapler motor did not start stapling within the prescribed time.
The 1st occurrence causes a jam, and the 2nd occurrence causes this SC
code.
SC743 D
Front motor harness loose, broken, defective

Front motor overloaded due to obstruction
Front motor defective
Feed-Out Belt Motor Error Finishers B830/D434
The stack feed-out belt HP sensor did not activate within the specified
time after the stack feed-out belt motor turned on. The 1st occurrence
If the motor is operating

SC745 D 1. Stack feed-out belt HP sensor harness loose, broken, defective
2. Sensor defective
If the motor is not operating:
1. Feed-out belt motor blocked by an obstruction
2. Motor harness loose, broken, defective
3. Motor defective
D059/D060/D061 4-64 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-1
Stack Plate Motor Error 1: Front Motor Finishers B830/D434
The stack plate HP sensor (front) did not activate within the prescribed
time after the motor turned on. The 1st occurrence causes a jam, and the
2nd occurrence causes this SC code.

SC746 D 1. Front stack plate HP sensor harness loose, broken, defective
2. Front stack plate HP sensor defective
3. Motor defective
4. Booklet finisher main board defective
shooting
Trouble-
Stack Plate Motor Error 2: Center Motor Finishers B830/D434
The stack plate HP sensor (center) did not activate within the prescribed

SC747 D 1. Center stack plate HP sensor harness loose, broken, defective
2. Center stack plate HP sensor defective
3. Motor defective
SM 4-65 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-1
Stack Plate Motor Error 3: Rear Motor Finishers B830/D434
The stack plate HP sensor (rear) did not activate within the prescribed

SC748 D 1. Rear stack plate HP sensor harness loose, broken, defective
2. Rear stack plate HP sensor defective
3. Motor defective
Proof Tray Lift Motor Error Finishers B830/D434
The shift tray paper height sensor did not change its status within the
prescribed time after the tray was raised or lowered. The 1st occurrence
SC750 D
Lift motor disconnected, defective

Paper height sensor disconnected, defective
Finisher main board connection to motor loose
D059/D060/D061 4-66 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-1
Drag Drive Motor Error Finishers B830/D434
The drag roller HP sensor did not detect the drag roller in (or out of) its
home position within the prescribed time. (The drag drive motor drives the
timing belt that rotates the drag roller at the shift tray exit.)

SC753 D 1. Drag roller HP sensor harness loose, broken, defective
2. Dray roller HP sensor defective
3. Motor defective
shooting
Trouble-
Drag Roller Motor Error Finishers B830/D434
The drag roller motor did not turn on. (The drag roller motor drives the
shaft that moves the drag roller left and right at the shift tray exit.)
SC754 D

Motor defective
Finisher control board defective
SM 4-67 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-1
Shift Motor Error Finishers B830/D434
The shift tray HP sensors did not detect the shift tray in (or out of) its
home position within the prescribed times. The 1st occurrence causes a
Note: In the Finisher SR5000 (B830), these sensors are the "half-turn"
sensors.
SC755 D If the motor is operating

1. HP sensor harnesses loose, broken, defective
2. HP sensor defective
3. Motor defective
Punch Motor Error Finishers B830/D434
The punch HP sensor did not detect the punch movement motor in (or
out) of its home position within the prescribed time. The 1st occurrence
If the motor is operating:

SC760 B 1. Punch HP sensor loose, broken, defective
2. Punch HP sensor defective
3. Motor defective
D059/D060/D061 4-68 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-1
Fold Plate Motor Error Booklet Finisher (D434)
The fold plate moves but:

The fold plate HP sensor did not detect it at the home position within the
specified time.
-or-
The plate remained at the home position longer than the specified time.
The 1st occurrence causes a jam, and the 2nd occurrence causes this SC
code.
SC761 D If the motor is operating:

1. Fold plate HP sensor dirty
2. Fold plate HP sensor harness or connector loose, broken,
defective
shooting
Trouble-
3. Fold plate HP sensor defective
1. Fold plate motor blocked by an obstruction
3. Motor defective
Punch Switch Motor Error Booklet Finisher (D434)
The punch switch motor failed to turn on within the specified time.
SC762 D
Check for and remove obstruction blocking the motor
Motor defective
SM 4-69 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-1
Punch Movement Motor Error Booklet Finisher (D434)
The punch movement HP sensor did not detect the punch at its home
position (or out of its home position) within the prescribed time. The 1st
occurrence causes a jam, and the 2nd occurrence causes this SC code.
SC763 D Check for and remove any obstructions that block the movement of
the punch unit
Punch movement HP sensor dirty
Sensor defective
Motor defective
Punch Registration (CIS) Error Booklet Finisher (D434)
The system detected an error at the CIS (Contact Image Sensor) inside
the punch unit during paper registration for paper punching.
SC764 D Check for and remove any obstructions that block the movement of
the punch unit
Punch CIS unit harness or connectors loose, broken, defective
CIS unit defective
Punch movement motor defective
Bottom Fence Lift Motor Error Booklet Finisher (D434)
The bottom fence in the booklet fold unit did not return to the home
position within the specified time.
Bottom fence mechanism overloaded due to an obstruction

SC765 D
Bottom fence HP sensor connector loose, broken, defective
Bottom fence HP sensor defective
Bottom fence lift motor connector loose, broken, defective
Bottom fence lift motor defective
Main control board defective
D059/D060/D061 4-70 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-1
Clamp Roller Retraction Motor Booklet Finisher (D434)
The clamp roller did not return to the home position within the specified
time.
Clamp roller mechanism overloaded due to an obstruction

SC766 D
Clamp roller HP sensor connector loose, broken, defective
Clamp roller HP sensor defective
Clamp roller retraction motor connector loose, broken, defective
Clamp roller retraction motor defective
Main control board defective
Stack JG Motor Booklet Finisher (D434)
The stack junction gate motor did not return to the home position
shooting
Trouble-
within the prescribed time.
Check junction gate for obstruction and remove it

SC767-1 D
Stack JG HP sensor connector loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
Stack JG motor connector loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
SM 4-71 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-1
Stack Transport Unit Motor Finishers D434
The stack transport unit HP sensor did not detect the stack transport
unit at (or out of) its home position within the prescribed time. The 1st
occurrence causes a jam, and the 2nd occurrence causes this SC
code.
Check for any obstruction around the motor and remove it

SC767-2 B
Stack transport unit motor harness or connector loose, broken,
defective
Stack transport unit HP sensor dirty
Sensor harness connector loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
Motor defective
Cover Interposer Lift Motor 1 Error CIT B835
In the first tray:

The upper limit sensor did not detect the bottom plate within the
specified time after the lift motor switched on to lift the bottom plate.
The lower limit sensor did not direct the bottom plate within the
specified time after the lift motor switched on to lower the bottom
plate.
SC770 D
Note: In both cases, 1 error count indicates a jam, 2 error counts issue
this SC code.
Lift motor, upper limit sensor, lower limit sensor harnesses,

connectors loose, broken, defective
Lift motor defective
Upper limit sensor defective
Lower limit sensor defective
D059/D060/D061 4-72 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-1
Cover Interposer Lift Motor 2 Error CIT B835
In the second tray:

The upper limit sensor did not detect the bottom plate within the
specified time after the lift motor switched on to lift the bottom plate.
The lower limit sensor did not direct the bottom plate within the
specified time after the lift motor switched on to lower the bottom
plate.
SC771 D
this SC code.
Lift motor, upper limit sensor, lower limit sensor harnesses,

connectors loose, broken, defective
Lift motor defective
shooting
Trouble-
Upper limit sensor defective
Lower limit sensor defective
Cover Interposer Pickup Motor 1 Error CIT B835
In the first tray:

While the pick-up roller motor was on, the pick-up roller HP sensor
did not detect the pick-up roller at the home position within the
specified number of pulses.
did not detect the pick-up roller at the home position above the
SC772 D specified number of pulses.
this SC code.
The pick-up motor, pick-up roller HP sensor harnesses, connectors

were loose, broken, defective
Pick-up motor overload due to an obstruction
SM 4-73 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-1
Cover Interposer Pickup Motor 2 Error CIT B835
In the second tray:

did not detect the pick-up roller at the home position within the
specified number of pulses.
did not detect the pick-up roller at the home position above the
SC773 D specified number of pulses.
this SC code.
The pick-up motor, pick-up roller HP sensor harnesses, connectors

were loose, broken, defective
Pick-up motor overload due to an obstruction
Top Fence Motor Error Finisher B830/D434
The top fence HP sensor did not detect the top fence at (or out of) the
home position within the prescribed time. The 1st occurrence causes a
If the top fence motor is operating:

1. Top fence HP sensor dirty
SC775 D
2. Sensor harness loose, broken, defective
3. Sensor defective
If the jogger top fence motor is not operating:
1. Top fence motor blocked by an obstruction
3. Motor defective
D059/D060/D061 4-74 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-1
Bottom Fence Motor Error Finisher B830/D434
The bottom fence HP sensor did not detect the bottom fence at (or out of)
the home position within the prescribed time. The 1st occurrence causes
a jam, and the 2nd occurrence causes this SC code.
If the bottom fence motor is operating:

1. Bottom fence HP sensor dirty
SC776 D
2. Sensor harness loose, broken, defective
3. Sensor defective
If the bottom fence motor is not operating:
1. Bottom fence motor blocked by an obstruction
3. Motor defective
shooting
Trouble-
Horizontal Transport Motor Error Multi Folder (D454)
The motor drive PCB detected an error at the motor.

SC778-1 B

Motor or motor drive board defective
Top Tray Exit Motor Multi Folder (D454)

SC778-2 B

SM 4-75 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-1
Top Tray JG Motor Multi Folder (D454)
The top tray JG HP sensor did not detect the top tray junction gate at
(or out of) its home position. The 1st occurrence causes a jam, and
SC778-3 B
Top tray JG HP sensor dirty
Top tray JG motor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
Entrance JG Motor Multi Folder (D454)
The entrance junction gate HP sensor did not detect the entrance
junction gate at (or out of) its home position. The 1st occurrence
SC778-4 B Entrance JG HP sensor dirty

Entrance JG motor harness or connector loose, broken,
defective
Sensor defective
D059/D060/D061 4-76 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-1
1st Stopper Motor Error Multi Folder (D454)
The 1st stopper HP sensor did not detect the 1st stopper in (or out of)
its home position within the prescribed time. The 1st occurrence
SC779 B
1st stopper HP sensor dirty
1st stopper motor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
shooting
Trouble-
SM 4-77 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-2
2nd Stopper Motor Error Multi Folder (D454)
The 2nd stopper HP sensor did not detect the 2nd stopper in (or out
of) its home position within the prescribed time. The 1st occurrence
SC783-1 B
2nd stopper HP sensor dirty
2nd stopper motor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
3rd Stopper Motor Error Multi Folder (D454)
The 3rd stopper HP sensor did not detect the 3rd stopper in (or out
SC783-2 B
3rd stopper HP sensor dirty
3rd stopper motor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
1st Fold Motor Error Multi Folder (D454)

SC783-3 B

D059/D060/D061 4-78 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-2
2nd Fold Motor Error Multi Folder (D454)

SC783-4 B

Crease Motor Error Multi Folder (D454)

SC783-5 B

shooting
Trouble-
Dynamic Roller Transport Motor Error Multi Folder (D454)

SC783-6 B

Reg. Roller Transport Motor Error Multi Folder (D454)

SC783-7 B

SM 4-79 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-2
Dynamic Roller Lift Motor Error Multi Folder (D454)
The dynamic roller HP sensor did not detect the dynamic roller in (or
out of) its home position within the prescribed time. The 1st
code.
SC783-8 B
Dynamic roller HP sensor dirty
Dynamic roller lift motor harness or connector loose, broken,
defective
Sensor defective
Registration Roller Release Motor Error Multi Folder (D454)
The registration roller HP sensor did not detect the registration roller
in (or out of) its home position within the prescribed time. The 1st
code.
SC783-9 B
Registration roller HP sensor dirty
Registration roller release motor harness or connector loose,
broken, defective
Sensor defective
D059/D060/D061 4-80 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-2
Fold Plate Motor Error Multi Folder (D454)
The fold plate HP sensor did not detect the fold plate in (or out of) its
home position within the prescribed time. The 1st occurrence causes
a jam, and the 2nd occurrence causes this SC code.
SC783-10 B
Fold plate HP sensor dirty
Fold plate motor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
Jogger Fence Motor Multi Folder (D454)
shooting
Trouble-
The jogger fence HP sensor did not detect the jogger fence in (or out
SC783-11 B Jogger fence HP sensor dirty

Jogger fence motor harness or connector loose, broken,
defective
Sensor defective
SM 4-81 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-2
Positioning Roller Motor Error Multi Folder (D454)
The positioning roller HP sensor did not detect the positioning roller
in (or out of) its home position within the prescribed time. The 1st
code.
SC783-12 B
Positioning roller motor harness or connector loose, broken,
defective
Sensor defective
FM2 Direct-Send JG Motor Multi Folder (D454)
The direct-send JG HP sensor did not detect the direct-send JG in

(or out of) its home position within the prescribed time. The 1st
code.
SC783-13 B
FM2 direct-send JG HP sensor dirty
FM2 direct-send JG motor harness or connector loose, broken,
defective
Sensor defective
D059/D060/D061 4-82 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-2
FM6 Pawl Motor Multi Folder (D454)
The FM6 pawl HP sensor did not detect the FM6 pawl in (or out of) its
home position. The 1st occurrence causes a jam, and the 2nd
occurrence causes this SC code.
SC783-14 B
FM6 pawl HP sensor dirty
FM6 pawl motor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
Two High-Capacity Stackers can be installed in the same line.

The following SC Codes (SC787-1 to 5) apply to the first stacker in the line.
shooting
Trouble-
Entrance Motor Error Stacker (D447)

SC787-1 B

Shift JG Motor Error Stacker (D447)
The shift tray JG HP sensor did not detect the shift junction gate in
the 2nd occurrence causes this SC code..
SC787-2 B Shift tray JG HP sensor dirty

Shift tray JG motor harness or connector loose, broken,
defective
Sensor defective
SM 4-83 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-2
Transport Motor Error Stacker (D447)

SC787-3 B

Proof Tray JG Motor Stacker (D447)
The proof tray JG HP sensor did not detect the proof tray junction
gate in (or out of) its home position within the prescribed time. The
1st occurrence causes a jam, and the 2nd occurrence causes this
SC code.
SC787-4 B
Proof tray JG HP sensor dirty
Proof tray JG motor harness or connector loose, broken,
defective
Sensor defective
Proof Tray Exit Motor Error Stacker (D447)

SC787-5 B


The following SC Codes (SC788-1 to 5) apply to the second stacker in the line if it
is installed.
SC Codes SC787-1 to -5 apply to the first stacker.
D059/D060/D061 4-84 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-2
Entrance Motor Error Stacker (D447)

SC788-1 B

Shift JG Motor Error Stacker (D447)
The shift tray JG HP sensor did not detect the shift junction gate in
SC788-2 B Shift tray JG HP sensor dirty
shooting
Trouble-
Shift tray JG motor harness or connector loose, broken,
defective
Sensor defective
Transport Motor Error Stacker (D447)

SC788-3 B

SM 4-85 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-2
Proof Tray JG Motor Stacker (D447)
The proof tray JG HP sensor did not detect the proof tray junction
gate in (or out of) its home position within the prescribed time. The
1st occurrence causes a jam, and the 2nd occurrence causes this
SC code.
SC788-4 B
Proof tray JG HP sensor dirty
Proof tray JG motor harness or connector loose, broken,
defective
Sensor defective
The motor drive PCB detected an error at the motor due to overload,
SC788-5 B overheating.

Proof Tray Exit Motor Error Multi Folder (D454)
The motor drive PCB detected an error at the motor due to overload,
SC789 B
overheating. Paper cannot exit at proof tray.
Motor, motor drive board defective
D059/D060/D061 4-86 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-2
Booklet Stapler Jogger Motor Error Booklet Finisher (D434)
The jogger fence HP sensor failed to detect the jogger fence at the home
position within the specified time.
If the booklet stapler jogger motor is operating:

1. Jogger fence HP sensor harness loose, broken, defective
SC790 D
2. Jogger fence HP sensor defective
If the jogger bottom fence motor is not operating:
3. Motor defective
shooting
Trouble-
Booklet Stapler Bottom Fence Motor Booklet Finisher (D434)
The bottom fence failed to return to home position or failed to leave the
home position within the prescribed time.
SC791 D An obstruction is blocking the movement of the bottom fence

Bottom fence HP sensor loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Sensor defective
SM 4-87 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-2
Junction gate error Ring Binder (D392)
Detected at HP after the time prescribed to leave the HP had elapsed

(more than 36 pulses) (1 detection, jam, twice detected, SC error)
-or-
Not detected at HP after the time prescribed to arrive at the HP had
elapsed (more than 22 pulses) (1 detection, jam, twice detected, SC
SC792-1 D
error)
Path JG motor (M201) defective

Motor connector loose, broken, defective
Motor overload
Path JG sensor (S203) connector loose, broken, defective
Sensor (S203) defective
Pre-punch side fence HP error Ring Binder (D392)

(more than 400 pulses) (1st detection, jam, 2nd detection, SC error)
-or-
elapsed (more than 600 pulses) (1st detection, jam, 2nd detection, SC
SC792-2 D error)
Side jogger motor (M302) connector loose, broken, defective

Motor overload
Motor defective
Pre-punch jogger HP sensor (S301) connector loose, broken,
defective
Sensor (S301) defective
D059/D060/D061 4-88 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-2
Pre-punch jogger roller HP error Ring Binder (D392)

-or-
SC792-3 D
error)
Jog roller lift motor (M305) connector loose, broken, defective

Motor overload
Motor defective
Jog roller lift HP sensor (S309) connector loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
shooting
Trouble-
Punch defective Ring Binder (D392)
One or more of the following occurred:

Punch unit not detected at initialization.
No motor rotation detected at HP at 30 ms after the DC motor turned on
No encoder pulse detected at HP at 5 ms after the DC motor turned on
Not detected at HP at 400 ms after the DC motor turned on
SC792-4 D
Punch motor (M304) connector loose, broken, defective
Motor overload
Motor defective
Punch HP sensor (S302) connector loose, broken, defective, or
sensor defective
Punch encoder sensor (S303) connector loose, broken, defective,
or sensor defective
SM 4-89 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-2
Paddle roller HP error Ring Binder (D392)

elapsed (more than 400 ms) (1st detection, jam, 2nd detection, SC error)
-or-
SC792-5 D (more than 400 ms) (1st detection, jam, 2nd detection, SC error)
Paddle roller lift motor (M603) connector loose, broken, defective

Motor overload
Motor defective
Paddle roller HP sensor (S602) connector loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
Jogger fence 1 error Ring Binder (D392)

elapsed (more than 400 ms) (1st detection, jam, 2nd detection, SC
error)
-or-
SC792-6 D
(more than 400 ms) (1st detection, jam, 2nd detection, SC error)
Jog fence 1 motor (M604) connector, loose, broken, defective

Motor defective
Motor overload
Side fence 1 HP sensor (S601) connector, loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
D059/D060/D061 4-90 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-2
Jogger fence 2 error Ring Binder (D392)

-or-
Jog fence 2 motor (M606) connector, loose, broken, defective

Motor defective
Motor overload
Side fence HP sensor 1 (S611) connector loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
shooting
Trouble-
Stack tamper HP error Ring Binder (D392)

-or-
Stack tamper motor (M607) connector, loose, broken, defective

Motor defective
Motor overload
Stack tamper HP sensor (S612) connector loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
SM 4-91 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-2
Pre-bind jogger clamp HP error Ring Binder (D392)

error)
-or-
SC792-9 D
Spine clamp motor (M605) connector loose, broken, defective

Motor defective
Motor overload
Clamp HP sensor (S603) connector loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
Binder unit runout error Ring Binder (D392)

error)
-or-
Runout press roller motor (M610) connector loose, broken,

defective
Motor defective
Motor overload
Runout roller HP sensor (S614) connector loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
D059/D060/D061 4-92 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-2
Clamp thickness error Ring Binder (D392)
50-sheet detection sensor (S606) went OFF during pre-bind jogging

when a 100-sheet thickness was detected. (1st detection jam, 2nd
detection SC error)
-or-
SC792-11 D
50-sheet detection sensor went OFF at initialization when the clamp
moved to the open position.
50-sheet detection sensor (S606) connector loose, broken,

defective
Sensor defective
Alignment pin error Ring Binder (D392)
shooting
Trouble-
error)
-or-
Alignment pin motor (M602) connector loose, broken, defective

Motor overload
Motor defective
Alignment pin HP sensor (S604) connector loose, broken,
defective
Sensor defective
SM 4-93 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-2
Pre-bind jogger shutter error Ring Binder (D392)

error)
-or-
SC792-13 D
Shutter motor (M608) connector loose, broken, defective

Motor overload
Motor defective
Shutter HP sensor (S605) connector loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
50/100 clamp adjustment error Ring Binder (D392)

error)
-or-
SC792-14 D
50/100 adjustment motor (M702) connector loose, broken,
defective
Motor overload
Motor defective
Ring switch HP sensor (S706) connector loose, broken, defective,
or sensor defective
Ring switch timing sensor (S707) connector loose, broken,
defective, or sensor defective
D059/D060/D061 4-94 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-2
Timing sensor interval error Ring Binder (D392)
The bind timing sensor (S702) remained ON or OFF longer than the
prescribed time (1500 ms) during initialization or ring binding (1st
detection: jam, 2nd detection: SC error)
SC792-15 D
Clamp unit motor (M701) connector loose, broken, defective
Motor overload
Motor defective
Bind timing sensor (S702) connector loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
Clamp unit HP error Ring Binder (D392)
shooting
Trouble-
At initialization or during ring binding, did not arrive at the home
position within the prescribed time (1500 ms) (1st detection: jam, 2nd
detection: SC error)
-or-
SC792-16 D
Clamp unit motor (M701) connector loose, broken, defective

Motor overload
Motor defective
Clamp unit HP sensor (S701) connector loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
SM 4-95 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-2
Spine alignment error Ring Binder (D392)
During pin alignment operation, the pin did not reach the up position or
return to the home position within the prescribed time (400 ms), and
one retry failed within the same time limit.
Alignment pin motor (M602) connector loose, broken, defective

SC792-17 D Motor overload
Motor defective
Alignment pin HP sensor (S604) connector loose, broken,
Alignment pin up sensor (S610) connector loose, broken,
Stack not jogged correctly, or not punched correctly
Binder unit not detected Ring Binder (D392)
The binder unit could not be detected at initialization.

SC792-18 D
Drawer connector loose, broken, defective

Drawer connector defective
D059/D060/D061 4-96 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-2
Output belt unit rotation error Ring Binder (D392)

-or-
error)
SC792-19 D
Output belt rotation motor (M403) connector loose, broken,

defective
Motor overload
Motor defective
Output belt rotation HP sensor (S403) connector loose, broken,
shooting
Trouble-
defective
Sensor defective
Output belt 1 HP error Ring Binder (D392)

-or-
SC792-20 D
error)
Output belt 1 motor (M401) connector loose, broken, defective

Motor overload
Motor defective
Output belt 1 HP sensor (S401) connector loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
SM 4-97 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-2
Output belt 2 HP error Ring Binder (D392)

-or-
SC792-21 D
error)
Output belt 2 motor (M402) connector loose, broken, defective

Motor overload
Motor defective
Output belt 2 HP sensor (S402) connector loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
Stack height error Ring Binder (D392)
Stack height sensor remained ON while moving toward the top.

-or-
The sensor did not go ON within 6 sec. after the motor turned on.
SC792-22 D
Stacker motor (M501) connector loose, broken, defective

Motor overload
Stack height sensor (S502) connector loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
D059/D060/D061 4-98 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-2
Stacker error Ring Binder (D392)
Although the stacker was full at the start and end of stacker operation
with the stacker full (stacker sensors ON together), no documents were
detected (also when documents were leaning)
-or-
Although the stacker was detected full with the stacker stopped, no
documents were detected within 2 sec.
SC792-23 D
(1st detection jam, 2nd detection SC error)
Stacker HP sensor (S501) connector loose, broken, defective, or

sensor defective
Stacker height HP sensor (S502) connector loose, broken,
shooting
Trouble-
Stacker detect sensor (S504) loose, broken, defective, or sensor
defective

The following SC Codes (SC793-1 to 8) apply to the first stacker in the line.
Shift Motor Error Stacker (D447)
The shift roller HP sensor did not detect the shift roller at (or out of) its
Shift roller HP sensor dirty

SC793-1 D
Check for and remove any obstructions that interfere with the
operation of the motor
Shift motor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
SM 4-99 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-2
Front Jogger Fence Motor Error Stacker (D447)
The front jogger fence HP sensor did not detect the front jogger fence
at (or out of) its home position within the prescribed time. The 1st
code.
SC793-2 D Front jogger fence HP sensor dirty

Sensor defective
Motor or shift motor drive board defective
Rear Jogger Fence Motor Error Stacker (D447)
The rear jogger fence HP sensor did not detect the rear jogger fence at
code.
SC793-3 D Rear jogger fence HP sensor dirty

Sensor defective
D059/D060/D061 4-100 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-2
Jogger Fence Retraction Motor Error Stacker (D447)
The jogger fence retraction HP sensor did not detect the jogger fences
at (or out of) their home position within the prescribed time. The 1st
code.
SC793-4 D Jogger fence retraction HP sensor dirty

Sensor defective
shooting
Trouble-
Sub Jogger Motor Error Stacker (D447)
The sub jogger HP sensor did not detect the sub jogger fence at (or
Sub jogger fence HP sensor dirty

SC793-5 DD
Sensor defective
SM 4-101 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-2
LE Stopper Motor Error Stacker (D447)
The LE stopper HP sensor did not detect the leading edge stopper at
code.
SC793-6 D LE stopper HP sensor dirty

Sensor defective
Tray Lift Motor Error Stacker (D447)
When the tray was ascending (or descending), the state of the paper
height sensor did not change at the prescribed time to detect the
height of the stack and adjust the height of the tray. The 1st
code.
SC793-7 D
operation of the tray lift motor or paper height sensor actuator
Sensor actuator loose or broken
Sensor defective
Motor defective
D059/D060/D061 4-102 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-2

SC793-8 D


The following SC Codes (SC794-1 to 8) apply to the second stacker in the line if it
is installed.
SC Codes SC793-1 to 8 apply to the first stacker.
Shift Motor Error Stacker (D447)
The shift roller HP sensor did not detect the shift roller at (or out of) its
shooting
Trouble-
Shift roller HP sensor dirty

SC794-1 D
Shift motor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
SM 4-103 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-2
Front Jogger Fence Motor Error Stacker (D447)
The front jogger fence HP sensor did not detect the front jogger fence
at (or out of) its home position within the prescribed time. The 1st
code.
SC794-2 D Front jogger fence HP sensor dirty

Sensor defective
Rear Jogger Fence Motor Error Stacker (D447)
The rear jogger fence HP sensor did not detect the rear jogger fence at
code.
SC794-3 D Rear jogger fence HP sensor dirty

Sensor defective
D059/D060/D061 4-104 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-2
Jogger Fence Retraction Motor Error Stacker (D447)
The jogger fence retraction HP sensor did not detect the jogger fences
at (or out of) their home position within the prescribed time. The 1st
code.
SC793-4 D Jogger fence retraction HP sensor dirty

Sensor defective
shooting
Trouble-
Sub Jogger Motor Error Stacker (D447)
The sub jogger HP sensor did not detect the sub jogger fence at (or
Sub jogger fence HP sensor dirty

SC794-5 D
Sensor defective
SM 4-105 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-2
LE Stopper Motor Error Stacker (D447)
The LE stopper HP sensor did not detect the leading edge stopper at
code.
SC794-6 D LE stopper HP sensor dirty

Sensor defective
Tray Lift Motor Error Stacker (D447)
When the tray was ascending (or descending), the state of the paper
height sensor did not change at the prescribed time to detect the
height of the stack and adjust the height of the tray. The 1st
code.
SC794-7 D
operation of the tray lift motor or paper height sensor actuator
Sensor actuator loose or broken
Sensor defective
Motor defective
D059/D060/D061 4-106 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-2

SC794-8 D

shooting
Trouble-
SM 4-107 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-3
Master-to-Slave Board Communication Errors PB (D391)
Master/Slave Control Board Communication Error 1
Master control board could not communicate with the slave control
board for over 5 sec. and issued the communication alarm.
Slave board connector loose, broken, defective

Slave board defective
Master/Slave Control Board Communication Error 2
Slave control board could not communicate with the master control
board for over 5 sec. and issued the communication alarm.
SC795-1 A
Received data corrupted
Cycle the machine power off/on
Slave control board defective
Download Error
The version of the slave control board could not be detected at power
on. Communication between the master and slave control boards is not
possible if the slave board firmware cannot be written to the board.
Slave board firmware not written

D059/D060/D061 4-108 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-3
Master-to-Relay Board Communication Error PB (D391)
The master control board could not communicate with the relay control
board.
Master control board, relay control board connectors loose, broken,

defective
SC795-2 A Master control board defective
Relay control board defective
Download Error
The version of the master control board could not be detected at power
on
Master control board firmware not written
shooting
Trouble-
SM 4-109 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-3
Slave-to-Cutter Control Board Communication Error PB (D391)
Slave-to-Cutter Board Communication Error 1
Slave control board could not communicate with the cutter control
board (it detected the communication alarm for over 5 sec.
Cutter board connector loose, broken, defective

Cutter control board defective
Slave-to-Cutter Board Communication Error 2
Cutter control board could not communicate with the slave control
board and detected the communication alarm for over 5 sec.
More than twice the maximum allowed alarm recovery time (2 to 3 sec.)
SC795-3 A
Slave control board connectors loose, broken, defective
Cutter control board connectors loose, broken, defective
Download Error
The version of the firmware on the cutter control board could not be
detected at power on. Communication between the slave and cutter
control boards is not possible if the cutter board firmware cannot be
written to the board.
Cutter control board connection loose, broken, defective

D059/D060/D061 4-110 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-3
Bookbinder EEPROM Error PB (D391)
EEPROM Read Error
After EEPROM write operation was completed, the data was read from
the same address.
Master control board EEPROM not installed, not installed correctly

EEPROM defective
SC795-4 A
EEPROM Write Error
When data was written to the EEPROM, the EEPROM signaled that it
was busy for longer than 25 ms and did not recover.
The error time exceeded three times the maximum time allowed for
recovery (8 ms)
shooting
Trouble-
Master control board EEPROM not installed, not installed correctly
EEPROM defective
SM 4-111 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-3
Master-to-Inserter Board Communication Error PB (D391)
Communication Error at Initialization
After the ConfigSet (parallel signal) went ON while the inserter

connection status was being checked, the initialization did not end
successfully within 5 sec. The error time exceeded three times the
maximum time allowed for the initialization communication (1.5 ms).
Inserter board connector loose, broken, defective

Inserter board defective
Bookbinder-to-Inserter Communication Error
SC795-5 A A command response for the inserter was not issued within the time
prescribed for the timeout.
There was an overflow in memory where information required for paper
feed is stored. (Master control board detection.)
Inserter control board defective

Inserter control board connector loose, broken, defective
Download Error
The version of the firmware on the inserter control board could not be
detected at power on.
Inserter control board defective

Inserter control board connector loose, broken, defective
D059/D060/D061 4-112 SM
Rev. 06/24/2010 SC Tables: 7xx-3
SC795-6 24V Check Signal Error 1 PB (D391)
The 24V1 monitor signal of the master control board did not go off even
though the front door switch was closed. (Relay circuit failed to go ON.)
A
Front cover switch error
24V1 monitor signal error
24V1 power supply error
SC795-7 24V Check Signal Errors PB (D391)
24V Check Signal Error 1
The top cover switch is open or the master control board 24V2 monitor
signal failed to go OFF within 5 sec., even though the front door switch
shooting
Trouble-
and top cover sensor are closed.
Top cover switch error

Stacking cover switch error
A Master control board connection loose, broken, defective
Master control board defective
24V Check Signal Error 2
The 24V2 check signal of the slave control board failed to go OFF
within 5 sec. even though the front door and top cover are closed.
⇒ Top cover switch (MSW3) error

Slave control board connection loose, broken, defective
SM 4-113 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-3
24V Check Signal Error PB (D391)
The 24V3 check signal of the slave control board failed to go OFF
within 5 sec. even though the front door is closed.
SC795-8 A

Power Supply Fan Lock Errors
Power Supply Fan (R) Lock

PB (D391)
Power Supply Fan (C) Lock
Power Supply Fan (L) Lock
SC795-9 A A fan lock signal was detected during rotation of the power supply fan
motor in one of the power supply fans (Right, Center, Left). Two retries
were attempted at 12 sec. intervals after detection of the firs lock signal.
Fan overload
Confirm that there are no obstructions interfering with operation of
the fan
Fan motor defective
D059/D060/D061 4-114 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-3
Spine Plate Lower Fan Errors
Spine Plate Lower Fan (F) Lock PB (D391)
Spine Plate Lower Fan (R) Lock
A fan lock signal was detected for 1 sec. during rotation of one of the
SC795-10 A lower spine plate fan motors. Two retries were attempted at 12 sec.
intervals after detection of the first lock signal.
Fan overload
the fan
Fan motor defective
shooting
Trouble-
Spine Plate Upper Fan Errors
Spine Plate Upper Fan (F) Lock PB (D391)
Spine Plate Upper Fan (R) Lock
SC795-11 A upper spine plate fan motors. Two retries were attempted at 12 sec.
intervals after detection of the first lock signal.
Fan overload
the fan
Fan motor defective
SM 4-115 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-3
Signature Fan 2 Error
Signature Fan 2F Lock PB (D391)
Signature Fan 2R Lock
SC795-12 A signature fan 2 motors (Front/Rear). Two retries were attempted at 12
sec. intervals after detection of the first lock signal.
Fan overload
the fan
Fan motor defective
Signature Fan 1 Errors
Signature Fan 1F Lock PB (D391)
Signature Fan 1R Lock
SC795-13 A signature fan 1 motors (Front/Rear). Two retries were attempted at 12
sec. intervals after detection of the first lock signal.
Fan overload
the fan
Fan motor defective
D059/D060/D061 4-116 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-3
Glue Supply Fan H Lock PB (D391)
A fan overload/lock signal was detected for 1 sec. during rotation of

the upper side glue supply fan motor. Two retries were attempted at
12 sec. intervals after the detection of the first lock signal.
SC795-14 A
Fan overload
the fan
Fan motor defective
Glue Supply Fan L Lock PB (D391)
A fan overload/lock signal was detected for 1 sec. during rotation of
shooting
Trouble-
the lower glue supply fan motor. Two retries were attempted at 12 sec.
intervals after the detection of the first lock signal.
SC795-15 A
Fan overload
the fan
Fan motor defective
Grip HP Sensor (S93) Error PB (D391)
The grip unit did not pull away from the HP sensor during operation.
-or-
The grip unit did not arrive at the HP sensor
SC795-16 A
Book grip motor (M43) connection loose, broken, defective

Motor defective
Grip HP sensor harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
SM 4-117 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-3
Main Grip Signature Sensor (S55) PB (D391)
The main grip signature sensor did not go off after the main grip unit
released the signature and moved the prescribed distance.
-or-
The grip unit did not arrive at the sensor.
SC795-17 A
Front and rear main grip motors (M23, M24) connection loose,
broken, defective
Motor defective
Main grip signature sensor harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
Trimming Buffer HP Sensor: Left (S103) Error PB (D391)
The trimmings buffer sensor (S103):

Did not go ON within 3 sec. when it was supposed to move to the right
to its home position.
Did not go OFF within 5 sec. when it was supposed to move to the left
away from its home position.
SC795-18 A
Clear jammed trimming scraps away from the trimmings buffer

Trimmings buffer motor (M37) connections loose, broken,
defective
Motor defective
Sensor harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
D059/D060/D061 4-118 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-3
Trimming Buffer HP Sensor: Right (S100) Error PB (D391)
The trimmings buffer failed to move away from the dump port on top of
the trimmings box or failed to arrive at the port.
The trimmings buffer sensor: right (S100) did not go OFF within 3 sec.
when the trimmings buffer was supposed to move away from the
sensor.
The trimmings buffer sensor: right (S100) did not go ON within 5
SC795-19 A
seconds when the trimmings buffer was supposed to arrive at the
sensor.

Trimmings buffer motor (M37) connections loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
shooting
Trouble-
Sensor defective
Trimmings Buffer Motor (M37) Error PB (D391)
The trimmings buffer motor is not rotating.

SC795-20 A
defective
Motor defective
Trimmings buffer sensor: left/right (S103/S100) harness loose,
broken, defective
Sensor defective
SM 4-119 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-3
Book Press Plate Sensor (S104) Error PB (D391)
The trimmings buffer and book press plate did not move after the
trimmings buffer motor turned on.
The book press plate sensor did not go OFF with 3 sec..
-or-
The book press plate sensor did not go ON within 3 sec.
SC795-21 A
defective
Motor defective
Trimmings buffer sensor: left/right (S103/S100) harness loose,
broken, defective
Sensor defective
Book Buffer Tray HP Sensor (S78) PB (D391)
The book buffer tray failed to move to the rear or failed to move to the
front.
The book buffer tray HP sensor failed to go ON within 3 sec. when the
tray was supposed to move front to rear.
The book buffer tray HP sensor failed to go OFF within 3 sec. when
the tray was supposed to move rear to front.
SC795-22 A
Book jammed on the rail of the book buffer tray

Book buffer tray overloaded
Book buffer tray motor (M39) connections loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Book buffer tray HP sensor (S78) harness loose, broken,
defective
Sensor defective
D059/D060/D061 4-120 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-3
Edge Press Plate HP Sensor (S90) Error PB (D391)
During edge press plate operation during trimming:

The edge press plate HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed
time because it failed to pull away from the HP sensor.
The edge press plate HP sensor did not ON within the prescribed time
because it failed to arrive at the HP sensor.
SC795-23 A The edge press motor (M36) stopped when the press HP sensor (S90)
switched ON, but after the motor stopped the HP sensor went OFF.
Edge press motor (M36) connections loose, broken, defective

Motor defective
Edge press plate HP sensor (S90) harness loose, broken,
defective
shooting
Trouble-
Sensor defective
Press End Sensor (S87) Error PB (D391)
The press end sensor did not detect the release of the edge press
plate (END of operation) against the book in the trimming unit. The
sensor did not go ON within 8 sec.
-or-
The press end sensor went ON the edge press plate motor (M36)
SC795-24 A
stopped, but the sensor went OFF again after the motor stopped.
Edge press plate motor (M36) connections loose, broken,

defective
Motor defective
Press end sensor (S87) harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
SM 4-121 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-3
Press Limit Sensor (S89) Error PB (D391)
The press limit sensor went ON and detected the edge press plate
beyond its maximum position.

defective
Motor defective
SC795-25 A
Press limit sensor harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
Plate out of position (see below)
Note: For a detailed description about how to correct this problem,
please refer to the replacement and adjustment procedures in the
Perfect Binder manual under "Trimming Unit" in the "Common
Procedures" section.
Slide HP Sensor (S82) Error PB (D391)
The slide motor (M44) did not leave the home position. When the slide
was raised, the slide HP sensor did not go OFF within 180 mm of
movement.
-or-
The slide motor (M44) did not reach the home position. The slide HP
SC795-26 A sensor did not go ON within 180 mm of movement after the slide was
lowered.
Signature has jammed during transport.

Slide motor (M44) connections loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Slide HP sensor (S82) harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
D059/D060/D061 4-122 SM
⇒ SC795-27 Book Rotation HP Sensor 1 (S95) Error PB (D391)
Rotate motor 1 (M42) did not leave the home position and the Book
Rotation HP sensor did not go OFF after enough time elapsed for
rotation through an arc of 50°.
-or-
The motor did not arrive at the HP sensor. When rotate motor 1 (M42),
A rotate motor 2 (M41) were both initialized, their HP sensors did not
turn ON after enough time elapsed for rotation through an arc of 440°.
Jam or overload during book rotation.

Rotate motor 1 (M42) connections loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Rotate HP sensor 1 (S95)harness loose, broken, defective
shooting
Trouble-
Rotate HP sensor (S95) defective
⇒ Book Rotation HP Sensor 2 (S91) PB (D391)
Rotate motor 2 (M41) did not leave the home position and the HP
sensor did not go OFF after enough time has elapsed for rotation
through an arc of 30°.
-or-
Rotate motor 2 (M41) did not reach the home position and the HP
SC795-28 A sensor did not go ON after enough time had elapsed for rotation
through an arc of 400°.
Jam or overload during book rotation.

Rotate motor 2 (M41) connections loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Rotate HP sensor (S91) harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
SM 4-123 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-3
Cutter Motor (M35) Error PB (D391)
One of the following occurred:

The cutter blade did not move after it was moved to the rear (it did
not leave home position).
The blade did not move away from the cutting point on the blade
cradle (it did not arrive at the home position).
The blade did not move for a rear-to-front cut.
The blade did not move away from the blade cradle to the front
within 10 sec.
When moving from the front, the blade did not reach the blade
SC795-29 A
cradle within 10 sec.
When moving from the rear, the blade did not reach the blade
cradle.
Cutter motor (M35) connections loose, broken, defective

Motor defective
Blade sensor 1, 2 (S84, S85) sensor harness loose, broken,
defective
Sensor defective
Blade is dull, cutting poorly
Note: Sensors S84, S85 are on the cutter area PCB.
D059/D060/D061 4-124 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-3
Trimmer Limit Sensor (S86) Error PB (D391)
The blade reached the limit position and the trimmer limit sensor went
ON.
Cutter motor (M35) connections loose, broken, defective

Motor defective
SC795-30 A
Trimmer limit sensor (S86) harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
Note: For a detailed description about how to correct this problem,

please refer to the replacement and adjustment procedures in the
Perfect Binder manual under "Trimming Unit" in the "Common
Procedures" section.
shooting
Trouble-
Book Lift Tray HP Sensor (S79) Error PB (D391)
The book lift tray did not go up because the book tray lift HP sensor
did not go OFF within 1 sec. after the book tray lift motor (M38) turned
on to raise the tray.
-or-
The book lift tray did not go down because the book tray lift HP sensor
SC795-31 A
did not go ON within 1.5 sec. after the book tray lift motor (M38) turned
on to lower the tray.
Book tray lift motor (M38) connections loose, broken, defective

Motor defective
Book lift tray HP sensor (S79) harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
SM 4-125 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-3
Book Lift Tray Motor (M38) Error PB (D391)
The motor is not rotating. The encoder is checked for motor lock at 50
ms intervals.
Book lift tray motor (M38) locked, blocked by the book press plate
SC795-32 A
or a jammed book.
Motor connections loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Book lift tray HP sensor (S79) harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
Book Buffer Tray HP Sensor (S78) Error PB (D391)
The book buffer tray did not leave the home position. The book
collection buffer tray HP sensor did not go OFF within 1 sec. after the
book buffer tray motor (M39) turned on.
-or-
The book buffer tray did not reach the home position. After the book
buffer tray motor (M39) turned on, the book buffer tray did not reach
SC795-33 A
the HP sensor within 3.5 sec.
Book collection buffer tray overloaded.

Book buffer tray motor (M39) connections loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Book buffer tray HP sensor (S78) harness loose, broken,
defective
Sensor defective
D059/D060/D061 4-126 SM
SC795-34 Blade Cradle HP Sensor (S83) Error PB (D391)
The blade cradle did not go up after the trimming blade cradle motor
(M40) turned on long enough to raise the blade cradle 12 mm to
switch the blade cradle HP sensor OFF.
-or-
The blade cradle did not go down after the trimming blade cradle
motor (M40) turned on long enough to lower the cradle 21 mm to turn
A
the blade cradle HP sensor ON.
Blade cradle motor (M40) connections loose, broken, defective

Motor defective
Blade cradle HP sensor (S83) harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
shooting
Trouble-
Book press plate or cutter has interfered with the blade cradle
movement.
⇒ Book Stacker Lock Solenoid (SOL5) Error PB (D391)
The book stacker door is locked but the book stacker door sensor
(S98) did not go OFF.
SC795-35 A Book stacker lock solenoid (SOL5) connections loose, broken,

defective
Solenoid defective
Book stacker door sensor harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
SM 4-127 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-3
Glue Heater (HTR1) Errors PB (D391)
Heater failed to start: Error 1
600 sec. after the bookbinder left the energy save mode, the glue
thermistor could not detect the target temperature (+-5).
SC795-36 A Heater (HTR1), glue temperature thermistor (S56) defective
Heater failed to start: Error 2
After the glue thermistor detected a glue temperature of 50°C, it could

not detect a temperature above 140°C within 200 sec.
Heater, glue temperature thermistor (S56) defective
Electrical Short in the Gluing Unit PB (D391)
Heater short. The glue unit thermistor detected a temperature

higher than 200°C for longer than 1 sec.
Heater wire break or short circuit. The gluing unit thermistor
detected a temperature of less than 5°C for more than 1 sec.
SC795-37 A (more than 10 sec. after power on).
Glue level thermistor (S58) broken
The AD value of the glue level thermistor (S58) remained at 1023
for 10 sec.
Thermistor abnormal, wire breakage, short circuit, broken wire:

Replace the gluing unit
D059/D060/D061 4-128 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-3
Temperature Detection
PB (D391)
Error
Low temperature detected while regulating glue temperature.
After adjustment of the glue temperature, the glue temperature

thermistor (S56) detected a temperature lower than 135°C for more
than 10 sec.
Heater, glue temperature thermistor (S56) defective
SC795-38 A Glue level thermistor: Error 1
The glue level thermistor detected a temperature higher than 170°C

for longer than 10 sec. after the glue had warmed up.
shooting
Trouble-
Glue level thermistor (S58) defective
Glue level thermistor: Error 2

Protective Circuit Error PB (D391)
The thermostat (THSW1) inside the gluing unit detected an

abnormally high temperature.
SC795-39 A
Abnormal thermostat detection
Glue heater defective

Thermostat defective
SM 4-129 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-3
Glue Surface Error 1 PB (D391)
The surface of the glue in the vat did not reach the lower or upper limit
position. This error is issued when the glue surface was detected
below the lower limit position 4 times in succession during the glue
SC795-40 A
re-supply cycle.
Glue has clogged in the vat

Glue supply defective
The glue surface has not dropped below the upper limit mark. Without
a glue vat refill, the glue level thermistor could not detect the level of
SC795-41 A the glue below the upper limit (full) level, even after the application of
25.42 g of glue.
Glue application abnormal (not applying correctly)

D059/D060/D061 4-130 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-3
Glue Level Thermistor (S58) Adjustment Error PB (D391)
One of the following errors occurred in the adjustment data for the
glue level thermistor:
Glue level thermistor 1 value (low limit) was out of the range:
128°C±14°C)
Glue level thermistor 2 value (high limit) was out of the range:
SC795-42 A 142°C±10°C)
Glue level thermistor adjustment value 1 was larger than for
adjustment 1.
The difference between the values for adjustment 1 and 2 was
less than 5°C.
shooting
Trouble-
Timing Sensor (S5) Adjustment Error PB (D391)
The value for the adjustment of the timing sensor exceeded the upper
limit. When the A/D input for the timing sensor is lower than 3.0V to
3.5V, even if the timing sensor D/A output is as high as 3.5V, the A/D
input value will not fall within the 3.0-to-3.5V range.
-or-
SC795-43 A The value for the adjustment of the timing sensor was lower than the
lower limit. When the A/D input for the timing sensor is higher than
3.0V to 3.5V, even if the timing sensor D/A output is as low as 0.1V,
the A/D input value will not fall within the 3.0-to-3.5V range.
Timing sensor defective

D/A converter defective
A/D converter defective
SM 4-131 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-3
Cover Registration Sensor (S21) Error PB (D391)
The value for the adjustment of the cover registration sensor was
higher than or lower than the target range: 3V to 3.5V
SC795-44 A
Cover registration sensor (S21) defective

Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor: Small

PB (D391)
(S71)
The value for the adjustment of the cover registration sensor was
SC795-45 A higher than or lower than the target range: 3.2V to 3.5V
Cover horizontal registration sensor: small (S71) defective

Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor: Large (S72) PB (D391)
The value for the adjustment of the cover horizontal registration

sensor (for large covers) was higher than or lower than the target
SC795-46 A range: 3.2V to 3.54V
Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor: Large (S72) defective

D059/D060/D061 4-132 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-3
Book Exit Sensor (S64) Error PB (D391)
The value for the adjustment of the book exit sensor was higher than
or lower than the target range: 3.2V to 3.54V
SC795-47 A
Signature exit sensor defective
Leading Edge Sensor (S65) Error PB (D391)
The value for the adjustment of the leading edge sensor was higher
than or lower than the target range: 3.2V to 3.54V
SC795-48 A
Leading edge sensor (S65) defective
shooting
Trouble-
Trim Unit Entrance Sensor (S92) Error PB (D391)
The value for the adjustment of the sensor was out of range.
SC795-49 A
Trim unit entrance sensor (S92) harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
Book Registration Sensor (S88) Error PB (D391)
The value for the adjustment of the book registration sensor was out
of range.
SC795-50 A
Motor defective
Book registration sensor (S88) harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
SM 4-133 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-3 Rev. 06/24/2010
⇒ SC795-51 Leading Edge Sensor (S65) Error PB (D391)
No book could be detected in the path for trimming (the sensor could
A
not detect a leading edge of a book).
The book has slipped out of the grip of the book rotation plates
No book could be detected at the entrance of the trimming unit.

-or-
The book did not arrive in the trimming unit because it jammed. (The
SC795-52 A trim unit entrance sensor (S92) did not go ON.)
Main grip lift motor (M22) connections loose, broken, defective

Motor defective
Book exit sensor (S64) harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
A book was not detected at the book registration sensor pair (the book
registration sensor did not go ON).
Book jammed, failed to arrive at book registration sensor

SC795-53 A
Motor defective
Book registration sensor (S88) harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
Sensor flag error, overload
D059/D060/D061 4-134 SM
SC795-54 Book Exit Sensor (S64) Error PB (D391)
The book exit sensor went ON when the system was turned ON,
indicating that a book was at the book exit sensor above the book grip
A
and rotation unit.
Book jammed at the entrance of the book grip and rotation unit.
Book exit sensor (S64) defective
⇒ Trim Unit Entrance Sensor (S92) Error PB (D391)
The slave control board could detect no paper at the entrance of the
trimming unit. The trim unit entrance sensor did not detect the
SC795-55 A
signature within 6860 ms from when the signature exited the gluing
shooting
Trouble-
unit.
Trim unit entrance sensor (S92) defective
Main Grip Signature Sensor (S55) Error PB (D391)
No signature was detected in the gripper of the main grip unit.

-or-
SC795-56 A
No signature was detected in the main grip unit after the signature
passed from the sub grip to the main grip.
Main grip signature sensor (S55) defective
SM 4-135 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-3
The trim unit entrance sensor remained ON (when no book should

have been present).
-or-
The trim unit entrance sensor (S92) went ON when the system was
turned on.
SC795-57 A -or-
The book exit sensor (S64) remained ON after jam removal.
Book jam at power on

Main group lift motor (M22) connections loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Book exit sensor (S64) harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
Book Registration Sensor (S92) Lag Error PB (D391)
The book registration sensor remained ON because the book did not
move from the sensor location.
-or-
The book registration sensor went on when the system was turned on.
SC795-58 A
Book jam above the trimmer unit

Motor defective
Book registration (S92) sensor harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
D059/D060/D061 4-136 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-3
Book Arrival Sensor (S76) Lag Error PB (D391)
The book arrival sensor remained ON because the book did not leave
the sensor location. The book remained in the book buffer area and
failed to fall onto the book output tray.
SC795-59 A

Motor defective
Book arrival sensor (S76) harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
Trimming Scrap Error PB (D391)
The trimming scraps did not fall from the trimmings buffer, or
shooting
Trouble-
trimmings were jammed between the trimmings buffer and the book
press plate. After retrieving the scraps after the 2nd cut (top edge) or
3rd cut (fore edge), the edge press plate sensor did not go ON.
SC795-60 A Trimming scraps have jammed in or around the trimmings buffer

defective
Motor defective
Edge press plate HP sensor (S90) harness loose, broken,
defective
Sensor defective
Sub Grip Signature Lag Error PB (D391)
The sub grip signature sensor remained ON because the signature

failed to move out of the sub grip unit.
SC795-61 A
Signature jam in the sub grip unit

Sub grip signature sensor (S39) defective (did not go OFF even
with sub grip unit open and the signature removed)
SM 4-137 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-3
Main Grip Lag Jam PB (D391)
The main grip signature sensor remained ON because the book failed
to move from the main grip unit to the trimming unit.
SC795-62 A
Book jam in the main grip unit

Main grip signature sensor (S39) defective (did not go OFF even
with the book removed)
Signature Thickness Error PB (D391)
Signature thickness reading is smaller than the allowed minimum size.

-or-
Signature thickness reading is larger than the allowed maximum size.
SC795-63 A
-or-
The signature thickness reading did not change after the main
grippers opened and closed.
Signature thickness sensor (S50) defective.
D059/D060/D061 4-138 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-4
Glue Vat HP Sensor (S73) Error PB (D391)
The glue vat HP sensor at the rear of the bookbinder failed to go ON

within the prescribed time.
-or-
SC796-1 A
The glue vat HP sensor at the rear of the bookbinder failed to go OFF.
Glue vat motor (M32) defective

Glue vat HP sensor (S73) defective
Sensor connector loose, broken, defective
shooting
Trouble-
Glue Vat Roller Rotation Error PB (D391)
The glue vat roller did not start rotating within the prescribed time.
SC796-2 A
Glue vat roller motor (M25) defective
Glue vat roller rotation sensor (S59) defective
Glue Supply Motor (M33) Error PB (D391)
The glue supply motor did not arrive at its home position. The glue
supply HP sensor (S75) did not turn ON within the prescribed time after
the glue supply motor (S33) turned on.
-or-
SC796-3 A
The glue supply motor did not leave its home position.
Glue pellet supply lock

Glue supply motor (M33) defective
Glue supply HP sensor (S75) defective
SM 4-139 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-4
Spine Fold HP Sensor: Left (S60) Error PB (D391)
The spine fold plate did not reach the left HP sensor (the sensor did not
go ON) within the prescribed time after the left spine fold plate motor
turned on.
-or-
SC796-4 A
The spine fold plate did not leave the left HP sensor position (the
sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time).
Spine fold plate motor: left (M28) defective

Spine fold HP sensor: left (S60) defective
Spine Fold Close Sensor: Left (S61) Error PB (D391)
The sensor did not turn ON within the prescribed time, or the sensor
was already OFF when the spine fold plate was supposed to move from
the closed to the open position.
-or-
The sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time after the spine
SC796-5 A
fold plate motor: left turned on to open the spine fold plate, or the
sensor was already ON when the spine fold plate was supposed to
move from the open to the closed position.
Spine fold plate motor: left (M28) defective

Spine fold close sensor: left (S61) defective
Dual Spine Plate Sensor Error: Left PB (D391)
The spine plate HP sensor (S60) and spine plate close sensor (S63)
turned ON at the same time.
SC796-6 A
Spine fold HP sensor: left (S60) defective

Spine fold close sensor (S63) defective
A sensor connector loose, broken, defective
D059/D060/D061 4-140 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-4
Spine Fold HP Sensor: Right (S66) Error PB (D391)
The spine fold plate did not reach the right HP sensor within the
prescribed time (sensor did not go ON) after the spine fold plate motor
(M29) turned on to open the fold plate, or the right HP sensor was
already OFF when the spine fold plate was supposed to move from the
open to the closed position.
SC796-7 A -or-
The spine fold plate did not leave the right HP sensor position (sensor
did not go OFF) within the prescribed time after the spine fold motor:
right turned on to close the fold plate.
Spine fold motor: right (M29) defective

Spine fold HP sensor: right (S66) defective
Connector loose, broken, defective
shooting
Trouble-
Spine Fold Close Sensor: Right (S69) Error PB (D391)
The right fold plate close sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
time after the spine fold plate motor: right turned on to close the fold
plate, or the close sensor on the right was already OFF when the spine
fold plate was supposed to close the plate.
-or-
The right spine fold plate close sensor did not go OFF within the
SC796-8 A
prescribed time after the spine fold plate motor: right turned on to open
the plate, or the spine fold page close sensor on the right was already
ON when the spine fold plate was supposed to move from the open to
the closed position.
Spine fold motor: right (M29) defective

Spine fold close sensor: right (S69) defective
SM 4-141 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-4
Dual Spine Plate Sensor Error: Right PB (D391)
The spine fold HP sensor: right (S66) and spine fold close sensor: right
(S69) turned ON at the same time.
SC796-9 A
Spine fold HP sensor: right (S66) defective

Spine fold close sensor: right (S69) defective
Spine Plate Open Sensor (S62) Error PB (D391)
The spine plate open sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time
after the spine plate motor turned on to open the plate.
-or-
SC796-10 A The spine plate open sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time
after the spine plate motor turned on to close the plate.
Spine plate motor (M26) defective

Spine plate open sensor (S62) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
Spine Plate Closed Sensor (S63) PB (D391)
The spine plate close sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time
after the spine plate motor turned on to close the plate.
-or-
SC796-11 A The spine plate close sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time
after the spine plate motor turned on to open the plate.
Spine plate motor (M26) defective

Spine plate closed sensor (S63) defective
Motor or sensor connector loose, broken, defective
D059/D060/D061 4-142 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-4
Front Door Lock Error PB (D391)
The right front door sensor did not go OFF even though the front doors
closed and locked.
-or-
The right front door sensor did not go ON even though the front doors
SC796-12 A released and opened.
The right front door solenoid (SOL3) defective

Right front door sensor (S30) defective
One or more of the front door switches (MSW1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7) is
defective
Solenoid, sensor, or MSW connector loose, broken, defective
shooting
Trouble-
Switchback Flapper HP Sensor (S10) Error PB (D391)
The switchback flapper HP sensor in the stacking tray did not go ON

after the motor turned on long enough to raise the flapper through an
arc of 50 degrees.
-or-
SC796-13 A The switchback flapper HP sensor did not go OFF after the motor
remained on long enough to lower the flapper through an arc of 150
degrees.
Switchback flapper HP sensor (S10) defective

Switchback flapper motor (M8) defective
SM 4-143 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-4
TE Press Lever HP Sensor (S3) Error PB (D391)
The TE press lever HP sensor in the stacking tray did not go ON the
TE press lever motor remained on long enough to move the lever
through and arc of 30 degrees to release the lever.
-or-
SC796-14 A The TE press lever HP sensor did not go OFF when the TE press
lever motor remained on long enough to move the lever through and
arc of 20 degrees to close the lever.
TE press lever HP sensor (S3) defective

TE press lever motor (M3) defective
Jog Fence HP Sensor: Front/Small (S12) Error PB (D391)
The front jog fence HP sensor in the stacking tray for small size paper
did not go ON within the prescribed time after the front jogger motor
turned on long enough to move the fence front jog fence.
-or-
SC796-15 A The front jog fence HP sensor for small size paper did not go OFF
within the prescribed time after the front jogger motor turned on to
move the front fence.
Jog fence HP sensor: front/small (S12) defective

Jogger motor: front (M4) defective
D059/D060/D061 4-144 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-4
Jog Fence HP Sensor: Front/Large (S14) Error PB (D391)
The front jog fence HP sensor for large size paper in the stacking tray
did not go ON within the prescribed time after the front jogger motor
turned on to move the front fence.
-or-
SC796-16 A The front jog fence HP sensor for large size paper in the stacking tray
did not go OFF within the prescribed time after the front jogger motor
turned on to move the front fence.
Jog fence HP sensor: front/large (S14) defective

shooting
Trouble-
Jog Fence HP Sensor: Rear/Small (S13) Error PB (D391)
The rear jog fence HP sensor for small size paper in the stacking tray
did not go ON within the prescribed time after the rear jogger motor
turned on to move the rear fence.
-or-
SC796-17 A The rear jog fence HP sensor for small size paper in the stacking tray
did not go OFF within the prescribed time after the rear jogger motor
turned on to move the rear fence.
Jog fence HP sensor: rear/small (S13) defective

Jogger motor: rear (M5) defective
SM 4-145 D059/D060/D061
SC796-18 Jog Fence HP Sensor: Rear/Large (S15) Error PB (D391)
The rear jog fence HP sensor for large size paper in the stacking tray
did not go ON after the rear jogger motor turned on to move the rear
fence.
-or-
A The rear jog fence HP sensor for large size paper in the stacking tray
did not go OFF after the rear jogger motor turned on to move the rear
fence.
Jog fence HP sensor: rear/large (S15) defective

Switchback Roller HP Sensor (S11) Error PB (D391)
The switchback roller HP sensor in the stacking tray did not go ON

after the motor turned on long enough to raise the roller through an arc
of 40 degrees.
-or-
SC796-19 A The switchback roller HP sensor in the stacking tray did not go OFF
⇒ after the switchback roller lift motor turned on long enough to lower the
roller through an arc of 20 degrees.
Switchback roller HP sensor (S11) defective

Switchback roller motor (M7) defective
D059/D060/D061 4-146 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-4
Stacking Tray Lower Limit Sensor (S7) Error PB (D391)
Stacking tray lower limit sensor did not go ON within the prescribe
time after the stacking tray lift motor turned to lower the tray.
-or-
SC796-20 A Stacking tray lower limit sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed
time after the stacking tray lift motor turned on to raise tray.
Stacking tray lower limit sensor (S7) defective

Stacking tray lift motor (M2) defective
shooting
Trouble-
SM 4-147 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-4
Paper Detection Sensor: Front/Rear (S1/S2) Error PB (D391)
The paper detection sensor at the front of the stacking tray did not go
ON within the prescribed time after the stacking tray overflow sensor
(S6) went ON and the stacking tray lift motor turned on to raise the
tray.
-or-
OFF within the prescribed time after the stacking tray lift motor turned
-or-
SC796-21 A The paper detection sensor at the rear of the stacking tray did not go
(S6) went ON and the stacking tray lift motor turned on to raise the
tray.
-or-
The paper detection sensor at the rear of the stacking tray did not go
OFF within the prescribed time after the stacking tray lift motor turned
on to lower the tray
Paper Detect Sensor: Front (S1) defective

Stacking Tray Lift Motor (M2) defective
D059/D060/D061 4-148 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-4
Stacking Tray Overflow Sensor (S6) Error PB (D391)
The stacking tray overflow sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
time after the stacking tray lift motor turned on to raise the tray.
-or-
The stacking tray overflow sensor did not go OFF within the
SC796-22 A
prescribed time after the stacking tray lift motor turned on to lower the
tray.
Stacking Tray Overflow Sensor (S6) defective

Dual Stacking Tray Errors PB (D391)
shooting
Trouble-
The Stacking Tray Lower Limit Sensor (S7) and Stacking Tray
Overflow Sensor (S6) went ON at the same time.
Stacking Tray Lower Limit Sensor (S7) defective

The Stacking Tray Overflow Sensor (S6) went OFF when the stacking
SC796-23 A tray was raised to its upper limit. When the tray was raised, the
stacking tray overflow sensor (S6) went OFF and: (1) the stacking tray
empty sensor (S8) was OFF and (2) one or both the paper detect
sensors (S1: Front/S2: Rear) were ON.
Stacking Tray Empty Sensor (S8) defective

Paper Detect Sensors: Front/Rear (S1/S2) defective
SM 4-149 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-4
Stacking Tray HP Sensor (S9) Error PB (D391)
The stacking tray HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time
after the stacking tray motor turned on to move the tray toward the
sensor.
-or-
SC796-24 A The stacking tray HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time
after the stacking tray motor turned on to move the tray away from the
sensor.
Stacking HP Sensor (S9) defective

Stacking Tray Motor (M9) defective
Stacking Weight HP Sensor (S16) Error PB (D391)
The stacking weight HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed

time the stacking weight motor turned on to move the tray toward the
sensor.
-or-
The stacking tray HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time
SC796-25 A
when the stacking tray motor turned on to move the tray away from
the sensor.
Stacking weight HP sensor did not go ON.

Stacking Weight HP Sensor (S16) defective
Stacking Weight Motor (M6) defective
D059/D060/D061 4-150 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-4
Left Cover Guide Error PB (D391)

SC796-26 A
The left cover guide HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
time after the left cover guide motor turned on.
Cover Guide HP Sensor: Left (S27) defective

Cover Guide Motor: Left (M15) defective
The left cover guide open sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
time after the left cover guide motor turned on to retract the left cover
guide.
Cover Guide Open Sensor: Left (S28) defective

Cover Guide Motor: Left (M15) defective
shooting
Trouble-
Left Cover Guide Dual Sensor Errors PB (D391)
Cover Guide HP Sensor: Left (S27) and Cover Guide Open Sensor:
Left (S28) went ON at the same time.
SC796-27 A
Cover Guide HP Sensor: Left (S27) defective

Cover Guide Open Sensor: Left (S28) defective
SM 4-151 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-4
Right Cover Guide Error PB (D391)
The right cover guide HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
time after the right cover guide motor turned on.
Cover Guide HP Sensor: Right (S22) defective

Cover Guide Motor: Right (M16) defective
SC796-28 A
The cover guide open sensor: right did not go ON within the
prescribed time after the right cover guide motor turned on to move
the right cover guide to the home position.

Cover Guide Motor: Right (M16) defective
Right Cover Guide Dual Sensor Errors PB (D391)
Cover Guide HP Sensor: Right (S22) and Cover Guide Open Sensor:
Right (S23) went ON at the same time.
SC796-29 A

Cover Guide Open Sensor: Right (S23) defective
D059/D060/D061 4-152 SM
⇒ Book Exit Sensor Error PB (D391)
The Book Exit Sensor did not go ON after the main grip lift motor
moved the book to the delivery point when the book was passed from
the main grip unit to the signature exit roller.
SC796-43 A
Main Grip Lift Motor (M22) defective
Book Exitt Sensor (S64) defective
Book broken, bent
Book stuck in the main grip unit
Main Grip HP Sensor: High (S45) Error PB (D391)
The main grip high HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
shooting
Trouble-
time after the main grip lift motor turned on to raise the main grip unit.
-or-
SC796-44 A The main grip high HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed
time after the main grip lift motor turned on to lower the main grip unit.

Main Grip HP Sensor: High (S45) defective
SM 4-159 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-4
Sub Grip Size HP Sensor (S38) Error PB (D391)
The sub grip size HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time
after the sub grip size motor turned on for horizontal adjustment to the
paper size.
-or-
The sub grip size HP sensor was already OFF when the sub grip size
horizontal adjustment started (from the open to closed position).
Sub Grip Size Motor (M19) defective

Sub Grip Size HP Sensor (S38) defective
SC796-32 A Motor or sensor connector loose, broken, defective
The sub grip size HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time
after the sub grip size motor turned on to close sub grippers for
horizontal adjustment of the paper size.
-or-
The sub grip size HP sensor was already ON when the sub grip size
horizontal adjustment started (from the close to open position).

Sub Grip Open Sensor (S40) Error PB (D391)
The sub grip open sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time
after the sub grip lift motor turned on to open the sub grip unit.
-or-
SC796-33 A The sub grip open sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time
after the sub grip lift motor turned on to close the sub grip unit.
Sub Grip Open Motor (M20) defective

Sub Grip Open Sensor (S40) defective
D059/D060/D061 4-154 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-4
Sub Grip Close Sensor (S41) Error PB (D391)
The sub grip close sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time
-or-
SC796-34 A The sub grip close sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time
after the sub grip open motor turned on to open the sub grip unit.

Sub Grip Close Sensor (S41) defective
Sub Grip Dual Sensor Error PB (D391)
shooting
Trouble-
The Sub Grip Open Sensor (S40) and Sub Grip Close Sensor (S41)
went ON at the same time.
SC796-35 A

Signature HP Sensor (S34) Error PB (D391)
The signature HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time

after the signature move motor turned on to move the sub grip to the
home position.
-or-
SC796-36 A The signature HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time
signature transfer position (from sub grip to main grip).
Signature Move Motor (M18) defective

Signature HP Sensor (S34) defective
SM 4-155 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-4
Signature Main Grip Position Sensor (S35) Error PB (D391)
The signature main grip position sensor did not go ON within the
prescribed time after the signature move motor turned for delivery of
the signature from the sub grip to the main grip.
-or-
Due to incorrect timing during delivery of the signature from sub grip to
main grip, the signature was gripped at the main grip HP sensor
position.
SC796-37 A Signature Move Motor (M18) defective

Signature Main Grip Position Sensor (S35) defective
The signature HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time
home position.

Signature Main Grip Position Sensor (S35) defective
Main Grip Rotate Enable Sensor (S36) Error PB (D391)
The main grip rotate enable sensor did not go ON within the prescribe
time after the signature move motor turned on to move the sub grip to
the home position.
-or-
SC796-38 A The main grip rotate enable sensor did not go OFF within the
prescribed time after the signature move motor turned on to move the
sub grip to the signature transfer position (from sub grip to main grip).

Main Grip Rotate Enable Sensor (S36) defective
D059/D060/D061 4-156 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-4
Sub Grip Dual Sensor Error PB (D391)
The Signature HP Sensor (S34) and Signature Main Grip Position

Sensor (S35) went ON at the same time.
SC796-39 A
Signature HP Sensor (S34) defective

Signature Main Grip Position Sensor (M35) defective
Main Grip HP Sensor (S44) Error PB (D391)
The main grip HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribe time after
the main grip lift motor turned on to raise the main grip unit, or the
main grip HP sensor was already ON when the motor started to lower
shooting
Trouble-
the main grip unit.
-or-
SC796-40 A The main grip HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time
after the main grip lift motor turned on to lower the main grip unit, or
the main grip HP sensor was already ON when the motor started to
lower the main grip unit.

Main Grip HP Sensor (S44) Error
SM 4-157 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-4
Main Grip Press Sensor 1 (S48) Error PB (D391)
The main grip press sensor 1 did not go ON within the prescribed time
after the main grip lift motor turned on to raise the main grip unit from
the main grip signature registration position.
-or-
SC796-41 A The main grip press sensor 1 did not go OFF within the prescribed
time after the main grip lift motor turned on to lower the main grip unit
to the main grip signature registration position.

Main Grip Press Sensor 1 (S48) defective
after the main grip lift motor turned on to lower the main grip unit and
signature to the point where the signature was to be pressed into the
center of the cover.
-or-
SC796-42 A The main grip press sensor 2 did not go OFF within the prescribed
time after the main grip lift motor turned on to raise the main grip unit
away from the point where the signature was pressed into the center
of the cover.

D059/D060/D061 4-158 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-4
Main Grip Signature Exit Error PB (D391)
The signature exit sensor did not go ON after the main grip lift motor
moved the signature to the delivery point when the signature was
passed from the main grip unit to the signature exit roller.
SC796-43 A

Signature Exit Sensor (S64) defective
Signature broken, bent
Signature stuck in the main grip unit
shooting
Trouble-
-or-
SC796-44 A The main grip high HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed

SM 4-159 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-4
Main Grip Rotate HP Sensor (S43) Error PB (D391)
The main grip rotate HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
time after the main grip rotation motor turned to rotate the main grip
unit for delivery of the signature from the sub grip unit.
-or-
SC796-45 A The main grip rotate HP sensor did not go OFF with the prescribed
time after the main grip rotation motor turned on to rotate the grip unit
and signature to the vertical.
Main Grip Rotation Motor (M21) defective

Main Grip Rotate HP Sensor (S43) defective
Motor or connector loose, broken, defective
Rotate-to-Binding Position Sensor (S42) Error PB (D391)
The main grip rotate-to-binding position sensor did not go ON within

the prescribed time after the main grip rotation motor turned on to
rotate the grip unit and signature to the vertical.
-or-
The main grip rotate to binding position sensor did not go OFF within
SC796-46 A
the prescribed time after the main grip rotation motor turned to rotate
the main grip unit to the left for delivery of the signature from the sub
grip unit.
Main Grip Rotation Motor (M21) defective

Rotate to Binding Position Sensor (S42) defective
D059/D060/D061 4-160 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-4
Main Grip Rotation Dual Sensor Errors PB (D391)
Main Grip Rotate HP Sensor (S43) and Rotate-to-Binding Position

Sensor (S42) went ON at the same time.
SC796-47 A
Main Grip Rotate HP Sensor (S43) defective

Rotate to Binding Position Sensor (S42) defective
Main Grip Open/Close Sensor: Rear (S47, S48) PB (D391)
The rear main grip open sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
time after the rear grip motor turned on to open the main grip unit.
-or-
shooting
Trouble-
The rear main grip open sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed
time after the rear grip motor turned on to close the main grip unit.
Grip Motor: Rear (M23) defective

Main Grip Open Sensor: Rear (S47) defective
The rear main grip close sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
-or-
The rear main grip close sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed

Main Grip Close Sensor: Rear (S54) defective
SM 4-161 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-4
Main Grip Encoder: Rear Sensor (S46) Error PB (D391)
The rear main grip encoder sensor could not be detected ON/OFF
within the prescribed time after the rear grip motor turned on to open
SC796-49 A and close the main grip unit.

Main Grip Encoder: Rear Sensor (S46) defective
Rear Main Group Dual Sensor Error PB (D391)
Main Grip Open Sensor: Rear (S47) and Main Grip Close Sensor:
Rear (S48) went ON at the same time.
SC796-50 A

D059/D060/D061 4-162 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-4
Main Grip Open/Close Sensor: Front (S51, S53) PB (D391)
The front main grip open sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
time after the front grip motor turned on to open the main grip unit.
-or-
The front main grip open sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed
time after the front grip motor turned on to close the main grip unit.
Grip Motor: Front (M24) defective

Main Grip Open Sensor: Front (S51) defective
The front main grip close sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
-or-
shooting
Trouble-
The front main grip close sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed

Main Grip Close Sensor: Front (S53) defective
Main Grip Encoder: Front Sensor (S52) Error PB (D391)
The front main grip encoder sensor could not be detected ON/OFF
within 200 ms after the front grip motor turned on to open/close the
main grip unit.
SC796-52 A
Main Grip Encoder: Front Sensor (S52) defective

SM 4-163 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-4
Front Main Grip Dual Sensor Error PB (D391)
Main Grip Open Sensor: Front (S51) and Main Grip Close Sensor:
Front (S53) went ON at the same time.
SC796-53 A

Signature Exit Path HP Sensor (S67) Error PB (D391)
The signature exit path HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
time after the signature exit path motor turned on to retract the
signature exit roller.
-or-
SC796-54 A The signature exit path HP sensor did not go OFF within the
prescribed time after the signature exit path motor turned on to move
the signature exit roller.
Signature Exit Path Motor (M30) defective

Signature Exit Path HP Sensor (S67) defective
Signature Exit Path Press Sensor (S68) Error PB (D391)
The signature exit path press sensor did not go ON within the
prescribed time after the signature exit path motor turned on to feed
the book into the nip of the signature exit roller.
-or-
SC796-55 A The signature exit path press sensor did not go OFF within the
prescribed time after the signature exit path motor turned on to retract

Signature Exit Path Press Sensor (S68) defective
D059/D060/D061 4-164 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-4
Signature Exit Roller Error PB (D391)
The leading edge sensor did not go ON within the time prescribed for
the signature exit roller to reverse feed the signature during signature
SC796-56 A exit.
Signature Roller Exit Motor (M27) defective

Leading Edge Sensor (S65) defective
Signature torn, bent
Inserter EEPROM Error PB (D391)
CHECKSUM error at power on.
shooting
Trouble-
-or-
SC796-57 A
EEPROM write error.
EEPROM not installed, or not installed correctly

EEPROM defective
Inserter Drive Switch Sensor (S16) Error PB (D391)
The drive switch sensor in the inserter did not go OFF within the time
prescribed after the drive switch motor (M2) turned on.
-or-
The drive switch sensor in the inserter did not go ON within the time
SC796-58 A
prescribed after the drive switching motor (M2) turned on.
Drive switch motor (M2) defective

Drive switch sensor (S16) defective
SM 4-165 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-4
Inserter Tray A Error PB (D391)
Inserter Tray A (upper tray) failed to leave its lower limit sensor within
the prescribed time after Tray A lift motor turned on.
Lift Motor: Tray A (M3) defective

Lower Limit Sensor: Tray A (S11) defective
Inserter Tray A (upper tray) failed to arrive at its paper feed sensor
within the prescribed time after the Tray A lift motor turned on.

Paper Feed Sensor: Tray A (S4) defective
Inserter Tray B Error PB (D391)
Inserter Tray B (lower tray) failed to leave its lower limit sensor within
the prescribed time after the Tray B lift motor turned on.
Lift Motor: Tray B (M4) defective

Lower Limit Sensor: Tray B (S12) defective
Inserter Tray B (lower tray) failed to arrive at its paper feed sensor
within the prescribed time after the Tray B lift motor turned on.

Paper Feed Sensor: Tray B (S10) defective
D059/D060/D061 4-166 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-4
Relay Unit EEPROM Error PB (D391)
EEPROM write error (successful completion of data write operation not

detected within the prescribed time).
SC796-61 A
Relay board EEPROM not installed, or installed incorrectly

EEPROM damaged
Relay board defective
Relay/ Bookbinder Communication Error PB (D391)
Communication error between relay unit and bookbinder.

SC796-62 A
Relay I/F cable disconnected or damaged
Relay unit PCB in bookbinder damaged, not installed correctly
shooting
Trouble-
PCB in relay unit damaged, not installed correctly
Lower Performance Mode Error PB (D391)
These are the conditions that must be met before the bookbinder
enters low performance mode:
The location where the error occurred has no effect on the
operation of the horizontal feed path for downstream delivery.
The jam has occurred in the horizontal feed path but it can be
removed easily.
SC796-63 D The unit where the error occurred allows use of the horizontal
feed path.
These conditions determine whether downstream delivery is
possible after an error occurs in the bookbinder.
Correct the problem and release the bookbinder from the low
performance mode. See Section 3 of the Perfect Binder manual for
more about how to release the Perfect Binder from the low
performance mode.
SM 4-167 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-5
Grip HP Sensor (S93) Error PB (D391)
The grip HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time because
the main grip did not leave its home position.
-or-
SC797-1 B The main grip unit did go ON because it did not arrive at the HP position
after signature release.
Book grip motor (M43) defective

Grip HP sensor (S93) defective
Sensor or motor harness loose, broken, defective
Grip End Sensor (S94) Error PB (D391)
The grip end sensor (S94) did not go OFF after the grip unit released
the signature and moved the prescribed distance.

Grip end sensor (S94) defective
SC797-2 B
The grip end sensor (S94) did not go ON because the grip unit did
arrive at the sensor position.

Grip end sensor (S94) defective
Data received for signature data was incorrect.
D059/D060/D061 4-168 SM
Trimmings Buffer HP Sensor: Left (S103) Error PB (D391)
The trimmings buffer sensor: left (S103) did not go OFF within the
prescribed time because it failed to leave the HP sensor.
-or-
The trimmings buffer sensor: left (S103) did not go ON within the
SC797-3 B
prescribed time because it failed to arrive at the HP sensor.
Trimmed scraps in or around the trimmings buffer

Trimmings buffer motor (M37) defective
Left trimmings buffer sensor (S103) defective
⇒ Trimmings Buffer HP Sensor: Right (S100) Error PB (D391)
shooting
Trouble-
Trimmings buffer did not reach the trimmings dump port because:
The trimmings buffer HP sensor: right (S100) did not go OFF within the
prescribed time because it failed to leave the HP sensor.
-or-
SC797-4 B The trimmings buffer HP sensor: right (S103) did not go ON within the
prescribed time because it failed to arrive at the HP sensor.
Trimmed scraps in or around the trimmings buffer

Right trimmings buffer HP sensor (S100) defective
Trimmings Buffer Motor (M37) Error PB (D391)
Trimmings buffer motor (M37) is not running.
SC797-5 B Trimming scrap jam

Right or left trimmings buffer sensor (S100, S103) defective
Motor or sensor connections loose, broken, defective
SM 4-169 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-5
Failure to Detect Book Press Plate Position PB (D391)
The book press plate sensor (S104) did not go OFF because the
trimmings buffer left the HP sensor position.
-or-
The book press plate sensor (S104) did not go ON because the
SC797-6 B
trimmings buffer did not arrive at the HP sensor position.
Trimming scraps jammed in or around the trimmings buffer

Book press plate sensor (S104) defective
The HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time after the
buffer tray the book buffer tray motor turned on to pull the tray to the
rear.
-or-
The HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time after the book
SC797-7 B
buffer tray motor turned on to push the tray to the front.
Book has jammed on the rail of the buffer

Buffer tray overloaded
Book buffer tray motor (M39) defective
Book buffer tray HP sensor (S78) defective
Motor or sensor connection loose, broken, defective
D059/D060/D061 4-170 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-5
Edge Press Plate HP Sensor (S90) PB (D391)
The edge press plate did not go OFF within the prescribed time after
the edge press plate motor turned on to press the plate against the
spine of the book.
-or-
SC797-8 B The edge press plate did not go ON within the prescribed time after the
edge press plate motor turned on to pull the plate away the spine of the
book.
Edge press plate motor (M36) defective

Edge press plate HP sensor (S90) defective
Motor or sensor connection loose, broken, defective
shooting
Trouble-
Press end Sensor (S87) Error PB (D391)
The press end HP sensor did not go OFF within the time prescribed for
press END.
-or-
Press end sensor went OFF after press end sensor went ON and
SC797-9 B stopped the press motor (M36).
Edge press plate motor (M36) defective

Press end sensor (S87) defective
Data received for signature data was incorrect because signature
thickness sensor (S50) defective
Motor or sensor harness loose, broken, defective
SM 4-171 D059/D060/D061
Slide HP Sensor (S82) Error PB (D391)
The HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time because the
slide motor did not leave the home position.
-or-
The HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time because the
SC797-10 B
slide motor did not arrive at the home position.
Signature jam, overload

Slide motor (M44) defective
Slide HP sensor (S82) defective
Book Rotation HP Sensor 1 (S95) Error PB (D391)
Book rotation sensor 1 did not go OFF because the book rotation
⇒ motor 1 (M41) did not leave the home position.
-or-
Book rotation sensor 1 did not go ON because the book rotation motor
1 (M41) did not arrive at the home position.
SC797-11 B -or-
At power on, book rotation motor 1 failed to rotate the left plate
through the prescribed arc for initialization.
Jam or overload during book rotation

Book rotation motor 1 (M41) defective
Book rotation HP sensor 1 (S95) defective
D059/D060/D061 4-172 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-5
Book Rotation HP Sensor 2 (S91) PB (D391)
Book rotation sensor 2 did not go OFF because the book rotation
motor 1 (M42) did not leave the home position.
-or-
Book rotation sensor 1 did not go ON because the book rotation motor
1 (M42) did not arrive at the home position.
SC797-12 B -or-
At power on, book rotation motor 1 failed to rotate the left plate
through the prescribed arc for initialization.
Jam or overload during book rotation
Book rotation motor 1 (M42) defective

Book rotation HP sensor 2 (S91) defective
shooting
Trouble-
Cutter Motor (M35) Error PB (D391)
The blade in the trimming unit did not move from the home position or
reach the blade cradle during cutting.
Blade is dull, cutting poorly

SC797-13 B
Cutter motor (M35) defective
Blade sensor 1, blade sensor 2 defective
Note: Blade sensors 1 and 2 (S84, S85) are mounted on the cutter
control board.
SM 4-173 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-5
Book Lift Tray HP Sensor (S79) Error PB (D391)
The book tray lift HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time
after the book tray lift motor (M38) turned on to raise the tray and
receive a finished book from the trimming unit.
-or-
The book tray lift HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time
SC797-14 B
after the book tray lift motor (M38) turned on to lower the tray and
book.
Book jammed under the tray

Book tray lift motor (M38) defective
Book lift tray HP sensor (S79) defective
Book Lift Tray Motor (M38) Error PB (D391)
The book lift tray motor was not rotating.
Book lift tray motor (M38) locked, blocked by the press plate or a
SC797-15 B
jammed book
Motor defective
Book lift tray HP sensor (S79) defective
D059/D060/D061 4-174 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-5
The book collection buffer tray HP sensor did not go OFF within the
prescribed time after the book buffer tray motor (M39) turned on to
raise the tray.
-or-
The book collection buffer tray HP sensor did not go ON within the
SC797-16 B
prescribed time after the book buffer tray motor (M39) turned on to
lower the tray.
Book buffer tray overloaded.

Book buffer tray motor (M39) defective
Book buffer tray HP sensor (S78) defective
shooting
Trouble-
Blade Cradle HP Sensor (S83) Error PB (D391)
The blade cradle HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time
after the blade cradle motor (M40) turned on to raise it.
-or-
The blade cradle HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time
SC797-17 B after the blade cradle motor (M40) turned on to lower it.
Edge press plate or cutter interfered with movement of the blade

cradle
Blade cradle motor (M40) defective
Blade cradle HP sensor (S83) defective
SM 4-175 D059/D060/D061
Book Door Lock Solenoid (SOL5) Error PB (D391)
The book stack door is locked but the book door sensor (S98) did not
go OFF.
SC797-18 B
Book door sensor (S98) defective
Book door lock solenoid (SOL5) defective
Solenoid or sensor harness loose, broken, defective
⇒ Glue Heater (HTR1) Error PB (D391)
The heater failed to start because:

600 sec. after the bookbinder left the energy save mode, the glue
temperature thermistor did not detect the target temperature
(153°C±5).
SC797-19 B
-or-
After the glue temperature hermistor detected a glue temperature of
50°C, it did not detect a temperature above 140°C within 200 sec.
Heater (HTR1) defective

Glue temperature thermistor (S56) defective
⇒ Electrical Short in the Gluing Unit PB (D391)
A short circuit or wire breakage occurred in the gluing unit.

The glue temperature thermistor (S56) detected:
A temperature over 200°C more than 1 sec. (short circuit)
A temperature of less than 5°C for more than 1 sec. or more than
SC797-20 B
10 sec. after power on (wire breakage)
The AD value of the glue level thermistor (S58) remained at 1023
for 10 sec (wire breakage).

D059/D060/D061 4-176 SM
⇒ Temperature Detection Error PB (D391)
After adjustment of the glue temperature, the glue temperature

thermistor (S56) detected a temperature lower than 135°C for more
than 10 sec.

SC797-21 B
-or-
shooting
Trouble-
Protection Circuit Error PB (D391)
The thermostat (THSW1) inside the gluing unit detected an

SC797-22 B abnormally high temperature.
Glue heater (HTR1)defective

Thermostat (THSW1) defective
SM 4-177 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-5
The surface of the glue in the vat did not reach the lower limit position.
This error occurred when the glue surface was detected below the
lower limit position 4 times in succession during the glue
replenishment cycle.

Glue supply defective
SC797-23 B
The glue level thermistor could not detect the glue surface at the
upper limit position: 1) After glue was detected above the low limit
mark, and 2) After 12 glue packets were supplied, and 3) No glue had
been recently applied.

D059/D060/D061 4-178 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-5
Without a glue vat refill, the glue level thermistor could not detect the
level of the glue below the upper limit (full) level, even after the
SC797-24 B
application of 25.42 g of glue.
Glue application abnormal (not applying correctly)

Glue Level Thermistor (S58) Adjustment Error PB (D391)
One of the following errors occurred in the adjustment data for the
glue level thermistor:
1. Glue level thermistor 1 value (low limit) was out of the range:
shooting
Trouble-
128°C±14C
SC797-25 B
2. Glue level thermistor 2 value (high limit) was out of the range:
142°C±10C
3. Glue level thermistor adjustment value 1 was larger than for
adjustment 1.
Replace the EEPROM on the slave control board
Timing Sensor (S5) Adjustment Error PB (D391)
The value for the adjustment of the timing sensor was out of range
(3.0V to 3.5V)
SC797-26 B
Timing sensor (S5) defective

SM 4-179 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-5
Cover Registration Sensor (S21) Error PB (D391)
The value for the adjustment of the cover registration sensor was out
of range (3.0V to 3.5V)
SC797-27 B
Cover registration (S21) sensor defective
Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor: Small (S71) PB (D391)
The value for the adjustment of the cover horizontal registration

sensor: small was out of range (3.0V to 3.5V)
SC797-28 B
Cover horizontal registration sensor: small (S71) defective
Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor: Large (S72) PB (D391)
The value for the adjustment of the cover horizontal registration sensor:
large was out of range (3.0V to 3.5V)
SC797-29 B
Cover horizontal registration sensor: large (S72) defective
The value for the adjustment of the book exit sensor (S64) was out of
range (3.2V to 3.54V)
SC797-30 B
Signature Exit Sensor (S64) defective
D059/D060/D061 4-180 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-5
The value for the adjustment of the LE sensor (S65) was out of range
(3.2V to 3.54V)
SC797-31 B

Trim Unit Entrance Sensor (S92) Error PB (D391)
The adjusted value for the trim unit entrance sensor was higher or
lower than the target range.
SC797-32 B

Trim unit entrance sensor (S92) defective
shooting
Trouble-
The adjusted value for the book registration was higher or lower than
the target range.
SC797-33 B

Book registration sensor (S88) defective
A book was not detected in the path for trimming when the slave
control board received the signal for transport end. The book has
SC797-34 B fallen past the sensor.
Main grip motors: front/rear (M24/M23) defective.

SM 4-181 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-5
The book exit sensor (S64) did not turn ON, even after the book
transport end signal was received when the book was passed from the
gluing unit to the trimming unit. No book was detected at the entrance
SC797-35 B of the trimming unit.
Failure to deliver the signature (due to a jam)

Signature path exit motor (M30) defective
Book Exit Sensor (S64) Late Error PB (D391)
A book was not detected in the trimming unit because the book
registration sensor failed to go ON.
SC797-36 B
Main grip lift motor (M22) defective

Book Exit Sensor (S64) Lag Error PB (D391)
The book exit sensor detected a book at power on. The cover path
SC797-37 B was closed and there was no book at the LE sensor (S65)

The book exit sensor did not detect the signature within the prescribed
SC797-38 B time after the glued signature exited the gluing unit.
Book exit sensor (S64) connector loose, broken, defective

Sensor defective
D059/D060/D061 4-182 SM
Main Grip Signature Sensor (S55) Error PB (D391)
No signature was detected in the main grip unit after the signature
SC797-39 B passed from the sub grip to the main grip.

⇒ Leading Edge Sensor Error PB (D391)
The leading edge sensor (S65) went ON at power on after the finisher
initialized.
SC797-40 B -or-
The leading edge senor remained ON after the power on jam
recovery.
shooting
Trouble-
Detected a signature jam at power on.
Book Registration Sensor (S88) Lag Error PB (D391)
The book registration sensor went ON at warm-up after power on.

-or-
SC797-41 B When the signature exited and the lift tray lowered, the sensor went
ON.
Detected a jammed book at power on.

Book Arrival Sensor (S76) PB (D391)
After the book output operation ended, the book arrival sensor
remained ON because the book failed to move from the buffer tray to
SC797-42 B the output tray.

Book arrival sensor (S76) defective
SM 4-183 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-5
Trimming Jam Scrap Error PB (D391)
The strips cut from the book could not be dumped into the trimmings
box or the strips jammed between the trimmings buffer and edge
press plate and trimming stopped. Three attempts failed to restore
operation, then the jam alert was issued.
Strips jammed between the edge press plate and trimmings

SC797-43 B
buffer.
Trimmings buffer HP sensors: right or left (S100, S103) defective
Note: Trimming strips wider that 29 mm at the bottom and top edges
(1st and 2nd cuts) and wider than 41 mm at the fore edge (3rd cut) will
cause the trimming unit to jam.
Sub Grip Signature Sensor (S39) Lag Error PB (D391)
The sub grip signature sensor did not go OFF after the sub grippers
released the signature to the main grip because the signature did not
SC797-44 B move.
Signature jammed in sub grip unit

Sub grip signature sensor defective
Main Grip Signature Sensor (S55) Lag Jam PB (D391)
The main grip signature sensor did not go OFF after the main grippers
released the signature to the trimming unit because the book did not
SC797-45 B move.
Book jammed in main grip unit

D059/D060/D061 4-184 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-5
Signature Thickness Sensor (S50) Error PB (D391)
The size of the signature measured by the signature thickness sensor

SC797-46 B was smaller than the minimum.
Signature thickness sensor (S50) defective

Glue Vat Roller Rotation Error PB (D391)
The glue vat roller sensor did not detect any rotation at the glue vat
roller within the prescribed time after the glue vat roller motor turned
SC797-47 B on.
Glue vat roller motor (M25) defective

Glue vat roller rotation sensor (S59) defective
shooting
Trouble-
Glue Supply Motor (M33) Error PB (D391)
The glue supply HP sensor (S75) did not turn ON within the
prescribed time after the glue supply motor (M33) turned on. The
motor did not arrive at its home position.
SC797-48 B
Glue pellet jam in the glue feeder

Glue supply motor (M33) defective
Glue supply HP sensor (S75) defective
SM 4-185 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-5
Front Door Lock Error PB (D391)
The right front door sensor did not go OFF even though the front doors
were closed and locked.
-or-
The right front door sensor did not go ON even though the front doors
released and opened.
-or-
SC797-49 B
Front doors are detected open even though the front doors are closed
and locked.
Right front door solenoid (SOL3) defective

Right front door sensor (S30) defective
One or more of the front door micro-switches (MSW1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7)
defective
Switchback Flapper HP Sensor (S10) Error PB (D391)
The switchback flapper HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed

time after the motor turned on long enough to raise the flapper through
an arc of 50 degrees.
-or-
SC797-50 B The switchback flapper HP sensor did not go OFF within the
prescribed time after the motor turned on long enough to lower the
flapper through an arc of 150 degrees.
Switchback Flapper HP Sensor (S10) defective

Switchback flapper motor (M8) defective
D059/D060/D061 4-186 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-5
TE Press Lever HP Sensor (S3) Error PB (D391)
The TE press lever HP sensor did not go ON when the TE press lever
motor turned on to move the lever through an arc of 30 degrees to
release the lever.
-or-
SC797-51 B The TE press lever HP sensor did not go OFF when the TE press
lever motor turned on to move the lever through an arc of 20 degrees
to close the lever.
TE press lever HP sensor (S3) defective

TE press lever motor (M3) defective
shooting
Trouble-
Jog Fence HP Sensor: Front/Small (S12) Error PB (D391)
The front jog fence HP sensor for small size paper did not go ON
within the prescribed time when the front jogger motor turned on to
move the fence.
-or-
SC797-52 B The front jog fence HP sensor for small size paper did not go OFF
within the prescribed time when the front jogger motor turned on to
move the fence.
Jog fence HP sensor: front/small (S12) defective

SM 4-187 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-5
Jog Fence HP Sensor: Front/Large (S14) Error PB (D391)
The front jog fence HP sensor for large size paper did not go ON within
the prescribed time when the front jogger motor turned on to move the
fence.
-or-
SC798-1 B The front jog fence HP sensor for large size paper did not go OFF within
the prescribed time when the front jogger motor turned on to move the
fence.
Jog fence HP sensor: front/large (S14) defective

Jog Fence HP Sensor: Rear/Small (S13) Error PB (D391)
The rear jog fence HP sensor for small size paper did not go ON within
the prescribed time when the rear jogger motor turned on to move the
fence.
-or-
SC798-2 B The rear jog fence HP sensor for small size paper did not go OFF within
fence.
Jog fence HP sensor: rear/small (S13) defective

D059/D060/D061 4-188 SM
SC798-3 Jog Fence HP Sensor: Rear/Large (S15) Error PB (D391)
The rear jog fence HP sensor for large size paper did not go ON within
fence.
-or-
B The rear jog fence HP sensor for large size paper did not go OFF within
fence.
Jog fence HP sensor: rear/large (S15) defective

shooting
⇒
Trouble-
Switchback Roller HP Sensor (S11) Error PB (D391)
The switchback roller HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed

time after the switchback roller lift motor turned on to raise the roller
through an arc of 40 degrees.
-or-
SC798-4 B The switchback roller HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed
time when the switchback roller lift motor turned on to lower the roller
through an arc of 20 degrees.
Switchback Roller HP Sensor (S11) defective

Switchback Roller Motor (M7) defective
SM 4-189 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-5
Stacking Tray Lower Limit Sensor (S7) Error PB (D391)
The stacking tray lower limit sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
time when the stacking tray lift motor turned on to lower the tray.
-or-
SC798-5 B The stacking tray lower limit sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed
time when the stacking tray lift motor turned on to raise the tray 30 mm.
Stacking Tray Lower Limit Sensor (S7) defective

Paper Detection Sensor: Front/Rear (S1/S2) PB (D391)
(S6) went ON and the stacking tray lift motor turned on to raise the tray.
-or-
OFF within the prescribed time when the stacking tray lift motor turned
-or-
SC798-6 B
(S6) went ON and the stacking tray lift motor turned on to raise the tray.
-or-
OFF within the prescribed time when the stacking tray lift motor turned
Paper Detect Sensor: Front (S1) defective

D059/D060/D061 4-190 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-5
Stacking Tray Overflow Sensor (S6) Error PB (D391)
The stacking tray overflow sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
time when the stacking tray lift motor turned on to raise the tray 70 mm.
-or-
The stacking tray overflow sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed
SC798-7 B
time after the stacking tray lift motor turned on to lower the tray so
paper could be removed from the tray by the operator.

Stacking Tray HP Sensor (S9) Error PB (D391)
shooting
Trouble-
The stacking tray HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time
when the stacking tray motor turned on to move the tray toward the
sensor.
-or-
SC798-8 B
The stacking tray HP sensor did not go OFF when the stacking tray
motor turned on to move the tray away from the sensor.
Stacking HP Sensor (S9) defective

Stacking Tray Motor (M9) defective
Stacking Weight HP Sensor (S16) Error PB (D391)
The stacking weight HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time
when the stacking weight motor turned on to move the tray toward the
SC798-9 B sensor.
-or-
The stacking weight HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed
time when the stacking tray motor turned on to move the tray away from
the sensor.
SM 4-191 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-5
Stacking Weight HP Sensor (S16) defective

Stacking Weight Motor (M6) defective
Sub Grip HP Sensor (S37) Error PB (D391)
The sub grip HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time after
the sub grip lift motor turned on to raise the sub grip unit.
-or-
SC798-10 B The sub grip HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time
after the sub grip lift motor turned on to lower the sub grip unit.
Sub Grip Lift Motor (M17) defective

Sub Grip HP Sensor (S37) defective
Sub Grip Size HP Sensor (S38) PB (D391)
The sub grip size HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time
after the sub grip size motor turned on for horizontal adjustment to the
paper size, or the sub grip size HP sensor was already OFF when the
sub grip size horizontal adjustment started.
-or-
SC798-11 B The sub grip size HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time
after the sub grip size motor turned on to close for horizontal
adjustment to the paper size, or the sub grip size HP sensor was
already ON when the sub grip size horizontal adjustment started.

D059/D060/D061 4-192 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-5
Sub Grip Open Sensor (S40) Error PB (D391)
The sub grip open sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time
after the sub grip lift motor turned on to open the sub grip unit.
-or-
SC798-12 B The sub grip open sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time

Sub Grip Close Sensor (S41) Error PB (D391)
shooting
Trouble-
The sub grip close sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time
-or-
SC798-13 B The sub grip close sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time
after the sub grip open motor turned on to open the sub grip unit.

SM 4-193 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-5
Main Grip HP Sensor (S44) Error PB (D391)
The main grip HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time
after the main grip lift motor turned on to raise the main grip unit, or the
main grip HP sensor was already ON when the motor started to lower
the main grip unit.
-or-
SC798-14 B The main grip HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time
after the main grip lift motor turned on to lower the main grip unit, or
the main grip HP sensor was already ON when the motor started to
lower the main grip unit.

Main Grip HP Sensor (S44) Error
after the main grip lift motor turned on to raise the main grip unit from
the main grip signature registration position.
-or-
SC798-15 B The main grip press sensor 1 did not go OFF within the prescribed
time after the main grip lift motor turned on to lower the main grip unit
to the main grip signature registration position.

D059/D060/D061 4-194 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-5
after the main grip lift motor turned on to lower the main grip unit and
signature to the point where the signature was to be pressed into the
center of the cover.
-or-
SC798-16 B The main grip press sensor 2 did not go OFF within the prescribed
time after the main grip lift motor turned on to raise the main grip unit
away from the point where the signature was pressed into the center
of the cover.

shooting
Trouble-
Main Grip Signature Exit Error PB (D391)
The book exit sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time after
the main grip lift motor moved the signature to the delivery point when
the signature was passed from the main grip unit to the book exit
roller.
SC798-17 B
Signature broken, bent

Signature jammed in the main grip unit
Book Exit Sensor (S64) defective
SM 4-195 D059/D060/D061
-or-
SC798-18 B The main grip high HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed

⇒ Main Grip Open Sensor: Rear/Front (S47, S51) PB (D391)
The rear main grip open sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
-or-
The rear main grip open sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed

SC798-19 B
The rear main grip close sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
-or-
The rear main grip close sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed

D059/D060/D061 4-196 SM
Main Grip Encoder: Rear Sensor (S46) Error PB (D391)
The rear main grip encoder sensor could not be detected ON/OFF
within the prescribed time after the rear grip motor turned on to open
SC798-20 B and close the main grip unit.
Main Grip Encoder: Rear Sensor (S46) defective

⇒ Grip Motor: Rear (M23) defective
⇒ Main Grip Open/Close Sensor: Front (S51,S53) PB (D391)
The front main grip open sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
shooting
Trouble-
-or-
The front main grip open sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed

SC798-21 B Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
The front main grip close sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
-or-
The front main grip close sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed

SM 4-197 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-5
Main Grip Encoder: Front Sensor (S52) Error PB (D391)
The front main grip encoder sensor could not be detected ON/OFF
within the prescribed time after the front grip motor turned on to
SC798-22 B open/close the main grip unit.

Signature Exit Path HP Sensor (S67) Error PB (D391)
The signature exit path HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
time after the signature exit path motor turned on to retract the
signature exit roller.
-or-
SC798-23 B The signature exit path HP sensor did not go OFF within the
prescribed time after the signature exit path motor turned on to move

Signature Exit Path HP Sensor (S67) defective
D059/D060/D061 4-198 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-5
Signature Exit Path Press Sensor (S68) Error PB (D391)
The signature exit path press sensor did not go ON within the
prescribed time after the signature exit path motor turned on to feed
the book into the nip of the signature exit roller.
-or-
SC798-24 B The signature exit path press sensor did not go OFF within the
prescribed time after the signature exit path motor turned on to retract

Signature Exit Path Press Sensor (S68) defective
shooting
Trouble-
Inserter Drive Switch Sensor (S16) PB (D391)
The drive switch sensor in the inserter unit did not go OFF within the
time prescribed for the drive switching motor (M2) to switch drives.
-or-
SC798-25 B The drive switch sensor in the inserter unit did not go ON within the
prescribed time.
Drive switch motor (M2) defective

Drive switch sensor (S16) defective
SM 4-199 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-5
Inserter Tray A Error PB (D391)
Inserter Tray A (upper tray) failed to leave its lower limit sensor (S11)
within the prescribed time after the Tray A lift motor turned on.
-or-
Inserter Tray A (upper tray) failed to arrive at its paper feed sensor
SC798-26 B
(S4) within the prescribed time after the Tray A lift motor turned on.

Lower limit sensor: Tray A (S11) defective
Paper feed sensor (S4) defective
Inserter Tray B Error PB (D391)
Inserter Tray B (lower tray) failed to leave its lower limit sensor (S12)
within the prescribed time after the Tray B lift motor turned on.
-or-
SC798-27 B Inserter Tray B (lower tray) failed to arrive at its paper feed sensor
(S10) within the prescribed time after the Tray B lift motor turned on.

Lower Limit Sensor: Tray B (S12) defective
D059/D060/D061 4-200 SM
SC Tables: 7xx-5
Trimming Blade Motor Error Trimmer (D455)
The trimming blade HP sensor did not detect the blade at (or out of)
its home position within the prescribed time during trimming. The 1st
detection causes a jam signal if the error occurred during cutting. The
2nd detection causes this SC code if the error occurred at the start or
end of cutting.
SC799-1 D Check for and remove any obstacles (jammed paper scraps)
around the blade, motor, or sensor
Trimming blade HP sensor dirty
Trimming blade motor harness or connector loose, broken,
defective
shooting
Trouble-
Motor defective
Trimming unit main board defective
Press Roller Motor Error Trimmer (D455)
The press roller HP sensor did not detect the press roller at (or out of)
its home position within the prescribed time. The 1st occurrence
SC799-2 D Check for and remove any obstacles around the motor and sensor
Press roller motor HP sensor dirty
Press roller motor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
SM 4-201 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 7xx-5
Cut Position Motor Error Trimmer (D455)
The cut position HP sensor did not detect the cut position stopper at
code.
SC799-3 D
Check for and remove any obstacles around the motor and sensor
Cut position HP sensor dirty
Cut position motor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Press Stopper Motor Error Trimmer (D455)
The press stopper HP sensor did not detect the press stopper at (or
Check for and remove any obstacles around the motor and sensor
SC799-4 D
Press stopper HP sensor dirty
Press stopper motor harness or connector loose, broken,
defective
Motor defective
D059/D060/D061 4-202 SM
SC Tables: 8xx
4.14 SC TABLES: 8XX
Energy save I/O sub system error GW
An error occurred in the energy save sub system. This error occurs only
when an energy sub system module such as ASIC Whistle is present.
SC816 D

If cycling the machine off/on does not restore normal operation,
replace the IOB.
0x5032 HAIC-P2 Data Compression Error GW
0x5245 Link-up Failure GW

SC819 D
shooting
Trouble-
0x5355 L2 Status Timeout GW
554C USB Loader Failure GW
0008 Self-diagnostic Error: CPU: System Call Exception GW
0612 Self-diagnostic Error: CPU: ASIC Interrupt Error GW
System program defective

SC820 D
Optional board defective
Replace controller firmware
Note: For more details about this SC code error, execute SP5990 to print
an SMC report so you can read the error code. The error code is not
displayed on the operation panel.
SM 4-203 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 8xx
Self-diagnostic error 2: ASIC GW
The ASIC provides the central point for the control of bus arbitration for
CPU access, for option bus and SDRAM access, for SDRAM refresh,
and for management of the internal bus gate.
Error code 0xffff ffff is returned when the register Write & Verify
check is executed on the ASIC mounted on the controller board.
SC821 C
0B00 The ASIC controls the ROM and buses for other devices.
ASIC defective
Replace the controller board
The interrupts of the ASIC and CPU are not timed correctly.
0D05
ASCI timing device or CPU defective
Replace the controller board.
Self-diagnostic error: HDD (Hard Disk Drive) GW
3003 Time Out Error
SC822 B Command Error
3004 When the main switch is turned on or starting the

self-diagnostic, the HDD stays busy for the specified time or
more.
Loose connection
Defective HDD
Defective controller
D059/D060/D061 4-204 SM
SC Tables: 8xx
Self-diagnostic error: Standard NVRAM GW
The controller cannot recognize the standard NVRAM installed

or detects that the NVRAM is defective.
SC824 C
1401 Loose connection
Defective standard NVRAM
Defective controller board
Worn-out battery in the NVRAM
Self-diagnostic Error: RTC/optional NVRAM GW
shooting
Trouble-
The RTC device was not detected.
SC826 C
15FF RTC defective
NVRAM without RTC installed
Backup battery discharged
Self-diagnostic error: Standard SDRAM DIMM GW
Verification error
Error detected during a write/verify check for the standard RAM
(SDRAM DIMM).
0201
Loose connection
Defective SDRAM DIMM
827 C
Defective controller
Resident memory error. The SPD values in all RAM DIMM are
incorrect or unreadable.
0202
Defective RAM DIMM
Defective SPD ROM on RAM DIMM
Defective 12C bus
SM 4-205 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 8xx
Self-diagnostic error: ROM GW
Check sum error 1. The boot monitor and OS program stored in

0101 the ROM DIMM was checked. If the check sum of the program
was incorrect, this SC code is displayed.
828 C
Check sum error 2. All areas of the ROM DIMM are checked. If
0104 the check sum of all programs stored in the ROM DIMM is
incorrect, this SC code is displayed.
Replace controller board
Self-diagnostic error: Optional RAM GW
Verification error (Slot 1). The data stored in the optional RAM in
0401
Slot 1 does not match the data when reading.
Composition error (Slot 1). The result of checking the

829 B
0402 composition data of the optional RAM in Slot 1 on the controller
is incorrect.
Incorrect RAM DIMM installed (not compatible with this

machine.)
RAM DIMM defective
D059/D060/D061 4-206 SM
SC Tables: 8xx
SC833 D Self-diagnostic error 8: Engine I/F ASIC GW
ASIC (Mandolin) for system control could not be detected. After the
0F30
PCI configuration, the device ID for the ASIC could not be checked.
The read/write check done for resident RAM on the mother board
0F41
could not be done correctly.
50B1 Could not initialize or read the bus connection.
50B2 Value of the SSCG register is incorrect.
Check for loose connections at MB (Mother Board)

Replace MB
shooting
Trouble-
For more details about this SC code error, execute SP5990 to print an SMC report
so you can read the error code. The error code is not displayed on the operation
panel.
Self-diagnostic Error: Centronics Device GW
The self-diagnostic test with the loopback connector failed.

SC835 D
IEEE1284 Centronics board defective

Loopback connector defective
IEEE 1394 I/F Error GW
Driver setting incorrect and cannot be used by the 1394 I/F.

SC851 D
NIB (PHY), LINK module defective; change the Interface Board

SM 4-207 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 8xx
Wireless LAN Error 1 GW
The board that holds the wireless LAN card can be accessed, but the wireless
SC853 D LAN card (802.11b/Bluetooth) itself could not be accessed while the machine
was starting up.
Wireless LAN card has been removed
The board that holds the wireless LAN card can be accessed, but the
SC854 D wireless LAN card (802.11b/Bluetooth) itself could not be accessed while
the machine was operating.
Wireless LAN card has been removed
An error is detected for the wireless LAN card (802.11b or Bluetooth).

SC855 D
Wireless LAN card defective

Wireless card connection not tight
An error is detected for the wireless LAN board (802.11b or Bluetooth).

SC856 D
Wireless LAN card board defective

PCI connector loose (External controller interface board)
D059/D060/D061 4-208 SM
SC Tables: 8xx
USB I/F Error 1 GW
The USB driver is unstable and generated an error. The USB I/F cannot be
SC857 D
used.
USB board or controller board defective
Serious Data Encryption Error GW
A serious error occurred during data encryption due to corruption of USB

SC858 B Flash or other data, or the presence of a magnetic field.
Power the system off/on

If this does not solve the problem, replace the data encryption board
shooting
Trouble-
Data encryption HDD error GW
An error occurred while data encryption was in progress.

The update procedure for the data encryption key was started with
no HDD installed in the main machine.
The machine was switched off while the data encryption key was
SC859 B being updated.
An HDD error occurred caused by the effect of spurious noise on the
disk or harnesses.
Check all the HDD harness connection points

Initialize the HDD with SP5832
Replace the HDD
SM 4-209 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 8xx
HDD Error 1 GW
The driver could not acquire the status of the hard disks within 30 s, or the
HDD is connected, but the driver detected one of the following errors:
Hard disks are not formatted

Hard disk corrupted; reformat the disks with SP mode
SS_NOT_READY One or both HDDs are not ready.
SS_BAD_LABEL Partition types are different
Error returned during label read or

SS_READ_ERROR
label check
SC860 D
Error returned during label write or
SS_WRITE_ERROR
label check
SS_FS_ERROR File system repair failed
SS_MOUNT_ERROR File system mount failed
SS_COMMAND_ERROR Drive does not answer the command
SS_KERNEL_ERROR Kernel internal error
SS_SIZE_ERROR Driver size is too small
SS_NO_PARTITION Specified partition does not exist
SS_NO_FILE Device files do not exist
D059/D060/D061 4-210 SM
SC Tables: 8xx
HDD Error 2: HDD Startup GW
The hard disks were detected at power on, but the disks were not detected
within 30 s after recovery from the energy conservation mode.
SC861 B Cable between the hard disks and controller board disconnected or
loose
Hard disk power connector loose
One of the hard disks is defective
Controller or mother board defective
HDD Error 4: HDD Read Error GW
The system cannot read the data written on the hard disks.
SC863 B
shooting
Trouble-
Sectors on the disks have become corrupted during operation;
replace the hard disks
HDD Error 5: Data CRC Error GW
SC864 B During HDD operation, the HDD could not respond to a CRC error query.
Mother board defective
HDD Error 6: Access Error GW
HDD responded to an error during operation for a condition other than

SC865 B
those for SC863, SC864.
HDD defective
SM 4-211 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 8xx
SD Card Error 1: Confirmation GW
The machine detects an electronic license error in the application on the

SD card inserted in the controller slot when the machine is powered on.
The program stored on the SD card contains electronic confirmation
license data. If the program does not contain this license data, or if the
SC866 B
result of the check reveals the license data in the program on the SD card
is incorrect, then the checked program cannot execute and this SC code is
displayed.
Required program missing or incorrect

Download the correct program for this machine onto the SD card.
SD Card Error 2: SD Card Removal GW
The SD card inserted in the system slot when the machine was powered
SC867 B on was removed while the machine was still switched on.
SD card removed from boot slot on the controller

SD Card Error 3: SD Card Access GW
An error is returned during an operation using an SD card. Debug console

acquires more detailed information about the error.
SD card not inserted completely

SC868 B
SD card defective
Note: If this SC code is displayed again after cycling the machine off and
on, use another SD card. If this does not solve the problem, replace the
controller board.
D059/D060/D061 4-212 SM
SC Tables: 8xx
Address Book Data Error GW
Address book data stored on the hard disk was detected as abnormal
when it was accessed from either the operation panel or the network.
The address book data cannot be read from the HDD or SD card where it
is stored, or the data read from the media is defective.
Software defective; switch off/on, and change the controller firmware if

the problem is not solved
SC870 B HDD defective
Recommended Recovery
Execute SP5846 050 (UCS Settings – Initialize all Directory Info.) to
initialize all address book data.
Initialize the user information with SP5832 006 (HDD Formatting–
shooting
Trouble-
User Information 1) and SP5832 007 (HDD Formatting – User
Information 2).
Replace the HDDs.
Boot the machine from the SD card.
HDD mail RX data error GW
An HDD error was detected immediately after power on. The HDD may
be defective or the machine was accidentally powered off while the HDD
SC872 D
was being accessed.
Reformat the HDD with SP5832-7 (Mail RX Data)

Replace the HDD
HDD mail send data error GW
An error was detected on the HDD immediately after the machine was
SC873 D turned on, or power was turned off while the machine used the HDD.
Do SP5832-007 (Format HDD – Mail TX Data) to initialize the HDD.

Replace the HDD
SM 4-213 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 8xx
Delete All Error 1: HDD GW
A data error was detected for the HDD/NVRAM after the "Delete All"
option was used.
Note: The source of this error is the Data Overwrite Security Unit running
SC874 D from an SD card.
Turn the main switch off/on and try the operation again.
Install the Data Overwrite Security Unit again. For more, see section
“MFP Options” in "Installation".
HDD defective
Delete All Error 2: Data area GW
An error occurred while the machine deleted data from the HDD.
SC875 D Note: The source of this error is the Data Overwrite Security Unit running
from an SD card.
Turn the main switch off/on and try the operation again.
Log Data Error GW
The log data has been corrupted at power on, while the machine was
SC876 D
operating, or when the machine was powered off during a print or copy
cycle. The machine should never be switched off while it is printing or
copying.
Log data file was corrupted at power on or while the machine was
SC876-1 operating.
Format the HDD with SP5832-004.
D059/D060/D061 4-214 SM
SC Tables: 8xx
The log was set for encryption without the encryption module installed:
At power on
While the machine was operating
SC876-2
When the log encryption setting was changed.
Install or replace and set the encryption module.

Enable the log encryption setting.
At power on the log encryption key was disabled, causing an

SC876-3 NVRAM malfunction.
Format the disk with SP5832-004.
At power on the machine attempted log data encryption with the log
encryption setting disabled (NVRAM malfunction).
shooting
Trouble-
-or-
SC876-4
At power on log encryption was attempted with the log encryption
setting disabled (NVRAM malfunction).
Format the disk with SP5832-004.
Error occurred at power on.

Only the NVRAM was replaced with an NVRAM from another machine.
-or-
SC876-5 Only the HDD was replaced with an HDD unit from another machine.
Replace NVRAM with original NVRAM.

Replace HDD with original HDD.
If the error persists, format the HDD with SP5832-004.
Cause unknown. The error occurred at power on or while the machine

SC876-99 was operating.
Contact Ricoh design section.
SM 4-215 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 8xx
SC876: More
If the error persists after doing the procedure described in the table above, do this
procedure.
Switch the machine off, remove the HDD, then switch the machine on.
Do SP5801-019 then switch the machine off.
Install the HDD again and switch the machine on.
Do SP5832-004.
Cycle the machine power off/on.
Do SP9730-002 and set to "1" (ON).
Cycle the machine power off/on.
Data Overwrite Security SD card error GW
An error occurred, preventing successful execution of the Data

Overwrite Security function, even though it has been set up and
enabled.
DOS card is not inserted completely into the SD card slot

DOS card has been removed from the SD card slot
SC877 B
DOS card is damaged.
Note:
If the SD card has been removed (or was not installed correctly),
switch the machine off, insert the SD card, then switch on the
machine again.
If the SD card has been damaged, procure a new SD card, replace
the NVRAM, then do the DOS option installation.
D059/D060/D061 4-216 SM
SC Tables: 8xx
TPM electronic authentication error GW
The attempt by the main machine to electronically authenticate TPM

SC878 B failed. When the machine was switched on the value registered by TPM
did not match the value stored in the USB Flash Memory
Replace the IOB.
Media Link Board Error GW
A request for access to the Media Link Board was not answered within
SC880 D
the specified time.
Media Link Board defective
shooting
Trouble-
SM 4-217 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 9xx
4.15 SC TABLES: 9XX
Electrical Total Counter Error GW
The total counter contains data that is not a number.

SC900 C
NVRAM disturbed unexpectedly
NVRAM defective
NVRAM data corrupted
Mechanical Total Counter Error
The mechanical total counter is disconnected.

SC901 B
User removed the counter while it was operating
Poor connection
Mechanical total counter defective
SC910 D External Controller Error 1 GW
The external controller alerted the machine about an error.
Please refer to the instructions for the external controller.
D059/D060/D061 4-218 SM
SC Tables: 9xx
External Controller Error 6 GW
While EAC (External Application Converter), the conversion module, was

operating normally, the receipt of a power line interrupt signal from the
FLUTE serial driver was detected, or BREAK signal from the other station
SC919 B
was detected.
Power outage at the EFI controller

EFI controller was rebooted
Connection to EFI controller loose
Printer Error 1 GW
An internal application error was detected and operation cannot continue.
shooting
Trouble-
SC920 D
Software defective; switch off/on, or change the controller firmware if
the problem is not solved
Insufficient memory
Printer Error 2 GW
When the printer application started, the font to use could not be found on
SC921 D
the SD card.
The font is not on the SD card
F-Gate Signal Error
When the IPU has already received the F-GATE signal (laser writing start
trigger signal), the IPU receives another F-GATE signal.
SC951 B
Firmware defective
Update the BICU firmware.
BICU defective
SM 4-219 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 9xx
Scanner Image Setting Error
The settings required for image processing using the scanner are not sent
from the IPU.
SC953 B
Check the harnesses, connectors between the MCU and BICU
Update the BICU, MCU firmware
MCU defective
BICU defective
Printer Image Setting Error
The settings that are required for image processing using the printer
controller are not sent from the IPU.
Check the harnesses, connectors to the LDB and IPU

SC954 B Check the harnesses, connectors between IPU/LDB, LDB/Polygon
Mirror Motor PCB
Update the BICU firmware
LD defective
IPU on BICU defective
Polygon mirror motor or polygon mirror motor PCB defective
Memory Setting Error
The settings that are required for image processing using the memory are
not sent from the IPU.
SC955 B Software bug

Hard disk unit defective
MCU defective
Replace BICU.
D059/D060/D061 4-220 SM
SC Tables: 9xx
Scanner Start Error
During scanned image processing, another command to start scanning

SC964 B
was received.
Software bug
Print Start Error
SC965 B During print processing, another command to start printing was received.
Software bug
shooting
Trouble-
Polygon Mirror Motor Ready Error
The polygon mirror motor does not reach ready status within 15 s after the
copy paper is detected by the registration sensor. (15 s after the write
request was issued for the IPU, the F-GATE signal remained LOW.)
Polygon mirror motor harness, connections to BICU loose, broken,

SC966 B
defective
Polygon mirror motor drive board harness, connector to BICU loose,
broken, defective
Polygon mirror motor drive board defective
BICU defective
SM 4-221 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 9xx
Scanner Ready Error
The scan ready signal is not generated by the MCU for more than 10 s
after the read start signal is sent to the MCU.
SC970 B
Software bug
Harnesses, connectors to the MCU loose, broken, defective
MCU defective
BICU defective
Software Performance Error 1 GW
An unexpected operation was encountered by the software.
Software crash; reboot the machine

If the HDDs have just been replaced, be sure to download the stamp
data (SP 5853).
SC990 B
With SP5990 004 (SMC Report – Logging Data), print the most
recent information for SC990.
The SC990 information displays the file name, line number, and
value. Report this information to your technical supervisor. For
example:
Function.c LINE: 123 VAL:0
Software Error GW
The software performs an unexpected function and the program cannot

SC991 C
continue. Recovery processing allows the program to continue.
Software defective, re-boot*1
D059/D060/D061 4-222 SM
SC Tables: 9xx
*1: In order to get more details about SC991:

Execute SP7403 or print an SMC Report (SP5990) to read the history of the 10 most
recent logged errors.
If you press the zero key on the operation panel with the SP selection menu displayed, you
will see detailed information about the recently logged SC991, including the software file
name, line number, and so on. Of these two methods, 1) is the recommended method,
because another SC could write over the information for the previous SC.
Undefined Error (No SC Code) GW
An error not controlled by the system occurred (the error does not come
under any other SC code).
SC992 C
Software defective
shooting
Trouble-
Turn the machine power off and on. The machine cannot be used
until this error is corrected.
Re-install firmware
Operation Panel Management Records Exceeded GW
An error occurred because the number of records exceeded the limit for
images managed in the service layer of the firmware. This can occur if
SC994 C
there are too many application screens open on the operation panel.
No action required because this SC does not interfere with operation of

the machine.
SM 4-223 D059/D060/D061
SC Tables: 9xx
Serial Number Setting Incorret

SC995
The 11-digit serial number is printed on the data plate. This information
is compared with the installed components to detect mismatches.
SC995-01 D Serial Number Mismatch 1
Enter the correct information for the model with SP5811 or

use the previous NVRAM.
Cycle the machine off/on.
SC995-02 D NVRAM Mismatch
Use the previous NVRAM.

-or-
If the NVRAM must be replaced:
Prepare an SD card with the current model information.
Do SP5825 to download the new model information from the
SD card to new NVRAM.
Remove the SD card.
Cycle the main machine off/on.
SC995-03 D Controller Mismatch, or Controller Board Defective
You must install the GW controller board designed for use with
this machine.
SC995-04 D Serial Number Mismatch 2
Reinstall the components which have been removed from the

machine.
D059/D060/D061 4-224 SM
SC Tables: 9xx
Application Selection Error GW
An application did not start after pressing the appropriate key on the
operation panel.
SC997 B
Software bug; change the firmware for the application that failed
A RAM or DIMM option required by the application is not installed or
not installed correctly.
shooting
Trouble-
SM 4-225 D059/D060/D061
PSU Protection Circuits
4.16 PSU PROTECTION CIRCUITS
4.16.1 OVERVIEW
The diagram above shows the outputs of each converter listed in Table 1.
PSU-C and PSU-E comprise the PSU. PSU-E consists of two PCBs: PCB A and PCB B.
There is a total of five converters:
PSU-C contains the energy save converter.
PCB A of PSU-E contains the 1st and 2nd converter.
PCB B of PSU-E contains the 3rd and 4th converter.
The PSU contains several protective circuits that will cut power to prevent damage to the
machine and dangerous fire hazards that could be caused by harness short circuits or
damage to the PSU circuits due an accidental power overload. These protective circuits
are provided at three locations:
AC input
Converter control points
Output points
Even if one or more of these protective circuits should fail, the others will act as backup to
cut power to the machine if a problem occurs,
The output points are provided with electronic interrupt circuits, so fuses are not required at
these locations.
Table 1: PSU Converters and Output System
D059/D060/D061 4-226 SM
Converter Output Name Output Voltage Output Connector
VccE 5.1V CN763-1p-5p

Energy Save
VcaE 12.0V CN764-1p-3p
VccL 5.1V CN711-1p-3p

1st
Vcc 5.1V CN712-1p-3p
Vaa1 24.0V CN713-1p-2p
2nd Vaa2 24.0V CN713-3p-6p
Vaa3 24.0V CN714-1p-6p
Vaa4 24.0V CN715-1p-2p

3rd
Vaa5 24.0V CN715-3p-4p
shooting
Trouble-
Vmm1 38.0V CN716-1p
4th
Vmm2 38.0V CN716-2p
SM 4-227 D059/D060/D061
4.16.2 AC INPUT MODULE

The AC input module has the following 5 fuses.
Input Fuse Rating
FU1 4A/250V
FU3 4A/250V
FU001 3.15A/250V
FU002 6.3A/250V
FU101 6.3A/250V
The AC input area of the PSU has fuses to cut AC power to the board in case of damage to
the PSU board or one or more short circuits in the output area.
The location of the board where output is interrupted is different, depending on which fuse
blows. Table 2 shows which areas of the PSU are affected by each fuse.
As shown in Table 2, FU1 cuts all circuits if damage or short circuits occur at PSU-C, which
operates independently of the other circuits while the machine is in the sleep (energy
conservation) mode. A short circuit in an input harness or other problem on PSU-C will also
cause FU3 to blow and will cut all power output from the PSU.
Table 2: PSU Fuses and Related Power Output Interrupts
D059/D060/D061 4-228 SM
Converter Output Name FU1 FU3 FU001 FU002 FU101
VccE O O
Energy Save
VcaE O O
VccL O O O
1st
Vcc O O O
Vaa1 O O O O
2nd Vaa2 O O O O
Vaa3 O O O O
Vaa4 O O O O O
3rd
shooting
Trouble-
Vaa5 O O O O O
Vmm1 O O O O O
4th
Vmm2 O O O O O
If there is damage or a short circuit inside the 1st converter of the control system in
PSU-E, FU001 blows and power is interrupted in the output of the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and
4th converters.
If there is damage or a short circuit inside the 2nd converter of the control system in
PSU-E, FU002 blows and power is interrupted in the output of the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th
converters.
If there is damage or a short circuit inside the 3rd or 4th converter of the control system
in PSU-E, FU101 blows and power is interrupted in the output of the 3rd and 4th
converters.
SM 4-229 D059/D060/D061
4.16.3 CONVERTER CONTROL MODULE

The following devices provide primary protection against current surges:
Energy save converter
1st Converter
2nd Converter
3rd Converter
4th Converter
Each converter generates the dc currents that are used by the CPU, motor drive boards,
and other parts of the mainframe. Each converter is provided with a protection circuit to
detect power surges.
As shown in Table 3, the power supply to the mainframe that is interrupted depends on
which protection circuit is opened as a result of a power surge:
The protection circuit of the energy save converter cuts all power if a problem occurs in
the energy save converter.
If the problem occurs in the 1st converter, power to the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th
converters is interrupted.
If the problem occurs in the 2nd converter, power to the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th converters is
interrupted.
If the problem occurs in the 3rd converter, power to only the 3rd converter is
interrupted.
If the problem occurs in the 4th converter, power to only the 4th converter is
interrupted.
D059/D060/D061 4-230 SM
Table 3: Converter Protection Circuits and Related Output Power Interrupts
Converter Output Name Energy Save 1st 2nd 3rd 4th
VccE O
Energy Save
VcaE O
VccL O O
1st
Vcc O O
Vaa1 O O O
2nd Vaa2 O O O
Vaa3 O O O
shooting
Trouble-
Vaa4 O O O O
3rd
Vaa5 O O O O
Vmm1 O O O O
4th
Vmm2 O O O O
Important!
To reset the machine after a protection circuit has opened:
Switch off the operation switch.
Switch off the main power switch.
Allow the machine to remain off for at least 5 minutes.
Turn on the main power switch.
SM 4-231 D059/D060/D061
4.16.4 OUTPUT MODULE

The PSU output module is provided with the following interrupt devices:
Control system electronic interrupt: 5.1V, 12V
Drive system electronic interrupt: 24V, 38V
The output fuses of previous models have been replaced by electronic interrupt circuits.
These electronic interrupt circuits hav protect the machine from excessive current,
excessive voltages, and overheating.
Excessive current can be caused by a short at the power supply.
Excessive voltage can be caused by damage to the PSU board, short circuits in
external harnesses, or an unexpected surge in the external power supply.
Overheating occurs when the temperature level of the elements in the control circuits
of the converters becomes too high due to the failure of the PSU cooling fan, for
example.
Table 4 shows how the electronic interrupt circuits react to these three problems.
Table 4: Electronic Interrupt Detection Locations
Converter Output Name Over Current Over Voltage Over Heating
VccE O O O
Energy Save
VcaE O O O
VccL O O
1st
Vcc O O
Vaa1 O O O
2nd Vaa2 O O O
Vaa3 O O O
Vaa4 O O O
3rd
Vaa5 O O O
Vmm1 O O O
4th
Vmm2 O O O
D059/D060/D061 4-232 SM
To reset the machine after a circuit has opened:

Switch off the operation switch.
Switch off the main power switch.
Allow the machine to remain off for at least 5 minutes.
Turn on the main power switch
shooting
Trouble-
SM 4-233 D059/D060/D061
4.16.5 PSU LED DISPLAY

Four converters are built into PSU-E. Each converter is provided with one LED that lights
when the converter is activated.
Converter LED Name
1st Converter 5V
2nd Converter 24V
3rd Converter 24VINT
4th Converter 38V
With the PSU box door open:

LED 5V (1st Converter) and LED 24V (2nd Converter) are on PCB A on the right.
LED 24VINT (3rd Converter) and LED 38V (4th Converter) are on PCB B on the left.
You can see which system is operating abnormally by checking whether these LEDs are on
or off. If an LED is off, the converter for that LED is defective (see the above table).
The table below shows what will interrupt the output from a converter.
Converter On/Off States According to Mode
D059/D060/D061 4-234 SM
Output Door Energy Low Off/

Converter Copy Standby
Name Open Saver Power Sleep
Energy VccE ON ON ON ON ON ON
Save
VcaE ON ON ON ON ON ON
VccL ON ON ON ON ON OFF
1st
Vcc ON ON ON ON OFF OFF
Vaa1 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF
2nd Vaa2 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF
Vaa3 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF
shooting
Trouble-
Vaa4 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
3rd
Vaa5 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
Vmm1 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF

4th
Vmm2 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF
4.16.6 PSU-E REPLACEMENT

Before replacing any part of the PSU (especially PCB A, PCB B):
Switch the machine off.
Disconnect it from the power source.
Allow the machine to stand at least 10 minutes before you open the PSU box door.
PCB-A and PCB-B of the PSU-E are both provided with a large capacity electrolytic
condenser.
Such large condensers store a large residual charge that can cause electrical shock if a
board is handled too soon after the machine is turned off.
SM 4-235 D059/D060/D061
Troubleshooting Guide
4.17 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
4.17.1 MAIN MACHINE (D059, D060, D061)
Problem Spotting and dirty edges
Solution
Raise the image transfer voltage with SP2301-1, -2 (Transfer Current Adjustment, 1 1st
Copy Side, 2 Thick Paper): D059: 100 to 120, D060: 110 to 130, D061: 130 to 150
Raise Vpp (ID sensor pattern development potential) with SP2201-3: 200 to 270
Raise SP2201-6: 200 to 270. Raise SP2201- (Development Bias Adjustment – ID Sensor
Development Potential (Low Speed 2)): 200 to 270.
Comments
When the V-I value of the transfer belt is low (i.e. high resistance), the attraction
between the paper and the belt is increased in order to hold the paper on the belt.
When paper that requires a large of amount of charge to separate at the paper exit,
spotting can occur because of the discharge used to separate belt and paper.
Residual toner can cause this problem in filled or halftone areas.
Also, toner scattered in the direction of paper feed on the transfer exit guide caused
by the aforementioned spotting can collect on the side edges of upstream paper.
Problem Vertical white stripes on coated paper
Solution
Replace the hot roller and paper separation pawls
Comments
Over time, the fusing separation pawls in contact with the hot roller become worn due
to friction.
This can cause white stripes to appear in the halftone, or black fill areas of images on
coated paper.
D059/D060/D061 4-236 SM
Problem EVOLVE paper does not feed
Solution
Clean the feed rollers with a damp, clean cloth.
Comments
EVOLVE and similar paper that contains a large amount of paper dust can cause paper
dust to adhere to the feed rollers which leads to failures to feed.
Problem Images on large-size paper dirty after feeding small-size paper.
Solution
Clean the transfer exit guide plate.
shooting
Trouble-
Clean the fusing exit guide plate.
Comments
Toner scatter (caused by the electrical discharge when paper is peeled from the
transfer belt during continuous feed of small-size paper) falls onto the transfer exit
guide and fusing exit guide plate.
This toner scattered on the guide plates will stick to the wider paper the next time
large-size paper is fed.
Problem Scattered toner, dirty images on coated paper
Solution
Raise Vpp with SP mode settings to reduce the toner density by adjusting these SP
codes:
SP2201-3: 200V to 240V
SP2201-6 : 200V to 240V
SP2201-9 : 200V to 240V
SM 4-237 D059/D060/D061
Comments
The front and cut sides of coated paper is extremely smooth, and in a low
temperature/low humidity environment dirty background can occur easily on the
surface of the OPC.
Under such conditions, during toner density control toner scatter and dirty edges can
occur easily with coated paper (compared with normal paper).
Problem Incorrect double-feed detection
Solution
Avoid using coated paper that has absorbed moisture, do not re-use OHP.
Do not use perforated paper where the holes may appear at the position of the
double-feed sensors. If you need to use long-edge feed (LEF) loose-leaf paper with holes
on only one edge, feed the paper so that the holes are on the trailing edges.
Avoid using multi-layered paper or label sheets with labels that may flutter.
Comments
The ultra-sound sensors used to detect double-feed cannot accurately detect double
feeding with the following types of paper.
Adhesive paper media (Examples: damp coated paper, used OHP)
Paper with holes near the leading edges
Paper with loose labels, multi layered sheets (pasted up for layout).
Problem Failure to feed, double feed
Solution
Fan the paper to remove static.

Remove the paper from the tray and turn the stack upside down.
D059/D060/D061 4-238 SM
Comments
If the paper has rough cut edges:

Bits of paper on the rough edges facing down can wrap around the separation roller
and cause poor feeding.
The paper can stick together and double feed.
Problem Jam 21 occurs with A5 LEF on the D061 (135 ppm)
Solution
Change these User Tool Settings:

Line speed mode setting (135 ppm to 110 ppm)
High Temperature Mode 2 setting (178 to 163) (both settings are in User Tools)
shooting
Trouble-
Comments
The strength of the spring on the feeler may have weakened and is not retracting the
feeler.
The timing interval between sheets in the D061 (135 ppm) machine is short, and if
the spring is weak the leading edge of the next sheet may arrive before the feeler of
the fusing exit sensor retracts.
If this occurs, the leading edge of the next sheet hits the feeler before it can return to
its home position and the sheet deviates from the paper path.
However, this problem does not occur with paper larger than A5 LEF because the
leading edges of the larger sheets are guided by the stripper pawls on both sides of
the leading edge.
SM 4-239 D059/D060/D061
Problem Copying cannot be done with two machine connected by the copier
connection kit and the High Capacity Stacker (D447) connected to
the slave machine.
Solution
Disconnect the High Capacity Stacker from the slave machine.
Comments
Dual copying is not possible with the High Capacity Stacker connected to the slave
machine.
The dual copy key on the operation panel does not light.
Dual copying is possible only if High Capacity Stacker is disconnected from the slave
machine.
Problem Fusing temperature setting
Solution
Wait for the machine to reach the adjusted target temperature.
Comments
When the fusing temperature setting is changed, the machine needs about 5
minutes to reach the target temperature.
If the fusing temperature is lowered for the next job after the machine has been
running at the default fusing temperature for a long period, and if paper passes
through the fusing unit before the unit can reach the lower target temperature, this
can cause the paper to curl and the paper may jam at the fusing exit.
D059/D060/D061 4-240 SM
Problem Granular black spotting occurs on the back side of paper
Solution
Clean the fusing unit carefully after paper jams in the fusing unit.
Comments
Black spotting on the back sides of paper can occur after jams have occurred in the
fusing unit.
When black spotting on the back sides of paper occurs, the spotting can cause the
paper to stick to the surface of the pressure roller.
Problem Dotted vertical lines
Solution
shooting
Trouble-
Improve fusing by raising the fusing temperature. You can further improve fusing by
adjusting the line speed for thick paper.
Comments
The fusibility of 2-by-2 half-tone and other images can be unfavorable.

The exit rollers of downstream peripheral units can cause white tracks (dotted lines)
in images by picking off unfused toner which the rollers then transfer into the white
areas of sheets that follow.
Problem Dirty stacked edges after printing
Solution
Improve fusing by raising the fusing temperature. You can further improve fusing by
adjusting the line speed for thick paper.
Comments
The conditions for fusing images that contain half-tones can be unfavorable.
When this occurs, this can contribute to the black appearance of stacked edges.
The poor fusibility of such images extends to the rollers, makes them dirty, and
causes dirty corners.
SM 4-241 D059/D060/D061
Problem Black edges, vertical lines on thin, large size paper
Solution
Follow the PM list and perform the periodic inspection and cleaning of the fusing unit.
Comments
The guide plate at the fusing unit exit can become dirty when feeding large-size thin
paper (sizes larger than B4).
This can cause the stacked edges to become black or cause black vertical lines at
the trailing edges
Problem Controller board replacement in the field
Solution
Always replace the controller board with the correct type for the machine.
Comments
Be sure to replace a controller board with the correct type for the machine: D059 (90
ppm), D060 (110 ppm), D061 (135 ppm).
The controller board of each machine is different; the controller board specifically
designed for the machine must be installed. If the wrong type of controller board is
installed in a machine, this will cause the machine to issue an SC error.
D059/D060/D061 4-242 SM
4.17.2 DECURL UNIT DU5000 (D457-17)
Problem Black streak 8 mm pitch on paper edges
Solution
Disconnect the unit downstream of the Decurl Unit and clean the anti-static brush at the
exit of the De-Curl Unit.
Comments
After a long period of time, the brush can transfer stray toner, paper dust, etc. to the
paper.
4.17.3 LCIT RT5030 (D452-17)
shooting
Trouble-
Solution

Remove it from the tray and turn the stack upside down.
Comments
The following undesirable conditions can occur with rough cut edges:
Bits of paper on rough edges facing down can wrap around the separation roller and
cause poor feeding.
Paper can stick together and double feed.
SM 4-243 D059/D060/D061
4.17.4 LCIT RT5040 (D453-17)
Solution

Remove it from the tray and turn the stack upside down.
Comments
The following undesirable conditions can occur with rough cut edges:
Bits of paper on rough edges facing down can wrap around the separation roller and
cause poor feeding.
Paper can stick together and double feed.
Problem SC586
Solution
Clean paper dust from the CIS (Contact Image Sensor) during PM and after the machine
issues SC 586 (CIS registration error).
Comments
The CIS does not function correctly if it is contaminated with paper dust.
Problem Poor feed with coated paper
Solution
If the customer intends to use coated paper, replace the three feed rollers (pickup, feed,
separation rollers) with the EPDM feed rollers.
Comments
The urethane feed rollers installed in the LCIT at the factory can pick up paper dust and
coating material from the surfaces of coated paper, causing less friction between the
roller and paper surface which can lead to poor feeding.
D059/D060/D061 4-244 SM
Rev. 06/23/2010 Troubleshooting Guide
Problem Leading edge of NCR bent, or bent leading edge causes a jam
Solution
⇒ Switch on Air Assist (ON Duty 30%)

Switch off Pickup Assist.
Install the NCR auxiliary plate near the feed rollers in the tray where NCR is being fed.
Comments
NCR media is not stiff and easily jams.
shooting
Trouble-
SM 4-245 D059/D060/D061
4.17.5 BOOKLET FINISHER SR5010 (D434-17)
Problem Stapled booklet remains on the exit roller
Solution
If this occurs, set the auxiliary Z-fold tray (intended for use with the shift tray) on the
booklet tray. Leave the auxiliary tray on the booklet tray only when needed (remove it
when not needed).
Comments
When paper without stiffness is stapled at two places and output to the booklet tray, the
booklet may droop and not feed out, causing the trailing edge of the paper to stop at the
exit rollers.
Problem Paper not aligned vertically by top fence and bottom fence
Solution
Use SP6217 to adjust the position of the top fence where it contacts the high edge of the
paper stack.
Comments
The top fence may not be able to touch the trailing edge of a large stack if the paper has
curled.
D059/D060/D061 4-246 SM
Problem Poor stacking of a large number of Z-folded sheets in the proof tray
Solution
Set the auxiliary Z-fold tray (intended for use with the shift tray) on the proof tray.
Removing the paper from the feed tray of the main machine, turning it over, and setting it
in the tray again may also solve the problem.
Comments
When paper without stiffness is Z-folded, it will sag on the proof tray and make it difficult
for the proof tray full sensor to detect when the tray is full, causing too many sheets to
stack up on the proof tray.
Problem Black streaks on the edges of large stapled booklets (50 sheets or more)
shooting
Trouble-
using small-size paper
Solution
Clean the brush roller in the stacker/stapler unit.
Comments
Toner or other material picked up and held in the brush roller is being transferred to paper
in the stack/staple unit before it goes to the booklet unit.
SM 4-247 D059/D060/D061
4.17.6 HIGH CAPACITY STACKER SK5010 (D447-17)
Problem Black streaks 5 mm wide on paper edges output to the shift tray
Solution
Clean the shaft of the shift tray exit roller, and clean the rubber paddles.
Comments
After a long period of time, the rubber paddles can transfer stray toner, paper dust,
etc. to the paper.
The shaft of the exit roller can pass stray toner, etc. to the paddles which can then
pass dirt on to the paper.
Problem Black streak 8 mm wide on paper edges output to the shift tray
Solution
Clean the anti-static brush at the shift tray exit.
Comments
After a long period of time, the brush can transfer stray toner, paper dust, etc. to the
paper.
Problem Incorrect paper alignment by the jogger unit
Solution
Lower the de-curl setting on the Decurl Unit next to the main machine.
Comments
The paper is skewing due to face curl when the leading edge stopper pushes to the right,
causing side fences to catch on the paper or miss it.
D059/D060/D061 4-248 SM
Problem Last (top) sheet of every stack misaligned
Solution
Correct paper curl at the Decurl Unit.
Comments
When the unit begins aligning the next stack, one side fence (front or rear) is catching on
the last sheet of the stack below when it passes over the sheet below to start aligning the
first sheet of the next stack.
Problem Stacks of coated paper misaligned after tray lowering
Solution
shooting
Trouble-
After the job ends, wait 15 to 30 seconds before pushing the tray down button on the unit
operation panel.
Comments
Waiting 15 to 30 sec. before lower the tray allows more time for air between the sheets to
dissipate, making it easier for the stacked sheets to cling together and not move.
Problem Stacker cannot detect cart tray
Solution
Make sure that the cart is perfectly level when pushing it into the stacker.
Comments
If the cart is not straight, or if it is tilted, the cart set sensor inside the stacker will not be
able to detect the cart at its correct position.
SM 4-249 D059/D060/D061
4.17.7 MULTI FOLDING UNIT FD5000 (D454-17)
Problem Z-folded paper not output, page output out of order
Solution
Set the auxiliary tray on the fold (top) tray.
Comments
Transport and exit of Z-folded paper that is thick or heavy can become erratic.
4.17.8 TRIMMER UNIT TR5020 (D455-17)
Problem Folded booklet out of position
Solution
Adjust the center stapling unit of the Booklet Finisher.
Comments
Do the skew adjustment procedures described in the Booklet Finisher (D434)

replacement and adjustment manual.
Problem Leading edge (folded edge) of the booklet burred, crumbled,

broken
Solution
Do the skew adjustment for the booklet unit of the Booklet Finisher.
Length: Less than 3 mm, Width: Less than 1 mm (specified standards).
Comments
The cut at the trailing edge of the booklet is not clean or is torn due to skew that occurred
when the booklet was folded in the fold mechanism of the booklet unit.
D059/D060/D061 4-250 SM
Problem Trailing edges A3, DLT or larger paper are not aligned correctly
Solution
Do the skew adjustments described in the Book Finisher replacement and adjustment
procedures manual.
Comments
Standard specification: The fore edges of a booklet comprised of large-size sheets, 16 to

20 sheet sheets should be aligned within 2.5 mm.
There may be some variation in the alignment of the fore edges when folding large-size
sheets to make booklets of 16 to 20 sheets.
Problem Adjoining pages not aligned
shooting
Trouble-
Solution
Do the skew adjustments described in the Book Finisher replacement and adjustment
procedures manual.
Comments
Standard specification: Adjacent pages should be aligned within 0.5 mm.

The standard has been revised in consideration that some skew may occur.
Problem Booklet too thick
Solution
Use SP6727 to increase the number of passes made by the crease roller before the
booklet leaves the booklet finisher to flatten the leading edge of the booklet.
Specification: Booklet height must be less than 30 mm.
Comments
If the leading edge of the booklet is too thick, it will jam at the trimmer exit.
SM 4-251 D059/D060/D061
Jam Detection Rev. 06/23/2010
⇒4.18 JAM DETECTION

4.18.1 PAPER JAM DISPLAY
SP7-507 shows the paper jam history.
CODE: Indicates the jam code.

SIZE: Indicates the paper Size Code.
TOTAL: Indicates the total counter (SP7-502-001).
DATE: indicates the date when the jam occurred.
4.18.2 PAPER SIZE CODE
Size Code Paper Size Size Code Paper Size
05 A4 LEF 141 B4 SEF
06 A5 LEF 142 B5 SEF
14 B5 LEF 160 DLT SEF
38 LT LEF 164 LG SEF
44 HLT LEF 166 LT SEF
132 A3 SEF 172 HLT SEF
133 A4 SEF 255 Others
134 A5 SEF - -
D059/D060/D061 4-252 SM
Rev. 06/23/2010 Jam Detection
4.18.3 JAM CODES AND DISPLAY CODES

SP7-504 and SP7-509 show how many jams occurred at each location. Jam codes from
001 to 255 correspond with the suffix number of SP7-504 (e.g. Jam code 001 corresponds
with SP7-504-001) and Jam codes from 256 to 396 correspond with the suffix number of
SP7-509 by the following formula.
Suffix number of SP7-509 = Jam code (256 to 396) - 255 (e.g. Jam code 256
corresponds with SP7-509-001)
Late: Paper should be at the sensor, but it is not

Lag: There should be no paper at the sensor, but paper is present
Display Code Location 1
shooting
Trouble-
Mainframe with Trimmer Unit, Booklet Finisher, High Capacity Stacker, GBC, Ring
Binder, Multi-Folding Unit, Cover Interposer Tray, Decurl Unit, LCIT and Multi Bypass
Tray.
Display Code Location 2
Mainframe with Plockmatic, Finisher, Perfect Binder, Decurl Unit, LCIT and Multi
Bypass Tray.
SM 4-253 D059/D060/D061
4.18.4 MAINFRAME
LCD
Jam Code Display Description
Display
-001 At power on Initial paper jam -
1st Tray Feed Sensor: Late

-003 Paper is not fed from tray 1. A
Error
2nd Tray Feed Sensor:

-004 Paper is not fed from tray 2. A3
Late Error
3rd Tray Feed Sensor: Late

-005 Paper is not fed from tray 3. A2
Error
4th Tray Feed Sensor: Late Paper is not fed from the upper tray
-006 U2
Error of the A4 LCT.
5th Tray Feed Sensor: Late Paper is not fed from the middle
-007 U4
Error tray of the A4 LCT.
6th Tray Feed Sensor: Late Paper is not fed from the lower tray
-008 U5
Error of the A4 LCT.
7th Tray Feed Sensor: Late Paper is not fed from the by-pass
-009 V
Error tray.
1st Tray Transport Sensor: Vertical transport sensor 1 does not

-010 B1
Late Error detect paper from tray 1.
2nd Tray Transport Sensor: Vertical transport sensor 2 does not

-011 B1
3rd Tray Transport Sensor: Vertical transport sensor 3 does not

-012 B1
4th Tray Transport Sensor: 4th transport sensor (LCT) does not
-013 U
-014 5th Tray Transport Sensor: 5th transport sensor (LCT) does not U
D059/D060/D061 4-254 SM
LCD
Display
-015 U
7th Tray Transport Sensor: Relay sensor (Multi Bypass Tray)

-016 U
Late Error does not detect paper from tray 7.
LCIT Relay Sensor: Late LCT relay sensor (Mainframe) does

-017 B4
Error not detect paper from LCT.
LCIT Exit Sensor: Late LCT exit sensor (LCT) does not
-018 B4
Error detect paper from LCT.
shooting
Trouble-
Paper Bank Relay Sensor: Upper relay sensor does not detect
-019 B1
Late Error paper from the tray.
Registration Sensor: Late Registration sensor does not detect

-020 C
Error paper.
Paper Cooling Pipe Exit Job time sensor does not detect
-021 D
Sensor: Late Error paper.
-022 Exit Sensor: Late Error Exit sensor does not detect paper. D
Duplex Entrance Sensor: Duplex entrance sensor does not

-023 Z1
Late Error detect paper.
Duplex Transport Sensor Duplex transport sensor 1 does not

-024 Z4
1: Late Error detect paper.

-025 Z4

-026 Z4
Duplex Inverter Sensor: Duplex inverter sensor does not

-027 Z1
Late Error detect paper.
SM 4-255 D059/D060/D061
LCD
Display
Duplex Inverter Relay Duplex inverter relay sensor does

-028 Z1
Sensor: Late Error not detect paper.
1st Tray Feed Sensor: Lag 1st tray feed sensor does not turn
-053 A
Error off.
2nd Tray Feed Sensor: Lag 2nd tray feed sensor does not turn
-054 A3
Error off.
3rd Tray Feed Sensor: Lag 3rd tray feed sensor does not turn
-055 A2
Error off.
4th Tray Feed Sensor: Lag 4th tray feed sensor (LCT) does not
-056 U2
Error turn off.
-057 U4
Error turn off.
-058 U5
Error turn off.
7th Tray Feed Sensor: Lag Paper feed sensor (Multi Bypass
-059 V
Error Tray) does not turn off.
1st Tray Transport Sensor: Vertical transport sensor 1 does not

-060 A
Lag Error turn off.
2nd Tray Transport Sensor: Vertical transport sensor 2 does not

-061 A
Lag Error turn off.
3rd Tray Transport Sensor: Vertical transport sensor 3 does not

-062 A
Lag Error turn off.
-063 U
Lag Error turn off.
-064 U
Lag Error turn off.
D059/D060/D061 4-256 SM
LCD
Display
-065 6th Tray Transport Sensor: 6th transport sensor (LCT) does not
U
Lag Error turn off.
7th Tray Transport Sensor: Relay sensor (Multi Bypass Tray)

-066 U
Lag Error does not turn off.
LCIT Relay Sensor: Lag LCT relay sensor (Mainframe) does

-067 Z4
Error not detect turn off..
LCIT Exit Sensor: Lag LCT exit sensor (LCT) does not
-068 Z4
Error turn off..
Paper Bank Relay Sensor: Upper relay sensor does not turn
-069 Z4
Lag Error off.
shooting
Trouble-
Registration Sensor: Lag Registration sensor does not turn
-070 Z1
Error off.
Paper Cooling Pipe Exit

-071 Job time sensor does not turn off. Z1
Sensor: Lag Error
-072 Exit Sensor: Lag Error Exit sensor does not turn off. D
Duplex Entrance Sensor: Duplex entrance sensor does not

-073 Z1
Lag Error turn off.

-074 Z4
1: Lag Error turn off.

-075 Z4

-076 Z4
Duplex Inverter Sensor: Duplex inverter sensor does not

-077 Z1
Lag Error detect paper.
-078 Duplex Inverter Relay Duplex inverter relay sensor does Z1
SM 4-257 D059/D060/D061
LCD
Display
Sensor: Lag Error not turn off.
Entrance Sensor: Late Entrance sensor (Decurl Unit) does

-093 K1 to K4
Error (D457) not detect paper.
Entrance Sensor: Lag Error Entrance sensor (Decurl Unit) does

-094 K1 to K4
(D457) not turn off
Exit Sensor: Late Error Exit sensor (Decurl Unit) does not
-095 K1 to K4
(D457) detect paper.
Exit Sensor: Lag Error Exit sensor (Decurl Unit) does not
-096 K1 to K4
(D457) turn off
Double-feed sensor detects double

-099 Double Feed B1
feeding paper.
4.18.5 FINISHER SR5000 (B830)
LCD
Display
Entrance: Late Error Entrance sensor does not detect

-101 R1 to R3
(B830) paper.
-102 Entrance: Lag Error (B830) Entrance sensor does not turn off. R1 to R3
Proof Tray Exit: Late Error Upper tray exit sensor does not
-103 R1 to R3
(B830) detect paper.
Proof Tray Exit: Lag Error Upper tray exit sensor does not
-104 R1 to R3
(B830) turn off.
Shift Tray Exit: Late Error Shift tray exit sensor does not
-105 R1 to R3
-106 Shift Tray Exit: Lag Error Shift tray exit sensor does not turn R1 to R3
D059/D060/D061 4-258 SM
LCD
Display
(B830) off.
Staple Tray Exit: Late Error Staple tray exit sensor does not
-107 R4 to R8
Staple Tray Exit: Lag Error Staple tray exit sensor does not
-108 R4 to R8
(B830) turn off.
Pre-Stack Tray: Late Error Staple tray paper sensor does not
-109 R4 to R8
Pre-Stack Tray: Lag Error Staple tray paper sensor does not
-110 R4 to R8
(B830) turn off.
shooting
Trouble-
Stack feed-out belt HP sensor does
-111 Output (B830) R4 to R8
not turn off.
The machine detects a lock signal

-112 Drive Train (B830) R1 to R3
from the transport motors.
Shift Tray Lift Drive Train The machine detects a lock signal
-113 R1 to R3
(B830) from the shift tray lift motor.
Jogger Fence Drive Train The machine detects a lock signal

-114 R4 to R8
(B830) from the jogger motor.
Shift Tray Drive Train The machine detects a lock signal

-115 R1 to R3
(B830) from the shift motor.

-116 Stapler Drive Train (B830) R4 to R8
from the staple motor.

-117 Output Drive Train (B830) R4 to R8
from the stack feed-out belt motor.

-118 Punch Drive Train (B830) R1 to R3
from the punch motor.
-119 Z-Fold Drive Train (B830) The machine detects a lock signal R4 to R8
SM 4-259 D059/D060/D061
LCD
Display
from the Z-hold jam motor.

Pre-Stacker Drive Train
-120 from the pre-stack transport jam R4 to R8
(B830)
motor.
Main Machine Setting The machine detects the job data

-121 R1 to R3
Incorrect (B830) error.
The machine detects the jam signal

-122 Plockmatic Jam (B830) Ploc
from the Plockmatic unit.
GBC Punch Unit Jam The machine detects the jam signal
-123 GBC
(B830) from the GBC unit.
4.18.6 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY CI5010 (B835)
LCD
Display
1st Feed Sensor: Late 1st paper feed sensor does not
-130 Q1
Error (B835) detect paper.
1st Feed Sensor: Lag Error 1st paper feed sensor does not turn
-131 Q1
(B835) off.
2nd Feed Sensor: Late 2nd paper feed sensor does not
-132 Q2
Error (B835) detect paper.
2nd Feed Sensor: Lag 2nd paper feed sensor does not
-133 Q2
Error (B835) turn off.
1st Transport Sensor: Late 1st transport sensor does not Q3 to

-134
Error (B835) detect paper. Q4
-135 1st Transport Sensor: Lag 1st transport sensor does not turn Q3 to
D059/D060/D061 4-260 SM
LCD
Display
Error (B835) off. Q4
2nd Transport Sensor: Late 2nd transport sensor does not Q3 to

-136
Error (B835) detect paper. Q4
2nd Transport Sensor: Lag 2nd transport sensor does not turn Q3 to
-137
1st Ver. Transport Sn: Late 1st vertical transport sensor does Q3 to
-138
Error (B835) not detect paper. Q4
1st Ver. Transport Sn: Lag 1st vertical transport sensor does Q3 to
-139
Error (B835) not turn off. Q4
shooting
Trouble-
2nd Ver. Transport Sn: Late 2nd vertical transport sensor does Q3 to
-140
Error (B835) not detect paper. Q4
2nd Ve. Transport Sn: Lag 2nd vertical transport sensor does Q3 to
-141
Error (B835) not turn off. Q4
Vertical Exit Sensor: Late Vertical exit sensor does not detect Q3 to
-142
Error (B835) paper. Q4
Vertical Exit Sensor: Lag Vertical exit sensor does not turn Q3 to
-143
Entrance Sensor: Late Entrance sensor does not detect Q3 to

-144
Error (B835) paper. Q4
Entrance Sensor: Lag Error Q3 to

-145 Entrance sensor does not turn off.
(B835) Q4
Interposer Exit Sensor: Q3 to

-146 Exit sensor does not detect paper.
Late Error (B835) Q4
Interposer Exit Sensor: Lag Q3 to

-147 Exit sensor does not turn off.
Error (B835) Q4
-148 1st Lift Motor Drive Train The machine detects a lock signal Q1
SM 4-261 D059/D060/D061
LCD
Display
(B835) from the 1st lift motor.
2nd Lift Motor Drive Train The machine detects a lock signal
-149 Q2
(B835) from the 2nd lift motor
1st Pick-up Motor Drive The machine detects a lock signal

-150 Q1
Train (B835) from the 1st pick-up motor.
2nd Pick-up Motor Drive The machine detects a lock signal

-151 Q2
Train (B835) from the 2nd pick-up motor
4.18.7 HIGH CAPACITY STACKER SK5010 (D447)
LCD
Display
Entrance: Late Error Entrance sensor (stacker 1) does

-240 L1 to L5
(Stacker 1) not detect paper.
Entrance: Lag Error Entrance sensor (stacker 1) does

-241 L1 to L5
(Stacker 1) not turn off
Proof Tray Exit: Late Error Proof tray exit sensor (stacker 1)
-242 L1 to L5
(Stacker 1) does not detect paper.
Proof Tray Exit: Lag Error Proof tray exit sensor (stacker 1)
-243 L1 to L5
(Stacker 1) does not turn off.
Stack Tray Exit: Late Error Shift tray exit sensor (stacker 1)
-244 L6
Stack Tray Exit: Lag Error Shift tray exit sensor (stacker 1)
-245 L6
Relay Path: Late Error Transport sensor (stacker 1) does

-246 L1 to L5
D059/D060/D061 4-262 SM
LCD
Display
-247 Relay Path: Lag Error Transport sensor (stacker 1) does

L1 to L5
(Stacker 1) not turn off.
Straight-Through Exit: Late Exit sensor (stacker 1) does not

-248 L1 to L5
Error (Stacker 1) detect paper.
Straight-Through Exit: Lag Exit sensor (stacker 1) does not

-249 L1 to L5
Error (Stacker 1) turn off.

-250 Shift JG Motor (Stacker 1) L6
from the shift JG motor (stacker 1).

Proof Tray JG Motor
-251 from the proof tray JG motor L6
shooting
Trouble-
(Stacker 1)
(stacker 1).

-252 Shift Motor (Stacker 1) from the shift roller motor (stacker L6
1).

Front Jogger Fence Motor
-253 from the main jogger front motor L6
(Stacker 1)
(stacker 1).

Rear Jogger Fence Motor
-254 from the main jogger rear motor L6
(Stacker 1)
(stacker 1).

Front Jogger Fence
-255 from the main jogger fence L6
Retraction Mtr (Stacker 1)
retraction motor (stacker 1).

Rear Jogger Fence
Sub Jogger Motor (Stacker The machine detects a lock signal

-257 L6
1) from the sub jogger motor (stacker
SM 4-263 D059/D060/D061
LCD
Display
1).

LE Stopper Motor (Stacker
-258 from the LE stopper motor (stacker L6
1)
1).

-259 Tray Lift Motor (Stacker 1) L6
from the tray lift motor (stacker 1).
The machine detects an error

Main Machine Setting signal from the stacker due to the
-260 L6
Incorrect (Stacker 1) incorrect request sent by the
mainframe.
Entrance: Late Error Entrance sensor (stacker 2) does

-270 L1 to L5
Entrance: Lag Error Entrance sensor (stacker 2) does

-271 L1 to L5
(Stacker 2) not turn off
Proof Tray Exit: Late Error Proof tray exit sensor (stacker 2)
-272 L1 to L5
Proof Tray Exit: Lag Error Proof tray exit sensor (stacker 2)
-273 L1 to L5
Stack Tray Exit: Late Error Shift tray exit sensor (stacker 2)
-274 L6
Stack Tray Exit: Lag Error Shift tray exit sensor (stacker 2)
-275 L6
Relay Path: Late Error Transport sensor (stacker 2) does

-276 L1 to L5
Relay Path: Lag Error Transport sensor (stacker 2) does

-277 L1 to L5
(Stacker 2) not turn off.
-278 Straight-Through Exit: Late Exit sensor (stacker 2) does not L1 to L5
D059/D060/D061 4-264 SM
LCD
Display
Error(Stacker 2) detect paper.
Straight-Through Exit: Lag Exit sensor (stacker 2) does not

-279 L1 to L5
Error(Stacker 2) turn off.

-280 Shift JG Motor (Stacker 2) L6
from the shift JG motor (stacker 2).

Proof Tray JG Motor
-281 from the proof tray JG motor L6
(Stacker 2)
(stacker 2).

-282 Shift Motor (Stacker 2) from the shift roller motor (stacker L6
shooting
Trouble-
2).

-283 from the main jogger front motor L6
(Stacker 2)
(stacker 2).

-284 from the main jogger rear motor L6
(Stacker 2)
(stacker 2).

Front Jogger Fence

Rear Jogger Fence

Sub Jogger Motor (Stacker
-287 from the sub jogger motor (stacker L6
2)
2).
LE Stopper Motor (Stacker The machine detects a lock signal

-288 L6
2) from the LE stopper motor (stacker
SM 4-265 D059/D060/D061
LCD
Display
2).

-289 Tray Lift Motor (Stacker 2) L6
from the tray lift motor (stacker 2).

Main Machine Setting signal from the stacker (stacker 2)
-290 L6
Incorrect (Stacker 2) due to the incorrect request sent by
the mainframe.
4.18.8 PERFECT BINDER (D391)
LCD
Display
The machine detects a job data

-300 P-Binder:Job Data Error Mk6
error.
P-Binder:S-Through Exit S-Through exit sensor does not Mk7 to

-301
Sn:Late detect paper. Mk 8
P-Binder:S-Through Exit S-Through exit sensor does not Mk7 to

-302
Sn:Stay on turn off. Mk 8
P-Binder:Cover Regist Cover registration sensor does not Mk9,

-303
Sn:Late detect paper. Mk10
P-Binder:Cover Regist Cover registration sensor does not Mk9,

-304
Sn:Stay on turn off. Mk10
P-Binder:Cover H-Reg. S Cover horizontal registration S Mk9,

-305
Sn:Late sensor does not detect paper. Mk10
P-Binder:Cover H-Reg. S Cover horizontal registration S Mk9,

-306
Sn:Stay on sensor does not turn off. Mk10
D059/D060/D061 4-266 SM
LCD
Display
-307 P-Binder:Cover H-Reg. L Cover horizontal registration L Mk9,

Sn:Late sensor does not detect paper. Mk10
P-Binder:Cover H-Reg. L Cover horizontal registration L Mk9,

-308
Sn:Stay on sensor does not turn off. Mk10
Entrance sensor does not detect Mk11 to

-309 P-Binder:Entrance Sn:Late
paper. Mk14
P-Binder:Entrance Sn:Stay Mk11 to

on Mk14
P-Binder:Sign. Path: Sn Signature path sensor 1 does not Mk11 to

-311
1:Late detect paper. Mk14
shooting
Trouble-
-312
1:Stay on turn off. Mk14

-313

-314
2:Stay on turn off. Mk5
Timing sensor does not detect Mk3 to

-315 P-Binder:Timing Sn:Late
paper. Mk5
P-Binder:Timing Sn:Stay Mk3 to

-316 Timing sensor does not turn off.
on Mk5
P-Binder:Stck Tray Emp. Stack tray empty sensor does not Mk3 to
-317
P-Binder:Stck Tray Emp. Stack tray empty sensor does not Mk3 to
-318
P-Binder:SG Paper Sub grip paper sensor does not Mk3 to

-319
SM 4-267 D059/D060/D061
LCD
Display
P-Binder:Cover Path: Sn Cover path sensor 1 does not Mk9 to

-320
P-Binder:Cover Path: Sn Cover path sensor 1 does not turn Mk9 to

-321
1:Stay on off. Mk10
P-Binder:Cover Path: Sn Cover path sensor 2 does not Mk7,

-322
P-Binder:Cover Path: Sn Cover path sensor 2 does not turn Mk7,

-323
2:Stay on off. Mk8
P-Binder:Cover Reg. Cover registration sensor does not Mk9,

-324
P-Binder:Cover Reg. Cover registration sensor does not Mk9,

-325
Inserter: Entrance sensor does not Mk9 to

-326 P-B/Inserter:Com. Sn:Late
detect paper. Mk14
P-B/Inserter:Com. Sn:Stay Inserter: Entrance sensor does not Mk9 to

-327
on stay on. Mk14
P-B/Inserter:U-Tray P-up Inserter: Separation sensor: tray A

-328 Mk1
Sn:Late does not detect paper.
P-B/Inserter:U-Tray P-up Inserter: Separation sensor: tray A

-329 Mk1
Sn:Stay on does not stay on.
P-B/Inserter:L-Tray P-up Inserter: Separation sensor: tray B

-330 Mk1
Sn:Late does not detect paper.
P-B/Inserter:Trans. Sn Inserter: Vertical transport sensor 1

-332 Mk1
1:Late does not detect paper.

-333 Mk1
1:Stay on does not stay on.
D059/D060/D061 4-268 SM
LCD
Display
-334 P-B/Inserter:Trans. Sn Inserter: Vertical transport sensor 2

Mk2
2:Late does not detect paper.

-335 Mk2
2:Stay on does not stay on.
P-B/Relay:Transport Relay: Transport sensor does not

-336 Mk6
Sn:Late detect paper.
P-B/Relay:Transport Relay: Transport sensor does not

-337 Mk6
Sn:Stay on stay on
4.18.9 RING BINDER RB5000 (D392)
shooting
Trouble-
LCD
Display
Entrance sensor does not detect Mc1,

-350 R-Binder:Entrance Sn:Late
paper. Mc2
R-Binder:Entrance Sn:Stay Mc1,

on Mc2
R-Binder:Transport Transport sensor does not detect Mc3,

-352
Sn:Late paper. Mc4
R-Binder:Transport Mc3,
-353 Transport sensor does not turn off.
Sn:Stay on Mc4
Mc3,
-354 R-Binder:Exit Sn:Late Exit sensor does not detect paper.
Mc4
Mc3,
-355 R-Binder:Exit Sn:Stay on Exit sensor does not turn off.
Mc4
-356 R-Binder:Pre-punch Jam Pre-punch jogger trigger sensor Mc5
SM 4-269 D059/D060/D061
LCD
Display
does not turn off.
Binder delivery sensor does not

-357 R-Binder:After-Punch Jam Mc5
turn off.
R-Binder:P TE Detect Sn Paper LE detect sensor does not Mc5,

-358
Jam turn off. Mc6
R-Binder:P LE Detect Sn Paper LE detect sensor does not Mc7,

-359
Jam detect paper. Mc8
Mc7,
-360 R-Binder:Ring Error Jam The machine detects a ring error.
Mc8
R-Binder:Binder Unit Set The machine cannot detect the Mc7,

-361
Jam binder unit. Mc8
R-Binder:Output Belt 1 Output belt 1 HP sensor does not

-362 Mc9
Jam turn off.
R-Binder:Output Belt 2 Output belt 2 HP sensor does not

-363 Mc9
Jam turn off.
The machine detects an error at the

-364 R-Binder:Stacker Jam Mc10
stacker unit.
R-Binder:Punch Motor The machine detects a lock signal

-365 Mc5
Error from the punch motor.
R-Binder:Shutter Motor The machine detects a lock signal Mc7,

-366
Error from the shutter motor. Mc8
R-Binder:Line-up Pin M The machine detects a lock signal Mc7,

-367
Error from the alignment pin motor. Mc8

Mc7,
-368 R-Binder:Paper Jog Error signal from the pre-punch jogger
Mc8
unit.
D059/D060/D061 4-270 SM
LCD
Display
-369 The machine detects an error Mc7,

R-Binder:Line-up Pin Error
signal from the pre-bind jogger unit. Mc8
R-Binder:Clamp Motor The machine detects a lock signal Mc7,

-370
Error from the clamp motor. Mc8

R-Binder:50/100 Adj. M Mc7,
-371 from the 50/100 clamp
Error Mc8
adjust motor.
R-Binder:Out-Belt Rot. M The machine detects a lock signal

-372 Mc9
Error from the output belt rotation motor.
The machine detects the job data Mc1 to
shooting
Trouble-
-373 R-Binder:Job Data Error
error. Nc2
4.18.10 BOOKLET FINISHER SR5020 (D434)
LCD
Display
Entrance: Late Error Entrance sensor does not detect Rb1 to

-400
(D434) paper. Rb5
Rb1 to
-401 Entrance: Lag Error (D434) Entrance sensor does not turn off.
Rb5
Proof Tray Exit: Late Error Proof tray exit sensor does not Rb1 to
-402
(D434) detect paper. Rb5
Proof Tray Exit: Lag Error Proof tray exit sensor does not turn Rb1 to
-403
(D434) off. Rb5
Shift Tray Exit: Late Error Shift tray exit sensor does not Rb1 to
-404
SM 4-271 D059/D060/D061
LCD
Display
Shift Tray Exit: Lag Error Shift tray exit sensor does not turn Rb1 to
-405
(D434) off. Rb5
Staple Tray Exit: Late Error Stapling tray paper sensor does not Rb6 to
-406
Staple Tray Exit: Lag Error Stapling tray paper sensor does not Rb10 to
-407
(D434) turn off. Rb17
Pre-Stack Tray: Late Error Pre-stack paper sensor does not Rb6 to
-408
Pre-Stack Tray: Lag Error Pre-stack paper sensor does not Rb6 to
-409
Booklet unit exit sensor detects a Rb10 to

-410 Output (D434)
paper jam. Rb17
Booklet Stapler: Late Fold unit entrance sensor does not Rb10 to
-411
Booklet Stapler: Lag Fold unit entrance sensor does not Rb10 to
-412
Booklet Stapler Exit: Late Fold unit exit sensor does not Rb10 to
-413
Booklet Stapler Exit: Lag Fold unit exit sensor does not turn Rb10 to
-414
(D434) off. Rb17

signal from the stapler JG HP
Rb1 to
-415 Paper Path (D434) sensor or proof tray HP JG sensor
Rb5
or a lock signal from the transport
motors.
Shift Tray Lift Drive Train The machine detects an error Rb1 to
-416
(D434) signal from the paper height Rb5
D059/D060/D061 4-272 SM
LCD
Display
sensors.

Jogger Fence Drive Train Rb10 to
-417 signal from the jogger fence HP
(D434) Rb17
sensors or top fence HP sensor

signal from the exit guide HP
sensor, shift tray HP sensors, shift Rb1 to
-418 Shift Drive Train (D434)
tray jogger HP sensor, shift tray Rb5
jogger retract HP sensor or drag
roller HP sensor.
shooting
Trouble-
signal from the corner stapler HP
Rb10 to
-419 Stapler Drive Train (D434) sensor, stapler rotation HP sensors,
Rb17
bottom fence HP sensor or stapler
HP sensor.

Stack Output Drive Train Rb10 to
-420 signal from the stack feed-out belt
(D434) Rb17
HP sensor

signal from the punch blade HP Rb1 to
-421 Punch Drive Train (D434)
sensor, punch unit HP sensor or Rb5
punch SW.

signal from the stack plate HP Rb10 to
-422 Jogger System (D434)
sensors or positioning roller HP Rb17
sensor

Pre-Stacker Drive Rb6 to
-423 signal from the pre-stack roller HP
Train(D434) Rb9
sensor.
SM 4-273 D059/D060/D061
LCD
Display

Rb10 to
-424 Booklet Path (D434) signal from the stack transport unit
Rb17
HP sensor or stack JG HP sensor.

signal from the booklet top fence
Booklet Stapling System HP sensor, booklet stapler jogger Rb10 to
-425
(D434) HP sensors, booklet stapler bottom Rb17
fence HP sensor or booklet stapler
unit.

signal from the fold plate cam HP
Rb10 to
-426 Folding System (D434) sensor, fold plate HP sensor or
Rb17
booklet stapler clamp roller HP
sensor.
For Debugging: Cause

-427 Not used -
Unknown (D434)

Main Machine Setting Rb1 to
-428 signal of the communication with an
Incorrect (D434) Rb5
upstream unit.
4.18.11 TRIMMER UNIT TR5020 (D455)
LCD
Display
Entrance Sensor: Late Entrance sensor does not detect

-430 Rt1, Rt2
Error (D455) paper.
Entrance Sensor: Lag Error

-431 Entrance sensor does not turn off. Rt1, Rt2
(D455)
D059/D060/D061 4-274 SM
LCD
Display
-432 Skew Sensor: Late Error Stopper sensor does not detect
Rt1, Rt2
(D455) paper.
Skew Sensor: Lag Error

-433 Stopper sensor does not turn off. Rt1, Rt2
(D455)
Exit Sensor: Late Error

-434 Exit sensor does not detect paper. Rt1, Rt2
(D455)
Exit Sensor: Lag Error

-435 Exit sensor does not turn off. Rt1, Rt2
(D455)
Trimming Blade Motor The machine detects a lock signal

-436 Rt1, Rt2
Lock (D455) from the trimming blade motor.
shooting
Trouble-
-437 Cut Position Motor (D455) Rt1, Rt2
from the cut position motor.

-438 Press Roller (D455) Rt1, Rt2
from the press roller motor.
Press/Stopper Roller The machine detects a lock signal

-439 Rt1, Rt2
(D455) from the press stopper motor.

-440 Tray Motor (D455) Rt1, Rt2
from the tray motor.
4.18.12 MULTI-FOLDING UNIT FD5000 (D454)
LCD
Display
Entrance sensor does not detect

-450 Entrance: Late Jam (D454) N1 to N5
paper.
-451 Entrance: Lag Jam (D454) Entrance sensor does not turn off. N1 to N5
SM 4-275 D059/D060/D061
LCD
Display
Top Tray Exit: Late Jam Top tray exit sensor does not detect
-452 N1 to N5
(D454) paper.
Top Tray Exit: Lag Jam Top tray exit sensor does not turn
-453 N1 to N5
(D454) off.
Straight-Through Exit: Late Horizontal path exit sensor does

-454 N1 to N5
Jam (D454) not detect paper.
Straight-Through Exit: Lag Horizontal path exit sensor does

-455 N1 to N5
Jam (D454) not turn off.
1st Stopper: Late Jam Stopper 1 paper sensor does not N6 to

-456
(D454) detect paper. N22
1st Stopper: Lag Jam Stopper 1 paper sensor does not N6 to

-457
(D454) turn off. N22
2nd Stopper: Late Jam Stopper 2 paper sensor does not N6 to

-458
2nd Stopper: Lag Jam Stopper 2 paper sensor does not N6 to

-459
3rd Stopper: Late Jam Stopper 3 paper sensor does not N6 to

-460
3rd Stopper: Lag Jam Stopper 3 paper sensor does not N6 to

-461
Registration sensor does not turn

Skew Correction Jam N6 to
-462 on after the entrance sensor has
(D454) N22
turned on.
Top tray paper path sensor does

Top Tray Transport Jam
-463 not turn on after the stopper 1 N1 to N5
(D454)
paper sensor has turned on.
-464 Entrance/Top Tray JG The machine detects a lock signal N1 to N5
D059/D060/D061 4-276 SM
LCD
Display
Motor Error (D454) from the entrance JG motor.
Entrance JG HP sensor does not

Entrance/Fold JG Motor
-465 turn on after the entrance JG motor N1 to N5
Error (D454)
has turned on.
1st Stopper Motor Error The machine detects a lock signal N6 to

-466
(D454) from the stopper 1 motor. N22
2nd Stopper Motor Error The machine detects a lock signal N6 to

-467
3rd Stopper Motor Error The machine detects a lock signal N6 to

-468
shooting
Trouble-
Dynamic Roller Transport N6 to
-469 from the dynamic roller transport
Motor Error (D454) N22
motor.

Registration Roller N6 to
-470 from the registration roller release
Release Motor (D454) N22
motor.
Fold Plate Motor Error The machine detects a lock signal N6 to

-471
(D454) from the fold plate motor. N22
Jogger Fence Motor Jam The machine detects a lock signal N6 to

-472
(D454) from the Jogger fence motor. N22
Positioning roller HP sensor does

Positioning Roller Motor N6 to
-473 not turn on after the positioning
Jam (D454) N22
roller motor has turned on.
FM2 Direct Send Motor The machine detects a lock signal N6 to

-474
Error (D454) from the direct send JG motor. N22
The machine detects a lock signal N6 to

-475 FM6 Pawl Motor (D454)
from the FM6 pawl motor. N22
SM 4-277 D059/D060/D061
SERVICE TABLES
52 ~ 53 01/21/2010 Do not use SP 29001-001 and 002. Use SP4417.
100 06/25/2010 Corrected SP5045 Accounting Counter
113 02/05/2010 SP5182
197 09/30/2009 SP5985
284 10/14/2011 Added NOTE to SP 7509.
360 ~ 361 07/22/2011 Updated Bit Switch 6 Added Bit 7 PJL USTATUS
383 ~ 384 04/22/2010 Updated Special Operation – Important Note
384 ~ 388 06/25/2010 Updated Updating Firmware graphic, also added numbering
SP Table Key
5. SERVICE TABLES
5.1 SP TABLE KEY
5.1.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN

Service Mode Lock/Unlock
At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer cannot
operate the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off. This function
makes sure that work on the machine is always done with the permission of the
Administrator.
If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the User Tool and
then set "Service Mode Lock" to OFF. After he or she logs in:
[User Tools] > System Settings > Administrator Tools > Service Mode Lock > OFF
This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
The service technician can do servicing on the machine and turn the machine off
and on. It is not necessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the
machine is turned on.
If you must use the printer bit switches, go into the SP mode and set SP5169 to "1".
Service
Tables
After machine servicing is completed:
Change SP5169 from "1" to "0".
Turn the machine off and on.
Tell the administrator that you completed servicing the machine.
The administrator will then set the "Service Mode Lock" to ON.
Operators, Skilled Operators

Operators and Skilled Operators can adjust machine operation for variable conditions such
as paper type, changes in temperature and humidity around the machine, the effects of
wear on machine parts over time, and so on.
There are two types of users:
Operators: Individuals who use the machine every day for copying and printing and
are familiar with the operation of the machine.
Skilled Operators: Individuals who also use the machine for copying and printing.
However, skilled operators are also trained in basic replacement procedures for key
components such as the development unit, charge corona unit, and so on.
Access to the skilled operator menus is restricted:
SM 5-1 D059/D060/D061
SP Table Key
A skilled operator is assigned an access code that allows access to all the features in
the skilled operator menus.
An operator is not assigned an access code, but he or she can use the User Program
Mode.
Most of the operator, skilled operator menu selections duplicate the functions of the SP
codes in the main service tables.
D059/D060/D061 5-2 SM
SP Table Key
5.1.2 SERVICE TABLE KEY
The Service Program Mode is for use only by customer engineers so that they can
properly maintain product quality. If this mode is used by anyone other than a
customer engineer for any reason, data might be deleted or settings might be
changed. In such a case image quality can no longer be guaranteed.
Notation What it means
[–9 to +9 / +3.0 / 0.1 mm]

[range / default / step] The default setting +3.0 can be adjusted in 0.1 mm steps in
the range ±9.
DFU Denotes "Design or Factory Use". Do not change this value.
The feature or item is for Japan only. Do not change this

Japan only
value.
SEF Short Edge Feed
LEF Long Edge Feed
Service
Tables
NIA No Information Available
SM 5-3 D059/D060/D061
System SP1-nnn Feed
5.2 SYSTEM SP1-NNN FEED
Leading Edge Registration
Adjusts the printing leading edge registration for feeding from the trays and
1001
duplex tray using the trimming area pattern (SP2-902-1, No.15).]
Use the [./*] key to enter the minus (–) before entering the value.
The specification is 4 ± 2 mm
Copier/LCT Paper Tray

001
[-9.0 to +9.0 /0 / 0.1 mm]
Duplex Tray
002
[-9.0 to +9.0 /0 / 0.1 mm]
Copier//LCT Paper Tray (Low Speed)

003
[-9.0 to +9.0 /0 / 0.1 mm]
Duplex Tray (Low Speed)

004
[-9.0 to +9.0 /0 / 0.1 mm]
D059/D060/D061 5-4 SM
System SP1-nnn Feed
Low Speed Table
D059 D060 D061
Standard 90 cpm 100 cpm 135 cpm
Low Speed 1 Invalid 90 cpm 110 cpm
Low Speed 2 Invalid Invalid 90 cpm
005 Copier/LCT Paper Tray (Low Speed 2)
[-9 to +9 / 0 / 0.1 mm]

Low Speed 2 applies to the D061 only (see table above).
006 Duplex Tray (Low Speed 2)
[-9 to +9 / 0 / 0.1 mm]

Low Speed 2 applies to the D061 only (see table above).
Service
Tables
SM 5-5 D059/D060/D061
System SP1-nnn Feed
Side-to-side Registration
Adjusts the printing side-to-side registration from the 1st paper feed station
1002
using the trimming area pattern (SP2-902-3, No.15).
Specification: 0 ± 2.0 mm.
001 1st Tray (Copier Tandem Tray)
002 2nd Tray (Copier)
003 3rd Tray (Copier)
004 4th Tray (LCT Tray 1)

[-9.0 to +9.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
007 7th Tray (Bypass Tray)
008 Duplex Tray (Copier)
Paper Buckle Adjustment (Registration)
1003 Adjusts the relay clutch timing at registration. The relay clutch timing
determines the amount of paper buckle at registration. (A plus or minus setting
increases or decreases the amount of buckle.)
001 Copier Paper Tray
002 LCT
[-6 to +6 / 0 / 1 mm]
003 Duplex Tray
004 Manual
D059/D060/D061 5-6 SM
System SP1-nnn Feed
Fine Adjust Reg Roller Speed
1016 This SP adjusts the speed of the registration roller. The speed can be adjusted
independently for paper feed 1) when the paper is fed for 1st side printing and
2) when paper is fed for 2nd side printing after the 1st side has been printed.
001 Font Side

[-3 to +3/0/0.1 mm]
002 Back Side
1105 Fusing Temperature Adjustment
Note: In the descriptions below:

"[0107]" refers to the "0107 Adjust Toner Fusing Temperature" in the
Operator and Skilled Operator menus of User Tools.
This feature has the same number (0107) in both menus.
Standby Temperature
Sets the target temperature of the hot roller for stand-by mode. This SP is
enabled only if SP1105-16 or [User Tool] [0107) is set for "Medium". This SP
Service
Tables
001 adjusts temperature for thick paper and other types of paper. The machine
uses this setting as the target re-load temperature during fusing temperature
control.
[140 to 190/*/1 °C]
* D059: 153, * D060: 165, * D061: 178
Standby (Low Temp Mode)
This SP sets the target temperature of the hot roller for stand-by mode. This SP
is enabled only if SP1105-16 or [User Tool] [0107) is set for "Low Temp Mode".
002 This SP adjusts temperature for thick paper and other types of paper. The
machine uses this setting as the target re-load temperature during temperature
control.
[140 to 190/*/1 °C]
* D059: 163, * D060: 175, * D061: 188
SM 5-7 D059/D060/D061
System SP1-nnn Feed
Standby (Low Temp Mode 2)
is enabled only if SP1105-16 is set for "Low" or if the fusing temperature has
003
been set in User Tools with "0107". This SP adjusts temperature for thick paper
and other types of paper. The machine uses this setting as the target re-load
temperature during temperature control.
[140 to 200/188/1 °C]
Standby (High Temp Mode)
is enabled only if SP1105-16 is set for "High" or if the fusing temperature has
004 been set in User Tools with "0107". This SP adjusts temperature for thick paper
[140 to 190/*/1 °C]
* D059: 148, * D060: 160, * D061: 173
Standby (High Temp Mode 2)
is enabled only if SP1105-16 is set for "High" or if the fusing temperature has
005 been set in User Tools with "0107". This SP adjusts temperature for thick paper
[120 to 190/*/1 °C]
* D059: 138, * D060: 150, * D061: 163
D059/D060/D061 5-8 SM
System SP1-nnn Feed
Fusing Temperature Lower Limit
Sets the low limit for the fusing temperature. If the fusing temperature falls
below this temperature, the machine will display an alert message and stop the
line. After the fusing temperature rises above this temperature, the machine will
resume operation in high temperature mode.
006 This SP is enabled only if SP1105-16 is set for "Medium" or if or if the
fusing temperature has been set in User Tools with "0107".
Change the setting of this SP to prevent poor image fusing to paper with
special paper, or if the environmental conditions around the machine are
not ideal.
[120 to 180/*/1 °C]
* D059: 133, * D060: 145, * D061: 158
Low Limit (Low Temp Mode)
below this temperature while operating in the high temperature mode, the
machine will display an alert message and stop the line. After the fusing
temperature rises above this temperature, the machine resumes operation in
Service
Tables
007 high temperature mode.
This SP is enabled only if SP1105-16 is set for "Low" or if or if the fusing
temperature has been set in User Tools with "0107".
not ideal.
[120 to 190/153/ 1°C]
SM 5-9 D059/D060/D061
System SP1-nnn Feed
Low Limit (Low Temp Mode 2)
line. After the fusing temperature rises above this temperature, the machine
resumes operation in high temperature mode.
008 This SP is enabled only if SP1105-16 is set for "Low" or if or if the fusing
not ideal.
[120 to 190/5/1]
* D059: 153, * D060: 155, * D061: 168
Low Limit (High Temp Mode)
009 This SP is enabled only if SP1105-16 is set for "High" or if or if the fusing
not ideal.
[120 to 180 / * / 1 °C]
* D059: 128, * D060: 140, * D061: 153
D059/D060/D061 5-10 SM
System SP1-nnn Feed
Low Limit (High Temp Mode 2)
010 This SP is enabled only if SP1105-16 is set for "High" or if or if the fusing
not ideal.
[100 to 180/*/1 °C]
* D059: 123, * D060: 135, * D061: 148
Fusing Temp Switch
Specifies the fusing temperature at which 1 lamp of the 3 fusing lamps is

switched off. The lamp that is switched off is the one heating the center of the
hot roller. Switching this lamp off prevents overshooting the warm-up
011 temperature.
Service
Tables
0: Normal Temp. (Default)
1: Low Temp. (Fusing Mode)
2: Low Temp.2 (Fusing Mode 2)
3: High Temp. (Reduce Curl Mode)
4: High Temp.2 (Reduce Curl Mode 2)
Fusing Temperature Correction (A4/LT)
012 Sets the amount to raise the fusing temperature above the standby
temperature to print on paper sizes smaller than A4/LT LEF.
[0 to 10/5/1°C]
SM 5-11 D059/D060/D061
System SP1-nnn Feed
Fusing Temperature Correction: Translucent
013 Specifies the amount to raise or lower the fusing from the standby temperature
to print on translucent paper.
[-10 to +10/0/1°C]
Fusing Temperature Correction: Small Size
Sets the amount to raise the fusing temperature above the standby
temperature to print on paper sizes smaller than A4/LT LEF. The machine may
014 display an alert and stop the line until it has adjusted the fusing temperature
with this setting.
"Small Size" (Small Size 1) is paper shorter than LT LEF (279 mm) in the main
scan direction but wider than B5 SEF.
[0 to 20/10 1°C]
Small Size (2 Copies)
This SP adjusts the fusing temperature for "#2 Copies". These are small paper
sizes (Small Size 2), smaller than A5 SEF in the main scan direction.. The
015
value entered here is added to the "Ready" temperature (standby temperature).
The job will begin when the hot roller reaches the adjusted temperature
(stand-by temperature + this setting).
[0 to 20/ 10/ 1 °C]
Small Size (Switch to 1 Lamp )
This SP selects one fusing lamp for small paper sizes (B5 SEF and smaller).
[0 to 2/0/1]
016 0: Medium, 1: Low, 2: High
Raise this setting if you see loose toner, indicating that the toner has not
fused completely with the surface of the paper.
Lower this setting if the paper excessively curled after it leaves the
machine.
D059/D060/D061 5-12 SM
System SP1-nnn Feed
Small Size (Switch to 2 Lamps)
017 This SP selects two fusing lamps for small paper sizes (Small Size 2), paper
small than A5 SEF in the main scan direction.
[0 to 20/10/1 degrees]
Paper Size for Temp Correction (0:LT,1:B5)
Sets the paper size used to define "small paper" for SP codes 1105-7,
018 SP1105-8.
[0 to 1/1/1]
0: LT LEF
1: B5 LEF
Fusing Lamp Switching at Warm-up
Specifies the fusing temperature at which 1 lamp of the 3 fusing lamps is

switched off. The lamp that is switched off is the one heating the center of the
019 hot roller. Switching this lamp off prevents overshooting the warm-up
temperature and ensures that heat is evenly distributed over the surface of the
hot roller.
Service
Tables
[20 to 190 / * /1°C
* D059: 99, * D060: 99, * D061: 95
020 Low Power Mode
Sets the target temperature of the hot roller for low power mode. The hot roller
remains at this temperature until the machine leaves low power mode.
[20 to 170/*/1°C]
* D059: 123, * D060: 135, * D061: 148
SM 5-13 D059/D060/D061
System SP1-nnn Feed
021 Fusing Lamp Switching after Low Power Mode
Specifies the temperature at which 1 of the 3 fusing lamps is switched off

before reaching the target standby temperature when the machine returns from
the low power mode. The center fusing lamp is switched off before reaching the
target standby temperature to prevent overshooting the target temperature, and
to ensure that the heat on the surface of the hot roller is evenly distributed.
[-20 to 0 / * / 1°C]
* D059: -10, * D060: -10, * D061: -20
Note: When this temperature is added to the stand-by temperature during
warm-up after leaving low power mode, and additional 10°C is added in the
D061 (135 cpm): 178°C - 20°C + 10°C = 168°C). This is done for the D061
only.
022 1st Print After Low Power Mode
Sets the temperature at which the first sheet is allowed to print before the hot
roller reaches the target standby temperature after returning from low power
mode.
[-50 to 0 / * / 1°C]
* D059: -20, * D060: -20, * D061: -5
023 Fusing Idling Start Temperature
This is the temperature at which printing can start during the warm-up cycle
after the machine leaves low power mode and returns to full operation. This is:
Stand-by Temperature SP + Print Start Temperature.
[100 to 160 / * / 1°C]
* D059: 130, * D060: 130, * D061: 160
Fusing Temperature Display

1106
Displays the fusing temperature.
D059/D060/D061 5-14 SM
System SP1-nnn Feed
1107 Fusing Idling Time Setting
001 Normal/High Temp Mode
Sets the length of time the hot roller is allowed to rotate before the first sheet is
fed in normal or high temperature mode. This idling time allows the hot roller to
heat up faster. This SP setting is enabled only if SP1105-16 or if User Tool
setting 0107 is set "Medium (Normal) or if high temperature mode is selected.
[0 to 120 / * / 1 s]
* D059: 40, * D060: 50, * D061: 60
002 Low Temp Mode
fed low temperature mode. This idling time allows the hot roller to heat up
faster. This SP setting is enabled only if SP1105-16 or if User Tool setting 0107
is set "Low".
[0 to 120 / * / 1 s]
* D059: 60, * D060: 70. * D061: 90
003 Low Temp Mode 2
Service
Tables
fed low temperature mode. This idling time allows the hot roller to heat up
faster. This setting is enabled regardless of settings done with SP1105-16 or
the 0107 setting in User Tools.
[0 to 120 / * / 1 s]
* D059: 60, * D060: 70, * D061: 90
Fusing Nip Band Check
Use OHP to execute this SP and feed 1 sheet between the hot roller and
pressure roller where it remains for 30 s and is then fed out so you can
1109
measure the nip band width.
[OFF, ON]
Note: This SP must be switched off after the nip band check is completed. If
this SP remains on, this will cause paper to jam in the fusing unit (SC559).
SM 5-15 D059/D060/D061
System SP1-nnn Feed
Fusing Jam: SC Setting
This SP determines what the machine does if three consecutive jams occur in
1159 the fusing unit.
0: OFF A jam alert is shown on the screen. The customer can remove the jam
and the machine works normally after that.
1: ON: SC559 occurs. The technician must remove the jam.
1902 Web Motor Control
Web Consumption Display/Setting
Displays how much of the web has been used, expressed as a percentage of
the roll consumed. Switch the machine off/on after changing this setting.
001 [0 to 107 / 0 / 1%]
When you install a partially used roll from another machine, read this SP before
removal, then input that value with this SP on the next machine. Otherwise, the
machine has no way of knowing how much of the partially used roll has been
consumed.
Web Motor Drive Interval
Determines how often the web motor turns on.

[3 to 130/*/0.1 sec.]
Note: The default setting is different depending on the area and model (see
below).
002
Model NA EU Asia
D059 17.2 11.5 17.2
D060 14.7 9.8 14.7
D061 12.2 8.2 12.2
D059/D060/D061 5-16 SM
System SP1-nnn Feed
Web Motor Drive Time

003
Changes the time that the web motor is driven.
[0.3 to 3.5 / 2.8 / 0.1 s]
Web Near End Setting
004 Changes the web consumption ratio at which web near end is displayed.
EUR/A: [0 to 100 / 90 / 1%]
NA: [0 to 100 / 92 / 1%]
Web Motor Drive Interval (Low Speed)
Determines how often the web motor turns on in Low Speed mode.
[3 to 130/*/0.1s]
Note: The default setting is different depending on the area and model (see
below).
005
Model NA EU Asia
D059 17.2 11.5 17.2
Service
Tables
D060 17.2 11.5 17.2
D061 14.7 9.8 14.7
007 Web Correction Coefficient Setting DFU
[5 to 0 / 0.79 / 0.01]
1903 Web Drive Time
Web Total Time Display (x 200ms)

001
Displays the total amount of time (seconds) elapsed during web roll feed.
Web Actual Time Display (x 100ms)

002
Displays the total amount of web roll motor operation time (seconds) for feeding
the current web roll.
SM 5-17 D059/D060/D061
System SP1-nnn Feed
1906 Web Motor Control at Finishing
001 Web Rotation Setting
[0 to 1/ 0 / 1]
002 Web Motor Drive Time
[0 to 360 / 30 / 1 s]
003 Web Additional Temperature
[0 to +20/ 0 / 1 degree C]
1907 Web Drive Time
001 Web Rotation Setting
[0 to 1/0 1]
002 Web Motor Drive Time
[0 to 120 /30/ 1 s]
003 Web Additional Temperature
[-10 to +20/ 5/ 1 degree C]
CIS Image Position Adj: PWM Duty After Adj

1909
Displays the results of the settings done with SP1910.
001 Tray 1, 2, 3
002 LCT
003 Duplex
D059/D060/D061 5-18 SM
System SP1-nnn Feed
CIS Image Pos Adj: LED Strength
Press [Execute] to do the adjustment.

Note:
1910
For more about adjustment of the CIS components in the copier, see
"Replacement and Adjustment".
The CIS of the LCT should be adjusted at installation. For more see
"Installation".
001 Tray 1, 2, 3
002 LCT Press [Execute].
003 Duplex
CIS Image Pos Adj: Normal Paper
There are three image position sensors units (1 in the LCT and 2 in the copier).
Each image position sensor unit contains a CIS. Each CIS can be adjusted
independently for normal paper.
1912
Service
Tables
Note:
For more about adjustment of the CIS components in the copier, see
Section "Replacement and Adjustment".
The CIS of the LCT should be adjusted at installation. For more see
Section "Installation".
001 Tray 1, 2, 3
002 LCT
003 Duplex
SM 5-19 D059/D060/D061
System SP1-nnn Feed
1913 CIS Image Pixel Adjustment: Get Pixels
This SP retrieves and displays the dot data set with SP1912.
001 Tray 1, 2, 3
002 LCT (Normal Paper)
003 Duplex (Normal Paper)
1914 CIS Abnormal Detection DFU
These SP codes display feedback resulting from the machine check on the
CIS
001 Error Flag
This is the bit flag that confirms abnormal operation of the CIS. Display
format: Binary Bit 2, Bit 1, Bit 0: [000]
Bits correspond as follows:
Bit 2 = Duplex unit
Bit 1 = LCIT,
Bit 0 = Bank
For example, if the CIS were detected abnormal at the bank the display would
be [001]. At the start of abnormal detection output, the SP value initializes
(clears) and displays the current condition.
002 Error Count
Displays the counts for when high-precision correction is OFF. If high-precision

correction is more than ±5 mm, this indicates that the CIS is not detecting
correctly and feedback of the correction value stops.
003 Error Count Clear
Clears the count for SP1914-2 only. Does not clear the count for SP1914-1.
D059/D060/D061 5-20 SM
System SP1-nnn Feed
101 P_EDGE:Bank
Displays the P_EDGE (paper edge) where an error occurred during CIS error
detection ("0" lights when feedback is normal).
102 P_EDGE:LCT
103 P_EDGE:Duplex
1915 Fine Adjust CIS DFU
001 Tray 1
002 Tray 2
003 Tray 3
Service
Tables
004 Tray 4
[-9 to +9 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
005 Tray 5
006 Tray 6
007 Tray 7
008 Back Side
1916 Adjust Duplex/Invert Timing DFU
Adjust Switchback Timing

001
[0 to 10 / 3.5 / 0.5 mm]
Adjust OFF Timing of Switchback

002
[-70 to 100/ -15 / 5 ms]
SM 5-21 D059/D060/D061
System SP1-nnn Feed
1917 Proof Tray Stop Time
This SP adjusts the stop timing of paper feed to the proof tray if double feeds
are occurring frequently.
001 1st Tray
002 2nd Tray
003 3rd Tray
004 4th Tray [0 to 1/ 0 / 0.1 sec.]
005 5th Tray
006 6th Tray
007 7th Tray
1920 LCIT Blower Fan Duty Adjustment
These SP codes adjust the force of the air blown by the fans during paper
separation with the LCT (D453).
001 4th Tray Blower Fan

[1 to 90 / 70 /1 %]
011 4th Tray Blower Fan: Special Paper
D059/D060/D061 5-22 SM
System SP1-nnn Feed
1921 LCIT Air Feed Start Time Adjustment
These SP codes adjust the start timing of the fans during paper separation with
the LCIT (D453).
001 4th Tray
002 5th Tray
003 6th Tray

[1 to 10/ 3/ 1 sec.]
011 4th Tray: Special Paper
1922 LCIT Air Assist Selection
These SP codes switch the air assist function of LCIT (D453) off/on.
001 4th Tray
Service
Tables
002 5th Tray
[0 to 2/ 0 / 1]
003 6th Tray 0: Auto Select
1: Force ON
2: Force OFF
SM 5-23 D059/D060/D061
System SP1-nnn Feed
1923 LCIT Pickup Assist Selection
001 4th Tray
002 5th Tray
003 6th Tray

[0 to 2/ 0 / 1]
004 7th Tray 0: Auto Select
1: Force ON
2: Force OFF
1925 De-curl Soft Roller Pressure Adjustment
This SP code adjusts the amount of pressure applied by the metal roller to the
soft roller in the De-Curl Unit (D457). This pressure can be adjusted on the
operation panel. Do not change this SP setting until you have tried the
pressure adjustments on the operation panel.
[-0.3 to 0.5 /0 / 0.1 mm]
1926 De-curl Exit Guide Plate Timing
When an error occurs in any unit downstream from the De-Curl unit, the exit
guide plate drops so paper can drop into the purge tray below the de-curl unit.
This SP adjusts how far the paper is allowed to feed after an error occurs
downstream.
[0 to 488 / 110 / 1 mm]
D059/D060/D061 5-24 SM
System SP2-nnn Drum: 1
5.3 SYSTEM SP2-NNN DRUM: 1
2001 Charge Corona Bias Adjustment
Grid Voltage in Imaging Area
Adjusts the voltage applied to the grid plate during copying when auto process
control is off.
001
[-600 to -1800 / -900 / 10 V]
Normally, there is no need to adjust this. However, if there is an ID or TD sensor
problem, the machine goes into fixed toner supply mode. After replacing the
drum or charge corona wire, reset this value to the default.
Grid Voltage in ID Sensor Pattern
Adjusts the voltage applied to the grid plate when making the ID sensor pattern,
when auto process control is switched off.
002
[-600 to -1800 / -770 / 10 V]
Normally, there is no need to adjust this. If the user wants high-density copies,
the sensor pattern must be lighter, so this voltage must be a higher negative
voltage.
Service
Tables
Grid Voltage in Imaging Area
Adjusts the voltage applied to the grid plate during copying when auto process
003 control is switched on.
[-600 to -1800 / -900 / 10 V]
This voltage changes every time auto process control starts up (every time the
machine is switched on)
Total Current
004 Adjusts the amount of current used to apply voltage to the grid plate during
normal operation mode (Text, Text/Photo, Pale, Generation copies).
[-1000 to -1800 / -1550 / 10 µA]
SM 5-25 D059/D060/D061
Total Corona Current

005
Adjusts the current applied to the charge corona wire for Photo mode.
[-1000 to -1800 / -1600 / 10 µA]
Vd (Auto Process Control)

006
Adjusts the target VD voltage for Process Control Initial Setting.
[-700 to -950 / -800 / 5 V]
Grid Voltage in Imaging Area (Low Speed)
007 Adjusts the voltage applied to the grid plate during copying when auto process
control is switched off and the machine is in the low speed mode.
[-600 to -1800 / -850/ 10 V]
Pattern Grid Voltage: Low Speed: No Procon
Adjusts the voltage applied to the grid plate when making the ID sensor pattern,
008
when auto process control is switched off and the machine is in the low speed
mode.
[-600 to -1800 / -710 / 10 V]
Grid Voltage:Low Speed:Procon
009 Adjusts the voltage applied to the grid plate when auto process control is on and
the machine is in the low speed mode.
[-600 to -1800 / -900 / 10 V]
Total Corona Current (Low Speed)
010 Adjusts the current applied to the charge corona wire when the machine is in the
low speed mode and normal copy mode (any mode except Photo Mode).
[-750 to -950 / -800 / 10 µA]
D059/D060/D061 5-26 SM
Ttl Corona Current: Low Speed 2: No Procon
011 Adjusts the current applied to the charge corona wire when the machine is in the
low speed mode and Photo Mode.
[-600 to -1800 / -850 / 10 µA]
Vd (Auto Process Control)

012
[600 to 1800/710/5 V]
Ttl Corona Current: Low Speed2: Procon

013
[600 to 1800/ 900/ 10V]
014 Vd (Auto Process Control)
[700 to 950 / 800/ 5 V]
Charge Corona Bias Adjustment
These SP codes allow you to display and change the settings for the operation
2002 mode of the pre-charge unit.
Service
Tables
Note: The pre-charge unit supplements the function of the charge unit by
reducing latent images and preventing low drum potential sensor readings in the
first copy cycle.
Set Pre-Charge Mode
Determines how the pre-charge unit operates after it is cycled off/on for a reset
in response to pre-charge unit SC code SC312 or SC313.
[0 to 2/1/1]
001 0: Off. Pre-charge unit does not operate after the machine is cycled off/on.
1: On. Pre-charge unit operates after the machine is cycled off/on.
2: Pre-charge unit operates only after the main motor turns on.
Note:
This display is turned off if the machine returns a pre-charge related SC code
when this SP code is set to "0" (Off).
SM 5-27 D059/D060/D061
Pre-Charge Total Current
Sets the total amount of current used to apply a charge to the drum when the
002
pre-charge unit turns on for normal copy jobs. This setting does not apply to low
speed mode copying.
[500 to 1500/600/10 µA]
2101 Printing Erase Margin
Leading Edge
001
Adjusts the leading edge erase margin.
[0 to 9.0/ 3.5 / 0.1 mm]
Trailing Edge
002
Adjusts the trailing edge erase margin.
[0 to 9.0/ 2.5 / 0.1 mm]
Left edge
003
Adjusts the left side erase margin.
[0 to 9.0/ 2.0 / 0.1 mm]
Right edge
004
Adjusts the right side erase margin.
[0 to 9.0/ 2.0 / 0.1 mm]
D059/D060/D061 5-28 SM
2103 LD Power Adjustment
This SP mode corrects the banding caused by: 1) changes in drum

characteristics over time, and 2) LD power fluctuations.
001 LD0 Power Adjustment
Adjusts 1200 dpi.

[-70 to +185/0/1]
004 LD3 Power Adjustment If you adjust one or more of these
SP codes, you must select the
appropriate SP (009 to 016 below) to
006 LD5 Power Adjustment enable adjustment.
The SP codes below switch SP2103 001 to 008 on and off. For example, after adjusting
SP2103 001, set SP2103 009 to "1".
Service
Tables
009 LD0 Power Adjustment Start/End

[0 to 1/0/1]
0: Off
013 LD4 Power Adjustment Start/End 1: On (enables adjustment)
SM 5-29 D059/D060/D061
LD Power Adjustment(for ID Sn Pattern) DFU
This SP sets the LD power level for the creation of the ID sensor pattern and the
2104 Vh pattern when process control is on and operating (enabled with SP3901).
These SP codes are automatically reset to their defaults after:
Leaving the SP mode.
The copier is switched off and on.
LD Power Adjustment – ID Sensor Pattern
001 Potential Pattern

[0 to 15 / 6 / 1]
002 VH Pattern
LD Power Correction
2105
These SP codes correct the banding caused by: 1) changes in drum
characteristics over time, and 2) LD power fluctuations.
Correction in Printer Mode
001 If switched ON, this allows each channel to be adjusted for 1200 dpi print output
with the SP settings below (LD0 to LD7).
0: OFF, 1: ON
Correction in Copy Mode
If switched ON, this allows each channel to be adjusted for copy output with the
002
SP settings below (LD0 to LD7).
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
LD0 Power Correction

003
Correct the power of LD0 after either SP2105-001 or -002 is switched on.
[-40 to +40 / -2 /1]
D059/D060/D061 5-30 SM

004
Corrects the power of LD1 after either SP2105-001 or -002 is switched on.
[-40 to +40 / -2 /1]

005
[-40 to +40 / +2 /1]

006
[-40 to +40 / +2 /1]

007
[-40 to +40 / +2 /1]

008
Service
Tables
[-40 to +40 / +2 /1]

009
[-40 to +40 / -2 /1]

010
[-40 to +40 / -2 /1]
SM 5-31 D059/D060/D061
FCI Shade Detection
2111 Allows shading detection if FCI (Fine Character Adjustment) smoothing is on.
With this SP switched on, photos and painted areas are detected, and FCI is not
applied in these areas. FCI is used for printer mode output only.
[0 to 128 / 18 / 1]
001 Matrix Size (600 dpi)
0: OFF
[0 to 128 / 4 / 1]
002 Threshold Value (600 dpi)
0: OFF
[0 to 128 / 18 / 1]
003 Matrix Size (400 dpi)
0: OFF
[0 to 128 / 4 / 1]
004 Threshold Value (400 dpi)
0: OFF
Printer Dot Edge Parameter Setting
Allows setting a parameter for binary edge processing for the printer application
with FCI switched off. This SP allows adjustment of image quality if the desired
2114
effect cannot be achieved with the default settings for edge processing. In
general, increasing the values produces thicker lines and decreasing them
produces thinner lines. However, some settings could cause defective images on
white paper.
001 Leading Dot Level Setting (1200 dpi) [2 to 8 / 5/ 1]
002 Trailing Dot Level Setting (1200 dpi) [2 to 8 / 5/ 1]
003 Multiple Dot Level Setting (1200 dpi) [2 to 8 / 8 / 1]
004 Independent Dot Level Setting (1200 dpi) [2 to 8 / 6/ 1]
005 Leading Dot Level Setting (600 dpi) [2 to 16 / 12/ 1]
006 Trailing Dot Level Setting (600 dpi) [2 to 16 / 12/ 1]
D059/D060/D061 5-32 SM
007 Multiple Dot Level Setting (600 dpi) [2 to 16 / 16/ 1]
008 Independent Dot Level Setting (600 dpi) [2 to 16 / 12/ 1]
2115 Main Scan Beam Pitch Adjustment
001 Pitch Adjustment Between ch0 and ch2 (LD0)

[-100 to 100/0/1 um]
007 Pitch Adjustment Between ch0 and ch1 (LD1) [-99 to +99/0/1 um]
008 Front Main Scan: LD0/LD1 (ch0 to ch1)

[-50 to +50/0/1 um]
009 Rear Main Scan: LD0/LD1 (ch0 to ch1)
Service
Tables
Two adjustments have been added:
The timing of the clock that controls image writing in the sub scan direction
The speed of the revolution of the polygon mirror motor that affects image writing in the
sub scan direction.
There are three new SP codes for laser beam pitch adjustment: SP2115 007, 008, 009.
These new SPs are provided to correct errors in the rate of magnification from the time the
line scan starts until it ends.
The rate of the main scan magnification error is the amount of correction to be done for the
magnification rate based on the length of the distance in the main scan direction for line
end LD1 (ch1) with reference to line start LD0 (ch1). These are the lengths of the distances
"A" and "B" in the illustration below.
SM 5-33 D059/D060/D061
With SP2115 007 set to "0", there can be as much variation in the pitch as shown above in
the front area ("A") and the rear area ("B"). To correct this problem the pitches of Area 1
and Area 2 can be adjusted independently with two SP codes.
SP2115 008 is used to adjust the pitch of Area 1. SP2115 009 is used to adjust the pitch of
Area 2.
2201 Development Bias Adjustment
Low Speed (Low Speed 1) and Low Speed 2 are referenced in the settings for
this SP code. Refer to the table below.
D059/D060/D061 5-34 SM
Low Speed Table
D059 D060 D061
Image Area (Normal Speed)
Adjusts the development bias for copying.

001
[-200 to -800 / -550 / 10 V]
This can be adjusted as a temporary measure if faint copies appear due to an
aging drum.
ID Sensor Pattern (Auto Process Control OFF)
Adjusts the development bias for making the ID sensor pattern for VSP
002 measurement when the auto process control is set to off.
[-200 to -800 / –500 / 10 V]
This should not be used in the field, because it affects ID sensor pattern density,
Service
Tables
which affects toner supply.
003 LD Sensor Development Potential
This SP adjusts the development bias of the ID sensor pattern that conforms to
the value of the measured ID sensor potential when the ID sensor development
potential was measured during auto process control.
With the ID sensor pattern potential at –100V, if the ID sensor pattern
development potential (default:+200V) were + 240V, the development potential
would be –340 V. The larger the value of SP2201-2, SP2201-4, (absolute value),
toner density control becomes lighter and image density becomes lighter.
[140 to 380 / 200 / 10V]
SM 5-35 D059/D060/D061
004 Image Area (Low Speed)
This SP adjusts the development bias of the ID sensor pattern that conforms to
the value of the measured ID sensor potential when the ID sensor development
potential was measured during auto process control.
[200 to 800 / 550 / 10V]
005 ID Sensor Pattern (Low Speed)
[200 to 800 / 500 / 10V]
006 ID Sensor Pattern Potential
[140 to 380 / 200 / 10V]
007 Image Area (Low Speed 2)
[200 to 800 / 550 / 10V]
008 ID Sensor Pattern (Low Speed 2)
[200 to 800 / 550 / 10V]
009 ID Sensor Development Potential (Low Speed 2)
[140 to 380 / 200 / 10V]
D059/D060/D061 5-36 SM
2207 Toner Supply
Forced Toner Supply
Touch [Execute]. Touching [Execute] switches on the drum motor, development

motor, development bias, and charge unit to operate toner supply for 10
001
consecutive 1 sec. intervals from the toner bank to the toner hopper.
This mode finishes automatically after the toner supplied 10 times. Use to
determine if toner supply is operating correctly. If forcing toner supply with this SP
does not darken the image, then toner supply is not operating correctly.
Toner Bank Toner Setup
Touch [Execute]. Touching [Execute] checks the toner level in the toner supply
cylinder and the toner hopper. The toner transport mechanism then supplies
toner to the cylinder or hopper (or both) if the toner level is low.
The 1) toner bank motor, 2) toner supply clutch, and 3) cylinder agitator motor
002 turn on to supply toner to the toner supply cylinder, then switch off with the toner
reaches a sufficient level.
To supply toner to the toner hopper, in addition to the 3 items above that turn on
Service
to supply toner to the toner supply cylinder, the 4) development agitator motor,
Tables
and 5) toner pump motor turn on. This requires about 4 minutes.
Note: Use this SP to fill the toner transport path with toner after cleaning the toner
supply unit, or at installation.
SM 5-37 D059/D060/D061
Toner Supply Mode
Selects the toner supply mode: Sensor Control or Image Pixel Count.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
2208
0: Sensor Control, 1: Pixel Count Control
Select Image Pixel Count only if the TD sensor has failed and cannot be
replaced immediately, so that the customer can use the machine. Return the
setting to Sensor Control after replacing the sensor.
Toner Supply Rate
Adjust the toner supply amount from the hopper for the normal operation.
2209 [100 to 2000 / 1300 / 10 mg/s]
Increasing this value reduces the toner supply roller clutch on time. Use a lower
value if the user tends to make lots of copies that have a high proportion of
black.
ID Sensor Pattern Interval
Changes the interval for making the ID sensor pattern (VSP/VSG detection).
2210 [1 to 500 / 10 / 1 copy]
Note: "mai" means "1 copy".
If the user normally makes copies with a high proportion of black, reduce the
interval.
D059/D060/D061 5-38 SM
Vref Display or Set
Adjusts the TD sensor reference voltage (Vref) manually.

[0 to 5.0 / 2.5 / 0.01 V]
Change this value after replacing the development unit with another one that
already contains toner. To use a development unit from another machine for test
2220 purposes:
1) Check the value of SP2220 and SP2906 in both the machine containing the
test unit and the machine that you are going to move it to.
2) Install the test development unit, then input the VREF for this unit into SP2220
and the Vcont for this unit into SP2906.
3) After the test, put back the old development unit, and change SP2220 and
SP2906 back to the original value.
Vt Display
2223
Displays the current TD sensor output voltage.
[0 to 5.0 / 2.5 / 0.01 V]
Service
Tables
Toner Bank Toner Discharge
This SP removes toner from the toner bank and sends it to the toner hopper.
After turning the toner supply motor and the toner bank motor on, the toner
2226 supply coil clutch turns on and off at 2 second intervals. The motors and clutch
stop when the toner near-end sensor (in the toner bank unit) detects no toner.
Even if the sensor continues to detect toner, this operation stops when the clutch
has been turned on and off 10 times, so this SP may have to be repeated to
clean out the system completely.
SM 5-39 D059/D060/D061
Toner Supply Mode Display
Displays the toner supply mode (1 to 4) used for the last copy.
2227 1: ID Sensor and TD Sensor (from the 11th copy, using VT – VREF)
2: ID Sensor and TD Sensor (using VSP/VSG) – before the 10th copy of a job
3: TD Sensor – temporary mode when ID sensor output is abnormal
4: Image Pixel Count
Transfer Current Adjustment
Adjusts the current applied to the transfer belt during copying, depending on the
2301
machine, side, media type, paper thickness, and operation mode (normal or low
speed).
[20 to 200/ 100 /1 ua]
Low Speed Table

Refer to this table for the meaning of Low Speed 1, Low Speed 2.
D059 D060 D061
D059/D060/D061 5-40 SM
These are weights for the paper thickness references:

Thin Paper: 40 to 51g/m2
Med Thick Paper: 106 to 163g/ m2
Thick Paper 1: 164 to 216g/ m2
001 1st Copy Side
002 2nd Copy Side
003 Thin Paper
004 Med Thick Paper
005 Med Thick Paper (2nd Copy Side)
006 Thick Paper 1
007 Thick Paper 1 (2nd Copy Side)
008 Thick Paper 2
Service
Tables
009 Thick Paper 2 (2nd Copy Side)
010 Thick Papers
011 Coated Paper
012 Coated Paper (2nd Copy Side)
013 Transparencies
014 Translucent Sheet
015 Postcard
016 Between Pages
017 1st Copy Side: Low Speed 1
018 2nd Copy Side: Low Speed 1
SM 5-41 D059/D060/D061
019 Thin Paper: Low Speed 1
020 Med Thick Paper: Low Speed 1
021 Med Thick Paper: 2nd Copy Side
022 Thick Paper 1: Low Speed 1
023 Thick Paper 1: 2nd Copy Side: Low Speed 1
025 Thick Paper 2: 2nd Copy Side: Low Speed 1
027 Coated Paper: Low Speed 1
028 Coated Paper (2nd Copy Side): Low Speed 1
029 Transparencies: Low Speed 1
030 Translucent Sheet: Low Speed 1
031 Postcard: Low Speed 1
032 Between Papers: Low Speed 1
033 1st Copy Side: Low Speed 2
034 2nd Copy Side: Low Speed 2
035 Thin Paper: Low Speed 2
036 Med Thick Paper: Low Speed 2
037 Med Thick Paper (2nd Copy Side): Low Speed 2
039 Thick Paper 1 (2nd Copy Side): Low Speed 2
D059/D060/D061 5-42 SM
041 Thick Paper 2 (2nd Copy Side): Low Speed 2
043 Coated Paper: Low Speed 2
044 Coated Paper (2nd Copy Side): Low Speed 2
045 Transparencies: Low Speed 2
046 Translucent Sheet: Low Speed 2
047 Postcard: Low Speed 2
048 Between Papers: Low Speed 2
2506 Cleaning Interval-Multiple Copy
On / Off
Selects whether multiple jobs are stopped at regular intervals in order to 1)

reverse the drum to clean the cleaning blade edge, or 2) create an ID sensor
Service
Tables
pattern to correct toner density control. This SP switches this feature on and off.
001
SP2506 002 sets the interval.
[0 to 1 / 1/1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Use if the drum gets dirty or images get too pale or too dark during long copy
jobs.
Interval
Selects the interval at which multi copy jobs are stopped for blade cleaning.
002
[1 to 100 / 30/ 1 min]
Reduce the value if a large amount of paper dust is causing black lines on the
copy.
SM 5-43 D059/D060/D061
2507 Pattern During Jobs
001 Set Operation
This On/Off setting determines whether the toner entry patterns are created on
the drum during and at the end of jobs.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Default: OFF (no patterns)
002 Set Interval
This SP sets the count for the number of sheets to print before the patterns are
created on the drum. When the count exceeds this setting, the machine retracts
the transfer belt from the drum, creates the patterns, resets the transfer belt
against the drum and continues the job.
[1 to 2000/100/ 1 K sheets]
Note: "mai" means "sheets"
003 Set Number of Patterns
This setting determines the number of patterns to be created on the drum.

[0 to 200/5/1]
Low Speed Table

D059 D060 D061
D059/D060/D061 5-44 SM
PTL Setting
Use this SP to adjust the on/off timing of the PTL (pre-transfer lamp).
Note:
2602 This PTL light emitted from the PTL is intended to reduce charge on the drum
and improve image transfer from drum to paper.
However, adjusting the on/off of the PTL can caused blurred images appear
at the leading edges of the paper. Therefore, the default setting for SP2602
001 is set to "Off".
1st Copy Side
Switches the PTL on and off for the front side of the paper passing through the
fusing unit at normal speed.
001
Note: When feeding thick paper or OHP transparencies, this setting is always off.
[0 to 1/0/1]
0: Off, 1: On
PTL timing can be adjusted with SP2602 002.
OFF Timing (1st Copy Side)
Service
Tables
This SP adjusts the length of the space from the leading edge where the PTL
002
quenching is applied to the front side at normal speed. For example, if you set +5,
5 mm from the leading edge will be quenched.
[-5 to 10/2/0.1 mm]
2nd Copy Side
Switches the PTL on and off for the rear side of the paper passing through the
fusing unit in the duplex mode at normal speed.
[0 to 1/0/1]
003
0: Off, 1: On
Note:
When this setting is switched on, make sure that the setting of SP2940 008 is
the same as the default setting of SP2940 001.
When feeding thick paper or OHP transparencies, this setting is always off.
SM 5-45 D059/D060/D061
OFF Timing (2nd Copy Side)
004
quenching is applied to the rear side at normal speed. For example, if you set +5,
[-5 to 10/2/0.1 mm]
1st Copy Side: Low Speed 1
fusing unit at Low Speed 1.
Note:
005
Low Speed 1 is 90 cpm for the D060 (110 cpm) and 110 cpm for D061 (135
cpm).
[0 to 1/1/1]
0: Off, 1: On
OFF Timing (1st Copy Side): Low Speed 1
quenching is applied to the front side at Low Speed 1. For example, if you set +5,
006 5 mm from the leading edge will be quenched.
[-5 to 10/2/0.1 mm]
Note:
cpm).
D059/D060/D061 5-46 SM
2nd Copy Side: Low Speed 1
fusing unit in the duplex mode at Low Speed 1.
[0 to 1/0/1]
0: Off, 1: On
007
Note:
cpm).
OFF Timing (2nd Copy Side): Low Speed 1
quenching is applied to the rear side at Low Speed 1. For example, if you set +5,
008 5 mm from the leading edge will be quenched.
[-5 to 10/2/0.1 mm]
Note:
Service
Tables
cpm).
1st Copy Side: Low Speed 2
fusing unit at Low Speed 2.
009
Note: When feeding thick paper or OHP transparencies, this setting is always off.
[0 to 1/1/1]
0: Off, 1: On
PTL timing can be adjusted with SP2602 002.
SM 5-47 D059/D060/D061
OFF Timing (1st Copy Side): Low Speed 2
010 quenching is applied to the front side at Low Speed 2. For example, if you set +5,
[-5 to 10/2/0.1 mm]
Note: Low Speed 2 (90 cpm) applies to the D061 (135 cpm) only.
2nd Copy Side: Low Speed 2
fusing unit in the duplex mode at Low Speed 2.
[0 to 1/0/1]
011 0: Off, 1: On
Note:
Low Speed 2 (90 cpm) applies to the D061 (135 cpm) only.
OFF Timing (2nd Copy Side): Low Speed 2
quenching is applied to the rear side at Low Speed 2. For example, if you set +5,
012
[-5 to 10/2/0.1 mm]
Note:
Low Speed 2 (90 cpm) applies to the D061 (135 cpm) only.
D059/D060/D061 5-48 SM
2801 TD Sensor Initial Setting
Performs the TD sensor initial setting.

This SP mode controls the voltage applied to the TD sensor to make the TD
sensor output about 2.5 V. After finishing this, the TD sensor output voltage is
displayed. Touch [Start] to execute.
You must also enter the developer lot number. (The lot number is stenciled on
the top edge of the developer package.)
Use this mode only after replacing the TD sensor or the developer.
001 Auto Initialize
002 Developer Lot Number
Charge Corona Cleaner On

2803
Touch [Execute] to clean the corona wire cleaner manually. When copy density
across the paper is uneven, clean the wire with this SP.
Service
Tables
2804 Charge Corona Cleaner Setting
Corona Wire Cleaner Operation Setting
Selects when automatic corona wire cleaning is done.

[0 to 3/2/1]
0: Off. No cleaning done.
1: Procon Sync
001
At the beginning process control and at intervals selected with SP2804 002
2: Interval
At intervals selected with SP2804 002 only (not at the beginning of process
control).
3: Suspend
Suspends wire cleaning.
SM 5-49 D059/D060/D061
Corona Wire Cleaner Interval

002
Selects the interval for automatic corona wire cleaning.
[100 to 10000 / 5000 / 100 copies]
D059/D060/D061 5-50 SM
Rev. 01/21/2010 System SP2-nnn Drum: 2
5.4 SYSTEM SP2-NNN DRUM: 2

⇒ NOTE: When scanning or printing a test pattern is required, please use SP4417 – IPU Test
Pattern as described in System SP4-nnn Scanner. SP2902-001, and 002 do not
function.
2902 Test Pattern
⇒ IPU Scanning Test Pattern ATTENTION Does not function – Use SP4417 IPU
Test Pattern
001
Prints the scan test patterns for the IPU chip. Prints 17 patterns for selection.
[0 to 17 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF
1: Vertical 1-dot Line
3: Horizontal 1-dot Line
5: Independent 1-dot
Service
Tables
6: Cross Stripes 1-dot Lines
7: Vertical Stripes
8: Horizontal Grayscale
9: Vertical Grayscale
10: 16-step Grayscale
11: Cross
12: Slant Cross Stripes
13: 256-Color Density Pattern
14: 64-Color Density Pattern
15: Trimming Area
16: Vertical Frequency Spec.
SM 5-51 D059/D060/D061
System SP2-nnn Drum: 2 Rev. 01/21/2010
17: Horizontal Frequency Spec.
⇒ 002 IPU Printing Test Pattern ATTENTION Does not function – Use SP4417 IPU
Test Pattern
Prints the print test pattern for the IPU chip. Presents 4 selections for selection.
[0 to 4 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF
1:1200 Date Image 1 (Edge)
2:1200 Date Image 2 (Non-Edge)
3: Vertical Grayscale
4: Caterpillar
Printing Test Pattern

003
Presents 42 selections for selection.
[0 to 42/0/1]
0:None
1:1-dot Independent Pattern
5: Grid 1-dot Line (0ch)
D059/D060/D061 5-52 SM
17: Grid 1-dot Parallel Lines
18: Checkered Flag
19: Slanted Grid 1-dot Line
20: Slanted Grid 2-dot Line
21: Argyle 670
22: Argyle 012
23: All Black
24: Grid 2-dot Line
Service
Tables
25: Vertical Belt Pattern
26: Horizontal Belt Pattern
27: Trim 1-dot Line
28: Trim 2-dot Line
29: Stair Pattern
30: Grayscale Horizontal (20mm W)
31: Grayscale Horizontal (40mm W)
32: Grayscale Vertical (20mm W)
33: Grayscale Vertical (40mm W)
34: Grayscale Hor. 20 (No Loop)
SM 5-53 D059/D060/D061
35: White Paper (Test: No Output)
36: Grid 1-dot (0ch) Ext. Data
37: Trim 1-dot External Data
38: Slanted Grid Pattern Ext.Data
39: LD Channel Adjust 1
Select Test Pattern
Selects the SBU test pattern (DAGL test pattern).

[0 to 4/ 0 / 1]
004 0: None
1: Fixed Value Output
2: Main Scan Grayscale Output
3: Sub Scan Grayscale Output
4: Grid Output
Set Output Level

005
Sets the output level for the test pattern selected with SP4907-1.
[0 to 1023/ 512 / 1]
Vcont Display or Set
Adjusts the TD sensor control voltage (Vcont) manually.

2906 [0 to 24 / 8 / 0.1 V]
Change this value after replacing the development unit with another one that
already contains toner. For example, when using a development unit from
another machine for test purposes. (See SP2220.)
D059/D060/D061 5-54 SM
2909 Main Scan Magnification
Copy
001 Adjusts the magnification in the main scan direction for copy mode.
[-2.0 to +2.0 / 0 / 0.1%]
Printer
002 Adjusts the magnification in the main scan direction for printing mode.
[-2.0 to +2.0 / 0 / 0.1%]
2910 Sub Scan Magnification
Fine adjusts the magnification in the sub scan direction.

Note: Normally this SP adjustment is done at the factory. However, this SP may
require adjustment in the field after replacement of the polygon mirror motor or
LD unit.
Service
Tables
Image Sub Scan Magnification
001
[-1.0 to +1.0 / 0 / 0.1%]
Image Sub Scan Magnification: Back Side

002
[-0.4 to +0.4 / 0 / 0.1%]
2911 Transfer Current On / Off Timing
SM 5-55 D059/D060/D061
Here is a summary of the notations that appear in the descriptions of these SP codes:
La: Adjusts the OFF timing for transfer bias between sheets at the leading edge.
Lb: Adjusts ON timing for bias in the image transfer area after leading edge transfer
current goes ON.
Lc: Adjusts the OFF timing of image transfer bias after the trailing edge of a sheet exits
the nip of the transfer roller.}
Transfer current OFF between pages
After the registration roller starts to rotate again after buckle adjustment, the transfer power
pack starts up and switches on leading edge transfer bias 50 ms before the leading edge of
the sheet reaches the nip of the transfer roller (the distance between the registration roller
and transfer roller nip is 57.02 mm).
If the line speed is 630 mm/s, the timing after the registration roller restarts is :
57.02/630 – 0.05 = 40.5 ms.
Leading edge transfer current ON
Ton(Tc) = Toff(T(b))
Leading edge transfer transfer current OFF
Toff(Tc) = Ton(Tc)+0.05+Lb/Vp
As for the standard for leading edge transfer current ON timing, the image area bias goes
ON at 50 ms plus the distance after Lb (this adjusts the criterion for leading edge ON
timing).
Lb: SP2911-2 Lb Switch Timing
This control is for when normal paper or tracing paper is selected. Image transfer efficiency
is given priority for Thick Paper 1, Thick Paper 2, Thick Paper 3, OHP, postcard, and
Medium Thick paper to prevent power separation with these media. Lb is fixed at "0" when
OHP, postcard, Thick Paper 1, Thick Paper 2, or Thick Paper 3 is selected. }
Image area transfer current ON
After the trailing edge of each sheet passes the registration sensor then reaches the exit of
the nip of the transfer roller after Lc, transfer bias goes OFF and switches to bias for
between sheets. Lc: SP2911-3 Lc Timing OFF (OFF timing is delayed from the maximum
number of tab sheets (15 mm).
Low Speed Table
D059/D060/D061 5-56 SM
D059 D060 D061
These are weights for the paper thickness references:

Thin Paper: 40 to 51g/m2
Med Thick Paper: 106 to 163g/ m2
2911 Transfer Current On / Off Timing
La (ON)
001
[-15 to +20 / 0 / 1 mm]
Service
Tables
Lb (Switch)
002
[0 to 45 / * / 1 mm]
* D059: 20, D060: 20, * D061: 26
Lc (OFF)
003
[-40 to +40 / 0 / 1 mm]
Med Thick La (Switch)

004
[-15 to +20/ 0 / 1 mm]
Med Thick Lb (Switch)

005
[0 to 45/ 0 / 1 mm]
SM 5-57 D059/D060/D061
Med Thick Lc (Switch)

006
[-40 to +40/ 0 / 1 mm]
After Punch La (Switch)

007
[-15 to +20/ 0 / 1 mm]
After Punch Lb (Switch)

008
[0 to 45/ * / 1 mm]
* D059: 20, D060: 20, * D061: 26
After Punch Lc (Switch)

009
[-40 to +40/ * / 1 mm]
* D059: –25, * D060: –30, * D061: –38
Coated Paper: La (ON)

010
[-15 to +20 / 0 / 1 mm]
Coated Paper Lb (Switch)

011
[0 to 45 /20/ 1 mm]
Coated Paper: Lc (OFF)

012
[-40 to +40 / 0 / 1 mm]
Thin Paper: La (ON)

013
[-15 to 20 / 0 / 1 mm]
Thin Paper: Lb: (Switch)

014
[0 to 45 / 20 / 1 mm]
Thin Paper: Lc (OFF)

015
[-40 to +40 / 0 / 1 mm]
Thick Paper: 1 La (ON)

016
[-15 to +20 / 0 / 1 mm]
D059/D060/D061 5-58 SM
Thick Paper: 1 Lb (Switch)

017
[0 to 45 / 0 / 1 mm]
Thick Paper: 1 Lc (OFF)

018
[-40 to +40 / 0 / 1 mm]

019
[-15 to +20 / 0 / 1 mm]

020
[0 to 45 / 0 / 1 mm]

021
[-40 to +40 / 0 / 1 mm]

022
[-15 to +20 / 0 / 1 mm]

023
[0 to 45 / 0 / 1 mm]
Service
Tables
024
[-40 to +40 / 0 / 1 mm]
Transparencies: La (ON)
025
[-15 to +20 / 0 / 1 mm]
Transparencies: Lb (Switch)
026
[0 to 45 / 0 / 1 mm]
Transparencies: Lc (OFF)
027
[-40 to +40 / 0 / 1 mm]
La (ON) (Low Speed 1)

028
[-15 to +20 / 0 / 1 mm]
Lb (Switch) (Low Speed 1)

029
[0 to 45 / 20 / 1 mm]
SM 5-59 D059/D060/D061
Lc (OFF) (Low Speed 1)

030
[-40 to +40 / 0 / 1 mm]
Med Thick La (ON) (Low Speed 1)

031
[-15 to +20 / 0 / 1 mm]
Med Thick Lb (Switch) (Low Speed 1)

032
[0 to 45 / 0 / 1 mm]
Med Thick Lc (Switch) (Low Speed 1)

033
[-40 to +40 / 0 / 1 mm]
After Punch La (ON) (Low Speed 1)

034
[-15 to +20 / 0 / 1 mm]
After Punch Lb (Switch) (Low Speed 1)

035
[0 to 45 / 20 / 1 mm]
After Punch Lc (Switch) (Low Speed 1)

036
[-40 to +40 / -25 / 1 mm]
Coated Paper La (ON) (Low Speed 1)

037
[-15 to +20 / 0 / 1 mm]
Coated Paper Lb (Switch) (Low Speed 1)

038
[0 to 45 / 20 / 1 mm]
Coated Paper Lc (Switch) (Low Speed 1)

039
[-40 to +40 / 0 / 1 mm]
Thin Paper La (ON) (Low Speed 1)

040
[-15 to +20 / 0 / 1 mm]
Thin Paper Lb (Switch) (Low Speed 1)

041
[0 to 45 / 20 / 1 mm]
Thin Paper Lc (Switch) (Low Speed 1)

042
[-40 to +40 / 0 / 1 mm]
D059/D060/D061 5-60 SM
Thick Paper 1: La (ON) (Low Speed 1)

043
[-15 to +20 / 0 / 1 mm]
Thick Paper 1: Lb (Switch) (Low Speed 1)

044
[0 to 45 / 0 / 1 mm]
Thick Paper 1: Lc (Switch) (Low Speed 1)

045
[-40 to +40 / 0 / 1 mm]

046
[-15 to +20 / 0 / 1 mm]

047
[0 to 45 / 0 / 1 mm]

048
[-40 to +40 / 0 / 1 mm]

049
[-15 to +20 / 0 / 1 mm]
Service
Tables
050
[0 to 45 / 0 / 1 mm]

051
[-40 to +40 / 0 / 1 mm]
Transparencies: La (ON) (Low Speed 1)

052
[-15 to +20 / 0 / 1 mm]
Transparencies: Lb (Switch) (Low Speed 1)

053
[0 to 45 / 0 / 1 mm]
Transparencies: Lc (Switch) (Low Speed 1)

054
[-40 to +40 / 0 / 1 mm]
La (ON) Low Speed 2

055
[-15 to +20 / 0 / 1 mm]
SM 5-61 D059/D060/D061
Lb (Switch) Low Speed 2

056
[0 to 45 / 0 / 1 mm]
Lc (Switch) Low Speed 2

057
[-40 to +40 / 0 / 1 mm]
Med Thick La (ON) Low Speed 2

058
[-15 to +20 / 0 / 1 mm]
Med Thick Lb (Switch) Low Speed 2

059
[0 to 45 / 0 / 1 mm]
Med Thick Lc (Switch) Low Speed 2

060
[-40 to +40 / 0 / 1 mm]
After Punch La (ON) Low Speed 2

061
[-15 to +20 / 0 / 1 mm]
After Punch Lb (Switch) Low Speed 2

062
[0 to 45 / 0 / 1 mm]
After Punch Lc (Switch) Low Speed 2

063
[-40 to +40 / -25 / 1 mm]
Coated Paper La (ON) Low Speed 2

064
[-15 to +20 / 0 / 1 mm]
Coated Paper Lb (Switch) Low Speed 2

065
[0 to 45 / 20 / 1 mm]
Coated Paper Lc (Switch) Low Speed 2

066
[-40 to +40 / 0 / 1 mm]
Thin Paper La (ON) Low Speed 2

067
[-15 to +20 / 0 / 1 mm]
Thin Paper Lb (Switch) Low Speed 2

068
[0 to 45 / 20 / 1 mm]
D059/D060/D061 5-62 SM
Thin Paper Lc (Switch) Low Speed 2

069
[-40 to +40 / 0 / 1 mm]
Thick Paper 1: La (ON) Low Speed 2

070
[-15 to +20 / 0 / 1 mm]
Thick Paper 1: Lb (Switch) Low Speed 2

071
[0 to 45 / 0 / 1 mm]
Thick Paper 1: Lc (Switch) Low Speed 2

072
[-40 to +40 / 0 / 1 mm]

073
[-15 to +20 / 0 / 1 mm]

074
[0 to 45 / 0 / 1 mm]

075
[-40 to +40 / 0 / 1 mm]
Service
Tables
076
[-15 to +20 / 0 / 1 mm]

077
[0 to 45 / 0 / 1 mm]

078
[-40 to +40 / 0 / 1 mm]
Transparencies: La (ON) Low Speed 2

079
[-15 to +20 / 0 / 1 mm]
Transparencies: Lb (Switch) Low Speed 2

080
[0 to 45 / 0 / 1 mm]
Transparencies: Lc (Switch) Low Speed 2

081
[-40 to +40 / 0 / 1 mm]
SM 5-63 D059/D060/D061
2912 Drum Reverse Rotation Interval
1st Reverse Rotation

001
Sets the length of time the drum is reversed to clean the drum cleaning blade.
[0 to 7 / 2 / 1 ms]
Forward Rotation After 1st Reverse Rotation

002
Sets the length of time the drum is rotated forward after the 1st reverse rotation.
[0 to 7 / 0 / 1 ms]
2nd Reverse Rotation
003 Sets the length of time the drum is reversed for the 2nd reverse rotation to clean
the drum cleaning blade again.
[0 to 7 / 0/ 1 ms]
Temperature & Humidity Display
This SP displays readings of the current temperature and humidity inside the
2913
machine.
Internal Temp
001 Temperature
Displays current temperature inside the machine.

[-20 to 60/None/1°C]
002 Humidity
Current humidity level inside the machine.

[0 to 100/None/1% rH]
003 Drum (OPC) Temperature
[0 to 2 / 1 / 1]
Temperature around the drum.
D059/D060/D061 5-64 SM
LD Off Check DFU
2920 Checks whether the LD turns off or on when the front door is opened.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
0: ON, 1: OFF
2nd Cleaning Blade
Use this SP to set up how the 2nd cleaning blade operates. The
temperature/humidity sensor measures the temperature and humidity, then the
machine calculates the absolute humidity. Based on this calculation of absolute
2930
humidity:
The settings of SP2930-001, -002, -003 take effect only when SP2930-008
is set to "0" (Normal).
The settings of SP29030-004, -005, -006, -007 take effect only when
SP2930-008 is set to "1" (Low).
Condition 1
This SP setting determines when 2nd blade cleaning is done.

1: During Process Control
Service
Tables
001 2nd blade cleaning is done during process control after the time specified by
SP2930-2, and -3 has elapsed.
2: Manual
Executes. 2nd blade can be executed manually. Otherwise, 2nd blade cleaning
is not done.
Interval 1
This SP sets the time to elapse before 2nd blade cleaning operates. 2nd blade
002
cleaning is done when the time exceeds this value, but only if SP2930-1 is set
to "1".
[5 to 1400/90/1 min.]
SM 5-65 D059/D060/D061
003 Time 1
This SP sets the length of time the 2nd cleaning blade is held against the drum.
At the end of this time, the 2nd cleaning blade is retracted and does not touch
the drum until the next cleaning.
[10 to 90/20/1 sec.]
Force 2nd Blade Cleaning

004
Press [Start] to force cleaning the drum with the 2nd cleaning blade.
Condition 2
This SP setting determines when 2nd blade cleaning is done.

[0 to 3/1/1]
005
0: No Switching
1: Level 1 (cleaning every sheet)
2: Level 2 (cleaning every 2 sheets)
3: Level 3 (cleaning every 3 sheets)
Interval 2
006
This SP sets the length of time to elapse before 2nd blade cleaning.
[5 to 1440 / 15 / 1 min.]
Time 2
This SP sets the length of time the 2nd cleaning blade is held against the drum.
007
At the end of this time, the 2nd cleaning blade is retracted and does not touch
the drum until the next cleaning.
[10 to 90/20/1 sec.]
D059/D060/D061 5-66 SM
Set Level
This SP displays a number that tells you which mode is controlling the operation
of the 2nd cleaning blade.
008 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Normal. The settings of SP2930-001, 002, 003 control the operation of the
2nd cleaning blade.
1: Low. The settings of SP2920-005, 006, 007, 008 control the operation of 2nd
blade cleaning.
Leading Edge Transfer Current

2940
Adjusts the leading edge transfer current for each paper feed station at normal
and low speed.
001 Tray 1
002 Tray 2
003 Tray 3
Service
[20 to 200 / */ 1 µA]
Tables
004 Tray 4
D059: 25, D060: 30, D061: 35
005 Tray 5
006 Tray 6
007 Tray 7
008 Duplex Tray
009 Tray 1 (Low Speed 1)

[20 to 200 / * / 1 ua]
D059: 25, D060: 25, D061: 30
SM 5-67 D059/D060/D061
[20 to 200 / * / 1 um]

016 Duplex Tray (Low Speed 1)
D059: 100, D060: 100, D061: 110
020 Tray 4 (Low Speed 2) [20 to 200 / 25 / 1 um]
024 Duplex Tray (Low Speed 2) [20 to 200 / 100 / 1 um]
Pages Allowed After TCB Lock
This SP displays the number of sheets allowed after Toner Collection Unit Lock
is detected. After detection, "Replacement of Toner Recycling Unit will soon be
2950
necessary" is displayed at the bottom of the operation panel. When this number
reaches 8K, SC487 is issued and the machine stops.
Enter "0" and cycle the machine power off/on to reset this symptom.
[0 to 50/0/1 K Sheets]
D059/D060/D061 5-68 SM
2960 Process Interval
This SP extends the time delay before the machine shifts to shut down mode.
[0 to 7/ 0 / 1 sec.]
2961 Developer Initialization (Factory) DFU
Auto Process Control Execution
Press [Start] to execute and automatically adjust the following:

Drum potential sensor
ID sensor
2962 Charge grid voltage Vg (by changing Vd)
LD power (by changing Vh)
VL detection.
Note: Before using this SP, auto process control should be on (SP3-901). After
changing the drum, ID sensor, drum potential sensor, LD unit, charge corona
wires, or toner density sensor, this SP should be executed.
Service
Tables
2966 Periodical Auto Process Control
Selects whether auto process control is done after 24 hours have elapsed after
the last copy job. This setting is required for a customer who keeps the main
switch on all day.
001 Operation Setting
[0 to 1 / 1/ 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
002 Interval Setting
[1 to 24 / 24 /1 hour]
SM 5-69 D059/D060/D061
Auto Image Density Adjustment
Selects whether auto image density adjustment is done during machine warm
up. This mode is to counter dirty background that occurs when a machine is
2967 used in an area that contains ammonia.
[0 to 1 / 0/ 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
If Periodical Auto Process Control (SP2-966) is used, this adjustment is done
also after the auto process control is finished.
Toner Density Correction
To prevent the image density dropping during continuous copying after a long
interval (this is caused by a sudden increase of Q/M), VREF is changed by –0.06
2968
V every (100 x [SP2-974 value + 1]) prints. This correction is applied from when
the auto process control is done, until "(the number of prints set in this SP mode)
x (SP2-974 value +1)" has been made.
[0 to 20 / 0 / 1K copies]
2969 ID Sensor Pattern Interval-Multiple Copy
[0 to 2/ 0 / 1]
0: No Operation
1: Process Control Execution Mode
2: Environment Sensor Mode
002 Interval Setting Between Jobs
[10 to 1000/70/ 10]
D059/D060/D061 5-70 SM
003 Total Number of Created Patterns
This is the frequency of the number of ID sensor patterns created during

continuous jobs.
[1 to 100/ 20 / 1 Pattern]
004 Switch Level
This is the switching level for the creation of ID sensor patterns during
continuous jobs.
[1 to 3 / 1 / 1]
1: Switch When > 1300
2970 Initialize by Unit
This SP can initialize units independently.
001 #Development Unit
Service
Tables
003 #Drum Unit
005 #Drum Cleaning Unit
009 #Charge Unit
014 #Pre-Charge Unit
017 #Fusing Unit
021 #Fusing Cleaning Unit
SM 5-71 D059/D060/D061
Toner Suction Bottle Operation Time
Displays the total operation time of the development unit toner collection bottle.
2972 [0 to 65 535 / 0 / 1 hour]
Need to replace soon: 580 hours
Need to replace now: 600 hours
After the bottle is replaced, reset the value to "0" by pressing 0 and (Enter).
Toner Suction Motor Operation Time
Displays the total operation time of the development toner suction motor.
2973 [0 to 600 / 0 / 1 hour]
Need to replace soon: 570 hours
Need to replace now: 600 hours
After the motor is replaced, reset the value to 0 (zero) by pressing 0 and [#].
Toner Supply Interval
Adjusts how often toner is supplied

[0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
0: 1/1 (every print)
1: 1/2 (every 2 prints)
2974
The operation of SP2968 now depends on this SP mode setting. In this machine,
the Vref update interval has been changed from "every 100 prints" to "every [100
x (SP2-974 value +1)] prints". For example, if set to 1, toner is supplied every 2
prints, and SP 2-974 value + 1 = 3.
D059/D060/D061 5-72 SM
2975 Toner Recycle Cut Counter
ON Counter
Determines how often all recycled toner is discarded. The purpose of this
feature is to periodically remove all recycled toner contaminated with paper dust.
001
[0 to 999 / 25 / 1 K copies]
This setting determines when the toner separation solenoid closes the shutter
and shunts all toner to the waste toner collection bottle. For details, see "Toner
Recycling" in Section 6.
OFF Counter
This setting determines how long all toner is shunted to the waste toner
002 collection bottle (no recycling).
[0 to 255 / 25 / 1 K copies]
This setting determines when the toner separation solenoid opens the shutter
and toner recycling starts.
Recycle Level Setting

003
Service
Tables
Adjusts recycling according to ambient conditions.
[0 to 3/1/1]
Toner Supply/Transport Display

2977
This SP displays information about toner supply operation.
001 Toner Bank Mtr: Total On Time [0 to 9 999/0/1 Hour]
002 Toner Supply CL: On/Off Times [0 to 9 999/0/1 K Prints]
003 TCB Agitator: Total On Time [0 to 999/0/1 Hour]
004 TS Agitator: Total On Time [0 to 999/0/1 Hour]
005 Toner Pump: Total On Time [0 to 999/0/1 Hour]
SM 5-73 D059/D060/D061
2978 Recycle Status Display
Status
This SP displays whether recycling is on or off.
001
[0 to 1/0]
0: On, 1: Off
Page Count
002 [0 to 999 / 0 / K copies]
Displays the number of K (1,000) pages printed with recycling on.
Coat Drum With Toner

2985
Touch [Execute] to coat the drum with toner.
Refresh Mode
This SP code is used periodically to discard toner in the developer/toner

2986 mixture and replenish it with fresh toner. Over a long period of time the quality
of the toner in the developer/toner mixture may deteriorate. This can occur with
machines that are used infrequently or on machines where the average copy or
print is of very low density.
Interval
Sets the interval between refresh executions. The toner refresh is done when
the count exceeds this number.
[0 to 25/0/1 K]
001 Note:
"KMAI" Means K sheets (1,000 sheets).
The machine will execute the refresh mode immediately as soon as the
count exceeds this setting, even if this occurs during a print job.
When the count is exceeded during a print job the job will pause and a
message tell the operator to wait while the machine makes the adjustment.
D059/D060/D061 5-74 SM
Level
Selects the Vsp value that will trigger toner refresh. Toner is refreshed if the
value of Vsp drops below the selected level.
[0 to 4/2/ 1]
0: Vsp = 0.8
002
1: Vsp = 1.0
2: Vsp = 1.2
3: Vsp = 1.5
4: Vsp = 1.8
Note: Vsp is the ID sensor output after it measures the toner density of the ID
sensor pattern.
Repetitions
003 Sets the number of times the refresh cycle is repeated for one refresh
execution.
[1 to 3/2/1 times]
Service
Tables
2987 Toner Consumption with Ring Binder
Determines whether a toner pattern is created on the OPC drum during heavy
use of the ring binder in a low temperature environment. The pattern is created
to prevent the occurrence of dirty background.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
1: ON. Pattern created at the level specified by SP2987-2.
0: OFF. No pattern is created. The setting of SP2987-2 is ignored.
SM 5-75 D059/D060/D061
002 Operation Level Setting
Determines the temperature/humidity level at which the toner pattern is created

on the OPC drum (only when SP2987-1 is enabled).
[0 to 3/1/1]
Ring Binder Run
Up to 200 books: 10°C 20% rH
Adjust Start Timing
This SP adjusts the timing of the first copy or print to ensure the quality of the
first copy. Clean toner is occasionally consumed when the drum starts to rotate.
This can lead to poor cleaning and other poor conditions on the drum.
[0 to 2/0/1]
0: Normal Mode
2990 1: Mode 1
The transfer belt separation from the drum is delayed for the 1st rotation of the
drum to keep the belt against the drum in order to counter the effects of a
possible faulty reading by the drum potential sensor.
2: Mode 2
The transfer belt separation from the drum is delayed for two drum rotations to
keep the belt against the drum to counter the effects of faulty readings by the
drum potential sensor or poor drum cleaning.
D059/D060/D061 5-76 SM
2991 Toner Supply Interval: Large Paper
This SP sets the toner supply interval for large size paper. Large size paper is
paper longer than 350 mm in the sub scan direction.
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1
0: 1/1 (every sheet)
1: 1/2 (every 2nd sheet)
2: 1/3 (every 3rd sheet)
3: 1/4 (every 4th sheet)
2992 Edge Pattern Creation
Switches the trailing edge pattern on/off. When this SP code is ON, a trailing
edge pattern is created if the number of images have exceeded the specified
number by the time the job and main motor have stopped. SP2993 specifies the
interval.
[0 to 1/0/1]
[*0:OFF] [1:ON]
Service
Tables
2993 Edge Pattern Interval Setting Between Jobs
This SP sets the interval for creation of the edge patterns. This setting is enabled
only when SP2992 is ON.
[1 to 9999 / 10 / 1]
SM 5-77 D059/D060/D061
System SP3-nnn Processing
5.5 SYSTEM SP3-NNN PROCESSING
3001 ID Sensor Initial Setting
ID Sensor PWM Setting
This SP mode recovers the machine when an SC condition occurs because ID

001 Sensor Initial Setting is not done after doing an NVRAM Clear or replacing the
NVRAM. Reset this SP to the factory setting in this case.
[0 to 255 / 62 / 1]
The PWM data is stored when ID Sensor Initial Setting is done.
ID Sensor Initialization
Performs the ID sensor initial setting. The ID sensor output for the bare drum
002
(VSG) is adjusted to 4.0 ± 0.2 V.
This SP mode should be performed: 1) After replacing or cleaning the ID sensor,
2) After replacing the NVRAM or doing an NVRAM clear.
3103 ID Sensor Output Display
Vsg
001
Displays the current value of the ID sensor output after checking the bare drum
surface.
Vsg Initial
002
Displays Vsg when the Vsp adjustment is done.
Vsp
003
Displays the current value of the ID sensor output after checking the ID sensor
pattern image.
Vsgp
004 Displays the value of the ID sensor output immediately after Vsp is output when
the charge potential drops. This reading is used to test and determine
characteristics for design. DFU
D059/D060/D061 5-78 SM
3901 Process Control ON/OFF Setting
Auto Process Control Setting
Determines whether machine checks and corrects drum potential (Vd) and LD
power when the fusing temperature is lower than 100°C at power-on.
001
[0 to 1 / 1/ 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
This setting attempts to change the Vd setting consistent with the OPC, the
charge corona unit, and environment to improve the reliability of the system.
VL & VD Correction Control Setting DFU
Determines whether VL detection and correction are performed during process

control every 1K copies.
002
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Even with this SP switched ON, VL detection and correction will not be
performed if SP3901 001 is OFF.
003 Temperature Control
Service
Tables
Displays the value of VH measured by the potential sensor.
0: OFF
1: ON
3902 Process Control Data Display
Auto Process Control (0:OFF 1:ON)
Displays whether auto process control is switched on or off [0:Off, 1:On]

001 When auto process control is on and the potential sensor is calibrated correctly,
"ON" appears on the operation panel.
Auto process control is not executed when this SP is switched off. After RAM is
cleared, this SP setting goes off.
VD
002
Displays the drum potential.
SM 5-79 D059/D060/D061
VH
003
Displays the standard halftone drum potential, used for laser power adjustment.
VG
004
Displays the charge grid voltage resulting from the latest Vd adjustment.
LD Power (Correction)
005
Displays the LD power correction value as a result of the latest Vh adjustment.
V ID
006
Displays the latest drum surface voltage measured on the ID sensor pattern.
VD Correction
Shows whether VD correction is being done or not

007
0: Not being done; process control is using the value of SP2001 007 only
1: Being done; process control is using the value of SP2001 007 + 50V
VL (Auto Process Control)

008
Displays the value of VL at auto process control initialization.
VL Correction (Auto Process Control)

009
Displays the amount of correction (ΔVLref) according to results of the VL
detection at auto process control.
VL
010
Displays the latest value of VL.
VL Correction
011
Displays the amount of correction (ΔVLref) according to the latest VL detection
results.
D059/D060/D061 5-80 SM
VB
012
Displays the value of the current image development bias output, determined by
the results of VL detection.
VG
013
Displays the value of Vg (charge corona grid voltage).
014 VD
015 Temperature Correction Value: VL
016 Temperature Correction Value: VBp
017 Process Control Temperature
018 Line Speed
VD Correction Counter
Adjusts the starting point for the VD Correction. Displays whether the VD
Service
Tables
3903 correction is being performed. The target value is "the value of SP2-001-7 + 50".
[0 to 9999 / 9999 / 1 K copies]
Reduce the setting if dirty background occurs.
The counter is automatically reset to 0 (zero) when SP2-801 is performed.
Vh Adjustment
These SP codes allow adjustment of the target Vh (standard drum potential for
halftone) for process control. Adjust setting for a drum that has been in use for a
long period of time if the text is not sharp. This problem can occur with drums
3904 designed for longer service life. Raising the value reduces the amount of light
fired from the LD unit. However, if the adjust is set too high, this can lower image
density and cause poor reproduction of low contrast images.
Note: Changing this SP resets the standard for SC428 (Drum Potential Sensor
Error 3: Vh Adjustment Error). If the target is adjusted to 300V, for example, the
standard for drum potential sensor sampling of Vh will be reset to 300V±20.
SM 5-81 D059/D060/D061
Normal Line Speed

001 This resets the target Vh for machine operation (but not low speed mode).
[200 to 500/280/10V]
Low Speed Mode

This resets the target Vh for low speed mode.
002 [200 to 500/280/10V]
Low Speed 1 is 90 cpm for the D060 (110 cpm).
Low Speed 2
This resets the target Vh for Low Speed Mode 2.
003 [200 to 500/280/10V]
Low Speed 2 does not apply to either the D059 or D060.
3905 OPC Drum Initial Setting
001 Execute Mode
Resets the count to zero. This SP code must be executed after the drum has
been replaced.
002 Time
Displays the time that has elapsed since the last time the count was cleared.
The displayed time is the total run time of the main motor.
003 Distance
Displays the time that has elapsed since the last time the count was cleared.
The displayed value is the distance calculated based on the total run time of the
main motor.
D059/D060/D061 5-82 SM
VB Correction Setting
3906
Vb (development bias) is used during process control to control drum potential.
Normally, VB is recalibrated every 11,400 minutes (about every 8 days).
On/Off Setting
Switches periodic calibration of Vb off on.
001
[0 to 1/1/1]
0: Off, 1: On
VB Correction Counter
When SP3906 1 is on, use this SP to adjust the interval between VB
002
calibrations.
[3800 to 9 999 999 / 1 m]
003 2nd Step ON/OFF Setting
This SP sets the value for 1st cycle Vb correction at Level 2. When set to zero
no correction is done. When set to any value other than zero, this value is
subtracted from the setting for SP3902-12.
[0 to 200 / 20 / 1V
Service
Tables
004 Start Distance for 2nd Step Correction
This SP sets the value the start time for 1st cycle Vb correction at Level 2.
SP3905-2 displays the initial setting of the OPC use time, this condition is
satisfied with any value higher than this setting.
[0 to 999 999 /420 000 / 1 m
005 3rd Step ON/OFF Setting
This SP sets the value for 1st cycle Vb correction at Level 3. When set to zero
no correction is done. When set to any value other than zero, this value is
subtracted from the setting for SP3902-12.
[0 to 200 / 120 / 1V]
SM 5-83 D059/D060/D061
006 Start Distance for 3rd Step Correction
This SP sets the value the start time for 1st cycle Vb correction at Level 3.
SP3905-2 displays the initial setting of the OPC use time, this condition is
satisfied with any value higher than this setting.
[0 to 000 000 / 560 000 / 1m]
007 Job Time Setting
The condition is satisfied if the time set for this SP is more that the time from the
last main motor stoppage until the next time the main motor starts. SP3906-001
to –006: The correction is input when the conditions of these SP codes are met
and the correction is input for the 1st Vb cycle.
[0 to 9 / 3 / 1 min.]
3907 OPC Drum Initial Setting
001 Correction Setting
This SP corrects transfer voltage. When set to zero no correction is done. When
set to a value other than zero, this setting is subtracted from the image area
transfer current.
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 μa]
002 Correction End Setting
This SP sets the stop time of the transfer current. SP3907-001: Even if the
setting of SP307-001 (transfer current correction) is any value other than zero, if
the value of SP3905-002 (OPC use time setting/display) is more than this SP
value, then the transfer current correction is not done.
[0 to 999 9999 / 140 000 / 1 m]
D059/D060/D061 5-84 SM
3908 VH Correction for Low Temperature
001 1st Level ON/OFF Setting
Level 1: Setting (approx. 10°C, below 25%) When set to zero no correction is
done.
[0 to 100 / 20 / 10°C]
002 2nd Level ON/OFF Setting
Level 2: Setting (approx. 14°C, below 40%) When set to zero no correction is
done.
[0 to 100 / 10 / 10°C]
003 Correction End Setting
Sets the stop time for Vh correction in a low temperature, low humidity
environment.
[0 to 999 999 / 56 000 / 1 m]
Service
Tables
SM 5-85 D059/D060/D061
System SP4-nnn Scanner
5.6 SYSTEM SP4-NNN SCANNER
Scanner Sub Scan Magnification
Adjusts the magnification in the sub scan direction for scanning. If this value is
changed, the scanner motor speed is changed.
4008 [-0.9 to +0.9 / 0 / 0.1 %]
Setting a lower value reduces the motor speed and lengthens the image in the
sub scan direction (paper direction). Setting a larger value increases the motor
speed and shortens the image in the sub scan direction.
Scanner Leading Edge Registration
Adjusts the leading edge registration for scanning.

[-9.0 to +9.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
4010
A minus setting moves in the direction of the leading edge. A larger value shifts
the image away from the leading edge, and a smaller value shifts the image
toward the leading edge.
Scanner Main Scan Registration Adj
Adjusts the side-to-side registration for scanning.

4011 [-2.0 to +2.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
(–): The image disappears at the left side.
(+): The image appears at the left side.
D059/D060/D061 5-86 SM
Set Scale Mask
4012 Adjusts the erase margin for scanning. The leading, trailing, right and left
margins can be set independently. Do not adjust this unless the user wishes to
have a scanner margin that is greater than the printer margin.
Book: Sub Scan: Leading Edge

001
[0 to 3.0 / 1 / 0.1 mm]
Book: Main Scan: Leading Edge

002
[0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
Book: Main Scan: Trailing Edge (Rear)

003
[0 to 3.0 / 1 / 0.1 mm]
Book: Main Scan: Trailing Edge (Front)

004
[0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
4013 Scanner Free Run
001 Book Mode: Lamp OFF
Service
Tables
Allows scanner free running with exposure lamp off.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
002 Book Mode: Lamp ON
Allows scanner free running with the exposure lamp on.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
4014 Scanner
This SP adjustment fine adjusts the speed of the scanner to prevent uneven
performance.
[Execute]
SM 5-87 D059/D060/D061
Scanning Control Adjustment
Displays the value of the scanner speed fine adjustment.

4015
[-20 to +20 / 0 / 1]
Scanner speed fine adjustment is automatically done when the main switch is
turned on, and the current setting is overwritten.
Operation Check APS Sensor

4301
Displays the APS sensor output signals when an original is placed on the
exposure glass.
Set Minimum Size for APS
Selects whether or not the machine detects the original as A5 or HLT size when
the APS sensor does not detect the size.
4303 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Unknown Document Size
1 : A5-SEF (HLT-SEF)
If 1 is selected, the paper size is determined as A5 length 5½" x 8 ½", even if the
paper size is too small to be detected on the exposure glass.
4305 8K/16K Detection
Changes APS size detection

[0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
0 : Normal
1 : A4-LEF LT-SEF
If the paper is LEF, detects A4, if SEF detects LT
2 : LT-LEF A4 SEF
If paper is LEF, detects LT, if SEF detects A4.
3: 8-kai, 16-kai
A3, B4 > 8-kai SEF
A4 SEF, B5 SEF, A5 SEF > 16-kai SEF
A4 LEF, B5 LEF, A5 LEF > 16-kai LEF
D059/D060/D061 5-88 SM
Original Edge Mask Setting
4400 This SP sets the mask area to remove shadows when scanning originals from
the exposure glass in Book mode.
Note: "LE" denotes "leading edge" and "TE" denotes "trailing edge".
001 Book:Sub Scan:Leading Edge
002 Book:Sub Scan:Trailing Edge

[0 to 3/0/0.1 mm]
003 Book:Main Scan:Leading Edge (Rear)
004 Book:Main Scan:Trailing Edge (Front)
4417 IPU Test Pattern
001 0 Scanner Data
1 256-Gradation: Main Scan A
2 256-Gradation: Main Scan B
3 256-Gradation: Main Scan C
Service
Tables
4 256-Gradation: Main Scan D
5 256-Gradation: Sub Scan
6 Small Grid Pattern
7 Slanted Grid Pattern
8 256 Gradations: K
9 16-Step Check Pattern
10 Gray Patch 1: 16-Step
11 Gray Patch 2: 16-Step
12 Gray Patch: 64-Step
SM 5-89 D059/D060/D061
13 Large Grid
14 Uneven Density Check
15 Banding Check 1
16 Banding Check 2
17 Overall Coverage
18 Shading Check
19 Text Check
20 Scan Image + Grid B
21 Scan Image + Black Grade B
22 Scan Image + Density Uneven C
23 Scan Image + Slanted Grid C
24 Scan Image + Slanted Grid D
25 18-Level Grayscale: Text
26 18-Level Grayscale: Photo
27 256-Level Grayscale: Text
28 256-Level Grayscale: Photo
4429 Illegal Copy Output DFU
Copy
001
[0 to 3/ 3 / 1
Scanner
002
[0 to 3/ 3 / 1
D059/D060/D061 5-90 SM
Digital AE
4460
This SP sets the lower limit and level for background removal when background
removal is selected with a scanner application.
001 Low Limit Value [0 to 1023/392/1]
002 Background level [0 to 1023/972/1]
4540 Print Coverage Correction DFU
4550 Scanning: Text/Drawing
4551 Scanning: Text
4552 Scanning: Test Dropout Color
4553 Scanning: Text/Photo
4554 Scanning: Photo
Service
Tables
4565 Scanning: Grayscale
4570 Scanning: Color Text/Photo
4571 Scanning: Color Gloss Photo
4572 Scanning: Auto Color
005 MTF Level: 0-15 (0:OFF, 15:High)
Sets the MTF level (Modulation Transfer Function) designed to improve

image contrast. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect.
[0 to 15/8/1]
006 Smoothing Level: 0-7 (0:Low, 7:High)
Use to remove "jaggies" if they appear. Set higher for smoother.

[0 to 7/4/1]
SM 5-91 D059/D060/D061
007 Brightness: 1-255
Set higher for darker, set lower for lighter.

[1 to 255/128/1]
008 Contrast: 1-255
Set higher for more contrast, set lower for less contrast.
[1 to 255/128/1]
009 Independent Dot Erase: 0-7 (0:Low, 7 High)
This SP sets the level for removing dots when a color original is scanned with
a scanner software application. The higher the setting, the greater the effect
applied for removing background dots.
[0 to 7/0/1]
Read SBU ASIC ID DFU

4600
Displays the SBU ID code confirmed by reading the SBU after the SBU
adjusts automatically at power on.
001 VSBCNT
Displays the reading of VSBCNT_ID if an error is detected at the SBU during

iSBU auto adjustment.
Note:
This SP displays after SC144 is issued if the reading of the ID value is
not within specifications for iSBU self adjustment control operation.
The display format is hexadecimal (1-byte data), normally "14H"
displays. 1
D059/D060/D061 5-92 SM
002 DAGL_L
Displays the reading of DAGL_ID if an error is detected at the SBU during

Note:
not within specifications for iSBU self adjustment control operaion. The
display format is hexadecimal (1-byte data), normally "11H" displays.
003 DAGL_F
Displays the reading of DAGL_F_ID if an error is detected at the SBU during

Note:
not within specifications for iSBU self adjustment control operation.
The display format is hexadecimal (1-byte data), normally "11H" displays.
4609 Gray Balance Ad Value: R DFU
Service
Tables
4610 Gray Balance Adj Value: G DFU
4611 Gray Balance Ad Value: B DFU
4615 Gray Balance Adj Value: R (Factory Setting) DFU
4616 Gray Balance Ad Value: G (Factory Setting) DFU
4617 Gray Balance Adj Value: B (Factory Setting) DFU
4628 Gain Range Ad Value: R (Factory Setting) DFU
4629 Gain Range Adj Value: G (Factory Setting) DFU
4630 Gain Range Ad Value: B (Factory Setting) DFU
4631 Gain Adj Value R DFU
SM 5-93 D059/D060/D061
4632 Gain Adj Value G DFU
4633 Gain Adj Value B DFU
4641 Loop Number: White Level DFU
4646 Error Flag Auto – Adj Scanner DFU
4647 Error Flag Auto – Adj Scanner DFU
4677 Gain Range Adj Value (Factory Setting) DFU
4680 Gain Range: Adj Value DFU
4690 White Level Peak Data DFU
4693 Black Level Data DFU
4800 FL Correction ON/OFF DFU
4803 Result FL DFU
4804 Result FL DFU
4820 Lamp Error Detection DFU
D059/D060/D061 5-94 SM
4901 Background Erase
Blue Original (Lighter)
Sets the strength of background blue erase when orange original mode is
020
selected.
[0 to 192 / 50 / 1]
A higher setting erases more background and a lower setting less.
Blue Original (Normal)
Sets the strength of background blue erase when the green original mode is
021
selected.
[0 to 192 / 72 / 1]
Blue Original (Darker)
Sets the strength of background blue erase when blue original mode is
022
selected
[0 to 192 / 100 / 1]
Service
Tables
4903 Image Quality Adjustment
These SP codes adjust the sharpness and granularity of printed images.
001 Independent Dot Erase: Text [0 to 7 / 0 / 1]

0: Softest
1: Soft Mode
002 Independent Dot Erase: Copy Original 4: Normal (Default)

6: Sharp Mode
7: Sharpest
SM 5-95 D059/D060/D061
4905 Gradation Processing Selection
4918 Manual Gamma
Text/Photo and Photo have different settings (Glossy Photo, Printed Photo, Copied Photo,
etc.) as shown in the screen below).
To display this screen: User Tools/Counter button ()> "Copier/Document Server
Settings"> "General Features"> "Original Photo Type Priority".
These features can be adjusted with SP4918.

Enter the SP mode and select SP4918.
Eight adjustments can be done independently for "Text" and "Photo" originals. Refer to the
table below.
D059/D060/D061 5-96 SM
Value
Area Adjusted on Original
Low (1) High (15)
Offset
H Density in light areas (highlights) Lighter Darker
M Density at center Lighter Darker
S Density of dark areas (shadows) Lighter Darker
IDmax Density of entire original Lighter Darker
Option
H Entire original background erase Weak Strong
M Entire original contrast Low High
S Not used --- ---
IDmax Not used --- ---
Service
Tables
4991 IPU Image Path Switching DFU
SM 5-97 D059/D060/D061
4993 Highlight Correction
001 Sensitivity Selection
Sets the level of sensitivity for the removal of shadows that can be caused with
originals that have been marked up with highlighter pens.
[0 to 9/4/1]
Lowering the setting reduces the removal effect, and raising the setting
increases the removal effect.
002 Range Selection
Sets the region where highlight removal is applied.

[0 to 9/4/1]
A lower setting increases the size of the region, and a higher setting reduces
the size of the region.
Adj Txt/Photo Recognition Level: High Compression PDF
Use this SP to adjust the copier capability to distinguish between text and photo
areas of images. This adjustment applies only to scanner applications using the
4994 high compression PDF mode.
[0 to 2/1/1]
0: Nearer text
1: Default
2: Nearer photo
D059/D060/D061 5-98 SM
System SP5-nnn Mode: 1
5.7 SYSTEM SP5-NNN MODE: 1
Paper Size
5019 Selects the paper size for the trays.

LT LEF: USA version
A4 LEF: Other versions
002 Tray 1
005 Tray 4
006 Tray 5
007 Tray 6
mm/inch Display Selection
Selects whether mm or inches are used in the display.

5024 Note: After selecting the number, you must turn the main power switch off and
Service
Tables
on.
Europe/Asia model: [0 = mm / 1 = inch]
American model: [0 = mm / 1 = inch]
Custom Size: Vertical

5040
Adjusts the vertical dimension of custom size paper for Tray 1. 'Custom size'
must be selected with SP 5019-2.
002 Tray 1
005 Tray 4
[0 to 297.0 / 297.0 / 0.1 mm]
006 Tray 5
007 Tray 6
SM 5-99 D059/D060/D061
System SP5-nnn Mode: 1 Rev. 06/25/2010
Custom Size: Horizontal
5041 Adjusts the horizontal dimension of custom size paper for Tray 1. 'Custom size'
must be selected with SP 5019-2.
002 Tray 1
005 Tray 4
[0 to 4320 / 2100 / 0.1 mm]
006 Tray 5
007 Tray 6
⇒ Accounting Counter
Selects the counter display.

NOTE: You can change the setting only one time.
5045 [0 to 2/ 0]
0: Total counter
1: Not used
2: Total counter and GPC counter: GPC counter is only used for Japanese
model. For other models, this mode cannot be used.
5047 Paper Display
001 Backing Paper Display
Determines whether the tray loaded with paper printed on one side is displayed
on the operation panel.
[0 to 1/0/1]
0: Not displayed, 1: Displayed
002 Punched Paper
Determines whether the tray loaded with punched paper is displayed on the
operation panel.
[0 to 1/1/1]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
D059/D060/D061 5-100 SM
5051 Toner Refill Detection Display
Enables/disables the toner refill detection display.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1] Alphanumeric
0: ON
1: OFF
Display IP Address
5055 Switches the banner display of MFP device display on and off.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
[OFF] ON
Coverage Counter Display
5056 NIA
[0 to 1/0/1]
0: Display off, 1: Display on
Service
Tables
Toner Remaining Icon Display Change
5061 Display or does not display the remaining toner display icon on the LCD.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ]
0: Not display, 1: Display
SM 5-101 D059/D060/D061
Part Replacement Alert Display
Enables/disables the appearance of the PM parts in the yield list on the operation
5062
panel. PM parts can be selected independently for display.
[ON] OFF
Note: SP5066 must be set to "1: Display".
002 Developer
003 #Drum Unit
004 Drum Pick-off Pawls
006 Cleaning Blade
007 Cleaning Brush
008 Drum Cleaning Unit Filter
009 #Charge Unit
010 Grid Plate
011 Charge Corona Wire
012 Cleaning Pad
013 Cushion
015 Pre-Charge Corona Wire
016 Pre-Charge Grid Plate
017 #Fusing Unit
018 Hot Roller Strippers
D059/D060/D061 5-102 SM
019 Hot Roller
020 Pressure Roller
022 Web Roll
023 Web Cleaning Roll
024 Web Brake Pad
025 Toner Suction Bottle
026 Toner Suction Motor
027 Tray 1 Roller Assembly
028 Feed Roller – Tray 1
029 Pick-up Roller – Tray 1
030 Separation Roller – Tray 1
Service
Tables
040 Transfer Belt
041 Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade
SM 5-103 D059/D060/D061
042 Toner Filter
043 ADF Transfer Belt
044 ADF Separation Roller
045 ADF Feed Belt
046 ADF Pick-up Roller
063 Toner Collection Unit
D059/D060/D061 5-104 SM
100 Blade Cradle
101 Blade
102 Glue Vat Unit
PM Parts Display
5066 Determines whether the PM parts button is displayed on the initial screen.
[*0: No Display] [1: Display]
Note: Individual PM parts can be selected for display or no display with SP5062.
Part Replacement Operation Type
Configures the PM parts display for either the customer engineer (Service) or
5067
user.
[*0: Service] [1: User]
Note: SP5066 must be set to "1: Display".
Service
Tables
002 Developer
003 #Drum Unit
006 Cleaning Blade
007 Cleaning Brush
009 #Charge Unit
010 Grid Plate
SM 5-105 D059/D060/D061
012 Cleaning Pad
013 Cushion
017 #Fusing Unit
019 Hot Roller
020 Pressure Roller
022 Web Roll
024 Web Brake Pad
D059/D060/D061 5-106 SM
040 Transfer Belt
042 Toner Filter
045 ADF Feed Belt
Service
Tables
SM 5-107 D059/D060/D061
100 Blade Cradle
101 Blade
102 Glue Vat Unit
Non-Std. Paper Sel.
Determines whether a non-standard paper size can be input for the universal
cassette trays (Tray 2, Tray 3)
5112
[0 to 1/1]
0: No
1: Yes. If "1" is selected, the customer will be able to input a non-standard paper
size using the UP mode.
D059/D060/D061 5-108 SM
5113 Optional Counter Type
Default Optional Counter Type
Selects the type of counter:

0: None
1: Key Card (RK3, 4)
2: Key Card Down
001
3: Pre-paid Card
4: Coin Lock
5: MF Key Card
11: Exp Key Card (Add)
12: Exp Key Card (Deduct)
Note: Items 1, 2, 3, 5 are for Japan Only
External Optional Counter Type
Enables the SDK application. This lets you select a number for the external
device for user access control.
Note: "SDK" refers to software on an SD card.
002
Service
[0 to 3/1]
Tables
0: None
1: Expansion Device 1
5114 Optional Counter I/F
This SP sets the machine for the MF Key Card Extension.

0: OFF, 1: ON
SM 5-109 D059/D060/D061
Disable Copying
Temporarily denies access to the machine. Japan Only

5118
[0 to 1/1]
0: Release for normal operation
1: Prohibit access to machine
Mode Clear Opt. Counter Removal
Do not change. Japan Only

5120 [0 to 2/ 0 / 1]
0: Yes. Normal reset
1: Standby. Resets before job start/after completion
2: No. Normally no reset
Counter Up Timing
Determines whether the optional key counter counts up at paper feed-in or at

5121
paper exit.
[0 to 1/1]
0: Feed count, 1: No feed count
Document: Set F-Size
There are presently three F-type sizes (8½ x 13, 8¼ x 13, 8 x 13). The APS
sensors are not sensitive enough to distinguish between these types. Use this
SP to select the F-type size that the customer uses most frequently so the ASP
5126
sensors can detect an F-type size accurately.
[0 to 2/0/1]
0: Foolscap 8 1/2 x 13
1: Folio 8 1/4 x 13
2: F 8 x 13
D059/D060/D061 5-110 SM
APS OFF Mode
This SP can be used to switch APS (Auto Paper Select) off when a coin lock or
5127
pre-paid key card device is connected to the machine.
[0 to 1/1]
0: On, 1: Off
Paper Size Type Selection
Selects the paper size type (for originals and copy paper). (The default setting
5131 depends on the setting of DIP SW 1 and 2 on the BCU.)
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: [JP]: Japan, 1: [NA]: North America, 2: [EU]: Europe
After changing the value, turn the main power switch off and on.
5148 Size Detection Off
This SP switches off paper size detection for the paper feed trays in the LCT.
Each tray can be selected independently. The number of trays displayed will
depend on whether the LCT and bypass unit are installed.
Service
Tables
005 Tray 4 (0: ON, 1: OFF)
006 Tray 5 (0: ON, 1: OFF)
007 Tray 6 (0: ON, 1: OFF)
Cover Feeder Size Change

5158
This SP sets the priority paper size setting for the cover interposer tray.
001 [0: A3] [1: 12x18]
002 [0: 8 1/2 x 13] [1: 81/2 x 13 [2: 8 1/4 x 13]
003 [0: 8 1/2x 14] [1: [8 1/2 x 13]
SM 5-111 D059/D060/D061
004 [0: 11x8 1/2] [1: 10 1/2 x 7 1/4
005 [0: 8 1/2 x 11] [1: 8 x 10]
006 [0: K] [1: DLT]
007 [0: 16K (267 x 195)] [1: 8 1/2 x 11]
008 [0: 16K (195 x 267)] [1: 11 x 81/2]
5160 Thick Paper Setting (0: OFF 1: ON)
Adjusts the machine for line speed with thick paper.

0: OFF
1: ON (Low Speed Mode)
2: ON (Low Speed Mode 2)
Notes:
D059: Do not change (90 cpm only).
D060: "1" selects 90 cpm. "2" setting has no effect.
D061: "1" selects 110 cpm, "2" selects 90 cpm
App. Switch Method
Controls if the application screen is changed with a hardware switch or a

5162
software switch.
[0 to 1/1]
0: Soft Key Set, 1: Hard Key Set
CE Login
If you will change the printer bit switches, you must 'log in' to service mode with
5169 this SP before you go into the printer SP mode.
[0 to 1/1]
0: Off. Printer bit switches cannot be adjusted.
1: On. Printer bit switches can be adjusted.
D059/D060/D061 5-112 SM
Rev. 02/05/2010 System SP5-nnn Mode: 1
5182 Not used on this model

⇒
Not used on this model
001
Not used on this model

002
TCRU: Set Machine DFU
5185 Determines whether the machine is TCRU compatible or not.

[*0: OFF] [1: ON]
PM Counter Print Out in UP
This setting determines whether parts without standard counts print in addition to
5187 the normal counter list
[0 to 1/0/1]
Service
Tables
0: No, 1: Yes
SM 5-113 D059/D060/D061
5188 Copy NV Version
Copies NV version to another NVRAM.

Note: NVRAM version management automatically initializes the NV for each
machine.
5190 Unit Life Target Change
This SP determines whether operators and skilled operators are allowed to make
changes in the Operator and Skilled Operator display screens on the machine
operation panel.
0: Changes allowed
1: No changes allowed.
5191 Mode Set
This setting determines whether the machine is allowed to move into energy
save mode..
1: Allowed
0: Not allowed
5193 External Controller Info. Setting
Selects the information setting for the type of external controller.
[0 to 10/ 0 / 1]
0: No external controller
1: EFI Controller
2: Ratio Controller
3: Egret Controller
4 to 10: Reserved (Do not select)
D059/D060/D061 5-114 SM
5195 Limitless SW
Selects the paper feed mode priority (productivity or tray). This SP is activated
only when a customer selects the "Auto Paper Select".
Productivity priority. Changes the feed station as soon as the machine
detects the priority tray even if paper still remains in the current tray.
Tray priority. This changes the feeding tray after the paper in the tray where
the machine has been feeding paper has run out of paper.
[0 to 1/0/1]
0: Productivity priority
1: Tray priority
5199 Paper Set After Staple End
Enables or disables feeding out of the finisher without stapling.

[0: OFF] [1: ON]
0: OFF"
Paper feeds out with stapling at the maximum number of the finisher stapling
when the machine gets a multiple printing job (over maximum number).
Service
Tables
1: ON
Paper feeds out without stapling at the maximum number of the finisher stapling
when the machine gets a multiple printing job (over maximum number).
5212 Page Numbering
003 Duplex Printout Left/Right Position
Horizontally positions the page numbers printed on both sides during duplexing.
[–10 to +10/1 mm]
0 is center, minus is left, + is right.
SM 5-115 D059/D060/D061
004 Duplex Printout High/Low Position
Vertically positions the page numbers printed on both sides during duplexing.
[–10 to +10/1 mm]
0 is center, minus is down, + is up.
5227 Page Numbering (Bates Stamp)
Change Page No. Display
This SP code determines whether the page number adjustment display is on or

220
off.
[0 to 1/0/1]
0: Display off, 1: Display on
221 Allow Page No. Entry
This SP specifies the number of digits to display for the entry of the starting page
number.
[2 to 9/9/1]
Zero Surplus Setting
This setting determines whether page numbers are prefixed with excess zeros
when the number is smaller than the number of assigned digits. For example,
222
with this setting on and 3 digits have been specified, the number "3" appears as
"003". With this setting off, the number "3" will appear as a "3" without the zeros.
[0 to 1/0/1]
0: No excess zeros, 1: Excess zeros displayed
D059/D060/D061 5-116 SM
Set Time DFU
Sets the time clock for the local time. This setting is done at the factory before
delivery. The setting is GMT expressed in minutes.
[–1440 to 1440/1 min.]
5302 JA: +540 (Tokyo)
NA: -300 (NY)
EU: +6- (Paris)
CH: +480 (Peking)
TW: +480 (Taipei)
AS: +480 (Hong Kong)
Summer Time
Lets you set the machine to adjust its date and time automatically with the
change to Daylight Savings time in the spring and back to normal time in the fall.
This SP lets you set these items:
Day and time to go forward automatically in April.
Day and time to go back automatically in October.
Set the length of time to go forward and back automatically.
Service
Tables
The settings for 002 and 003 are done with 8-digit numbers:
307 Digits Meaning
Month. 4: April, 10: October (for months 1 to 9, the first digit of

1st, 2nd 0 cannot be input, so the eight-digit setting for 002 or 003
becomes a seven-digit setting)
3rd Day of the week. 0: Sunday, 1: Monday
The number of the week for the day selected at the 3rd digit.
If "0" is selected for "Sunday", for example, and the selected
4th
Sunday is the start of the 2nd week, then input a "2" for this
digit.
SM 5-117 D059/D060/D061
The time when the change occurs (24-hour as hex code).

5th, 6th Example: 00:00 (Midnight) = 00, 01:00 (1 a.m.) = 01, and so
on.
7th The number of hours to change the time. 1 hour: 1
If the time change is not a whole number (1.5 hours for

8th
example), digit 8 should be 3 (30 minutes).
Enables/disables the settings for 002 and 003.

001 Setting [0 to 1/1]
0: Disable, 1: Enable
003 Rule Set (Start) The start of summer time.
004 Rule Set (End) The end of summer time.
D059/D060/D061 5-118 SM
Access Control DFU
5401 This SP adjusts the settings below when installing and SDK application.
Note: "SDK" is the "Software Development Kit". This data can be converted from
SAS (VAS) when installed or uninstalled.
103 Default Document ACL
Used to assign the default access user access privileges to their own documents
on the document server.
162 Extend Certification Detail
Logout without an IC card.

[0 to 1/0/1]
0: Not allowed (default)
1: Allowed
200 SDK1 Unique ID
Service
Tables
201 SDK1 Certification Method
210 SDK2 Unique ID
220 SDK3 Unique ID
User Code Count Clear

5404
Clears the counts for the user codes assigned by the key operator to restrict the
use of the machine. Press [Execute] to clear.
SM 5-119 D059/D060/D061
5411 LDAP Certification
004 Easy Certification
Determines whether easy LDAP certification is done.

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1] 1: On, 0: Off
005 Password Null Not Permit
Enabled only when SP5411-4 is set to "1" (On).

[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Password NULL not permitted.
1: Password NULL permitted.
5413 Lockout Setting
001 Lockout On/Off
Switches the local address book account lock on/off.

[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Off, 1: On
002 Lockout Threshold
Sets a limit on the frequency of lockouts for account lockouts.

[1 to 10 / 5 / 1/step]
003 Cancellation On/Off
Determines whether the system waits the prescribed time for input of a correct
user ID and password after an account lockout has occurred.
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Off (no wait time, lockout not cancelled)
1: On (system waits, cancels lockout if correct user ID and password are
entered.
D059/D060/D061 5-120 SM
004 Cancellation Time
Determines the length of time that the system waits for correct input of the user
ID and password after a lockout has occurred. This setting is used only if
SP5413-3 is set to "1" (on).
[1 to 999 / 60 / 1 min./step]
005 Counter Clear Time
Not used.
5414 Access Mitigation
001 Mitigation On/Off
Switches on/off masking of continuously used IDs and passwords that are
identical.
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Off, 1: On
002 Mitigation Time
Service
Tables
Sets the length of time for excluding continuous access for identical user IDs and
passwords.
[0 to 60 / 15 / 1 min./step]
5415 Password Attack
001 Permissible Number
Sets limit on the number of attacks on the system with random passwords to gain
illegal access to the system.
[0 to 100 / 30 / 1 attempt/step]
SM 5-121 D059/D060/D061
002 Detect Time
Sets the time limit to stop a password attack once such an attack has been
detected.
[1 to 10 / 5 / 1 sec./step]
5416 Access Information
001 Access Use Max Num
Limits the number of users used by the access exclusion and password attack
detection functions.
[50 to 200 / 200 / 1 users/step]
002 Access Password Max Num
Limits the number of passwords used by the access exclusion and password
attack detection functions.
[50 to 200 / 200 / 1 password/step]
003 Monitor Interval
Sets the processing time interval for referencing user ID and password
information.
[1 to 10 / 3 / 1 sec./step]
5417 Access Attack
001 Access Permissible Number
Sets a limit on access attempts when an excessive number of attempts are

detected for MFP features.
[0 to 500 / 100 / 1/step]
002 Attack Detect Time
Sets the length of time the frequency of access to MFP features are monitored.
[10 to 30 / 10 / 1 sec./step]
D059/D060/D061 5-122 SM
003 Productivity Fall Wait
Sets the wait time to slow down the speed of certification when an excessive
number of access attempts have been detected.
[0 to 9 / 3 / 1 sec./step]
004 Attack Max Number
Sets a limit on the number of requests received for certification in order to slow
down the certification speed when an excessive number of access attempts
have been detected.
[50 to 200 / 200 / 1 attempt/step]
5420 User Authentication
These settings should be done with the System Administrator.

Note: These functions are enabled only after the user access feature has been
enabled.
001 Copy
Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the copy
Service
Tables
applications.
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off
011 Document Server
Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the document
server.
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off
031 Scanner
Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the scanner
applications.
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off
SM 5-123 D059/D060/D061
041 Printer
Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the printer
applications.
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off
051 SDK1
Determines whether certification is required before a user can
061 SDK2 use the SDK application.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF
071 SDK3
5430 Auth Dialog Message Change
001 Message Change On/Off
002 Message Text Download
003 Message Text ID
[0 to 1/0/1
0: OFF
1: ON
D059/D060/D061 5-124 SM
5481 Authentication Error Code
These SP codes determine how the authentication failures are displayed.
001 System Log Disp
Determines whether an error code appears in the system log after a user
authentication failure occurs.
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: Off, 1: On
002 Panel Disp
Determines whether an error code appears on the operation panel after a user
authentication failure occurs.
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: Off, 1: On
5490 MF Key Card
Sets operation of the MF key card.
Service
Tables
[0 to 1/0/1]
1: Allowed
0: Not allowed
1: Certification executes with a user code (9999 9999). Printing executes and the
counter increments for the user code.
0: Certification executes without a user code but printing is cancelled.
SM 5-125 D059/D060/D061
PM Alarm
Sets the count level for the PM alarm.

5501 [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
0: Alarm disabled
The PM alarm goes off when the print count reaches this value multiplied by
1,000.
Jam Alarm Japan Only
Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are not
included). RSS use only
5504 [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 step]
0: Zero (Off)
1: Low (2.5K jams)
2: Medium (3K jams)
3: High (6K jams)
Error Alarm
5505
Sets the error alarm level. Japan only DFU
[0 to 255 / 50 / 100 copies per step]
5507 Supply Alarm
001 Paper Supply Alarm
Switches the control call on/off for the paper supply. DFU
0: Off, 1: On
0: No alarm.
1: Sets the alarm to sound for the specified number transfer sheets for each
paper size (A3, A4, B4, B5, DLT, LG, LT, HLT)
D059/D060/D061 5-126 SM
002 Staple Supply Alarm
Switches the control call on/off for the stapler installed in the finisher. DFU
0: Off, 1: On
0: No alarm
1: Alarm goes off for every 1K of staples used.
003 Toner Supply Alarm
Switches the control call on/off for the toner end. DFU
0: Off, 1: On
If you select "1" the alarm will sound when the copier detects toner end.
080 Toner Call Timing
Changes the timing of the "Toner Supply Call" via the NRS, when the following
conditions occur.
0: Toner is replaced (default)
1: Toner near end or End
128 Interval: Others
Service
Tables
132 Interval: A3
133 Interval: A4
134 Interval: A5
The "Paper Supply Call Level: nn" SPs specify the
141 Interval: B4 paper control call interval for the referenced paper
sizes.
142 Interval: B5
[00250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 Step]
160 Interval: DLT
164 Interval: LG
166 Interval: LT
172 Interval: HLT
SM 5-127 D059/D060/D061
5508 CC Call Japan Only
001 Jam Remains

Enables/disables initiating a call.
002 Continuous Jams [0 to 1/1]
003 Continuous Door Open
011 Jam Detection: Time Length
Sets the length of time to determine the length of an unattended paper jam.
[03 to 30/1]
This setting is enabled only when SP5508-004 is enabled (set to 1).
012 Jam Detection Continuous Count
Sets the number of continuous paper jams required to initiate a call.

[02 to 10/1]
013 Door Open: Time Length
Sets the length of time the remains opens to determine when to initiate a call.
[03 to 30/1]
5513 Parts Alarm Level Count Japan Only
Normal
001
Sets the parts replacement alarm counter to sound for the number of copies.
[1 to 9999 / 350 / 1]
DF
002 Sets the parts replacement alarm counter to sound for the number of scanned
originals.
[1 to 9999 / 350 / 1]
D059/D060/D061 5-128 SM
Parts Alarm
5514 Japan Only
Level
001 Normal [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
002 DF [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
SC/Alarm Setting
5515 With NRS (New Remote Service) in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an
SC call when an SC error occurs. If this SP is switched off, the SC call is not
issued when an SC error occurs.
001 SC Call
002 Service Parts Near End Call [0 to 1/1/1]

0: Off, 1: On
003 Service Parts End Call
004 User Call
Service
Tables
006 Communication Test Call
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
007 Machine Information Notice 0: Off
1: On
008 Alarm Notice
010 Supply Automatic Ordering Call

[0 to 1/0/1]
011 Supply Management Report Call
012 Jam/Door Open Call [0 to 1/1/1]
SM 5-129 D059/D060/D061
Individual PM Part Alarm Call
This SP sets an alarm to send a notice to the service center when one of the
seven service parts covered by the TCRU replacement procedures has reached
5516
the end or near end of service life.
Note: The service parts covered in the TCRU replacement procedures are: 1)
development unit, 2) pre-charge unit, 3) charge unit, 4) drum cleaning unit, 5)
PCU, 6) fusing unit, 7) fusing cleaning unit.
001 Disable/Enable Setting (0:Not Send 1:Send)
This SP switches this feature on/off.

Default 0: Not send.
004 Percent yield for triggering PM alert
Sets the percentage of yield (used service life) to trigger the PM alert.
Memory Clear
5801
Resets NVRAM data to the default settings. Before executing any of these SP
codes, print an SMC Report.
001 All Clear Initializes items 2 to 15 below.
002 Engine Clear
Initializes all registration settings for the engine and copy process settings.
003 SCS
Initializes default system settings, SCS (System Control Service) settings,

operation display coordinates, and ROM update information.
004 IMH Memory Clear
Initializes the image file system.

(IMH: Image Memory Handler)
D059/D060/D061 5-130 SM
005 MCS
Initializes the automatic delete time setting for stored documents.

(MCS: Memory Control Service)
006 Copier application
Initializes all copier application settings.
008 Printer application
Initializes the printer defaults, programs registered, the printer SP bit switches,
and the printer CSS counter.
009 Scanner application
Initializes the defaults for the scanner and all the scanner SP modes.
010 Web Service/Network application
Deletes the Netfile (NFA) management files and thumbnails, and initializes the
Job login ID.
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the
Service
Tables
DeskTopBinder software
011 NCS
Initializes the system defaults and interface settings (IP addresses also), the
SmartNetMonitor for Admin settings, WebStatusMonitor settings, and the
TELNET settings.
(NCS: Network Control Service)
014 Clear DCS Setting
Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.
015 Clear UCS Setting
Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service) settings.
SM 5-131 D059/D060/D061
016 MIRS Setting
Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report Service) settings.
017 CCS
Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control Service) settings.
018 SRM Clear
Initializes the SRM (System Resource Manager) settings.
019 LCS Clear
Initializes the LCS (Log Count Service) settings.
020 Web Uapl
NIA
021 ECS
Initializes the ECS settings.
Printer Free Run
Makes a base engine free run

5802 [0 to 1/0/1]
0: Release free run mode, 1: Enable free run mode
Return this setting to off (0) after testing is completed.
Finisher connectors should be disconnected and duplex mode should be off.
D059/D060/D061 5-132 SM
5803 Input Check: Decurl Unit Decurler (D457)
Displays signals received from sensors and switches. This is the input check for
the main machine.
050 Entrance Sensor
051 Exit Sensor
052 Soft Roller HP Sensor
053 Decurl Roller Set Sensor
055 Purge Tray Paper Sensor 1
058 Front Door Switch
Output Check
Service
Tables
5804
Turns on the electrical components individually for testing. This is the output
check for the main machine.
001 1st Pick-up SOL
002 2nd Pick-up SOL
003 3rd Pick-up SOL
004 LCT 1st Pick-up SOL
005 LCT 2nd Pick-up SOL
006 LCT 3rd Pick-up SOL
007 Bypass Pick-up SOL
008 1st Separation Roller SOL
SM 5-133 D059/D060/D061
009 2nd Separation Roller SOL
010 3rd Separation Roller SOL
011 LCT 1st Separation Roller SOL
012 LCT 2nd Separation Roller SOL
013 LCT 3rd Separation Roller SOL
014 Bypass Separation Roller SOL
015 1st Tray Lift Motor
016 2nd Tray Lift Motor
017 3rd Tray Lift Motor
018 Rear Fence Drive Motor
019 Tandem Tray Connect Solenoid
020 Front Side Fence Solenoid
021 Rear Side Fence Solenoid
022 Left 1st Tray Lock Solenoid
031 Drum Motor
032 Fusing/Exit Motor
033 Fusing Motor
034 Web Motor
035 Development Motor
036 Upper Toner Bottle Motor
037 Lower Toner Bottle Motor
038 Toner Bank Motor
D059/D060/D061 5-134 SM
039 Toner Supply Coil Clutch
041 Upper Bottle Cap Motor
042 Lower Bottle Cap Motor
043 Toner Collection Bottle Agitator Motor
044 Hopper Agitator Motor
045 Toner Cylinder Agitator Motor
051 Guide Plate Solenoid
052 LCT Guide Plate Solenoid
053 Duplex Inverter Gate Solenoid
054 Reverse Roller Solenoid
055 Inverter Guide Plate Solenoid
Service
Tables
056 Toner Recycling Shutter Solenoid
057 2nd Cleaning Blade Solenoid
058 Transfer Belt Lift Solenoid]
061 ID Sensor LED
062 Quenching Lamp
063 Charge Corona
064 Grid Plate
065 Development Bias
066 Transfer Belt Bias
067 Pre-Charge Grid
SM 5-135 D059/D060/D061
068 Charge Corona Grid
069 ID Sensor
070 PTL
081 Polygonal Motor Mirror Cooling Fan
082 Exhaust Fan (Low)
083 Exhaust Fan (High)
084 Drum Cooling Fan (Low)
085 Drum Cooling Fan (High)
086 Paper Cooling Pipe Fan1
087 Paper Cooling Pipe Fan2
088 Steam Removal Fan (Low)
089 Steam Removal Fan (High)
090 Development Unit Cooling Fan1
091 Development Unit Cooling Fan2
092 Duplex Entrance Cooling Fan
093 Duplex Cooling Fan
094 Cleaning Unit Cooling Fan
095 Toner Collection Cooling Fan
098 Laser Diode
099 Total Counter
101 1st Paper Feed Motor (Low Speed)
102 1st Paper Feed Motor (High Speed)
D059/D060/D061 5-136 SM
103 2nd Paper Feed Motor (Low Speed)
104 2nd Paper Feed Motor (High Speed)
105 3rd Paper Feed Motor (Low Speed)
106 3rd Paper Feed Motor (High Speed)
107 1st Transport Motor (Low Speed)
108 1st Transport Motor (High Speed)
109 2nd Transport Motor (Low Speed)
110 2nd Transport Motor (High Speed)
111 3rd Transport Motor (Low Speed)
112 3rd Transport Motor (High Speed)
113 Upper Relay Motor (Low Speed)
114 Upper Relay Motor (High Speed)
Service
Tables
115 Vertical Relay Roller (Low Speed)
116 Vertical Relay Roller (High Speed)
117 Registration Motor
121 4th Paper Feed Motor (Low Speed)
122 4th Paper Feed Motor (High Speed)
SM 5-137 D059/D060/D061
129 4th Grip Motor (Low Speed)
130 4th Grip Motor (High Speed)
136 7th Grip Motor High Speed)
137 4th Transport Motor (Low Speed)
138 4th Transport Motor (High Speed)
144 7th Transport Motor High Speed)
145 LCT Exit Motor (Low)
146 LCT Exit Motor (High)
151 1st Vertical Transport Clutch
152 2nd Vertical Transport Clutch
D059/D060/D061 5-138 SM
153 3rd Vertical Transport Clutch
154 LCT 1st Grip Clutch
155 LCT 2nd Grip Clutch
156 LCT 3rd Grip Clutch
157 Bypass Grip Clutch
158 Relay Clutch
159 LCT Relay Clutch
161 Inverter Gate Solenoid
162 Duplex Transport Motor1
163 Toner Supply Pump Motor
164 Toner Supply Roller Motor
165 4th Front Blower Fan
Service
Tables
166 4th Rear Blower Fan
171 Decurl Pressure Adjustment Motor
172 Transport Motor
173 Exit Guide Solenoid
174 Purge Tray JG Solenoid
202 Scanner Lamp 1
SM 5-139 D059/D060/D061
203 Scanner Lamp 2
204 Scanner Lamp Fan
205 Scanner Motor Fan
206 Scanner Fan
209 Paper Dehumidifier Fan (Main)
210 Transport Motor Cooling Fan (Main)
211 Power Pack Fan (Main)
Option Connection Check

5807
This SP displays whether the devices listed below are connected or not:
1: Connected, 0: Not connected.
001 ADF (1:Connect)
002 LCT (1:Connect)
003 FIN (1:Connect)
004 Decurler (D457) (1: Connected)
Machine Serial DFU
5811 This SP presents the soft keyboard used to enter the 11-digit number of the
machine. The allowed entries are "A" to "Z" and "0" to "9". The setting is done
at the factory, and should not be changed in the field.
D059/D060/D061 5-140 SM
5812 Service Tel. No. Setting
001 Service
Inputs the telephone number of the CE (displayed when a service call condition
occurs.)
002 Facsimile
Use this to input the fax number of the CE printed on the Counter Report (UP
mode).
003 Supply
Displayed on the initial SP screen.
004 Operation
Sales representative telephone number.
Service
Tables
SM 5-141 D059/D060/D061
5816 Remote Service
I/F Setting
Turns the remote diagnostics off and on.

001 [0 to 2/1]
0: Remote diagnostics off.
1: Serial (CSS or NRS) remote diagnostics on.
2: Network remote diagnostics.
CE Call
002
Lets the customer engineer start or end the remote machine check with CSS or
NRS; to do this, push the center report key
Function Flag
Enables and disables remote diagnosis over the NRS network.

003
[0 to 1/1]
0: Disables remote diagnosis over the network.
1: Enables remote diagnosis over the network.
SSL Disable
Controls if RCG (Remote Communication Gate) confirmation is done by SSL

007 during an RCG send for the NRS over a network interface.
[0 to 1/1]
0: Yes. SSL not used.
1: No. SSL used.
RCG Connect Timeout
008 Sets the length of time (seconds) for the time-out when the RCG (Remote
Communication Gate) connects during a call via the NRS network.
[1 to 90/1 sec.]
D059/D060/D061 5-142 SM
RCG Write Timeout
009 Sets the length of time (seconds) for the time-out when sent data is written to the
RCG during a call over the NRS network.
[0 to 100/1 sec.]
RCG Read Timeout
010 Sets the length of time (seconds) for the timeout when sent data is written from
the RCG during a call over the NRS network.
[0 to 100/1 sec.]
Port 80 Enable
Controls if permission is given to get access to the SOAP method over Port 80 on
011 the NRS network.
[0 to 1/1]
0: No. Access denied
1: Yes. Access granted.
013 RFU Timing
Service
Tables
RCG – C Registed
021 This SP displays the Cumin installation end flag.

1: Installation completed
2: Installation not completed
RCG – C Registed Detail
This SP displays the Cumin installation status.

022
0: Basil not registered
1: Basil registered
2: Device registered
SM 5-143 D059/D060/D061
Connect Type (N/M)
023 This SP displays and selects the Cumin connection method.

0: Internet connection
1: Dial-up connection
Cert. Expire Timing DFU

061
Proximity of the expiration of the certification.
Use Proxy
062
This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when the machine
communicates with the service center.
HTTP Proxy Host
This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for communication between
Cumin-N and the gateway. Use this SP to set up or display the customer proxy
063 server address. The address is necessary to set up Cumin-N.
Note:
The address display is limited to 127 characters. Characters beyond the
127th character are ignored.
This address is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
HTTP Proxy Port Number
This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for communication
064
between Cumin-N and the gateway. This setting is necessary to set up Cumin-N.
Note: This port number is customer information and is not printed in the SMC
report.
D059/D060/D061 5-144 SM
Proxy User Name
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification user name.

065 Note:
The length of the name is limited to 31 characters. Any character beyond the
31st character is ignored.
This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
Proxy Password
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification password.

066 Note:
The length of the password is limited to 31 characters. Any character beyond
the 31st character is ignored.
This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
Service
Tables
SM 5-145 D059/D060/D061
CERT: Up State
Displays the status of the certification update.

0: The certification used by Cumin is set correctly.
1: The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has been received from the
GW URL and certification is presently being updated.
2: The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the
successful update.
3: The certification update failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the failed
update.
4: The period of the certification has expired and new request for an update is
being sent to the GW URL.
11: A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue certification
setting is in progress for the rescue GW connection.
12: The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is being
067 notified of the certification update request.
13: The notification of the request for certification update has completed
successfully, and the system is waiting for the certification update request from
the rescue GW URL.
14: The notification of the certification request has been received from the rescue
GW controller, and the certification is being stored.
15: The certification has been stored, and the GW URL is being notified of the
successful completion of this event.
16: The storing of the certification has failed, and the GW URL is being notified of
the failure of this event.
17: The certification update request has been received from the GW URL, the
GW URL was notified of the results of the update after it was completed, but an
certification error has been received, and the rescue certification is being
recorded.
18: The rescue certification of No. 17 has been recorded, and the GW URL is
being notified of the failure of the certification update.
D059/D060/D061 5-146 SM
CERT: Error
Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update of
the certification.
0: Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress.
1: Request for certification update in progress. The current certification has
068 expired.
2: An SSL error notification has been issued. Issued after the certification has
expired.
3: Notification of shift from a common authentication to an individual certification.
4: Notification of a common certification without ID2.
5: Notification that no certification was issued.
6: Notification that GW URL does not exist.
CERT: Up ID
069
The ID of the request for certification.
Firmware Up Status
083
Displays the status of the firmware update.
Service
Tables
Non-HDD Firm Up
084
This setting determines if the firmware can be updated, even without the HDD
installed.
Firm Up User Check
This SP setting determines if the operator can confirm the previous version of the
085
firmware before the firmware update execution. If the option to confirm the
previous version is selected, a notification is sent to the system manager and the
firmware update is done with the firmware files from the URL.
Firmware Size
086
Allows the service technician to confirm the size of the firmware data files during
the firmware update execution.
SM 5-147 D059/D060/D061
CERT: Macro Version

087
Displays the macro version of the NRS certification
CERT: PAC Version

088
Displays the PAC version of the NRS certification.
CERT: ID2 Code

089
Displays ID2 for the NRS certification. Spaces are displayed as underscores (_).
Asterisks (*) indicate that no NRS certification exists.
CERT: Subject
090 Displays the common name of the NRS certification subject. CN = the following
17 bytes. Spaces are displayed as underscores (_). Asterisks (*) indicate that no
DESS exists.
CERT: Serial No.

091
Displays serial number for the NRS certification. Asterisks (*) indicate that no
DESS exists.
CERT: Issuer
092
Displays the common name of the issuer of the NRS certification. CN = the
following 30 bytes. Asterisks (*) indicate that no DESS exists.
CERT: Valid Start

093
Displays the start time of the period for which the current NRS certification is
enabled.
CERT: Valid End

094
Displays the end time of the period for which the current NRS certification is
enabled.
D059/D060/D061 5-148 SM
Selection Country
Select from the list the name of the country where Cumin-M is installed in the
machine. After selecting the country, you must also set the following SP codes for
Cumin-M:
SP5816-153
SP5816-154
SP5816-161
150
0: Japan 6: Italy
1: USA 7: Netherlands
2: Canada 8: Belgium
3: UK 9: Luxembourg
4: Germany 10: Spain
5: France
Line Type Authentication Judgment
Service
Tables
Touch [Execute].
Setting this SP classifies the telephone line where Cumin-M is connected as
either dial-up or push type, so Cumin-M can automatically distinguish the number
151 that connects to the outside line.
The current progress, success, or failure of this execution can be displayed
with SP5816 152.
If the execution succeeded, SP5816 153 will display the result for
confirmation and SP5816 154 will display the telephone number for the
connection to the outside line.
SM 5-149 D059/D060/D061
Line Type Judgment Result
Displays a number to show the result of the execution of SP5816 151. Here is a
list of what the numbers mean.
0: Success
1: In progress (no result yet). Please wait.
2: Line abnormal
152
3: Cannot detect dial tone automatically
4: Line is disconnected
5: Insufficient electrical power supply
6: Line classification not supported
7: Error because fax transmission in progress – ioctl() occurred.
8: Other error occurred
9: Line classification still in progress. Please wait.
Selection Dial/Push
This SP displays the classification (tone or pulse) of the telephone line to the
access point for Cumin-M. The numbered displayed (0 or 1) is the result of the
execution of SP5816 151. However, this setting can also be changed manually.
[0 to 1/0/1]
153
0: Tone Dialing Phone
1: Pulse Dialing Phone
Inside Japan, "2" may also be displayed:
0: Tone Dialing Phone
1: Pulse Dialing Phone 10PPS
2: Pulse Dialing Phone 20PPS
D059/D060/D061 5-150 SM
Outside Line/Outgoing Number
The SP sets the number that switches to PSTN for the outside connection for
Cumin-M in a system that employs a PBX (internal line).
If the execution of SP5816 151 has succeeded and Cumin-M has connected
to the external line, this SP display is completely blank.
154
If Cumin-M has connected to an internal line, then the number of the
connection to the external line is displayed.
If Cumin-M has connected to an external line, a comma is displayed with the
number. The comma is inserted for a 2 sec. pause.
The number setting for the external line can be entered manually (including
commas).
Dial Up User Name
Use this SP to set a user name for access to remote dial up. Follow these rules
156 when setting a user name:
Name length: Up to 32 characters
Spaces and # allowed but the entire entry must be enclosed by double
quotation marks (").
Service
Tables
Dial Up Password
Use this SP to set a password for access to remote dial up. Follow these rules
157 when setting a user name:
Name length: Up to 32 characters
Spaces and # allowed but the entire entry must be enclosed by double
quotation marks (").
Local Phone Number
161 Use this SP to set the telephone number of the line where Cumin-M is connected.
This number is transmitted to and used by the Call Center to return calls.
Limit: 24 numbers (numbers only)
SM 5-151 D059/D060/D061
Connection Timing Adjustment: Incoming
When the Call Center calls out to a Cumin-M modem, it sends a repeating ID
tone (*#1#). This SP sets the line remains open to send these ID tones after the
162
number of the Cumin-M modem is dialed up and connected.
[0 to 24/1/1]
The actual amount of time is this setting x 2 sec. For example, if you set "2" the
line will remain open for 4 sec.
Access Point
This is the number of the dial-up access point for Cumin-M. If no setting is done
163 for this SP code, then a preset value (determined by the country selected) is
used.
Default: 0
Allowed: Up to 16 alphanumeric characters
Line Connecting
This SP sets the connection conditions for the customer. This setting dedicates
the line to Cumin-M only, or sets the line for sharing between Cumin-M and a fax
unit.
[0 to 1/0/1]
164
0: Line shared by Cumin-M/Fax
1: Line dedicated to Cumin-M only
Note:
If this setting is changed, the copier must be cycled off and on.
SP5816 187 determines whether the off-hook button can be used to interrupt
a Cumin-M transmission in progress to open the line for fax transaction.
Modem Serial Number

173
This SP displays the serial number registered for the Cumin-M.
D059/D060/D061 5-152 SM
Retransmission Limit
Normally, it is best to allow unlimited time for certification and ID2 update
requests, and for the notification that the certification has been completed.
174
However, Cumin-M generates charges based on transmission time for the
customer, so a limit is placed upon the time allowed for these transactions.
If these transactions cannot be completed within the allowed time, do this SP to
cancel the time restriction.
FAX/TX Priority
This SP determines whether pushing the off-hook button will interrupt a Cumin-M
transmission in progress to open the line for fax transaction. This SP can be used
only if SP5816 164 is set to "0".
[0 to 1/0/1]
187 0: Disable. Setting the fax unit off-hook does not interrupt a fax transaction in
progress. If the off-hook button is pushed during a Cumin-M transmission, the
button must be pushed again to set the fax unit on-hook after the Cumin-M
transmission has completed.
1: Enable. When Cumin-M shares a line with a fax unit, setting the fax unit
Service
Tables
off-hook will interrupt a Cumin-M transmission in progress and open the line for a
fax transaction.
Manual Polling
200
No information is available at this time.
SM 5-153 D059/D060/D061
Regist: Status
Displays a number that indicates the status of the NRS service device.
0: Neither the NRS device nor Cumin device are set.
1: The Cumin device is being set. Only Box registration is completed. In this
201
status the Basil unit cannot answer a polling request.
2: The Cumin device is set. In this status the Basil unit cannot answer a polling
request.
3: The NRS device is being set. In this status the Cumin device cannot be set.
4: The NRS module has not started.
Letter Number
202
Allows entry of the number of the request needed for the Cumin device.
Confirm Execute
203
Executes the inquiry request to the NRS GW URL.
Confirm Result
Displays a number that indicates the result of the inquiry executed with SP5816
203.
0: Succeeded
1: Inquiry number error
2: Registration in progress
204
3: Proxy error (proxy enabled)
4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)
5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)
6: Communication error
7: Certification update error
8: Other error
9: Inquiry executing
D059/D060/D061 5-154 SM
Confirm Place
205 Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the GW URL in
answer to the inquiry request. Displayed only when the result is registered at the
GW URL.
Register Execute
206
Executes Cumin Registration.
Register Result
Displays a number that indicates the registration result.

0: Succeeded
2: Registration in progress
3: Proxy error (proxy enabled)
207
4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)
5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)
6: Communication error
7: Certification update error
8: Other error
Service
Tables
9: Registration executing
208 Error Code
Displays a number that describes the error code that was issued when either
SP5816 204 or SP5816 207 was executed.
Cause Code Meaning
-11001 Chat parameter error
Illegal Modem Parameter Chat

-11002 execution
error
SM 5-155 D059/D060/D061
Unexpected
-11003
error
Inquiry, registration attempted

-12002
without acquiring device status.
Attempted
registration
without
execution of
-12003
an inquiry
Operation Error, Incorrect and no
Setting previous
registration.
Attempted
setting with
illegal
-12004
entries for
certification
and ID2.
Attempted dial up overseas without

-2385 the correct international prefix for
the telephone number.
Not
Error Caused by Response supported at
-2387
from GW URL the Service
Center
Database
-2389 out of
service
D059/D060/D061 5-156 SM
Program out
-2390
of service
Two
registrations
-2391
for same
device
Parameter
-2392
error
Basil not
-2393
managed
Device not
-2394
managed
Box ID for
-2395 Basil is
illegal
Service
Tables
Device ID for
-2396 Basil is
illegal
Incorrect ID2
-2397
format
Incorrect
request
-2398
number
format
Instl Clear
209
Releases a machine from its Cumin setup.
SM 5-157 D059/D060/D061
CommLog Print
250
Prints the communication log.
5821 Remote Service Address Japan Only
RCG IP Address
Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote Communication Gate) destination for
call processing at the remote service center.
[00000000h to FFFFFFFFh/1]
NVRAM Data Upload
Uploads the UP and SP mode data (except for counters and the serial number)
5824
from NVRAM on the control board to an SD card.
Note: While using this SP mode, always keep the front cover open. This prevents
a software module accessing the NVRAM during the upload.
NVRAM Data Download
5825 Downloads data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine. After
downloading is completed, remove the SD card and turn the machine power off
and on.
D059/D060/D061 5-158 SM
5828 Network Setting
050 1284 Compatibility (Centro)
Enables and disables bi-directional communication on the parallel connection

between the machine and a computer.
[0 to 1/1]
0: Off, 1: On
052 ECP (Centro)
Disables and enables the ECP feature (1284 Mode) for data transfer.
[0 to 1/1]
065 Job Spool Setting
Switches job spooling on and off.

0: No spooling, 1: Spooling enabled
066 Job Spool Clear: Start Time
Service
Tables
This SP determines whether the job interrupted at power off is resumed at the next
power on. This SP operates only when SP5828 065 is set to 1.
1: Resumes printing spooled jog.
0: Clears spooled job.
069 Job Spool Protocol
This SP determines whether job spooling is enabled or disabled for each protocol.
This is an 8-bit setting.
0 LPR 4 BMLinks (Japan Only)
FTP
1 (Not 5 DIPRINT
Used)
2 IPP 6 Reserved (Not Used)
3 SMB 7 Reserved (Not Used)
SM 5-159 D059/D060/D061
090 TELNET (0:OFF 1:ON)
Disables or enables Telnet operation. If this SP is disabled, the Telnet port is

closed.
[0 to 1/1]
091 Web (0:OFF 1:ON)
Disables or enables the Web operation.

[0 to 1/1]
145 Operation IPv6 Link Local Address
This is the IPv6 local address link referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN
(802.11b) in the format:
"Link Local Address" + "Prefix Length"
The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.
147 Operation IPv6 Stateless Address 1
These SPs are the IPv6 status addresses (1 to 5) referenced on the Ethernet or
wireless LAN (802.11b) in the format:
"Status Address" + "Prefix Length"
D059/D060/D061 5-160 SM
156 IPv6 Manual Setting Address
This SP is the IPv6 manually set address referenced on the Ethernet or wireless
LAN (802.11b) in the format:
"Manual Set Address" + "Prefix Length"
158 IPv6 Gateway Address
This SP is the IPv6 gateway address referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN
(802.11b). The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of
16 bits each.
161 IPv6 Stateless Auto Setting
Enables or disables the automatic setting for IPv6 stateless.

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
236 Web Item Visible
Displays or does not display the Web system items.
Service
Tables
[0 x 0000 to 0 x ffff / 0 x ffff] 0: Not displayed, 1: Displayed
bit0: Net RICOH
bit1: Consumable Supplier
bit2-15: Reserved (all)
237 Web Shopping Link Visible
Displays or does not display the link to Net RICOH on the top page and link page
of the web system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Not display, 1:Display
SM 5-161 D059/D060/D061
238 Web Support Link Visible
Displays or does not display the link to Consumable Supplier on the top page and
link page of the web system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
239 Web Link 1 Name
This SP confirms or changes the URL1 name on the link page of the web system.
The maximum characters for the URL name are 31 characters.
240 Web Link 1 URL
This SP confirms or changes the link to URL1 on the link page of the web system.
The maximum characters for the URL are 127 characters.
241 Web Link 1 Visible
Displays or does not display the link to URL1 on the top page of the web system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
242 Web Link 2 Name Same as "-239"
243 Web Link 2 URL Same as "-240"
244 Web Link 2 Visible Same as "-241"
Initial Setting Mode Clear
5831 Push [Execute] to restore the initial settings of all SP codes to their initial
(factory) settings.
Note: This SP does not reset time settings or user tool settings.
D059/D060/D061 5-162 SM
HDD
5832
Enter the SP number for the partition to initialize, then press #. When the
execution ends, cycle the machine power off and on.
001 HDD Formatting (All)
002 HDD Formatting (IMH)
003 HDD Formatting (Thumbnail)
004 HDD Formatting (Job Log)
005 HDD Formatting (Printer Fonts)
006 HDD Formatting (User Info1)
007 Mail RX Data
008 Mail TX Data
009 HDD Formatting (Data for Design)
010 HDD Formatting (Log)
Service
Tables
011 HDD Formatting (Ridoc I/F) (for Ridoc Desk Top Binder)
5836 Capture Setting
Capture Function (0:Off 1:On)

With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot be
001 initialized, displayed, or selected.
[0 to 1/1]
SM 5-163 D059/D060/D061
Panel Setting
Determines whether each capture related setting can be selected or updated

002 from the initial system screen.
[0 to 1/1]
The setting for SP5836-001 has priority.
Print Back-up Function
003 Determines whether the print back-up function setting can be changed.
[0 to 1/1]
Reduction for Copy B&W Text

072
[0 to 6/1] 0:1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 6:2/3
Reduction for Copy B&W Other

073
[0 to 6/1] 0:1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 6:2/3
Reduction for Printer B&W

075
[0 to 6/1] 0 1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 6:2/3
Format for Copy Color DFU

081
[0 to 3/1] 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR, 2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
Format for Copy B&W Text

082
Format Copy B&W Other

083
Format for Printer Color DFU

084
Format for Printer B&W

085
Format for Printer B&W HQ

086
D059/D060/D061 5-164 SM
Default for JPEG

[5 to 95/1]
091 Sets the JPEG format default for documents sent to the document management
server with the MLB, with JPEG selected as the format. Enabled only when
optional File Format Converter (MLB: Media Link Board) is installed.
High Quality for JPEG
092 Determines the quality level of JPEG images for high quality sent to the
Document Server via the MLB (Media Link Board).
[5 to 95/60/1]
Low Quality for JPEG
093 Determines the quality level of JPEG images for low quality sent to the
Document Server via the MLB (Media Link Board).
[5 to 95/40/1]
Default Format for Backup Files
Sets the format for backup files created when the print backup function is used.
[0 to 4/0/1]
Service
Tables
094 0: TIFF
1: JPEG
2: J2K
3: PDF Single
4: PDF Multi
Default Resolution for Backup Files
Sets the resolution for backup files (JPEG, TIFF) when the print backup function
is used. This SP can be used only after JPEG or TIFF is selected for SP5836
094.
095
[0 to 6/2/1]
0: 1/1
1: 1/2
3: 1/4
6: 2/3 (Unavailable for some models)
SM 5-165 D059/D060/D061
Default User Name for Backup Files

096
Sets the user name when the print backup function is used.
Limit: 8 alphanumeric characters.
Default Compression for Backup Files
This SP sets the compression rate for JPEG backup files when the print backup
097
function is used. This SP operates only after SP5826 0094 has been set for "1"
(JPEG).
[0 to 2/0/1]
Back Projection Removal
098 Removes the ghost images transferred from the back sides of double-sided
originals.
1: Enable, 0: Disable
101 Primary srv IP address
Sets the IP address of the PC designated to operate as the primary capture

server (CS).
[000.000.000.000
102 Primary srv scheme
Sets the IO device of the primary CS remotely.

Max. characters: 6
103 Primary srv .port number
Use to set the IO device for the primary CS remotely.

[1 to 65535/80/1]
104 Primary srv URL Path
Use to set the IO device for the primary CS remotely

Max. characters: 16
D059/D060/D061 5-166 SM
111 Secondary srv IP Address
Sets the IP address of the PC designated to operate as the secondary capture

server (CS).
[000.000.000.000
112 Secondary svr scheme
Sets the IO device of the secondary CS remotely.

Max. characters: 6
113 Secondary svr port number

Max. characters: 6
114 Secondary svr port number

Max. characters: 6
120 Default Reso Rate Switch
Service
Tables
Sets the IO device of the CS remotely.
[0 to 1/ 0 / 1]
122 Reso: Copy (Mono)

Sets the IO device of the CS remotely.
124 Reso: Print (Mono) [0 to 6/ 3/ 1]
0: 600 dpi 1: 400 dpi 2: 300 dpi
127 Reso: Scan (Color)
3: 200 dpi 4: 150 5: 100 6: 75
128 Reso: Scan (Mono)
SM 5-167 D059/D060/D061
141 All Addr Info Switch
Expands the scope of used resources and performance. Switch this off if this
feature is not being used.
[0 to 1/1/1]
1: ON
0: OFF
142 Stand-by Doc Max Number
Expands the scope of used resources and performance. Switch this off if this
feature is not being used.
[0 to 1/1/1]
1: ON
0: OFF
5840 IEEE 802.11
Channel MAX
006 Sets the maximum range of the bandwidth for the wireless LAN. This bandwidth
setting varies for different countries.
[1 to 14/1]
Channel MIN
007 Sets the minimum range of the bandwidth for operation of the wireless LAN. This
bandwidth setting varies for different countries.
[1 to 14/1]
D059/D060/D061 5-168 SM
WEP Key Select
Determines how the initiator (SBP-2) handles subsequent login requests.

[0 to 1/1]
011 0: If the initiator receives another login request while logging in, the request is
refused.
1: If the initiator receives another login request while logging in, the request is
refused and the initiator logs out.
Note: Displayed only when the wireless LAN card is installed.
042 Fragment Thresh
Adjusts the fragment threshold for the IEEE802.11 card.

[256 to 2346 / 2346 / 1]
This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802.11 card is installed.
043 11g CTS to Self
Determines whether the CTS self function is turned on or off.

[0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 0: Off, 1: On
Service
Tables
044 11g Start Time
Selects the slot time for IEEE802.11.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0: 20 μm, 1: 9 μm
045 WPA Debug Lvl1
Selects the debug level for WPA authentication application.

[1 to 3 / 3 / 1] 1: Info, 2: warning, 3: error
SM 5-169 D059/D060/D061
Supply Name Setting

5841
Press the [User Tools] key. These names appear when the user presses the
Inquiry button on the User Tools screen.
001 Toner Name Setting: Black
008 Paste Name
011 Staple Std 1
012 Staple Std 2
013 Staple Std 3
014 Staple Std 4
021 Staple Bind 1
022 Staple Bind 2
023 Staple Bind 3
031 Ring Name (50/black)
032 Ring Name (50/white)
033 Ring Name (100/black)
034 Ring Name (100/white)
D059/D060/D061 5-170 SM
GWS Analysis Setting DFU

5842
This settings select the output mode for debugging information as each network
file is processed.
001 Setting 1
Default: 00000000 Do not change

Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the
DeskTopBinder software
002 Setting 2
Adjusts the debug program modesetting.

Bit7: 5682 mmseg-log setting
0: Date/Hour/Minute/Second
1: Minute/Second/Msec.
0 to 6: Not used
5844 USB
Service
Tables
Transfer Rate
001 Sets the speed for USB data transmission.

[Full Speed]
[Auto Change]
Vendor ID
002 Sets the vendor ID:

Initial Setting: 0x05A Ricoh Company
[0x0000 to 0xFFFF/1] DFU
Product ID
003
Sets the product ID.
[0x0000 to 0xFFFF/1] DFU
SM 5-171 D059/D060/D061
Device Release No.
Sets the device release number of the BCD (binary coded decimal) display.
004
[0000 to 9999/1]
Enter as a decimal number. NCS converts the number to hexadecimal number
recognized as the BCD.
005 Fixed USB Port
Selects the PnP name standardization mode.

[0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Disable
1: Level 1
2: Level 2
006 PnP Model Name
Specifies PnP name for USB device.
007 PnP Serial Number
Specifies PnP serial number for USB device.
100 Notify Unsupport
Displays or does not display USB unsupport message.

[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Not displayed,
Delivery Server Setting

5845
These are delivery server settings.
FTP Port No.

001
[0 to 65535/1]
D059/D060/D061 5-172 SM
IP Address (Primary)
002 Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under the
transfer tab can be used with the initial system setting.
[0 to FFFFFFFF/1]
Delivery Error Display Time
Use this setting to set the length of time that the message is shown when a test
006
error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application and an
external device.
[0 to 999/1]
IP Address (Secondary)
008 Sets the IP address that is given to the computer that is the secondary delivery
server for Scan Router. This SP lets you set only the IP address, and does not
refer to the DNS setting.
Delivery Server Model
Lets you change the model of the delivery server that is registered by the I/O
Service
Tables
device.
[0 to 4/1]
009
0: Unknown
1: SG1 Provided
2: SG1 Package
3: SG2 Provided
4: SG2 Package
SM 5-173 D059/D060/D061
Delivery Svr. Capability
Changes the functions that the registered I/O device can do.
[0 to 255/1]
Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits
Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible
010
Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible
Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function exists
Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists
Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists
Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender exists
Bit0 = 1 Sender specification required (if set to 1, Bit6 is set to "0")
Delivery Svr.Capability (Ext)
011 These settings are for future use. They will let you increase the number of
registered devices (in addition to those registered for SP5845 010).
There are eight bits (Bit 0 to Bit 7). All are unused at this time.
013 Delivery Server Scheme (Primary)
Max. character string: 6 characters
014 Server Port Number (Primary)
[1 to 65535 / 80 / 1]
015 Server URL Path (Primary)
Max. character string: 16
016 Server Scheme (Secondary)
Max. character string: 6 characters
017 Server Port Number (Secondary)
D059/D060/D061 5-174 SM
018 Server URL Path (Secondary)
Service
Tables
SM 5-175 D059/D060/D061
SP5-nnn Mode: 4
5.10 SP5-NNN MODE: 4
5846 UCS Setting
Machine ID (for Delivery Server)
Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory. The value
is only displayed and cannot be changed.
This ID is created from the NIC MAC or IEEE 1394 EUI.
001
The ID is displayed as either 6-byle or 8-byte binary.
6-byte
%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X
8-byte
%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X
Machine ID Clear (Delivery Server)
Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer directory.
002
Execute this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery server is unstable.
After clearing the ID, the ID will be established again automatically by cycling the
machine off and on.
Maximum Entries
Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle.

003
[2000 to 50000/1]
If a value smaller than the present value is set, the UCS managed data is
cleared, and the data (excluding user code information) is displayed.
Delivery Server Retry Timer
Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the
006
delivery server address book.
[0 to 255/1 s]
0: No retries
D059/D060/D061 5-176 SM
SP5-nnn Mode: 4
Delivery Server Retry Times
007 Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the
delivery server address book.
[0 to 255/1]
Delivery Server Maximum Entries
008 Lets you set the maximum number of account entries and information about the
users of the delivery server controlled by UCS.
[20000 to 50000/1]
LDAP Search Timeout

010
Sets the length of the time-out for the search of the LDAP server.
[1 to 255/1]
020 WSD Maximum Entries
Sets a limit on the number of WS-Scanner for WSD (Web Services Devices)
address book entries. You must cycle the machine off/on after changing this
setting for the new setting to take effect.
Service
Tables
[50 to 250/250/1]
021 Fold Auth Change
Authorizes changes on folders.
SM 5-177 D059/D060/D061
SP5-nnn Mode: 4
Addr Book Migration (USB -> HDD)
This SP moves the address book data from a data source via USB to the HDD.
You must cycle the machine off and on after executing this SP.
Turn the machine off.
Install the HDD.
Insert the USB storage device with the address book data into the device
connected via the USB interface.
Turn the machine on.
Do SP5846 040.
040
Remove the USB storage device from the USB device.
Notes:
Executing this SP overwrites any address book data already on the HDD.
We recommend that you back up all directory information before you
execute this SP.
After the address book data is copied to HDD, all the address book data is
deleted from the source USB memory device. If the operation fails, the data
is not erased from the source device.
D059/D060/D061 5-178 SM
SP5-nnn Mode: 4
Fill Addr Acl Info.
This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a basic

machine that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine is powered on
with the new HDD installed, the system automatically takes the address book
from the NVRAM and writes it onto the new HDD. However, the new address
book on the HDD can be accessed only by the system administrator at this
stage. Executing this SP by the service technician immediately after power on
grants full address book access to all users.
041
Procedure
Install the new HDD.
The address book and its initial data are created on the HDD automatically.
However, at this point the address book can be accessed by only the system
administrator or key operator.
Enter the SP mode and do SP5846 041. After this SP executes successfully, any
user can access the address book.
Service
043 Add Book Media
Tables
Displays the slot number of address book data location.
[0 to 30 / - /1]
0: Unconfirmed
1: SD Slot 1
2: SD Slot 2
4: USB Flash ROM
20: HDD
30: Nothing
Initialize Local Address Book

047
Clears all of the address information from the local address book of a machine
managed with UCS.
SM 5-179 D059/D060/D061
SP5-nnn Mode: 4
Initialize Delivery Addr Book

048
Push [Execute] to delete all items (this does not include user codes) in the
delivery address book that is controlled by UCS.
Initialize LDAP Addr Book

049
Push [Execute] to delete all items (this does not include user codes) in the LDAP
address book that is controlled by UCS.
Initialize All Addr Book
050 Clears everything (including users codes) in the directory information managed
by UCS. However, the accounts and passwords of the system administrators are
not deleted.
Backup All Addr Book

051
Uploads all directory information to the SD card.
Restore All Addr Book

052
Downloads all directory information from the SD card.
Clear Backup Info.
Deletes the address book uploaded from the SD card in the slot. Deletes only the
053 files uploaded for that machine. This feature does not work if the card is
write-protected.
Note: After you do this SP, go out of the SP mode, turn the power off. Do not
remove the SD card until the Power LED stops flashing.
D059/D060/D061 5-180 SM
SP5-nnn Mode: 4
Search Option
This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS local
address book.
Bit Meaning
0 Checks both upper/lower case characters
1 Japan Only
060
2 Japan Only
3 Japan Only
4 --- Not Used ---
5 --- Not Used ---
6 --- Not Used ---
7 --- Not Used ---
Complexity Option 1
Service
Tables
Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address
book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to upper case and sets the
length of the password.
062
[0 to 32/1]
Note:
This SP does not normally require adjustment.
This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group
password policy to control access to the address book.
SM 5-181 D059/D060/D061
SP5-nnn Mode: 4
Complexity Option 2
book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to lower case and defines the
063
[0 to 32/1]
Note:
Complexity Option 3
book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to numbers and defines the
064
[0 to 32/1]
Note:
Complexity Option 4
book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to symbols and defines the
065
[0 to 32/1]
Note:
D059/D060/D061 5-182 SM
SP5-nnn Mode: 4
FTP Auth. Port Settings
091 Sets the FTP port to get the delivery server address book that is used in the
individual authorization mode.
[0 to 65535/1]
Encryption Start
094 Shows the status of the encryption function of the address book on the LDAP
server.
[0 to 255/1] No default
Resolution Reduction
5847 1 through 5847 6 changes the default settings of image data sent externally
by the Net File page reference function. [0 to 2/1]
5847
5847 21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files controlled by
NetFile.
"Repository" refers to jobs to be printed from the document server with a PC and
the DeskTopBinder software.
Service
Tables
002 Rate for Copy B&W Text [0 to 6/1]
0: 1x
003 Rate for Copy B&W Other
1: 1/2x
005 Rate for Printer B&W 2: 1/3x
3: 1/4x
4: 1/6x
007 Rate for Printer B&W 1200dpi 5: 1/8x

6: 2/3x1
"6: 2/3x" applies to 003, 005 only.
Network Quality Default for JPEG
021 Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages. This
function is available only with the MLB (Media Link Board) option installed.
[5 to 95/1]
SM 5-183 D059/D060/D061
SP5-nnn Mode: 4
Web Service
5848 2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting. Setting of
5848
0001 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.
5848 100 sets the maximum size of images that can be downloaded. The
default is equal to 1 gigabyte.
0000: No access control

Acc. Ctrl.: Repository (only Lower 4
002 0001: Denies access to DeskTop
Bits)
Binder.
Acc. Ctrl.: Doc. Svr. Print (Lower 4

003
Bits)
Acc. Ctrl.: User Directory (Lower 4

004
Bits)
009 Acc. Ctrl.: Job Control (Lower 4 Bits) Switches access control on/off.
0000: OFF, 0001: ON
Acc. Ctrl: Device Management
011
(Lower 4 Bits)
021 Acc. Ctrl: Delivery (Lower 4 Bits)
Acc. Ctrl: User Administration (Lower

022
4 Bits)
Repository: Download Image Max.

100 [1 to 1024/1 K]
Size
210 Setting: Log Type: Job 1

Switches access control on/off.
211 Setting: Log Type: Job 2
0000: OFF, 0001: ON
212 Setting: LogType Access
213 Setting: Primary Srv DFU
D059/D060/D061 5-184 SM
SP5-nnn Mode: 4
214 Setting: Secondary Srv
Specifies the maximum size of the image data that the machine can download.
[1 to 1024 / 1024 / 1 MB /step]
215 Setting: Start Time
216 Setting: Interval Time -
217 Setting: Timing
Installation Date
5849
Displays or prints the installation date of the machine.
001 Display
The "Counter Clear Day" has been changed to "Installation Date" or "Inst.
Date".
002 Switch to Print
Service
Tables
Determines whether the installation date is printed on the printout for the total
counter.
[0 to 1/1]
0: No Print, 1: Print
003 Total Counter
Displays the total count from the day set with SP5849-001.
[0 to 9999 9999]
Bluetooth Mode
5851
Sets the operation mode for the Bluetooth unit. Press either key.
[0: Public] [1: Private]
SM 5-185 D059/D060/D061
SP5-nnn Mode: 4
Stamp Data Download
Push [Execute] to download the fixed stamp data from the machine ROM onto
the hard disk. Then these stamps can be used by the system. If this is not
5853
done, the user will not have access to the fixed stamps ("Confidential",
"Secret", etc.).
You must always execute this SP after replacing the HDD or after formatting
the HDD. Always switch the machine off and on after executing this SP.
Remote ROM Update
When set to "1" allows reception of firmware data via the local port (IEEE 1284)
during a remote ROM update. This setting is reset to zero after the machine is
5856
cycled off and on. Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a
parallel cable.
[0 to 1/1]
0: Not allowed, 1: Allowed
5857 Save Debug Log
On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF)
Switches on the debug log feature. The debug log cannot be captured until this
001
feature is switched on.
[0 to 1/1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Target (2: HDD 3: SD Card)
Selects the destination where the debugging information generated by the

002
event selected by SP5858 will be stored if an error is generated
[2 to 3 /1]
2: HDD, 3: SD Card
D059/D060/D061 5-186 SM
SP5-nnn Mode: 4
Save to HDD
005
Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the hard disk.
Save to SD Card
006
Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the SD Card.
Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB)
Takes the most recent 4 MB of the log written to the hard disk and copies them
009 to the SD Card.
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the
SD Card. Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be
copied one by one to each SD Card.
Copy HDD to SD Card Latest 4 MB Any Key)
Takes the log of the specified key from the log on the hard disk and copies it to
the SD Card.
010
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the
SD Card. Up to 4 MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be
Service
Tables
copied one by one to each SD Card. This SP does not execute if there is no log
on the HDD with no key specified.
Erase HDD Debug Data

011
Erases all debug logs on the HDD
Erase SD Card Debug Data
Erases all debug logs on the SD Card. If the card contains only debugging files
012
generated by an event specified by SP5858, the files are erased when SP5857
010 or 011 is executed.
To enable this SP, the machine must be cycled off and on.
SM 5-187 D059/D060/D061
SP5-nnn Mode: 4
Free Space on SD Card

013
Displays the amount of space available on the SD card.
Copy SD to SD (Latest 4MB)

014
Copies the last 4MB of the log (written directly to the card from shared memory)
onto an SD card.
Copy SD to SD (Latest 4MB Any Key)

015
This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information
written directly from shared memory) to a log specified by key number.
Make HDD Debug

016
This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD.
Make SD Debug
017
This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card.
Debug Save When
5858 These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the
destination selected by SP5857 002.
SP58583 stores one SC specified by number.
001 Engine SC Error (0:OFF 1:ON)
Stores SC codes generated by copier engine errors.
002 Controller SC Error (0:OFF 1:ON
Stores SC codes generated by GW controller errors.
D059/D060/D061 5-188 SM
SP5-nnn Mode: 4
003 Any SC Error (0:OFF 1:ON
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
004 Jam (0:OFF 1:ON
Stores jam errors.
5859 Debug Log Save Function
001 Key 1
002 Key 2
003 Key 3
004 Key 4
These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for
005 Key 5
functions that use common memory on the controller board.
006 Key 6 [-9999999 to 9999999/1]
Service
Tables
007 Key 7
008 Key 8
009 Key 9
010 Key 10
5860 SMTP/POP3/IMAP4
Partial Mail Receive Timeout
[1 to 168/72/1]
020
Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during
reception. The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is
not received during this prescribed time.
SM 5-189 D059/D060/D061
SP5-nnn Mode: 4
MDN Response RFC2298Compliance
021 Determines whether RFC2298compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail.

[0 to 1/1]
0: No, 1: Yes
SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement
Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the
022 validated account after the SMTP server is validated.
[0 to 1/1]
0: No. "From" item not switched.
1: Yes. "From" item switched.
SMTP Auth Direct Sending
Occasionally, all SMTP certifications may fail with SP5860 006 set to "2" to
enable encryption during SMTP certification for the SMTP server. This can
occur if the SMTP server does not meet RFC standards. In such cases you can
use this SP to set the SMTP certification method directly. However, this SP can
025
be used only after SP5860 003 has been set to "1" (On).
Bit0: LOGIN
Bit1: PLAIN
Bit2: CRAM_MD5
Bit3: DIGEST_MD5
Bit4 to Bit 7: Not Used
S/MIME: MIME Header Settings
Selects the MIME header type of an e-mail sent by S/MIME.

026 [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: Microsoft Outlook Express standard
1: Internet Draft standard
2: RFC standard
D059/D060/D061 5-190 SM
SP5-nnn Mode: 4
E-Mail Report
5866
This SP controls operation of the email notification function.
001 Report Validity
Enables or disables the e-mail notification to @Remote.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ]
0: Enable, 1: Disable
005 Add Date Field
Disables and re-enables the addition of a date field to the email notification.
[0 to 1/0/1]
Common Key Info Writing

5870
Writes to flash ROM the common proof for validating the device for NRS
specifications.
001 Writing Note: These SPs are for future use and currently are not used.
Service
Tables
003 Initialize
SD Card Appli Move

5873
Allows you to move applications from one SD card another.
001 Move Exec Executes the move from one SD card to another.
002 Undo Exec This is an undo function. It cancels the previous execution.
SM 5-191 D059/D060/D061
SP5-nnn Mode: 4
SC Auto Reboot
5875 This SP determines whether the machine reboots automatically when an SC

error occurs.
Note: The reboot does not occur for Type A and C SC codes.
001 Reboot Setting
[0 to 1/0/1]
0: On, 1: Off
On: default: 0 (Reboots automatically) The machine reboots automatically when
the machine issues an SC error and logs the SC error code. If the same SC
occurs again, the machine does not reboot.
OFF: 1 (Does not reboot automatically. Changing this setting to "0" sets the
machine to reboot automatically after an SC occurs.
Reboot Type
This setting determines how the machine reboots after an SC code is issued.
002 [0 to 1/0/1]
0: Allows manual reboot, 1: Automatic reboot
Option Setup
5878
This SP enables the DOS application (Data Overwrite Security). Do this SP after
installing Data Overwrite Security Unit.)
001 Data Overwrite Security
Enables the Data Overwrite Security unit.

Touch [EXECUTE] on the operation panel. Then cycle the machine off/on.
002 HDD Encryption
Enables the HDD Encryption Unit.

Touch [EXECUTE] on the operation panel. Then cycle the machine off/on.
D059/D060/D061 5-192 SM
SP5-nnn Mode: 4
5881 Fixed Phase Block Erasing DFU
5885 WIM Settings DFU
Doc Svr Acc Ctrl
Bit Meaning
0 Forbid all document server access (1)
1 Forbid user mode access (1)
2 Forbid print function (1)

020
3 Forbid fax TX (1)
4 Forbid scan sending (1)
5 Forbid downloading (1)
6 Forbid delete (1)
7 Reserved
Service
Tables
050 Doc Svr Format
051 Doc Svr
100 Set Signature
101 Set Encryption
200 Detect Mem Lock
201 Doc Svr Timeout
SM 5-193 D059/D060/D061
SP5-nnn Mode: 4
5887 SD Get Counter
This SP sends a text file to an SD card inserted in the SD card service slot.
The file is stored in a folder created in the root directory of the SD card
called SD_COUNTER.
The file is saved as a text file (*.txt) prefixed with the number of the
machine.
Insert the SD card in SD card Slot 2 (lower slot).
Select SP5887 then touch [EXECUTE].
Touch [Execute] in the message when you are prompted.
5888 Personal Information Protect
Selects the protection level for logs.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1}
0: No authentication, No protection for logs
1: No authentication, Protected logs (only an administrator can see the logs)
5893 SDK Application Couner
Displays the counter name of each SDK application.
001 SDK-1
002 SDK-2
003 SDK-3
004 SDK-4
005 SDK-5
006 SDK-6
D059/D060/D061 5-194 SM
SP5-nnn Mode: 4
5894 External Charge Unit Setting: Switch Charge Mode DFU
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
5898 HDD Pages
Changes the number of pages in LS (Local Storage) to match the number of

documents.
[0 to 2/0/1]
0: Standard, max. number of pages per job for LS management:
Copy application: 15000P1 per job
Printer application: 5000P1 per job
15000P per job (LS area)
20 000 per job (TEMP)
1: Maximum no of pages for ALS:
Copy application: 30,000P1
Printer application: 5,000P1
2: Maximum number of pages per 50,000P1 jogs for BLS
Copy application 2000P1
Service
Tables
Printer application 2000P
At next startup HDD is initialized, HDD stamp area also initialized.
5899 PM Double Count
This SP sets the PM counter to count double for paper longer than 420 mm.
[0 to 1/ 0 / 1]
0: OFF
1: PM registers a double-count for paper longer than 420 mm in the sub scan
direction.
SM 5-195 D059/D060/D061
SP5-nnn Mode: 4
Plug & Play Maker/Model Name
Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug & Play.
5907 This information is stored in the NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective, these
names should be registered again.
After selecting, press the "Original Type" key and "#" key at the same time.
When the setting is completed, the beeper sounds five times.
5913 Switchover Permission Time
If no key is pressed when there is an application with display control rights,

these SP settings allow the system to shift to the application standing by after
the specified time as elapse.
001 Print Application Timer
This SP switches the switchover permission timer on/off.

[0 to 1/ 1 / 1]
0: OFF
1: ON
002 Indication Application Timer
Sets the length of time to elapse before allowing another application to take
control of the display when the application currently controlling the display is
not operating because a key has not been pressed.
[3 to 30/30/1 s]
Mechanical Counter Detection
Displays whether the mechanical counter is installed in the machine.

5915 [0 to 2]
0: Not detected
1: Detected
2: Unknown
D059/D060/D061 5-196 SM
Rev. 09/30/2009 SP5-nnn Mode: 4
5967 Copy Server: Set Function
Enables and disables the document server. This is a security measure that
prevents image data from being left in the temporary area of the HDD. After
changing this setting, you must switch the main switch off and on to enable the
new setting.
[0 to 1/1]
0: ON, 1: OFF
Cherry Server
Selects which version of the Scan Router application program, "Light" or "Full
5974 (Professional)", is installed.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Light version (supplied with this machine)
1: Full version (optional)
⇒ Device Setting
5985 The NIC and USB support features are built into the GW controller. Use this SP
Service
Tables
to enable and disable these features. In order to use the NIC and USB
functions built into the controller board, these SP codes must be set to "1".
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OFF, 1: ON, 2: ON: Limited
When the "Function limitation" is set, "On board NIC" is limited
only for the @Remote or LDAP/NT authentication.
001 On Board NIC Other network applications such as

WebImageMonitor, @Remote, or LDAP/NT
authentication are not available when this SP is set to
"2". Even if you can change the initial settings of
those network applications, settings may not actually
work.
002 On Board USB [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: OFF, 1: ON
SM 5-197 D059/D060/D061
SP5-nnn Mode: 4
SP Print Mode SMC Print
In the SP mode, press Copy Window to move to the copy screen, select the
5990
paper size, then press Start. Select A4/LT (Sideways) or larger to ensure that
all the information prints. Press SP Window to return to the SP mode, select the
desired print, and press Execute.
001 All (Data List)
002 SP (Mode Data List)
003 User Program Data
004 Logging Data
005 Diagnostic Report
006 Non-Default (Prints only SPs set to values other than defaults.)
007 NIB Summary
008 Capture Log
021 Copier User Program
022 Scanner SP
023 Scanner User Program
D059/D060/D061 5-198 SM
System SP6-nnn Peripherals: 1
5.11 SYSTEM SP6-NNN PERIPHERALS: 1
6006 ADF Adjustment
Main Scan Registration: Front Side
001 Adjusts the printing side-to-side registration in the ADF mode for copying the front
side of the paper.
[-3 to +3 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
002 Main Scan Registration: Back Side
Adjusts the printing side-to-side registration in the ADF mode for copying the
back side of the paper.
[-3 to +3 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
No Registration Buckle Correction
This SP changes the registration reference data for the single sheet that follows
003
the command (C2H) that adjusted the registration amount of the front side of the
Service
paper in original no-buckle mode.
Tables
[-10 to +10 / 0 / 1]
Reg Buckle Adjustment: Front Side
This SP adjusts the amount of buckle of the single sheet that strikes the
005
registration roller after the COH command that adjusted the amount of buckle for
the front side of a duplex sheet in the buckle registration mode.
[-29 to +29 / 0 / 1]
Reg Buckle Adjustment: Back Side
This SP adjusts the amount of buckle of the single sheet that strikes the
006
registration roller after the C1H command that adjusted the amount of buckle for
the back side of a duplex sheet in the buckle registration mode.
[-29 to +29 / 0 / 1]
SM 5-199 D059/D060/D061
6007 ADF Input Check
001 Original Set Sensor
002 Original Width Sensor 1
005 Entrance Sensor
006 Registration Sensor
007 Exit Sensor
008 Inverter Sensor
009 DF Position Sensor
010 APS Start Sensor
011 Feed Cover Sensor
012 Exit Cover Sensor
013 Bottom Plate HP Sensor
014 Bottom Plate Position Sensor
015 Pick-up Roller HP Sensor
016 Feed-in Motor Encoder Pulse
017 Transport Motor Encoder Pulse
018 Feed-out Motor Encoder Pulse
019 Original Length Sensor
D059/D060/D061 5-200 SM
ADF Output Check

6008
Turns on each ADF electrical component on/off for testing.
001 Feed-in Motor(Fast)
002 Feed-in Motor(Slow)
003 Transport Motor (Forward)
004 Transport Motor (Reverse)
005 Feed-out Motor
006 Exit Gate SOL
007 Inverter Gate SOL
008 LEDs
009 Pick-up Motor
010 Bottom Plate Motor
Service
Tables
011 Paper Feed Clutch
ADF Test Mode

6009
Performs an ADF free run in two-sided original mode. Press "1" to start.
This is a general free run controlled from the copier.
6015 ADF Original Scale Setting
This SP adjusts the operation of an original striking the original scale to

correct original skew for originals shorter than A5 SEF.
The setting for the DOM scale should be left at "1".
The setting of the overseas (EXP) machine scale is "0". A5 SEF paper
does not strike the scale. If set to "0" A5 SEF strikes the scale.
[*0: EXP SCALE] [1: DOM SCALE]
SM 5-201 D059/D060/D061
ADF Motor Speed Auto Adjustment
After the [Start key] is pressed, the machine automatically adjusts the speeds of
6019
the ADF motors in the following order:
Feed-in motor > Transport Motor > Feed-out Motor (High) > Feed-out Motor
(Low)
Staple Position Adjustment
Use this SP to shift the position of the stapling done by the corner stapler of the
finisher (B830). This SP shifts the staple position forward and back across the
6100
direction of paper feed.
Use the [./*] key to toggle between + and –.
A larger value shifts the stapling position to shift forward.
A smaller value shifts the stapling position backward.
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 B5 SEF The settings are done for each paper size.
SEF denotes "Short Edge Feed".
006 B5 LEF
LEF denotes "Long Edge Feed".
007 DLT SEF [-2 to +2 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
008 LG SEF
009 LT SEF
010 LT LEF
011 Others
D059/D060/D061 5-202 SM
Punch Hole Position Adjustment
Use this SP to shift the position of the punching done by the Punch Unit B831.
This SP shifts the punching position left and right in the direction of paper feed.
There are three versions of the Punch Unit B831 1) NA 2/3 (2 or 3 hole
6101 punching selectable for the job), 2) NA 4 (4 hole punching only), and 3) EU 2/4
(2 or 4 hole punching selectable for the job)
[-7.5 to +7.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
Use the [./*] key to toggle between + and –.
A larger value shifts the punch holes away from the edge of the paper.
A smaller value shifts the punch holes toward the edge of the paper.
001 JPN/EU: 2-Hole
002 JPN/NA: 3-Hole
003 EU: 4-Hole
004 NA: 4-Hole
005 NA: 2-Hole
Service
Tables
006 JPN: 1-Hole
End Bind Jogger Adjustment
Use this SP code to adjust the positions of the jogger fences when the pages
are aligned (jogged) horizontally in the stapling tray for corner stapling in the
Finisher B830. These jogger fences close in on the sides of the stack on the
6102 paper tray. These side fences move in and out perpendicular to the direction of
paper feed.
The higher the setting, the narrower the jogger span and the smaller the
gaps between the fences and the edges of the paper. Stacking is tighter.
The lower the setting, the wider the jogger span and the wider the gaps
between the fences and the edges of the paper. Stacking is not as precise.
SM 5-203 D059/D060/D061
The settings below are done for each paper size. SEF denotes "Short Edge
Feed". LEF denotes "Long Edge Feed".
[-2.0 to +1.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 B5 SEF
006 B5 LEF
007 DLT SEF
008 LG SEF
009 LT SEF
010 LT LEF
011 Custom Size
Adjust Output Jog Position
Use this SP code to adjust the positions of the jogger fences when the pages
are aligned (jogged) horizontally in the stapling tray for stapling in the Booklet
Finisher D434. The jogger fences close in on the sides of the stack on the
paper tray. These side fences move in and out perpendicular to the direction of
6103
paper feed.
[-3 to +3 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
The higher the setting, the narrower the jogger span and the smaller the
gaps between the fences and the edges of the paper. Stacking is tighter.
The lower the setting, the wider the jogger span and the wider the gaps
between the fences and the edges of the paper. Stacking is not as tight.
D059/D060/D061 5-204 SM
The settings below are done for each paper size. SEF denotes "Short Edge
Feed". LEF denotes "Long Edge Feed".
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 A5 SEF
006 A5 LEF
007 B5 SEF
008 B5 SEF
009 DLT LEF
010 LG SEF
011 LT SEF
Service
Tables
012 LT SEF
013 HLT SEF
014 HLT LEF
015 Other
SM 5-205 D059/D060/D061
Pre Stack Adjustment

6104
[-3 to +3/0/0.1]
001 A4 LEF
002 B5 LEF
003 LT LEF
004 Others
6105 Adj Leading Edge Stopper Pressure
001 A4 LEF [-5 to +10 / 0 / 0.1]
002 B5 LEF [-5.0 to +2.0/0/0.11]
003 LT LEF [-5.0 to +10.0/0/0.1]
004 Other [-5.0 to +10.0/0/0.1]
Staple Jogging Repeat Settings
6106 Allows you to increase by 1 the number of times the stack is jogged on the
stapling tray.
[*0: DEFAULT] [1: +1]
D059/D060/D061 5-206 SM
Staple Tray Jog Off/On

6107
Allows you to switch jogging on the stapling tray off and on for the paper sizes
listed below. The default for each paper size is 0 (On)
001 A3 SEF 0:On 1:Off
002 B4 SEF 0:On 1:Off
004 A4 LEF 0:On 1:Off
007 B5 SEF 0:On 1:Off
008 B5 LEF 0:On 1:Off
009 DLT SEF 0:On 1:Off
010 LG SEF 0:On 1:Off
Service
Tables
011 LT SEF 0:On 1:Off
012 LT LEF 0:On 1:Off
013 HLT SEF 0:On 1:Off
014 HLT LEF 0:On 1:Off
015 Other
SM 5-207 D059/D060/D061
Finisher Input Check

6112
Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the finisher.
001 Entrance Sensor
002 Upper Exit Tray Sensor
003 Shift Tray Exit Sensor 1
004 Stapler Tray Exit Sensor
005 Shift Tray Lower Limit Sensor
006 Shift Tray Near Full Sensor
007 Feed-Out Belt HP Sensor
008 Jogger HP Sensor
009 Shift Tray Half-Turn Sensor 1
010 Stapler HP Sensor (Front/Rear)
011 Stapler HP Sensor
012 Staple Out Sensor
013 Staple Tray Paper Sensor
014 Front Door Open Switch
015 Punch Detection Sensor
016 Punch HP Sensor 1
017 Punch-out Hopper Full Sensor
018 Stapling Paper Height Sensor
019 Staple Mode HP Sensor
020 Jam Detection Sensor
D059/D060/D061 5-208 SM
021 Upper Tray Full Sensor
022 Stapler Rotation Sensor 1
023 Stapler Trimmings Hopper Full Sensor
024 Pre-Stack Sensor
025 Stack Plate HP Sensor (Center)
026 Exit Guide Open Sensor
027 Stapler Rotation Sensor 2
028 Staple Ready Sensor
029 Stack Plate HP Sensor (Front)
030 Stack Plate HP Sensor (Back)
031 Positioning Roller HP Sensor
032 Return Drive HP Sensor
Service
Tables
033 Stapling Paper Height Sensor
034 Shift Lower Limit Sensor (Large Paper)
035 Punch HP Sensor 2
036 Shift Jogger Sensor
037 Shift Jogger HP Sensor
038 Shift Jogger Retraction HP Sensor
039 Emergency Stop Switch
040 Top Fence HP Sensor
041 Bottom Fence HP Sensor
042 LowerTray Full Sensor (Z-Folded Paper)
SM 5-209 D059/D060/D061
043 Shift Tray Exit Sensor 2
044 Upper Tray Junction Gate HP Sensor
045 Staple Junction Gate HP Sensor
046 Pre-Stack Junction Gate HP Sensor
047 Pre-Stack Sensor (Right)
048 Pre-Stack Junction Gate Release HP Sensor
049 Shift Tray Half-Turn Sensor 2
050 Staple Trimmings Hopper Set Sensor
D059/D060/D061 5-210 SM
Finisher Output Check

6113
Turn on the electrical components of the finisher individually for test purposes.
001 OFF (Stop)
002 Upper Transport Motor
003 Shift Tray Exit Motor
004 Upper Tray Junction Gate Motor
005 Shift Tray Lift Motor
006 Jogger Motor
007 Shift Jogger Motor
008 Staple Hammer Motor
009 Punch Motor
Service
Tables
010 Staple Junction Gate Motor
011 Positioning Roller Motor
012 Stack Feed-Out Belt Motor
013 Shift Motor
014 Stapler Rotation Motor
015 Lower Transport Motor
016 Exit Guide Motor
017 Stack Plate Motor (Center)
018 Pre-Stack Junction Gate Motor
019 Pre-Stack Junction Gate Release Motor
SM 5-211 D059/D060/D061
020 Stack Plate Motor (Front)
021 Stack Plate Motor (Rear)
022 Stacking Roller Motor
023 Stacking Roller Drag Motor
024 Shift Jogger Motor
025 Shift Jogger Lift Motor
026 Jogger Top Fence Motor
027 Jogger Bottom Fence Motor
028 Lower Transport Motor
029 Upper Tray Exit Motor
030 Positioning Transport Motor
031 Pre-Stack Transport Motor
032 Staple Trimming Shooter Solenoid
6114 Finisher Free Run
001 Free Run 1
System free run. A4 LEF at 90 ppm, with simulated staple mode.
002 Free Run 2
Free run for durability testing. All motors and solenoids operate to simulate full
staple mode run for durability testing.
003 Free Run 3
Shipping free run. Simulates standby conditions during shipping.
D059/D060/D061 5-212 SM
004 Free Run 4
Shift free run. A4 LEF at 90 ppm with simulated output jogging with the shift
jogger unit mounted on the side of the finisher.
Adjust Booklet Stapling Position (D434)

6200
Use this SP to adjust the stapling position of the booklet stapler when paper is
stapled and folded in the Booklet Finisher.
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 B5 SEF
[-2 to +2/0/0.2 mm]
005 12 x 18 SEF When viewing the open booklet:
+ Value: Shifts staple position right .
006 13 x 19 SEF
- Value: Shifts staple position left .
Service
Tables
007 DLT
008 LG
009 LT SEF
011 Other
Adjust Booklet Fold Position (D434)

6201
This SP corrects the folding position when paper is stapled and folded in the
Booklet Finisher.
001 A3 SEF [-3 to +2/0/0.2 mm]

When viewing the open booklet:
002 B4 SEF + Value: Shifts staple position right

- Value: Shifts staple position left.
SM 5-213 D059/D060/D061
003 A4 SEF
004 B5 SEF
005 12 x 18 SEF
006 13 x 19 SEF
007 DLT
008 LG
009 LT SEF
011 Other
Fine Adj Booklet Jog Fence Pos (D434)
6202 This SP adjusts the distance between the jogger fences and the sides of the
stack on the finisher stapling tray in the Booklet Finisher. The adjustment is done
perpendicular to the direction of paper feed.
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
[-0.5 to +0.5/0/0.1 mm]
004 B5 SEF
+ Value: Increases distance between jogger fences and the
005 12x18 SEF sides of the stack.
- Value: Decreases the distance between the jogger fences
006 13x19 SEF
and the sides of the stack.
007 DLT
008 LG
009 LT SEF
D059/D060/D061 5-214 SM
011 Other
6205 Booklet Stapler Jog Pawl Adjust (D434)
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 B5 SEF
005 12 x 18 SEF
[-3 to +3 / 0 / 0.2]
006 13 x 19 SEF
007 DLT
008 LG
009 LT SEF
011 Other
Service
Tables
SM 5-215 D059/D060/D061
6208 Staple Position Adjustment (D434)
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 B5 SEF
006 B5 LEF
007 DLT
[-1 + 1 /0 / 0.5 mm]
008 LG
009 LT SEF
010 LT LEF
011 8-Kai SEF
012 16-Kai SEF
013 16-Kai LEF
015 Other
D059/D060/D061 5-216 SM
6209 Punch Position Adjust: Sub Scan (D434)
001 2-Hole EU/JPN
002 3-Hole NA
003 4-Hole EU [-3.5 +3.5 / 0 / 0.5]
004 4-Hole Scandinavia
005 2-Hole NA
6210 Punch Position Adjust: Main Scan (D434)
001 2-Hole EU/JPN
002 3-Hole NA
003 4-Hole EU [-3 to +3 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
004 4-Hole Scandinavia
005 2-Hole NA
Service
Tables
SM 5-217 D059/D060/D061
6211 End Bind Jogger Adjustment (D434)
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 B5 SEF
006 B5 LEF
007 DLT
[-3 to +3 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
008 LG
009 LT SEF
010 LT LEF
011 8-Kai SEF
012 16-Kai SEF
013 16-Kai LEF
015 Other
D059/D060/D061 5-218 SM
6212 Adjust Output Jog Position (D434)
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 A5 SEF
006 A5 LEF
007 B5 SEF
008 B5 LEF [-2 to +2 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
009 DLT
010 LG
011 LT SEF
Service
Tables
012 LT LEF
013 HLT SEF
014 HLT LEF
016 Other
SM 5-219 D059/D060/D061
6213 Pre Stack Adjustment (D434)
001 A3 SEF
[0 to 2 / 2/ 1 Sheet]
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
[0 to 5 / 5 / 1 Sheet]
007 B5 SEF
008 B5 LEF
009 DLT
010 LG
011 LTSEF [0 to 2 / 2/ 1 Sheet]
012 LT LEF
013 8-Kai SEF
014 16-Kai SEF
015 16-Kai LEF [0 to 5 / 5 / 1 Sheet]
016 Other
D059/D060/D061 5-220 SM
6214 Adj Leading Edge Stopper Pressure (D434)
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 B5 SEF
006 B5 LEF
007 DLT
[-2.5 to +2.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
008 LG
009 LT SEF
010 LT LEF
011 8-Kai SEF
Service
Tables
012 16-Kai SEF
013 16-Kai LEF
015 Other
6215 Staple Jogging Repeat Setting (D434)
[0 to 1/ 0 / 1]
[0: Default]
[1: High Precision]
SM 5-221 D059/D060/D061
6216 Staple Tray Jog Off/On (D434)
001 A3 SEF 0: ON 1: OFF
002 B4 SEF 0: ON 1: OFF
003 A4 SEF 0: ON 1: OFF
004 A4 LEF 0: ON 1: OFF
005 A5 SEF 0: ON 1: OFF
006 A5 LEF 0: ON 1: OFF
007 B5 SEF 0: ON 1: OFF
008 B5 LEF 0: ON 1: OFF
009 DLT 0: ON 1: OFF
010 LG 0: ON 1: OFF
011 LT SEF 0: ON 1: OFF
012 LT LEF 0: ON 1: OFF
013 HLT SEF 0: ON 1: OFF
014 HLT LEF 0: ON 1: OFF
016 Other 0: ON 1: OFF
6217 Top/Bottom Jog Adjustment (D434)
[-10 to +10/ 0 / 5 deg.]

-10, -5, 0, +5, +10
D059/D060/D061 5-222 SM
Booklet Finisher Input Check (D434)

6218
Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the booklet
finisher.
001 Finisher Entrance Sensor
002 Pre-Stack Paper Sensor
003 Pre-Stack Roller HP Sensor
004 Proof Tray JG HP Sensor
005 Stack JG HP Sensor
006 Proof Tray Exit Sensor
007 Proof Tray Full Sensor
008 Punch Vertical Registration Sensor
009 Punch Side-to-Side Registration Sensor
010 Punch Blade HP Sensor
Service
Tables
011 Punch Unit HP Sensor
012 Punch Switch
013 Punch Hopper Full Sensor
014 Punch Set Sensor
015 Stack Plate HP Sensor: Front
016 Stack Plate HP Sensor: Center
017 Stack Plate HP Sensor: Rear
018 Corner Stapler HP Sensor
019 Stapler Rotation HP Sensor: Front
SM 5-223 D059/D060/D061
020 Stapler Rotation HP Sensor: Rear
021 Bottom Fence HP Sensor
022 Jogger Fence HP Sensor: Front
023 Jogger Fence HP Sensor: Rear
025 Top Fence HP Sensor
026 Stack Feed-Out Belt HP Sensor
027 Stapling Tray Paper Sensor
028 Corner Stapler HP Sensor
029 Staple End Sensor
030 Self-Limit Sensor
031 Staple Trimmings Hopper Set Sensor
032 Staple Trimmings Hopper Full Sensor
033 Stapling Tray Entrance Sensor
034 Stack Transport Unit HP Sensor
035 Stack JG HP Sensor
036 Booklet Top Fence HP Sensor
037 Booklet Stapler Clamp Roller HP Sensor
038 Fold Plate Cam HP Sensor
039 Fold Plate HP Sensor
040 Booklet Stapler Side Fence HP Sensor (Front)
041 Booklet Stapler Side Fence HP Sensor (Rear)
D059/D060/D061 5-224 SM
042 Booklet Stapler Bottom Fence HP Sensorr
043 Fold Unit Entrance Sensor
044 Booklet Stapler Entrance Sensor
045 Fold Unit Entrance Sensor
046 Booklet Stapler Staple End Sensor: Front
047 Booklet Stapler Staple End Sensor: Rear
048 Booklet Tray Full Sensor: Upper
049 Booklet Tray Full Sensor: Lower
050 Shift Tray Exit Sensor: Long
051 Shift Tray Exit Sensor: Short
052 Exit Guide HP Sensor
053 Drag Roller HP Sensor
Service
Tables
054 Shift Tray Upper Limit Switch
055 Shift Tray HP Sensor: Front
056 Shift Tray HP Sensor: Rear
057 Paper Height Sensor: Staple
058 Paper Height Sensor: Shift
059 Paper Height Sensor: Z-Fold
060 Paper Height Sensor: TE
061 Shift Tray Full Sensor: 2500
SM 5-225 D059/D060/D061
065 Shift Tray Emergency Stop Switch
066 Shift Tray Jogger HP Sensor
067 Shift Jogger Fence Retract HP Sensor
068 Shift Tray Jogger HP Sensor
069 Front Door Switch
070 Punch Type 1
071 Punch Type 2
072 Staple Tray Set Sensor
073 Sub Board Set Sensor
074 Reserved
D059/D060/D061 5-226 SM
6219 Finisher Output Check (D434)
001 Entrance Motor
003 Proof Tray Vertical Transport Motor
004 Pre-stack Release Motor
005 Pre-stack Motor
006 Shift JG Motor
007 Stapler JG Motor
008 Proof Tray Exit Motor
009 Horizontal Transport Motor
010 Punch Movement Motor
Service
Tables
011 Punch Switch Motor
012 Punch Drive Motor
013 Stapling Tray Entrance Motor
014 Stack Plate Motor: Front
015 Stack Plate Motor: Center
016 Stack Plate Motor: Rear
017 Punch S-to-S Registration: CIS Lamp
018 Stapler Rotation Motor
019 Stapler Movement Motor
020 Bottom Fence Lift Motor
SM 5-227 D059/D060/D061
021 Front Jogger Fence Motor
022 Rear Jogger Fence Motor
023 Positioning Roller Rotation Motor
025 Stack Feed-out Belt Motor
026 Top Fence Motor
027 Shutter Solenoid
028 Booklet Stapler Motor
029 Stack Transport Motor
030 Stack JG Motor
031 Stack Transport Motor
032 Reserved
033 Booklet Stapler Clamp Roller Motor
034 Booklet Stapler Bottom Fence Motor
035 Booklet Stapler Side Fence Motor
036 Booklet Stapler Top Fence Motor
037 Booklet Stapler Motor
038 Fold Roller Motor
039 Fold Plate Motor
040 Shift Tray Exit Motor
041 Shift Motor
042 Drag Drive Motor
D059/D060/D061 5-228 SM
043 Drag Roller Motor
044 Exit Guide Motor
045 Shift Tray Lift Motor
046 Shift Tray Jogger Fence Motor
047 Shift Tray Jogger Fence Retraction Motor
6220 Finisher Free Run (D434)
001 Finisher Free Run 1
Free run for durability testing. All motors and solenoids operate to simulate
full staple mode run for durability testing.
Service
Tables
SM 5-229 D059/D060/D061
6222 Registration Buckle Adjustment (D434)
001 A4 LEF
002 A5 SEF
003 A5 LEF
004 B5 LEF
[-2 to +2 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
005 LT LEF
006 HLT SEF
007 HLT LEF
008 Other
6309 Input Check: Folder (D454)
001 Entrance Sensor
002 Entrance JG HP Sensor
004 Registration Sensor
005 Dynamic Roller HP Sensor
006 Registration Roller HP Sensor
007 Fold Plate HP Sensor
008 Jogger Fence HP Sensor
010 1st Stopper Paper Sensor
011 1st Stopper HP Sensor
012 2nd Stopper Paper Sensor
D059/D060/D061 5-230 SM
013 2nd Stopper HP Sensor
014 3rd Stopper Paper Sensor
015 3rd Stopper HP Sensor
016 Direct-Send JG HP Sensor
017 FM6 Pawl HP Sensor
018 Top Tray Paper Path Sensor
019 Top Tray Exit Sensor
020 Horizontal Path Exit Sensor
021 Top Tray Full Sensor (E)
023 Front Door Switch (SW1)
024 Horizontal Path Paper Sensor
025 Vertical Path Paper Sensor
Service
Tables
026 Bypass Entrance Paper Sensor
027 Bypass Exit Paper Sensor
6310 Output Check: Folder (D454)
002 Top Tray Transport Motor
003 Top Tray Exit Motor
004 Dynamic Roller Transport Motor
005 Registration Roller Transport Motor
007 Entrance JG Motor
SM 5-231 D059/D060/D061
008 1st Stopper Motor
009 2nd Stopper Motor
010 3rd Stopper Motor
011 Dynamic Roller Lift Motor
012 Registration Roller Release Motor
013 Fold Plate Motor
014 Jogger Fence Motor
016 Direct-Send JG Motor
017 FM6 Pawl Motor
018 1st Fold Motor
019 2nd Fold Motor
020 Crease Motor
021 Bypass JG Solenoid
022 Exit JG Solenoid
023 Top Tray JG Solenoid
024 LE Stop Pawl Solenoid
025 Reverse JG Solenoid
D059/D060/D061 5-232 SM
6311 Folder Free Run (D454)
001 Free Run 1
002 Free Run 2
Free run for durability testing. All motors and solenoids operate to simulate
full staple mode run for durability testing.
003 Free Run 3
004 Free Run 4
6324 Jogger Fence Position Adjust (D454)
Service
Tables
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 DLT SEF
005 LG SEF [+1 to 1 /0/ 0.5 mm]
006 LT SEF
007 12x18
008 8-Kai
009 B5 SEF
SM 5-233 D059/D060/D061
019 Other
6325 Registration Buckle Adjust (D454)
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 DLT SEF
005 LG SEF
[+1 to 1 /0/ 0.5 mm]
006 LT SEF
007 12x18
008 8-Kai
009 B5 SEF
019 Other
6326 Registration Buckle Adjust Select (D454)
[0: With Buckle Control]

[1: Without Buckle Control]
D059/D060/D061 5-234 SM
6400 Input Check: Cvr Inserter (B835)
001 1st Paper Feed Sensor
002 2nd Paper Feed Sensor
003 1st Transport Roller
004 2nd Transport Roller
005 1st Vertical Transport Sensor
006 2nd Vertical Transport Sensor
007 Output Sensor
008 Entrance Sensor
009 Exit Sensor
010 1st Pick-up Roller HP Sensor
011 2nd Pick-up Roller HP Sensor
Service
Tables
012 1st Upper Limit Sensor
013 2nd Upper Limit Sensor
014 1st Lower Limit Sensor
015 2nd Lower Limit Sensor
016 1st Paper Near End Sensor
017 2nd Paper Near End Sensor
018 1st Paper End Sensor
019 2nd Paper End Sensor
020 1st Paper Length Sensor
021 2nd Paper Length Sensor
SM 5-235 D059/D060/D061
022 1st Paper Width Sensor 1
027 2nd Paper Width Sensor 1
032 1st Feed Cover Sensor
033 2nd Feed Cover Sensor
034 Cover Vertical Transport Switch
035 Front Door Open Switch
6401 Output Check: Cvr Inserter (B835)
Turn on the electrical components of the cover interposer tray individually for
test purposes.
001 OFF (Stop)
002 1st Pick-up Motor
003 2nd Pick-up Motor
004 1st Paper Feed Motor
D059/D060/D061 5-236 SM
005 2nd Paper Feed Motor
006 1st Transport Motor
007 2nd Transport Motor
008 Vertical Transport Motor
6500 Punch Adjust Ring Binder (D392)
[-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
001 A4 LEF
002 LT LEF
6501 Paddle Position Adjustment Ring Binder (D392)
[-1.5 to + 1.5 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
Service
Tables
6502 Adjust Binding Position 1 Ring Binder (D392)
001 A4 LEF
[-1 to +1 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
002 LT LEF
6503 Adjust Binding Position 2 Ring Binder (D392)
001 A4 LEF
[-1 to +1 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
002 LT LEF
SM 5-237 D059/D060/D061
6504 Adj Jog: Punching Ring Binder (D392)
Shifts the punch hole position horizontally (front-to-rear, rear-to-front)

This SP must be adjusted after replacement of one or more of the following items:
Ring binder main board
Binder unit control board
Pre-punch side jogger assembly
Pre-punch jogger HP sensor (S301)
Notes:
The correct value for this setting is written on the label attached to the pre-punch
jog unit. The value must be divided by "10". For example, "19" is actually "1.9
mm)
001 A4 LEF
[-4 to +4/0/0.1 mm]
002 LT LEF
Adj Jog: Paddle Ring Binder (D392)
Adjusts the height of the paddle roller at initialization. If the correct number is not
entered, the stack will not be jogged correctly before binding.
[-3 to +3/0/0.1 mm]
6505
Pre-bind jogger unit
The correct value to be entered for the adjustment is written in the first line of the
label. This label is attached to the front cover of the pre-bind jogger unit.
Note: The value must be divided by "10". For example, "8" is actually "0.8 mm)
D059/D060/D061 5-238 SM
6506 Adj Jog: Binding 1 Ring Binder (D392)
Adjusts the stop position of the front jog fence. If the correct number is not
entered, the stack will not be jogged correctly before binding.
The correct value to be entered for the adjustment is written in the second line of
the label. This label is attached to the front cover of the pre-bind jogger unit.
Note: The value must be divided by "10". For example, "-7" is actually "-0.7 mm)
001 A4 LEF
[-2 to +2/0/0.1 mm]
002 LT LEF
6507 Adj Jog: Binding 2 Ring Binder (D392)
001 A4 LEF Shifts the operating position of the rear jog fence. If the correct
number is not entered, the stack will not be jogged correctly before
Service
Tables
binding.
[-2 to +2/0/0.1 mm]
This SP must be adjusted after replacement of one or more of the
following items:
002 LT LEF Binder unit control board

The correct value to be entered for the adjustment is written in the
third line of the label. This label is attached to the front cover of the
pre-bind jogger unit.
Note: The value must be divided by "10". For example, "-3" is
actually "-0.3 mm")
SM 5-239 D059/D060/D061
6508 Input Check: Ring Binder Ring Binder (D392)
001 Entrance Sensor
002 Transport Sensor
003 Exit Sensor
004 Punch Reference Sensor
005 Binder Delivery Base Sensor
006 Path JG HP Sensor
007 Paper Jog HP Sensor
008 Jog Roller Lift HP Sensor
009 Punch HP Sensor
010 Punch Encoder Sensor
011 Unit Detect Sensor
012 Punch Size A4/LT Sensor
013 Punch Type Sensor
014 Full Sensor
015 Chad Box Sensor
016 Output Belt 1 HP Sensor
017 Output Belt 2 HP Sensor
018 Output Belt Rotation HP Sensor
019 Output Unit Entrance Sensor
020 Booklet Pass Sensor
021 Stack HP Sensor
D059/D060/D061 5-240 SM
022 Stack Height Sensor 1
023 Stack Height Sensor 2
024 Stacker Paper Detect Sensor
025 Tray Detect Sensor
026 Obstacle Detect Sensor
027 Book Position Sensor
028 Binder Unit Sensor
029 Width Align HP Sensor 1
030 Paddle Roller HP Sensor
031 Clamp HP Sensor
032 Alignment Pin HP Sensor
033 Shutter HP Sensor
Service
Tables
034 50-Sheet Detect Sensor
035 Paper Thickness Sensor
037 Paper LE Detect Sensor
038 Alignment Pin Top Edge Sensor
039 Width Align HP Sensor 2
040 De-curler Motor HP Sensor
041 Shutter Motor HP Sensor
042 Roller Lift Motor HP Sensor
043 Binder HP Sensor
044 Bind Timing Sensor
SM 5-241 D059/D060/D061
045 Ring Replace HP Sensor
046 Ring Replace Timing Sensor
047 Ring Supply Detect Sensor
048 Cartridge Reversed Sensor
049 Ring Near-End Sensor
050 Ring 50/100 Sensor
051 Ring A4/LT Sensor
6509 Output Check Ring Binder (D392)
001 Entrance Motor
002 Transport Motor
003 Exit Motor
004 Path JG Motor
005 Jog Roller Motor
006 Side Jogger Motor
007 After-Punch Output Motor
008 Jog Roller Lift Motor
009 Hole Clear Motor
010 Top Fence SOL
011 Output Belt 1 Motor
012 Output Belt 2 Motor
013 Output Belt Rotation Motor
D059/D060/D061 5-242 SM
014 Output Tray Lift Motor
015 De-curler Motor
016 Shutter Motor
017 Paddle Roller Motor
018 Alignment Pin Motor
019 Paddle Roller Lift Motor
020 Width Align Motor 1
021 Clamp Motor
022 Width Align Motor 2
023 Roller Motor
024 Roller Lift Motor
025 Main Lift Motor
Service
Tables
026 50/100 Adjustment Motor
SM 5-243 D059/D060/D061
6523 Finishing Angle Adjustment Perfect Binder (D391)
001 Forward
002 Backward [-1 to + 1/ 0 / 0.1 mm]
003 Toward Small Hole
6524 Stack Thickness Volume Adjustment Perfect Binder (D391)
001 0 mm Adjust [1 to 1023 / 97 / 1]
002 25 mm Adjust [1 to 1023 / 865 / 1]
6525 Glue Remain Thermistor: Wet Side Perfect Binder (D391)
001 Glue Vat: Wet Side Lower Limit [0 to 255 / 132 / 1]
002 Glue Vat: Wet Side Upper Limit [0 to 255 / 132 / 1]
6526 Input Check: Perfect Binder Perfect Binder (D391)
001 Entrance sensor
002 Timing Sensor
003 Jog Sensor HP: Front
004 Jog Sensor HP: Rear
005 Jog Sensor HP: Front Large
006 Jog Sensor HP: Rear Large
007 Cover Path: Sensor 1
D059/D060/D061 5-244 SM
008 Cover Path: Sensor 2
009 Signature Path: Sensor 1
010 Signature Path: Sensor 2
011 Inserter Communication Sensor: Before Joining
012 Switchback Flapper HP Sensor
013 Switchback Roller HP Sensor
014 Cover Registration Sensor
015 Straight-Through Exit Sensor
016 TE Press Lever HP Sensor
017 Stack Overflow Sensor
018 Tray Lower Limit Sensor
019 Paper Detect Sensor: Front
Service
Tables
020 Paper Detect Sensor: Rear
021 Cover Guide HP Sensor: Right
022 Cover Guide HP Sensor: Left
023 Cover Guide Open Sensor: Right
024 Cover Guide Open Sensor: Left
025 Stack Weight Move HP Sensor
026 Stack Tray HP Sensor
027 Front Door SW
028 Top Cover Sensor
029 Top Cover Switch
SM 5-245 D059/D060/D061
030 Glue Tank Cover Sensor
031 Temperature Start Switch
032 Inserter Connect Signal
033 Glue Tank Empty Sensor
034 Glue Tank Full Sensor
035 24 V Guard 1
036 24 V Guard 2
037 Stack Tray Empty Sensor
038 Front Door Lock Sensor
039 Power Supply Fan Lock: Left
040 Sub Grip Upper HP Sensor
041 Signature Exit Sensor
042 Size Move HP Sensor
043 Registration Unit HP Sensor
044 Post Main Grip Encoder Sensor
045 24V 2 Check Signal
046 Spine Fold Press Sensor: Right
047 Main Grip HP Sensor: Left
048 Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor: Small
049 Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor: Large
050 Glue Tank HP Sensor
051 Main Grip HP Sensor
D059/D060/D061 5-246 SM
052 Main Grip Front Encoder Sensor
053 24V 3 Check Signal
054 Main Grip Press Sensor: Left
055 Main Grip Press Sensor: Small
056 Sub Grip Paper Sensor
057 Sub Grip Open Sensor
058 Sub Grip Close Sensor
059 Spine Fold Close Sensor: Left
060 Spine Plate Open Sensor
061 Spine Plate Closed Sensor
062 Spine Fold HP Sensor: Left
063 Spine Fold HP Sensor: Right
Service
Tables
064 Cutter LE Detect Sensor
065 Main Grip Rotate Enable Sensor
066 Main Grip Rotate Bind Position Sensor
067 Main Grip Rotate HP Sensor
068 Rear Main Grip Open Sensor
069 Rear Main Grip Close Sensor
070 Front Main Grip Open Sensor
071 Front Main Grip Close Sensor
072 Main Grip Signature Sensor
073 Thermostat Abnormal
SM 5-247 D059/D060/D061
074 Glue Heater Thermistor
075 Glue Unit HP Sensor
076 Book Output Path HP Sensor
077 Book Output Path Push Sensor
078 Sub Grip HP Sensor
079 Signature Main Grip Position Sensor
080 Signature Fan 2 Lock: Rear
081 Signature Fan 2 Lock: Front
082 Signature Fan 1 Lock: Rear
083 Signature Fan 1 Lock: Front
084 Power Supply Fan Lock: Center
085 Power Supply Fan Lock: Rear
086 Spine Plate Fan Lock: Upper Rear
087 Spine Plate Fan Lock: Front
088 Spine Plate Fan Lock: Lower Rear
089 Spine Plate Fan Lock: Lower Front
090 Glue Tank Roller: Rotate Detect Sensor
091 Glue Tank HP Sensor: Front
092 Glue Supply Fan: Lock 1
093 Glue Supply Fan Lock 2
094 Book Catch Fence HP Sensor
095 Output Stack Door Sensor
D059/D060/D061 5-248 SM
096 Output Stack Door Switch
097 Book Buffer Tray HP Sensor
098 Trim Scrap Buffer HP Sensor: Right
099 Press HP Sensor
100 Blade Cradle HP Sensor
101 Cutter Limit Sensor
102 Cutter Area Sensor 1
103 Entrance Path Sensor
104 Book Registration Sensor
105 Cutter Area Sensor 2
106 LE Detect Sensor
107 Grip End Sensor
Service
Tables
108 Book Rotate HP Sensor 1: Right
109 Press End Sensor
110 Slide HP Sensor
111 Grip HP Sensor
112 Book Rotate HP Sensor 2: Left
113 Press Limit Sensor
114 Trim Scrap Box Sensor
115 Book Arrival Sensor
116 Book Detect Sensor: Output Tray
117 Output Tray HP Sensor
SM 5-249 D059/D060/D061
118 Trim Scrap Buffer HP Sensor
119 Trim Scrap Box Full Sensor
120 Front Door SW: Center
121 Front Door SW: 36V
122 Thrust Plate Sensor
123 Upper Tray Empty Sensor
124 Lower Tray Empty Sensor
125 Upper Tray Pickup Sensor
126 Lower Tray Pickup Sensor
127 Inserter Cover Sensor
128 Lower Tray Paper Out Sensor
129 Lower Tray Registration Sensor
130 Upper Tray Registration Sensor
131 Upper Tray: Large Paper Sensor
132 Upper Tray: Small Paper Sensor
133 Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor
134 Transport Sensor: Midway
135 Inserter Unit Sensor
136 Upper Tray Lower Limit Sensor
137 Drive Gear Switching Sensor
138 Transport Sensor 1
139 Transport Sensor 2
D059/D060/D061 5-250 SM
140 Relay Unit Transport Sensor
141 Relay Unit Front Door Sensor
6600 Input Check: Stacker 1 High Capacity Stacker (D447)
001 Entrance Sensor
002 Shift Tray Exit Sensor
004 Exit Sensor
007 Shift Tray JG HP Sensor
Service
Tables
009 Shift Tray Roller HP Sensor
010 ---
011 Front Jogger Fence HP Sensor
013 Jogger Fence Retraction HP Sensor
014 LE Stopper HP Sensor
015 Paper Height Sensor
016 Shift Tray Paper Sensor
017 Tray Full Sensor 1: 25%
SM 5-251 D059/D060/D061
021 Tray Low Limit Sensor
022 Roll Away Cart Set SW
023 Tray Guard Sensor 1
025 Sub Jogger HP Sensor
026 Down Button
027 Jam Button
028 Top DoorSW
029 Front Door SW
6601 Output Check: Stacker 1 High Capacity Stacker (D447)
001 Stop
002 Entrance Motor
004 Shift Exit Motor
005 Transport Motor
006 Shift JG Motor
007 Proof Tray JG Motor
008 Shift Motor
D059/D060/D061 5-252 SM
011 Jogger Fence Retraction Motor
013 LE Stopper Motor
014 Sub Jogger Motor
015 Tray Lift Motor
016 Front Door Lock SOL
017 Fan Motor
018 Tray Full LED
019 Jog In Progress LED
020 Tray Lift LED
021 Error LED
6602 Jog Fence Adjust: Stacker 1 High Capacity Stacker (D447)
Service
Tables
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 A5 SEF [+2 to -2 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
006 A5 LEF
007 B5 SEF
008 B5 LEF
009 DLT SEF
SM 5-253 D059/D060/D061
010 LG SEF
011 LT SEF
012 LT LEF
013 HLT SEF
014 HLT LEF
015 Other
6603 LE Stopper Adjust: Stacker 1 High Capacity Stacker (D447)
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 A5 SEF
006 A5 LEF
007 B5 SEF
[+2 to -2 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
008 B5 LEF
009 DLT SEF
010 LG SEF
011 LT SEF
012 LT LEF
013 HLT SEF
014 HLT LEF
D059/D060/D061 5-254 SM
015 Other
6604 Sub Jog Fence Adjust: Stacker 1 Hi Capacity Stacker (D447)
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 A5 SEF
006 A5 LEF
007 B5 SEF
008 B5 LEF [+2 to -2 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
009 DLT SEF
010 LG SEF
Service
Tables
011 LT SEF
012 LT LEF
013 HLT SEF
014 HLT LEF
015 Other
6605 Free Run: Stacker 1 High Capacity Stacker (D447)
001 Free Run 1
002 Free Run 2
SM 5-255 D059/D060/D061
6606 Stacker 2 Input Check (if 2 installed) High Capacity Stacker (D447)
001 Entrance Sensor
002 Shift Tray Exit Sensor
004 Exit Sensor
007 Shift Tray JG HP Sensor
009 Shift Tray Roller HP Sensor
010 ---
011 Front Jogger Fence HP Sensor
013 Jogger Fence Retraction HP Sensor
014 LE Stopper HP Sensor
015 Paper Height Sensor
016 Shift Tray Paper Sensor
021 Tray Low Limit Sensor
022 Roll Away Cart Set SW
D059/D060/D061 5-256 SM
025 Sub Jogger HP Sensor
026 Down Button
027 Jam Button
028 Top DoorSW
029 Front Door SW
6607 Output Check: Stacker 2 High Capacity Stacker (D447)
001 Stop
002 Entrance Motor
004 Shift Exit Motor
Service
Tables
005 Transport Motor
006 Shift JG Motor
007 Proof Tray JG Motor
008 Shift Motor
011 Jogger Fence Retraction Motor
013 LE Stopper Motor
014 Sub Jogger Motor
SM 5-257 D059/D060/D061
015 Tray Lift Motor
016 Front Door Lock SOL
017 Fan Motor
018 Tray Full LED
019 Jog In Progress LED
020 Tray Lift LED
021 Error LED
6608 Jog Fence Adjust: Stacker 2 High Capacity Stacker (D447)
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 A5 SEF
006 A5 LEF
007 B5 SEF [-2 to +2 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
008 B5 LEF
009 DLT SEF
010 LG SEF
011 LT SEF
012 LT LEF
013 HLT SEF
D059/D060/D061 5-258 SM
014 HLT LEF
015 Other
Service
Tables
SM 5-259 D059/D060/D061
6609 LE Stopper Adjust: Stacker 2 High Capacity Stacker (D447)
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 A5 SEF
006 A5 LEF
007 B5 SEF
008 B5 LEF [-2 to +2 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
009 DLT SEF
010 LG SEF
011 LT SEF
012 LT LEF
013 HLT SEF
014 HLT LEF
015 Other
D059/D060/D061 5-260 SM
6610 Sub Jog Fence Adjust: Stacker 2 Hi Capacity Stacker (D447)
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 A5 SEF
006 A5 LEF
007 B5 SEF
008 B5 LEF [-2 to +2 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
009 DLT SEF
010 LG SEF
011 LT SEF
Service
Tables
012 LT LEF
013 HLT SEF
014 HLT LEF
015 Other
6611 Stacker 2: Free Run High Capacity Stacker (D447)
001 Free Run 1
002 Free Run 2
SM 5-261 D059/D060/D061
6612 Stacker 1 Fan Setting High Capacity Stacker (D447)
0: ON
1: OFF
6613 Stacker 2 Fan Setting High Capacity Stacker (D447)
0: ON
1: OFF
6650 Input Check: Trimmer (D455)
001 Entrance Sensor
002 Stopper Sensor
003 Exit Sensor
004 Booklet Sensor 1
007 Trimming Blade HP Sensor
008 Cut Position HP Sensor
009 Press Roller HP Sensor
010 Press Stopper HP Sensor
011 Scrap Hopper Full HP Sensor
012 Scrap Hopper HP Sensor
013 Door Switch
D059/D060/D061 5-262 SM
6651 Output Check: Trimmer (D455)
001 Entrance Motor
002 Exit Motor
003 Press Roller Motor
004 Cut Position Motor
005 Press Stopper Motor
006 Tray Motor
007 Trimming Blade Motor
6750 FM1 Z-Fold: Fine Adjust 1st Fold (D454) FM1 Z-Folding
001 A3 SEF [-4 to +4 / 0 / 0.2 mm]
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
Service
Tables
004 DLT SEF
005 LG SEF
006 LT SEF
007 12x18
008 8-Kai
019 Other
SM 5-263 D059/D060/D061
6751 FM1 Z-Fold: Fine Adjust 2nd Fold (D454) FM1 Z-Folding
001 A3 SEF [-4 to +4 / 0 / 0.2 mm]
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 DLT SEF
005 LG SEF
006 LT SEF
007 12x18
008 8-Kai
019 Other
6752 FM2 Equal Halves: Fine Adjust Fold (D454) FM2 Half Fold
001 A3 SEF [-4 to +4 / 0 / 0.2 mm]
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 DLT SEF
005 LG SEF
006 LT SEF
007 12x18
008 8-Kai
009 B5 SEF
010 13x19.2
D059/D060/D061 5-264 SM
011 13x19
012 12.6x19.2
013 12.6x18.5
014 13x18
015 SR A3
016 SR A4
017 226x310
018 310x432
019 Other
6753 FM3 Equal 3rds: Fine Adjust 1st (D454) FM3 Letter Fold-out
001 A3 SEF [-4 to +4 / 0 / 0.2 mm]
002 B4 SEF
Service
Tables
003 A4 SEF
004 DLT SEF
005 LG SEF
006 LT SEF
007 12x18
008 8-Kai
009 B5 SEF
019 Other
SM 5-265 D059/D060/D061
6754 FM3 Equal 3rds: Fine Adjust 2nd (D454) FM3 Letter Fold-out
001 A3 SEF [-4 to +4 / 0 / 0.2 mm]
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 DLT SEF
005 LG SEF
006 LT SEF
007 12x18
008 8-Kai
009 B5 SEF
019 Other
6755 FM4 3rds 1 Flap: Fine Adjust 1st (D454) FM4 Letter Fold-in
001 A3 SEF [-4 to +4 / 0 / 0.2 mm]
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 DLT SEF
005 LG SEF
006 LT SEF
007 12x18
008 8-Kai
009 B5 SEF
D059/D060/D061 5-266 SM
019 Other
6756 FM4 3rds 1 Flap: Fine Adjust 2nd (D454) FM4 Letter Fold-in
001 A3 SEF
[-4 to +4 / 0 / 0.2 mm]
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 DLT SEF
005 LG SEF
006 LT SEF
007 12x18
008 8-Kai
009 B5 SEF
019 Other
Service
Tables
SM 5-267 D059/D060/D061
6757 FM5 4ths "V": Fine Adjust 1st (D454) FM5 Double Parallel Fold
001 A3 SEF [-4 to +4 / 0 / 0.2 mm]
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 DLT SEF
005 LG SEF
006 LT SEF
007 12x18
008 8-Kai
009 B5 SEF
019 Other
6758 FM5 4ths "V": Fine Adjust 2nd (D454) FM5 Double Parallel
001 A3 SEF [-4 to +4 / 0 / 0.2 mm]
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 DLT SEF
005 LG SEF
006 LT SEF
007 12x18
008 8-Kai
009 B5 SEF
019 Other
D059/D060/D061 5-268 SM
6759 FM6 4ths 2 Flap: Fine Adjust 1st (D454) FM6 Gate Fold
001 A3 SEF [-4 to +4 / 0 / 0.2 mm]
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 DLT SEF
005 LG SEF
006 LT SEF
008 8-Kai
009 B5 SEF
019 Other
Service
6760 FM6 4ths 2 Flap: Fine Adjust 2nd (D454) FM6 Gate Fold
Tables
001 A3 SEF [-4 to +4 / 0 / 0.2 mm]
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 DLT SEF
005 LG SEF
006 LT SEF
008 8-Kai
009 B5 SEF
019 Other
SM 5-269 D059/D060/D061
6761 FM6 4ths 2 Flap: Fine Adjust 3rd (D454) FM6 Gate Fold
001 A3 SEF [-4 to +4 / 0 / 0.2 mm]
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 DLT SEF
005 LG SEF
006 LT SEF
007 12x18
008 8-Kai
009 B5 SEF
019 Other
6770 Ring Binder: Jog Adjust: Front/Rear D392
001 A4 LEF
[-1 to +1 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
002 LT LEF
6771 Ring Binder: Jog Adjust: Leading Edge D392
[-1.5 to + 1.5 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
6772 Ring Binder: Jog Adjust: Front D392
001 A4 LEF
[-1 to +1 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
002 LT LEF
D059/D060/D061 5-270 SM
6773 Ring Binder: Jog Adjust: Rear D392
001 A4 LEF
[-1 to +1 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
002 LT LEF
6830 Extra Staples DFU
More than the standard number of corner staples can be loaded. This SP
recognizes the maximum number of staples (This Setting + Standard
Number).
If the number of the maximum for staples is increased, and the
mechanical warranty of the unit can be guaranteed, then the setting
can take effect without changing the controller software.
However, assurance that mechanical performance can be guaranteed
is required before changing the setting to increase the staple load for
more than the maximum in the feed/exit specifications. Raising this
setting without quality assurance could damage the machine.
0 to 50 (Initial: 0)
Service
Tables
001
[0 to 50 / 0 /1]
0 to 50 (Initial: 0)
002
[0 to 50 / 0 /1]
6890 Punch Function Enabled (Z-Fold)
Permission for punching thick (tab) paper is forbidden and it is up to the

service technician to pass this on to the customer.
0: Simultaneous use forbidden
1: Simultaneous use allowed
SM 5-271 D059/D060/D061
6980 Punch Enable Setting for 135 cpm
Enables punching with the D061 (cpm 135). The default for this SP is OFF.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
[*OFF] [1:ON]
D059/D060/D061 5-272 SM
System SP7-nnn Data Logs: 1
5.16 SYSTEM SP7-NNN DATA LOGS: 1
Main Motor Operation Time

7001
Displays the total drum rotation time in minutes.
Total SC Counter
7401
Displays the total number of SCs logged.
SC History
7403
Displays the latest 10 service call codes
001 Latest
002 Latest 1
003 Latest 2
Service
Tables
004 Latest 3
005 Latest 4
006 Latest 5
007 Latest 6
008 Latest 7
009 Latest 8
010 Latest 9
Total Paper Jam Counter

7502
Displays the total number of copy jams.
SM 5-273 D059/D060/D061
Total Original Jam Counter

7503
Displays the total number of copy jams.
7504 Paper Jam Loc Main Machine
Displays the list of possible locations where a jam could have occurred. These jams are
caused by the failure of a sensor to activate. These are jams when the paper does not
activate the sensor.
Paper late error: Paper failed to arrive at prescribed time.
Paper lag error: Paper failed to leave at prescribed time.
001 At Power On
003 1st Tray Feed Sensor: Late Error
004 2nd Tray Feed Sensor: Late Error
005 3rd Tray Feed Sensor: Late Error
006 4th Tray Feed Sensor: Late Error
010 1st Tray Transport Sensor: Late Error
011 2nd Tray Transport Sensor: Late Error
012 3rd Tray Transport Sensor: Late Error
013 4th Tray Transport Sensor: Late Error
D059/D060/D061 5-274 SM
017 LCIT Relay Sensor: Late Error
018 LCIT Exit Sensor: Late Error
019 Paper Bank Relay Sensor: Late Error
020 Registration Sensor: Late Error
021 Paper Cooling Pipe Exit Sensor: Late Error
022 Exit Sensor: Late Error
023 Duplex Entrance Sensor: Late Error
024 Duplex Transport Sensor 1: Late Error
027 Duplex Inverter Sensor: Late Error
028 Duplex Inverter Relay Sensor: Late Error
Service
Tables
053 1st Tray Feed Sensor: Lag Error
054 2nd Tray Feed Sensor: Lag Error
055 3rd Tray Feed Sensor: Lag Error
056 4th Tray Feed Sensor: Lag Error
060 1st Transport Sensor: Lag Error
061 2nd Transport Sensor: Lag Error
062 3rd Transport Sensor: Lag Error
SM 5-275 D059/D060/D061
063 4th Transport Sensor: Lag Error
067 LCIT Relay Sensor: Lag Error
068 LCIT Exit Sensor: Lag Error
069 Paper Bank Relay Sensor: Lag Error
070 Registration Sensor: Lag Error
071 Paper Cooling Pipe Exit Sensor: Lag Error
072 Exit Sensor: Lag Error
073 Duplex Entrance Sensor: Lag Error
074 Duplex Transport Sensor 1: Lag Error
077 Duplex Inverter Sensor: Lag Error
078 Duplex Inverter Relay Sensor: Lag Error
093 Entrance Sensor: Late Error (D457)
094 Entrance Sensor: Lag Error (D457)
095 Exit Sensor: Late Error (D457)
096 Exit Sensor: Lag Error (D457)
099 Double Feed
D059/D060/D061 5-276 SM
7504 Paper Jam Loc Finisher (B830)
101 Entrance: Late Error (B830)
102 Entrance: Lag Error (B830)
103 Proof Tray Exit: Late Error (B830)
104 Proof Tray Exit: Lag Error (B830)
105 Shift Tray Exit: Late Error (B830)
106 Shift Tray Exit: Lag Error (B830)
107 Staple Tray Exit: Late Error (B830)
108 Staple Tray Exit: Lag Error (B830)
109 Pre-Stack Tray: Late Error (B830)
110 Pre-Stack Tray: Lag Error (B830)
111 Output (B830)
Service
Tables
112 Drive Train (B830)
113 Shift Tray Lift Drive Train (B830)
114 Jogger Fence Drive Train (B830)
115 Shift Tray Drive Train (B830)
116 Stapler Drive Train (B830)
117 Output Drive Train (B830)
118 Punch Drive Train (B830)
119 Z-Fold Drive Train (B830)
120 Pre-Stacker Drive Train (B830)
121 Main Machine Setting Incorrect (B830)
SM 5-277 D059/D060/D061
122 Plockmatic Jam (B830)
123 GBC Punch Unit Jam (B830)
7504 Paper Jam Loc CIT (B835)
130 1st Feed Sensor: Late Error (B835)
131 1st Feed Sensor: Lag Error (B835)
132 2nd Feed Sensor: Late Error (B835)
133 2nd Feed Sensor: Lag Error (B835)
134 1st Transport Sensor: Late Error (B835)
135 1st Transport Sensor: Lag Error (B835)
136 2nd Transport Sensor: Late Error (B835)
137 2nd Transport Sensor: Lag Error (B835)
138 1st Ver. Transport Sn: Late Error (B835)
139 1st Ver. Transport Sn: Lag Error (B835)
140 2nd Ver. Transport Sn: Late Error (B835)
141 2nd Ve. Transport Sn: Lag Error (B835)
142 Vertical Exit Sensor: Late Error (B835)
143 Vertical Exit Sensor: Lag Error (B835)
144 Entrance Sensor: Late Error (B835)
145 Entrance Sensor: Lag Error (B835)
146 Interposer Exit Sensor: Late Error (B835)
147 Interposer Exit Sensor: Lag Error (B835)
D059/D060/D061 5-278 SM
148 1st Lift Motor Drive Train (B835)
149 2nd Lift Motor Drive Train (B835)
150 1st Pick-up Motor Drive Train (B835)
151 2nd Pick-up Motor Drive Train (B835)
7504 Paper Jam Loc High Capacity Stacker (D447)
240 Entrance: Late Error (Stacker 1)
241 Entrance: Lag Error (Stacker 1)
242 Proof Tray Exit: Late Error (Stacker 1)
243 Proof Tray Exit: Lag Error (Stacker 1)
244 Stack Tray Exit: Late Error (Stacker 1)
245 Stack Tray Exit: Lag Error (Stacker 1)
246 Relay Path: Late Error (Stacker 1)
Service
Tables
247 Relay Path: Lag Error (Stacker 1)
248 Straight-Through Exit: Late Error(Stacker 1)
249 Straight-Through Exit: Lag Error(Stacker 1)
250 Shift JG Motor (Stacker 1)
251 Proof Tray JG Motor (Stacker 1)
252 Shift Motor (Stacker 1)
253 Front Jogger Fence Motor (Stacker 1)
254 Rear Jogger Fence Motor (Stacker 1)
255 Front Jogger Fence Retraction Mtr(Stacker 1)
SM 5-279 D059/D060/D061
7505 Original Jam Detection
Displays the list of possible locations where an original jam could have occurred.
These jams are caused by the failure of a sensor to activate.
001 At Power On
003 Feed Jam
004 Exit Jam
Jam Count by Paper Size

7506
Displays the total number of jams by paper size.
005 A4 LEF
006 A5 LEF
014 B5 LEF
038 LT LEF
044 HLT LEF
132 A3
133 A4 SEF
Displays the total number of jams by paper size.
134 A5 SEF
141 B4 SEF
142 B5 SEF
160 DLT SEF
164 LG SEF
166 LT SEF
172 HLT SEF
D059/D060/D061 5-280 SM
255 Others
7507 Plotter Jam History
001 Last
002 Latest 1 Displays the copy jam history (the most recent 10 jams)
Sample Display:
003 Latest 2
CODE:007
004 Latest 3 SIZE:05h
TOTAL:0000334
005 Latest 4
DATE:Mon Mar 15 11:44:50 2000
006 Latest 5 where:
CODE is the SP7504-* number (see above.
007 Latest 6
SIZE is the ASAP paper size code in hex.
008 Latest 7 TOTAL is the total jam error count
DATE is the date the jams occurred.
009 Latest 8
010 Latest 9
Service
Tables
Size Code Size Code Size Code
A4 (S) 05 A3 (L) 84 DLT (L) A0
A5 (S) 06 A4 (L) 85 LG (L) A4
B5 (S) 0E A5 (L) 86 LT (L) A6
LT (S) 26 B4 (L) 8D HLT (L) AC
HLT (S) 2C B5 (L) 8E Others FF
SM 5-281 D059/D060/D061
Original Jam History
Displays the original jam history of the transfer unit in groups of 10, starting with the
most recent 10 jams. Display contents are as follows:
7508
CODE is the SP7-505-* number.
SIZE is the paper size code in hex. (See "Paper Size Hex Codes" below.)
TOTAL is the total jam error count (SP7-003)
DATE is the date the previous jam occurred
001 Last
002 Latest 1
003 Latest 2
004 Latest 3 Sample Display:

CODE: 007
005 Latest 4
SIZE: 05h
006 Latest 5 TOTAL: 0000334
DATE: Mon Mar 15 11:44:50 2000
007 Latest 6
008 Latest 7
009 Latest 8
010 Latest 9
Paper Size Hex Codes

These codes are displayed by SP7507 and SP7508.
D059/D060/D061 5-282 SM
Paper Size Code (hex) Paper Size Code (hex)
A4 LEF 05 B4 SEF 8D
A5 LEF 06 B5 SEF 8E
B5 LEF 0E DLT SEF A0
LT LEF 26 LG SEF A4
HLT LEF 2C LT SEF A6
A3 SEF 84 HLT SEF AC
A4 SEF 85 Others FF
A5 SEF 86
Service
Tables
SM 5-283 D059/D060/D061
System SP7-nnn Data Logs: 2 Rev. 10/14/2011
7509 Paper Jam Loc
001 Rear Jogger Fence Retraction Mtr (Stacker 1) (D447)
002 Sub Jogger Motor (Stacker 1) (D447)
003 LE Stopper Motor (Stacker 1) (D447)
004 Tray Lift Motor (Stacker 1) (D447)
005 Main Machine Setting Incorrect (Stacker 1) (D447)
015 Entrance: Late Error (Stacker 2) (D447)
016 Entrance: Lag Error (Stacker 2) (D447)
017 Proof Tray Exit: Late Error (Stacker 2) (D447)
018 Proof Tray Exit: Lag Error (Stacker 2) (D447)
019 Stack Tray Exit: Late Error (Stacker 2) (D447)
020 Stack Tray Exit: Lag Error (Stacker 2) (D447)
021 Relay Path: Late Error (Stacker 2) (D447)
022 Relay Path: Lag Error (Stacker 2) (D447)
023 Straight-Through Path: Late Error(Stacker 2) (D447)
024 Straight-Through Path: Lag Error(Stacker 2) (D447)
025 Shift JG Motor (Stacker 2) (D447)
026 Proof JG Motor (Stacker 2) (D447)
027 Shift Motor (Stacker 2) (D447)
028 Front Jogger Fence Motor (Stacker 2) (D447)
⇒ NOTE: To find jam locations for Jam Codes above 255, subtract 255 from the original code
and then go to SP Mode 7509 and look up the code. For example, a code of 259
would be 259-255 = 004, Jam Code 004, Tray Lift Motor Stacker 1.
D059/D060/D061 5-284 SM
029 Rear Jogger Fence Motor (Stacker 2) (D447)
030 Jogger Front Retraction Motor (Stacker 2) (D447)
031 Jogger Rear Retraction Motor (Stacker 2) (D447)
032 Sub Jogger Motor (Stacker 2) (D447)
033 LE Stopper Motor (Stacker 2) (D447)
034 Tray Lift Motor (Stacker 2) (D447)
035 Main Machine Setting Incorrect (Stacker 2) (D447)
045 Main Machine Setting Incorrect (D391)
046 Horizontal Path Exit Sensor: Late Jam (D391)
047 Horizontal Path Exit Sensor: Lag Jam (D391)
048 Cover Registration Sensor: Late Jam (D391)
049 Cover Registration Sensor: Lag Jam (D391)
Service
Tables
050 Cover Horiz Regist Sn:Small: Late Jam (D391)
051 Cover Horiz Regist Sn:Small: Lag Jam (D391)
052 Cover Horiz Regist Sn:Large: Late Jam (D391)
053 Cover Horiz Regist Sn:Large: Lag Jam (D391)
054 Entrance Sensor: Late Jam (D391)
055 Entrance Sensor: Lag Jam (D391)
056 Signature Path Sensor 1: Late Jam (D391)
057 Signature Path Sensor 1: Lag Jam (D391)
058 Signature Path Sensor 2: Late Jam (D391)
059 Signature Path Sensor 2: Lag Jam (D391)
SM 5-285 D059/D060/D061
060 Timing Sensor: Late Jam (D391)
061 Timing Sensor: Lag Jam (D391)
062 Stacking Tray: Late Jam (D391)
063 Stacking Tray: Lag Jam (D391)
064 Sub Grip: Late Jam (D391)
065 Cover Path Sensor 1: Late Jam (D391)
066 Cover Path Sensor 1: Lag Jam (D391)
067 Cover Path Sensor 2: Late Jam (D391)
068 Cover Path Sensor 2: Lag Jam (D391)
069 Cover Registration Sensor: Late Jam (D391)
070 Cover Registration Sensor: Lag Jam (D391)
071 Vertical Transport Sn 2: Late Jam (D391-INS)
072 Vertical Transport Sn 2: Lag Jam (D391-INS)
073 Tray A Paper Feed Sn Late Jam (D391-INS)
074 Tray A Paper Feed Sn Lag Jam (D391-INS)
075 Tray B Paper Feed Sn Late Jam (D391-INS)
081 Transport Sensor: Late Jam (D391-TPU)
082 Transport Sensor: Lag Jam (D391-TPU)
D059/D060/D061 5-286 SM
095 Entrance: Late Jam (D392)
096 Entrance: Lag Jam (D392)
097 Relay: Late Jam (D392)
098 Relay: Lag Jam (D392)
099 Exit: Late Jam (D392)
100 Exit: Lag Jam (D392)
101 Before Punch Unit Jam (D392)
102 After Punch Unit Jam (D392)
103 Binder Unit TE Jam (D392)
104 Binder Unit LE Jam (D392)
105 Ring Jam: Wrong Ring Type (D392)
106 Binder Unit Jam (D392)
Service
Tables
107 Output Belt 1 Jam (D392)
108 Output Belt 2 Jam (D392)
109 Stacker Jam (D392)
110 Punch Motor Jam (D392)
111 Shutter Motor Jam (D392)
112 Alignment Pin Motor Jam (D392)
113 Pre-Punch Jogger Jam (D392)
114 Alignment Pin Jam (D392)
115 Clamp Motor Jam (D392)
116 50/100 Clamp Adjust Motor Jam (D392)
SM 5-287 D059/D060/D061
117 Output Belt Rotation Motor Jam (D392)
145 Entrance: Late Error (D434)
146 Entrance: Lag Error (D434)
147 Proof Tray Exit: Late Error (D434)
148 Proof Tray Exit: Lag Error (D434)
149 Shift Tray Exit: Late Error (D434)
150 Shift Tray Exit: Lag Error (D434)
151 Staple Tray Exit: Late Error (D434)
152 Staple Tray Exit: Lag Error (D434)
153 Pre-Stack Tray: Late Error (D434)
154 Pre-Stack Tray: Lag Error (D434)
155 Output (D434)
156 Booklet Stapler: Late (D434)
157 Booklet Stapler: Lag (D434)
158 Booklet Stapler Exit: Late (D434)
159 Booklet Stapler Exit: Lag (D434)
160 Paper Path (D434)
161 Shift Tray Lift Drive Train (D434)
162 Jogger Fence Drive Train (D434)
163 Shift Drive Train (D434)
164 Stapler Drive Train (D434)
D059/D060/D061 5-288 SM
165 Stack Output Drive Train (D434)
166 Punch Drive Train (D434)
167 Jogger System (D434)
168 Pre-Stacker Drive Train(D434)
169 Booklet Path (D434)
170 Booklet Stapling System (D434)
171 Folding System (D434)
172 For Debugging: Cause Unknown (D434)
175 Entrance Sensor: Late Error (D447)
176 Entrance Sensor: Lag Error (D447)
177 Skew Sensor: Late Error (D447)
Service
Tables
178 Skew Sensor: Lag Error (D447)
179 Exit Sensor: Late Error (D447)
180 Exit Sensor: Lag Error (D447)
181 Trimming Blade Motor Lock (D447)
182 Cut Position Motor (D447)
183 Press Roller (D447)
184 Press/Stopper Roller (D447)
185 Tray Motor (D447)
195 Entrance: Late Jam (D454)
196 Entrance: Lag Jam (D454)
SM 5-289 D059/D060/D061
197 Top Tray Exit: Late Jam (D454)
198 Top Tray Exit: Lag Jam (D454)
199 Straight-Through Exit: Late Jam (D454)
200 Straight-Through Exit: Lag Jam (D454)
201 1st Stopper: Late Jam (D454)
202 1st Stopper: Lag Jam (D454)
203 2nd Stopper: Late Jam (D454)
204 2nd Stopper: Lag Jam (D454)
205 3rd Stopper: Late Jam (D454)
206 3rd Stopper: Lag Jam (D454)
207 Skew Correction Jam (D454)
208 Top Tray Transport Jam (D454)
209 Entrance/Top Tray JG Motor Error (D454)
210 Entrance/Fold JG Motor Error (D454)
211 1st Stopper Motor Error (D454)
212 2nd Stopper Motor Error (D454)
213 3rd Stopper Motor Error (D454)
214 Dynamic Roller Transport Motor Error (D454)
215 Registration Roller Release Motor (D454)
216 Fold Plate Motor Error (D454)
217 Jogger Fence Motor Jam (D454)
218 Positioning Roller Motor Jam (D454)
D059/D060/D061 5-290 SM
219 FM2 Direct Send Motor Error (D454)
220 FM6 Pawl Motor (D454)
7617 Parts PM Counter Display
001 Normal
002 Document Feed
7618 Parts PM Counter Reset Japan Only
001 Normal Clears the counter of SP7617- 001.
002 Document Feed Clears the counter of SP7617- 002
Display PM Count
7621
0 to 9999 9999
Service
Tables
Clear PM Count
7622
This SP clears the PM counts for the components below.
7623 Unit PM Target
0 to 9999 9999
002 Developer
003 #Drum Unit
006 Cleaning Blade
SM 5-291 D059/D060/D061
007 Cleaning Brush
009 #Charge Unit
010 Grid Plate
012 Cleaning Pad
013 Cushion
017 #Fusing Unit
019 Hot Roller
020 Pressure Roller
022 Web Roll
024 Web Brake Pad
D059/D060/D061 5-292 SM
040 Transfer Belt
Service
Tables
042 Toner Filter
045 ADF Feed Belt
SM 5-293 D059/D060/D061
7624 Part Replacement Operation ON/OFF
002 Developer
003 #Drum Unit
006 Cleaning Blade
007 Cleaning Brush
009 #Charge Unit
D059/D060/D061 5-294 SM
010 Grid Plate
012 Cleaning Pad
013 Cushion
017 #Fusing Unit
019 Hot Roller
020 Pressure Roller
Service
Tables
022 Web Roll
024 Web Brake Pad
SM 5-295 D059/D060/D061
040 Transfer Belt
042 Toner Filter
045 ADF Feed Belt
D059/D060/D061 5-296 SM
100 Blade Cradle
101 Blade
102 Glue Vat Unit
Service
Tables
SM 5-297 D059/D060/D061
Pg Counter History Latest 1

7625
0 to 9999 9999
Pg Count History Latest 2

7626
0 to 9999 9999
Pg Count History Latest 3

7627
0 to 9999 9999
002 Developer
003 #Drum Unit
006 Cleaning Blade
007 Cleaning Brush
009 #Charge Unit
010 Grid Plate
012 Cleaning Pad
013 Cushion
D059/D060/D061 5-298 SM
017 #Fusing Unit
019 Hot Roller
020 Pressure Roller
022 Web Roll
024 Web Brake Pad
Service
Tables
SM 5-299 D059/D060/D061
040 Transfer Belt
042 Toner Filter
045 ADF Feed Belt
D059/D060/D061 5-300 SM
Clear PM Count
7628
Clears counts for all PM parts or on those PM parts whose counts have exceeded
their services lives.
001 Clear Exceeded Counts
002 Reset All Counts
7801 ROM Version
Displays the ROM versions for the items displayed on the operation panel
screen.
Service
Tables
PM Counter Display
7803
Displays the PM counter since the last PM.
PM Counter Reset
7804
Resets the PM counter.
SC/Jam Counter Reset

7807
Resets the SC and jam counters. To reset, press [1].
This SP does not reset the jam history counters: SP7-507, SP7-508.
SM 5-301 D059/D060/D061
MF Error Counter Japan Only

7826
Displays the number of counts requested of the card/key counter.
001 Error Total
A request for the count total failed at power on. This error will occur if the device
is installed but disconnected.
002 Error Staple
The request for a staple count failed at power on. This error will occur if the
device is installed but disconnected.
MF Error Counter Clear

7827
Press [Execute] to reset to 0 the values of SP7826. Japan Only
Self-Diagnose Result Display

7832
Push [#] to display a list of error codes. Nothing is displayed if no errors have
occurred.
Total Memory Size

7836
Displays the contents of the memory on the controller board.
7901 Assert Info. DFU
001 Filename
002 Number of Lines Used for debugging.
003 Location
D059/D060/D061 5-302 SM
7940 Drive Distance: End Std Value
Displays the standard value of expected service life measured by distance

(meters). Default setting of service life for each component appears on the
screen.
7942 Drive Distance % Counter
Displays expiration of service measured by percent (%).
7944 Drive Distance Counter
Displays the expiration of service measured by distance (meters).
002 Developer
003 #Drum Unit
Service
Tables
006 Cleaning Blade
007 Cleaning Brush
009 #Charge Unit
010 Grid Plate
012 Cleaning Pad
013 Cushion
SM 5-303 D059/D060/D061
017 #Fusing Unit
019 Hot Roller
020 Pressure Roller
040 Transfer Belt
042 Toner Filter
7954 Consumption Rate Counter
Shows the consumption rate, expressed as a percentage (%).
002 Developer
003 #Drum Unit
006 Cleaning Blade
007 Cleaning Brush
009 #Charge Unit
010 Grid Plate
D059/D060/D061 5-304 SM
012 Cleaning Pad
013 Cushion
017 #Fusing Unit
019 Hot Roller
020 Pressure Roller
022 Web Roll
Service
Tables
024 Web Brake Pad
SM 5-305 D059/D060/D061
040 Transfer Belt
042 Toner Filter
045 ADF Feed Belt
D059/D060/D061 5-306 SM
7989 Trim Count (Trimmer)
Displays the number of cuts performed with the Trimmer Unit (D455) attached
to the left side of the Booklet Finisher (D434).
Service
Tables
SM 5-307 D059/D060/D061
Engine Debug Log Switch DFU
This SP sets the debug log switch for one of the settings listed below.
[0 to 100/0/1]
00 Rapi Commands 10 Toner Supply Motor
01 Queue Check 11 Semiphore
02 Plotter Queue 12 Registration REP
03 Scanner Queue 13 Exit REP

7999
04 Block I/F 14 Transfer SC
05 IPU I/F 15 Drum Charge SC
06 ASAP I/F *1 16 Charge Grid SC
07 Task 17 Development Bias SC
08 Memory Pool 18 LCT (B832) Tray Lift
09 Watchdog Cycle 19 Serial Signal Send/Receive
*1: Finisher, ADF, MCU
D059/D060/D061 5-308 SM
System SP8-nnn: Data Log2: 1
5.19 SYSTEM SP8-NNN: DATA LOG2: 1
Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available, such as
sending color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes that when used in
combination with others, can provide useful information.
This machine does not have a fax function.
SP Numbers What They Do
SP8211 to SP8216 The number of pages scanned to the document server.
SP8401 to SP8406 The number of pages printed from the document server
SP8691 to SP8696 The number of pages sent from the document server
Specifically, the following questions can be answered:

How is the document server actually being used?
What application is using the document server most frequently?
What data in the document server is being reused?
Service
Tables
Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation
(the mode of operation is referred to as an 'application'). Before reading the Group 8
Service Table, make sure that you understand what these prefixes mean.
SM 5-309 D059/D060/D061
PREFIXES WHAT IT MEANS
Total: (Grand Grand total of the items counted for all applications (C, F,
T:
Total). P, etc.)..
C: Copy application.
Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each application
P: Print application.
when the job was not stored on the document server.
S: Scan application.
Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document server. The L:

counters work differently case by case. Sometimes, they
count jobs/pages stored on the document server; this can
be in document server mode (from the document server
Local storage
L: window), or from another mode, such as from a printer
(document server)
driver or by pressing the Store File button in the Copy
mode window. Sometimes, they include occasions when
the user uses a file that is already on the document
server. Each counter will be discussed case by case.
Other applications Refers to network applications such as Web Image

(external network Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK (Software
O:
applications, for Development Kit) will also be counted with this group in
example) the future.
The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of displaying
them on the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs. Read over the list of
abbreviations below and refer to it again if you see the name of an SP that you do not
understand.
Key for Abbreviations
D059/D060/D061 5-310 SM
ABBREVIATION WHAT IT MEANS
/ "By", e.g. "T:Jobs/Apl" = Total Jobs "by" Application
> More (2> "2 or more", 4> "4 or more"
AddBook Address Book
Apl Application
B/W Black & White
Bk Black
C Cyan
ColCr Color Create
ColMode Color Mode
Comb Combine
Comp Compression
Service
Tables
Deliv Delivery
Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan, Print) used to

DesApl
store the job on the document server, for example.
Dev Counter Development Count, no. of pages developed.
Dup, Duplex Duplex, printing on both sides
Emul Emulation
FC Full Color
FIN Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
Full Bleed No Margins
GenCopy Generation Copy Mode
SM 5-311 D059/D060/D061
Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter does not count
up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this counter counts up by the number
GPC
that is in excess of 10 (e.g., for an 11-page job, the counter counts up
11-10 =1)
IFax Internet Fax
Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI, e.g. border
ImgEdt
removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
K Black (YMCK)
LS Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
LSize Large (paper) Size
Mag Magnification
MC One color (monochrome)
New Remote Service, which allows a service center to monitor

NRS
machines remotely. "NRS" is used overseas, "CSS" is used in Japan.
Org Original for scanning
OrgJam Original Jam
Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that allows print
jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers on the network, and
Palm 2
allows files to moved around, combined, and converted to different
formats..
PC Personal Computer
Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original. Duplex pages
PGS count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as two pages if the A3/DLT
counter SP is switched ON.
PJob Print Jobs
D059/D060/D061 5-312 SM
Ppr Paper
PrtJam Printer (plotter) Jam
PrtPGS Print Pages
Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2 only. This
R
machine is under development and currently not available.
Rez Resolution
SC Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scn Scan
Sim, Simplex Simplex, printing on 1 side.
S-to-Email Scan-to-E-mail
SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8 counters are
SMC
recorded in the SMC report.
Svr Server
Service
Tables
TonEnd Toner End
TonSave Toner Save
TXJob Send, Transmission
WSD Web Services Devices
YMC Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
YMCK Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black
SM 5-313 D059/D060/D061
All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear, or the Counter
Reset SP7 808.
8001 T:Total Jobs These SPs count the number of times each application is
used to do a job.
8002 C:Total Jobs
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8004 P:Total Jobs Note: The L: counter is the total number of times the other
applications are used to send a job to the document server,
8005 S:Total Jobs
plus the number of times a file already on the document
8006 L:Total Jobs server is used.
These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of pages
processed.
When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.
Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer
engineer using the SP modes are not counted.
When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job), the job
is counted at the time when either "Delete Data" or "Specify Output" is specified.
When a copy job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments, and
when a print job stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 also increments.
When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: and L:
counters both increment.
When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counter increments.
When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the document
server, only the L: counter increments.
When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the document
server, only the L: counter increments.
When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter
increments.
When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter
increments.
D059/D060/D061 5-314 SM
8011 T:Jobs/LS
8012 C:Jobs/LS These SPs count the number of jobs stored to the document server by
each application, to reveal how local storage is being used for input.
8014 P:Jobs/LS
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8015 S:Jobs/LS The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from within the
document server mode screen at the operation panel.
8016 L:Jobs/LS
8017 O:Jobs/LS
When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments. When you
enter document server mode and then scan an original, the L: counter increments.
When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments.
When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter
increments.
When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter
increments.
8021 T:Pjob/LS
Service
Tables
8022 C:Pjob/LS These SPs reveal how files printed from the document server were
stored on the document server originally.
8024 P:Pjob/LS
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8025 S:Pjob/LS The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from within the
8026 L:Pjob/LS
8027 O:Pjob/LS
When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another application, the
C: counter increments.
When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on the
document server with a print job that was stored on the document server, the C: and P:
counters both increment.
When a job already on the document server is printed with another application, the L:
counter increments.
SM 5-315 D059/D060/D061
When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another application,
the S: counter increments. If the original was scanned from within document server
mode, then the L: counter increments.
When images stored on the document server by a network application (including Palm
2), are printed with another application, the O: counter increments.
When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network application
(Web Image Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments.
8031 T:Pjob/DesApl
8032 C:Pjob/DesApl These SPs reveal what applications were used to output
documents from the document server.
8034 P:Pjob/DesApl
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8035 S:Pjob/DesApl The L: counter counts the number of jobs printed from within the
8036 L:Pjob/DesApl
8037 O:Pjob/DesApl
When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the count for the
application that started the print job is incremented.
When the print job is started from a network application (Desk Top Binder, Web Image
Monitor, etc.) the L: counter increments.
8041 T:TX Jobs/LS These SPs count the applications that stored files on the
document server that were later accessed for transmission
8042 C:TX Jobs/LS
over the telephone line or over a network (attached to an
8044 P:TX Jobs/LS e-mail).
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8045 S:TX Jobs/LS
Note: Jobs merged for sending are counted separately.
8046 L:TX Jobs/LS The L: counter counts the number of jobs scanned from
within the document server mode screen at the operation
8047 O:TX Jobs/LS panel.
D059/D060/D061 5-316 SM
When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counter increments.
When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2 are
sent as an e-mail, the O: counter increments.
8051 T:TX Jobs/DesApl

These SPs count the applications used to send files from
8052 C:TX Jobs/DesApl the document server over the telephone line or over a
network (attached to an e-mail). Jobs merged for sending
8054 P:TX Jobs/DesApl
are counted separately.
8055 S:TX Jobs/DesApl [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs sent from within
8056 L:TX Jobs/DesApl
the document server mode screen at the operation panel.
8057 O:TX Jobs/DesApl
If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example, then
the O: counter increments.
T:FIN Jobs
Service
Tables
8061 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified by the
application.
C:FIN Jobs
8062 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing method is
specified by the application.
P:FIN Jobs
8064 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method is
SM 5-317 D059/D060/D061
S:FIN Jobs
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8065
These SPs total finishing methods for scan jobs only. The finishing method is
Note: Finishing features for scan jobs are not available at this time.
L:FIN Jobs
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8066
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the document
server mode screen at the operation panel. The finishing method is specified
from the print window within document server mode.
O:FIN Jobs
8067 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external application,
over the network. The finishing method is specified by the application.
Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored copy job is set
806x 1 Sort for Sort and then stored on the document server, the L: counter
increments. (See SP8066 1)
806x 2 Stack Number of jobs started out of Sort mode.
806x 3 Staple Number of jobs started in Staple mode.
Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the machine is in staple

806x 4 Booklet
mode, the Staple counter also increments.
Number of jobs started In any mode other than the Booklet mode
806x 5 Z-Fold
and set for folding (Z-fold).
Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch is set for a print
806x 6 Punch
job, the P: counter increments. (See SP8064 6.)
806x 7 Other Reserved. Not used.
D059/D060/D061 5-318 SM
T:Jobs/PGS
8071 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages in
the job, regardless of which application was used.
C:Jobs/PGS
8072 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on the
number of pages in the job.
P:Jobs/PGS
8074 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on the
S:Jobs/PGS
8075 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based on the
Service
Tables
L:Jobs/PGS
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8076
These SPs count and calculate the number of jobs printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel, by the number of pages
in the job.
O:Jobs/PGS
8077 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of "Other" application jobs (Web
Image Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages in the job.
SM 5-319 D059/D060/D061
807x 1 1 Page 807x 8 21 to 50 Pages
807x 2 2 Pages 807x 9 51 to 100 Pages
807x 3 3 Pages 807x 10 101 to 300 Pages
807x 4 4 Pages 807x 11 301 to 500 Pages
807x 5 5 Pages 807x 12 501 to 700 Pages
807x 6 6 to 10 Pages 807x 13 701 to 1000 Pages
807x 7 11 to 20 Pages 807x 14 1001 to Pages
For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in document
server mode, the appropriate L: counter (SP8076 0xx) increments.
Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.
If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is counted at
the time the error occurs.
For copy jobs (SP 8072) and scan jobs (SP 8075), the total is calculated by multiplying
the number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (One duplex page
counts as 2.)
The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the
number of pages of the copy job (SP 8072).
When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the page
is counted.
D059/D060/D061 5-320 SM
T:S-to-Email Jobs
8131 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and attached to an e-mail,
regardless of whether the document server was used or not.
S:S-to-Email Jobs
8135
These SPs count the number of jobs scanned and attached to an e-mail, without
storing the original on the document server.
These counters count jobs, not pages.

If the job is stored on the document server, after the job is stored it is determined to be
color or black-and-white then counted.
If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the document is
waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending on
what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.
If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router, Scan-to-Email, or
Scan-to-PC, or if one job is sent to more than one destination. each send is counted
Service
Tables
separately. For example, if the same document is sent by Scan-to-Email as well as
Scan-to-PC, then it is counted twice (once for Scan-to-Email and once for
Scan-to-PC).
T:Deliv Jobs/Svr
8141 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent to a Scan Router
server.
S:Deliv Jobs/Svr
8145
These SPs count the number of jobs scanned in scanner mode and sent to a Scan
Router server.
SM 5-321 D059/D060/D061

The jobs are counted even though the arrival and reception of the jobs at the Scan
Router server cannot be confirmed.
If even one color image is mixed with black-and-white images, then the job is counted
as a "Color" job.
If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the document is
waiting to be delivered, the job is not counted.
Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one job.
T:Deliv Jobs/PC
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8151
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent to a folder on a PC
(Scan-to-PC).
Note: At the present time, 8151 and 8155 perform identical counts.
S:Deliv Jobs/PC
8155
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent with Scan-to-PC.

If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted.
If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one job.
D059/D060/D061 5-322 SM
8171 T: Deliv Jobs/WSD
Total jobs for WSD (WS-Scanner for Web Services Devices).
S: Deliv Jobs/WSD
Total number of jobs scanned for WSD.
8175 001 B/W
002 Color
003 ACS
8191 T:Total Scan PGS

These SPs count the pages scanned by each application
8192 C:Total Scan PGS
that uses the scanner to scan images.
8195 S:Total Scan PGS [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8196 L:Total Scan PGS
Service
Tables
SP 8191 to 8196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number of
physical pages.
These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to adjust
color.
Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.
A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.
Scans made in SP mode are not counted.
Examples:
If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not stored,
the S: count is 4.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using the
Store File button in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L: count is 6.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6.
If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
SM 5-323 D059/D060/D061
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with
8201 T:LSize Scan PGS the scanner for scan and copy jobs.
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report,
and in the User Tools display.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with
8205 S:LSize Scan PGS the scanner for scan jobs only.
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report,
and in the User Tools display.
8211 T:Scan PGS/LS These SPs count the number of pages scanned into the
document server .
8212 C:Scan PGS/LS
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8215 S:Scan PGS/LS The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from
8216 L:Scan PGS/LS panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy
mode screen
Reading user stamp data is not counted.

If a job is cancelled, the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted.
If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet, the S: count is
4.
If pages are copied but not stored on the document server, these counters do not
change.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server, the C: count
is 6 and the L: count is 6.
If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
D059/D060/D061 5-324 SM
ADF Org Feeds
8221 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and back
side scanning.
Number of front sides fed for scanning:

With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Front side
count is the same as the number of pages fed for either simplex or
duplex scanning.
8221 1 Front
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Front
side count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex front
side scanning. (The front side is determined by which side the user
loads face up.)
Number of rear sides fed for scanning:

With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Back count
is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex scanning.
8221 2 Back
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Back
count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex rear-side
Service
Tables
scanning.
When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count is 1.
If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double
counting. Also, the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet is
output.
SM 5-325 D059/D060/D061
Scan PGS/Mode
8231 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to
determine the work load on the ADF.
Large Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be loaded in the ADF at
8231 1
Volume one time.
8231 2 SADF Selectable. Feeding pages one by one through the ADF.
8231 3 Mixed Size Selectable. Select "Mixed Sizes" on the operation panel.
8231 4 Custom Size Selectable. Originals of non-standard size.
Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the original directly on
8231 5 Platen
the platen.
If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from ADF
to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
If the user selects "Mixed Sizes" for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size count
is enabled.
In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2 pages
with SADF, the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
T:Scan These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by
8241
PGS/Org original type for all jobs, regardless of which application was
used.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
C:Scan
8242 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original
PGS/Org
type for Copy jobs.
D059/D060/D061 5-326 SM
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
S:Scan
8245 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original
PGS/Org
type for Scan jobs.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored
L:Scan
8246 from within the document server mode screen at the
PGS/Org
operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the
Copy mode screen
8241 8242 8243 8245 8246
824x 1: Text Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
824x 2:
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Text/Photo
824x 3: Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
824x 4:
GenCopy, Yes Yes No Yes Yes
Service
Tables
Pale
824x 5: Map Yes Yes No Yes Yes
824x 6:
Yes No Yes No No
Normal/Detail
824x 7:
Fine/Super Yes No Yes No No
Fine
824x 8:
Yes No No Yes No
Binary
824x 9:
Yes No No Yes No
Grayscale
If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from ADF
to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
SM 5-327 D059/D060/D061
These SPs show how many times Image Edit features have been
selected at the operation panel for each application. Some
examples of these editing features are:
Erase> Border
Erase> Center
T:Scan Image Repeat
8251
PGS/ImgEdt Centering
Positive/Negative
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: The count totals the number of times the edit features have
been used. A detailed breakdown of exactly which features have
been used is not given.
C:Scan
8252
PGS/ImgEdt
L:Scan
8256
PGS/ImgEdt
O:Scan
8257
PGS/ImgEdt
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode
screen.
T:Scan These SPs count the number of pages scanned using a TWAIN
8281
PGS/TWAIN driver. These counters reveal how the TWAIN driver is used for
delivery functions.
S:Scan [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8285
PGS/TWAIN Note: At the present time, these counters perform identical counts.
D059/D060/D061 5-328 SM
T:Scan
8291 These SPs count the number of pages stamped with the stamp
PGS/Stamp
in the ADF unit.
S:Scan [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8295
PGS/Stamp The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within
the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and
L:Scan
8296 with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen
PGS/Stamp
T:Scan PGS/Size
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8301
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all
applications. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning)
and output (printing) page size [SP 8-441].
C:Scan PGS/Size
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8302
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy
Service
Tables
application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning)
and output (printing) page size [SP 8-442].
S:Scan PGS/Size
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8305
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan
application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning)
and output page size [SP 8-445].
SM 5-329 D059/D060/D061
L:Scan PGS/Size
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored
8306
from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and
with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen. Use these
totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP
8-446].
830x 1 A3
830x 2 A4
830x 3 A5
830x 4 B4
830x 5 B5
830x 6 DLT
830x 7 LG
830x 8 LT
830x 9 HLT
830x 10 Full Bleed
830x 254 Other (Standard)
830x 255 Other (Custom)
D059/D060/D061 5-330 SM
T:Scan PGS/Rez
8311 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by
applications that can specify resolution settings.
S:Scan PGS/Rez
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8315
These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by
applications that can specify resolution settings.
Note: At the present time, 8311 and 8315 perform identical counts.
831x 1 1200dpi to
831x 2 600dpi to 1199dpi
831x 3 400dpi to 599dpi
831x 4 200dpi to 399dpi
831x 5 to 199dpi
Service
Tables
Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted.
SM 5-331 D059/D060/D061
SP8-nnn: Data Log2: 2
5.20 SP8-NNN: DATA LOG2: 2
8381 T:Total PrtPGS These SPs count the number of pages printed by the
customer. The counter for the application used for storing the
8382 C:Total PrtPGS
pages increments.
8384 P:Total PrtPGS [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from
8385 S:Total PrtPGS
8386 L:Total PrtPGS panel. Pages stored with the Store File button from within the
Copy mode screen go to the C: counter.
8387 O:Total PrtPGS
When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLT page is
counted as 2.
When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored are
counted for the application that stored them.
These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine, so the
following pages are not counted as printed pages:
Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip sheets.
Reports printed to confirm counts.
All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine maintenance reports,
etc.)
Test prints for machine image adjustment.
Error notification reports.
Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.
LSize PrtPGS
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8391
These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.
Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are also
displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
D059/D060/D061 5-332 SM
8401 T:PrtPGS/LS
These SPs count the number of pages printed from the document
8402 C:PrtPGS/LS server. The counter for the application used to print the pages is
incremented.
8404 P:PrtPGS/LS
The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from within the
8405 S:PrtPGS/LS document server mode screen at the operation panel.

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8406 L:PrtPGS/LS
Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the L:
count.
This SP counts the amount of paper (front/back counted as 1 page)

used for duplex printing. Last pages printed only on one side are not
8411 Prints/Duplex
counted.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
8421 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Service
Tables
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number
of pages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
8422 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
of pages processed for printing by the copier application.
P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
8424 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
of pages processed for printing by the printer application.
SM 5-333 D059/D060/D061
S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
8425 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
of pages processed for printing by the scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8426
of pages processed for printing from within the document server mode
window at the operation panel.
O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb
8427 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
of pages processed for printing by Other applications
842x 1 Simplex> Duplex
842x 2 Duplex> Duplex
842x 3 Book> Duplex
842x 4 Simplex Combine
842x 5 Duplex Combine
842x 6 2> 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)
D059/D060/D061 5-334 SM
842x 11 16> 16 pages on 1 side (16-Up)
842x 12 Booklet
842x 13 Magazine
These counts (SP8421 to SP8427) are especially useful for customers who need to
improve their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption.
Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1 page.
Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:
Booklet Magazine
Original Pages Count Original Pages Count
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
Service
Tables
3 2 3 2
4 2 4 2
5 3 5 4
6 4 6 4
7 4 7 4
8 4 8 4
SM 5-335 D059/D060/D061
T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
8431 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features
below, regardless of which application was used.
C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
8432 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
below with the copy application.
P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
8434 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
below with the print application.
L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
8436 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the document
server mode window at the operation panel with the three features below.
O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt
8437 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
below with Other applications.
D059/D060/D061 5-336 SM
Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted. The

843x 1 Cover/Slip Sheet
count for a cover printed on both sides counts 2.
The number of pages printed in series (one side) or

843x 2 Series/Book
printed as a book with booklet right/left pagination.
The number of pages printed where stamps were

843x 3 User Stamp applied, including page numbering and date
stamping.
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
8441 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all
applications.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
8442 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the
Service
Tables
copy application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
8444 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
printer application.
S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
8445 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
scanner application.
SM 5-337 D059/D060/D061
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
8446 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed from
within the document server mode window at the operation panel.
O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
8447 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by
other applications.
844x 1 A3
844x 2 A4
844x 3 A5
844x 4 B4
844x 5 B5
844x 6 DLT
844x 7 LG
844x 8 LT
844x 9 HLT
844x 10 Full Bleed
844x 254 Other (Standard)
844x 255 Other (Custom)
These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.
D059/D060/D061 5-338 SM
PrtPGS/Ppr Tray
8451
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
8451 1 Bypass Bypass Tray
8451 2 Tray 1 Copier
8451 3 Tray 2 Copier
8451 4 Tray 3 Paper Tray Unit (Option)
8451 5 Tray 4 Paper Tray Unit (Option)
8451 6 Tray 5 LCT (Option)
8451 7 Tray 6 Currently not used.
Service
Tables
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all applications.
These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter is
8461
based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed
rollers. However, these counts are based on output timing.
Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a
page printed on one side counts as 1.
SM 5-339 D059/D060/D061
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
8462 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy
application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
8464 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer
application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type
8466 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel.
846x 1 Normal
846x 2 Recycled
846x 3 Special
846x 4 Thick
846x 5 Normal (Back)
846x 6 Thick (Back)
846x 7 OHP
846x 8 Other
D059/D060/D061 5-340 SM
PrtPGS/Mag
8471
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.
8471 1 - 49%
8471 2 50% to 99%
8471 3 100%
8471 4 101% to 200%
8471 5 201% -
Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation panel
but performed remotely with an external network application capable of performing
magnification adjustment as well.
Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as Excel
are also counted.
Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on the
Service
Tables
document server are not counted.
Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge
copying are counted.
The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically
assigned a rate of 100%.
8481 T:PrtPGS/TonSave
8484 P:PrtPGS/TonSave
These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature
switched on.
Note: These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print
application.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
SM 5-341 D059/D060/D061
T:PrtPGS/Emul [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8511
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
printed.
P:PrtPGS/Emul [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8514
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
printed.
8514 1 RPCS
8514 2 RPDL
8514 3 PS3
8514 4 R98
8514 5 R16
8514 6 GL/GL2
8514 7 R55
8514 8 RTIFF
8514 9 PDF
8514 10 PCL5e/5c
8514 11 PCL XL
8514 12 IPDL-C
8514 13 BM-Links Japan Only
8514 14 Other
SP8511 and SP8514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print
application.
Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.
D059/D060/D061 5-342 SM
T:PrtPGS/FIN
8521 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all
applications.
C:PrtPGS/FIN
8522 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the
Copy application.
P:PrtPGS/FIN
8524 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Print application.
S:PrtPGS/FIN
8525 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Service
Tables
Scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/FIN
8526 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from
within the document server mode window at the operation panel.
852x 1 Sort
852x 2 Stack
852x 3 Staple
SM 5-343 D059/D060/D061
852x 4 Booklet
852x 5 Z-Fold
852x 6 Punch
852x 7 Other
If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling, the
unstapled pages are still counted.
The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so jam
recoveries are counted.
This SP counts the amount of staples used by the machine.

8531 Staples
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8541 T: GPC Counter

Japan Only
8544 C: GPC Counter
T:Counter
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless of the
8581
application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters
are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
Note: This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this
machine, the count is done for black only.
D059/D060/D061 5-344 SM
O:Counter
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8591
These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pages
printed, and the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:)
applications only.
8591 1 A3/DLT
8591 2 Duplex
8591 3 Staple
8621 Func Use Counter NIA
001 to 064 Function 001 to 064
T:S-to-Email PGS
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Service
Tables
8651 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-mail for
both the Scan and document server applications.
S:S-to-Email PGS
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8655 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-mail for
the Scan application only.
SM 5-345 D059/D060/D061
The count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is stored on the
HDD. If the job is cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not counted.
If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses, the count is
10 (the pages are sent to the same SMTP server together).
If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, the count is 50
(the document is sent to each destination of the SMB/FTP server).
Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page
document to a large number of destinations, the count may be divided and
counted separately. For example, if a 10-page document is sent to 200 addresses,
the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and the count is also 10 for the second
100 destinations, for a total of 20.).
T:Deliv PGS/Svr
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8661 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan Router
server by both Scan and LS applications.
S:Deliv PGS/Svr
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8665 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan Router
server by the Scan application.
D059/D060/D061 5-346 SM
The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the HDD of
the Scan Router server.
If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes, the
counts are not done.
The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at the Scan
Router server.
T:Deliv PGS/PC
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8671 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder on a PC
(Scan-to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications.
S:Deliv PGS/PC
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8675 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with Scan-to-PC
with the Scan application.
Service
Tables
8691 T:TX PGS/LS These SPs count the number of pages sent from the
document server. The counter for the application that was
8692 C:TX PGS/LS
used to store the pages is incremented.
8694 P:TX PGS/LS [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from
8695 S:TX PGS/LS
panel. Pages stored with the Store File button from within the
8696 L:TX PGS/LS
Copy mode screen go to the C: counter.
SM 5-347 D059/D060/D061
Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the
count.
If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages stored is
counted for the application that stored them.
TX PGS/Port
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8701
These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to send
them. For example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via ISDN G4,
the count for ISDN (G3, G4) is 12.
8701 1 PSTN-1
8701 2 PSTN-2
8701 3 PSTN-3
8701 4 ISDN (G3,G4)
8701 5 Network
T:Scan PGS/Comp
8711 [0 to 9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the number of compressed pages scanned into the
document server, counted by the formats listed below.
8711 1 JPEG/JPEG2000
8711 2 TIFF (Multi/Single)
8711 3 PDF
8711 4 Other
D059/D060/D061 5-348 SM
S:Scan PGS/Comp
8715 [0 to 9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the number of compressed pages scanned by the scan
application, counted by the formats listed below.
8715 1 JPEG/JPEG2000
8715 2 TIFF (Multi/Single)
8715 3 PDF
8715 4 Other
8721 T: Deliv: PGS/WSD
Total number of pages sent via WSD (WS-Scanner for Web Services
Devices).
8725 S: Deliv PGS/WSD
Total number of pages sent via WSD (WS-Scanner for Web Services
Service
Tables
Devices).
001 B/W
002 Color
SM 5-349 D059/D060/D061
RX PGS/Port
8741 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port used to
receive them.
8741 1 PSTN-1
8741 2 PSTN-2
8741 3 PSTN-3
8741 4 ISDN (G3,G4)
8741 5 Network
Dev Counter
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8771 These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the development
rollers) for black and other color toners.
Note: For machines that do not support color, the Black toner count is the same as
the Total count.
Pixel Coverage Ratio

8781
This SP displays the number of toner bottles used. The count is done based on the
equivalent of 1,000 pages per bottle.
This SP displays the percent of space available on the document

LS Memory
8791 server for storing documents.
Remain
[0 to 100/ 0 / 1]
D059/D060/D061 5-350 SM
This SP displays the percent of toner remaining for each color. This SP
Toner
8801 allows the user to check the toner supply at any time.
Remain
[0 to 100/ 0 / 1]
This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply (1% steps) is better
than other machines in the market that can only measure in increments of 10 (10%
steps).
This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines. For this machine, the
count is done for black only
Toner [0 to 9999999]
8851 Coverage These SPs count the percentage of dot coverage for black and
0-10% other color toners.
8851
K Black toner
1
8851
Service
Tables
M Magenta toner Do not display for this machine.
2
8851
C Cyan toner
3
8851
Y Yellow toner
4
SM 5-351 D059/D060/D061
Toner [0 to 9999999]
8861
K Black toner
1
8861
2
8861
C Cyan toner
3
8861
Y Yellow toner
4
Toner [0 to 9999999]
8871
K Black toner
1
8871
2
8871
C Cyan toner
3
8871
Y Yellow toner
4
D059/D060/D061 5-352 SM
Toner [0 to 9999999]
31 -% other color toners.
8881
K Black toner
1
8881
2
8881
C Cyan toner
3
8881
Y Yellow toner
4
8891 Page/Toner Bottle Total number of pages per toner bottle.
8921 Cvr Cnt/Total Total number of pages to date.
Service
Tables
8901 Coverage Display (Toner Bottle: Previous) DFU
8911 Coverage Display (Toner Bottle: Before Previous) DFU
SM 5-353 D059/D060/D061
Machine Status
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8941
These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation
mode. These SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machine
operation for improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards.
Engine operation time. Does not include time while

8941 1 Operation Time controller is saving data to HDD (while engine is not
operating).
Engine not operating. Includes time while controller

8941 2 Standby Time saves data to HDD. Does not include time spent in
Energy Save, Low Power, or Off modes.
Includes time while the machine is performing

8941 3 Energy Save Time
background printing.
Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on.

8941 4 Low Power Time Includes time while machine is performing background
printing.
Includes time while machine is performing background

8941 5 Off Mode Time printing. Does not include time machine remains
powered off with the power switches.
8941 6 SC Total down time due to SC errors.
8941 7 PrtJam Total down time due to paper jams during printing.
8941 8 OrgJam Total down time due to original jams during scanning.
8941 9 Supply PM Wait End Total down time due to toner end.
D059/D060/D061 5-354 SM
AddBook Register
8951
These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data
registration.
8951 1 User Code User code registrations.
8951 2 Mail Address Mail address registrations.

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8951 4 Group Group destination registrations.
8951 6 F-Code F-Code box registrations.
Copy application registrations with the

8951 7 Copy Program
Program (job settings) feature.
Printer Printer application registrations with

8951 9 [0 to 255 / 0 / 255]
Program the Program (job settings) feature.
Scanner Scanner application registrations with

8951 10
Program the Program (job settings) feature.
Service
Tables
SM 5-355 D059/D060/D061
Printer SP Tables
5.21 PRINTER SP TABLES
1001 Bit Switch
001 Bit Switch 1 0 1
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 No I/O Timeout 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: The MFP I/O Timeout setting will have no effect. I/O Timeouts will
never occur.
bit 4 SD Card Save Mode 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: Print jobs will be saved to an SD Card in the GW SD slot.
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 [RPCS,PCL]: Printable area frame border 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: The machine prints all RPCS and PCL jobs with a border on the
edges of the printable area.
D059/D060/D061 5-356 SM
Printer SP Tables
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 Applying a collation Type Shift Normal

Collate Collate
A collation type (shift or normal) will be applied to all jobs that do not
already have a ‘Collate Type’ configured.
If #5-0 is enabled, this Bit Switch has no effect.
bit 3 [PCL5e/c,PS]: PDL Auto Switching 0: Enable 1: Disable
Disable: The MFPs ability to change the PDL processor mid-job.

Some host systems submit jobs that contain both PS and PCL5e/c. If Auto
PDL switching is disabled, these jobs will not be printed properly.
Service
Tables
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
SM 5-357 D059/D060/D061
Printer SP Tables
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 [PCL5e/c]: Legacy HP compatibility 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as

HP4000/HP8000.
In other words, the left margin defined in the job (usually "<ESC>*r0A")
will be changed to "<ESC>*r1A"
bit 3 DFU - -
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
004 Bit Switch 4 DFU - -
D059/D060/D061 5-358 SM
Printer SP Tables
1001 Bit Switch
Show "Collate Type", "Staple Type" and

"Punch Type" buttons on the operation Disable Enable
panel.
bit 0 If enabled, users will be able to configure a Collate Type, Staple Type, and
Punch Type from the operation panel. The available types will depend on
the device and configured options.
After enabling the function, the settings will appear under:
"User Tools > Printer Features > System"
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 Prevent SDK applications from altering Enable

Disable
the contents of a job.
If this BitSw is enabled, SDK applications will not be able to alter print
data. This is achieved by preventing SDK applications from accessing a
Service
Tables
module called the "GPS Filter".
Note: The main purpose of this BitSw is for troubleshooting the effects of
SDK applications on data.
bit 3 [PS] PS Criteria Pattern3 Pattern1
Change the number of PS criterion used by the PS interpreter to

determine whether a job is PS data or not.
Pattern3: includes most PS commands.
Pattern1: A small number of PS tags and headers
bit 4 Increase max number of the stored jobs Disable Enable

to 1000 jobs. (100) (1000)
Enable: Changes the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the
HDD via Job Type settings to 1000. The default is 100.
SM 5-359 D059/D060/D061
Printer SP Tables Rev. 07/22/2011
bit 5 Face-up output Disable Enable
Enable: All print jobs will be output face-up in the destination tray.
bit 6 Method for determining the image

Disable Enable
rotation for the edge to bind on.
Enable: the image rotation will be performed as they were in the

specifications of older models for the binding of pages of mixed orientation
jobs.
The old models are below:
- PCL: Pre-04A models
- PS/PDF/RPCS: Pre-05S models
bit 7 DFU - -
⇒ 1001 Bit Switch
006 bit 0 Disable Enable

DFU
thru 6 0 1
Bit 7 determines the timing of the PJL USTATUS JOB END sent when
multiple collated copies are being printed.
0 (default): JOB END is sent by the device to the client after the first copy
has completed printing. This causes the page counter to be incremented
Bit 7
after the first copy and then again at the end of the job.
1: JOB END is sent by the device to the client after the last copy has
finished printing. This causes the page counter to be incremented at the
end of each job.
1001 Bit Switch
Print path Disable Enable
bit 0 Enable: Simplex pages (in mixed simplex/duplex PS/PCL5 jobs only) and
the last page of an odd paged duplex job (PS, PCL5, PCL6), are always
routed through the duplex unit.
Not having to switch paper paths increases the print speed slightly.
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 DFU - -
D059/D060/D061 5-360 SM
Rev. 07/22/2011 Printer SP Tables
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 [PCL,PS]: Allow BW jobs to print without

Disable Enable
requiring User Code
Enable: BW jobs submitted without a user code will be printed even if
Service
Tables
usercode authentication is enabled.
Color jobs will not be printed without a valid user code.
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
SM 5-361 D059/D060/D061
Printer SP Tables
1003 Clear setting
Initialize Printer System

001
Initializes the settings in the printer feature settings of UP mode.
003 Delete Program DFU
Print Summary
1004
Touch [Execute] to print the printer summary sheets.
1005 Display Version.
Printer Application Version
Displays the version of the controller firmware.
Sample/Locked Print
This SP disables/enables use of the document server.

1006
[0 to 1/0/1]
0: Enabled. Document server can be used.
1: Disabled. Document server cannot be used.
D059/D060/D061 5-362 SM
Scanner SP Tables
5.22 SCANNER SP TABLES
1001 Scan Nv Version
Displays the scanner firmware version stored in NVRAM in a 9-digit format: Func.
Name_Model Name_History No.
Compression Type
1004 Selects the compression type for binary picture processing.

[1-3/1/1]
1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR
Erase Margin (Remote Scan)
1005 Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image.
If the machine has scanned the edge of the original, create a margin.
[0 to 5/0/1 mm]
Service
Tables
Remote Scan Disable
This SP switches the TWAIN scanner function on/off. This is one of the
1009 scanner application functions.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: ON (enabled)
1: OFF (disabled)
Non Display Clear Light PDF
This SP switches the Clear Light PDF display off/on.

1010
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Display ON
1: Display OFF
SM 5-363 D059/D060/D061
Scanner SP Tables
Org Count Display
This SP codes switches the original count display on/off.

1011
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF (no display)
1: ON (count displays)
User Info Release
This SP code sets the machine to release or not release the following items
at job end]
Destination (E-mail/Folder/CS)
Sender name
1012
Mail Text
Subject line
File name
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
1: Release
0: Do not release
Multi Media Func
This SP code enables/disables the multi-media function.

1013
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
D059/D060/D061 5-364 SM
User Service Program Mode Tables
5.23 USER SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
5.23.1 ADJUSTMENT SETTINGS FOR OPERATORS

Push [User Tools].
Touch [Adjustment Settings for Operators].
The operator SP codes are displayed.
You will not see the SP codes marked "Super User Only" in the SP tables below.
These "Super User" SP codes are displayed only after you enter the user SP
mode with the procedure below.
1 of 2
Adjust Image Position Adjust Image Position with Feed

0101 0102
Across Feed Direction Direction
Adjust Magnification Across

0104 0105 Adjust Magnification with Feed Direction
Feed Direction
Select Test Pattern for

0106 0107 Adjust Toner Fusing Temperature
Image Position Adjustment
Service
Tables
0108 Adjust Feed Speed 0109 Double Feed Detect
After Double Feed Paper is Auto Image Position Adjustment Across

0110 0111
Automatically Ejected Feed Detection
0113 Adjust Wide LCT Fan Level 0114 Adjust Wide LCT Fan Timer
Temperature/Humidity Around the

0116 Adjust Image Quality 0118
Machine
Adjust Staple Adjust Punch Position With Feed

0201 0202
Position/Finisher Dir./Finisher
Adjust Staple Position for

0301 0302 Adjust Folding Position for Booklet
Booklet
Adjust Staple Adjust Punch Position Across Feed

0303 0304
Position/Booklet Finisher Dir./Booklet Finisher
SM 5-365 D059/D060/D061
2 of 2
Adjust Punch Position With Feed Maximum Stack Quantity in

0305 0407
Dir./Booklet Finisher Stacker Tray
0501 Adjust Z-fold Position 1 0502 Adjust Z-fold Position 2
Adjust Letter Fold-out Position

0503 Adjust Half Fold Position 0504
1
0505 Adjust Letter Fold-out Position 2 0506 Adjust Letter Fold-in Position 1
Adjust Double Parallel Fold

0507 Adjust Letter Fold-in Position 2 0508
Position 1
Adjust Double Parallel Fold Position

0509 0510 Adjust Gate Fold Position 1
2
0511 Adjust Gate Fold Position 2 0512 Adjust Gate Fold Position 3
0901 Reset All Adjustment Settings.
5.23.2 ADJUSTMENT SETTINGS FOR SKILLED OPERATORS

To open the user SP mode with this procedure, you must have an assigned user name and
password.
The user name and password must be assigned by the system administrator.
For more details, please refer to the TCRU (Trained Customer Replacement Units)
manuals.
Push [User Tools].
Touch [Adjustment Settings for Skilled Operators].
Touch [Enter] to the right of "Login User Name".
On the soft keyboard enter your assigned user name and touch [OK].
Touch [Enter] to the right of "Login Password".
On the soft keyboard enter your assigned password and touch [OK].
The operator and skilled operator SP codes are displayed.
D059/D060/D061 5-366 SM
1 of 3
Adjust Image Position

0101 0102 Adjust Image With Feed Direction
Across Feed Direction
Adjust Magnification Across Feed

0103 Correct Image Skew 0104
Direction
Adjust Magnification With Select Test Pattern for Image Position

0105 0106
Feed Direction Adjustment
Adjust Toner Fusing

0107 0108 Adjust Paper Feed Speed
Temperature
After Double Feed Paper is

0109 Double Feed Detect 0110
Automatically Ejected
Auto Image Position

0111 Adjustment Across Feed 0112 Adjust Paper Feed Separation Time
Direction
0113 Adjust Wide LCT Fan Level 0114 Adjust Wide LCT Fan Timer
Service
Tables
0115 Adjust Image Density 0116 Adjust Image Quality
Temperature/Humidity around the

0117 Sensor Information 0118
Machine
0122 Remove Toner Cartridge 0201 Adjust Staple Position / Finisher
2 of 3
Adjust Punch Position With Feed Paper Alignment for Stapling

0202 0203
Dir./Finisher Across Feed Dir./Finisher
Paper Alignment for Stapling With Paper Alignment in Shift Tray

0204 0205
Feed Direction/Finisher Across Feed Dir./Finisher
Adjust Folding Position for

0301 Adjust Staple Position for Booklet 0302
Booklet
SM 5-367 D059/D060/D061
Adjust Staple Position/Booklet Adjust Punch Position Across

0303 0304
Finisher Feed Dir./Booklet Finisher
Adjust Punch Position With Feed Paper Alignment for Booklet

0305 0306
Dir./Booklet Finisher Across Feed Direction
Paper Alignment for Booklet with

0307 Set Number of Folds for Booklet 0308
Feed Dir.
Ppr.Alignmnt for Stapling Acros Ppr. Alignment in Shift Tray

0309 0310
Feed Dir./Booklet Finisher Across Feed Dir./Bklet Finisher
Ppr.Alignment for Stapling With

0311 0312 Punch Skew Correction
Feed Dir./Booklet Finisher
Paper Alignment in Stacker Tray

0313 Correct Punch Skew 0401
Across Feed Direction 1
Paper Alignment in Stacker Tray Paper Alignment in Stacker

0402 0403
With Feed Direction Across Feed Direction 2
3 of 3
Paper Alignment in 2nd Stacker Paper Alignment in 2nd Stacker

0404 0405
Tray Across Feed Dir. 1 Tray With Feed Direction
Paper Alignment in 2nd Stacker Maximum Stack Quantity in

0406 0407
Tray Across Feed Dir. 2 Stacker Tray
0501 Adjust Z-fold Position 1 0502 Adjust Z-fold Position 2
0503 Adjust Half Fold Position 0504 Adjust Letter Fold-out Position 1
0505 Adjust Letter Fold-out Position 2 0506 Adjust Letter Fold-in Position 1
D059/D060/D061 5-368 SM

0507 Adjust Letter Fold-in Position 2 0508
Position 1

0509 0510 Adjust Gate Fold Position 1
Position 2
0511 Adjust Gate Fold Position 2 0512 Adjust Gate Fold Position 3
Adjust Cover Sheet for Perfect

0601 0901 Reset All Adjustment Settings
Binding
Service
Tables
SM 5-369 D059/D060/D061
Input Check
5.24 INPUT CHECK
5.24.1 MAIN MACHINE INPUT CHECK: SP5803

This procedure allows you to test sensors and other components of the machine. After you
select one of the categories below by number, you will see a small 8-bit table with the
number of the bit and its current setting (0 or 1). The bits are numbered from 0 to 7, reading
from right to left.
Enter the class 3 number for the item that you want to check. A small box will be displayed
on the SP mode screen with a series of 0's and 1's where "0" means "Off" and "1" means
"On". The bits are arrayed as shown below.
Bit 76543210
Setting 11001010
Check the status of each item against the corresponding bit numbers listed in the table
below.
[1] [2] [3]
bit-7 Exit Unit Set Sensor bit-7 Cleaning Unit Set bit-7 -
bit-6 Exit Sensor bit-6 Pre-Charge Grid bit-6 -
bit-5 Job Time Sensor bit-5 Pre-Charge Corona bit-5 -
Exit Junction Gate

bit-4 bit-4 Total Counter Set bit-4 -
HP Sensor
Abnormal Polygon Mirror Motor

bit-3 bit-3 bit-3 -
Development Bias Cooling Fan
Abnormal Charge
bit-2 bit-2 - bit-2 -
Grid
D059/D060/D061 5-370 SM
Input Check
Abnormal Charge
Corona
Drum Motor Front Door

bit-0 bit-0 - bit-0
Overload Safety Switch
[4] [5] [6]
bit-7 - bit-7 Fusing Exit Sensor bit-7 -
Paper
Fusing Unit Set (Lower
bit-6 - bit-6 bit-6 Remains: 2nd
Drawer)
Tray 2
Paper
bit-5 - bit-5 ADF Open/Close bit-5 Remains: 2nd
Tray 1
Development
Fusing Unit Set:
bit-4 bit-4 Original Set bit-4 Toner Bottle
D061
Set Sensor
Service
Tables
Paper
Fusing Unit Set:
bit-3 bit-3 Key Counter Set bit-3 Remains: 3rd
D059/D060
Tray 2
Paper
Toner Collection
bit-2 bit-2 - bit-2 Remains: 3rd
Coils Sensor
Tray 1
Cleaning Web End Lower Limit

bit-1 bit-1 - bit-1
Sensor Sensor
Fusing Motor
Overload
[7] [8] [9]
SM 5-371 D059/D060/D061
Input Check
Tray 3 Paper Size Paper Remains: 1st Rear Fence

bit-7 bit-7 bit-7
Detection 1 Tray 4 Return Sensor
Left Tandem
Tray 3 Paper Size Paper Remains: 1st
bit-6 bit-6 bit-6 Tray Paper
Detection 2 Tray 2
Sensor
Tray 3 Paper Size Paper Remains: 1st Upper Toner

bit-5 bit-5 bit-5
Detection 3 Tray 3 Bottle Sensor
Toner
Tray 3 Paper Size Paper Remains: 1st Collection
bit-4 bit-4 bit-4
Detection 4 Tray 4 Bottle Agitator
Sensor
Upper Toner
Tray 3 Paper Size Rear Side Fence
bit-3 bit-3 bit-3 Bottle Inner
Detection 5 Closed Sensor
Cap Sensor
Front Side Fence Right Tandem Tray Toner Bank TE

bit-2 bit-2 bit-2
Open Sensor Paper Sensor Sensor
Toner
Front Side Fence Tandem Left Tray Set Collection
bit-1 bit-1 bit-1
Closed Sensor Sensor Bottle Set
Sensor
Toner
Collection
Rear Side Fence Rear Fence HP
bit-0 bit-0 bit-0 Bottle
Open Sensor Sensor
Overflow
Sensor
[10] [11] [12]
D059/D060/D061 5-372 SM
Input Check
Right Tandem
Lower Toner Bottle
bit-7 bit-7 - bit-7 Tray Set
Sensor
Sensor
Toner Bank Motor

Solenoid Overload
Lower Toner Bottle

Inner Cap Sensor
bit-4 - bit-4 - bit-4 -
Toner Collection Bottle

bit-3 - bit-3 bit-3 -
Near Full Sensor
bit-2 - bit-2 - bit-2 -
bit-1 - bit-1 - bit-1 Key Card Set
bit-0 - bit-0 - bit-0 -
[13] [14] [15]
Service
Tables
Duplex Transport
Sensor 3
Duplex Inverter Relay

Sensor 2
Duplex Entrance Guide Plate

bit-5 - bit-5 bit-5
Sensor Open Sensor
Duplex Transport IOB Board

bit-4 - bit-4 bit-4
Sensor 1 Type 1
Duplex Inverter Relay IOB Board

bit-3 - bit-3 bit-3
Sensor 1 Type 2
IOB Board
bit-2 - bit-2 Model Detect 2 bit-2
Type 3
SM 5-373 D059/D060/D061
Input Check
bit-1 - bit-1 Model Detect 1 bit-1 Drum Unit Set
Duplex Transport
bit-0 bit-0 Duplex Unit Set bit-0 -
Sensor 2
[16] [17] [18]
bit-7 DIP SW1 bit-7 Exit Motor OL bit-7 -
bit-6 DIP SW2 bit-6 - bit-6 -
Toner End
bit-2 DIP SW6 bit-2 - bit-2
Sensor
Development
Unit Set
Toner Suction
Motor Sensor
[19] [20] [21]
Toner Pump Motor 3rd Tray Lift

bit-7 bit-7 - bit-7
Sensor Sensor
Toner Cylinder TE 2nd Tray Lift

bit-6 bit-6 - bit-6
Sensor Sensor
Vertical
Development Motor
bit-5 bit-5 - bit-5 Transport
Overload
Sensor 2
D059/D060/D061 5-374 SM
Input Check
1st Paper Feed 3rd Paper End

bit-4 bit-4 - bit-4
Sensor Sensor
1st Paper End 3rd Paper

bit-3 bit-3 - bit-3
Sensor Feed Sensor
bit-2 1st Tray Lift Sensor bit-2 - bit-2 -
Vertical Transport
Sensor 1
bit-0 - bit-0 - bit-0 -
[22] [23] - [24] -
bit-7 - bit-7 - bit-7 -
Tray 2 Paper Size

Detection 5
Tray 2 Paper Size

Detection 4
Service
Tables
Tray 2 Paper Size
Detection 3
Tray 2 Paper Size

Detection 2
Tray 2 Paper Size

Detection 1
bit-1 - bit-1 - bit-1 -
bit-0 - bit-0 - bit-0 -
[35] [36] [37]
SM 5-375 D059/D060/D061
Input Check
1st Paper
3rd Vertical Transport
bit-7 - bit-7 bit-7 Width Sensor
Sensor 1 (LCT)
1 (LCT)
1st Paper
1st Vertical Transport
Sensor 2 (LCT)
2 (LCT)
1st Paper
1st Vertical Transport
Sensor 1 (LCT)
3 (LCT)
1st Paper
LCT Front Door
bit-4 bit-4 - bit-4 Length Sensor
Safety Switch
(LCT)
1st Paper
bit-3 - bit-3 - bit-3 Feed Sensor
(LCT)
1s Paper End
bit-2 - bit-2 - bit-2
Sensor (LCT)
2nd Vertical
1st Tray Lift
bit-1 Transport Sensor 1 bit-1 - bit-1
Sensor (LCT)
(LCT)
1st Transport
bit-0 LCT Exit Sensor bit-0 - bit-0
Sensor (LCT)
[38] [39] [40]
2nd Paper
1st Paper Height 2nd Paper Width
bit-7 bit-7 bit-7 Height Sensor
Sensor 1 (LCT) Sensor 1 (LCT)
1 (LCT)
D059/D060/D061 5-376 SM
Input Check
2nd Paper
2 (LCT)
2nd Paper
3 (LCT)
2nd Paper
1st Paper Height 2nd Paper Length
Sensor 4 (LCT) Sensor (LCT)
4 (LCT)
2nd Paper Feed

Sensor (LCT)
2nd Paper End Sensor

(LCT)
2nd Tray Lift Sensor

(LCT)
Service
Tables
2nd Transport Sensor
(LCT)
[41] [42] [43]
Bypass Paper
3rd Paper Width 3rd Paper Height
bit-7 bit-7 bit-7 Width Sensor
1
Bypass Paper
2
Bypass Paper
3
SM 5-377 D059/D060/D061
Input Check
Bypass Paper
3rd Paper Length 3rd Paper Height
Sensor (LCT) Sensor 4 (LCT)
4
Bypass Paper
3rd Paper Feed
bit-3 bit-3 - bit-3 Width Sensor
Sensor (LCT)
5
3rd Paper End Bypass Paper

bit-2 bit-2 - bit-2
Sensor (LCT) Length Sensor
3rd Tray Lift Sensor

(LCT)
3rd Transport Sensor

(LCT)
[44] [45] [46] -
Bypass Paper Height

Sensor 1
Bypass Height Sensor

2
bit-5 - bit-5 - bit-5 -
Bypass Lower Limit

Sensor
Bypass Paper Feed

bit-3 bit-3 Bypass Tray Lift bit-3 -
Sensor
Bypass Paper End

Sensor
Bypass Tray Lift Bypass Connection

bit-1 bit-1 bit-1 -
Sensor Detection
Bypass Transport
bit-0 bit-0 Bypass Slide Open bit-0 -
Sensor
D059/D060/D061 5-378 SM
Input Check
5.24.2 ADF INPUT CHECK: SP6007
Class 3 Bit Reading

Description
No. No.
0 1
Original
7 Inverter Sensor No original
detected
Original
6 Exit Sensor No original
detected
Original
5 Registration Sensor No original
detected
Original
4 Entrance Sensor No original
detected
1
Original
3 Original Width Sensor 3 No original
detected
Service
Tables
Original
detected
Original
detected
Original
0 Original Set Sensor No original
detected
SM 5-379 D059/D060/D061
Input Check
Class 3 Bit Reading

Description
No. No.
0 1
ADF Feed-in Motor Encoder Changes between "0" and "1"

7
Pulse during rotation
Not home
6 Pick-up Roller HP Sensor At home position
position
5 Bottom Plate Position Sensor Detected Not detected
2 Not home
4 Bottom Plate HP Sensor At home position
position
3 Exit Cover Sensor Close Open
2 Feed Cover Sensor Close Open
1 APS Start Sensor Start Off
0 DF Position Sensor Down Up
7 Not Used
6 Not Used
5 Not Used
4 Not Used
3 Not Used
3
Original
2 Original Length Sensor No original
detected
ADF Feed-out Motor Encoder Changes between "0" and "1"

1
ADF Transport Motor Encoder Changes between "0" and "1"

0
D059/D060/D061 5-380 SM
Input Check
5.24.3 OTHER INPUT CHECKS
Unit SP No.
3000-Sheet Finisher (B830) 6112
ADF (see above) 6007
Booklet Finisher (D434) 6218
Cover Interposer Tray (B835) 6400
Decurl Unit (D455) 5803
Main Machine (see above) 5803
Multi Folder Unit (D454) 6309
Service
Tables
SM 5-381 D059/D060/D061
Output Checks
5.25 OUTPUT CHECKS
Motors keep turning in output check mode regardless of upper or lower limit
sensor signals. To prevent mechanical or electrical damage, do not keep an
electrical component on for a long time.
Open SP mode.
Select the SP number that corresponds to the component you wish to check. (Refer to the
table below.)
Press On to test the selected item then press Off.
Units SP No.
3000-Sheet Finisher (B830) 6113
ADF 6008
Booklet Finisher (D434) 6219
Cover Interposer Tray (B835) 6401
Decurl Unit 5804
High Capacity Stacker 1 (D447) 6601
High Capacity Stacker 2 (D447) 6607
Main Machine 5804
Multi Folder (D454) 6310
Ring Binder (D392) 6509
Trimmer Unit (D455) 6651
D059/D060/D061 5-382 SM
Rev. 04/22/2010 Special Operations
5.26 SPECIAL OPERATIONS
5.26.1 FIRMWARE UPDATE

To update the firmware for this machine, you must have the new version of the firmware
downloaded onto an SD (Secure Digital) Card. The SD Card is inserted into the lower slot
on the right side of the controller box, viewed from the back of the machine.
Before You Begin…

An SD card is a precision device, so always observe the following precautions when
handling SD cards:
Always switch the machine off before inserting an SD card. Never insert the SD card
into the slot with the power on.
After the power has been switched on, never remove the SD card from the service slot.
Never switch the machine off while the firmware is downloading from the SD card.
Store SD cards in a safe location where they are not exposed high temperature, high
humidity, or exposure to direct sunlight.
Always handle SD cards with care to avoid bending or scratching them. Never drop an
SD card or expose it to other shock or vibration.
Keep the following points in mind while you are using the firmware update software:
Service
Tables
"Upload" means to send data from the machine to the SD card, and "download" means
to send data from the SD card to the machine.
To select an item on the LCD, touch the appropriate button on the soft touch-screen of
the LCD, or press the appropriate number key on the 10-key pad of the operation
panel. For example, "Exit (0)" displayed on the screen means you can touch the Exit
button on the screen, or press the "0" button on the operation panel of the copier.
Before starting the firmware update procedure, always make sure that the machine is
disconnected from the network to prevent a print job for arriving while the firmware
update is in progress.
⇒
If the Ring Binder (D392) is already installed in the machine, update the firmware
of the Ring Binder (D392) to "1.250:04" or later version before updating other
machines. Otherwise, updating the firmware of peripherals installed on the left
side of the Ring Binder may fail.
For updating the firmware for the Cover Interposer Tray (B835) and Perfect Binder
(D391), the updating procedure for these peripherals should be done separately.
SM 5-383 D059/D060/D061
Special Operations Rev. 06/25/2010
Updating Firmware
1. On the machine, switch off the main power switch.
⇒ [A]
[C]
[B]
2. With the label on the SD card [A] facing as shown in the diagram, insert the SD card
into service slot [B] (lower slot) on the right side of the controller box [C]. Slowly push
the SD card once into the slot so it locks in place.
3. Make sure the SD card is locked in place.
To remove the SD, push it in to unlock the spring lock and then release it so it
pops out of the slot.
4. If the machine is connected to a network, disconnect the network cable from the
copier.
5. Switch the main power switch on. After about 10 seconds, the initial version update
screen appears on the LCD in English.
D059/D060/D061 5-384 SM
KEY WHAT IT DOES
Press this button on the touch-screen (or  on the 10-key pad)

Firmware (1)
to open the firmware update screen.
Language Data Press this button on the touch-screen (or on the 10-key pad) to
(2) open the language update screen.
Press this key on the touch-screen (or  on the 10-key pad) to

Exit (0) quit the update procedure and return to normal machine
operation.
The firmware update and language update cannot be performed during the
same session. If you need to do both, do the firmware update, switch the
machine off and on to confirm the successful update of the firmware, then do
the language update.
6. Touch "Firmware (1)" to open the firmware update screen.
Service
Tables
SM 5-385 D059/D060/D061
ROM/NEW WHAT IT MEANS
Tells you the number of the module and name of the version presently
ROM: installed. The first line is the module number, the second line the
version name.
Tells you the number of the module and name version on the SD card.
NEW:
The first line is the module number, the second line the version name.
7. On the screen, touch the button or press the corresponding number key on the
operation panel to select the item in the menu that you want to update.
8. After pressing the module button, or entering the appropriate number with the 10-key
pad to select the module, the "Update" keys appear at the bottom of the screen.
The screen below shows only the "Printer" option selected for update.
D059/D060/D061 5-386 SM
KEY WHAT IT DOES
Update(#) Press this button (or ) to upgrade the selected module.
Exit(0) Press this button (or ) to return to the previous screen.
9. To start the update, touch "UpDate (#)" (or ).

After selecting "Update", three lines are displayed on the screen:
Service
Tables
The first line tells you what is happening, the second line is the name of the module,
and the third line tells you about the progress of the operation. As the update
progresses, the underscores (_) in the progress bar are replaced by asterisks.
The update is finished after all 10 underscores are replaced by asterisks.
The progress bar (*_ _ _ _) is not displayed for the operation panel firmware
after you touch "OpePanel". While the LCDC firmware is updating, the power
on key flashes on and off at 0.5 s intervals. When the update is finished, the
power key flashes on and off slower at 3 s intervals.
When the update is finished, you will see a screen like the one below:
SM 5-387 D059/D060/D061
The first line prompts you that the update is finished, and the second line tells you the
name of the module that has just been updated.
If you have selected more than one module for updating, only the screen for
the last module updated will be displayed.
10. When you see the "Update Done" message, switch the copier main power switch off.
11. Press in the SD card to release it, then remove it from the slot.
12. Switch the copier on for normal operation.
Error Messages
If an error occurs during the download, an error message will be displayed in the first line.
D059/D060/D061 5-388 SM
Special Operations
The error code consists of the letter "E" and a number. The example above shows error
"E24" displayed. For details, refer to the "Download Error Codes" table. (
Troubleshooting – Download Error Codes)
Firmware Update Error
If a firmware update error occurs, this means the update was cancelled during the update
because the module selected for update was not on the SD card.
Recovery After Power Loss

If the ROM update is interrupted as a result of accidental loss of power while the firmware
Service
Tables
is updating, then the correct operation of the machine cannot be guaranteed after the
machine is switched on again. If the ROM update does not complete successfully for any
reason, then in order to ensure the correct operation of the machine, the ROM update error
will continue to be displayed until the ROM is updated successfully.
In this case, just insert the card once again and switch on the machine to continue the
firmware download automatically from the card without the menu display.
Updating Browser Firmware

Remove the SD card slot cover.
Insert the SD card with the new firmware into the SD card slot.
SM 5-389 D059/D060/D061
Special Operations
Push the card in slowly until you hear a click.

Turn ON the main power switch.
Push the "User Tools" key.
Touch "Extended Feature Settings" twice on the LCD.
Touch "Uninstall" on the LCD.
Touch the "Browser" line.
A confirmation message is displayed on the LCD.

Touch "Yes".
Another confirmation message is displayed on the LCD.

Touch "Yes" to uninstall the browser unit.
You will see "Uninstalling the extended feature... Please wait.", and then "Completed".
Touch "Exit" to go back to the settings screen.
Exit "User/Tools", and then turn OFF the main power switch.
Remove the SD card from the SD card slot.
Save the "sdk" folder that contains the new firmware for the Browser Option in the HDD of
the PC.
Insert the SD card into the SD card reader connected to the PC.
Upload (overwrite) the new "sdk" folder to the SD card.
Install the new Browser Unit firmware in the machine. ( Installation – Browser Unit)
Updating the LCDC for the Operation Panel

Follow this procedure to update the LCDC (LCD Control Board).
Turn the copier main switch off.
Insert the SD card into service slot (lower slot).
Switch the copier main switch on.
After about 10 seconds the initial screen opens in English.
Touch "OpePanel".
D059/D060/D061 5-390 SM
Special Operations
Touch "UpDate(#) (or ) to start the update.

After about 9 seconds, the downloading starts and a progress bar appears.
While the data is downloading, the [Start] key LED flashes RED slowly then rapidly
near completion.
When the update is finished, the [Start] key flashes GREEN.
The LCDC update requires about 15 minutes to complete.
Switch the copier main power switch off, remove the SD card, then switch the copier on
again.
Downloading Stamp Data
Service
Tables
The stamp data should be downloaded from the controller firmware to the hard disks:
When the machine is installed.
After the hard disks have been replaced.
The print data contains the controller software, so execute SP5853 to download the fixed
stamp data required by the hard disks.
Enter the SP mode.
Select SP5853 then press "Execute". The following screen opens while the stamp data is
downloading.
SM 5-391 D059/D060/D061
Special Operations
The download is finished with the message prompts you to close.
Press the "Close" button then cycle the copier off and on again.
Installing Another Language

Many languages are available for selection, but only two can be selected for switching.
Follow this procedure to select the two languages, either of which can be selected for the
user interface on the operation panel.
Switch the copier main power switch off.
Insert the SD card with the language data into service slot (lower slot).
Switch the copier main power switch on. The initial screen opens after about 10 seconds.
Touch "Language (2)" on the screen (or press ).
D059/D060/D061 5-392 SM
Special Operations
Touch "LANG. 1(1)" or "LANG 2(2)
Key What it does
Touch this button on the screen (or press on the 10-key pad) to
LANG. 1(1)
open the next screen so you can select the 1st language.
Touch this button on the screen (or press on the 10-key pad) to
LANG. 1(2)
open the next screen so you can select the 2nd language.
Service
Tables
Touch this key on the screen (or press on the 10-key pad) to quit
Exit(0)
the update procedure and return to normal screen.
To select the 1st Language, touch "LANG 1(1)".

-or-
To select the 2nd Language, touch "LANG(2)".
SM 5-393 D059/D060/D061
Special Operations
Touch the appropriate button on the screen (or press the number on the 10-keypad) to
select a language as the 1st (or 2nd) Language.
If a language is already selected, it will be displayed in reverse.
Touching "Exit(0)" also returns the previous screen.
If you do not see the language that you want to select, touch "↑(7)" or "↓(9)" on the screen
(or press or ) to display more choices.
After you select a language, the Download Screen opens.
The 1st or 2nd language selected for updating is displayed.
To the right of the selection, the first column displays the language currently selected
and the 2nd column displays the language selected to replace that language.
The example below shows that the download will replace "Japanese" with "Italian" as
the 1st language.
D059/D060/D061 5-394 SM
Special Operations
Touch "Update(#)" on the screen (or press ) to start the download.

Another screen with a progress bar is not displayed while the language is
downloading.
While the language is downloading:
The operation panel switches off.
The LED on the power on key flashes rapidly.
After the Start LED begins to flash slowly, switch the copier main power switch off, then
remove the SD card from the slot.
Switch the copier main power switch on to resume normal operation.
Handling Firmware Update Errors

If an error occurs during a download, an error message will be displayed in the first line.
The error code consists of the letter "E" and a number ("E20", for example).
Error Message Table
Code Meaning Solution
Cannot map logical Make sure the SD card is inserted correctly, or use
20
address another SD card.
Cannot access
Service
21 HDD connection incorrect or replace hard disks.
Tables
memory
Cannot decompress
22 Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is corrupted.
compressed data
Error occurred when

Controller program abnormal. If the second attempt fails,
23 ROM update
replace controller board.
program started
Make sure SD card inserted correctly, or use another SD

24 SD card access error
card.
No HDD available for

30 HDD connection incorrect or replace hard disks.
stamp data download
Data incorrect for Insert the SD card with the remaining data required for the
31
continuous download download, then re-start the procedure.
SM 5-395 D059/D060/D061
Special Operations
Code Meaning Solution
Data incorrect after Execute the recovery procedure for the intended module
32
download interrupted download, then repeat the installation procedure.
Incorrect SD card
33 Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is corrupted.
version
Module mismatch -
SD update data is incorrect. Acquire the correct data
34 Correct module is not
(Japan, Overseas, OEM, etc.) then install again.
on the SD card)
Module mismatch – SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD card is

35 Module on SD card is for another machine. Acquire correct update data then
not for this machine install again.
Cannot write module SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD card is
36 – Cause other than for another machine. Acquire correct update data then
E34, E35 install again.
Engine module Replace the update data for the module on the SD card
40
download failed and try again, or replace the BCU board.
Operation panel
Replace the update data for the module on the SD card
42 module download
and try again, or replace the LCDC.
failed
Stamp data module Replace the update data for the module on the SD card
43
download failed and try again, or replace the hard disks.
Controller module Replace the update data for the module on the SD card
44
download failed and try again, or replace controller board.
Electronic SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD card is

50 confirmation check for another machine. Acquire correct update data then
failed install again.
D059/D060/D061 5-396 SM
Special Operations
5.26.2 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD

Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card
Follow this procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card.
This data should always be uploaded to an SD card before the NVRAM is

replaced.
Before switching the machine off, execute SP5990 001 (SMC Print). You will need a record
of the NVRAM settings if the upload fails.
Insert the SD card into service slot (lower slot), then switch the copier on.
Execute SP5824 001 (NVRAM Data Upload) then press the "Execute" key
When uploading is finished, the following files are coped to an NVRAM folder on the
SD card. The file is saved to the path and filename:
NVRAM¥<serial number>.NV
Here is an example with Serial Number "B0700017":
NVRAM¥B0700017.NV
In order to prevent an error during the download, be sure to mark the SD card that holds
the uploaded data with the number of the machine from which the data was uploaded.
Service
Tables
NVRAM data from more than one machine can be uploaded to the same SD card.
Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM

Follow this procedure to download SP data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine.
If the SD card with the NVRAM data is damaged, or if the connection between the
controller and BCU is defective, the NVRAM data down load may fail.
If the download fails, repeat the download procedure.
If the second attempt fails, enter the NVRAM data manually using the SMC print you
created before uploading the NVRAM data.
Insert the SD card with the NVRAM data into service slot (lower slot).
Switch the copier main power switch on.
Execute SP5825 001 (NVRAM Data Download) and press the "Execute" key.
SM 5-397 D059/D060/D061
Special Operations
In order for the NVRAM data to download successfully, the serial number of the file
on the SD card must match the serial number of the machine. If the serial numbers
do not match, the download will fail.
This procedure downloads the following data to the NVRAM:
Total Count
C/O, P/O Count
5.26.3 SMC LISTS

The SMC list prints system parameters and report data.
Access the SP mode corresponding to the list that you wish to print.
SP5-990-1: All (Data List)
SP5-990-2: SP (Mode Data List)
SP5-990-3: User Program Data
SP5-990-4: Logging Data
SP5-990-5: Diagnostic Report
SP5-990-7: Non-Default (Prints only SPs set to values other than defaults.)
SP5-990-8: NIB Summary
SP5-990-21: Capture Log
SP5-990-22: Copier User Program
SP5-990-23: Scanner SP
Touch the "Copy Window" key to access the copy mode display.
Select the paper size and press the "SP Mode" key to return the SP mode.
Press the "Execute" key to print the list.
Exit SP mode.
D059/D060/D061 5-398 SM
Special Operations
5.26.4 MEMORY ALL CLEAR: SP5801

As a rule, you should always print an SMC Report before initializing or adjusting the SP
settings. The SMC Report provides a concise list of all the SP commands and their current
settings. The report can be used for reference if the service manual is not available.
Execution of "Memory All Clear" resets all the settings stored in the NVRAM to their default
settings except the following:
SP5-811-1: Machine serial number
SP5-907: Plug & Play Brand Name and Production Name Setting
Execute SP5990 to print out all SMC Data Lists.

Open SP5801.
Press the number for the item that you want to initialize. The number you select determines
which application is initialized. For example, press 1 if you want to initialize all modules.
No. What It Initializes Comments
1 All modules Initializes items 2 to 15 below.
Service
Tables
Initializes all registration settings for the engine and
2 Engine
copy process settings.
SCS (System Control Initializes default system settings, CSS settings,

3
Service) /SRM operation display coordinates.
4 IMH Initializes the image file system.
MCS (Memory Control Initializes the automatic delete time setting for stored
5
Service) documents.
6 Copier application Initializes all copier application settings.
Initializes the printer defaults, programs registered,

8 Printer application the printer SP bit switches, and the printer CSS
counter.
SM 5-399 D059/D060/D061
Special Operations
No. What It Initializes Comments
Initializes the defaults for the scanner and all the

9 Scanner application
scanner SP modes.
Initializes all service-mode settings about access to

the document server from the DeskTopBinder
10 Network application software on a PC.
For example, initializes the resolution of images the

PC gets using the image converter board option.
Initializes the system defaults and interface settings

NCS (Network Control (IP addresses also), the SmartNetMonitor for Admin
11
Service) settings, WebStatusMonitor settings, and the
TELNET settings.
Initializes the DCS (Delivery & Receive Control

14 DCS
Server) settings.
Initializes the UCS (User Directory Control Server)

15 UCS
settings.
Press Execute, then follow the prompts on the display to complete the procedure.
Make sure that you perform the following settings:
Do the printer and scanner registration and magnification adjustments. (
Replacement and Adjustment – Copy Image Adjustments).
Execute SP2115 – Main Scan Beam Pitch Adjustment
Do the touch screen calibration ( Touch Screen Calibration).
Referring to the SMC data lists, re-enter any values, which had been changed
from their factory settings.
Execute SP 3001 002 – ID Sensor Initial Setting
Switch SP 3901 001 (Auto Process Control Setting) to 1 (On), if you wish auto
process control to be used.
Check the copy quality and the paper path, and do any necessary adjustments.
D059/D060/D061 5-400 SM
Special Operations
5.26.5 SOFTWARE AND COPY SETTING RESET

Software Reset
The software can be rebooted when the machine hangs up. Use the following procedure.
Turn the main power switch off and on.
-or-
Press and hold down and together for over 10 seconds. When the machine beeps
once, release both buttons. After "Now loading. Please wait" is displayed for a few seconds,
the copy window will open. The machine is ready for normal operation.
Resetting the System

The system settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults using the following
procedure.
Make sure that the machine is in the copier standby mode.
Press the User Tools key.
Hold down the "#" key and touch the "System Setting" key.
A confirmation message will be displayed, then press "Yes".
Resetting Copy/Document Server Features Only

The copy/document server settings in the user tools mode can be reset to their defaults
using the following procedure.
Service
Tables
Hold down the "#" key and touch "Copy/Document Server Features" key.
A confirmation message will be displayed, then press "Yes".
Resetting Scanner Features Only

The scanner settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults using the following
procedure.
Hold down the "#" key and touch the "Scanner Features" key.
A confirmation message will be displayed, then press "Yes
SM 5-401 D059/D060/D061
Special Operations
5.26.6 USING THE DEBUG LOG

Overview
This machine provides a Save Debug Log feature that allows the Customer Engineer to
save and retrieve error information for analysis.
Every time an error occurs, debug information is recorded in volatile memory but this
information is lost when the machine is switched off and on.
To capture this debug information, the Save Debug Log feature provides two main features:
Switching on the debug feature so error information is saved directly to the HDD for
later retrieval.
Copying the error information from the HDD to an SD card.
When a user is experiencing problems with the machine, follow the procedure below to set
up the machine so the error information is saved automatically to the HDD. Then ask the
user to reproduce the problem.
Switching On and Setting Up Save Debug Log

The debug information cannot be saved until the "Save Debug Log" function has been
switched on and a target has been selected.
Enter the SP mode.
Press S (Clear Modes) then use the 10-key pad to enter .
Press and hold down # (Clear/Stop) for more than 3 seconds.
Press "Copy SP" on the touch-panel.
Enter then press .
Under "5857 Save Debug Log", press .
On the control panel keypad, press "1" then press . This switches the Save Debug Log
feature on.
D059/D060/D061 5-402 SM
Special Operations
The default setting is "0" (OFF). This feature must be switched on in order for
the debug information to be saved.
Next, select the target destination where the debug information will be saved. Under "5857
Save Debug Log", touch "2 Target", enter "2" with the operation panel key to select the
hard disk as the target destination, then press .
Select "3 SD Card" to save the debug information directly to the SD card if it is
inserted in the service slot.
Now touch "5858" and specify the events that you want to record in the debug log. SP5858
(Debug Save When) provides the following items for selection.
Service
Saves data when an engine-related SC code is
Tables
1 Engine SC Error
generated.
Saves debug data when a controller-related SC Code

2 Controller SC Error
is generated.
Saves data only for the SC code that you specify by

3 Any SC Error
entering code number.
4 Jam Saves data for jams.
More than one event can be selected.

Example 1: To Select Items 1, 2, 4
Touch the appropriate items(s). Press "ON" for each selection. This example shows
"Engine SC Error" selected.
SM 5-403 D059/D060/D061
Special Operations
Example 2: To Specify an SC Code

Touch "3 Any SC Error", enter the 3-digit SC code number with the control panel
number keys, then press . This example shows an entry for SC670.
For details about SC code numbers, please refer to the SC tables in Section
"4. Troubleshooting"
Next, select the one or more memory modules for reading and recording debug information.
Touch "5859".
Under "5859" press the appropriate key item for the module that you want to record.
Enter the appropriate 4-digit number, then press .
Refer to the two tables below for the 4-digit numbers to enter for each key.
The example below shows "Key 1" with "2222" entered.
The following keys can be set with the corresponding numbers. (The initials in
parentheses indicate the names of the modules.)
D059/D060/D061 5-404 SM
Special Operations
4-Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10
Key No. Copy Printer Scanner Web
1 2222 (SCS)
2 2223 (SRM)
3 256 (IMH)
4 1000 (ECS)
5 1025 (MCS)
6 4848(COPY) 4400 (GPS) 5375 (Scan) 5682 (NFA)
7 2224 (BCU) 4500 (PDL) 5682 (NFA) 6600 (WebDB)
4600
8 3000 (NCS) 3300 (PTS)
(GPS-PM)
9 2000 (NCS) 2000 (NCS) 6666 (WebSys)
10 2224 (BCU) 2000 (NCS)
Service
Tables
The default settings for Keys 1 to 10 are all zero ("0").
SM 5-405 D059/D060/D061
Special Operations
Key to Acronyms
Acronym Meaning Acronym Meaning
ECS Engine Control Service NFA Net File Application
GPS GW Print Service PDL Printer Design Language
GW Print Service – Print

GSP-PM PTS Print Server
Module
IMH Image Memory Handler SCS System Control Service
System Resource
MCS Memory Control Service SRM
Management
Web Document Box

NCS Network Control Service WebDB
(Document Server)
The machine is now set to record the debugging information automatically on the HDD (the
target selected with SP5-857-002) for the events that you selected SP5-858and the
memory modules selected with SP5-859.
Please keep the following important points in mind when you are doing this setting:
Note that the number entries for Keys 1 to 5 are the same for the Copy, Printer,
Scanner, and Web memory modules.
The initial settings are all zero.
These settings remain in effect until you change them. Be sure to check all the settings,
especially the settings for Keys 6 to 10. To switch off a key setting, enter a zero for that
key.
You can select any number of keys from 1 to 10 (or all) by entering the corresponding
4-digit numbers from the table.
You cannot mix settings for the groups (COPY, PRINTER, etc.) for 006to010. For
example, if you want to create a PRINTER debug log you must select the settings from
the 9 available selections for the "PRINTER" column only.
One area of the disk is reserved to store the debug log. The size of this area is limited
to 4 MB.
D059/D060/D061 5-406 SM
Special Operations
Retrieving the Debug Log from the HDD

Insert the SD card into service slot of the copier.
Enter the SP mode and execute SP5857 009 (Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB) to write
the debugging data to the SD card.
The SD card can hold up to 4MB of data. If the debugging data is larger than
4MB, you can switch to another SD card.
Use a card reader to copy the file and send it for analysis to your local Ricoh representative
by email, or just send the SD card by mail.
Recording Errors Manually

Since only SC errors and jams are recorded to the debug log automatically, for any other
errors that occur while the customer engineer is not on site, please instruct customers to
perform the following immediately after occurrence to save the debug data. Such problems
would include a controller or panel freeze.
In order to use this feature, the customer engineer must have previously switched
on the Save Debug Feature (SP5857-001) and selected the hard disk as the save
destination (SP5857-002).
When the error occurs, on the operation panel, pressJ (Clear Modes).
Service
Tables
On the control panel, enter "01" then hold down \ for at least 3 sec. until the machine
beeps then release. This saves the debug log to the hard disk for later retrieval with an SD
card by the service representatives.
Switch the machine off and on to resume operation.
The debug information for the error is saved on the hard disk so the service
representatives can retrieve it on their next visit by copying it from the HDD to an SD
card.
SM 5-407 D059/D060/D061
Special Operations
New Debug Log Codes

SP5857-015: Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key
This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information written directly
from shared memory) to a log specified by key number. The copy operation is executed in
the log directory of the SD card inserted in the same slot. (This function does not copy from
one slot to another.) Each SD card can hold up to 4 MB of file data. Unique file names are
created for the data during the copy operation to prevent overwriting files of the same name.
This means that log data from more than one machine can be copied onto the same SC
card. This command does not execute if there is no log on the HDD for the name of the
specified key.
SP5857-016: Create a File on HDD to Store a Log
This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD. However, this is not a completely
empty file. The created file will hold the number "2225" as the SCS key number and other
non-volatile information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file is created on the HDD when
the first log is stored on the HDD, but this operation takes time. This creates the possibility
that the machine may be switched off and on before the log can be created completely. If
you execute this SP to create the log file beforehand, this will greatly reduce the amount of
time required to acquire the log information and save onto the HDD. With the file already
created on the HDD for the log file, the data only needs to be recorded; a new log file does
not require creation. To create a new log file, execute SP5857-011 to delete the debug log
data from the HDD and then execute this SP (SP5857-016).
SP5857-017: Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log
This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card. However, this is not a completely
empty file. The created file will hold the number "2225" as the SCS key number and other
non-volatile information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file is created on the SD card
when the first log is stored on the SD card, but this operation takes time. This creates the
possibility that the machine may be switched off and on before the log can be created
completely. If you execute this SP to create the log file beforehand, this will greatly reduce
the amount of time required to acquire the log information and save onto the SD card. With
the file already created on the SD card for the log file, the data only needs to be recorded; a
new log file does not require creation. To create a new log file, execute SP5857-012 to
delete the debug log data from the SD card and then execute this SP (SP5857-017).
D059/D060/D061 5-408 SM
Special Operations
5.26.7 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION

When the touch panel detection mechanism is not working properly, calibrate the touch
screen as follows:
Push [Clear], push 1993, and then press [Clear] 5 times.
Select "[1] Touch Screen Adjust".
[2] tests the LEDs on the operation unit, not the machine's main operation
panel. Keys [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] are for factory use only. Do not use unless
Service
Tables
directed by senior technical staff.
SM 5-409 D059/D060/D061
Special Operations
The "Touch Screen Adjustment" calibration screen will appear. Touch the center of the
circle in the upper left corner then the lower right corner of the panel using a pointer (but not
sharp!) tool.
Touch a few spots on the LED touch panel, and confirm that the marker appears on the
screen at exactly the same location as where it is touched. If it does not, touch "Re-input"
(or press the key) and repeat the calibration procedure.
Touch "OK" on the adjustment screen.
Touch "Exit" to exit the self diagnostic mode.
D059/D060/D061 5-410 SM
DETAILS
7 ~ 28 04/21/2010 Corrected Electrical Component Descriptions
163 08/25/2010 Corrected – Fusing Lamp Chart
Overview
6. DETAILS
6.1 OVERVIEW
6.1.1 OVERALL MACHINE LAYOUT
Details
1. Laser Diode Board 19. 3rd Separation Roller
2. Cleaning Brush 20. 3rd Paper Feed Roller
3. Cleaning Blade 21. 3rd Pickup Roller
4. 2nd Cleaning Blade 22. 3rd Tray (500 Sheets)
SM 6-1 D059/D060/D061
Overview
5. Quenching Lamp 23. 2nd Tray (500 Sheets)
6. SBU (Sensor Board Unit) 24. 1st Tray (Tandem Tray, 1,000 Sheets Each)
7. Pre-Charge Unit 25. Toner Collection Bottle
8. Charge Corona Unit 26. Toner Bank Unit
9. Exposure Lamps x2 27. Duplex Tray
10. Operation Panel 28. Switchback Roller
11. Drum 29. Inverter Roller 2
12. Development Unit 30. Inverter Roller 1
13. LCT Relay Roller 31. Pressure Roller
14. Registration Roller 32. Exit Roller
15. Transfer Belt Unit 33. Paper Cooling Pipe
16. Upper Relay Roller 34. Hot Roller
17. Vertical Relay Roller 35. Cleaning Fabric
18. 3rd Grip Roller 36. Drum Cleaning Unit
D059/D060/D061 6-2 SM
Overview
6.1.2 PAPER PATH
1. ADF 8. Inverter Unit
2. Bypass Tray 9. Decurl Unit
3. Optional LCT 10. Booklet Finisher
4. Tray 3 11. Shift Tray
5. Tray 2 12. Proof Tray
6. Tray 1 13. Cover Interposer
7. Duplex Unit Details
SM 6-3 D059/D060/D061
Overview
6.1.3 COPY PROCESS
Exposure
A Xenon lamp [1] exposes the original. Light reflected from the original passes to the CCD,
where it is converted into an analog data signal. This data is converted to a digital signal,
processed, and stored in the memory. At the time of printing, the data is retrieved and sent
to the laser diode. For multi-copy runs, the original is scanned once only and stored to the
hard disk.
Drum Charge
An OPC (organic photoconductor) drum is used in this machine. In the dark, first the
pre-charge unit [2] then the charge corona unit [3] give a negative charge to the drum. The
grid plate ensures that corona charge is applied uniformly. The charge remains on the
surface of the drum because the OPC layer has a high electrical resistance in the dark.
Laser Exposure
The processed data from the scanned original is retrieved from the hard disk and
transferred to the drum by four laser beams, which form an electrostatic latent image on the
drum surface. The amount of charge remaining as a latent image on the drum depends on
the laser beam intensity, which is controlled by the LDB [4] (laser diode board).
Drum Potential Measurement
D059/D060/D061 6-4 SM
Overview
The drum potential sensor [5] detects the electric potential on the drum to correct various
process control elements.
Development
The development rollers [6] turn and carry the developer to the drum. When the magnetic
developer brush on the development rollers contacts the drum surface, the high negative
charge of the white areas in the latent image force the toner with its low negative charge
into the black areas. This forced migration of toner over the latent image forms the copy
image on the drum.
Pre-Transfer
Light from the pre-transfer lamp [7] reduces the amount of charge on the drum surface to
improve the ease of image transfer.
Image Transfer
Paper is fed to the area between the drum surface and the transfer belt [8] at the proper
time to align the copy paper and the developed image on the drum. Then, the transfer bias
roller and brush apply a high positive charge to the reverse side of the paper through the
transfer belt. This positive charge pulls the toner particles from the drum to the paper. At
the same time, the paper is electrically attracted to the transfer belt.
Paper Separation
Paper separates from the drum as a result of the electrical attraction between the paper
and the transfer belt. The pick-off pawls [9] also help separate the paper from the drum.
ID Sensor Pattern Writing/Detection
The laser projects a sensor pattern on the drum surface. The ID sensor [10] measures the
reflectivity of this pattern. The output signal from this measurement is one of the factors
used for toner supply control.
Drum Cleaning
Details
The cleaning brush [11] removes toner remaining on the drum after image transfer. The
cleaning blade and a retractable 2nd cleaning blade clean toner from the surface of the
drum.
Quenching
The light from the quenching lamp [12] electrically neutralizes the charge on the drum
surface.
SM 6-5 D059/D060/D061
Overview
6.1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT
1. Drum Motor 10. 12nd Grip Motor
2. Scanner Motor 11. Vertical Relay Motor
3. Duplex Inverter Motor 12. 1st Grip Motor
4. Exit Motor 13. Upper Relay Motor
5. Fusing Motor 14. Registration Motor
6. Paper Feed Motor 15. Toner Supply Motor
7. 2nd Paper Feed Motor 16. Hopper Agitator Motor
8. 3rd Paper Feed Motor 17. Development Motor
9. 3rd Grip Motor
D059/D060/D061 6-6 SM
Rev. 04/21/2010 Overview
⇒ 6.1.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS

Refer to the electrical component layout on the reverse side of the point-to-point diagram
for the location of the components using the symbols and index numbers.
Copier Engine
Number Name Description
Clutches
Transfers drive from the toner bank motor to the

CL1 Toner Supply Coil Clutch toner transport coil, to transport toner towards the
toner supply cylinder.
Heaters
Optics Anti-condensation Turns on when the main switch is off to keep the
H1
Heater scanner unit dry.
Transfer Turns on when the main switch is off to keep the

H2
Anti-Condensation Heater transfer unit dry.
Tray Anti-Condensation Turns on when the main switch is off to keep

H3
Heater 1 (Upper) paper dry in the paper trays.
Tray Anti-Condensation Turns on when the main switch is off to keep

H4
Heater 2 (Lower) paper dry in the paper trays.
LCT Anti-Condensation Turns on when the main switch is off to keep

H5 Details
Heater paper dry in the paper trays of the LCT.
Lamps
Applies high intensity light to the original for

L1 Exposure Lamp 1
exposure.
Applies high intensity light to the original for

L2 Exposure Lamp 2
exposure.
L3 Fusing Lamp 1 Provides heat to the hot roller.
SM 6-7 D059/D060/D061
Overview Rev. 04/21/2010
Pre-Transfer Lamp. Just before image transfer,

the PTL flashes light on the drum to weaken the
L6 PTL
attraction between the toner and the drum. This
makes the toner transfer to the paper easier.
Neutralizes any charge remaining on the drum

QL1 Quenching Lamp
surface after cleaning.
Motors
Scanner Motor Cooling

M1 Cools the scanner motor.
Fan
Scanner Unit Exhaust Cools the scanner optics. Not: "optics exhaust
M2
Fan fan".
Lamp Regulator Fan

M3 Cools the area around the right lamp regulator.
(Right)
Lamp Regulator Fan

M4 Cools the area around the left lamp regulator.
(Left)
M5 Scanner Intake Fan Cools the scanner optics. Not: "optics fan"
M6 SBU Cooling Fan Removes heat from around the SBU.
M7 Scanner Motor Drives the 1st and 2nd scanners.
M8 Polygon Mirror Motor Drives the polygon mirror in the laser optics unit
Drives the air pump that creates the vacuum to

M9 Toner Suction Motor draw loose toner from the development unit to the
development unit toner collection bottle.
Development Unit Cooling

M10 Removes heat from the development unit.
Fan Motor 1
Development Unit Cooling

M11 Removes heat from the development unit.
Fan Motor 2
D059/D060/D061 6-8 SM
M12 An independent stepper motor that drives the

Toner Supply Motor
toner supply roller.
Transport Motor Cooling

M13 Removes heat from the transport motor.
Fan
M14 Drum Cooling Fan Blows cool air around the drum.
Transport Pipe Cooling Cools the toner transport pipe between the toner
M15
Fan entrance bank and the toner cylinder.
Toner Cylinder Agitator Drives the agitator inside the toner supply cylinder
M16
Motor to prevent clumping inside the cylinder.
M17 Development Motor Drives the development unit.
Drives the agitator that agitates the toner in the

M18 Hopper Agitator Motor
toner hopper to prevent clumping.
Drives the exit rollers that feed the paper out of

M19 Exit Motor
the machine.
M20 Fusing Motor Drives the fusing unit.
M21 Cleaning Fabric Motor Drives the oil supply/cleaning fabric.
Draws hot air from around the drum and the

M22 Drum Exhaust Fan
charge corona unit.
Polygon Mirror Motor Removes heat from around the polygon mirror Details
M23
Cooling Fan motor.
Cleaning Unit Cooling

M24 Cools the area around the cleaning unit.
Fan
Drives the drum, cleaning unit, and transfer belt

M25 Drum Motor
unit.
Raises and lowers the bottom plate in the 1st

M26 1st Tray Lift Motor
paper tray.
Raises and lowers the bottom plate in the 2nd

M27 2nd Tray Lift Motor
paper tray.
SM 6-9 D059/D060/D061
Raises and lowers the bottom plate in the 3rd

M28 3rd Tray Lift Motor
paper tray.
Toner Collection Bottle Drives the coil that agitates the used toner in the
M29
Agitator Motor toner collection bottle.
Drives the toner transport coil, which feeds fresh

M30 Toner Bank Motor toner from the toner bank to the toner supply
cylinder.
Rotates the lower toner bottle to supply toner to

M31 Lower Toner Bottle Motor
the toner entrance tank.
Opens and closes the inner cap of the lower toner

M32 Lower Bottle Cap Motor
bottle.
Rotates the upper toner bottle to supply toner to

M33 Upper Toner Bottle Motor
the toner entrance tank.
Opens and closes the inner cap of the upper

M34 Upper Bottle Cap Motor
toner bottle.
Moves the paper stack in the left tandem tray to

M35 Rear Fence Drive Motor
the right tandem tray.
Performs two functions: 1) Drives the pick-up

roller in the 3rd tray, and 2) Drives the grip roller
M36 3rd Paper Feed Motor
that feeds paper from the 3rd tray to the grip
roller.

roller in the 2nd tray, and 2) Drives the grip roller
M37 2nd Paper Feed Motor
that feeds paper from the 2nd tray to the grip
roller.

M38 1st Paper Feed Motor roller in the 1st tray, and 2) Drives the grip roller
that feeds paper from the 1st tray to the grip roller.
Performs two functions: 1) Drives the separation

M39 3rd Grip Motor
roller in the 3rd tray, and 2) Drives the grip roller
D059/D060/D061 6-10 SM
that feeds paper from the 3rd tray into the vertical
feed path.

roller in the 2nd tray, and 2) Drives the grip roller
M40 2nd Grip Motor
that feeds paper from the 2nd tray into the vertical
feed path.
Feeds paper between the 2nd transport rollers

M41 Vertical Relay Motor below and the 1st transport rollers below. This
motor is needed due to the height of the 1st tray.

roller in the 1st tray, and 2) Drives the grip roller
M42 1st Grip Motor
that feeds paper from the 1st tray into the vertical
feed path.
M43 Registration Motor Drives the registration rollers.
Drives the upper relay rollers that transport paper

M44 Upper Relay Motor to the registration rollers, the duplex exit roller,
and the LCT relay roller.
Mounted between the toner hopper and the toner

supply cylinder, this pumps the toner that the
M45 Toner Supply Pump Motor
supply cylinder has received from the toner bank
into the toner hopper.
Details
M46 Switchback Motor Drives the switchback roller in the duplex unit.
M47 Duplex Transport Motor Drives the transport rollers of the duplex unit.
Drives these rollers in the duplex unit: (1) Duplex

transport roller 2, (2) Duplex transport roller 1, (3)
M48 Duplex Inverter Motor
Inverter roller 1, (4) Inverter roller 2, (5) Inverter
relay roller.
M49 Duplex Entrance Motor Feeds paper to the duplex unit.
Toner Collection Unit

M50 Removes heat from the toner collection unit.
Cooling Fan
SM 6-11 D059/D060/D061
M51 Power Pack Fan Removes heat from the power pack.
M52 Paper Cooling Pipe Fan 2 Cools the paper cooling pipe.
M53 Paper Cooling Pipe Fan 1 Cools the paper cooling pipe.
Charge Corona Wire

M54 Drives the charge corona wire cleaner.
Cleaner Motor
Removes heat from the horizontal paper path of

M55 Duplex Cooling Fan the duplex/inverter unit. Note: Number of duplex
fans has increased to 3
Removes heat from around the entrance to the

Duplex Entrance Cooling
M56 duplex/inverter unit. Note: Number of duplex fans
Fan 2
has increased to 3
Removes heat from around the entrance to the

Duplex Entrance Cooling
M57 duplex/inverter unit. Note: Number of duplex fans
Fan 1
has increased to 3
M58 Paper Dehumidifier Fan Removes water vapor around the paper exit unit.
Removes water vapor from around the fusing

M59 Moisture Removal Fan
unit.
Operates the duplex junction gate which guides

M60 Exit Junction Gate Motor paper straight out of the machine or sends it down
into the inverter/duplexer.
M61 PSU Box Fan 3 Cools the PSU-E board.
Controller Box Cooling

M64 Cools the controller box interior.
Fan
M65 CPU Fan Cools the CPU on the controller board.
D059/D060/D061 6-12 SM
PCBs
PCB1 CNB (Connector Board) Interfaces between the BICU and SIB.
SBU (Sensor Board Unit): Contains the CCD.

PCB2 SBU Converts the CCD output to digital before sending
it to the IPU (Image Processing Unit).
The SIB (Scanner Interface Board) controls the

PCB3 SIB scanner, and serves as the signal I/F board for
the IPU and MCU.
Controls the Xenon exposure lamp in the flat bed

PCB4 Lamp Regulator (Left)
scanner
Controls the Xenon exposure lamp in the flat bed

PCB5 Lamp Regulator (Right)
scanner
MCU (Motor Control Unit). Controls the scanner

PCB6 MCU
motor.
The operation panel unit interfaces with the CPU

PCB7 OPU
and runs the copier user interface.
BCU (Base-Engine Image-Processing Control

Unit): Main control board, controls the engine
PCB8 BICU
sequence, timing for peripherals, image
processing, and the video data path Details
Polygon Mirror Motor

PCB9 Controls the polygon motor.
Control Board
LDB (Laser Diode Board): The LDB contains and

PCB10 LDB
controls the laser diodes.
Laser Synchronization Detects when the laser is about to start another

PCB11
Detector Board main scan line across the OPC
SM 6-13 D059/D060/D061
IOB (Input/Output Board): The IOB handles the

following functions: (1) Drive control for the
sensors, motors, and solenoids of the main unit,
PCB12 IOB
(2) PWM (pulse width modulation) control for the
high voltage supply board, (3) Serial interface
with peripherals, (4) Fusing control.
The image position sensor in the paper bank that

Image Position Sensor detects the edges of paper fed from the copier
PCB13
Board (Tray) paper bank (trays 1, 2, 3) for image position
correction during simplex printing.
Controls the double-feed sensors and registration

PCB14 URB
sensor.
The image position sensor in the paper bank that

Image Position Sensor detects the edges of paper fed from the copier
PCB15
Board (Duplex) paper bank (trays 1, 2, 3) for image position
correction of during duplex printing.
Drives the ac components (fusing lamps,

PCB16 AC Drive Board
anti-condensation heaters).
PSU-E (Power Supply Unit-Engine A): Supplies

PCB17 PSU-Ea
DC power for the IOB, LCT, OPU, IPU.
The microswitches that toggle the power to the

PCB18 Interlock Relay Board laser unit off/on when the doors are open/closed
are mounted on this small board.
PSU-C (Power Supply Unit-Controller): Supplies

PCB19 PSU-c
DC power for the controller.
PSU-E (Power Supply Unit-Engine B): Supplies

PCB20 PSU-Eb DC power for the two PSU fans, the MCU and the
Relay Interlock Switch.
D059/D060/D061 6-14 SM
Controls the memory and all peripheral devices.

The GW architecture allows the board to control
all applications, i.e. copying, printing, and
PCB21 Controller Board
scanning. In order to add an option (printer,
scanner), the appropriate ROM DIMM must be
installed on the controller.
Power Packs
This power pack supplies the charge to the image

PP1 Transfer Power Pack transfer roller that pulls the image off the drum
and onto the paper.
Provides high voltage for the charge corona

PP2 CGB Power Pack
wires, grid plate, and the development roller.
Provides high voltage for the corona wires and

PP3 PPG Power Pack
grid plate in the pre-charge unit.
Sensors
Informs the CPU when the 1st and 2nd scanners

S1 Scanner HP Sensor
are at home position.
APS1 (a board) holds 3 original width sensors

under the exposure glass. The detection
combinations of these sensors are sent to the
Details
CPU to determine the width of the original on the
exposure glass positioned for LEF. Each sensor
consists of an LED and receptor pair to detect the
width of paper on the exposure glass above.
S2 Original Width Sensors
APS2, APS3 (boards) each hold 1 original length
sensor under the exposure glass. The detection
combinations of these sensors are sent to the
CPU to determine the length of the original on the
exposure glass positioned for SEF. Each sensor
consists of an LED and receptor pair to detect the
width of paper on the exposure glass above.
SM 6-15 D059/D060/D061
S3 Original Length Sensor 1 Detects the original length.
S4 Original Length Sensor 2 Detects the original length.
Toner Suction Bottle Monitors the rotation of the toner suction bottle
S5
Rotation Sensor motor.
The Toner Density sensor measures the

S6 TD Sensor concentration of toner in the toner-developer
mixture.
S7 Toner Hopper Sensor Monitors the level of toner in the toner supply unit.
Toner Pump Motor Detects whether the toner supply pump motor is
S8
Sensor rotating.
Signals toner end (TE) when the toner supply

S9 Toner End Sensor
cylinder is empty.
Toner Collection Coil Detects whether the coil of the toner collection
S10
Sensor unit is rotating.
Cleaning Fabric End Detects when the oil supply/cleaning fabric has
S11
Sensor been used up.
S12 Fusing Exit Sensor Detects misfeeds.
Temperature/Humidity Monitors the temperature and humidity inside the

S13
Sensor machine.
Located in the toner entrance bank, this sensor

detects toner falling from the toner supply bottle.
S14 Toner Bottle End Sensor When the bottle runs out of toner, this sensor
signals the machine to switch to the other toner
bottle.
Toner Collection Bottle Detects when the toner collection bottle agitator
S15
Agitator Sensor motor locks.

S16 Detects when the toner collection bottle is full.
Overflow Sensor
D059/D060/D061 6-16 SM
S17 Lower Bottle Inner Cap Detects when the inner cap of the lower toner
Sensor bottle is opened.
Lower Toner Bottle

S18 Detects when the lower toner bottle is set.
Sensor
Upper Toner Bottle Inner Detects when the inner cap of the upper toner
S19
Cap Sensor bottle is opened.
Upper Toner Bottle

S20 Detects when the upper toner bottle is set.
Sensor
Left 1st Tray Paper Detects whether there is paper in the left side of
S21
Sensor the 1st tray.
Rear Fence Return Informs the CPU when the tandem tray rear fence
S22
Sensor is in the return position.
Informs the CPU when the tandem tray rear fence

S23 Rear Fence HP Sensor
is in the home position.
Right Tray Paper Set Detects paper in the right side of the tandem tray
S24
Sensor (Tray 1).
1st Tray Paper Height 4 Detects the paper height in the 1st tray (tandem
S25
Sensor tray), stage 4.
S26
Details
S27
S28
After the tandem tray is empty, the tray lowers

S29 Lower Limit Sensor
until this sensor detects the tray.
Rear Side Fence Closed Detects whether the tandem tray rear side fence
S30
Sensor is closed.
SM 6-17 D059/D060/D061
S31 Rear Side Fence Open Detects whether the tandem tray rear side fence
Sensor is opened.
Front Side Fence Closed Detects whether the tandem tray front side fence
S32
Sensor is closed.
Front Side Fence Open Detects whether the tandem tray front side fence
S33
Sensor is opened.
Vertical Transport Sensor

S34 Detects misfeeds in the vertical feed path.
3
Detects the correct paper height for feeding in the

S35 3rd Tray Lift Sensor
3rd tray.
S36 3rd Paper End Sensor Informs the CPU when tray 3 runs out of paper.
Controls the 3rd paper feed motor on/off timing

S37 3rd Paper Feed Sensor
and the 1st pick-up solenoid off timing.

2

S39 2nd Tray Lift Sensor
2nd tray.
S40 2nd Paper End Sensor Informs the CPU when tray 2 runs out of paper.
Controls the 2nd paper feed motor on/off timing

S41 2nd Paper Feed Sensor

1

S43 1st Tray Lift Sensor
1st tray.
S44 1st Paper End Sensor Informs the CPU when tray 1 runs out of paper.
Controls the 1st paper feed motor on/off timing

S45 1st Paper Feed Sensor
D059/D060/D061 6-18 SM
A CIS located in the vertical feed path before the

Image Position Sensor last pair of transport rollers before the registration
S46
(Tray) roller. Detects the edges of the paper and corrects
the side-to-side image position within 1 mm.
S47 LCT Relay Sensor Detects misfeeds.
S48 Upper Relay Sensor Detects misfeeds.
Guide Plate Open/Close

S49 Detects whether the guide plate is open or close.
Sensor
The paper detection LED and sensor are used in

the new automatic double-feed detection feature.
Double-Feed Detection
S50 This LED emits light which is reflected from the
LED
paper to the double–feed detection sensor to test
the translucence of each sheet.
Receives the light emitted from the double–feed

detection LED and reflected from the surface of
Double-Feed Detection
S51 each sheet in the paper path. Signals an error if
Sensor
the thickness of the paper (due to a double-feed)
is not the same as the previous sheet.
Detects misfeeds and controls registration motor

S52 Registration Sensor
on/off timing.
Details
A CIS located in the duplex path where the
inverted sheets reenter the paper feed path for
Image Position Sensor
S53 printing on the 2nd side. Detects the edges of the
(Duplex)
paper and corrects the side-to-side image
position within 1 mm.
Duplex Transport Sensor

S54 Detects the position of paper in the duplex unit.
2

1
SM 6-19 D059/D060/D061
S56 Detects when to turn the inverter gate and exit

Duplex Inverter Sensor
gate solenoids off and checks for misfeeds.
Detects the leading and trailing edges of the

S57 Duplex Entrance Sensor paper to determine the reverse roller solenoid on
or off timing.
Duplex Inverter Relay Monitors timing of sheets in the vertical paper

S58
Sensor path and detects paper jams.

3
S60 Drum Potential Sensor Detects the drum surface potential.
Image density sensor detects the density of the ID

S61 ID Sensor
sensor pattern on the drum.
Exit Junction Gate HP Detects the home position of the exit junction
S62
Sensor gate.
Mounted above the paper path to the left of the

cooling pipe. This photo sensor switches off when
it detects the leading edge of the first sheet of a
job, then switches on 2 sec. after the trailing edge
S63 Job Time Sensor of the last sheet exits from under the cooling pipe.
This sensor measures the time between its off/on
state. The machine uses this time count to
calculate the rate of consumption of the fusing
fabric.
S64 Exit Sensor Detects misfeeds.
Solenoids
Opens the guide plate when a paper misfeed

SOL1 Guide Plate Solenoid
occurs around this area.
Controls the up-down movement of the transfer

SOL2 Transfer Belt Lift Solenoid
belt unit.
D059/D060/D061 6-20 SM
SOL3 2nd Cleaning Blade

Controls the operation of the 2nd cleaning blade.
Solenoid
Left Tandem Tray Lock Locks the left tandem tray while paper is being
SOL4
Solenoid transported from left tray to right tray.
Tandem Tray Connect Connects/disconnects the two halves of the

SOL5
Solenoid tandem tray.
Rear Side Fence Opens and closes the rear side fence in the
SOL6
Front Side Fence Opens and closes the front side fence in the
SOL7
3rd Separation Roller Controls the up-down movement of the

SOL8
Solenoid separation roller in tray 3.
Controls the up-down movement of the pick-up

SOL9 3rd Pick-up Solenoid
roller in tray 3.
2nd Separation Roller Controls the up-down movement of the

SOL10

SOL11 2nd Pick-up Solenoid
roller in tray 2.
1st Separation Roller Controls the up-down movement of the

SOL12
Details

SOL13 1st Pick-up Solenoid
roller in tray 1.
Opens and closes the LCT guide plate between

SOL14 LCT Guide Plate Solenoid
the LCT and the bypass tray.
SM 6-21 D059/D060/D061
In duplex mode, after the sheet is jogged and fed

out of the inverter this solenoid energizes to open
Duplex/Inverter Junction the duplex inverter gate to guide the paper to the
SOL15
Gate Solenoid duplex unit below. In invert mode, the solenoid
remains closed and the paper goes face-down
out to the output tray or the finisher.
Operates the switchback junction gate. Raises

the gate to allow paper to enter the inverter tray.
Switchback Junction Gate
SOL16 Lowers the gate to prevent paper from re-entering
Solenoid
the vertical path after the switchback roller
reverses to send the paper out of inverter tray.
Switchback Idle Roller Controls the contact of the switchback idle roller
SOL17
Solenoid with the switchback roller.
Toner Recycling Shutter Controls the shutter mechanism in the toner

SOL18
Solenoid recycling system.
Switches
Right Front Door Safety Cuts the 24V power from the PSU-E to the IOB
SW1
Switch when the front right door is opened.
Left Front Door Safety Cuts the +5 LD dc power to disable the LD unit
SW2
Switch when the front left door is open.
2nd Cleaning Blade Monitors the operation of the release mechanism

SW3
Release Switch of the 2nd cleaning blade.
Toner Suction Bottle Set Detects whether the toner suction bottle is
SW4
Switch installed or set correctly.

SW5 Detects when the toner collection bottle is set.
Set Switch
Detects whether the toner bottle front door is

Toner Bottle Front Door
SW6 open or close. When the toner bottle front door is
SW
open, the power to the toner bank motor, toner
D059/D060/D061 6-22 SM
supply coil clutch and toner collection bottle

agitator motor is cut.
SW7 Right Front Door Safety Cuts the 24V power from the PSU-E to the IOB
Switch 2 when the front left door is opened.
Left Front Door Safety Cuts the 24V power from the PSU-E to the IOB
SW8
Switch 2 when the front left door is opened.
A push switch that detects when the cleaning unit

SW9 Cleaning Unit Set SW
is set correctly.
Provides back-up high current protection for the

SW10 Circuit Breaker
electrical components.
Provides power to the machine. If this is off, there

SW11 Main Power Switch
is no power supplied to the machine.
Determines the size of paper in tray 3. Also

3rd Tray Paper Size
SW12 detects when the tray has been placed in the
Switches
machine.
Determines the size of paper in tray 2. Also

2nd Tray Paper Size
SW13 detects when the tray has been placed in the
Switches
machine.
Fusing Unit Set Detection These are the pins that complete a circuit to tell
Pins whether the fusing unit is installed or set correctly. Details
TC
TC1 Total Counter Counts the total number of copies.
TH
Touches the hot roller and measures its

TH1 Thermistor (Fusing Unit) temperature. These temperature readings are
used to control operation of the fusing lamps.
SM 6-23 D059/D060/D061
Measures the surface temperature of the drum.

TH2 Thermistor (Drum Unit) The measured temperature is used for a
reference value of the process control.
TS
One of a pair of wafer thermostats mounted

directly above the center of the hot roller to
TS1/2 Thermostat 1/2
monitor the temperature of the hot roller and
signal the CPU to switch it off if it overheats.
A pair of wafer thermostats (198°C, 199°C)

mounted directly above the center of the hot roller
TS3/4 Thermostat 3/4
to monitor the temperature of the hot roller and
signal the CPU to switch it off if it overheats.
Other
Scanned image data is compressed and held

HDD HDD
here temporarily.
NF1 Noise Filter Filters noise from the ac power supply.
D059/D060/D061 6-24 SM
ADF
Symbol Name Function
Motors
M1 Pick-up Moves the pick-up roller up and down.
Drives the feed belt, and the separation, pick-up, and transport
M2 Feed-in
rollers.
Transport
M3 Drives the transport belt.
Belt
M4 Feed-out Drives the exit and inverter rollers.
Bottom
M5 Moves the bottom plate up and down.
Plate
Sensors
Informs the CPU when the DF is opened and closed (for platen
S1 APS Start mode) so that the original size sensors in the copier can check the
original size.
S2 DF Position Detects whether the DF is lifted or not.
S3 Original Set Detects whether an original is on the table.
Bottom
S4 Detects whether the bottom plate is in the down position or not.
Plate HP Details
Bottom
S5 Plate Detects when the original is at the correct position for feeding.
Position
Pick-up
S6 Detects whether the pick-up roller is up or not.
Roller HP
Detects when to restart the pick-up motor to lift up the pick-up

roller, detects when to change the feed motor direction, detects the
S7 Entrance
trailing edge of the original to finish checking the original length,
and checks for misfeeds.
SM 6-25 D059/D060/D061
S8 Detects the leading edge of the original to check the original

Registration length, detects when to stop the original on the exposure glass,
Original
S9 Detects the original width.
Width 1
Original
Width 2
Original
Width 3
Original
S12 Detects the original length.
Length
Detects when to stop the transport belt motor and checks for
S13 Exit
misfeeds.
Detects when to turn the inverter gate and exit gate solenoids off
S14 Inverter
S15 Feed Cover Detects whether the feed cover is open or not.
S16 Exit Cover Detects whether the exit cover is open or not.
Solenoids
SOL1 Exit Gate Opens and closes the exit gate.
Inverter
SOL2 Opens and closes the inverter gate.
Gate
Magnetic Clutches
MC1 Feed-in Drives the feed belt, separation roller, and pick-up roller.
PCBs
PCB1 DF Main Controls the DF and communicates with the main copier boards.
D059/D060/D061 6-26 SM
Indicates whether an original has been placed in the feeder, and

PCB2 DF Indicator
indicates whether SADF mode has been selected.
Details
SM 6-27 D059/D060/D061
D059/D060/D061 6-28 SM
ADF
6.2 ADF
6.2.1 OVERVIEW
1. Entrance Sensor 9. Feed-out Roller
2. Separation Roller 10. Exit Junction Gate
3. Feed Belt 11. Inverter Roller
4. Pick-up Roller 12. Exit Sensor
5. Original Tray 13. Transport Belt
6. Inverter Junction Gate 14. Registration Sensor
7. Inverter Guide Roller 15. Width Sensors (x3)
8. Inverter Sensor
Details
SM 6-29 D059/D060/D061
ADF
6.2.2 PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE
When the original set sensor is off (no original on the original tray), the pick-up roller stays
in the up position.
When the original set sensor turns on (or when the trailing edge of a page passes the
entrance sensor while pages remain on the original tray), the pick-up motor [A] turns on.
The cam [B] rotates away from the pick-up roller release lever [C]. The lever then rises and
the pick-up roller [D] drops onto the original.
When the original reaches the entrance sensor, the pick-up motor turns on again. The cam
pushes the lever down, and the pick-up roller rises until the pick-up roller HP sensor [E]
detects the actuator [F].
D059/D060/D061 6-30 SM
ADF
6.2.3 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT
When an original is placed on the original tray, the original set sensor [A] turns on, the
pick-up roller [B] drops on to the original, and the bottom plate position sensor [C] turns off.
Then the bottom plate motor [D] turns on and lifts the bottom plate [E] by raising the lift
lever [F] until the bottom plate position sensor turns on.
The level of the pick-up roller drops as the stack of originals becomes smaller, and
eventually, the bottom plate position sensor [C] turns off. Then, the bottom plate motor
turns on and lifts the bottom plate until the bottom plate position sensor turns on. This
keeps the original at the correct height for feeding.
Details
SM 6-31 D059/D060/D061
ADF
6.2.4 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION
The original separation system is a Feed and Reverse Roller (FRR) system. The pick-up
roller [A], feed belt [B], and separation roller [C] are driven by the feed-in motor [D].
To drive this mechanism, the feed-in motor [D] and feed-in clutch [E] turn on.
( Handling Paper> Handling Originals> Document Feed> FRR with Feed Belt)
D059/D060/D061 6-32 SM
ADF
6.2.5 ORIGINAL FEED
When the leading edge of the original turns the entrance sensor [A] on, the feed-in clutch
[B] turns off and the drive for the feed belt is released. The original is fed by the transport
rollers [C].
At the same time, the pick-up motor starts again and the pick-up roller [D] is lifted up. When
the pick-up roller HP sensor turns on, the pick-up motor stops.
Details
SM 6-33 D059/D060/D061
ADF
6.2.6 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
The ADF detects the original size by combining the readings of original length sensor [A],
and original width sensors-1 [B], -2 [C], and -3 [D].
Original Length
The original length sensor and the disk [E] (connected to the transport roller) generate a
pulse signal. The CPU counts pulses, starting when the leading edge of the original turns
on the registration sensor [F], until the trailing edge of the original turns off the entrance
sensor [G].
Original Width
The CPU detects original width using three original width sensors -1, -2, -3 as shown above.
Three small circles on the diagram indicate the positions of the sensors.
D059/D060/D061 6-34 SM
ADF
Original Width Sensor Location
Detectable Paper Sizes

Please refer to the “ADF” table in “Specifications”.
Details
SM 6-35 D059/D060/D061
ADF
6.2.7 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT
The transport belt [A] is driven by the transport belt motor [B]. The transport belt motor
starts when the main machine sends an original feed-in signal.
The pressure rollers inside the transport belt maintain the correct pressure between belt
and original. The pressure roller [C] closest to the left original scale is made of rubber for
the stronger pressure needed for thick originals. The other rollers are sponge rollers.
Normally, originals are manually placed at the left rear corner, so an original [D] fed from
the ADF must also be at this position. But if the original touches the rear scale [E] as it
feeds, original skew, jam, or wrinkling may occur.
To prevent such problems, the original transfer position is set to 3.5 mm away from the rear
scale as shown. The 3.5 mm gap is compensated for by changing the starting position of
the main scan for when the image is exposed on the drum.
D059/D060/D061 6-36 SM
ADF
6.2.8 ORIGINAL SKEW CORRECTION
The transport belt motor remains energized to carry the original to the right about 7 mm
past the left scale [A]. Then the motor stops and reverses to feed the original 12 mm to the
left against the left scale to correct skew. This forces the original to hit the left scale, which
aligns the trailing edge to minimize original skew on the exposure glass.
If thin original mode is selected, the original is not forced back against the left scale. This is
to prevent damage to the original.
After a two-sided original has been inverted to copy the 2nd side, it is fed in from the
inverter against the left scale [B] without skew correction.
The bottom drawing applies to duplex scanning; the top two drawings do not apply
in this mode.
The amount of reverse feed against the left scale can be adjusted as follows:
One-sided originals, and side 1 of two-sided originals: SP6006-3 Details
Side 2 of two-sided originals: SP6006-4.
SM 6-37 D059/D060/D061
ADF
6.2.9 ORIGINAL INVERSION AND FEED-OUT

General Operation
When the scanner reaches the return position, the main machine CPU sends the feed-out
signal to the ADF. When the ADF receives the feed-out signal, the transport belt motor and
feed-out motor [A] turn on. The original is then fed out to the exit tray or fed back to the
exposure glass after reversing in the inverter section.
This ADF has two exit trays. For single-sided original mode, the original is fed out straight
out to the right exit tray, but for double-sided original mode, the original is fed out to the
upper exit tray.
This causes the originals to be fed out in the correct order on the exit trays and allows the
maximum one-to-one copy speed for each mode.
Original Inversion
D059/D060/D061 6-38 SM
ADF
When the ADF receives the original invert signal from the main machine, the transport belt
motor, feed-out motor, exit gate solenoid [A], and inverter gate solenoid [B] turn on and the
original is fed back to the exposure glass through the inverter roller [C], exit gate [D],
inverter guide roller [E], inverter gate [F], and inverter roller.
The transport belt motor reverses shortly after the leading edge of the original turns on the
inverter sensor [G], and feeds the original to the left scale.
Original Exit (Single-Sided Original Mode)
The exit gate solenoid [A] remains off, the exit gate [B] remains closed, and the original is
fed out to the right exit tray.
The speed of the motor is reduced about 30 mm from the trailing edge of the original to
ensure the originals stack neatly on the exit tray. This timing is determined by the length of
the original, and the time since the exit sensor [C] detected the leading edge.
The transport belt motor turns off after the exit sensor [C] turns off.
Original Exit (Double-Sided Original Mode)

Details
The exit gate solenoid [A] turns on and the exit gate [B] opens.
SM 6-39 D059/D060/D061
ADF
The inverter gate solenoid [C] remains off, and the original is fed out to the upper tray. The
transport belt motor turns off when the trailing edge of the original passes the exit sensor
[D].
To stack the originals neatly on the upper tray, the feed-out motor speed is reduced shortly
after the trailing edge of the original turns off the inverter sensor [E].
D059/D060/D061 6-40 SM
ADF
6.2.10 ADF JAM CONDITIONS
Feed-in
The entrance sensor [A] is still off 500 ms after the feed-in motor turned on.
The registration sensor [B] is still not off 300 ms after the feed-in motor speed increased.
The entrance sensor is still on when the feed-in and transport motors have fed the original
442 mm after the registration sensor turned on.
Feed-out
The registration sensor is still on when the feed-in and transport motors have fed the
original 751 mm after the registration sensor turned on.
The exit sensor [C] is still off when the transport and feed-out motors have fed the original
129 mm after the feed-out motor turned on.
The exit sensor is still on when feed-out motor has fed the original X mm (X = original
length x 1.3) after the exit sensor turned on.
Inversion
The exit sensor is still off when the transport and exit motors have fed the original 198 mm
after the transport motor turned on to feed the original to the inverter section. Details
The exit sensor is still on when the feed-out motor has fed the original X mm (X = original
length x 1.3) after the exit sensor turned on.
The inverter sensor [D] is still off when the transport and feed-out motors have fed the
original 96 mm after the exit sensor turned on.
The inverter sensor is still off when the transport and feed-out motors have fed the original
96 mm to the exposure glass after the exit sensor turned off.
SM 6-41 D059/D060/D061
ADF
6.2.11 SCANNING
Overview
1. Scanner Motor 14. SIB (Scanner Interface Board)
2. Optics Exhaust Fan 15. Lamp Regulator Fan (Right)
3. Lamp Regulator Fan (Left) 16. Connector Board
4. Thermistor 17. SBU (CCD) Cooling Fan
5. Scanner HP Sensor 18. SBU (CCD)
6. White Plate (on exposure glass) 19. Scanner Lens
7. 2nd Mirror 20. 3rd Mirror
8. Exposure Glass 21. Lamp Regulator (Right)
9. Original Length Sensors 1 22. Original Width Sensors 1, 2, 3
10. Original Length Sensors 2 23. Lamp Regulator (Left)
11. Exposure Lamps (x2 Xenon) 24. MCU
12. 1st Mirror 25. Scanner Motor Cooling Fan
13. Optics Intake Fan
Two xenon lamps (30W, 57,600 lux) as the exposure lamps [4] illuminate the original. Two
lamps reduce the occurrence of dirty background caused if there is a gap between the
original and the exposure glass. The two lamps also improve color registration for color
scanning.
D059/D060/D061 6-42 SM
ADF
The image is reflected onto the CCD [11] (600 dpi resolution) via the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd
mirrors, and through the lens [13].
The CCD (10 μm 600 dpi, 4 ch, 3-line) can scan in color as well as black and white. The
scanned color documents can be used with Palm (Auto Document Link, Desk Top Editor
for Production, Print Job Manager Professional) or with Scan-to-Email.
The lens, CCD, and SBU are in a single unit, the lens block. The optical axis, focus, and
MTF are pre-adjusted, so this lens block requires no adjustment in the field. The 1st
scanner consists of the exposure lamp [4], the lamp regulator [7] and the 1st mirror.
Exposure lamp Scanner Motor

Low power
Off Off mode
On On
(after 60 s) (after 60 s)
Scanner Motor Cooling

- - Full Off Off
Fan
Optics Exhaust Fan Full Half - - Off
Lamp Regulator Fan

Full Off - - Off
(Right)
Lamp Regulator Fan (Left) Full Off - - Off
Optics Intake Fan (Right) Full Half - - Off
SBU (CCD) Cooling Fan Full Full - - Off

Details
SM 6-43 D059/D060/D061
ADF
Full: Full power, Half: Half power
1. Scanner Motor Cooling Fan
2. Optics Exhaust Fan
3. Optics Intake Fan
4. SBU Cooling Fan
5. Lamp Regulator Fan (Right)
6. Lamp Regulator Fan (Left)
The optics fan intake [3] and the SBU cooling fan [4], draw cool air into the scanning unit.
The right lamp regulator [5] fan draws cool air over the lamp regulators.
The left lamp regulator fan [6], the scanner motor cooling fan [1], and the optics exhaust fan
[2] expel warm air.
The optional optics anti-condensation heater (not shown) turns on while the main
switch is off to prevent moisture from forming on the optics.
D059/D060/D061 6-44 SM
ADF
6.2.12 SCANNER DRIVE
The scanner motor is a dc servo motor. The 1st and 2nd scanners [A, B] are driven by the
scanner motor [C] through the timing belt [D], scanner drive pulley [E], scanner drive shaft
[F], and two scanner wires [G].
The MCU (Motor Control Unit) board controls the scanner motor.
Scanner speed (A4/ LT LEF, 100%)
Forward: 515 mm/s
Return: 2500 mm/s
Magnification and Reduction

Magnification and reduction in the main scan direction are done in the IPU board.
Magnification and reduction in the sub scan direction are done by controlling the speed of
the scanner motor in sync with the main scan processing done in the IPU.
Magnification above 101% is done in the IPU. For example, at 200% magnification, the
Details
IPU doubles magnification while the scanner motor speed remains at 100%.
Reduction in the range 51% to 100% is done by the scanner motor.
Reduction in the range 25% to 50% is done by the scanner motor, assisted by IPU
processing. For example, at 40% reduction, the scanner motor speed is 80% and the
IPU reduces the image by 1/2.
Reduction below 25% is done by the scanner motor, assisted by IPU processing. For
example, at 24% reduction the scanner motor speed is 96% and the IPU reduces the
image by 1/4.
Magnification in the sub scan direction can be adjusted by changing the scanner
motor speed with SP4008 (Scanner Sub Scan Magnification).
SM 6-45 D059/D060/D061
ADF
6.2.13 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
There are three reflective sensors at three locations in the optics cavity for original size
detection.
The original width sensor [A] detects the original width, and the original length sensor 1 [B]
and original length sensor 2 [C] detect the original length. These are the APS (Auto Paper
Select) sensors.
Inside each APS sensor, there is an LED [D] and either three photoelectric devices [E] (for
the width sensor) or one photoelectric device (for each length sensor). In the width sensor,
the light generated by the LED is separated into three beams and each beam scans a
different point of the exposure glass (in each length sensor, there is only one beam). If the
original or ADF cover is present over the scanning point, the beam is reflected and each
reflected beam exposes a photoelectric device and activates it.
While the main switch is on, these sensors are active and the original size data is always
sent to the main CPU. However, the main CPU checks the data only when the ADF is being
closed.
The ADF functions as the platen. The DF position sensor [F] (attached to the ADF) detects
whether the ADF is open or closed.
The APS start sensor [G] triggers auto paper size detection.
The original size data is taken by the main CPU when the APS start sensor is activated.
This is when the ADF is positioned about 12 cm above the exposure glass. At this time,
D059/D060/D061 6-46 SM
ADF
only the sensors underneath the original receive the reflected light and switch on. The
other sensors are off. The main CPU recognizes the original size from the on/off signals
from the five sensors.
If the copy is made with the ADF open (book mode), the main CPU decides the original
size from the sensor outputs when the [Start] key is pressed.
This original size detection method eliminates the necessity for a pre-scan and increases
the machine productivity.
The tables below show the outputs of the sensors for each original size.
Details
SM 6-47 D059/D060/D061
ADF
North America
Original APS 1 APS 2 APS 3

SP4301 Display
Name Size W1 W2 W3 L1 L2
DLT SEF 11 x 17 in. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0001 1111
LG SEF 8½ x 14 in. Yes — — Yes Yes 0001 1100
LT SEF 8½ x 11 in. Yes — — Yes — 0000 1100
LT LEF 11 x 8½ x in. Yes Yes Yes — — 0000 0111
HLT SEF 5½ x 8½ — — — — —
HLT LEF 8½ x 5½ — — — — Yes 0001 0000
Yes: Detected
—: Not detected
: Default: Size not detected. However, SP4303 can be set to recognize HLT SEF.
D059/D060/D061 6-48 SM
ADF
Europe, Oceania, Asia
Original APS 1 APS 2 APS 3 SP4301 Display
Name Size W1 W2 W3 L1 L2
A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0001 1111
B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm Yes Yes — Yes Yes 0001 1110
A4 SEF 219 x 297 mm Yes — — Yes — 0000 1100
A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm Yes Yes Yes — — 0000 0111
B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm — — — Yes — 0000 1000
B5 LEF 257 x 182 mm Yes Yes — — — 0000 0110
A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm — — — — —
Foolscap
8½ x 13 in. Yes — — Yes Yes 0001 1100 *1
SEF
Folio SEF 8¼ x 13 in. Yes — — Yes Yes 0001 1100 *1
F SEF 8 x 13 in. Yes — — Yes Yes 0001 1100 *1
Yes: Detected
—: Not detected
: Default: Size not detected. However, SP4303 can be set to recognize A5 SEF. Details
*1: With SP 5126, you can select 1 from 3 paper sizes of very similar dimensions. The
default is 8½ x" 13", and the other choices are 8¼" x 13", 8" x 13".
Occasionally, the APS sensors cannot detect the original size accurately if there is
a large amount of black coverage in the original.
In such cases, the detection of the innermost APS width sensor is ignored and the
detection of the outermost is used to detect the original size.
When this occurs, the APS readings appear with double underlines when
displayed on the operation panel display with SP4301.
APS can detect only the paper sizes in the table above.
SM 6-49 D059/D060/D061
ADF
6.2.14 AUTO IMAGE DENSITY (ADS)

The area that the CCD uses as a reference for ADS is shown in the following diagram.

Digital Processes> Image Processing> Black and White CCD Systems> Analog Signal
Processing> Automatic Image Density
Digital Processes> Image Processing> Color Systems> Analog Signal Processing
D059/D060/D061 6-50 SM
Board Structure
6.3 BOARD STRUCTURE
6.3.1 BLOCK DIAGRAMS

IOB
BICU
Details
SM 6-51 D059/D060/D061
Board Structure
Controller
D059/D060/D061 6-52 SM
Board Structure
6.3.2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS

This machine has a GW controller board.
PCBs
Here is a summary of the main parts of the board structure.
The DIP switch settings and the board should not be changed. For details, please
refer to “Specifications”, the last section of this manual.
BICU (Base Engine Control Unit): This is the main control board that controls the engine
sequence, timing for peripherals. The BCU also controls
High voltage
Duplexing
Paper feed
Paper registration
Fusing
Peripheral interfaces
Drive
Toner supply
Controller Board: The controller board controls all devices for memory DIMMs, HDD,
copying, printing, and scanning. The controller board also provides all the connection
points for easy installation of the options. The controller board also controls:
Printer/scanner
Document server
Image rotation
Conversion of all image formats Details
Image compression and decompression
SBU (Sensor Board Unit): The SBU receives analog signals from the CCD and converts
them into the digital signals that are used for image processing. A/D conversion divides the
range between black and white into 256 levels and digitizes the analog signal based on
these levels. The 256 levels are called grayscales.
IOB (Input/Output Board): Performs three functions:
Converts sensor output from the paper bank, toner bank unit, and LCT then sends
it to the BCU.
Converts serial data from the BCU to parallel data for control of the paper bank,
toner bank unit, and LCT components (motors, solenoids, clutches).
SM 6-53 D059/D060/D061
Board Structure
Supplies the 24V power supply from the PSU to the BCU, LCT, and interlock
system for the development motor, drum motor, and paper feed motor.
LDB (LD Board): The LDB controls the laser diodes. It also contains the laser diodes.
AC Drive Board: The AC drive board controls AC power for the fusing lamps and the
anti-condensation heaters.
MCU (Motor Control Unit): Controls the scanner motor with the commands from the BCU.
Also controls exposure lamp on/off timing, APS detection, the fan motors, generation of
gate signals, and transmission of serial data.
Operation Panel: Controls the operation panel and LCD display panel.
Polygon Mirror Motor Control Board: Controls the polygon motor.
The URB is a new board. It controls the operation of the double-feed sensors. There are
two sensors. One sensor is an emitter sensor, and the other is a receptor.
D059/D060/D061 6-54 SM
Image Processing
6.4 IMAGE PROCESSING
6.4.1 IMAGE PROCESSING OVERVIEW
Photoelectric conversion, Odd/even allocation, Amplification, A/D

SBU:
Conversion (analog to digital), Light intensity detection (scanning)
BCU: Engine control, Scanner control, SBU settings, IPU settings, LDB settings
Details
Shading correction, Image Processing, Main/Sub scan magnification,
Video path switching, Image Compression/ Decompression. The GAVD
IPU:
on this board performs density conversion processing, FCI processing,
and edge processing, and also generates the test patterns.
System control, software application control, image storage control, file

Controller:
compression/decompression
8-beam laser exposure, binary-to-grayscale conversion, synchronization

LDB:
detection
SM 6-55 D059/D060/D061
Image Processing
6.4.2 IMAGE PROCESSING FLOW

Image processing is done by the IPU (Image Processing Unit), following the steps shown
below.
Overall image processing for this machine is designed to:
Target edges with filters to improve the angles of text characters and reduce the
occurrence of moiré filled areas.
Improve the evenness of granular areas in images
Shading
Corrects the dispersion of the scanning lens and CCD.
Correction
Gamma
Background erase
Correction
Determines if an image is text or raster image data and processes

Auto Select
the data accordingly.
Selects the best methods for Filtering, Density Control, and

↓
Grayscale Processing.
Filtering MTF and smoothing (MTF filter of previous machines)
↓ Either of two filters is selected by Auto Select above.
Independent Dot
Removes isolated pixels.
Erase
Line Width
Correction
Main Scan
Magnification
D059/D060/D061 6-56 SM
Image Processing
Video Path Application (printer)
Density Control Employs one of two gamma tables, selected by Auto Select above
Grayscale
Error diffusion, dithering, or binary picture processing
Processing
Black-and-white digitization or dithering is selected by Auto Select

↓
above.
LD Unit
Details
SM 6-57 D059/D060/D061
Image Processing
6.4.3 ADJUSTMENTS
Independent Dot Erase, Background Color Dropout
Independent Dot Erase
Item Range Default SP No.
Text 0 4903-001
0 to 7
Generation Copy 0 4903-002
Independent dot erase removes isolated black pixels. As this setting is increased, the
greater the number of eliminated isolated pixels. Setting to zero switches this function off.
Background (BG) Color Dropout
TARGETED
SP NO. MODE NAME VALUES
COLOR
4901-020 BG Dropout – Weak Orange 0 to 192 (Default: 180)
4901-021 BG Dropout – Medium Green 0 to 192 (Default: 155)
4901-022 BG Dropout - Strong Blue 0 to 192 (Default: 105)
D059/D060/D061 6-58 SM
Image Processing
6.4.4 ORIGINAL TYPE SETTINGS

Text/Photo and Photo have different settings (Glossy Photo, Printed Photo, Copied Photo,
etc.) as shown in the screen below).
To display this screen:
User Tools/Counter button ()> "Copier/Document Server Settings"> "General
Features"> "Original Photo Type Priority".
These features can be adjusted with SP4918.
Manual Gamma Adjustment with SP4918

Details
Eight adjustments can be done independently for "Text" and "Photo" originals. Refer to the
table below.
SM 6-59 D059/D060/D061
Image Processing
Value
Area Adjusted on Original
Low (1) High (15)
Offset
H Density in light areas (highlights) Lighter Darker
M Density at center Lighter Darker
S Density of dark areas (shadows) Lighter Darker
IDmax Density of entire original Lighter Darker
Option
H Entire original background erase Weak Strong
M Entire original contrast Low High
S Not used
IDmax Not used
D059/D060/D061 6-60 SM
Laser Exposure
6.5 LASER EXPOSURE
6.5.1 OVERVIEW
1. LD Unit 7. 2nd Mirror
2. Polygon Mirror Motor Control Board 8. Drum
3. Polygon Mirror Motor 9. Toner Shield Glass

Details
4. F-Theta Lens 1 10. 1st Mirror
5. F-Theta Lens 2 11. Laser Synchronization Detector
6. BTL Lens 12. Cylindrical Lens
SM 6-61 D059/D060/D061
Laser Exposure
6.5.2 LASER EXPOSURE MECHANISM
The LD unit consists of two 4-channel LDA’s (Laser Diode Arrays) and two collimating
lenses.
Each LDA produces 4 beams [A]. Each collimating lens [B] is a fixed lens, seated in a
V-groove and held in place by a spring and a screw.
Four beams from each LDA [C] pass through the collimating lenses, though the apertures
[D], then strike the polygonal mirror. Due to this multi-beam writing, the polygonal mirror
motor speed can be reduced, thus the noise generated by the polygon mirror motor and the
wear on the motor can be reduced.
Auto Power Control (APC)
A built-in photo diode detects the light emitted from the LD unit. When the photo diode
detects this light, it generates a signal and the feedback of this signal to the LD control
board is used to adjust the strength and amount of light in the laser beams.
The laser diode array is assembled and adjusted in the factory, and does not
require position adjustment in the field.
LD drivers control the power output from the laser diodes.
( Digital Processes > Printing > Laser Printing > Laser Diode Power Control)
The reference levels are adjusted on the production line. Never touch the variable
resistors on the LD unit.
D059/D060/D061 6-62 SM
Laser Exposure
6.5.3 LD SAFETY SWITCHES
The laser unit generates laser beams that are extremely dangerous to the eyes.
To ensure the safety of the operators and service technicians, two safety switches are Details
connected in series to the inside of both the left front door and right front door.
Either switch breaks the power supply circuit of the LD unit (the laser diode drive board)
every time the left front door or the right front door is opened. This prevents the LD unit
from switching on automatically when either the left front door or right front door is open.
SM 6-63 D059/D060/D061
Laser Exposure
6.5.4 MULTI-BEAM LINE EXPOSURE
The LD unit contains two laser diode arrays (LDA) [A], each with one 4-channel array,
allowing the LD unit to produce a total of eight beams. This multi-beam exposure
mechanism has the following advantages:
Reduces the number of rotations required of the polygon mirror motor.
Reduces the amount of noise generated by the polygon mirror motor because it is
rotating at lower speed.
Reduces the need for LD unit replacement.
Allows production of a more precision beam on a stable platform.
The laser synchronization detector detects only Channel 0 and Channel 1, the uppermost
beams of each parallel array.
The main scan pitch of Channels 2 to 7 is determined by setting SP2115 001-006 (Main
Scan Beam Pitch Adjustment) at the factory. For this reason, when the LD unit is replaced,
these SP codes must be input for the new unit. The correct SP settings are printed on a
label attached to the LD unit.
An SC code is issued for a laser synchronization detector error if the LD unit malfunctions
and does not emit the laser beams.
D059/D060/D061 6-64 SM
Laser Exposure
6.5.5 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR

The polygon mirror reflects the laser beam onto the OPC drum to expose the image line by
line in the main scan direction. The polygon mirror motor rotates at a constant speed, even
while the main machine is in standby mode, but shuts off when the main machine enters
the energy conservation mode.
Polygon Mirror Motor Rotation Speed
D059: 90 ppm D060: 110 ppm D061: 135 ppm
24,803 rpm 29,528 rpm 37,205 rpm
The polygon mirror motor has no brake mechanism, so it requires about 3 minutes
to stop rotating.
Before moving the machine or before servicing the motor or the area around the
polygon mirror motor, you should switch off the main machine main power switch,
disconnect the machine, and wait at least three minutes for the motor to stop
rotating.
The polygon mirror motor requires about 10 seconds to reach full speed after the
machine awakes from the energy conservation mode, or after the machine is
switched from the normal mode to low speed mode for printing on thick paper. The
machine cannot print during this 10 second interval until it reaches full rotation
speed.
Details
SM 6-65 D059/D060/D061
Laser Exposure
6.5.6 1200-DPI RESOLUTION
0 LDA 1 4 LDA 1
1 LDA 2 5 LDA 2
2 LDA 1 6 LDA 1
3 LDA 2 7 LDA 2
The original is scanned at 600 dpi, then the 600 dpi output is boosted to 1200 dpi 1-bit data
during image processing in the IPU.
This machine can produce an image at 1200 dpi by writing each dot twice, possibly with
two different values, depending on the results of image processing. This is achieved with
the LD unit, which has two laser diode arrays, each with 4 channels which together
produce 8 beams. As shown in the illustration above, the beams from each laser diode are
emitted in two parallel lines.
For copying, 1200 dpi is used. For printing, the default is 600 dpi, but 1200 dpi can be
selected.
The diagram shows how the two sets of four beams are interlaced to produce a sub scan
resolution of 1200 dpi.
D059/D060/D061 6-66 SM
Laser Exposure
There are two parallel rows of four beams, separated by 22.3 mm in the main scan
direction. In each of these rows, the beams are spaced at 42.3 micrometer intervals (this is
the same as 600 dpi).
The rows are also offset in the sub scan direction by 21.2 micrometers.
The net result is that we have dots at 21.2 micrometer intervals, which is the same as 1200
dpi.
Details
SM 6-67 D059/D060/D061
Laser Exposure
6.5.7 OPTICAL PATH
The output path from the laser diode to the drum is shown above.
The LD unit [A] outputs eight laser beams to the polygonal mirror [B] (six mirror surfaces)
through the cylindrical lens [C] and the 1st mirror [D].
Each surface of the polygon mirror reflects eight full main scan lines. The laser beams go to
the F-theta lens 1 [E], F-theta lens 2 [F], BTL (barrel toroidal lens) [G], and mirror [H]. Then
these laser beams go to the drum through the toner shield glass [I].
The laser synchronizing detector [J] determines the main scan starting position. This
sensor sends a synchronization signal when the laser synchronization detector mirror [K]
reflects the laser beam to the detector as the laser beam starts its sweep across the drum.
The laser synchronization detector detects only the beams emitted from Channels 1 and 0,
the uppermost beams of each parallel array.
D059/D060/D061 6-68 SM
Drum Unit
6.6 DRUM UNIT
6.6.1 OVERVIEW
The drum unit consists of the components shown. An organic photoconductor drum
(diameter: 100 mm) is used for this model.
1. Quenching Lamp 9. ID Sensor
2. Pre-Charge Unit 10. Cleaning Brush
3. Charge Corona Unit 11. Toner Collection Coil Details
4. OPC Drum 12. Drum Cleaning Unit Agitator
5. Drum Potential Sensor 13. Cleaning Blade
6. Thermistor 14. Cleaning Unit Filters
7. PTL (Pre-Transfer Lamp) 15. Toner Filter
8. Pick-Off Pawls 16. 2nd Cleaning Blade
SM 6-69 D059/D060/D061
Drum Unit
Pre-charge unit (2):

Supplements the function of the charge unit. Because of the high speed of the drum, the
main charge corona does not give the drum enough charge, especially for the first copy
cycle. This is especially important for the D061 (135 ppm) due to its high speed.
Cleaning brush (9):
Rotates forward (ccw) with the drum (not against the direction of drum rotation). This
reduces wear on the surface of the drum and extends the life of the drum.
Ventilation duct:
Between the cleaning unit and the fusing unit. Reduces the effects of heat from the fusing
unit, which would cause toner clumping during toner transport and cleaning. This is
especially important for the D061 (135 ppm) due to its high speed.
Second cleaning blade (15):
Added specifically to reduce white tear-drop shapes that appear in the solid backgrounds
of copies and prints.
After training, super users (trained operators) can replace the following components
around the drum:
Pre-Charge Unit
Charge Corona Unit
Cleaning Unit.
Two sensors have been added: a cleaning unit sensor and drum unit sensor. When the
machine is switched on or when the front door is closed, these sensors detect whether the
cleaning unit and drum unit are set correctly. If either or both units are set incorrectly, a
message appears on the operation panel. The machine cannot be used until the problem
has been corrected.
D059/D060/D061 6-70 SM
Drum Unit
6.6.2 DRUM DRIVE
The drive from the drum motor [A] is transmitted to the drum and the cleaning unit through
timing belts, gears, the drum drive shaft [B], and the cleaning unit coupling [C].
The drum motor has a drive controller, which outputs a motor lock signal when the rotation
speed is out of the specified range.
Drum Speeds
Details
D059 (90 cpm) 420 mm/s
D060 (110 cpm) 500 mm/s
D061 (135 cpm) 630 mm/s
The flywheel [D] on the end of the drum drive shaft stabilizes the rotation speed.
SM 6-71 D059/D060/D061
Drum Unit
6.6.3 DRUM CHARGE

Overview
This main machine uses a corona wire Scorotron system to charge the drum.
Unit
Pre-Charge Corona [A] Charge Corona [B]
Corona Wire Single Double
Grid Plate Plate
Power pack PPG Power pack [C] CGB Power pack [D]
Charge current (Text,

Text/Photo, Pale, Constant: 600 µA Constant: 1,550 µA
Generation Copy)
Charge current (Photo

Constant: 600 µA Constant: 1,600 µA
mode)
Grid voltage Not controlled - 900 V
Corona wire cleaning Manually Automatic mechanism
D059/D060/D061 6-72 SM
Drum Unit
This is a high-speed main machine, so two corona wires are needed inside the charge
corona unit [B] to give a sufficient, uniform negative charge to the drum surface. The
stainless steel grid plate makes the corona charge uniform and controls the amount of
negative charge on the drum surface by applying a negative voltage to the grid.
Cleaning the Corona Wires
Charge Corona Unit

Air flowing around the charge corona wire may deposit toner particles on the corona wires.
These particles can interfere with charging and cause low density bands on copies.
The wire cleaner pads [A] automatically clean the wires to prevent such a problem.
The wire cleaner is driven by a dc motor [B]. Normally the wire cleaner [C] is at the front
end (the home position). Just after the main switch is turned on, the wire cleaner motor
turns on to bring the wire cleaner to the rear and then back to the home position. When the Details
wire cleaner moves from the rear to the home position, the wire cleaner pads swivel,
bringing the pads into contact with the wires, and clean the wires as it moves forward.
Cleaning is executed when:
The machine is switched on and the fusing temperature is less than 100°C while auto
process control executes.
Every 24 hours.
After every 5,000 copies. This can be adjusted with SP2804 002 (Charge Corona
Cleaner Setting – Corona Wire Cleaning Interval).
SM 6-73 D059/D060/D061
Drum Unit
Pre-Charge Unit
There is no mechanism to clean the pre-charge unit corona wire automatically.
However, the pre-charge unit corona wire can be cleaned manually. After the pre-charge
unit has been removed, its cleaning pad can be pushed to the rear and front several times
to clean the corona wire.
SC312 and SC313 signal a problem with the pre-charge unit. After either SC is issued,
operation halts and the machine must be cycled off and on.
When this occurs, the setting of SP2002 001 is automatically switched from "1" (On) or “2”
(ON) to "0" (Off). The operator can use the machine, but the machine is allowed to operate
with only the (main) charge unit operating. This will not seriously hinder operation of the
machine. However, if SP3901 (Auto Process Control Setting) is switched on, auto process
control will execute to adjust the new conditions around drum because the pre-charge unit
is not operating.
D059/D060/D061 6-74 SM
Drum Unit
When auto process control is executed under these conditions, the ID sensor
adjustment is not done.
After you repair the pre-charge unit, to recover from SC312 or SC313, you must
change the setting of SP2002 001 from "0" (Off) to "1" (On).
Details
SM 6-75 D059/D060/D061
Drum Unit
6.6.4 DRUM CLEANING

Overview
This main machine has two drum cleaning blades: a main drum cleaning blade [A] and a
2nd cleaning blade [B].
Main Cleaning Blade

The main cleaning blade is a counter blade angled against the direction of drum rotation.
The counter blade system has the following advantages:
Less wearing of the cleaning blade edge
High cleaning efficiency
The cleaning brush [C] removes toner from the drum surface. Any remaining toner is
scraped off by the cleaning blade. The cleaning brush rotates counter-clockwise, not
against the rotation direction of the drum. This reduces wear on the surface of the drum.
Toner on the cleaning brush is scraped off by the scraper [D] and falls onto the toner
collection coil [E]. The coil transports the toner to back to the toner entrance tank in the
toner bank unit for recycling.
The agitator [F] agitates the toner to prevent clumping in the toner returned to the toner
entrance tank.
To remove any accumulated toner at the edge of the cleaning blade, the drum turns in
reverse for about 40 ms at the end of every copy job. This is also done every 30 minutes
during long copy jobs. If any accumulated toner is deposited on the drum, it is removed by
the cleaning brush. For more, refer to SP2506 002 (Cleaning Interval - Multiple Copy -
Interval) in Section “5. Service Tables”.
D059/D060/D061 6-76 SM
Drum Unit
2nd Cleaning Blade
The 2nd cleaning blade [A] removes paper dust and other particles from the surface of the
drum, especially in work areas that are very humid.
The 2nd cleaning blade solenoid [B] operates the 2nd cleaning blade.
During copying and when the machine is not being used, the 2nd cleaning blade does
not touch the drum.
At the end of the process control sequence, or at times prescribed with SP2930, the
solenoid activates and locks the 2nd cleaning blade against the drum to clean the
drum surface.
Detecting the Status of the 2nd Cleaning Blade

The solenoid moves the 2nd cleaning blade release arm to the contact position and locks
the blade against the drum. The release mechanism of the 2nd cleaning blade has a
Details
"push-switch" [C] which confirms whether the 2nd cleaning blade release arm is operating
correctly. This push-switch is set so it is under pressure when the blade is against the
drum.
If an abnormal condition is detected, the machine issues SC488.
SP 2930 Adjustments
SP2930 controls the operation of the 2nd cleaning blade. There are two modes of
operation: ‘normal humidity’, and ‘low humidity’. The threshold between these two humidity
modes is set with SP 2930 008.
SM 6-77 D059/D060/D061
Drum Unit
SP2930 008 This SP sets the critical level of the

absolute humidity that determines which
SP codes above are used to control the
operation of 2nd blade cleaning.
[0-3/1/ 1]
Humidity Mode Normal Low 0: No switching (calculated absolute

humidity is ignored)
1: 0.0022
2: 0.0040
3: 0.0060
Determines when 2nd blade cleaning

executes.
[0-2/1/1]
0: Off 2nd blade cleaning is never done.
However, the 2nd blade cleaning can be
done manually with SP2930-4.
1: On Cleaning done after process control
execution but only when SP3901 is ON to
enable process control and:
The temperature of the machine is
Condition SP2903-1 SP2930-5 less than 100°C when it is powered
on.
SP2966 is ON. This SP sets process
control to execute if the machine
remains on and idle for longer than 24
hours.
2: After the selected time interval has
elapsed. The time interval is prescribed by
SP2930-2 or -7. If the time elapses during
a job, process control does not execute
until the job has finished.
D059/D060/D061 6-78 SM
Drum Unit
This SP sets the time to elapse before 2nd

blade cleaning. 2nd blade cleaning is done
when the time exceeds this value, but only
Interval SP2930-2 SP2930-6
if SP2930-001 is set to "2".
SP2930-001: [5 to 1440/90/1 min.]
SP2930-006: [5 to 1440/15/1 min.]
This SP sets the length of time the 2nd

cleaning blade is held against the drum. At
the end of this time, the 2nd cleaning blade
Time SP2930-3 SP2930-7
is retracted and does not touch the drum
until the next cleaning.
[10-90/20/1 s]
SP 2930 004 provides a command that allows you to manually clean the drum with the
2nd cleaning blade.
Timing Sequence for Operation of the 2nd Cleaning Blade
Details
At the end of a job:

(1) 2nd blade solenoid (a magnetic latching solenoid) activates and pushes a lever that
locks the 2nd cleaning blade against the drum.
(2) Drum motor rotates forward for 20 seconds and reverse for 0.2 second. The length of
time that the blade is held against the drum can be adjusted with SP2930-3.
(3) Drum motor stops.
(4) 2nd blade solenoid pushes the lever that pulls the 2nd cleaning blade away from the
drum surface and locks it in the release position.
SM 6-79 D059/D060/D061
Drum Unit
At the following times, current is applied to the 2nd cleaning blade solenoid for 0.1 second
to make sure that the solenoid is restored to its normal state (released and away from the
drum):
Immediately after the machine is turned on
When either front door is closed
At the beginning of every job
Cleaning Unit Drive
Drive from the drum motor is transmitted to the cleaning unit drive gear via the timing belt
[A] and the cleaning unit coupling [B]. This coupling drives the cleaning brush [C] directly.
The cleaning brush then transmits the drive to the gear at the front, which drives the toner
collection coil gear [D] and agitator gear [E].
D059/D060/D061 6-80 SM
Drum Unit
Cleaning Blade Pressure and Side-to-Side Movement
The spring [A] always pushes the cleaning blade against the drum. The cleaning blade
pressure can be manually released by pushing up the release lever [B].
The guide roller [C] at the rear end of the cleaning blade holder touches the cam gear [D]
that moves the blade from side to side. This movement disperses accumulated toner and
prevents uneven blade wear.
Details
SM 6-81 D059/D060/D061
Drum Unit
6.6.5 AIR FLOW AROUND THE DRUM
The drum cooling fan [A] draws cool air through the drum dust filter [B] and sends it to the
center of the drum [C], then over the charge units [D] (charge corona unit and pre-charge
unit).
Holes in the flanges on both ends of the drum allow air to pass through the drum to cool it.
After the air has passed through the center of the drum, the exhaust fan [E] draws the air
out of the interior of the machine, through the toner filter [F] to remove free floating toner,
through the ozone filter [G] to remove ozone, then finally out of the machine.
To keep the temperature inside the machine constant, the drum cooling fan turns slowly
during standby, but turns faster during copying.
D059/D060/D061 6-82 SM
Drum Unit
6.6.6 DRUM PICK-OFF PAWLS
If the paper does not separate from the drum after image transfer, the drum pick-off pawls
strip the paper from the drum.
Pressure from small springs [A] press the pick-off pawls [B] against the surface of the
drum.
The shaft [C] and the cam [D] move the pick-off pawls from side to side to ensure that they
never remain at the same location (this prevents wear on the drum).
Details
SM 6-83 D059/D060/D061
Drum Unit
6.6.7 DRUM QUENCHING
In preparation for the next copy cycle, light from the quenching lamp [A] neutralizes any
charge remaining on the drum.
The quenching lamp consists of an array of 28 red LEDs extending across the full width of
the drum.
D059/D060/D061 6-84 SM
Drum Unit
6.6.8 PROCESS CONTROL

Drum potential gradually changes for the following reasons:
Dirty optics, exposure glass
Dirty charge corona casing, grid plate
Deterioration of drum sensitivity
When Does Auto Process Control Execute?
Process control is executed under the following conditions:
When the machine is turned on with the fusing temperature at less than 100°C and
automatic process control is enabled (SP3901 001 switched on).
After the machine has remained on and idle for over 24 hours (SP2966 001) and
automatic process control is enabled (SP3901 001 switched on).
When the service technician executes SP2962 to force process control execution
manually.
After the power is turned off/on to reset the machine after a pre-charge unit related SC
code has occurred (SC312, SC313). (SP2002 001 is set to "0" (Off) and the ID sensor
is not adjusted.)
When the rotation speed of the drum is changed (Normal > Low Speed, Low Speed >
Normal Speed) after pressing the [Start] key. (The ID is not adjusted.) However, if auto
process control fails (SP3902 001 displays a "0"), the auto process control will not
execute even if the drum speed changes.
Auto Process Control Flow
Step 1: Charge Unit Corona Wire Cleaning
Step 2: Process Control Begins (OPC Drum Start Timing)
Step 3: ID Sensor Vsg Adjustment
Details
Step 4: Vb (Development Bias Voltage), Vg (Charge Grid Voltage), LD (Laser Diode) Power
Adjustments (Based on Drum Potential Sensor Readings)
Step 5: TD Sensor (Vref) Adjustment (Based on ID Sensor Readings)
Step 6: Vb (Development Bias Voltage), Vg (Charge Grid Voltage) Adjustments (Based on
VL Detection)
Step 7: Process Control Ends
Vsg: Reflectivity of the bare surface of the drum. This reading is used with Vsp (the
reflectivity of the ID sensor pattern where it is covered with toner) to calculate Vref
(Vsp/Vsg).
Vb: Development bias. A charge applied to the drum to prevent dirty backgrounds
on copies. Backgrounds emerge dirty if the residual potential (Vr) remains high.
SM 6-85 D059/D060/D061
Drum Unit
Vg: Voltage output of the charge corona unit. Vg is used to adjust Vd, the drum
potential of the unexposed areas of the drum.
Vh: Standard drum potential for halftone.
VL: Light potential, the drum potential after maximum laser exposure. The drum
potential sensor measures VL by reading the white patches of the potential sensor
pattern. To change VL, the machine adjusts input current of the laser diode.
Vd: Detected by the drum potential sensor, this is the reading of the drum surface
before exposure to the laser. This is the "dark potential".
Vdref: The target value of Vd, the dark potential of the drum before it is exposed by
the laser.
LD PM: Laser Diode Pulse Modulation. This is strength (intensity, amount of light)
of the laser beams.
Step 1: Charge Unit Corona Wire Cleaning
The machine executes charge corona wire cleaning at the beginning of every auto process
control cycle if SP2804 001 (Charge Corona Cleaner Setting) is set to "1".
Step 2: Process Control Begins (OPC Drum Start Timing)
Process control starts after the machine is turned on with the fusing temperature below
100°C (regardless of the number of lamps that are on).
Step 3: ID Sensor Vsg Adjustment
Vsg (reflectivity of the bare surface of the drum) is automatically set:
Vsg = 4.0±2V
After this is done, you can display and confirm the Vsg setting with SP3103 002. You can
also display and confirm the PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) setting with SP3001 001.
If process control executes in response to a change in the drum rotation speed

(low to high speed, high to low speed mode), the Vsg adjustment is not done.
Therefore, SP3103 002, SP3001 001 will not reflect any changes.
Step 4: Vb (Development Bias Voltage), Vg (Charge Grid Voltage), LD (Laser Diode)
Power Adjustments (Based on Drum Potential Sensor Readings)
1. Determining ΔVL: ΔVL = (Target VL) –200
The difference between the value of VL read by the drum potential sensor and the previous
target VL value of –200V is obtained. ΔVL is then used to update VLref. If the following
result of the calculation is less than ΔVL, the lower value between ΔVL1 and VL2 is used to
update VLref.
Vb = Vb setting of SP2201 001 + ΔVL > 800
ΔVL1= 800 – (Value of SP2201 001)
D059/D060/D061 6-86 SM
Drum Unit
VDref = Vd setting of SP2001 006) + ΔVL > 950

ΔVL2 = 950 – (Vd setting of SP2001 006)
The purpose of the calculations is to set Vb and VDref at the high limit of their ranges to
prevent over compensation during adjustment.
At the beginning of the process control cycle, the following components remain turned on:
drum motor, fusing motor, QL, charge unit, charge grid (using the previous voltage, or the
voltage set with SP2001 003 if the machine has just been powered on), and development
motor.
The development motor switches off, the laser creates the VL pattern on the surface of the
drum, and the drum potential sensor reads the VL pattern.
VL Pattern
Size Width: 30 mm Length: 40 mm
Exposure Level 15
Laser PM Same value as previous process control execution
If ΔVL < 0, ΔVL is set to 0.

If VL detection is abnormal, SC424 is issued and VLref is not updated.
If the VL detection at this step is displayed by SP3902 008, and the ΔVLref is
displayed by SP3902 009.
If process control is switched off (SP3901 set to "0") then ΔVLref is set to "0" and
the drum potential sensor does not detect VL.
Details
2-1. Determining Vb: Vb = (Value of SP2201) + ΔVL
The development bias value applied from SP2201 depends on the line speed.
Line Speed SP No. SP Name
Normal Speed SP2201 001 Image Area (Normal Speed)
Low Speed SP2201 004 Image Area (Low Speed)
SM 6-87 D059/D060/D061
Drum Unit
Even if the result of the calculation is Vb > 800, the voltage applied by the power
pack is 800V.
The value of Vb is displayed by SP3902 012.
2-2. Determining VdreM: VDref = (Value of SP2001) + ΔVLref + Vd Calibration
The value of Vd applied from SP2001 depends on the line speed.
Line Speed SP No.
Normal Speed SP2201 001
Low Speed SP2201 005
Even if the result of the calculation is VDref > 950, VDref is set to 950.
When ΔVLref is determined, Vdref should be value of SP2001 + ΔVL ≤ 950. So,
Vdref > 950 only when Vd is corrected.
Count "A" is cleared only when SP2801 (TD Sensor Initial Setting) is executed:
a) If "A" < SP3903 (VD Correction Counter), there is no VD correction.
b) If "A" > SP3903, the value is corrected by +50.
2-3. Determining VhreM: VHref = (value of VH from SP3904) + ΔVLref
The value of VH applied from SP3904 depends on the line speed.
Line Speed SP No.
Normal Speed SP3904 001
Low Speed SP3904 002
If VB = 800, then VHref = VH of SP3904 + (800 – Vb of SP2201) for the value of

development bias on image areas.
3. Determining Vg with the detected Vd: VD = (-VDref) ± 20
The development motor turns on.
15 VD readings are taken at 2 ms intervals from each quarter section of the drum as it
rotates. For each quarter section, the maximum and minimum values are discarded. The
remaining 13 readings for each of the 4 sections are averaged. Next, the four averages
D059/D060/D061 6-88 SM
Drum Unit
(one from for each section of the drum) are once again averaged to determine VD.
VD detection begins at (1) 50 ms from the time the power pack switches at a point 69.9 mm
distant from the area between the pre-charge unit and the drum potential sensor.
(2) VD = VDref ±20V?
If VD = VDref ±20V is not achieved, the grid voltage is adjusted (VD + VDref) and the
VD samplings are done again. This cycle is repeated 5 times. If a satisfactory result is
not obtained (VD = VDref ±20V), then SC420 is issued.
(3) VD = – VDref ±20V?
If VD = – VDref ±20V is achieved, VG is determined. The determined value of VG is
displayed by SP3902 004. VD is displayed by SP3902 002.
4. LD PM is determined with the detected Vh: VH = (-VHref) ± 20
(1) The development motor turns off and the laser creates a VH pattern 30 mm wide and 80
mm long.
The laser power that creates the pattern is adjusted for the line speed.
Line Speed SP No. SP Name
Normal Speed SP2104 003 VH Pattern (Normal Speed)

Details
Low Speed SP2104 004 VH Pattern (Low Speed)
SM 6-89 D059/D060/D061
Drum Unit
The laser power is set to different levels for creation of the VH pattern and ID
sensor pattern.
(2) 15 VH readings are taken at 2 ms intervals. The maximum and minimum values are
discarded. The remaining 13 readings are averaged to determine VH.
(3) VH = VHref ±20V
If VH = VHref ±20V is not achieved, the laser power is adjusted for creation of the pattern.
(4) If VH > VHref then laser power is raised 5 steps above the setting for SP2103.
If VH < VHref then laser power is lowered 5 steps below the setting for SP1203.
(5) The VH pattern created with the adjusted laser power is sampled again. This cycle (4)
and (5) is repeated until a satisfactory result is achieved. If a satisfactory result is not
achieved after the 45th attempt, SC428 is issued.
(6) The correct value for the level of the laser power (PM) is obtained. The result can be
displayed with SP3902 005. VH can be displayed with SP3902 003.
Step 5 TD Sensor Adjustment (Based on ID Sensor Readings)
The laser projects the ID sensor pattern onto the drum.
The ID sensor reads the patterns and obtains a value for Vsp (covered area of the pattern)
and a value for Vsg (bare surface of the drum in the pattern).
The machine takes these values and calculates a new value for Vref (Vref = Vsp/Vsg). The
voltage that was used to make the sensor pattern can be displayed with SP3902 006.
Step 6 Update Vb, Vg (Based on VL Detection)
Vb (Development Bias Voltage) and Vg (Charge Grid Voltage) are finally updated.
Step 7 Process Control Ends
All motors shut off in the same sequence as any job end.
D059/D060/D061 6-90 SM
Development
6.7 DEVELOPMENT
6.7.1 OVERVIEW
1. Hopper Filter 8. Separator
2. Hopper Center Filter 9. Toner Transport Coil
3. Toner Hopper Sensor 10. Cross-mixing Roller
4. Agitator 11. TD Sensor
5. Toner Supply Roller 12. Paddle Roller

Details
6. Upper Development Roller 13. Lower Development Roller
7. Doctor Blade
This main machine uses a double roller development system and a dual component
development process with toner particles 6.8 µm and developer particles 50 µm. To
improve image quality, the width of the magnetic area on the lower development roller has
been reduced.
This system differs from single roller development systems in that:
It develops the image in a narrower area
It develops the image twice
SM 6-91 D059/D060/D061
Development
The relative speed of each development roller against the drum is reduced.
This machine contains a toner recycling system. Toner collected from the drum by the drum
cleaning unit is transported to the toner entrance tank, where it mixes with fresh toner from
the toner bottle.
D059/D060/D061 6-92 SM
Development
6.7.2 DEVELOPMENT MECHANISM
Toner and developer are mixed in the toner agitator by the cross-mixing roller [A]. The
paddle roller [B] picks up the developer and sends it to the upper development roller [C].
Internal permanent magnets in the development rollers attract the developer to the
development roller sleeve. Developer from the upper development roller sleeve is also
attracted to the lower development roller [D].
The upper development roller carries the developer past the doctor blade [E] which trims
the developer to the desired thickness. Excess developer spills over the separator [F] to
the toner transport coil [G]. The coil transports the developer from back to front as far as
the cross-mixing roller.
In this machine, black areas of the latent image are at a low negative charge (about -150 V)
and white areas are at a high negative charge (about -800 V).
Details
The development rollers continue to turn and carry the developer to the drum [H].
SM 6-93 D059/D060/D061
Development
6.7.3 DRIVE
The gears in the development unit are driven by the development drive gear [A] when the
development motor [B] (a dc servomotor) turns.
The gears in the toner hopper are driven by the toner supply roller drive gear [C], which is
connected to the toner supply motor [D].
A one-way clutch on the paddle roller knob [E] prevents counter-clockwise rotation of the
paddle roller.
A dedicated dc motor [F] (hopper agitator motor) is provided for the agitator to:
Reduce the amount of time for toner filling after development unit replacement
Reduce the load on the drive components
To better control toner transport by the toner supply pump in the toner hopper
D059/D060/D061 6-94 SM
Development
6.7.4 CROSS-MIXING
This main machine uses a standard cross-mixing mechanism to keep the toner and
developer evenly mixed. It also helps agitate the developer to prevent developer clumps
from forming and helps create the tribo-electric charge.
The developer on the turning development rollers [A] is split into two parts by the doctor
blade [B]. The part that stays on the development rollers forms the magnetic brush and
develops the latent image on the drum. The part that is trimmed off by the doctor blade
goes to the back-spill plate [C].
As the developer slides down the back-spill plate to the agitator [D], the mixing vanes [E]
move it slightly toward the rear of the unit. Part of the developer falls into the auger inlet Details
and is transported to the front of the unit by the auger [F].
SM 6-95 D059/D060/D061
Development
6.7.5 DEVELOPMENT BIAS
The CGB (Charge Grid Bias) power pack [A] applies the negative development bias
(-550V) to both the lower sleeve roller and upper sleeve roller through the receptacles [B]
and the sleeve roller shafts [C].
The development bias prevents toner from being attracted to the non-image areas on the
drum where there is residual voltage. In addition, the development bias changes with the
image density setting chosen for the copy job by the user.
The development rollers [D] employ fixed shafts that do not rotate. This eliminates friction
on the shafts. The shafts never require lubrication.
D059/D060/D061 6-96 SM
Development
6.7.6 DEVELOPMENT UNIT TONER SUCTION
To ensure that the fine-grained toner does not scatter and blacken the interior of the
machine, a toner suction assembly reduces the pressure inside the development unit.
Below the development unit [A] the toner suction pump [B], driven by the toner suction
motor [C], draws air out of the development unit along with any airborne toner. The toner is
sent to the toner suction bottle [D] on the right side of the machine.
The toner suction motor switches on and off with the development motor.
The service life of both the toner suction bottle and toner suction motor are limited. Details
The service life of the bottle is set with SP 2972 (‘near-full" is at 680 hours, and ‘full’ is
at 720 hours – 3000K: A4 6%).
The service life of the motor is set with SP 2973 (‘near-end’ is at 570 hours, and ‘end’ is
at 600 hours).
When an end alert is issued for the toner suction motor, a message is displayed on the
main machine LCD panel.
SM 6-97 D059/D060/D061
Development
6.7.7 TONER HOPPER

Toner Supply
The toner supply pump motor pumps toner from the toner supply cylinder into the hopper.
This toner is new toner mixed with recycled toner.
When the hopper agitator motor [A] (inside the development motor unit [B]) turns on, the
agitator [C] mixes the toner. Then it moves the toner from rear to front and sends it to the
toner supply roller.
Toner is caught in the grooves in the toner supply roller [D]. Then, as the grooves turn past
the opening, the toner falls into the development unit.
The toner supply motor [E] drives the toner supply roller.
Toner supply is controlled by the ID sensor and the toner density sensor.
D059/D060/D061 6-98 SM
Development
Toner Hopper Empty Detection
The toner hopper sensor [A] detects whether there is enough toner in the toner hopper.
The toner hopper sensor checks for toner once when the toner supply roller clutch turns on.
When there is only a small amount of toner inside the toner hopper and pressure on the
toner hopper sensor becomes low, the toner hopper sensor outputs a pulse signal for each
copy. Then the toner supply pump supplies more toner to the toner hopper.
Details
SM 6-99 D059/D060/D061
Development
6.7.8 TONER DENSITY CONTROL

Overview
There are two modes for controlling toner supply: sensor control mode and image pixel
count control mode. The mode can be selected with SP2208. The factory setting is sensor
control mode. Image pixel count mode should only be used if the TD [A] or ID [B] sensor is
defective and cannot be replaced immediately.
Toner Supply Timing

After the trailing edge of the image leaves the development area, the machine calculates
how long the toner supply motor should be switched on (based on the TD sensor reading).
Then, the toner supply motor switches on for the time prescribed by the calculation. Until
the toner supply motor switches off, the development motor, drum motor, charge, and
development bias all remain on.
Regardless of whether the machine is in the sensor control or pixel count toner supply
mode, toner is supplied based on the setting for the toner supply interval entered with
SP2974 (Toner Supply Interval); the default is every print.
If the TD sensor malfunctions, then toner is supplied for each copy and the setting for
SP2974 is ignored.
D059/D060/D061 6-100 SM
Development
The SP2974 setting has no effect on the ID sensor pattern interval; the ID sensor
pattern interval is set with SP2210 (ID Sensor Pattern Interval)
Sensor Control Mode

In sensor control mode, the machine varies toner supply for each copy to maintain the
correct proportion of toner in the developer and to account for changes in drum reflectivity
over time. The adjustment depends on two factors.
Amount of toner needed to print the page (based on the black pixel amount for the
page).
Readings from the TD sensor and ID sensor.
Sensor control mode has two phases, called ‘ID sensor control’ and ‘TD sensor control’. In
ID sensor control, VSP/VSG from the most recent ID sensor pattern check determines the
GAIN factor in the toner supply calculation (see later in this section). In TD sensor control
mode, GAIN depends on the current TD sensor output also (VT – VREF is used).
The phase that is used depends on the number of copies since the start of the job. See the
table below for details.
Number of copies in the job Copy no. Control method
10 or fewer 1 to 10 ID Sensor Control
More than 10 From 11 TD Sensor Control
Vref Decision
When new developer is installed, TD sensor initial setting must be done using SP2801.
This sets the sensor output to 2.5 ±0.1V. This value is used as the TD sensor reference Details
voltage (VREF). Thereafter, a new reference value for the TD sensor is calculated from the
ID sensor output (every time the ID sensor pattern is read) and the current TD sensor
reading (Vt).
If the sensor output cannot be adjusted to within the standard, SC368 or SC372 is logged
and the toner density control is set to the pixel count control.
VSP and VSG Detection
The ID sensor detects the following voltages.
VSG: The ID sensor output when checking the drum surface
VSP: The ID sensor output when checking the ID sensor pattern
In this way, the reflectivity of both the drum and the pattern on the drum are checked.
The ID sensor pattern is made on the drum with the charge corona and laser diode.
SM 6-101 D059/D060/D061
Development
VREF Update
To update VREF (the TD sensor reference voltage), VSP/VSG is detected at the end of the
copy job, if 10 or more copies have been made since the last VREF update. This
compensates for any variations in the reflectivity of the pattern on the drum or the
reflectivity of the drum surface. The 10-copy interval can be changed using SP2210.
VREF is also updated during process control initial setting.
If the reading of the ID sensor becomes abnormal while checking the ID sensor pattern,
SC400, SC401, SC402, or SC406 is logged and the toner density control is done using TD
sensor only.
VT Detection
The toner density in the developer is detected once every copy cycle, after the trailing edge
of the image passes the development roller.
If the reading from the TD sensor, done for every page in the copy job, becomes abnormal
(Vt ≤ 0.5V or Vt ≥ 4.0V), then the machine holds the GAIN factor constant to allow toner
supply to vary with only the pixel count for the rest of the copy job. Then at the end of the
job, SC360 (Vt Above Upper Limit) or SC364 (Vt Below Lower Limit) is generated and the
machine must be repaired.
If the TD sensor needs to be replaced and none is available, the toner supply mode can be
set to image pixel count mode using SP2208.
Image Pixel Count
For each copy, the CPU adds up the value of each pixel and converts the sum to a value
between 0 and 255. (The value would be 255 if the page was all black.)
Gain Determination
GAIN is another factor in the toner supply motor on time calculation. Its value can be 0, 1,
1.5, 2, 3, or 4. It is calculated either using VSP/VSG if ID sensor control is being used, or
every copy using “VT – VREF” if TD sensor control is being used (see Sensor Control
Mode – Overview for more on TD and ID sensor control).
D059/D060/D061 6-102 SM
Development
ID Sensor Control
VSP/VSG GAIN
≤ 3/40 0
≤ 9/100 0
≤ 21/200 1
≤ 1/8 1
≤ 4/25 2
≤ 41/200 3
≤ 1/2 4
> 1/2 1
TD Sensor Control
a = VT – VREF GAIN
a < 0.00 0
0.00 ≤ a < 0.06 1
0.06 ≤ a < 0.10 2

Details
0.10 ≤ a < 0.20 3
0.20 ≤ a 4
Toner Supply Motor On Time Calculation

The toner supply motor on time for each copy is decided using the following formula: (GAIN
x Image pixel count x 0.7mg/cm2/Toner Supply Rate) + 50 ms
When GAIN is “0”, the above 50 ms is set to “0”.
The toner supply rate can be changed using SP2209.
SM 6-103 D059/D060/D061
Development
Image Pixel Count Control

This mode should only be use as a temporary countermeasure while waiting for
replacement parts, such as a TD sensor. This mode controls the toner supply using the
same formula for the toner supply motor on time. However, the GAIN value is fixed at 0.7.
D059/D060/D061 6-104 SM
Toner Supply and Recycling
6.8 TONER SUPPLY AND RECYCLING
6.8.1 OVERVIEW
Toner is supplied from a toner bank [A] on the left side of the machine. The toner bank
holds two bottles. Only one bottle operates at a time.
A small toner bottle motor turns the bottle [B]. This spills toner into the toner entrance tank
Details
[C].
The toner transport coil in the toner transport tube [D] transports toner to the toner supply
cylinder [E]. The toner supply cylinder contains a small agitator motor [F] and toner end
sensor [G]. The agitator prevents the toner from clumping. The sensor monitors the level of
toner in the toner supply cylinder.
Due to the length of the toner supply path (400 mm), a toner supply pump [H] is needed to
draw the toner into the toner hopper [I].
Toner Bottle Capacity: 1650 g A4 6%: About 60K prints
Here are some important points to remember about the toner bank:
The toner bank contains the toner bottles, the toner collection bottle below the bottles.
The toner entrance tank comprises the back side of the toner bank.
SM 6-105 D059/D060/D061
The toner bank holds two toner bottles. This doubles the toner supply capacity for the
machine and allows replacement of an empty toner bottle while the machine is
operating.
The machine works even if there is only one bottle installed.
Toner can be supplied from either the upper or lower toner bottle, but not from both at
the same time. When toner runs out in one bottle, toner supply from the other bottle
starts automatically.
After the toner near-end message is displayed for both toner bottles, the toner bottle
still has enough toner for about 200 copies.
The lower toner bottle is loaded first, then the upper toner bottle is loaded. If the upper
toner bottle is loaded first, a message will be displayed on the operation panel to
request loading the lower toner bottle.
Handle toner bottles carefully. Avoid shaking them.
D059/D060/D061 6-106 SM
6.8.2 TONER BANK

Toner Bottle Switching Mechanism
When the upper toner bottle [A] is supplying toner, the upper bottle cap motor [B] pulls out
the toner bottle cap. The upper bottle cap sensor [C] detects the actuator [D] of the toner
bottle opening rod, then the motor shuts off.
Toner is supplied from the toner bottle to the toner entrance tank where a toner end sensor
(see the next page) checks for the presence of toner in the toner entrance tank.
When the toner end sensor (not shown) can no longer detect any toner, it signals the
machine that it is time to switch bottles. The upper bottle cap motor switches on and closes
Details
the cap of the top bottle, while the lower bottle cap motor [E] switches on and opens the
cap of the lower bottle so it can start supplying toner.
SM 6-107 D059/D060/D061
Toner Near-end, Toner End, Bottle Replacement
Each toner bottle [A] has an independent toner bottle motor [B]. An empty toner bottle can
be replaced during printing. The toner bottle end sensor [C] detects toner when it falls from
the toner bottle into the toner entrance tank [D]. If the sensor detects that no toner has
come out of the toner bottle, the toner bottle enters the toner end condition.
The toner bottle motor rotates the toner bottle 1 sec to try to supply toner to the toner
entrance tank.
If the sensor detects toner end condition 15 consecutive times, the machine judges the
bottle to be empty.
When the first toner bottle is empty, the machine switches to the second toner bottle.
The first toner bottle cap motor closes the bottle cap and the second toner bottle cap motor
pulls out the second bottle cap. The motors operate until the first bottle inner cap sensor
D059/D060/D061 6-108 SM
does not detect the actuator and the second bottle inner cap sensor does detect the
actuator.
The second toner bottle is then rotated.
When the operator takes out the old bottle, and puts in a new one, this is detected by the
toner bottle sensor. However, this bottle is not tested until the second bottle is empty. When
the second bottle is empty, the machine switches back to the first bottle.
If an empty bottle is not replaced, and the other bottle becomes empty (toner end condition
detected 15 consecutive times, as described above), 200 more copies can be made. Then
Details
the machine enters the system toner end condition (both bottles are empty), and this is
indicated in the operation panel display.
The system toner end condition continues and printing is not possible.
SM 6-109 D059/D060/D061
Toner Bottle Sensors
When a toner bottle is placed in the toner bank, the toner bottle pushes the lock arm [A]
down. Then the lock arm catches the toner bottle and also pushes down lever [B]. This
causes toner bottle sensor [C] to detect that a bottle has been installed (the actuator leaves
the toner bottle sensor while the bottle is being inserted in the holder).
When replacing a toner bottle, push the toner bottle release lever [D] to release the lock
mechanism. While a toner bottle is supplying toner, the toner bottle opening rod is pulled to
the rear and the lock plate [E] is lowered by the link [F] so that the toner bottle release lever
cannot be pushed. Therefore, the toner bottle that is supplying toner is always locked in
place, and the user cannot pull out the bottle until it is empty.
D059/D060/D061 6-110 SM
6.8.3 SUPPLYING TONER TO THE DEVELOPMENT UNIT
The toner bottle motor turns the toner bottle [A]. This spills toner into the toner entrance
tank [B].
Toner collected from the drum cleaning unit is also sent to the toner entrance tank where it
mixes with fresh toner.
The toner bank motor drives the toner transport coil via the toner supply coil clutch toner.
The revolving coil [C] inside the transport tube transports the toner to the toner supply
cylinder [D].
Details
The toner supply cylinder [E] contains a small agitator motor [F] and a toner end sensor [G].
The agitator prevents toner clumping in the cylinder. The sensor monitors the level of toner
in the cylinder.
SM 6-111 D059/D060/D061
The toner supply pump motor [H] pumps toner from the toner supply cylinder to the toner
hopper [I]. The toner supply pump [J] is a "dry" powder pump driven by an impeller. There
is no problem with an increase in pressure inside the toner hopper. One filter is sufficient to
vent pressure from the hopper. The toner pump motor sensor [K] checks that the motor is
working.
When the machine enters the toner supply mode, the toner supply cylinder and toner
hopper are checked for toner, by following the pattern described in the table below step by
step.
In the table below, the levels are monitored by the toner cylinder toner-end sensor in the
toner supply cylinder and by the toner hopper sensor in the toner hopper.
TS Cylinder Hopper
Pattern Step Operation Panel Message
Toner? Toner?
A NO NO Step 1 to Step 2 Starting toner supply.
B YES NO No Step 2 Starting toner supply.
C NO YES No Step 1 Starting toner supply.
D YES YES TS Mode End Toner present, canceling…
Step 1: Toner transported from toner entrance bank to toner supply cylinder
Step 2: Toner transported from toner supply cylinder to toner hopper
1 Toner Bottle Toner Entrance Bank
The toner bottle end sensor in the toner entrance bank controls the operation of two toner
D059/D060/D061 6-112 SM
bottles motors. This sensor checks for the presence of toner:
2 s after the bottle chuck opens
500 ms after the toner bottle motor goes off
Every 200 ms while the toner supply clutch is on
If the sensor detects insufficient toner at any one of these checks, the sensor signals the
machine to turn on the toner bottle motor.
2 Toner Entrance Bank Toner Supply Cylinder
The toner bank motor and toner supply clutch drive the transport coil inside the diagonal
transport tube that carries toner from the toner entrance bank to the toner supply cylinder.
The toner cylinder toner-end sensor monitors the level of toner in the toner cylinder every
100 ms and signals the machine to turn on the toner bank motor for 2 seconds when toner
runs low (toner end) in the toner cylinder. If the sensor detects insufficient toner for longer
than 2 seconds, it signals the machine to issue SC494 because toner transport has
stopped due to an obstruction or some other problem.
3 Toner Supply Cylinder Agitator, Toner End Sensor Cleaning
A small toner cylinder agitator motor drives the agitator inside the toner cylinder. This motor
turns on when the toner hopper sensor signals insufficient toner and turns off as soon as
the toner hopper sensor signals sufficient toner.
The toner cylinder TE (toner end) sensor checks the toner level 1 second after the agitator
motor turns off and thereafter checks at 200 ms intervals. It does not check the toner level
while the agitator motor is on.
4 Toner Supply Cylinder Toner Hopper
The toner hopper sensor controls the operation of the toner pump motor. The toner hopper
sensor checks the level of the toner 1 second after the hopper agitator turns off, and 1
second after the toner pump motor turns off. If the sensor detects insufficient toner, it waits
Details
for 1 second then signals the pump motor to switch on for 2 seconds.
If the sensor detects insufficient toner for more than 2 seconds, it signals the machine to
issue SC495 because toner supply has stopped due to a blockage in the toner supply path
below, a defective toner pump, or some other problem.
5 Toner Hopper Development Unit
The toner hopper agitator motor turns on with the toner supply pump motor.
The machine maintains a running count for the time the hopper supply clutch remains on.
SM 6-113 D059/D060/D061
For every 500 ms the hopper supply clutch remains on, the agitator motor is turned on for
500 ms. The count is reset every time the hopper agitator motor turns on, or is reset as
soon as the toner hopper sensor signals "toner present".
SP2977 (Toner Supply/Transport Display) logs the total on time of key components in the
toner supply system (toner bank motor, toner supply clutch, toner collection bottle agitator,
toner supply cylinder agitator motor, and the toner pump motor). For more, please refer to
Section "5. Service Tables".
D059/D060/D061 6-114 SM
6.8.4 TONER RECYCLING AND TONER COLLECTION

Overview
To recycle used toner for re-use, the toner recycling coil [A] in the tube [B] transports the
toner collected by the drum cleaning to the toner entrance tank for recycling.
The toner collection coil [A] in the tube [B] transports the toner collected from the transfer
belt unit to the toner collection bottle. The toner cleaned from the transfer belt cannot be
recycled.
The drum motor [C] drives the toner recycling coil [A] via timing belts and gears, whose
rotation in return drives the toner collection coil [B] via gears.
Details
SM 6-115 D059/D060/D061
Toner Recycling
The toner recycling coil [A] in the tube transports the toner collected by the drum cleaning
unit to the toner entrance tank [B] for recycling. This toner is dropped into the toner
entrance tank and mixed with fresh toner from the toner bottle. The toner bank motor [C]
drives the toner transport coil via the toner supply coil clutch [D].
The new toner separation shutter mechanism (toner recycling shutter solenoid [E] and
shutter [F]) reduces the amount of paper dust in the toner. During recycling, paper dust
gradually collects in the toner, which can cause black dots to appear on copies. At the
prescribed interval, the toner separation mechanism purges all toner from the toner supply
system and replaces it with new toner, as described below.
Normally during toner recycling, the toner recycling shutter solenoid remains on and the
shutter remains open, but when the number of copies exceeds 25K, the toner recycling
shutter solenoid switches off and the shutter closes.
After the solenoid switches off, no toner recycling is done for the next 25K copies, and all
used toner is sent to the toner collection bottle without recycling. Toner from the toner
hopper takes about 20K copies to pass through the recycling path cleaning and collection
tubes, so during the 25K copies after the solenoid switches off, all the toner in the toner
supply path is purged from the system and replaced with fresh toner.
The timing of this operation can be adjusted with SP2975 001, 002 (Toner Recycle
Cut Counter – ON Counter/OFF Counter). SP2975 001 determines how often the
toner is purged (default: 25K), and SP2975 002 determines how long the purge is
done for (default: 25k copies)
D059/D060/D061 6-116 SM
The toner collection coil in the tube [A] transports the toner collected by the transfer belt
unit to the toner collection bottle. This toner contains paper dust and cannot be recycled.
The toner falls from the collection coil [B] onto the toner agitator coil [C]. The agitator coil
distributes toner evenly across the length of the bottle. As a result, toner does not build up
on one end and trigger the full alert before the bottle is actually full.
Details
The capacity of the toner collection bottle is approximately 1800 grams (A4 6%: 650K).
SM 6-117 D059/D060/D061
When the toner collection bottle starts to fill up, the toner agitator coil [A] becomes harder to
turn. When this occurs, the actuator plate [B] does not rotate because the agitator coil drive
gear [C] has a torque limiter, and the output of the toner collection bottle agitator sensor [D]
becomes constant. At this time, the operation panel indicates that the toner collection bottle
is nearly full. After this, about 200K sheets can be printed until the bottle becomes full.
When the toner collection bottle is full, the toner collection coil [E] becomes harder to turn.
When this occurs, the actuator plate [F] does not rotate, and the output of the toner
collection bottle overflow sensor [G] becomes constant. In this condition, the operation
panel LCD indicates “Toner Full”, all copy paper in the paper feed path is fed out, and
printing stops.
If the toner bottle is not properly installed inside the toner bank, the toner collection bottle
sensor [H] detects this condition and the operation panel LCD displays error messages
(used toner bottle is not set correctly).
D059/D060/D061 6-118 SM
Paper Feed
6.9 PAPER FEED
6.9.1 OVERVIEW
Details
SM 6-119 D059/D060/D061
Paper Feed
1. Duplex Tray 13. 2nd Transport Roller
2. Registration Rollers 14. 2nd Paper Feed Sensor
3. Double-Feed Sensor (Emitter) 15. 3rd Transport Roller
4. Double-Feed Sensor (Receptor) 16. 3rd Grip Roller
5. Registration Sensor 17. 3rd Paper Feed Sensor
6. LCT Relay Rollers 18. 3rd Paper Feed Roller
7. LCT Relay Sensor 19. 3rd Separation Roller
8. Upper Relay Roller 20. 3rd Pick-up Roller
9. Upper Relay Sensor 21. 3rd Tray
10. 1st Transport Roller 22. 2nd Tray
11. 1st Paper Feed Sensor 23. 1st Tray (Tandem Tray)
12. Vertical Relay Roller
This model has three paper tray feed stations:

1st Tray (23). The tandem tray holds 2,000 sheets of paper (1,000 sheets x 2 stacks).
The tandem tray can be converted to a 1,000-sheet tray for larger paper sizes with the
optional A3/DLT Feed Kit B331.
2nd Tray (22). This is a universal tray. It holds 500 sheets of paper. To allow easy
removal, the paper cassette is not fastened to the tray with screws.
3rd Tray (21). Identical to the 2nd tray.
All feed stations use the FRR feed system, shown at (17)-(20) above for the 3rd tray.
The arrangement of the rollers is identical for each paper tray:
Rotation of the pick-up roller (20) drives the top sheet of paper to the paper feed roller
(18) and separation roller (19).
The grip roller (17) feeds the sheet to the transport roller (15).
The transport roller feeds the paper into the vertical paper path and to the transport
and relay rollers above.
D059/D060/D061 6-120 SM
Paper Feed
6.9.2 DRIVE
Layout
Details
SM 6-121 D059/D060/D061
Paper Feed
1. Registration Motor 13. 2nd Transport Roller
2. Registration Roller 14. 2nd Transport Sensor
3. Registration Sensor 15. 3rd Grip Motor
4. Upper Relay Motor 16. 3rd Transport Roller
5. Upper Relay Roller 17. 3rd Transport Sensor
6. Upper Relay Sensor 18. 3rd Grip Roller
7. 1st Grip Motor 19. 3rd Paper Feed Sensor
8. 1st Transport Roller 20. 3rd Paper Feed Motor
9. 1st Transport Sensor 21. 3rd Paper Feed Roller
10. Vertical Relay Motor 22. 3rd Separation Roller
11. Vertical Relay Roller 23. 3rd Pick-up Solenoid
12. 2nd Grip Motor 24. 3rd Pick-up Roller
Items 18-24 are shown for Tray 3 only. These components are duplicated in Tray 1
and Tray 2 but do not appear in the illustration above.
Tray Components (Example: 3rd Tray)

The 3rd paper feed motor (20) drives both the 3rd paper feed roller (21) and 3rd pick-up
roller (24).
The 3rd grip motor (15) drives the 3rd grip roller (18), the 3rd transport roller (16), and the
3rd separation roller.
The 3rd paper feed sensor times the paper feed and signals jams if they occur.
The pick-up roller picks the sheet off the top of the stack, the paper feed motor feeds the
sheet to the grip roller. The grip roller pulls the sheet out of the cassette and sends to the
transport roller. The transport roller feeds the sheet into the vertical feed path.
This arrangement of motors and rollers is duplicated in tray 1 and tray 2.
D059/D060/D061 6-122 SM
Paper Feed
Vertical Paper Path

After the sheet leaves the 3rd tray, it feeds to the 3rd transport roller (16) > 2nd Transport
roller (13) > Vertical relay roller (10) > 1st transport roller (8) > Upper relay roller >
Registration roller.
Each paper tray has a transport roller paired with one transport sensor.
The grip motors (one in each tray) drive the transport rollers, which feed the paper past
the paper trays. Their sensors check the timing of each sheet when it passes, and
signal jams if they occur.
The vertical relay motor (10) is positioned between the 1st transport roller (7) and 2nd
transport roller (12). This motor is necessary due to the greater distance between
transport rollers, due to the greater height of the 1st tray.
All the rollers are driven by stepper motors only.
The stepper motors were added for the feed and transport rollers on separate drive
shafts to improve the accuracy of control in the paper path.
Details
SM 6-123 D059/D060/D061
Paper Feed
6.9.3 PAPER LIFT – TRAYS 2 & 3
The machine detects when a tray has been placed in the machine by a signal from the
paper size switch. When this is detected, the tray lift motor [A] turns on. The coupling gear
[B] on the tray lift motor engages the pin [C] on the lift arm shaft [D], then it turns the tray lift
arm [E] to lift the tray bottom plate [F].
For tray 1, an electrical signal from the tray connector automatically informs the CPU when
the tray has been placed in the machine.
D059/D060/D061 6-124 SM
Paper Feed
When a stack of paper is loaded in the tray, the paper end sensor below the stack (not
shown) activates and switches on the pick-up solenoid [A] to lower the pick-up roller [B]. At
the same time, the tray lift motor [C] switches on and lifts the bottom plate [D]. This plate
pushes the top of the stack up against the pick-up roller until the actuator [E] descends and
leaves the tray lift sensor [F] slot. This de-activates the tray lift sensor; the tray is now at the
correct feed position so the machine switches off the tray lift motor.
The pick-up roller descends gradually with each sheet fed, so the tray lift sensor actuator
ascends until it activates the tray lift sensor. This signals the machine to switch on the tray
lift motor to raise the stack to the correct feed height. The tray lift sensor again deactivates
Details
to switch off the tray lift motor. This process is repeated to position the top of the stack at
the correct feed height.
When the tray is drawn out of the feed unit, the lift motor coupling gear [G] disengages the
pin [H] of the lift arm shaft, then the tray bottom plate drops under its own weight.
SM 6-125 D059/D060/D061
Paper Feed
6.9.4 PICK-UP AND FEED – TRAYS 1, 2, 3

Overview
Drive from the paper feed motor [A] is transmitted to the paper feed roller [B] and pick-up
roller [C].
The grip motor [D] drives the separation roller [E] and grip roller [F].
D059/D060/D061 6-126 SM
Paper Feed
Pick-up and Feed
If a paper feed station is not selected, its separation roller solenoid [A] de-activates.
When the paper feed station is selected and the start key is pressed, the paper feed motor,
grip motor, separation roller solenoid, and the pick-up solenoid [B] all turn on.
Paper feed motor: This rotates the feed roller [C], and the pick-up roller [D] linked to the
feed roller by an idle gear [E].
Grip motor: Rotates the grip roller and separation roller [F].
Separation roller solenoid [A]: When this solenoid turns on, the separation roller [F]
contacts the paper feed roller [C].
Pick-up solenoid [B]: When this solenoid turns on, the pick-up roller [D] lowers to contact
the top sheet of the paper stack and sends it to the nip of the paper feed and separation
rollers. Details
When the paper feed sensor [G] detects the leading edge of the paper, the pick-up solenoid
de-energizes to lift the pick-up roller. The grip motor turns on and the grip roller and the
transport roller pull the paper out of the tray and feed it into the vertical feed path.
SM 6-127 D059/D060/D061
Paper Feed
Separation Roller Release
The separation roller [A] is normally away from the feed roller [B]. When the paper feed
station is selected, the separation roller solenoid [C] pushes the separation roller up so it
touches the paper feed roller.
This contact/release mechanism has the following two advantages:
After paper feed is completed, paper sometimes remains between the feed and
separation rollers. If the feed tray is pulled out in this condition, this paper might be torn.
When the separation roller is away from the feed roller, the remaining paper can be
removed from between the rollers.
When paper misfeeds occur around this area, the operator can easily pull out the
jammed paper between the feed and the separation rollers if the separation roller is
away from the feed roller.
D059/D060/D061 6-128 SM
Paper Feed
6.9.5 REMAINING PAPER/PAPER END DETECTION (TRAY 2, 3)
Remaining Paper Detection

The tray lift motor [A] rotates when the tray is pushed in. The CPU detects the remaining
paper by monitoring the lift motor rotation angle (4 levels).
End Detection
The paper end sensor [B] is a photo-reflective sensor. While there is paper in the tray, light
is reflected back to the sensor, but after the last sheet feeds, the sensor deactivates and
signals paper out.
Details
SM 6-129 D059/D060/D061
Paper Feed
6.9.6 PAPER SIZE DETECTION

Tandem Tray (Tray 1)
The tandem tray does not have paper size switches. Every time the paper size is changed
by moving the front and back fences, you must enter the selected paper size with
SP5019-002.
If you set SP 5019 002 to ‘Custom Size’, then you can input a custom size for the tandem
tray with SP 5040 and 5041.
Universal Cassettes (Tray 2, 3)
The output from the switch depends on the position of the dial (see the table on the
following page)
The paper size switch [A] detects the paper size with 5 microswitches. The actuator plate
[B], attached to the rear of the paper tray, actuates the paper size switch, and the side
fence [C] changes position.
Paper Size Switch Output
D059/D060/D061 6-130 SM
Paper Feed
Paper Size Switch
12" x 18" SEF 12" x 18" 11111
A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm 11001
B4 SEF 257 x 394 mm 10011
A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm 01001
A4 LEF 210 x 297 mm 11000
B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm 10101
B5 LEF 182 x 257 mm 00011
A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm 11101
A5 LEF 148 x 210 mm 01101
DLT 11" x 17" 11100
LG SEF 8½" x 14" 10110
LT SEF 8½" x 11" 11010
LT LEF 8½" x 11" 01100
HLT SEF 5½" x 8½ " 01110
HLT LEF 5½" x 8½ " 11110 Details
F4 8½" x 13" 11011
Folio 8¼" x 13" 01011
SM 6-131 D059/D060/D061
Paper Feed
Paper Size Switch
F 8" x 13" 01111
Executive LEF 7¼" x 10 ½" 10100
Executive SEF 7¼" x 10 ½" 00111
8-Kai 267 x 390 mm 00110
16-Kai LEF 267 x 195 mm 10010
16-Kai SEF 195 x 267 mm 10111
0: OFF (Sensor Output HIGH)

1: ON (Sensor Output LOW)
If the user does not put the fences at the correct position, a jam can occur.
To use a paper size that is not in this table, select the size with the Tray Paper Settings
button. If the paper size is not the same as the setting, a jam can occur. Note that SP 5112
must be set to ‘enabled’ or non-standard sizes cannot be selected for trays 2 and 3.
D059/D060/D061 6-132 SM
Paper Feed
6.9.7 TRAY LOCK – TRAY 2, 3
When the tray is placed in the paper feed unit, the lock lever [A] drops behind the lock plate
[B] on the support bracket to lock the tray in the proper position.
6.9.8 TANDEM FEED – TRAY 1

Overview
Details
1,000 sheets of paper can be set in the left tray [A] and right tray [B] of tray 1, the tandem
paper tray. Paper is fed from the right tray. When the paper in the right tray runs out, the
paper stack in the left tray automatically is pushed to the right tray. After the stack is moved
from the left tray to the right tray, paper feeding resumes.
Normally both the right and the left trays are joined. However, during copying, if there is no
paper in the left tray, the left tray can be pulled out to load paper while the right tray stays in
the machine so paper feed can continue.
SM 6-133 D059/D060/D061
Paper Feed
After moving the adjustable side fences for a different paper size, be sure to
execute SP5019 002 (Tray Paper Size Selection – 1st Tray) to select the correct
setting for the paper size loaded in the tandem tray. (The tandem tray cannot
detect the paper size automatically.)
Connecting the Left and Right Sides of the Tray
Normally the left tray lock lever [A] catches the pin [B] in the right tandem tray. During
copying, if there is no paper in the left tray, the tandem tray connect solenoid [C] turns on to
release the tray lock lever so the left tray separates from the right tray. Therefore, the left
tray can be pulled out to load paper while paper is still being fed into the machine from the
right tray.
When the tandem tray is drawn out fully, the projection [D] pushes up the left tray lock lever
[A] so that both trays separate for easier paper loading.
D059/D060/D061 6-134 SM
Paper Feed
Paper Lift/Remaining Paper Detection: Tray 1

The machine detects when the 1st tray has been placed in the machine by monitoring the
tray set signal through the connector.
When the machine detects the 1st paper tray, the right 1st tray paper sensor [N] (under the
tray) checks whether there is paper in the right tandem tray. When paper is detected, the
tray lift motor [A] rotates and the coupling gear [B] on the tray lift motor engages the pin [C]
of the lift shaft [D].
The tray wires [E] are fixed in the slots [F] at the ends of the tray support rods [G, H]. When
the tray lift motor rotates clockwise, the tray support rods and the tray bottom plate [I] rise.
The tray rises until stack pushes up the pick-up roller until the tray lift sensor de-activates
and switches off the tray lift motor. Details
As the actuator [K] on the right support rod [G] rises, it de-activates each of the 4 paper
height sensors [J] to trigger 5 levels of paper remaining alerts on the operation panel.
SM 6-135 D059/D060/D061
Paper Feed
Paper Height Remaining

Comment
Sensor Paper
None 100% Bottom position, no sensors de-activated.
1 75%
2 50%
Each sensor de-activates as the actuator rises.
3 25%
4 Near End
Detected by the paper sensor [N] below the stack when

Paper Out
the last sheet feeds.
When the tray is removed, the coupling gear [B] separates from pin [C], so the tray bottom
plate descends. The tray descends until the actuator activates the lower limit sensor [L].
The damper [M] provides resistance so the tray bottom plate descends slowly.
D059/D060/D061 6-136 SM
Paper Feed
Feed and Lift: Tray 1
When the tray lift motor turns on, the pick-up solenoid [A] actuates and lowers the pick-up
roller [B]. When the top of the stack reaches the correct height for paper feed, it pushes up
the pick-up roller and lowers the actuator [C]. This actuator de-activates the tray lift sensor
[D] when it leaves the sensor slot, and this stops the tray lift motor.
After several paper feeds, the pick-up roller descends and the actuator rises and enters the
tray lift sensor and activates it. This switches on the tray lift motor again, which raises the Details
stack once again to the correct paper height.
When the tray is pulled out of the feed unit, the lift motor coupling gear [E] disengages the
pin [F] on the lift shaft [G], then the tray bottom plate [H] drops. The damper provides
resistance so the tray descends slowly.
There is also a paper end sensor for the 1st tray, which works in the same way as the
sensor in the 2nd and 3rd trays.
SM 6-137 D059/D060/D061
Paper Feed
Side Fence Drive: Tray 1
The side fences [A] of the right tray are normally closed. They open only when paper in the
left tray is moving to the right tray.
The side fence solenoids [B] drive the side fences. When the paper loaded in the left tray
transfers to the right tray, the side fence solenoids turn on to open the side fences until the
side fence open sensors [C] activate.
When the rear fence in the left tray has pushed the stack of paper into the right tray, the
side fence solenoids turn off to close the side fences. Then, when the side fence closed
sensors [D] activate, the LCD displays a message advising the user to load some paper
into the left side of the tandem tray.
D059/D060/D061 6-138 SM
Paper Feed
Rear Fence Drive
When the left 1st tray paper sensor [A] detects paper but the right 1st tray paper sensor
does not, the rear fence drive motor [B] (a DC motor) in the left tray turns counter-clockwise
causing the rear fence [C] to push the paper stack into the right tray.
When the actuator on the rear fence activates the rear fence return sensor [D], the rear
fence drive motor turns clockwise until the actuator activates the rear fence HP sensor [E].
While the rear fence is moving, the left 1st tray lock solenoid [F] turns on and the lock lever
[G] locks the left tray. Details
SM 6-139 D059/D060/D061
Paper Feed
Tray Positioning
Tray Lock
When the feed tray is set in the paper feed unit, the lock lever [A] drops behind the lock
plate [B] on the Accuride support bracket to lock the tray in the proper position.
Side-to-side Positioning
When the feed tray is set in the paper feed unit, the side-to-side positioning plate [C]
presses the feed tray against the stopper [D]. By moving the positioning plate, the tray
position can be changed to adjust the side-to-side registration.
D059/D060/D061 6-140 SM
Paper Feed
6.9.9 VERTICAL TRANSPORT
The vertical transport rollers in each feed unit are each driven by a separate stepper motor.
The vertical transport rollers and the vertical transport idle rollers (1), (2), (3), (4) on the
inner and outer vertical guide plates, transport the paper up from each feed unit towards
the relay and registration rollers.
The vertical transport guides [A] can be opened to remove jammed paper in the vertical
transport area.
Details
SM 6-141 D059/D060/D061
Paper Feed
6.9.10 LCT GUIDE PLATE
When the machine detects a jam at the LCT exit, paper feed stops, and the LCT guide
plate solenoid [A] releases the guide plate (labeled ‘B5’) [B] in order for the user to easily
remove jammed paper. After removing the jam, the user must return the B5 lever to its
normal position.
D059/D060/D061 6-142 SM
Paper Feed
6.9.11 PAPER REGISTRATION

Overview
The registration sensor [A] is positioned just before the registration rollers [B].
When the paper leading edge activates the registration sensor, the registration motor is off
and the registration rollers are not turning. However, the upper relay roller (or LCT relay
roller for feed from the LCT) [C] stays on for a bit longer.
This delay allows time for the paper to press against the registration rollers and buckle
slightly to correct skew. Next, the registration motor energizes and the upper relay motor
re-energizes at the proper time to align the paper with the image on the drum. The
registration and relay rollers feed the paper to the image transfer section.
Details
The registration sensor is also used for paper mis-feed detection, and the LCT relay sensor
[D] detects jams at the LCT roller.
SM 6-143 D059/D060/D061
Paper Feed
Registration Drive
The registration motor [A] drives the lower registration roller [B] through a timing belt [C]
and some gears. Drive is transmitted to the upper registration roller [D] via two gears [E] at
the front.
The paper dust remover extends across the length of the paper registration roller [D],
where most paper dust is generated.
Clean the dust remover every PM visit.
D059/D060/D061 6-144 SM
Paper Feed
Jam Removal at Paper Registration
If a sheet misfeeds between the vertical transport rollers and the registration rollers, the
next sheet is already on its way up from the paper tray, and must be stopped, or there will
be a pile-up of jammed paper.
To prevent this, when the registration sensor is not activated at a certain jam check timing,
the lower paper guide plate [A] automatically opens.
Guide plate solenoid [B] turns on > Lever [C] raises > Lock lever [D] (on the guide plate)
releases from pin [E] (on the rear side frame) > Guide plate [A] falls open > Paper coming
along the feed path is diverted to the duplex tray.
Actuator [F] on the guide plate activates the guide plate position sensor [G] when the guide Details
plate opens.
The user must remove jammed paper in the feed path, the sheet in the duplex tray, and
manually close the guide plate.
To prevent the guide plate from being left open, if the guide plate position sensor is
activated, copying is disabled and a caution is displayed on the LCD panel.
SM 6-145 D059/D060/D061
Paper Feed
6.9.12 IMAGE POSITION CORRECTION
There are three image position sensors:

(1) One in the LCT paper path above the paper path and in front of the LCT exit rollers.
(This sensor is mounted on its own control board.)
(2) One to the right of the vertical feed path in front of the last pair of transport rollers.
(3) One in the duplex unit of the main machine in front of the duplex exit roller and below
the last pair of duplex transport rollers.
Each sensor is a CIS (Contact Image Sensor). Each sensor checks the side edges of each
sheet as it passes, and feeds this information back to the machine.
If the side-to-side registration of the paper is slightly out of alignment, the machine will
correct the image position when the laser writes the image on the surface of the drum. This
function does not correct the position of the paper.
D059/D060/D061 6-146 SM
Paper Feed
6.9.13 DOUBLE-FEED DETECTION
[A]: Registration Rollers

[B]: Double-Feed Sensor 1 (Emitter)
[C]: Double-Feed Sensor 2 (Receptor)
The double-feed sensors, mounted above and below the paper path at the registration
roller, employ ultra-sound. The bottom sensor [A] (the emitter) aims uninterrupted small
supersonic waves at the top sensor [B] (the receptor).
Details
SM 6-147 D059/D060/D061
Paper Feed
When the a sheet of plain paper [A] passes between the bottom sensor and the top
sensor .
The sound waves emitted from the bottom sensor strike the paper. This is called the
"primary signal".
The waves striking the bottom of the paper start the paper oscillating very slightly only
where the waves strike. The obstruction of the paper weakens the wave signal on the
top side of the paper. This is called the "secondary signal".
The receptor sensor picks up this extremely weak secondary signal on top side of the
paper, amplifies it, converts it to an electronic signal and sends it to the URB.
The strength of the secondary signal is different for each type of paper, depending on
its thickness [B].
Because the secondary signal is very weak, if a double feed [C] occurs, there will be
no secondary signal and the receptor sensor will detect nothing. When this occurs the
machine will signal a double-feed, stop paper feed, and issue an error message.
D059/D060/D061 6-148 SM
Paper Feed
Both sensors are connected to the URB [A] which constantly monitors and compares the
strengths of the primary signal and the secondary signal.
The URB is mounted directly under the development unit so it is encased in a hard cover to
protect it from toner scatter. It connects directly to the IOB.
These sensors do not require calibration or adjustment.
Details
SM 6-149 D059/D060/D061
Paper Feed
6.9.14 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATERS (OPTIONS)
Two optional anti-condensation heaters can be installed below the 1st tray [A] and below
the 3rd tray [B].
The anti-condensation heaters switch on when the main switch or operation switch are
switched off. The anti-condensation trays prevent moisture from collecting in and around
the paper trays when the machine is not in use.
The anti-condensation heater connectors are not pre-set at the factory and must
be connected correctly before use. For details, see “1. Installation” in the main
service manual.
D059/D060/D061 6-150 SM
Image Transfer and Paper Separation
6.10 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION
6.10.1 OVERVIEW
The transfer belt unit consists of the following parts:

[A]: Transfer belt
A belt (length: 321 mm) with high electrical resistance which holds a high positive electrical
potential to attract toner from the drum to the paper.
Also, the electrical potential attracts the paper itself and helps the paper to separate from
the drum.
[B]: Transfer bias roller and transfer belt bias brush
Applies transfer voltage to the transfer belt.
Details
[C]: Transfer belt lift lever (driven by a magnetic latching solenoid)
Lifts the transfer belt into contact with the drum.
[D]: Transfer power pack
Generates a constant transfer current.
[E]: Cleaning bias roller and cleaning roller cleaning blade
Removes toner remaining on the transfer belt to prevent the rear side of the paper from
getting dirty.
[F]: Transfer belt cleaning blade
Removes toner from the transfer belt. Any toner that is not removed by this blade is
removed by the cleaning roller [E].
SM 6-151 D059/D060/D061
6.10.2 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION
The registration rollers [A] feed the paper [B] to the gap between the drum [C] and the
transfer belt [D].
As soon as the leading edge of the first sheet reaches the gap between the transfer belt
and the drum, the transfer belt lift lever [E] raises the transfer belt into contact with the drum.
The lift lever is driven by a solenoid.
D059/D060/D061 6-152 SM
Then a positive charge is applied to the transfer bias roller [F] and transfer belt bias brush
to attract the negatively charged toner [G] from the drum. It also attracts the paper and
separates it from the drum.
After the image transfer is completed, the charge on the transfer belt holds the paper to the
transfer belt. After separating the paper from the transfer belt, the transfer belt is
discharged by the transfer belt drive roller [A].
Details
SM 6-153 D059/D060/D061
The transfer power pack [B] inside the transfer belt unit monitors the current (I1 and I2) fed
back from the drive rollers at each end of the transfer belt to adjust the transfer current.
The power pack then adjusts “It” to keep the current through the drum (I3) constant, even if
the paper, environmental conditions, or transfer belt surface resistance change.
The varistor [C] keeps the voltage at the cleaning bias roller [D] constant.
To apply a higher current to the transfer belt without a higher voltage, the bias brush [E] has
been incorporated near the nip between drum and belt. This ensures that enough transfer
current is applied for this machine, which has a higher copy volume.
D059/D060/D061 6-154 SM
6.10.3 TRANSFER BELT UNIT LIFT
The transfer belt lift solenoid [A] (a magnetic latching solenoid inside the transfer belt unit)
turns on to raise the transfer belt into contact with the drum.
The front lever [B] and the rear lever [C] are connected to the solenoid by links [D], and
they push up the stays when the solenoid turns on.
The support spring [E] helps the solenoid to raise the transfer belt.
The solenoid turns off after the copy job is finished.
The transfer belt must be released from the drum for the following reasons:
1. To prevent the ID sensor pattern on the drum from being rubbed off by the transfer belt,
because the transfer belt is located between the development unit and the ID sensor.
2. To decrease the load on the bias roller cleaning blade, it is better to prevent toner on
non-image areas (for example VD, VH, ID sensor patterns developed during process
control data initial setting) from being transferred onto the transfer belt.
3. To prevent drum characteristics from being changed by remaining in contact with the
Details
rubber belt.
SM 6-155 D059/D060/D061
6.10.4 PAPER TRANSPORTATION AND BELT DRIVE
The drum motor [A] drives the transfer belt through belts and gears. Since the transfer belt
electrically attracts the paper [B], a transport fan is not required.
At the turn in the transfer belt, the transfer belt drive roller [C] discharges the belt to reduce
paper attraction, and the paper separates from the belt as a result of its own stiffness.
The tapered parts [D] at both ends of the roller [E] help keep the transfer belt [F] in the
center, so that it does not run off the rollers.
D059/D060/D061 6-156 SM
6.10.5 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING
Some toner may adhere to the transfer belt when paper jams occur. The adhered toner
must be removed to prevent the rear side of the copy paper from getting dirty.
The cleaning blade [A] scrapes off any toner remaining on the transfer belt. This is a
counter blade system.
Even if the toner is not completely removed due to paper dust stuck on the transfer belt
cleaning blade [A], the positively charged cleaning bias roller [B] attracts the remaining
toner. The bias roller cleaning blade [C] scrapes toner off the cleaning bias roller.
The surface of the transfer belt is coated to make it smooth and prevent the transfer belt
from flipping the cleaning blade.
The toner collection coil [E] transports toner cleaned from the transfer belt to the waste
toner collection bottle. The agitator [D] moves the toner to the collection coil, and prevents
the toner in the cleaning unit from forming clumps.
Details
SM 6-157 D059/D060/D061
6.10.6 TONER COLLECTION
Transfer belt drive is transmitted to the toner collection coil [A] through idle gears. The
toner collection coil transports the collected toner to the toner recycling unit [B] and from
there it goes to the waste toner collection bottle.
An agitator [C] in the transfer belt cleaning unit, below the cleaning blade and to the right of
the toner transport coil, keeps the toner loose. This increases the speed of the toner
collection mechanism.
See Toner Supply and Recycling for details.
6.10.7 DRUM ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER
The drum anti-condensation heater [A] is located under the transfer belt unit. It turns on
when the main switch is off to prevent moisture from forming on the transfer belt.
The heater is included in the machine at the factory, but the connector is not connected.
D059/D060/D061 6-158 SM
Fusing
6.11 FUSING
6.11.1 OVERVIEW
After transferring the image, the copy paper enters the fusing unit. A heat and pressure
process using a hot roller [A] and a pressure roller [B] fuses the image to the copy paper.
There are three fusing lamps of different wattage [C] inside the hot roller. They are turned
on and off to maintain the target fusing temperature.
The CPU monitors the hot roller surface temperature through a thermistor [D], which is in
contact with the hot roller surface. Four thermostats [E] protect the fusing unit from
Details
overheating.
The fusing exit sensor [F] monitors the progress of the copy paper through the fusing unit
and also detects paper jams while the exit rollers drive the copy paper to the inverter
section.
The oil supply roller and cleaning fabric [G] applies a light coat of silicone oil to the hot roller.
It also removes the paper dust and toner from the hot roller.
The hot roller and pressure roller have stripper pawls (1), (2) to prevent wrap-around jams.
The pressure roller is cleaned by a steel cleaning roller [H]. Toner adheres to steel more
readily than to silicone rubber.
SM 6-159 D059/D060/D061
Fusing
6.11.2 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE
The entrance guide [A] for this machine is adjustable for thick or thin paper by changing the
screw position from the upper to the lower.
With thin paper, set the entrance guide in the upper position. This slightly lengthens the
paper path, which prevents the paper from creasing in the fusing unit.
With thick paper, set the entrance guide in the lower position. This is because thick paper
does not bend as easily, and is therefore less prone to creasing. In addition, the lower
setting allows more direct access to the gap between the hot and pressure rollers. This
prevents thick paper from buckling against the hot roller, which can cause blurring at the
leading edge of the copy.
In this model, the transfer belt improves paper transport and stabilizes the paper path to the
fusing entrance. This reduces the chance of paper creasing due to paper skews in the
fusing unit.
Use the screws to adjust the guide plate position. Since there are very few reasons to
change the guide plate position, there is no guide plate position adjustment lever for
customer use.
The markings on the entrance guide are different for different regions. Each entrance guide
is designed for the paper width that is normally used in each region, for optimum prevention
of creasing.
NA: With ‘N’ mark (inch version)
EU/AA (A4): No ‘N’ mark
D059/D060/D061 6-160 SM
Fusing
6.11.3 FUSING UNIT DRIVE
The fusing drive gear [A] transmits drive from the fusing motor [B] to the gear [C], which
drives the hot roller gear [D]. The pressure roller is driven by the friction between the hot
and pressure rollers.
Details
SM 6-161 D059/D060/D061
Fusing
6.11.4 FUSING LAMP AND FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL

Overview
A thermistor in permanent contact with the hot roller monitors the temperature of the hot
roller as it rotates. These temperature readings are used to control the temperature of the
hot roller by switching the fusing lamps on and off.
The current temperature detected by the thermistor can be displayed with SP1106.
Four thermostats mounted very close to the surface of the hot roller also monitor the hot
roller temperature. The thermostats trigger an SC code if the hot roller overheats and the
fusing unit shuts down.
There are three types of fusing lamps. Each is classified by which portion of the hot roller it
heats:
D059/D060/D061 6-162 SM
Rev. 08/25/2010 Fusing
There are three fusing lamps inside the hot roller. The wattages of the fusing lamps are as
shown below.
Name Voltage/Wattage
D059/D060 D061
⇒ Fusing Lamp 1 900 W (F: White, R: Red) *1 900 W (F: White, R: Red)
Fusing Lamp 2 600 W (F/R: White) 600 W (F/R: Yellow)
Fusing Lamp 3 900 W (F: White, R: Blue) 900 W (F: White, R: Blue)
*1: F=Front Connector, R=Rear Connector
Normal, High, and Low Temp Modes

The operator can use a User Tool to modify the operation of the fusing unit to respond to
changes in the operating environment and improve fusing or reduce paper curl.
User Tools> Adjustment Setting for Operators> SP1740
SP1740 Settings
Normal Temp Mode Default
Low Temp Mode Raise temperature to improve fusing
High Temp Mode Lower temperature to reduce curl
Details
The table below shows which SP codes control the standby temperature, fusing
temperature lower limit, and hot roller idling time depends on the selected temperature
mode.
If the fusing unit temperature falls below the lower limit, then the machine stops printing
until the fusing unit temperature recovers to the standby temperature.
The fusing idling time is the length of time that the fusing unit idles at start up (just after the
main switch is turned on or after recovery from energy saver mode), if the fusing unit
temperature is too low.
SM 6-163 D059/D060/D061
Fusing
Normal Temperature Mode (Default)
Default Values D059 D060 D061 SP No.
Standby Temp. 153°C 165°C 178°C SP1105 001 140 - 190°C
Fusing Lower Limit 133°C 145°C 158°C SP1105 004 120 - 180°C
Fusing Unit Idling Time 40 sec 50 sec 60 sec SP1107 001 0 - 120 sec
Low Temperature Mode (Improves Fusing)
High Temperature Mode (Reduces Paper Curl)
D059/D060/D061 6-164 SM
Fusing
The SP settings and ranges below are the same for every temperature mode.
Correction for Small Paper Size (default: SP1105 0 to

10°C 10°C 10°C
narrow than LT LEF/257 mm) 007 +20°C
Correction for Normal Paper Size (default: SP1105 0 to

5°C 5°C 5°C
LT LEF/257 mm or wider) 008 +10°C
SP1105 -10 to
Correction for Tracing Paper 0°C 0°C 0°C
009 +10°C
SP1105 100 to
Fusing Idling Start Temperature 130°C 130°C 160°C
012 160°C
Fusing Temperature Control and Machine Status - Overview

Fusing temperature control operates differently depending on the status of the machine:
At power on (cold/warm starts)
During standby
During machine operation (low limit, paper sizes)
Low power mode (during and immediately after)
In Energy Saver mode
Fusing control in each operation mode is described below.
In the descriptions below, the "1", "2", "3" notations refer to the fusing lamp
number. Details
Fusing Temperature Control at Power On (Cold/Warm Starts)
SM 6-165 D059/D060/D061
Fusing
After the machine power is turned off/on
If the fusing unit temperature is below the temperature set with SP1105 010, three
fusing lamps switch on in this order: 3 > 2 > 1.
-or-
If the fusing temperature is above the temperature set with SP1105 010, two lamps (2
and 3) switch on in this order: 3 > 2
Fusing Lamp Switching for

99°C 99°C 95°C 1105-10 20 to 190°C
warm-up
When the temperature rises to the temperature set with SP1105 010, fusing lamp 1
switches off.
When the temperature reaches the standby temperature, fusing lamps 3 and 2 switch off in
this order: 3 > 2
Fusing Temperature Control During Standby and in Energy Saver

Mode
In standby mode, the operation control of the fusing lamps is different for the D059/D060
and D061.
Model Lamps Used Comment
D059/D060 Lamp 2 Only 1 lamp is used:
Two lamps keep the hot roller at the correct standby

D061 Lamp 2, 3 temperature: These lamps light on and off alternately so
only one lamp is on at a time.
The fusing lamps heat the hot roller to keep the temperature as follows:
The lamps are switched ON when the thermistor detects the temperature of the hot
roller surface is lower than the standby temperature (SP1105 001, 002, 003)
The lamps are switched OFF when the thermistor detects the temperature of the hot
roller surface is higher than the standby temperature (SP1105 001, 002, 003) +2°C
D059/D060/D061 6-166 SM
Fusing
Fusing Temperature Control During Machine Operation

When the Fusing Temperature Falls below the Lower Limit
During long jobs, some images may not fuse correctly, depending on variables such as
paper and image type, and room temperature.
To prevent poor image fusing:
If the fusing unit thermistor detects that the temperature of the hot roller has dropped
lower than the lower limit (set SP1105 004 – 006), a message appears and the job
halts temporarily.
The machine restarts the job once the fusing temperature rises again to the target
operating temperature.
The low limit temperature is different, depending on the temperature mode

currently selected for operation: normal, low, and high temperature mode.
Fusing Temperature Control for Normal Size Paper
"Normal size paper" is defined as LT LEF or wider paper (297 mm or wider).
The definition of "normal size paper" can be changed to ‘B5 or wider (257 mm or
wider)’ with SP1105 013.
The fusing lamp control with normal paper sizes is different for the D059/D060 and D061.
Lamps Used
Model Lamps Used ON Order OFF Order
D059/D060 1, 3 1>3 3>1

Details
D061 1, 2, 3 1>3>2 2>3>1
SM 6-167 D059/D060/D061
Fusing
Lamps Operation Immediately Before/After Job Start
Model Status Before Job Start Status After Job Start
1 2 On After 2 Off, On 1 > 3

D059/D060
2 1, 2, 3 Off On 1 > 3
1 2 On 2 remains On, On 1 > 3
D061 2 3 On 3 remains On, On 1 > 2
3 1, 2, 3 Off On 1 > 3 > 2
‘Status Before Job Start’ column, there are two (D059/D060) or three (D061) possible
statuses. Then, for each of these, the ‘Status After Job Start’ column shows what happens
after the job starts.
During the job, the lamps are switched ON when the thermistor detects the temperature of
the hot roller surface is lower than:
SP1105 001 (002, 003) + SP1105 008
During the job, the lamps are switched OFF when the thermistor detects the temperature of
the hot roller surface is higher than:
SP1105 001 (002, 003) + SP1105 008 +2°C
Fusing Temperature Control for Small Size Paper
Small size paper is defined as:
Paper less wide than (not including) LT LEF (less wide than 297 mm). This definition
can be changed to ‘less wide than B5 (less wide than 257 mm)’ with SP1105 013.
Any paper size less wide than B5 SEF
Two Fusing Lamps (Lamps 1 and 2): When fusing lamps 1 and 2 are used, the lamps
light in order 1 > 2 and go off in order 2 > 1. In the table below D061 (4) is the only time in
the fusing lamp cycle that the 3 lamps come on. Thereafter, only 2 lamps (1 and 2) are
used.
D059/D060/D061 6-168 SM
Fusing
(1) 2 on 2 remains on > 1

D059/D060
(2) 1, 2, 3 off 1>2
(3) 2 On 2 remains on > 1 on
D061 (4) 3 On 3 remains on, 2 > 1
(5) 1, 2, 3 off 1>2
Two Lamps (Lamps 1 and 3): When fusing lamps 1 and 3 are used, the lamps light in
order 1 > 3 and go off 3 > 1. In the table below D061 (3) is the only time in the fusing lamp
cycle that the 3 lamps come on. Thereafter, only 2 lamps (1 and 3) are used.
(1) 2 on 2 goes off 1 3

D059/D060
(2) 1, 2, 3 off 1 3
(3) 2 On 2 remains on 1 3
D061 (4) 3 On 3 remains on 1

Details
(5) 1, 2, 3 off 1 3
SM 6-169 D059/D060/D061
Fusing
One Fusing Lamp (Lamp 1 Only): In the table below, D061 (3) is the only time in the
fusing lamp cycle that the 2 lamps (1 and 2) come on. Thereafter, only 1 lamp (lamp 1) is
used. Also, 2 lamps (1 and 3) come on at (4). Thereafter, only 1 lamp (lamp 1) is used.
(1) 2 on 2 off 1
D059/D060
(2) 1, 2, 3 off 1
(3) 2 on 2 remains on 1
D061 (4) 3 on 3 remains on 1
(5) 1, 2, 3 off 1
SP1105 001 (002, 003) + SP1105 007
SP1105 001 (002, 003) + SP1105 007 +2°C
Tracing Paper
When tracing paper is fed from a tray (if the user selects ‘Translucent Paper’), the fusing
lamps are not controlled based on the size of the paper. The control method, however, is
nearly the same as that for normal paper.
SP1105 001 (002, 003) + SP1105 009
SP1105 001 (002, 003) + SP1105 009 +2°C
D059/D060/D061 6-170 SM
Fusing
Fusing Temperature Control for Low Power Mode (During and

Immediately After)
During Low Power Mode
Only one fusing lamp is used while the machine is in the low power mode.
Model Lamps On Lamps Used
D059/D060 Lamp 3 Only 1 lamp is used:
Two lamps are used. The lamps turn on and off alternately
D061 Lamp 2, 3
so that only one lamp at a time is on.
The fusing lamps heat the hot roller to keep the temperature as follows:
On: Fusing Temperature Adjustment in Low Power (SP1105 011)
Off: Fusing Temperature Adjustment in Low Power (SP1105 011) +2°C
Returning from Low Power Mode
After returning the low power mode
If the fusing unit temperature is below the temperature set with SP1105 001-003 +
SP1105 014, three fusing lamps switch on in this order: 3 > 2 > 1.
-or-
If the fusing temperature is above the temperature set with SP1105 001-003 + SP1105
014, two lamps (2 and 3) switch on in this order: 3> 2
Fusing Lamp Switching

-10°C -10°C -20°C SP1105 014 0 to -20°C
after Low Power Mode
Details
When the temperature rises to the temperature set with SP1105 001-003, fusing lamp 1
switches off.
When the temperature reaches the standby temperature, fusing lamps 3 and 2 switch off in
this order: 3 > 2
SM 6-171 D059/D060/D061
Fusing
Low Speed Mode (CPM Down)

The User Tools has a selection (System Settings> General Features> Optimum for Thick
Paper: Set to ‘On’) that allows the customer to improve the fusing of images and text on
thick paper and tracing paper by reducing the cpm (this is done by reducing the drum
speed).
The speed reductions are as follows:
D059: No speed reduction (stays at 90 cpm)
D060: Reduced from 110 cpm to 90 cpm
D061: Reduced from 135 cpm to 110 cpm
D059/D060/D061 6-172 SM
Fusing
6.11.5 FUSING CLEANING UNIT

Mechanism
The fusing cleaning unit [A] feeds the cleaning fabric. Springs [B] hold a roller under the
fabric [C] against the hot roller [D].
This intermediate roller applies a light coat of silicone oil to the hot roller and removes
paper dust and toner from the hot roller.
A spring clutch inside the mechanism pulls the fabric to take up the slack, to prevent it
getting pulled in between the fusing rollers.
Details
At prescribed intervals during printing, the fabric motor [E] switches on for a fixed period of
time to move the cleaning fabric.
SP1902 002 and SP1902 003 can be used to adjust the motor rotation time and rotation
interval. SP1902 004 is used to adjust the near end timing for the web.
SM 6-173 D059/D060/D061
Fusing
The web is 24 m long and lasts for about 750K copies for NA, or 500K copies for EUR/A.
SP1902 001 displays the cleaning fabric consumption. When the consumption exceeds the
value set with SP1902 004, the machine indicates near-end on the operation display.
The machine still operates while the actuator [A] remains above the fabric end sensor [B]
undetected. The actuator arm of the actuator remains in contact with the supply roller [C]
and gradually lowers as the amount of fabric on the supply roller grows smaller as it is fed
to the take-up roller [D] above.
When the fabric runs out, the actuator drops into the fabric end sensor at [E] and the
sensor signals the machine to issue the fabric end message.
At fabric end, the fusing cleaning unit must be replaced by either the service technician or a
trained ‘super user’.
Additional Notes about Fusing Cleaning Unit Operation

Opening either front door (or both doors) shuts down operation of the fusing fabric unit.
When the fusing temperature reaches the temperature 10°C below the temperature
where the hot roller starts to idle, the fabric take-up operation executes twice.
When the fabric motor operates while the hot roller is idling. After the hot roller starts to
idle, the fabric motor turns on at 10 sec. intervals up to a maximum of 10 times.
The fusing fabric unit shuts down completely when the machine is turned off with the
main power switch.
When the operation power switch is pressed to turn on the machine, the fusing fabric
unit starts to operate as soon as the hot roller starts to idle. The fabric motor rotates the
take-up roller at 10 sec. intervals up to a maximum of 10 times.
D059/D060/D061 6-174 SM
Fusing
When the operation power switch is pressed to turn the machine off, the fabric take-up
roller turns on/off twice. However, this does not occur if the fusing temperature when
the machine is turned off is 10°C less than the temperature set for hot roller idling to
start.
When the machine enters auto off mode, the fabric take-up motor turns on/off twice.
However, this does not occur if the fusing temperature when the machine is turned off
is 10°C less than the temperature set for hot roller idling to start.
Calculating Cleaning Fabric Service Life

The fusing cleaning fabric is a roll of heat-resistant fabric 24 m log saturated with silicone
oil. It is mounted on a supply roller and take-up roller. The part of the cleaning fabric that
touches the hot roller both lubricates and removes paper dust and other particles from the
surface of the hot roller.
At prescribed intervals, the fabric motor (a dc motor) switches on and rotates the take-up
roller. This feeds a fresh portion of the fabric from the supply roller to clean and lubricate
the surface of the hot roller.
The job time sensor (a photo-sensor) measures the length of time that it takes for all the
sheets of each job to pass.
The job time sensor is on when there is no paper present.
It turns off when it detects the leading edge of the first sheet of a job, and at that time,
the machine starts to measure the job time.
At 2 sec after the trailing edge of the last sheet of the job passes below the sensor, the
machine stops measuring the job time.
The length of the job is then added to the accumulated count for the cleaning fabric.
When this calculated total equals the time prescribed for the service life of the cleaning
fabric, the machine issues the fusing fabric near-end alert. Details
When a paper jam occurs, cleaning fabric operation stops, and the job time sensor
stops measuring paper throughput. These functions resume after the jam has
been removed and the job restarted.
When a job stops temporarily because the fusing temperature has fallen below its
lower limit, the machine waits until 2 sec. after the last sheet leaves the cooling
pipe exit. Then the job time sensor switches on and the machine stops counting
(fabric unit operation also stops).
When the fusing temperature reaches the operating temperature, the job restarts,
the first sheet feed switches off the fabric near-end sensor, and the job time sensor
resumes its count.
SM 6-175 D059/D060/D061
Fusing
Fabric Near-End
When the fabric near-end message appears, the message is displayed on the operation
panel but the job does not stop. The operator should have a replacement fabric unit on
hand or get one as soon as possible. The cleaning fabric is near the end of its service life
and must be replaced soon.
SP1902 004 (Fabric Near End) can be adjusted to change the near-end period.
The table below shows approximately how adjustment of SP1902 002 affects the near-end
and end displays of the D059 (90 ppm), D060 (110 ppm) and D061 (135 ppm).
SP1902 002 *1 SP1902 004 Near-End Display End Display

Comments
*2 (Sheets) *3 (Sheets)
D059 D060 D061
19.8s 16.2s 12.9s 92% 750K 820K NA Default
EUR/A
13.2s 10.8s 8.6s 90% 500K 550K
Default
*1: SP1902 002 (Fabric Motor Control – Fabric Motor Drive Interval)
*2: SP1902 004 (Fabric Motor Control – Fabric Near End Setting)
*3: Calculated based on A4 LEF at 100% magnification, and the default settings of SP
1902 004.
SP1902 003 (Fabric Motor Control – Fabric Motor Drive Time) not adjusted.
D059/D060/D061 6-176 SM
Fusing
6.11.6 PAPER COOLING
The paper cooling pipe [A] cools the copy paper [B] after it has gone through the fusing unit.
This prevents the temperature around the drum from increasing in duplex mode.
The paper cooling pipe has a hollow metal tube inside. Water capillary tubes run along the
inside of the paper cooling pipe, and these transfer heat within the pipe.
The hot paper leaving the fusing unit heats the parts of the cooling pipe that it touches at
[C] (black arrows), causing the water in the pipe to vaporize. This creates a high-speed flow
of steam to the ends of the pipe, which are cooler, especially to the rear, which is well away
from the paper feed path, and has the cooling fins [D] attached to it. When the steam Details
reaches this area, it cools and condenses. Capillary action returns the condensation to the
heated part of the pipe.
This heat transfer cycle (vaporization > steam transfer > condensation) repeats
continuously. Paper cooling pipe fan 1 [E] in the duct at the machine rear side cools the fins
and paper cooling fan 2 [F] pulls the air around the fins out of the fusing unit.
SM 6-177 D059/D060/D061
Fusing
6.11.7 FUSING PRESSURE
Fusing pressure is constantly applied between the hot roller [A] and pressure roller [B] by
the upper pressure lever [C] and lower pressure lever [D], which are lifted by the fusing unit
release lever [E] via the pressure cam [F]. The pressure can be adjusted by using the
pressure adjustment screw [G].
The fusing pressure is released by turning the fusing unit release lever counterclockwise.
D059/D060/D061 6-178 SM
Fusing
6.11.8 HOT ROLLER STRIPPER RELEASE
For easier jam removal, when the hot roller stripper unit [A] is opened, the stripper pawls
[B] turn clockwise to expand the jam removal area.
Details
SM 6-179 D059/D060/D061
Paper Exit/Duplex
6.12 PAPER EXIT/DUPLEX
6.12.1 OVERVIEW
Inversion/Duplex Components
Duplex Entrance Motor drives: 13

Duplex Switchback Motor drives: 16
Duplex Inverter Motor drives: 26, 27, 29, 30, 33
Duplex Transport Motor drives: 24, 25
Upper Relay Motor drives: 19, 21
Exit Motor drives: 1, 3, 4, 7, 35
1. Exit Roller 19. Upper Relay Roller
2. Exit Sensor 20. Upper Relay Sensor
3. Vertical Relay Roller 21. Duplex Exit Roller
4. Horizontal Exit Roller 22. 1st Transport Sensor
5. Exit Junction Gate 23. 1st Transport Roller
6. Job Time Sensor 24. Duplex Transport Roller 4
D059/D060/D061 6-180 SM
Paper Exit/Duplex
7. Cooling Pipe 25. Duplex Transport Roller 3
8. Hot Roller/Pressure Roller 26. Duplex Transport Roller 2
9. Drum 27. Duplex Transport Roller 1
10. Registration Sensor 28. Duplex Transport Sensor 1
11. Registration Roller 29. Inverter Roller 1
12. Duplex Entrance Sensor 30. Inverter Roller 2
13. Duplex Entrance Roller 31. Duplex Inverter Sensor
14. Switchback Junction Gate 32. Duplex/Inverter Junction Gate
15. Switchback Idle Roller 33. Inverter Relay Roller
16. Switchback Roller 34. Inverter Relay Sensor
17. Duplex Transport Sensor 2 35. Vertical Relay Roller - Duplex
18. Duplex Transport Sensor 3
Straight-Through Path (No Inversion, No Duplexing)
Details
SM 6-181 D059/D060/D061
Paper Exit/Duplex
During straight-through feed (with neither inverting nor duplexing selected) the paper goes:
1: From under the cooling pipe
2: Over the closed exit junction gate
3: Through the horizontal exit rollers
4: Under the exit sensor
5: Through the exit rollers and out of the machine
Inversion Path (Face-down Output, No Duplexing)
When inversion has been selected for the job for face-down output, the paper goes:
1: Out from under the cooling pipe
2: Down into the inverter/duplexer path at the open exit junction gate
3: Through the nip of the vertical relay rollers
4: Under the duplex entrance sensor
5: Through the duplex entrance rollers
6: Through the open switchback junction gate
7: Through the switchback rollers
8: Between the switchback rollers again after the switchback junction gate closes and the
switchback roller reverses
9: Under the duplex/inverter sensor
10: Through inverter rollers 1
11: Over the closed duplex/inverter junction gate
12: Through the inverter relay rollers
13: Under the inverter relay sensor
D059/D060/D061 6-182 SM
Paper Exit/Duplex
14: Through the vertical relay rollers
15: Under the exit sensor
16: Through the exit rollers and out of the machine
Inverting/Duplexing Path
When duplexing has been selected for the job, the paper goes:
1: Out from under the cooling pipe
2: Down into the inverter/duplexer path at the open exit junction gate
3: Through the nip of the vertical relay rollers
4: Under the duplex entrance sensor
5: Through the duplex entrance rollers Details
6: Through the open switchback junction gate

7: Through the switchback rollers
8: Between the switchback rollers again after the switchback junction gate closes and the
switchback roller reverses
9: Under the duplex/inverter sensor
11: Through the open inverter/duplex junction gate down into the duplex unit
13: Through horizontal transport path: [A] Duplex transport sensor 1 > [B] Duplex transport
roller 1 > [C] Duplex transport roller 2 > [D] Duplex transport sensor 2 > [E] Duplex
transport roller 3 > [F] Duplex transport sensor 3 > [G] Duplex transport roller 4 > [H]
SM 6-183 D059/D060/D061
Paper Exit/Duplex
Duplex exit rollers
14: Up past the upper relay rollers, upper relay sensor
15: Under the registration sensor, registration sensor
16: Under the drum where the image is transferred to the 2nd side
17: Through the nip of the hot roller/pressure roller where the image is fused
18: Out from under the cooling pipe, over the closed exit junction gate, through the exit
rollers and out of the machine.
6.12.2 INVERTER/DUPLEXING JUNCTION GATES
This inverter/duplexer unit has three junction gates:

[A]: Exit junction gate
[B]: Switchback junction gate
[C]: Invert/duplex junction gate
The exit junction gate [A]:
Closes for straight-through feed (neither face-up nor duplexing selected) and the paper
goes out of the machine face-up.
Opens to feed paper down into the inversion tray for inversion/duplexing
The switchback junction gate [B]:
Opens before paper arrives so it can feed onto the inversion tray and into the
switchback rollers [D]
Closes to keep the paper down and horizontal so that it will feed out properly after the
switchback roller reverses.
D059/D060/D061 6-184 SM
Paper Exit/Duplex
The invert/duplex junction gate [C]:
Closes so that paper passes over it and into the vertical feed path for face-down output
only (no duplexing).
Opens to guide paper down into the duplex unit so that the paper can return to the
main feed path for printing the 2nd side of the sheet.
Details
SM 6-185 D059/D060/D061
Paper Exit/Duplex
6.12.3 DUPLEX DRIVE MECHANISM
The duplex entrance motor [A] drives the duplex entrance roller [B].
The duplex switchback motor [C] drives the switchback roller [D].
The duplex inverter motor [E] drives the duplex transfer roller 1 [F], duplex transfer roller 2
[G], inverter roller 1 [H], and inverter roller 2 [I].
The duplex transport motor [J] drives the duplex transfer roller 3 [K] and duplex transfer
roller 4 [L].
D059/D060/D061 6-186 SM
Paper Exit/Duplex
6.12.4 SWITCHBACK IDLE ROLLER OPERATION

For paper longer than A4/LT, the first sheet [B] feeds out of the inverter at the same time
that the second sheet feeds in. (This only happens for a fraction of a second)
To let this happen, a solenoid lifts the switchback idle roller.
To feed the first sheet out of the inverter, the switchback roller [A] reverses and feeds the
first sheet [B] to the inverter rollers 1 [C]. At about the same time, the switchback idle roller
solenoid [D] energizes and raises the switchback idle roller [E].
For paper longer than A4/LT, the

first sheet [B] feeds out of the
inverter at the same time that the
second sheet feeds in. (This only
happens for a fraction of a second)
To let this happen, a solenoid lifts
the switchback idle roller.
To feed the first sheet out of the
inverter, the switchback roller [A]
reverses and feeds the first sheet
[B] to the inverter rollers 1 [C]. At
about the same time, the
switchback idle roller solenoid [D]
energizes and raises the
switchback idle roller [E]. Details
The next sheet feeds into the
inverter tray through the duplex
entrance rollers [F] and under the
open switchback junction gate [G].
SM 6-187 D059/D060/D061
Paper Exit/Duplex
6.12.5 PAPER EXIT MECHANISM
The exit motor [A] drives the paper exit roller [B] and transport rollers (1), (2), (3).
To feed the printed page from the fusing unit straight through and out of the machine, the
exit junction gate motor [C] stays off and the exit junction gate [D] remains closed.
To feed the page to the inverter and duplex unit below, the motor turns on to open the exit
junction gate and guide the paper down.
D059/D060/D061 6-188 SM
Paper Exit/Duplex
6.12.6 BASIC DUPLEX FEED OPERATION

To improve the productivity of duplex copying, a non-stacking style duplex mechanism is
adopted. This type of mechanism allows more than one page to be processed at once, in a
process called ‘interleaving’. Examples of this are given below.
For paper lengths up to A4/Letter LEF, the top duplex speed is possible, with the duplex
unit processing four sheets of copy paper at the same time.
For paper longer than this, the duplex tray can process two sheets of copy paper at once.
For a single-set duplex copy job, the duplex unit stores only one sheet of copy paper. For a
multi-set duplex job, the job is stored first, then the first set is made using interleaving.
Length up to A4/Letter LEF

The duplex unit can process four sheets of copy paper
Example: A 14-page copy. The large numbers in the illustration show the order of pages.
The small numbers in circles show the order of sheets of copy paper (if shaded, this
indicates the second side).
The first 4 sheets are fed and printed.

1) 1st sheet printed (1st page) Details
2) 2nd sheet printed (3rd page)
3) 3rd sheet printed (5th page)
4) 4th sheet printed (7th page)
The back of the 1st sheet is printed (2nd page).
SM 6-189 D059/D060/D061
Paper Exit/Duplex
The 2nd, 3rd, 4th sheets (3rd, 5th, and 7th pages) go into the duplex unit.
The 5th sheet (9th page) is fed in.
The 5th sheet is printed (9th page).

The 1st sheet is fed out (1st and 2nd pages printed).
The 5th sheet (9th page) is directed to the duplex unit.

The 6th sheet (11th page) is fed.
The back of the 2nd sheet is printed (4th page).
The 2nd sheet is fed out (3rd and 4th pages printed).
The 6th sheet is printed (11th page) and directed to the duplex unit.
The back of the 3rd sheet (6th page) is printed.
The 7th sheet is fed and printed (13th page).
The back of the 4th sheet is printed (8th page) and fed out (7th and 8th page).
The back of the 5th sheet is printed (10th page) and fed out (9th and 10th pages).
D059/D060/D061 6-190 SM
Paper Exit/Duplex
The back of the 6th sheet is printed (12th page) and fed out (11th and 12th pages).
The back of the 7th sheet is printed and fed out (13th and 14th pages).
Longer than A4/Letter LEF

The duplex unit can process two sheets of copy paper
Example: 8 pages. The small numbers in circles show the order of sheets of copy paper (if
shaded, this indicates the second side).
Details
The first 2 sheets are fed and printed.

1) 1st sheet printed (1st page)
2) 2nd sheet printed (3rd page)
SM 6-191 D059/D060/D061
Paper Exit/Duplex
The first 2 sheets go into the duplex unit.
The back of the 1st sheet (2nd page) is printed.

The 3rd sheet (5th page) is fed and printed.
The 1st sheet (1st and 2nd pages) is fed out.

The back of the 2nd sheet (4th page) is printed.
The 4th sheet (7th page) is fed and printed.
D059/D060/D061 6-192 SM
Paper Exit/Duplex
The 2nd sheet (3rd and 4th pages) is fed out.
The back of the 3rd sheet (6th page) is printed.
The 3rd sheet (5th and 6th pages printed) is fed out.
The back of the 4th sheet (8th page) is printed.
The 4th sheet (7th and 8th pages) is fed out.
Details
SM 6-193 D059/D060/D061
Boards
6.13 BOARDS
6.13.1 LEDS
BCU
Number Monitored Signal
Monitors +5VL operating.

LED059 (Green)
On: Normal
Monitors firmware downloading

LED060 (Orange)
On: Downloading, Off: Normal
Monitors firmware operating.

LED061 (Red)
Blinks Slowly: Normal, Blinks Rapidly: Firmware error
MCU
DC24V monitoring
LED1 (Green)
On: Normal
IOB
+5VL monitoring
LED059 (Green)
Blinks: Normal
+24V monitoring
LED060 (Green)
On: Normal
D059/D060/D061 6-194 SM
Boards
SIB
DC24V monitoring
LED1
On: Normal
OPU
On: Downloading
LED1 (Red)
Off: Normal, Completed downloading
Flashing (50ms On; 50ms Off): Download error
Flashing (200ms On+200ms Off+200ms On+500ms Off): Normal
LED2 (Green) Flashing (200ms On+200ms Off): Downloading
Flashing: 1s On+1s Off: Completed downloading
Off: Download error Details
SM 6-195 D059/D060/D061
Boards
IPU
Monitors Printer
LED 1 (Green)
Flashes: ICs operating normally for image processing.
LED 2 (Green)
Off: Operation failure.
LED 3 (Red) Monitors Scanner

LED 4 (Red) Flashes: ICs operating normally for image processing.
LED 5 (Red) Off: Operation failure.
DC5VL monitoring
LED 6 (Green)
On: Normal
DC5VE monitoring
LED 7 (Red)
On: Normal
D059/D060/D061 6-196 SM
Boards
Controller Board
LED Color Comments
10 Green Power on.
Flashing: Stand by
9 Red On: Operating BIOS
Off: Operating OS
8 Red
7 Red
6 Red
While upgrading the firmware from the SD card inserted in the
5 Red
controller slot, each LED lights red as the download progresses. All
4 Red LEDs light and remain on after the download is completed.
3 Red
2 Red
1 Red
Details
SM 6-197 D059/D060/D061
Boards
ADF Main Board LEDs
LED100 LED059 LED060
On — — Entrance Sensor Jam
— On — Registration Sensor Jam
On On — Exit Sensor Jam
— — On Inverter Sensor Jam
Jammed paper not removed: Between entrance

On — On
sensor + registration sensor
Jammed paper not removed: On the exposure

On On On
glass
Blinking — — Feed-in Motor Abnormal
— Blinking — Transport Motor Abnormal
— — Blinking Feed-out Motor Abnormal
Blinking Blinking — Pick-up Motor Abnormal
— Blinking Blinking Bottom Plate Motor Abnormal
Blinking Blinking Blinking DF Position (Open)
Blinking — Blinking APS Sensor ON
Blinking — — Normal
D059/D060/D061 6-198 SM
Boards
6.13.2 DIP SWITCHES

MCU
SW1
No. Comments
1 OFF
2 OFF
Do not change these settings.
3 OFF
4 OFF
IOB
SW101
No. NA EUR/ASIA Comments
1 ON OFF
NA: Only SW1 set to ON, Others OFF.
2 OFF ON
EUR/ASIA: Only SW2 set to ON, Others OFF
3 OFF OFF
4 OFF
Details
5 OFF
6 OFF Do not change these settings.
7 ON
8 OFF
SM 6-199 D059/D060/D061
Boards
ADF Main Board
DPS100 Description
4 3 2 1
0 0 0 0 Normal operating mode
0 0 0 1 Motor Test: Transport motor – Forward
0 0 1 0 Motor Test: Transport motor – Reverse
0 0 1 1 Motor Speed Adjustment (Automatic)
Original stop position adjustment – Single-sided original mode (No original

0 1 0 0
skew correction)
0 1 0 1 Original stop position adjustment – Double sided original mode
1 0 0 0 Free Run: Single-sided original mode with skew correction
1 0 1 0 Free Run: Single-sided original mode without skew correction
0 1 1 0 Free Run: Double-sided original mode
Others: Do not select

“SADF” LED turns on when one of DIP switch turns on.
D059/D060/D061 6-200 SM
Boards
Controller Board
DIP SW1
No. Comments
1 OFF Never change this setting.
4 OFF Design Use Only
5 OFF Design Use Only
6 OFF Not used.
7 OFF Not used.
8 OFF Not used.
DIP SW2
No. Comments
Boot Block Switching

1 OFF
ON: Top Block, OFF: Recovery Block
Details
2 OFF Not used.
3 OFF CMOS RAM Clear
4 OFF Not used.
SM 6-201 D059/D060/D061
Boards
DIP SW3
No. Comments
1 OFF Not used.
2 OFF Not used.
3 OFF Not used.
Watchdog Reset
4 ON
ON: Enable, OFF: Disable
D059/D060/D061 6-202 SM
Boards
6.13.3 TEST POINTS

ADF Main Board
Number Label Monitored Signal
TP100 TXD TXD to the main machine
TP101 RXD RXD from the main machine
TP102 GND Ground
TP103 12 V +12 V
TP104 5V +5 V
6.13.4 FUSES
ADF Main Board
Number Description
FU100 Protects the 38 V line
FU101 Protects the 24 V line
6.13.5 VARIABLE RESISTORS Details
ADF Main Board
Number Function
Adjusts the original stop position for the single-sided original at no skew
VR100
correction mode.
VR101 Adjusts the original stop position for the double-sided original.
SM 6-203 D059/D060/D061
Energy Conservation Modes
6.14 ENERGY CONSERVATION MODES
6.14.1 OVERVIEW
When the machine is not used, the energy saver function reduces power consumption by
lowering the fusing temperature.
This machine has four types of energy saver mode as follows.
1) Energy saver mode (called ‘panel off mode’ in the operation manual)
2) Low power mode (called ‘energy saver mode’ in the operation manual)
3) Off mode (main machine configuration only)
4) Sleep mode (main machine/printer/scanner configuration only)
These modes are controlled by the following User Tools:
Panel off timer
Energy saver timer
Auto off timer
Auto off disabling
The way that the machine operates depends on the combination of installed equipment
(main machine only, or whether a printer/scanner is installed).
D059/D060/D061 6-204 SM
6.14.2 ENERGY SAVER MODE

Entering the energy saver mode
The machine enters energy saver mode when one of the following is done.
The Energy Saver Key is held down for a second.
The panel off timer runs out after the last job (User Tools - System Settings - Timer
Setting - Panel Off Timer: default setting is 60 s).
What happens in energy saver mode
When the machine enters energy saver mode, the operation panel indicators are turned off
except for the Energy Saver LED and the Power LED.
If the CPU receives the image print out command from an application (e. g. to print data
from a PC), the fusing temperature rises to print the data. However, the operation
indicators stay off.
Return to stand-by mode
If one of the following is done, the machine returns to stand-by mode:
The Energy Saver Mode key is pressed
An original is placed in the ADF
The ADF is lifted
An SC occurs
A hard key on the operation panel, or a soft key on the display panel is touched
Front door is opened
Energy Approx.
Operation System
Saver Fusing Temp. Recovery
Switch +5V
LED Time Details
D059/D060: Stays at the standby

temperature (D059: 153 °C, D060:
165 °C)
On On 3s On
D061: Stays at the standby
temperature minus 5 °C (178 °C –
5 °C)
SM 6-205 D059/D060/D061
6.14.3 LOW POWER MODE

Entering the low power mode
The machine enters low power mode when the energy saver timer runs out after the last
job.
(User Tools - System Settings - Timer Setting - Energy Saver Timer: default setting is 15
min)
What happens in low power mode
The fusing lamp drops to the prescribed temperature, as shown in the table below (the
temperature drops more than that in energy saver mode). The other conditions are the
same as for the energy saver mode.
Return to stand-by mode
The machine returns to standby mode in the same way as from the energy saver mode.
Energy
Operation System
Saver Fusing Temp. Approx. Recovery Time
Switch +5V
LED
Standby
temperature - 10 °C
Depends on the model and the
(D059, D060)
On On region: See ‘Energy Star’ in the On
Standby
Specifications.
temperature - 20 °C
(D061)
D059/D060/D061 6-206 SM
6.14.4 OFF MODE

Off mode is used only if no optional printer/scanner unit is installed.
Entering the off mode
The machine enters off mode when one of the following is done.
The auto off timer runs out after the last job (User Tools – System Settings – Timer
Setting – Auto Off Timer: default setting is 60 min)
The operation switch is pressed to turn the power off
What happens in the off mode
When the machine enters off mode, the fusing lamps and all dc supplies except
+5VE/12VE (+5V/12V for energy saver mode) turn off.
Returning to stand-by mode
The machine returns to stand-by mode when the main operation switch is pressed.
Energy
Operation Fusing System
Saver Approx. Recovery Time Note
Switch Temp. +5V
LED
Only +5VE and

Room Depends on the model
+12VE are
Temp. and the region: See
Off Off Off supplied to the
(Fusing ‘Energy Star’ in the
Controller, MB,
lamp off) Specifications.
HDD.
Disabling the off mode

Details
If the user wishes to disable the off mode, use the following user tool: User Tools > System
Settings> Administrator Tools> AOF (change the setting to ‘OFF’).
SM 6-207 D059/D060/D061
6.14.5 SLEEP MODE

This is used instead of off mode when an optional scanner/printer unit is installed.
There are two types of sleep mode: Sleep Stand-by Mode and Sleep Mode. The difference
between sleep stand-by mode and sleep mode is the machine’s condition when the
machine enters off mode.
Entering sleep stand-by and sleep modes
The machine enters the sleep stand-by mode and sleep modes when one of the following
is done.
The operation switch is pressed to turn the power off
The auto off timer runs out (the operation switch is then turned off, but the main power
switch stays on)
If the machine is in one or more of the following conditions, the machine enters sleep
stand-by mode. If not, the machine enters sleep mode.
Error or SC condition
Image data is stored in the memory
An original is in the ADF
The ADF is open
Paper is left in the duplex unit or staple tray
What happens in sleep stand-by and sleep modes
When the machine enters either of these modes, the fusing lamp and operation switch turn
off, and only the main power LED is lit.
Sleep stand-by mode: The system +5V and +24 V are supplied to all components.
Sleep mode: The system +5V supply is also turned off. However, +5VE (+5V for energy
saver mode) is still activated. When the machine detects a signal from the PC, the machine
goes back to sleep stand-by mode and the system +5V and +24V supplies are activated.
Then the machine receives the incoming message and prints it.
Returning to stand-by mode
The machine returns to stand-by mode when the operation switch is pressed.
D059/D060/D061 6-208 SM
Energy
Operation System
Mode Saver Fusing Temp. Note
Switch +5V
LED
Sleep Room Temp.

stand-by Off Off (Fusing lamp On
mode off)
Room Temp. Only +5VE/+12VE is

Sleep
Off Off (Fusing lamp Off supplied to the controller,
mode
off) MB, HDD.
Details
SM 6-209 D059/D060/D061
SPECIFICATIONS
21 05/30/2012 Update D391 Paper Thickness Specification
Specifications: Main
7. SPECIFICATIONS
7.1 SPECIFICATIONS: MAIN
7.1.1 MAIN MACHINE

Engine
Configuration: Console
Copy Process: Dry electrostatic transfer system
Originals: Sheet/Book/Object
Max.: A3, 11" x 17"

Original Size:
Min.: A5, 5½" x 8½" (with ADF)
Original
Rear left corner (for platen mode, ADF mode)
Alignment:
Tray 1-3: 52 to 216 g/m2
Tray 4-5(D452): Bond: 16 to 40 lb.
Tray 4,6 (D453) Cover: 50 to 80 lb.
Tray 7 (Bypass): Index: 90 to 110 lb.

Paper Weight:
52 to 163 g/m2
Bond: 16 to 40 lb.
Tray 6 (D452):
Specifications
Cover: 50 to 60 lb.
Index: 90 lb.
SM 7-1 D059/D060/D061
52 to 216 g/m2
Bond: 16 to 40 lb.
Tray 5 (D453):
Cover: 50 to 60 lb.
Index: 90 lb.
52 to 216 g/m2
Duplex Tray Bond: 16 to 40 lb.

(Possible Weight):
Cover: 50 to 80 lb.
Index: 90 to 110 lb.
Tray 1 (Tandem): 8½" x 11" LEF, A4 LEF
Tray 2, Tray 3: 5½" x 8½" to 11" x 17", 12" x 18", A5 to A3

Paper Size:
Duplex Tray A5 to A3, 5½" x 8½" to 11" x 17", 12" x 18", 13”
(Possible Sizes): x 18”
7 reduction and 5 enlargement
Metric Version Inch Version
400% 400%
Reproduction 200% 200%

Ratios: Enlargement 141% 155%
122% 129%
115% 121%
Full Size 100% 100%
D059/D060/D061 7-2 SM
93% 93%
82% 85%
75% 78%
Reduction 71% 73%
65% 65%
50% 50%
25% 25%
25 to 400% (allows manual adjustment in 1% steps vertically,

Zoom:
horizontally)
Image Density: Automatic, Manual (9 notches)
D059: 90 ppm
Copying with image stored in memory with
D060: 110 ppm
A4/LT LEF feeding from the same tray.
Copy Speed: D061: 135 ppm
Note: The speed in this mode is 80 ppm for all three models. When
using ADF 1-to-1 with A4/LT LEF magnification feeding from the
same tray.
Scanning 600 dpi

Resolution
Printing 1200 dpi
Grayscale (per 256 Levels Scanning: 8-bit/pixel

Specifications
pixel):
Printing: 1-bit/pixel 32 values
Warm-up Time: Less than 360 s from Off mode at 23°C (73.4°F)
SM 7-3 D059/D060/D061
Copy Tray 1, A4, 8½" x 11" LEF
Face-up Face-down
First Copy Time D059 (90 cpm) <3.5 s < 5.0 s
D060 (110 cpm) <3.2 s < 4.5 s
D061 (135 cpm) <3.0 s <4s
Multiple Copies: Up to 9,999
Tray 1: (Tandem) 1000 x 2
Copier 3,000 Tray 2: 500

Copy Paper
Capacity (Sheets): Tray 3: 500
Tray 7, 500 (Optional Bypass

Bypass 500
Tray B833)
512 MB (512 x 1) Standard
RAM: 1.5 GB (512 MB x1, 1 GB x1)

Optional but required for Scanner/Printer
Memory Capacity:
Option
320 GB (320 GB x1)

HDD:
Approximately 1,735 copies
Toner
Cartridge exchange (1,650 g/cartridge)
Replenishment:
D059/D060/D061 7-4 SM
60 K copies, (A4 LEF, 6% chart)
D059 (90 cpm) 1 to 25 Repeat Copying

Toner Yield:
D060 (110 cpm), 1 to 50 Repeat Copying
D061 (135 cpm), 1 to 100 Repeat Copying
North America 208 to 240 V, 60 Hz, 20 A

Power Source:
Europe/Asia 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz, 16 A
870 x 858.5 x 1476 mm

Copier
32.3" x 33.8" x 58.1"
Full System (with 3461 x 858.5 x 1476 mm

Size (W x D x H)
B834)
136.3 x 33.8 x 58 in.
Full System (with 3151 x 858.5 x 1476 mm

B832)
124 x 33.8 x 58 in.
Weight: Less than 315 kg (693 lb) including ADF, and no options
Space Requirements: See "Installation"
Specifications
SM 7-5 D059/D060/D061
Maximum Power Consumption
90 ppm 110 ppm 135 ppm
3500W or less 3500W or less 4000W or less
Energy Star
North America
D059 (90 cpm) D060 (110 cpm) D061 (135 cpm)
Basic MFP Basic MFP Basic MFP
Low Power Mode
Power Consumption (W) 113.8 119.7 129.4 132.4 121.2 127.1
Default Interval (min.) 15 15 15 15 15 15
Recovery Time (sec) 32 29 29 30 66 65.8
Off Mode
Power Consumption (W) 4.2 --- 4.2 --- 4.2 ---
Default Interval (min.) 90 --- 120 --- 120 ---
Sleep Mode
Power Consumption (W) --- 35.5 --- 35 --- 35.9
Default Interval (min.) --- 90 --- 120 --- 120
D059/D060/D061 7-6 SM
Europe
D059 (90 cpm) D060 (110 cpm) D061 (135 cpm)
Basic MFP Basic MFP Basic MFP
Low Power Mode
Power Consumption (W) 113.3 120.1 129.7 134.5 121.1 127.1
Default Interval (min.) 15 15 15 15 15 15
Recovery Time (sec.) 36 36 37 34 81 82
Off Mode
Power Consumption (W) 4.1 --- 4.0 --- 4.0 ---
Default Interval (min.) 90 --- 120 --- 120 ---
Sleep Mode
Power Consumption (W) --- 35.3 --- 35.3 --- 35.6
Default Interval (min.) --- 90 --- 120 --- 120
Specifications
SM 7-7 D059/D060/D061
Noise Emission: Sound Power Level
D059 (90 cpm) dB (A)
Stand-by ≤ 60
Copying ≤ 74
Mainframe
Operator position ≤ 68
Passers-by ≤ 68
Stand-by ≤ 64
Copying ≤ 78
Full System
Passers-by ≤ 72
D060 (110 cpm) dB (A)
Stand-by ≤ 66
Copying ≤ 76
Mainframe
Passers-by ≤ 70
Stand-by ≤ 70
Copying ≤ 80
Full System
Passers-by ≤ 74
D059/D060/D061 7-8 SM
D061 (135 cpm) dB (A)
Stand-by ≤ 73.5
Copying ≤ 78.5
Mainframe
Operator position ≤ 72.5
Passers-by ≤ 72.5
Stand-by ≤ 77.5
Copying ≤ 82.5
Full System
Operator position ---
Passers-by ---
Specifications
SM 7-9 D059/D060/D061
ADF (B301)
Normal Original A3 to B5, 11" x 17" to 5½" x 8½"
Original Size: Thin Original A3 to B5, 11" x 17" to 5½" x 8½"
Duplex Original A3 to B5, 11" x 17" to 5½" x 8½"
Normal Original 52-128 g/m2 (Note 1)
Original Weight: Thin Original 40-128 g/m2 (Note 1)
Duplex Original 52-105 g/m2 (Note 2)
Table Capacity: 100 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
Original Feeding Speed: 80 cpm (A4/8½" x 11" LEF, 1 to 1)
Original Standard Position: Rear left corner (Face-up)
Separation: FRR
Original Transport: One flat belt
Original Feed Order: From the top original
Power Source: DC24V±10%, DC38V±10%, DC5V±5% (from the copier)
Power Consumption: Less than 130 W
Size (W x D x H): 680 x 560 x 150 mm (26.8" x 22" x 5.9")
Level Less than 5 mm deviation at front/back, left/right
Weight Less than 17.5 kg (38.5 lb.)
Note 1:156 g/m2 possible, but not guaranteed.

Note 2:128 g/m2 possible, but not guaranteed.
D059/D060/D061 7-10 SM
Specifications: Options-1
7.2 SPECIFICATIONS: OPTIONS-1
7.2.1 A3/DLT TRAY KIT B331 (OPTION)
A3 SEF, B4 SEF, 11"x17" SEF, 8½"x14" SEF, A4 SEF, A4

Paper Size
LEF, 8½"x11" SEF, 11"x8½" LEF, 305 mm x 439 mm
Paper Weight 52 - 163 g/m2
Tray Capacity 1,000 sheets
Paper Level Detection 5-Step: 100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, End
7.2.2 LCIT RT5030 (D452) (OPTION)
Compatible Machines D059/D060/D061
Operating
Ranges of temperature and humidity: Same as main machine.
Environment
Service Life Expected: 5 Years or 55,000K sheets
D059 (90 cpm) 420-555 mm/s
Speed D060 (110 cpm) 500-720 mm/s
D061 (135 cpm) 630-985 mm/s
Paper Feed System: FRR-CF (no air-knife separation)

Specifications
Tray 1, 2 1,000 sheets (Thickness: 0.11 mm)

Tray Capacity:
Tray 3 2,550 sheets (Thickness: 0.11 mm)
Tray 1, 2 52 to 216 g/m2

Paper Weight
Tray 3 52 to 163 g/m2
SM 7-11 D059/D060/D061
A5 LEF, A5 SEF, 5½"x8½" LEF, B5 LEF, 5½"x8½"

Paper Size Tray 1,2,3
SEF, A4 LEF, 8½"x11" LEF
Fixed position side, end fences, adjusted for other

Tray 1, 2
paper sizes by the operator.
Paper Size Switching
Fixed position side, end fences, adjusted by service
Tray 3
technician.
Heater (Option) Anti-condensation heaters: 36W (18W x 2)
Size (w x d h) 540 x 730 x 980 mm (21.3 x 28.7 x 38.6 in.)
Weight Less than 88 kg (193.6 lb)
Power Source DC 24 V ±10% (from copier)
Power Consumption Less than 132 W
I/F Connection Serial connection to main frame
Feed possible from Tray 4 or Tray 5. Requires installation of tab

Tab Sheet: sheet fence.
Note: Only A4 LEF, 8½" x 11" LEF tab sheets can be fed.
Trays 4, 5 5 Step: 900, 625, 375, 75, paper end

Paper Level
Tray 6 5 Step: 2250, 1525, 800, 75, paper end
Detection:
Accuracy ±30 sheets (Tray 4, 5, 6)
D059/D060/D061 7-12 SM
The Multi-Bypass Tray (B833) can be installed on either this

Bypass Tray (Option)
LCIT or LCIT RT5040 (D453).
System
Mode Stand-alone
A B C
Noise Level
Operation < 73 dB < 78 dB < 80 dB < 83 dB
Standby < 64 dB < 70 dB < 78 dB
Specifications
SM 7-13 D059/D060/D061
7.2.3 LCIT RT5040 (D453) (OPTION)
Operating Environment Ranges of temperature and humidity: Same as main machine.
D059 (90 cpm) 420-555 mm/s
Speed D060 (110 cpm) 500-720 mm/s
D061 (135 cpm) 630-985 mm/s
Service Life Expected: 5 Years or 55,000K
Paper Feed System: Tray 1, 2, 3 FRR-CF
Tray 1, 3 1,000 sheets (Thickness: 0.11 mm)

Tray Capacity:
Tray 2 2,000 sheets (Thickness: 0.11 mm)
Trays 4, 5 5 Step: 900, 625, 375, 75, tray end
Paper Level Detection: Tray 6 5 Step: 2250, 1525, 800, 75, tray end

Tray 1 52 to 256 g/m2
Paper Weight Tray 2 40 to 300 g/m2
Tray 3 52 to 256 g/m2
Paper Size Tray 1,2,3 A5 to A3, 5½"x8½" to 13” x 18”
D059/D060/D061 7-14 SM
Paper Size Switching Side fence, end fence adjustment.
Paper Size Detection Automatic
Heater (Option) Anti-condensation heaters: 36W (18W x 2)
Size (w x d x h) 880 x 730 x 980 mm (33.5 x 28.7 x 38.6 in.)
Weight Less than 165 kg (363 lb)
Power Source DC 24 V ±10% (from copier)
Power Consumption: Less than 150 W
I/F Connection Serial connection to main frame
Feed possible from all Tray. Requires installation of tab sheet

Tab Sheet: fence.
Note: Only A4 LEF, 8½" x 11" LEF tab sheets can be fed.
Trays 4, 5 5 Step: 900, 625, 375, 75, paper end
Paper Level Detection: Tray 6 5 Step: 1750, 1250, 750, 75, paper end

System
Mode Stand-alone
A B C
Specifications
Noise Level
Operation < 73 dB < 78 dB < 80 dB < 83 dB
Standby < 64 dB < 70 dB < 78 dB
SM 7-15 D059/D060/D061
7.2.4 MULTI-BYPASS TRAY (B833) (OPTION)

This option can be installed on the top of either the LCIT RT5030 (452) for A4/LT paper or
the LCIT RT5040 (D453) for A3/DLT paper.
Operating
Temperature and humidity ranges: Same as main machine.
Environment
D059 (90 cpm): 420-555 mm/s
Speed D060 (110 cpm): 500-720 mm/s
D061 (135 cpm): 630-985 mm/s
Paper Feed System FRR-CF
Tray Capacity 500 sheets (Paper thickness: 0.11 mm)
Paper Weight 52 to 216 g/m2
Paper Size A5 LEF, A5 SEF to A3 SEF, HLT LEF, HLT SEF to 13"x18" SEF
Operator adjustable side fences accommodate different paper

Paper Size Switching
sizes
Paper Size Detection Automatic (standard sizes only)
Heater None
Tray 7 4-Step: 500, 250, 50, paper end

Paper Level Detection
Accuracy ±50 sheets
Weight Less than 18 kg (39.6 lb)
Power Source 24 V DC (from Copier), 5 V DC (from LCT)
D059/D060/D061 7-16 SM
Size (W x D x H) 710 x 560 x 210 mm (30 x 22 x 8.3 in.)
Tab Sheets A4 LEF, 8½" x 11" LEF (requires attachment of tab fence)
System
Mode Alone
A B C
Noise Level Operation < 73 dB < 78 dB < 80 dB < 83 dB
<
Standby 64 < 70 dB < 78 dB
dB
Specifications
SM 7-17 D059/D060/D061
7.2.5 DE-CURL DU5000 UNIT (D457) (OPTION)

A de-curler and purge tray unit comprise this option:
Mounted on the left side of the main machine, the de-curler unit removes curl from
paper after it exits the main machine.
The purge tray holds paper purged from the paper path at the exit of the main machine
when a jam occurs downstream. (This reduces the number of sheets that have to be
removed to clear paper jams from the line.)
This unit is an option for the D059, D060, and D061
General
Temperature and humidity ranges: Same as main

Operating Environment
machine.
Paper Weight 40 g/m2 to 300g/m2
Paper Size 331 x 488 mm (13"x19.2") to A6 SEF, postcards
Power Supply DC 24V±5%, 5.1V±3% from main machine
Power Consumption Less than 30V
Size (w x d x h) 170 x 730 x 990 mm (6.7 x 28.7 x 40 in.)
Weight Less than 30 Kg (66 lb)
D059/D060/D061 7-18 SM
Noise Level: dB(A)
D059 D060 D061
Alone System Alone System Alone System
Operation 74 78 76 80 79 83
Standby 60 64 66 70 74 78
De-Curler Unit
Paper Size 331 x 488 mm (13"x19.2") to A6 SEF, postcards
Corrects front/back curl, selectable with lift

De-curling Site
plate on the unit by operator
Strength 5-Steps: Set by CE
Purge Tray
Capacity 10 sheets
Operation panel (main machine)

Jam Alert Jam LED front door
Inner Jam LED (paper remaining on tray)
Jam Removal Tray easily opened, paper removed by operator
Purged Paper Count None

Specifications
Space provided for storage of one extra used toner bottle for
Special Feature
the main machine.
SM 7-19 D059/D060/D061
7.2.6 PERFECT BINDER D391

Cover Interposer (Inserter) D391
Feed System Automatic Paper Feed
Trays Two. Tray A (upper), Tray B (lower)
Cover Setting Face-up stacking
Feed Top to bottom
Transport Mode Simplex
Standard PPC, Color Paper, Coated Paper

Cover Paper Type
Paper type mixing not recommended
Standard: A4 SEF, A4 LEF, B5 SEF, B5 LEF, LT SEF, LT LEF, EXE

SEF
Cover Size Width: 257 to 330.2 mm
Length: 182 to 487.7 mm
Recommended: 13"x19.2", 13"x19", 13"x18", A3, B4
Up to 200 covers (80 g/m2)

Tray A, B Capacity
Maximum stack thickness: 24 mm
Paper Weight 64 g/m2 to 300 g/m2
Paper Positioning Center aligned
Width: Adjustable slide-fence contact sensors

Paper Size
Tray A, Tray B: 1 sensor each
Detection
Length: Pulse count photo-sensors
Weight Approximately 17 kg (37.4 lb)
D059/D060/D061 7-20 SM
Rev. 05/30/2012 Specifications: Options-1
Power Supply DC 24V (supplied from host machine via Perfect Binder)
Power
Less than 103 W (maximum at operation)
Consumption
Perfect Binder (D391)
Compatible Host Machines D059/D060/D061
Paper Positioning Center aligned
Delivery Face-down
10 to 200 sheets (64 to 80 g/m2)

Signature Thickness 10 to 150 sheets (81 to 105 g/m2)
Max. thickness: Up to 23 mm (0.9 in.)
Width: 182 to 228.6 mm

Signature
Length: 257 to 320 mm
Paper Size
Width: 257 to 330.2 mm
Cover
Length: 364 to 487.7 mm
⇒ Signature 64 to 105 g/m2 (See *)

Paper Thickness
Cover 90 to 300 g/m2
Width 139.7 mm to 216 mm

Finished Size
Length 201 to 297 mm
Top 6 to 28 mm
Specifications
Trimming Range Bottom 6 to 28 mm
Fore Edge 6 to 40 mm
* 106 to 163 g/m2 is available for slip sheets, however, limited to 10 sheets.
SM 7-21 D059/D060/D061
Target Signature Cover
13"x19.2"
13"x19"
A4 SRA4
13"x18"
Recommended SRA3
Cover/Signature Size Ratios
B5 A4 A3
A5 B5 B4
13"x19.2"
LT 9"x12"
13"x19"
3 cuts: Bottom, top, fore edge

Trimming Modes 1 cut: Fore edge (Limit: 297 mm)
No cuts
Straight-through, no binding
Width: 98.4 to 330.2 mm

Downstream Delivery Size
Length: 139.7 to 500 mm
Max.: 25 mm (80g/m2)
Book Output Tray
Book door locked during operation
Warm-up Time Less than 380 sec. (6.3 min.)
Glue vat 380 g (continuous pellet supply)

Glue Capacity
Approximately A4 to B5 100 books
More than 15 books

Trimmings Box Capacity
Approx. A4 to B5 of 100 sheets each, 80 g/m2
D059/D060/D061 7-22 SM
Size (w x d x h) 1090 x 791 x 1387 mm (43 x 31 x 53.5 in.)
Weight 335 kg (737 lb)
EU: 220 to 240V 50/60 Hz

Power Supply
NA: 208 60 Hz
Power Consumption Less than 623 W (with inserter)
Specifications
SM 7-23 D059/D060/D061
7.2.7 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY CI5010 (B835)
D059 (90 cpm) 432 mm/s
Speed D060 (110 cpm) 515 mm/s
D061 (135 cpm) 649 mm/s
Paper Separation FRR System with Feed Belt
Width: A5 SEF/5½"x8½" SEF - 13”

Paper Sizes
Length: A5 LEF/5½"x8½" LEF - 18”
Capacity 400 sheets (80 g/m2) (2 trays 200 sheets each)
Paper Size Detection Yes
Paper Size Switching Operator adjustable side fences
Side Registration Yes
Power Supply 24 V ± 5% (from mainframe)
Size (w x d x h) Less than 540 x 730 x 1200 mm, 21.2" x 28.7" x 47.2"
D059/D060/D061 7-24 SM
7.2.8 MUTLI-FOLDING UNIT FD5000 (D454)

General

machine.
Service Life Expected: 5 years or 60,000 K (A4 LEF)
Folding Methods 6 (see below)
Speed Straight-Through 100 to 700 mm/s
Folding 270 to 700 mm/s
Straight-Through Feed Size Postcard to 13x19.2"
Used paper: A3, A4, B4, B5

Type OHP: A4, B5
Tap paper: A4 LEF, LT LEF
Folding Methods 6 (FM1 to FM6)
Specifications
SM 7-25 D059/D060/D061
Paper Sizes (Folding) FM1 A3, B4, DLT, LG, A4, LT, 12x18", 8-kai
A3, B4, DLT, LG, A4, B5, LT 12x18",

12.6x18.5", 12.6x19.2", 13x18", 13x19",
FM2
13x19.2", 226x310 mm, 310x432 mm, SRA3,
SRA4, 8-kai
FM3
FM4
A3, B4, DLT, LG, A4, LT, B5, 12x18", 8-kai
FM5
FM6
D059/D060/D061 7-26 SM
Paper Weights (Folding) FM1
FM2
FM3
64 to 105 g/m2
FM4
FM5
FM6
Multiple Folding FM1 Not allowed
FM2 Max. 3 (64 to 80 g/m2 only)
FM3 Max. 3 (64 to 80 g/m2 only)
FM4 Max. 3 (64 to 80 g/m2 , B4, A4, LT, B5 only)
FM5
Not allowed
FM6
Line Speed (Only FM1 Z-Folded paper can exit downstream)
350 mm/sec. to top tray

No Fold
To downstream: Same as main machine.
700 mm/sec. to top tray (paper ≤ 355.6 mm long)

FM1 450 mm/sec. to top tray (paper < 355.6 mm long)
To downstream: Same as main machine.
1 Sheet: Same as main machine

Specifications
2-3 Sheets: 454 mm/sec.

FM2 700 mm/sec. to top tray (paper ≤ 355.6 mm long)
350 mm/sec. to top tray (paper ≤ 279.4 <355.6 mm long)
250 mm/sec. to top tray (paper < 279.4 mm long)
SM 7-27 D059/D060/D061

FM3 2-3 Sheets: 454 mm/sec. to top tray
FM4 350 mm/sec. to top tray (paper ≤ 420 mm long)
250 mm/sec. to top tray (paper < 420 mm long)

FM5 350 mm/sec. to top tray (paper ≤ 420 mm long)
1 Sheet: Same as main machine as far as 3rd Stopper. At 3rd stopper feeds
50 mm at 100 mm/sec.
FM6
350 mm/sec. to top tray (paper ≤ 420 mm long)
Power Supply NA AC 120V 60 Hz, 15A
EU AC 220 to 240V, 50/60 Hz 10A
Power Consumption 270 W
Noise Level (dB A) Mode Alone System
No Folding < 76 dB ---
Folding < 78 dB < 83 dB
D059/D060/D061 7-28 SM
Tray Capacity
The capacity of the tray on top of the unit for folded paper is determined by these variables:
Folding Methods (FM1 to FM6)
Paper size
Paper weight
Folding Mode FM1
Weight (Standard) Weight (Heavy)

Size 2
64 to 80 g/m 64 to 80 g/m2
8-kai 35 20
12x18" 35 20
A3 SEF 35 20
DLT 35 20
B4 SEF 35 20
LG SEF 35 20
A4 SEF 30 20
LT SEF 30 20
Specifications
SM 7-29 D059/D060/D061
Folding Mode FM2

Size
64 to 80 g/m2 64 to 80 g/m2
13x19.2" 40 25
13x19" 40 25
12.6x19.2" 40 25
12.6x18.5" 40 25
13x18" 40 25
SRA3 (320x450 mm) 40 25
SRA4 (225x320 mm) 40 25
226x310 mm 40 25
310x432 mm 40 25
8-kai 40 25
12x18" 40 25
A3 SEF 40 25
DLT 40 25
B4 SEF 40 25
LG SEF 40 25
A4 SEF 50 50
LT SEF 50 50
B5 SEF 50 50
D059/D060/D061 7-30 SM
Folding Mode FM3

Size
64 to 80 g/m2 64 to 80 g/m2
8-kai 30 20
12x18" 30 20
A3 SEF 30 20
DLT 30 20
B4 SEF 30 20
LG SEF 30 20
A4 SEF 40 30
LT SEF 40 30
B5 SEF 40 30
Specifications
SM 7-31 D059/D060/D061
Folding Mode FM4

Size 2
64 to 80 g/m 64 to 80 g/m2
8-kai 40 20
12x18" 40 20
A3 SEF 40 20
DLT 40 20
B4 SEF 40 20
LG SEF 40 20
A4 SEF 50 40
LT SEF 50 40
B5 SEF 50 40
D059/D060/D061 7-32 SM
Folding Mode FM5

Size 2
64 to 80 g/m 64 to 80 g/m2
8-kai 30 20
12x18" 30 20
A3 SEF 30 20
DLT 30 20
B4 SEF 30 20
LG SEF 30 20
A4 SEF 30 30
LT SEF 30 30
B5 SEF 30 30
Specifications
SM 7-33 D059/D060/D061
Folding Mode FM6

Size 2
64 to 80 g/m 64 to 80 g/m2
8-kai 50 20
12x18" 50 20
A3 SEF 50 20
DLT 50 20
B4 SEF 50 20
LG SEF 50 20
A4 SEF 30 30
LT SEF 30 30
B5 SEF 30 30
D059/D060/D061 7-34 SM
7.2.9 RING BINDER RB5000 (D392)
Compatible Host
D059/D060/D061
Machines
Configuration Console
Paper Transport Centered in paper path
Punching + ring binding

Operation Modes Punching only
Straight-through (downstream delivery)
Signature
2 to 100 sheets
Thickness
Punching,
A4 LEF, LT LEF
binding
Straight-through (no punching)

Paper Size
A6 to A3 SEF, DLT, HLT, 12"x18", 13"x19",
Unfolded
12.6"x19.2", 13"x19.2", Tab sheets (A4, LT, LG)
A3, B4, A4 SEF, DLT, LG, LT SEF 12"x18" (from

Z-Folded
upstream Z-Folder unit).
Ring Sizes 2 (50-sheet, 100-sheet)
A4 LEF: 23 holes
Punching
Specifications
LT LEF: 21 holes
Ring Supply Cartridge feed: capacity: 80 rings max.
SM 7-35 D059/D060/D061
11 documents (100-ring bound, A4 SEF)
Thickness Ring On Tray

Output Tray
2 to 10 50 25
Capacity
11 to 50 50, 100 20
51 to 100 100 11
Punching Only Up to 50 sheets
Size 870 x 730 x 980 mm (34.3 x 28.7 x 38.6 in.)
Power
Less than 400 W
Consumption
D059/D060/D061 7-36 SM
7.3 SPECIFICATIONS: OPTIONS-2
7.3.1 HIGH CAPACITY STACKER SK5010 (D447)

The Tray Cart (D456) is available as an additional option for this unit.
General

machine.
Service Life Expected: 5 years or 60,000 K
Speed 280 to 700 mm/s
Front Door Lock Hasps provided, lock not provided
Size (w x h x d) 900 x 980 x 730 mm (35.4 x 38.6 x 28.7)
Weight 100 kg (220 lb.)
NA AC 120V 60 Hz, 15A

Power Supply
EU AC 220 to 240V, 50/60 Hz 10A
Shift < 76 dB < 83 dB

Specifications
SM 7-37 D059/D060/D061
Shift Tray
A3 Ext., A3 SEF, B4 SEF, A4 SEF, A4 LEF, DLT

5,000
SEF, LG SEF, LT SEF, LT LEF
Capacity (80 g/m2)
B5 SEF, B5 LEF, A5 SEF, A5 LEF, HLT SEF,
2,500
HLT LEF
Tray Full Detection 4-Steps: 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%
Proof Tray
Capacity 250 (A4, LT 80 g/m2)
Paper Size A5 SEF/Postcard to 331 x 499 mm (13" x 19.2")
Tray Full Detection None
D059/D060/D061 7-38 SM
7.3.2 BOOKLET FINISHER SR5020 (D434)

General

machine.
Service Life Expected: Five years or 60,000K
Size (w x h x d) 990 x 730 x 1130 mm (39 x 28.7 x 44.5 in.)
Weight 128 kg (281.6)
NA AC 120V 60 Hz, 15A

Power Supply
EU AC 220 to 240V, 50/60 Hz 10A
Shift < 76 dB ---
Staple < 78 dB < 83 dB
Specifications
SM 7-39 D059/D060/D061
Shift Tray
2500 A4 LEF, B5 LEF, LT LEF
A3, A4 SEF, B4, B5 SEF, LT, LG<

1500
LT SEF, SRA4, 226x310 mm
12x18", SRA3, 13x18", 12.6x1.5",

Unfolded Paper
Capacity 1000 12.6x19.2", 13x19", 13x19.2",
310x432 mm
500 A5 LEF, HLT LEF
100 A5 SEF, HLT SEF
Z-Folded Paper 30
Unfolded Paper A5 to 13x19.2"

Paper Size
A3, B4, A4 SEF, DLT, LG LT SEF, 12x18",
Z-Folded Paper
8-kai
Unfolded Paper 40 to 300 g/m2

Paper Weight
Z-Folded Paper 64 to 105 g/m2
Proof Tray
250 A4, LT or smaller

Unfolded Paper
50 B4, LG or larger
Capacity
20 A4, LT or smaller
Z-Folded Paper
20 B4, LG or larger
Unfolded Paper A6 SEF to 13x19.2", Postcard SEF

Paper Size
A3, B4, A4 SEF, DLT, LG, LT SEF, 12x18",
Z-Folded Paper
8-kai
Paper Weight Unfolded Paper 52 to 216 g/m2
D059/D060/D061 7-40 SM
Corner Stapling
2 to 100 A4, B5, LT

Unfolded Paper
2 to 50 A3, B4, DLT, LG
10
Combined Stack
Z-Folded Unfolded
1 1 to 90
2 0 to 80
Stack Size (80 g/m2) 3 0 to 70
Z-Folded Paper 4 0 to 60
5 0 to 50
6 0 to 40
7 0 to 30
8 0 to 20
9 0 to 10
10 0
Paper Size Unfolded Paper B5 to A3, LT to DLT
Z-Folded Paper A3, B4, DLT
Paper Weight Unfolded Paper 64 to 90 g/m2

Specifications
1 Staple: Rear, Rear diagonal, or Front

Stapling Positions
2 Staples: Front/Rear
Staple Supply Cartridge with 5000-staple capacity
SM 7-41 D059/D060/D061
Tray Capacity After Stapling
Pages Stacks Size
20 to 100 125 to 25
10 to 19 200 to 105 A4 LEF, B5 LEF, LT LEF
2 to 9 150
No Folding
10 to 100 150 to 15
A4 SEF, B5 SEF, LT SEF
2 to 9 150
10 to 50 150 to 30
A3, B4, DLT, LG
2 to 9 150
Pages Stacks Size
No Folding, Mixed Sizes A3/A4 LEF

2 to 50 30 B4/B5 LEF
DLT/LT LEF
Pages Stacks Size

Z-Folded, Mixed with
A3 Z-fold/A4
Unfolded
1 to 10 30 to 3 B4 Z-fold/B5
DLT Z-fold/LT
Staple Trimming Hopper Capacity 15,000 staples
Hopper Full Alert Photo-sensor
Trimming Disposal Alert, operator
D059/D060/D061 7-42 SM
Booklet Stapling
Stack Size 20 64 to 80 g/m2
15 80 to 90 g/m2
13x19.2", 13x19", 12.6x19.2", 12.6x18.5", 13x18",

SRA3 (320x450 mm), 12x18", A3, B4, SRA4 (320 x
Paper Size
225 mm), 226x310 mm, 310 x 432 mm, A4,B5, DLT,
LG, LT
Stapling Positions 2 staples, 2 fixed locations
Staple Supply 2 cartridges, 5000 staples each
Pages Stacks Size
2 to 5 30
Tray Capacity After Stapling 6 to 10 15

All sizes
11 to 15 10
16 to 20 5
Specifications
SM 7-43 D059/D060/D061
Punch Unit PU5020 (D449) (Option)

This punch unit is not pre-installed in the finisher. The punch unit must be installed.
Punching North America 2/3 hole selectable
Europe 2/4 hole selectable
Scandinavia 4 hole
Skew Correction Yes
Paper Registration Yes
Holes Edge Size
SEF A6 to A3, HLT to DLT

2 Holes
LEF A5 to A4, HLT to LT
SEF A6 to A3, HLT to DLT

NA 2 Holes
Paper Size SEF A3, B4, DLT

3 Holes
LEF A4, B5, LT
SEF A3, B4, DLT

EU 4 Holes
LEF A4, B5, LT
SEF B6 to A3, HLT to DLT

Scn 4 Holes
Holes Weight
2 Holes
NA 2 Holes 52 to 209 g/m2

Paper Weight
3 Holes
EU 4 Holes
52 to 163 g/m2
Scn 4 Holes
D059/D060/D061 7-44 SM
7.3.3 TRIMMER UNIT TR5020 (D455) (OPTION)

This option is installed on the left side of the Booklet Finisher (D434).
Compatible Machines Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434) with the D059/D060/D061
Operating Environment Temperature and humidity ranges: Same as main machine.
Service Life Expected: 5 years or 12,000 K
Paper Size
13x19.2", 13x19", 12.6x19.2", 12.6x18.5", 13x19", SRA3

Standard Sizes (320x450 mm), 12x18", A3, B4, SRA4 (320x225 mm),
226x310 mm, 310 x 432 mm, A4, B5, DLT, LG, LT, 8 kai
Width: 182 to 330 mm

Custom Size
Length: 257 to 488 mm
Stack Size 1 to 20 sheets (folded)
Trimming 40 sheets (80 g/m2)
Pages Sets
1 to 5 60 for all sizes
35 for B5 and A4/LT

6 to 10
40 for B4/LG and A3/DLT
Tray Capacity
11 to 15 25 for all sizes
20 for B5, A4/LT and B4/LG

Specifications
16 to 18
25 for A3/DLT
20 for B5, A4/LT and B4/LG

19 to 20
25 for A3/DLT
SM 7-45 D059/D060/D061
Weight: 80 g/m2
Paper Weight
Weight: 20 lb. Bond
NA AC 120V 60 Hz, 15A

Power Supply
EU AC 220 to 240V, 50/60 Hz 10A
Power Consumption 75W
Weight 70 kg or less
Straight-Through < 68 dB < 75 dB
Trimming < 72 dB < 75 dB
D059/D060/D061 7-46 SM
7.3.4 FINISHER SR5000 (3K FINISHER B830)

Proof Tray
500 sheets (A4, 8½" x 11" and smaller)

Paper Capacity (80 g/m2)
250 sheets (B4, 8½" x 14" and larger)
A3 to A6 SEF, B6 SEF, 11" x 17" to 5½" x 8½", 12" x

Paper Size
18", 13" x 18"
Upper Tray Full Detection Provided
Shift Tray
3000 sheets (A4 LEF, B5 LEF, 8½" x 11" LEF)
1500 sheets (A3, A4 SEF, B4 and B5 SEF, 11" x 17" SEF, 8½"
x 14", 8½" x 11" SEF
2
Paper Capacity (80 g/m )
1000 sheets 12" x 18"
500 sheets (A5 LEF, 5½" x 8½" LEF)
100 sheets (A5 SEF, 5½" x 8½" SEF)
A3 to A5, 11" x 17" to 5½" x 8½", 12" x 18" (including tab

Paper Size
paper)

Specifications
Shift Tray Full Detection Provided
SM 7-47 D059/D060/D061
Stapler
A4, B5, 8½" x 11" (Max. 100 Sheets)

Stapling Stack Size
A3, B4, 11" x 17", 8½" x 14" (Max. 50 sheets)
A3 to B5, 11" x 17" to 8½" x 11"

Stapling Paper Size
Z fold paper: A3 ,B4 ,11” x 17”
64 to 90 g/m2
Stapling Paper Weight
Z fold paper: 64 to 80 g/m2
4 Modes
Staple Position 1 Staple: Front, Rear, Rear-Oblique
2 Staples: 2 locations
Staple Capacity 5000 staples/cartridge
Staple Supply Cartridge or Staple Replacement
Sheets Sets Sizes
A4 SEF, B5 SEF, 8½" x 11" SEF

10 - 100 200 - 30
A4 LEF, B5 LEF, 8½" x 11" LEF
No Folding
2-9 150
Stapled Stack Size 10 - 50 150 - 30 A3, B4, 11" x 17", 8½" x 14"
2-9 150
Sheets Sets Sizes
Folding A3 Z fold + A4, B4 Z fold + B5

1 - 10 30 - 3
11” x 17” Z-Fold + 8½" x 11"
D059/D060/D061 7-48 SM
Trimmed Staple Capacity 15,000 or more
Staple Hopper Full Detection Provided
Power Source DC 24 V (From Mainframe)
Size (W x D x H) 800 x 730 x 980 mm (31.5 x 28.7 x 38.6 in.)
Compatible Machines D059 (90 cpm), D060 (110 cpm), D061 (135 cpm)
Specifications
SM 7-49 D059/D060/D061
Punch Unit PU5000 (B831)

The punch unit is installed in the Finisher SR5000 (B830).
2/3-hole (North America)

Punch Hole Positions
2/4-hole (Europe)
Punch Paper Size
A6 - A3 SEF, 11" x 17"-5 ½" x 8½" SEF

2-Hole (NA)
A5 - A4 LEF, 8 ½" x 11" LEF, 5½" x 8½" LEF
A3 SEF, B4 SEF, 11" x 17" SEF

3-Hole (NA)
A4 LEF, B5 LEF, 8½" x11" LEF
A3 SEF, B4 SEF, 11" x 17" SEF

4-Hole (EUR/A)
A4 LEF,B5 LEF, 8½" x 11" LEF
Paper Weight
2-Hole (NA) 52 g/m2 - 163 g/m2
3-Hole (NA) 52 g/m2 - 163 g/m2
4-Hole ( EUR/A) 52 g/m2 - 128 g/m2
Punch Waste Hopper Capacity
2-Hole (NA) 10K
3-Hole (NA) 10K
4-Hole ( EUR/A) 15K
Operation Modes All (Shift, Proof, Staple)
D059/D060/D061 7-50 SM
D059/D060/D061
SERVICE MANUAL
(Book 2 of 2) 004971MIU
ACCESSORIES
D059/D060/D061
SERVICE MANUAL
D059/D060/D061
SERVICE MANUAL
004971MIU
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained
within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best
interest of Ricoh Americas Corporation and its member companies.
NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION.
All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including

desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered
trademarks or the property of their respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion
only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of
any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other
affiliation with Ricoh products.
© 2009 RICOH Americas Corporation. All rights reserved.

WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh Americas Corporation.
Users of this manual should be either service
trained or certified by successfully completing a
Ricoh Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing

information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property or loss of warranty
protection.
Ricoh Americas Corporation

LEGEND
PRODUCT COMPANY
CODE GESTETNER LANIER RICOH SAVIN
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS
* 07/2009 Original Printing
FINISHER SR5000
B830
B830 Finisher SR5000 REVISION HISTORY
None
FINISHER B830
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................1

1.1 COVERS ...................................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 FRONT DOOR, INNER COVER.......................................................... 1
Front Door................................................................................................ 1
Left Inner Cover ....................................................................................... 1
Inner Cover .............................................................................................. 1
1.1.2 SIDE TABLE AND UPPER TRAY ....................................................... 2
1.1.3 LEFT COVERS, REAR COVER .......................................................... 3
1.1.4 TOP COVER ....................................................................................... 3
1.1.5 SHIFT TRAY........................................................................................ 3
1.1.6 JOGGER UNIT COVER ...................................................................... 4
1.2 ROLLERS..................................................................................................... 5
1.2.1 DRAG ROLLER ................................................................................... 5
1.2.2 POSITIONING ROLLER...................................................................... 6
1.2.3 ALIGNMENT BRUSH ROLLER ........................................................... 7
1.3 JOGGER FENCE ......................................................................................... 8
1.4 SENSORS .................................................................................................... 9
1.4.1 PAPER HEIGHT SENSORS ............................................................... 9
1.4.2 EXIT GUIDE HP SENSOR ................................................................ 10
1.4.3 UPPER TRAY FULL AND EXIT SENSORS ...................................... 11
Upper Tray Full Sensor.......................................................................... 11
Upper Tray Exit Sensor.......................................................................... 11
1.4.4 SHIFT TRAY EXIT SENSOR............................................................. 12
1.4.5 ENTRANCE AND STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSORS ........... 13
Entrance Sensor .................................................................................... 13
Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor................................................................ 13
1.4.6 MAIN BOARD, PRE-STACK PAPER SENSOR ................................ 14
1.4.7 STAPLE TRIMMINGS HOPPER FULL SENSOR.............................. 16
1.4.8 STAPLER ROTATION HP AND STAPLER RETURN SENSORS............ 17
1.5 STAPLER ................................................................................................... 18
1.6 SHIFT TRAY............................................................................................... 19
1.6.1 SHIFT TRAY EXIT, SHIFT TRAY LIFT MOTOR ............................... 19
Shift Tray Exit Motor .............................................................................. 19
Shift Tray Lift Motor................................................................................ 20
1.6.2 DRAG ROLLER/DRAG DRIVE MOTORS,
DRAG DRIVE HP SENSOR ........................................................ 21
1.6.3 SHIFT MOTOR AND SENSORS ....................................................... 24
1.6.4 JOGGER TOP FENCE MOTOR........................................................ 25
1.6.5 JOGGER UNIT .................................................................................. 26
1.6.6 JOGGER BOTTOM FENCE MOTOR................................................ 27
1.7 PUNCH UNIT ............................................................................................. 28
1.7.1 PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT................................................... 28
SM i B830
Front to Rear Adjustment....................................................................... 28
Right to Left Adjustment......................................................................... 28
1.8 SHIFT TRAY JOGGER UNIT ..................................................................... 29
1.8.1 SHIFT TRAY JOGGER UNIT ............................................................ 29
1.8.2 SHIFT TRAY JOGGER UNIT PCB .................................................... 30
1.8.3 SHIFT TRAY JOGGER UNIT MOTORS............................................ 31
1.9 MOTORS.................................................................................................... 32
1.9.1 TRANSPORT MOTORS, EXIT GUIDE MOTOR ............................... 32
Upper Tray Transport Motor .................................................................. 32
Lower Transport Motor........................................................................... 33
Exit Guide Motor .................................................................................... 33
1.9.2 UPPER TRAY MOTORS ................................................................... 34
Upper Tray Exit Motor............................................................................ 34
Upper Tray Junction Gate Motor............................................................ 35
1.9.3 PRE-STACK MOTORS ..................................................................... 36
Pre-Stack Transport Motor..................................................................... 36
Pre-Stack Junction Gate Motor.............................................................. 37
Pre-Stack Stopper Motor ....................................................................... 37
1.9.4 PUNCH MOTOR................................................................................ 38
Punch Motor .......................................................................................... 38
1.9.5 STAPLE MOTORS ............................................................................ 39
Staple Junction Gate Motor ................................................................... 39
Stapler Exit Motor .................................................................................. 40
2. SERVICE TABLES.........................................................................41
2.1 DIP SWITCHES.......................................................................................... 41
2.2 TEST POINTS ............................................................................................ 41
2.3 FUSES ....................................................................................................... 41
3. DETAILS.........................................................................................42
3.1 UPPER TRAY AND STAPLER JUNCTION GATES................................... 42
3.2 PAPER PRE-STACKING ........................................................................... 43
3.3 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING ..................................................... 44
3.4 STAPLING.................................................................................................. 45
3.5 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT .................................................................... 46
Side-to-Side ........................................................................................... 46
Rotation (1) ............................................................................................ 47
Rotation (2) ............................................................................................ 47
3.6 STAPLER ................................................................................................... 48
3.7 FEED-OUT ................................................................................................. 50
3.8 PAPER EXIT STACKING ........................................................................... 51
3.9 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION......................................................................... 52
3.9.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................... 52
3.9.2 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION: STAND-BY MODE ................................ 54
3.9.3 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION: SHIFT MODE........................................ 55
3.9.4 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION: STAPLE MODE .................................... 56
3.9.5 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION: Z-FOLDED PAPER............................... 57
3.9.6 SHIFT TRAY FULL AND NEAR-FULL DETECTION ......................... 58
3.10 SHIFT TRAY SIDE-TO-SIDE MOVEMENT .............................................. 59
B830 ii SM
3.11 PUNCH UNIT ........................................................................................... 60
3.11.1 PUNCH UNIT DRIVE....................................................................... 60
3.11.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION ...................................................... 61
3.12 SHIFT TRAY JOGGER UNIT ................................................................... 62
3.12.1 JOGGER UNIT MECHANICAL LAYOUT ........................................ 62
3.12.2 JOGGER UNIT DRIVE .................................................................... 63
4. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION...........................................64

4.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT .................................................... 64
4.2 DRIVE LAYOUT ......................................................................................... 65
4.2.1 MAIN DRIVE...................................................................................... 65
4.2.2 STAPLING TRAY DRIVE .................................................................. 66
4.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS................................................................... 67
4.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT SUMMARY ................................................... 70
SM iii B830

1.1 COVERS
[A]
[D]
Finisher
B830
[C]
[B]
B830R901.WMF
B830R902.WMF
1.1.1 FRONT DOOR, INNER COVER

Front Door
1. Remove the front door screw [A] ( x 1).
2. Remove the front door [B].
Left Inner Cover

1. Remove the front door.
2. Remove the left inner cover [C] ( x 1).
Inner Cover
1. Remove the inner cover [D] ( x 3).
SM 1 B830
1.1.2 SIDE TABLE AND UPPER TRAY

[C]
[B]
[A]
B830R903.WMF
1. Remove the side table [A] ( x 2). Slide to the right to remove it.
2. Click the release lever [B] and remove the upper tray [C].
B830 2 SM
[D]
[E]
[A]
[H]

[F]
[G]
[B]
[C]
B830R504.WMF
B830R904.WMF
Finisher
B830
1.1.3 LEFT COVERS, REAR COVER
Remove:
• Shift tray jogger unit ( 1.8.1)
• Remove the door and left inner cover. ( 1.1.1)
[A] Remove the left upper cover ( x 2, x 2).
[B] Remove the rear cover ( x 2).
[C] Remove the left lower cover ( x 4).
1.1.4 TOP COVER
Remove:
• Side table, upper tray ( 1.1.2)
[D] Step screws ( x 2).
[E] Top cover ( x 2). Slide to the right to remove.
1.1.5 SHIFT TRAY
• If you need to lower the shift tray, support the bottom of the tray with your hand,
then pull the gear toward you to release the tray and lower it.
Remove:
[F] Remove the shift tray ( x 4).
[G] Shift tray rear cover ( x 1)
[H] Shift tray front cover [H] ( x 1).
SM 3 B830
1.1.6 JOGGER UNIT COVER
[B]
[A]
B830Ｒ101.WMF

2. Pull out the stapler tray unit [A].
3. Remove the jogger unit cover [B] ( x2)
B830 4 SM
1.2 ROLLERS
1.2.1 DRAG ROLLER
[A]
[B]
Finisher
B830
[C]
B830R905.WMF
1. Above the shift tray, pull the roller mount [A] out.
2. Remove the rollers [B] and [C] ( x 1 each)
SM 5 B830
1.2.2 POSITIONING ROLLER
[C]
[B]
[A] B830R906.WMF
1. Remove the jogger unit cover ( 1.1.6)

2. Remove the snap ring [A].
3. Release the rubber belt [B].
4. Replace the positioning roller [C].
B830 6 SM
1.2.3 ALIGNMENT BRUSH ROLLER
[C]
[B]
[A]
[D]
B830R507.WMF
[H] [G]
[E]
Finisher
B830
[I] [F]
B830R907.WMF
1. Open the front door and pull out the staple unit.
3. Remove the main board bracket and all connectors ( x 8). ( 1.4.6)
4. Remove the screw [A] and tension spring [B] for the tension bracket [C], and
release the tension of the timing belt.
5. Remove the pulley [D] and bearing [E].
6. Remove the inner cover [F] ( x 1).
7. Open the guide [G], then remove the alignment brush roller assembly [H].
8. Remove the alignment brush roller [I] ( x2, Bearing x 1 front/back, x1).
SM 7 B830
1.3 JOGGER FENCE
[B] [A]
B830R909.WMF

2. Pull out the jogger and stapler unit.
3. Push both fences to the center.
4. Remove the left jogger fence [A] ( x 1)
5. Remove the right jogger fence [B] ( x 1).
NOTE: If the screws are difficult to remove or re-attach, remove the jogger
fence belt and spring plate.
B830 8 SM
1.4 SENSORS
1.4.1 PAPER HEIGHT SENSORS
[C]
[D]
[F]
Finisher
B830
[B] [E]
[A] B830R509.WMF
Remove:
• Top cover. ( 1.1.1)
• Left upper panel and left upper cover ( x 2, x 2) ( 1.1.3)
[A] Protector plate ( x 1).
[B] Feeler ( x 1).
[C] Sensor bracket ( x 1).
[D] Paper height sensor – staple mode ( x 1, Pawls x4)
[E] Paper height sensor – standby mode ( x 1, Pawls x4)
[F] Paper height sensor – shift/Z-Fold( x 1, Pawls x4).
SM 9 B830
1.4.2 EXIT GUIDE HP SENSOR
1. Remove the top cover. ( 1.1.1)

2. Remove the left upper panel and left upper cover ( x 2, x 2).
3. Remove:
[A] Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1).
[A]
B830R980.BMP
[B] Exit guide HP sensor ( x 1,

Pawls x3).
[B]
B830R981.BMP
B830 10 SM
1.4.3 UPPER TRAY FULL AND EXIT SENSORS

[D]
[C]
[B] [E]
[A]
Finisher
B830
B830R510.WMF
Upper Tray Full Sensor

1. Remove the top cover.
2. Remove the sensor cover [A] ( x 2).
3. Remove the sensor bracket [B] ( x 1).
4. Replace the upper tray full sensor [C] ( x 1, x1).
Upper Tray Exit Sensor

5. Remove the sensor bracket [D] ( x 1).
6. Replace the upper tray exit sensor [E] ( x 1, x 1).
SM 11 B830
1.4.4 SHIFT TRAY EXIT SENSOR

Remove the top cover ( 1.1.4)
Remove:
[A] Sensor bracket ( x1)
[A]
B830R982.BMP
[B] Shift tray exit sensor 1 ( x1, x1)

[B]
B830R983.BMP
[C] Shift tray exit sensor 2 ( x1, x1)

[C]
B830R984.BMP
B830 12 SM
1.4.5 ENTRANCE AND STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSORS
[B]
[A]
B830R985.WMF
[D]
Finisher
B830
[C]
B830R986.WMF
Entrance Sensor
1. Disconnect the finisher from the copier.
2. Remove the sensor bracket [A] ( x 1).
3. Replace the entrance sensor [B] ( x 1) ( x 1).
Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor
2. Remove the sensor bracket [C] ( x 1).
3. Replace the stapler tray entrance sensor [D] ( x 1)( x 1).
SM 13 B830
1.4.6 MAIN BOARD, PRE-STACK PAPER SENSOR
{
~
}
B830R987.BMP
1. Remove the rear cover. ( 1.1.4)

2. Remove the main board bracket ( x 4, = x8, x All).
B830 14 SM
[D]
[E]
[A]
[B]
[C]
B830R516.WMF
[G]
Loosen the screw [A] ( x1)
Finisher
Remove:
B830
[B] Gear cover ( x1)
[C] Gear ( x1, Timing belt x1) [F]
[D] Gear ( x1)
[E] Plate ( x2)
[F] Left vertical transport guide
[G] Middle vertical transport guide
[H] Pre-stack paper sensor ( x1)
[H]
B830R516A.WMF
SM 15 B830
1.4.7 STAPLE TRIMMINGS HOPPER FULL SENSOR
[D]
[A]
[C]
[B]
B830R988.BMP
B830R989.BMP
• Open the front door

• Pull out the stapler unit
• Remove the rear cover ( x 2).
Remove:
[A] Staple trimmings hopper
[B] Hopper holder (= x1, Hook x1, x1)
[C] Hopper full sensor ( x 1)
[D] Hopper set sensor ( x 1)
B830 16 SM
1.4.8 STAPLER ROTATION HP AND STAPLER RETURN SENSORS
[C]
[A]
Finisher
[B]
B830
B830R990.WMF
1. Remove the stapler unit. (See next page.)

2. Remove the stapler mount bracket [A] ( x 4) (Springs x 2).
3. Replace the stapler rotation HP sensor [B] ( x 1).
4. Replace the stapler return sensor [C] ( x 1).
SM 17 B830
1.5 STAPLER
[B]
[A] B830R518.WMF
1. Open the front door and pull out the staple tray.
2. Remove the stapler unit harness cover [A] ( x 2).
3. Lift the stapler [B] off of its pegs ( x 2)
4. Remove plate [C] ( x 2).
5. Attach this plate to the new stapler with the
same screws ( x 2)
[C]
B830R421.BMP
6. Replace the frame guard [D] with the one

provided with the new stapler.
[D]
B830R422.BMP
B830 18 SM
1.6 SHIFT TRAY

1.6.1 SHIFT TRAY EXIT, SHIFT TRAY LIFT MOTOR
Finisher
B830
B830R901.BMP
{ Shift Tray Exit Motor
| Shift Tray Lift Motor
Shift Tray Exit Motor [A]

• Rear cover ( 1.1.4)
[A] Shift tray exit motor bracket
( x2, x1, = X1, Timing belt x1)
[B] Shift tray exit motor ( x2)
[B]
B830R940.BMP
SM 19 B830
Shift Tray Lift Motor
[B]
[A]
[C]
B830R946.BMP
B830R947.BMP

[A] Gear cover ( x2)
[B] Shift tray lift motor bracket ( x2)
[C] Shift tray lift motor ( x,2 x1, Timing belt x1)
B830 20 SM
1.6.2 DRAG ROLLER/DRAG DRIVE MOTORS, DRAG DRIVE HP

SENSOR
[A]
[B]
Finisher
B830
B830R526.WMF
Remove:
• Front door and all covers, except the left lower cover, top cover ( 1.1)
NOTE: Be sure to lower the shift tray by pulling the gear toward you. The shift
tray must be down.
1. Remove the left stay [A] (x 2)
2. Remove the shift tray mounting plate [B] ( x 2).
SM 21 B830
[A]
[B]
[C]
B830R527.WMF
B830R991.WMF
3. Remove the end fence [A] and plate ( x8, = x6, x2).
4. Remove cover [B] ( x 4).
5. Remove the motor stay [C] ( x4, = x7, x4).
NOTE: Make sure the motor and sensor connectors are disconnected before
removing.
B830 22 SM
[D]
[B]
[A]
[C]
B830R992.BMP
Finisher
B830
6. Remove the drag roller motor unit [A] (Bearing x1, x2, = x1)
7. Remove the drag roller motor ( x2)
8. Remove the drag roller HP sensor unit [B] ( x1)
9. Remove the drag roller HP sensor ( x1, Pawls x3)
10. Remove the paper height sensor – shift/Z-fold unit [C] ( x2, = x2)
11. Remove the paper height sensor shift/Z-fold ( x1, Pawls x3)
12. Remove the drag drive motor unit (= x4, x2)
13. Remove the drag drive motor ( x2)
SM 23 B830
1.6.3 SHIFT MOTOR AND SENSORS
[A]
[C]
[B]
B830R950.BMP
[D]
B830R951.BMP
1. Remove the end fence ( 1.6.2)

2. Remove the shift motor bracket [A] (with motor) ( x 4, = x1, x1)
3. Remove the shift motor ( x4)
4. Remove the half-turn sensor bracket [B] ( x 1)
5. Remove half-turn sensor 1 [C] ( x1, Pawls x3)
6. Remove half-turn sensor 2 [D] ( x1, Pawls x3)
B830 24 SM
1.6.4 JOGGER TOP FENCE MOTOR
[A]
[B]
Finisher
B830
B830Ｒ102.WMF
1. Open the front door and pull out the stapler tray unit. ( 1.1.6)
2. Remove the jogger unit cover ( x2)
3. Remove the motor bracket [A] ( x2, timing belt x1)
4. Remove the jogger top fence motor [B] ( x2 = x1 x1)
SM 25 B830
1.6.5 JOGGER UNIT
[A]
B830Ｒ103.WMF
1. Open the front door and pull out the stapler tray unit.
2. Remove the jogger unit cover ( x2)
3. Remove the jogger unit [A] ( x4, = x5, x5)
B830 26 SM
1.6.6 JOGGER BOTTOM FENCE MOTOR
[A]
Finisher
B830R993.BMP
B830
1. Open the front door and pull out the stapler tray unit.
2. Remove the jogger bottom fence motor unit [A] ( x3, timing belt x1, = x1,
x1).
SM 27 B830
1.7 PUNCH UNIT

1.7.1 PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT
[A]
B830R994.WMF
The position of the punched holes can be adjusted in two ways.
Front to Rear Adjustment

Three spacers [A] are provided with the punch unit for manual adjustment of the
hole position in the main scan direction:
• 2 mm (x 1)
• 1 mm (x 2)
NOTE: One spacer was installed at installation and the remaining spacers were
fastened with a screw to the rear frame of the finisher under the rear cover
and slightly above the lock bar.
Right to Left Adjustment

The position of the punched holes can be adjusted right to left in the sub scan
direction with SP6101 Punch Hole Position Adjustment. The position can be
adjusted in the range ±7.5 mm in 0.5 mm steps. The default setting is 0.
Press the key to toggle the ± selection. A +ve value shifts the punch holes left
toward the edge of the paper, and a -ve value shifts the holes right away from the
edge.
B830 28 SM
1.8 SHIFT TRAY JOGGER UNIT

1.8.1 SHIFT TRAY JOGGER UNIT
[A]
Finisher
B830
B830R995.WMF
[B]
B830R996.WMF
1. Remove the jogger unit cover [A] ( x 2).

2. Remove the jogger unit [B] ( x 2, x 1).
SM 29 B830
1.8.2 SHIFT TRAY JOGGER UNIT PCB
[A]
B830R001B.WMF
1. Remove the jogger unit from the finisher. ( 1.8.1)

2. Remove the jogger unit control PCB [A] ( x 2, x 3)
B830 30 SM
1.8.3 SHIFT TRAY JOGGER UNIT MOTORS

[A]
[B]
B830R997.WMF
Finisher
B830
1. Remove the jogger unit from the finisher. ( 1.8.1)
2. Remove the shift tray jogger motor [A] ( x 2, x 1).
3. Remove the shift tray jogger retraction motor [B] ( x 2, x 1).
SM 31 B830
1.9 MOTORS
1.9.1 TRANSPORT MOTORS, EXIT GUIDE MOTOR
B830R901.BMP
{ Upper Transport Motor
| Lower Transport Motor
Upper Tray Transport Motor

[A] Upper transport motor ( x4, x1)
[A]
B830R905.BMP
B830 32 SM
Lower Transport Motor

[A] Lower transport motor ( x4, x1)
[A]
B830R906.BMP
Exit Guide Motor
Finisher
B830
[A]
[B]
B830R955.BMP
B830R956.BMP
• Top cover ( 1.1.4)

[A] Bracket ( x2, x1)
[B] Exit guide motor ( x2, x1, Timing belt x1)
SM 33 B830
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT Rev. 09/2006
1.9.2 UPPER TRAY MOTORS
B830R901.BMP
{ Upper Tray Exit Motor
| Upper Tray Junction Gate Motor
Upper Tray Exit Motor
⇒
B830R910.BMP

[A] Motor bracket ( x2, x1) [A]
[B] Upper tray exit motor ( x2, Timing belt x1)
[B]
B830 34 SM
Upper Tray Junction Gate Motor

• Rear cover ( 1.1.4) [A]
[A] Upper tray junction gate motor( x2, = x1)
B830R911.BMP
Finisher
B830
SM 35 B830
1.9.3 PRE-STACK MOTORS
{ |
B830R902.BMP
The photograph above shows the main control board removed ( x4, x All).
{ Pre-Stack Transport Motor
| Pre-Stack Junction Gate Motor
} Pre-Stack Stopper Motor
Pre-Stack Transport Motor

• Main control board bracket
( x4, x All, = x8)
• Motor unit ( x2, x1)
[A] Pre-stack transport motor ( x2)
[A]
B830R920.BMP
B830 36 SM
Pre-Stack Junction Gate Motor

• Main control board bracket
( x4, x All, = x8)
[A] Pre-stack junction gate motor ( x2, = x1, x1)
[A
B830R921.BMP
Pre-Stack Stopper Motor

• Main control board bracket ( x4, x All, = x8)
Finisher
[B]
B830
[A] Pre-stack stopper motor ( x2, = x1, x1)
[A]
B830R922.BMP
SM 37 B830
1.9.4 PUNCH MOTOR
B830R901.BMP
{ Punch Motor
Punch Motor
[A] Punch motor bracket ( x3, = x2, x1,
[A]
Timing belt x1)
[B] Punch motor ( x2)
[B]
B830R925.BMP
B830 38 SM
1.9.5 STAPLE MOTORS

*
Finisher
B830R901.BMP
B830
{ Staple Junction Gate Motor
Staple Junction Gate Motor

[A] Staple junction gate motor ( x2, = x1, x1)
[A]
B830R930.BMP
SM 39 B830
Stapler Exit Motor
B830R931.BMP

B830R932.BMP
{ Stapler Exit Motor
• Main control board bracket ( x4, = x 8, x All)

1. Remove the stapler exit motor { ( x2 , , x2, Timing belt x1)
B830 40 SM
SERVICE TABLES
2. SERVICE TABLES
For details about 3000-Sheet Finisher B830 SP codes, please refer to “5. Service
Tables” in the main machine service manual.
2.1 DIP SWITCHES

DIP SW100
This DIP SW100 settings are for designer and factory use only. Do not change
them.
DIP SW 101: 1 to 4
DPS100
Description
1 2 3 4
0 0 0 0 Default
1 0 0 0 Free run: 135 ppm (649 mm/s) A4 LEF, 5 sheets
0 1 0 0 Proof tray free run for durability testing: proof tray + punch +
junction gate operation + proof tray output.:
Finisher
0 0 1 0 Shift free run: Shift mode simulation 136 ppm (649 mm/s) A4
B830
SEF, 5 sheets, continuous punching 110 ppm (515mm/s)
0 0 0 1 Sensor check before shipping, lowering the tray before shipping.
DFU. Do not change.
2.2 TEST POINTS

100 to 110
No. Label Monitored Signal Comment
TP100 (5V) +5 V Used for sensor point testing,
TP101 (GND) Ground lowering the tray to shipping
TP102 (RXD) RXD position. DFU.
TP103 (TXD) TXD
2.3 FUSES
No. Function
FU100 Protects 24 V.
SM 41 B830
DETAILS
3. DETAILS
3.1 UPPER TRAY AND STAPLER JUNCTION GATES
Upper Tray Mode
[B]
[A]
B830D506B.WMF
Sort/Stack Mode Staple Mode [D]
[C]
[B]
[C]
B830D505B.WMF B830D507B.WMF
Depending on the finishing mode, the copies are directed up, straight through, or
down by the combinations of open and closed junction gates.
Selected Operation Mode

Solenoid/Gate
Upper Tray Sort/Stack Staple
[A] Upper tray junction gate motor ON Off Off
[B] Upper tray junction gate OPEN Closed Closed
[C] Stapler junction gate Closed Closed OPEN
[D] Stapler junction gate motor Off Off ON
B830 42 SM
DETAILS
3.2 PAPER PRE-STACKING
2 2 2 2
1 1
3 3 3 3
B830D901A
B830D901A.WMF
[A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F] [G]
Sequence 1
The first three sheets of each job feed to trays { Æ | Æ } ([A], [B], [C]), then the
first three sheets feed together to the staple tray [D].
Sequence 2
Finisher
B830
Thereafter, the remaining sheets feed to trays | Æ } ([E], [F]), then the two sheets
feed together to the staple tray [G]. Sequence 2 continues until the end of the job.
Junction gate mechanism:
• Three junction gates at the top of the pre-stack tray send the sheet of paper
down path , , or .
• The pre-stack junction gate motor controls the junction gates.
• The pre-stack junction gate HP sensor detects when the junction gates are at
home position.
• The pre stack paper sensor – left detects paper jams in path .
• The pre stack paper sensor – right detects paper jams in path .
Stopper mechanism:
• The pre-stack stopper releases the three sheets of paper from the pre-stack tray
after the previous set is stapled.
• The pre-stack stopper motor controls the stopper at the bottom of the tray.
• The pre-stack stopper HP sensor detects when the stopper is at home position.
SM 43 B830
DETAILS
3.3 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING

[C] [B]
[A]
[G]
[F]
[E]
[D]
[J]

[I]

[H] B830D508.WMF
In the staple mode, as every sheet of paper arrives in the jogger unit, it is vertically
and horizontally aligned, then the staple edge is pressed flat to ensure the edge of
the stack is aligned correctly for stapling.
Vertical Paper Alignment: About 60 ms after the trailing edge of the copy passes
the staple tray entrance sensor [A], the positioning roller motor [B] is energized to
push the positioning roller [C] into contact with the paper. The positioning roller and
alignment brush roller [D] rotate to push the paper back and align the trailing edge
of the paper against the stack stopper [E].
Horizontal Paper Alignment: When the print key is pressed, the jogger motor [F]
turns on and the jogger fences [G] move to the wait position about 7.2 mm wider
than the selected paper size on both sides. When the trailing edge of the paper
passes the staple tray entrance sensor, the jogger motor moves the jogger fences
3.7 mm towards the paper. Next, the jogger motor turns on again for 3.5 mm for the
horizontal paper alignment then goes back to the wait position.
Paper Stack Correction: After the paper is aligned in the stapler tray, the left [H],
center [I], and right [J] stack plate motors switch on briefly and drive the front stack,
center stack, and rear stack plates against the edge of the stack to flatten the edge
completely against the staple tray for stapling. When the next copy paper turns on
the stapler entrance sensor, the stack plate motors turn on and return to their home
positions. The home positions are detected by stack plate HP sensors , , .
B830 44 SM
DETAILS
3.4 STAPLING
|
2

5
}
3
~
4
Finisher
B830
{1

B830D004.WMF
B830D005.WMF
Here is the operation sequence for jogging and stapling:

① The lower jogger fence lifts to receive the sheets.
② The top fence moves down, to the horizontal position.
③ A sheet of paper goes into the stapler tray.
④ The positioning roller turns when each sheet is fed to the stapler tray.
⑤ Each sheet is fed down against the lower jogger fence to align the bottom edge.
⑥ After the set number of sheets come in, the top fence motor switches on and lowers
the top fence against the top of the stack. This aligns the stack for stapling.
⑦ The bottom fence motor lowers the aligned stack to the stapling position.
⑧ The stapler staples the stack.
SM 45 B830
DETAILS
3.5 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT
[A]
[B]
B830D513.WMF
[C]
Side-to-Side
The stapler motor [A] moves the stapler [B] from side to side. After the start key is
pressed, the stapler moves from its home position to the stapling position.
If two-staple-position mode is selected, for the first stack the stapler moves to the
rear stapling position first, staples, moves to the front position, staples and waits at
the front. For the second stack, the stapler staples the front corner first, then moves
to the rear corner and staples.
NOTE: For continuous stapling jobs, the corners are stapled rear then front for the
odd number stacks and stapled front then rear for even number stacks.
After the job is completed, the stapler returns to its home position. This is detected
by the stapler HP sensor [C].
B830 46 SM
DETAILS
[E]
[D]
[A]
[B] B830D514.WMF
B830D515.WMF
[C]
Rotation (1)
Finisher
B830
In the oblique staple position mode, the stapler rotation motor [A] rotates the
stapler unit [B] 45° to counterclockwise after it moves to the stapling position.
Rotation (2)
When the staple end condition arises, the stapler motor moves the stapler to the
front and the stapler rotation motor rotates the stapler unit to clockwise to remove
the staple cartridge [C]. This allows the user to add new staples.
Once the staples have been installed, and the front door closed, the stapler unit
returns to its home position.
Sensors
Two sensors [D] and [E] detect the angle of the stapler. There are three positions:
horizontal, 45 degrees, 75 degrees.
SM 47 B830
DETAILS
3.6 STAPLER
[A] [E]
[D]
[B]
[F]
[C]
B830D516.WMF B830D522.WMF
[H]
[G]
When the stapler cartridge is locked and in position, actuator [A] deactivates the
cartridge set sensor [B] and the stapler is ready for operation.
When aligned copies are brought to the stapling position by the positioning roller
and jogger fences, the staple hammer motor [C] starts stapling.
During stapling, the stapler trims off the excess length of the staples. This length of
the trimmings depends on the number of copies in the set. They will be very small
for a stack containing 100 sheets.
The staple trimmings drop into the trap door [D] inside the stapler. When the
stapler unit returns to its home position, solenoid {E} energizes opens the trap door.
The staple trimmings drop into the staple trimmings hopper [F].
The staple trimmings hopper descends as it fills, until actuator [G] activates the
staple trimmings hopper full sensor [H]. A message asks the user to empty the
staple trimmings.
B830 48 SM
DETAILS
[C]
[B]
[E]
[A]
B830D518.WMF
[D]
Finisher
B830
B830D517.WMF
The stapler has a staple end sensor [A] and cartridge set sensor [B]. When the
staple cartridge is inserted, it pushes the actuator [C] into the gap of the cartridge
set sensor. This tells the machine the stapler is ready for operation.
When a staple end or no cartridge condition is detected, a message is displayed
advising the operator to install a staple cartridge. If this condition is detected during
a copy job, the indication will appear, and the copy job will stop.
The staple cartridge has a clinch area [D] where jammed staples collect. The
operator can remove the jammed staples from the clinch area by raising and
lowering bracket lever [E].
SM 49 B830
DETAILS
3.7 FEED-OUT
[G] [D]
[A]
[B] [E]
[H]
[C] [F]
B830D920.WMF
[I]
B830D512.WMF
After the copies have been stapled, the stack feed-out motor [A] starts.
The pawl [B] on the stack feed-out belt [C] transports the set of stapled copies up
and feeds it to the shift tray exit roller [D].
When stapling starts, the exit guide motor [E] opens the upper exit guide [F], which
includes the upper shift tray exit roller [G], in order to feed out the leading edge of
the copy set smoothly.
The exit guide motor turns on again at the prescribed time after stapling finishes,
and the upper exit guide plate is lowered. Then the shift tray exit roller takes over
the stack feed-out.
The on-off timing of the exit guide motor is detected by the exit guide open sensor
[H].
The stack-feed-out motor turns off when the pawl actuates the stack feed-out belt
home position sensor [I].
B830 50 SM
DETAILS
3.8 PAPER EXIT STACKING
[A]
[B]
[F] [E]
[C]
[D]
[G] [H] [I]
B830D524.WMF
Finisher
B830
The drag roller assembly [A] is fastened to a plate [B] on a shaft by a spring [C].
The cam [D], in contact with the bottom of the plate, is connected to the drag drive
motor [E] via a timing belt.
The drag drive motor and timing belt rotate the cam against the bottom of the plate
to move the rollers forward and back with each sheet ejected onto the shift tray.
The drag roller motor [F] drives the shaft [G] that rotates the drag rollers counter-
clockwise as the rollers move back. The simultaneous rotation and backward
movement of the roller assembly pulls each sheet back toward the copier to align
the edges of the stack on the shift tray.
The actuator [H] is mounted on the cam and rotating with both rotating clockwise)
and detects the roller assembly home position when the actuator leaves the gap of
the drag drive HP sensor [I] and signals the machine that the rollers are at the
home position. The machine uses this information to control paper feed timing and
confirm that the mechanism is operating correctly. The cam and actuator make one
complete rotation for every sheet fed out of the machine onto the shift tray.
SM 51 B830
DETAILS
3.9 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION

3.9.1 OVERVIEW
[C] [B]
[A]
[D]
B830D010.WMF
The movement of the shift tray is controlled by four sensors , ,, and and a
feeler [A] with two actuators [B] and [C].
• The notched actuator [B] is used with sensors and .
• The flat actuator [C] is used with sensor .
• Sensor is provided with its own actuator [D].
The operation mode determines which parts are used to control the movement of
the shift tray.
Sensor Names
No. Name
Paper Height Sensor – Staple Mode
Paper Height Sensor – Standby Mode
Paper Height Sensor – Z-Fold Full
Paper Height Sensor – Shift/Z-Fold
B830 52 SM
DETAILS

Finisher
B830
B830D010.WMF
Sensors and Operation Modes

Mode Function
Shift Sensor detects the amount of paper on the shift tray in shift mode to
control operation of the tray lift motor.
Staple Sensor detects the amount of paper on the shift tray in staple mode
to control the tray lift motor.
Standby • When the machine is turned on, Sensor is used to position the tray
at the standby position and keep it there when the shift is not in use
or when the upper tray (proof tray) is used.
• If the shift tray is not attached to the machine (if it has been removed
for servicing, for example), if the machine is switched on the tray
mount will push up the feeler and switch off Sensor to switch off
the tray lift motor. (Sensor cannot operate if the tray has been
removed.)
Z-Fold, Z-Fold • Sensor detects the height of the tray when the output includes Z-
Staple folded sheets with and without stapling.
• Sensor detects when the tray is full when the output includes Z-
folded sheets with and without stapling.
These operations are described in more detail in the following sections.
SM 53 B830
DETAILS
3.9.2 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION: STAND-BY MODE

[B] [A]

B830D010.WMF
Standby Mode
When the machine is switched on:
1. The shift tray lift motor switches on and lowers the tray.
2. The feeler [A] descends and raises the hooked actuator [B] out of the gap of
Sensor and switches Sensor ON.
3. When Sensor switches ON this reverses the shift tray motor.
4. The shift tray motor raises the shift tray and pushes up the feeler, the actuator
descends into the gap of Sensor , and switches Sensor OFF
5. When Sensor switches OFF, this stops the shift tray lift motor with the shift
tray at the standby position.
This sequence repeats every time the machine is powered on.
Sensor also switches off the shift tray lift motor when the machine is switched on
with the shift tray removed for servicing. When the machine is switched on without
the shift tray attached to the side of the finisher:
1. The shift tray mount will push the feeler [A] up until the actuator [B] enters the
gap of Sensor and switches Sensor 2 ON.
2. When Sensor switches ON this switches the shift tray motor OFF and stops
the tray.
NOTE: Sensor cannot operate with the shift tray removed so Sensor is
used to switch off the shift tray motor and stop the shift tray mount.
B830 54 SM
DETAILS
3.9.3 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION: SHIFT MODE
[A]
Finisher
B830
[B]
B830D010.WMF
Sensor and its feeler [A] and actuator [B] control the movement of the shift tray
when paper is output in the sort/stack mode:
1. Paper is output to the tray.
2. As the height of the stack increases, this pushes up the feeler [A].
3. When the actuator [B] of the ascending feeler actuates Sensor , this switches
the sensor OFF and switches the tray lift motor ON.
4. The tray lift motor lowers the tray until the feeler descends far enough to raise
the actuator out of the gap of Sensor .
5. When the actuator leaves the gap of Sensor , this switches Sensor ON,
switches the motor OFF, and stops the tray.
The sequence repeats until the end of the job or until the tray becomes full.
( 3.9.6)
SM 55 B830
DETAILS
3.9.4 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION: STAPLE MODE
[B]

[A]
B830D010A.WMF
Sensor , feeler [A] and its notched actuator [B] control the movement of the shift
tray when paper is output to the shift tray in the staple mode:
1. A stapled stack is output to the tray.
2. The tray lift motor switches ON and lowers the tray the prescribed distance.
3. Next, the tray lift motor raises the tray and feeler [A] until actuator [B] leaves the
gap of Sensor .
4. When the actuator [b] leaves the gap of sensor , this switches Sensor OFF
and switches the tray lift motor OFF.
This sequence repeats every time a stack is output to the tray until the end of the
job or until the tray becomes full. ( 3.9.6)
B830 56 SM
DETAILS
3.9.5 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION: Z-FOLDED PAPER
[C]
[D]
[A]
[B]
Finisher
B830
B830D010.WMF
Sensor and its feeler [A] and actuator [B], and Sensor with its feeler [C] and
flat actuator [D] control the movement of the shift tray when Z-folded paper is
output to the shift tray.
1. Z-folded paper is output to the tray.
2. As the height of the stack increases, this pushes up feeler [A] of Sensor .
3. When the actuator [B] of the ascending feeler enters the gap of Sensor , this
switches the sensor OFF and switches the tray lift motor ON.
4. The tray lift motor lowers the tray until the feeler descends far enough to raise
the actuator out of the gap of Sensor .
5. When the actuator leaves the gap of Sensor , this switches Sensor ON,
switches the motor OFF, and stops the tray.
6. Steps 1 to 5 repeat until the top of the paper stack pushes feeler [C] up and
actuator [C] into the gap of Sensor .
7. When the actuator enters the gap of Sensor , this switches the sensor off and
switches Sensor OFF, signals that the tray is full and stops the job.
SM 57 B830
DETAILS
3.9.6 SHIFT TRAY FULL AND NEAR-FULL DETECTION
[A]
[D]
B830D010.WMF
[C]
[B]
This machine has two shift tray full sensors: the shift tray full sensor (large paper)
[A] for B4 and larger, and the shift tray full sensor [B] for small paper (smaller than
B4).
NOTE: Sensor [C] (S20) is the near-full sensor.
When the actuator [D] enters sensor [A] while using large paper (about 1500
sheets are on the tray), a message will be displayed and copying will stop.
When the actuator [D] enters sensor [B] while using small paper (about 3,000
sheets are on the tray), a message will be displayed and copying will stop.
B830 58 SM
DETAILS
3.10 SHIFT TRAY SIDE-TO-SIDE MOVEMENT
[D]
[A] [F]
[G]

[C]
[E]

[B] B830D520.WMF
Finisher
B830
In sort/stack mode, the shift tray [A] moves from side to side to separate the sets of
copies.
The horizontal position of the shift tray is controlled by the shift motor [B] and shift
gear disk [C]. After one set of copies is made and delivered to the shift tray, the
shift motor turns on, driving the shift gear disk and the shaft [D]. The end fence [E]
is positioned by the shaft, creating the side-to-side movement.
The next set of copies is then delivered. The motor turns on, repeating the same
process and moving the tray back to the previous position.
The disk is rotated alternately clockwise and counter-clockwise through an arc of
180 degrees.
The notches cut into the shift gear disk control the operation of the shift motor,
using shift tray half-turn sensors [F] and [G].
If the job ends with the disk at with only one sensor deactivated, the motor
rotates the disk to the position where both sensors are deactivated. This is the
home position.
SM 59 B830
DETAILS
3.11 PUNCH UNIT

3.11.1 PUNCH UNIT DRIVE
[A] [C]
[B]
[D]
[E]
B830D102.WMF
The punch unit makes 2 or 3 holes at the trailing edge of the paper. The number of
holes depends on a selection made on the operation panel.
The cam [A] has 2 punches on one side and 3 punches on the other, and is turned
by the punch motor [B]. The punch motor turns on immediately after the trailing
edge of the paper passes the entrance sensor. The punches on the cam rotate
downward and punch holes in the paper.
After punching a sheet of paper, the cam returns to home position and stops.
Home position depends on whether 2 holes or 3 holes are being made, so there
are two punch HP sensors. Punch HP sensor 1 [C] is used when 2-hole punching
is selected, and punch HP sensor 2 [D] is used when 3-hole punching is selected.
When the cut-out [E] enters the slot of the punch HP in use (sensor 1 or 2-hole
punching) the motor stops.
The knob (not shown) on the front end of the punch unit can be turned in either
direction to clear paper jammed in the punch unit.
B830 60 SM
DETAILS
3.11.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION
[A]
[B]
[C]
Finisher
B830
B830D103.WMF
Punch waste is collected in the punch waste hopper [A] positioned under the punch
unit.
When the level of the punch waste in the hopper rises as far as the hole [B] in the
hopper, the punch hopper full sensor [C] turns on, stops the job, and triggers a
message on the operation to indicate that the hopper is full and must be removed
and emptied.
The job resumes automatically after the hopper is emptied and returned to the
finisher.
The punch hopper full sensor also functions as the hopper set sensor. When the
hopper is not in the finisher, or if it is not inserted completely, the spring loaded
sensor arm rotates up and to the right with the punch waste sensor away from the
hole in the hopper holder and a message is displayed. The message in this case is
the same as the hopper full message.
SM 61 B830
DETAILS

3.12.1 JOGGER UNIT MECHANICAL LAYOUT
1 2
B830D003.WMF
1. Shift Tray Jogger Retraction Motor

2. Shift Tray Jogger Motor Timing Belt
3. Shift Tray Jogger Motor
4. Shift Tray Jogger Fence Timing Belt
5. Shift Tray Jogger Fences
6. Shift Tray Jogger HP Sensor
7. Shift Tray Jogger Lift HP Sensor
B830 62 SM
DETAILS
3.12.2 JOGGER UNIT DRIVE
[C]
[H]
[B] [A]
[D]
[I]
[J]
[G]
[F]
[E]
Finisher
B830
B830D002.WMF
After the first sheet exits, the shift tray jogger motor [A] switches on and rotates the
jogger timing belt [B], gear [C] and jogger fence timing belt [D]. This closes the
jogger fences [E] against the sides of the first sheet to align it and stops. Next, the
motor reverses to open the fences for the next sheet. The jogger motor alternates
its direction of rotation to open and close the jogger fences. The timing is
prescribed by the width of the paper selected for the job.
At the end of the job, the actuator [F] activates the shift tray jogger HP sensor [G]
which shuts off the jogger motor and starts the jogger fence retraction motor [H].
The jogger fence retraction motor rotates the shaft which raises the jogger fences
and lowers the actuator [I] into the slot of the jogger fence retraction HP sensor [J].
The activated sensor turns off the jogger fence retraction motor and the jogger
fences remain at the raised position.
SM 63 B830
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
4. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

4.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1 2 3 4 5
6
7
21
20 8
9
19
10
18
17 11
16
15 12
13
14
B830V500.WMF
1. Upper Tray 12. Stack Plate

2. Middle Transport Rollers 13. Stapler
3. Upper Tray Exit Roller 14. Staple Trimmings Hopper
4. Upper Transport Rollers 15. Alignment Brush Roller
5. Upper Tray Junction Gate 16. Positioning Roller
6. Stapler Junction Gate 17. Stack Feed-out Belt
7. Entrance Rollers 18. Shift Tray Drive Belt
8. Punch Unit 19. Lower Transport Rollers
9. Pre-stack Junction Gates (x2) 20. Shift Tray
10. Punch Waste Hopper 21. Shift Tray Exit Roller
11. Pre-stack Tray
B830 64 SM
4.2 DRIVE LAYOUT

4.2.1 MAIN DRIVE
1 2 3 4
Finisher
B830
5
B830V503.WMF
1. Upper Transport Motor

2. Upper Tray Exit Motor
3. Shift Tray Lift Motor
4. Shift Tray Exit Motor
5. Stapler Exit Motor
6. Pre-Stack Transport Motor
7. Lower Transport Motor
SM 65 B830
4.2.2 STAPLING TRAY DRIVE
1 2 3
10 9 8 B830V504.WMF
1. Stack Feed-Out Belt Motor

2. Jogger Motor
3. Top Fence Motor
4. Positioning Roller Drive Motor
5. Positioning Roller Motor
6. Stack Plate Motor (Rear)
7. Stapler Movement Motor
8. Stack Plate Motor (Center)
9. Stack Plate Motor (Front)
10. Stapler Rotation Motor
B830 66 SM
4.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
1 2 3 4
5
24
23
6
22
21
7
20
19 8
9
18
10
17
Finisher
B830
16
11
15 14 13 12 B830V502D.WMF
1. Top Fence HP Sensor 13. Stack Plate Motor (Front)

2. Top Fence Motor 14. Staple Trimming Chute Solenoid
3. Positioning Roller Drive Motor 15. Stapler Rotation Motor
4. Positioning Roller Motor ) 16. Stapler HP Sensor (Front/Rear)
5. Positioning Roller HP Sensor 17. Stapler Rotation Sensor 2
6. Bottom Fence HP Sensor 18. Stapler Rotation Sensor 1
7. Stack Plate HP Sensor (Rear) 19. Stack Feed-Out Belt HP Sensor
8. Stack Plate Motor (Rear) 20. Staple Tray Full Sensor
9. Stack Plate HP Sensor (Center) 21. Bottom Fence Motor
10. Stack Plate Motor (Center) 22. Jogger HP Sensor
11. Staple Hammer Motor 23. Jogger Motor
12. Stack Plate HP Sensor (Front) 24. Stack Feed-Out Belt Motor
SM 67 B830
1 2 3 4
5
15
14
6
13 7
12 8
11
9
B830V502E.WMF
10
1. Exit Guide HP Sensor 9. Staple Trimmings Hopper Set Sensor

2. Exit Guide Motor 10. Staple Trimmings Hopper Full Sensor
3. Upper Tray Full Sensor 11. Stapler Tray Exit Sensor
4. Upper Tray Exit Sensor 12. Pre-Stack Tray Paper Sensor (Right)
5. Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor 13. Front Door Safety Switch
6. Entrance Sensor 14. Shift Tray Exit Sensor 2
7. Punch-Out Hopper Full Sensor 15. Shift Tray Exit Sensor 1
8. Pre-Stack Tray Paper Sensor (Left)
B830 68 SM
1 2 3 4 5
15
14
13
12
11
10
Finisher
B830
8
7
6
B830V502F.WMF
1. Upper Transport Motor 9. Pre-Stack Junction Gate HP

2. Stapler Junction Gate HP Sensor Sensor
3. Upper Tray Exit Motor 10. Pre-Stack Junction Gate Motor )
4. Shift Tray Lift Motor 11. Pre-Stack Transport Motor
5. Shift Tray Exit Motor 12. Upper Tray Junction Gate Motor
6. Lower Transport Motor 13. Upper Tray Junction Gate HP
7. Pre-Stack Stopper HP Sensor Sensor
8. Pre-Stack Stopper Motor 14. Stapler Junction Gate Motor
15. Punch Motor
SM 69 B830
4.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT SUMMARY

Motors
No. Name Description
M01 Shift Tray Exit Motor Drives the exit roller for the shift tray.
M02 Shift Tray Lift Motor Moves the shift tray up or down.
M03 Exit Guide Motor Opens and closes the upper exit guide. When stapling starts, the
exit guide motor opens the upper exit guide, which includes the
upper shift tray exit roller, in order to feed out the leading edge of
the copy set smoothly. The exit guide motor turns on again a
certain time after stapling is complete, and the upper exit guide
plate is lowered. Then the shift tray exit roller takes over the stack
feed-out. The on-off timing of the exit guide motor is detected by
the exit guide HP sensor.
M04 Stapler Exit Motor Drives the rollers that feed stapled stacks out of the stapling unit.
M05 Upper Tray Exit Motor Drives the rollers that output paper to the proof tray (top tray).
M06 Shift Motor Moves the shift tray from side to side.
M07 Upper Tray Junction Gate Operates the upper tray junction gate.
Motor
M08 Stapler Junction Gate Motor Operates the staple junction gate that directs paper into the
stapling path.
M09 Pre-Stack Junction Gate Operates the pre-stack junction gates that direct paper into path 1,
Motor 2, or 3 of the pre-stack unit.
M10 Pre-Stack Transport Motor Drives the rollers that feed paper into the pre-stack paper paths.
M11 Pre-Stack Stopper Motor Controls the stopper that stops the sheets in the pre-stack unit and
then releases them to the staple tray.
M12 Positioning Roller Motor Moves the positioning roller into contact with the paper.
M13 Positioning Roller Drive Rotates the positioning roller.
Motor
M14 Drag Drive Motor Extends the sponge roller that drags the stapled stack on the shift
tray toward the finisher so that the edge of the stack is aligned
against the back of the shift tray.
M15 Drag Roller Motor Rotates the drag roller counter-clockwise to pull the ejected paper
toward the machine so that the edge of the stack on the shift tray
is aligned against the back of the shift tray.
M16 Jogger Motor Moves the jogger fences of the stapling tray.
M17 Stack Feed-Out Belt Motor Drives the stack feed-out belt which lifts the stapled stack and
feeds it out of the finisher. The stack-feed-out motor turns off when
the pawl actuates the stack feed-out belt home position sensor.
M18 Stack Plate Motor (Center) Presses down the center of the edge for stapling.
M19 Stack Plate Motor (Front) Presses down the front corner of the edge for stapling.
M20 Stack Plate Motor (Rear) Presses down the rear corner of the edge for stapling.
M21 Stapler Movement Motor Moves the staple unit side-to-side.
M22 Stapler Rotation Motor Rotates the stapler 45 degrees for oblique stapling.
M23 Staple Hammer Motor Drives the staple hammer.
M24 Top Fence Motor After the specified number of sheets has been fed, this motor
lowers the top fence against the leading edges of the sheets to
align them for stapling and then raises the top fence to its home
position after stapling.
Operates the top fence that jogs pre-stacked paper vertically (in
the direction of paper feed).
M25 Bottom Fence Motor After the specified number of sheets has been fed, this motor
lowers the bottom fence to position the stack for stapling and then
raises the bottom fence to its home position after stapling.
M27 Upper Transport Motor Feeds paper in the upper transport area. Drives the rollers that
transport paper toward the proof tray (top tray).
B830 70 SM
Motors
M28 Lower Transport Motor Drives the rollers that transport paper in the shift and stapling
paper path.
M29 Punch Motor Drives the punch shaft and roller.
M30 Shift Tray Jogger Motor Drives the shift tray jogger fences against the sides of the sheets
to align the stack, then reverses to return them to the home
position
M31 Shift Tray Jogger Retraction Raises the shift tray jogger fences after aligning the stack, then
Motor reverses and lowers them to them to the home position.
PCBs
PCB Main Board (Output Jogger) Controls operation of the shift and output jogger mechanisms.
PCB Main Board Controls the finisher and communicates with the copier.
Sensors
S01 Entrance Sensor Detects the copy paper entering the finisher and checks for
misfeeds.
S02 Upper Tray Exit Sensor Checks for misfeeds at the upper tray.
S03 Upper Tray Full Sensor Detects when the upper tray is full.
S04 Shift Tray Exit Sensor 1 Controls the output timing of stapled stacks and detects jams.
Finisher
S05 Shift Tray Exit Sensor 2 Controls the timing of paper in the shift path and detects paper
B830
jams.
S06 Exit Guide HP Sensor Detects whether the guide plate is opened or not.
S07 Paper Height Sensor – Detects the height of the tray when the machine is turned on to
Standby Mode position the tray at the standby position.
S08 Paper Height Sensor – Detects the height of the paper output on the shift tray and adjusts
Staple Mode the height of the tray in the staple mode.
S09 Paper Height Sensor – Z- Detects the height of the paper output on the shift tray and signals
Fold Full when the tray is full when Z-folded paper is output to the shift tray.
S10 Paper Height Sensor – Detects the amount of paper on the shift tray 1) in shift
Shift/Z-Fold mode to control operation of the tray lift motor, and 2) when
Z-folded paper is output to the shift tray.
S11 Drag Drive HP Sensor Controls the push and pull movement of the drag roller when it
extends and drags paper back against the back of the shift tray to
keep the edge of the stack aligned on the shift tray.
S12 Shift Tray Half-Turn Sensor Detects whether the shift tray is at either the front or back position.
1 Controls the side-to-side movement of the shift tray. (This pair of
sensors is used to detect the positions of the leading and trailing
edges of the sheets controls operation of the shift mechanism.)
S13 Shift Tray Half-Turn Sensor Detects whether the shift tray is at either the front or back position.
2 Controls the side-to-side movement of the shift tray.
S14 Upper Tray Junction Gate Detects the upper tray junction gate at its home position.
HP Sensor
S15 Stapler Junction Gate HP Detects the staple junction gate at its home position.
Sensor
S16 Pre-Stack Junction Gate Detects the pre-stack junction gate mechanism at its home
HP Sensor position.
S17 Pre-Stack Tray Paper Detects paper feed in the right side of the pre-stack unit and
Sensor (Right) detects jams.
S18 Shift Tray Full Sensor Detects when the shift tray is full for paper smaller than B4. The
tray is at its lower limit.
S19 Shift Tray Full Sensor Detects when the shift tray is full for large size paper (B4 or
(Large Paper) larger).
S20 Shift Tray Near-Full Sensor Detects when the shift tray is nearly full.
S21 Stapler Tray Exit Sensor Detects jams at the staple tray exit.
S22 Staple Trimmings Hopper Detects when the staple trimmings hopper is full.
SM 71 B830
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION Rev. 09/2006
Sensors
Full Sensor
S23 Staple Trimmings Hopper Detects if the hopper that holds stapling trimmings is set correctly
Set Sensor or incorrectly.
S24 Pre-Stack Stopper HP Detects the pre-stack stopper mechanism at its home position.
Sensor
S25 Pre-Stack Tray Paper Detects paper feed in the right side of the pre-stack unit. Controls
Sensor (Left) the release timing of the pre-stack stopper, and starts the pre-
stack transport motor. Also detects paper jams.
S26 Stapler Tray Entrance Detects a paper jam if there is paper at the entrance of the stapler
Sensor unit junction gate when the machine is turned on or after the door
is closed.
S27 Stack Feed-Out Belt HP Detects the home position of the stack feed-out belt.
Sensor
S28 Staple Tray Full Sensor Detects paper in the stapler tray.
S29 Jogger HP Sensor Detects the home position of the jogger fence in the stapler tray.
S30 Bottom Fence HP Sensor Detects the bottom fence at its home position.
S31 Top Fence HP Sensor Detects the top fence at its home position.
S32 Positioning Roller HP Detects the home position of the positioning roller.
Sensor
S33 Stack Plate HP Sensor Detects the home position of the center stack plate.
(Center)
S34 Stack Plate HP Sensor Detects the home position of the front stack plate.
(Front)
S35 Stack Plate HP Sensor Detects the home position of the rear stack plate.
(Rear)
S36 Stapler HP Sensor Detects the home position of the staple unit for side-to-side
(Front/Rear) movement.
S37 Stapler Rotation Sensor 1 Paired with Stapler Rotation Sensor 2. .This sensor pair controls
the positioning of the corner stapler for the horizontal, 45o angle,
o
⇒
and 75 angle stapling positions.
S38 Stapler Rotation Sensor 2 Paired with Stapler Rotation Sensor 1 .This sensor pair controls
o
the positioning of the corner stapler for the horizontal and 45
angle stapling positions.
S39 Punch-out Hopper Full Detects when the punch-out hopper is full and detects when the
Sensor punch tray is set.
S40 Punch HP Sensor 1 Detects the cam home position for the 2-hole punch. After
punching a sheet of paper, the cam returns to home position and
stops. Home position depends on whether 2 holes or 3 holes are
being made, so there are two punch HP sensors. Punch HP
sensor 1 is used when 2-hole punching is selected, and punch HP
sensor 2 is used when 3-hole punching is selected. When the cut-
out enters the slot of the punch HP in use (sensor 1 or 2-hole
punching) the motor stops.
S41 Punch HP Sensor 2 Detects the cam home position for 3-hole punch. After punching a
sheet of paper, the cam returns to home position and stops. Home
position depends on whether 2 holes or 3 holes are being made,
so there are two punch HP sensors. Punch HP sensor 1 is used
when 2-hole punching is selected, and punch HP sensor 2 is used
when 3-hole punching is selected. When the cut-out enters the
slot of the punch HP in use (sensor 1 or 2-hole punching) the
motor stops.
S42 Shift Tray Jogger HP Detects the actuator on the rear shift tray jogger fence and
Sensor switches off the shift tray jogger motor, and signals the machine to
turn on the shift tray jogger retraction motor to raise the fences at
the end of a job.
S43 Shift Tray Jogger Detects the jogger fences of the shift tray jogger unit at their home
Retraction HP Sensor positions.
B830 72 SM
Solenoids
SOL Staple Trimming Chute Opens and closes the trap door that drops staple trimmings into
Solenoid the stapling trimmings hopper.
Switches
SW Front Door Safety Switch Detects when the front door is open. The finisher does not
operate until the front door has been closed.
SW Emergency Stop Switch Switches the current job off and on to allow time for the operator
to remove paper from the shift tray.
SW Shift Tray Upper Limit Switch Cuts the power to the shift tray lift motor when the shift tray
position is at its upper limit.
Finisher
B830
SM 73 B830
MULTI BYPASS TRAY BY5000
B833
B833 MULTI BYPASS TRAY BY5000 REVISION HISTORY
None
MULTI BYPASS TRAY B833
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 OPENING THE BYPASS TRAY ................................................................... 1
1.2 BYPASS TRAY COVERS ............................................................................ 2
1.3 TRAY LIFT SWITCH, FEED TRAY .............................................................. 3
1.4 FEED ROLLERS .......................................................................................... 5
1.5 BYPASS TRAY PCB .................................................................................... 6
1.6 PAPER FEED MOTOR, TRANSPORT MOTOR .......................................... 7
1.7 PAPER FEED AND LIFT SENSORS ........................................................... 8
Sensor Removal ...................................................................................... 8
1.8 PICK-UP SOLENOID ................................................................................... 9
1.9 PAPER WIDTH SWITCH, PAPER END AND
PAPER LENGTH SENSORS ..................................................................... 10
1.10 PAPER HEIGHT SENSORS, LIFT MOTOR............................................. 11
2. DETAILS.........................................................................................12
2.1 TRAY LIFT.................................................................................................. 12
2.2 PAPER FEED............................................................................................. 13
Feed....................................................................................................... 13
Tray Lift.................................................................................................. 13
2.3 PAPER SIZE DETECTION......................................................................... 14
Paper Size Detection Table ................................................................... 15
Selecting the Paper Size for Undetectable Sizes................................... 15
3. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION...........................................16

3.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT .................................................... 16
3.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS................................................................... 17
3.2.1 LAYOUT ............................................................................................ 17
3.2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT SUMMARY ......................................... 18
3.3 DRIVE LAYOUT .......................................................................................... 19
SM i B833

1.1 OPENING THE BYPASS TRAY
[A]
B833R901.WMF
1. Pull in the direction indicated by the arrow at the front left cover.
CAUTION
When moving the LCT with the bypass unit attached, grip and push
the body of the LCT unit. To avoid damaging the bypass tray, never
attempt to push or rotate the assembled units by pulling or pushing
on the bypass tray.
Multi Bypass
B833
Tray
SM 1 B833
1.2 BYPASS TRAY COVERS

[B]
[D]
[A] [C]
B833R004.WMF
1. Open the bypass tray. ( 1.1)

2. Front cover [A] ( x 1).
3. Rear cover [B] ( x 1).
4. Pull off the pick-up roller cover [C].
5. Top cover [D] ( x 2).
B833 2 SM
1.3 TRAY LIFT SWITCH, FEED TRAY
[A]
[C]
[B]
[E] [D]
B833R902.WMF

2. Remove the covers. ( 1.2)
3. Use the tip of a screwdriver to remove the tray lift switch cover [A].
4. Remove the tray lift switch [B] ( x 1, hook x 1, standoff x 1, x 1).
Multi Bypass
5. Disconnect the tray lift switch connector [C].
B833
Tray
6. Disconnect the paper width switch [D] ( x 2, harness clamp x 1).
7. Remove the feed tray [E] ( x 4).
SM 3 B833
8. Pull out the extension tray [A]．

NOTE: The extension tray must be removed
to separate the top and bottom of the
bypass feed tray.
[A]
B833R903.BMP
9. Remove the bottom plate rear right cover [B] [C] [B]
( x1)
10. Remove the bottom plate rear left cover [C]
B833R904.BMP
11. Remove the plate [D] and shaft ( x1, x1).

[D]
12. Separate the top and bottom of the feed tray
( x2, x1).
B833R905.BMP
B833 4 SM
1.4 FEED ROLLERS
[D]
[C]
[E]
[A]
[B]
B833R906.WMF
1. Pull off the pick-up roller cover [A].

2. Pull off the separation roller cover [B].
3. Remove the pick-up roller [C] ( x 1).
4. Remove the feed roller [D] ( x 1).
5. Remove the separation roller [E] ( x 1).
Multi Bypass
NOTE: After re-installing the feed roller, make sure that it rotates clockwise.
B833
6. Reset the PM count to zero for the new rollers. Tray
SM 5 B833
1.5 BYPASS TRAY PCB
[A]
B833R907.BMP
1. Remove the rear cover. ( 1.2)

2. Remove the bypass tray PCB [A] ( x 9, x 2, standoffs x 2).
NOTE: Before disconnecting CN210 and CN211, mark either connector with a
marker to make sure that you re-connect them correctly. The shapes of
these connectors are the same and the wires are the same color.
B833 6 SM
1.6 PAPER FEED MOTOR, TRANSPORT MOTOR
[B]
[A]
DSCN1932.BMP
1. Remove the rear cover. ( 1.2)

2. Remove the paper feed motor [A] ( x3, Spring x1, Timing belt x1, x1)
3. Remove the transport motor [B] ( x3, Spring x1, Timing belt x1, x1)
Multi Bypass
B833
Tray
SM 7 B833
1.7 PAPER FEED AND LIFT SENSORS
[A] [D]
[C]
[B]
B833R920.BMP
Sensor Removal
1. Remove the rear, front, and top covers. ( 1.2)
2. Remove the paper feed bracket [A] (Step x 1, x 1).
3. Remove the paper feed sensor [B] (Hooks x 3, x 1)
4. Remove the lift sensor bracket [C] ( x 1).
5. Remove the lift sensor [D] (Hooks x 3, x 1).
B833 8 SM
1.8 PICK-UP SOLENOID
[A]
B833R921.WMF
1. Remove the rear, front, and top covers. ( 1.2)

2. Remove the pick-up solenoid [A] ( x 2, x 1, harness clamp x 1)
NOTE: When re-installing the solenoid, make sure that the arm of the solenoid is
positioned above and in contact with the plate of the pick-up roller shaft
below. To confirm correct installation, manually move the solenoid to the
left and right. When the solenoid plunger is moved, the pick-up roller
should move up and down smoothly.
Multi Bypass
B833
Tray
SM 9 B833
1.9 PAPER WIDTH SWITCH, PAPER END AND PAPER

LENGTH SENSORS
[E]
[F]
[G]
[C] [B]
[D]
DSCN1924.BMP
[A] B833R922.WMF
1. Remove the feed tray and separate the top and bottom. ( 1.3)
2. Turn over the top half of the feed tray [A] then lay it on a flat surface.
3. Remove the cable cover [B] (Hooks x2)
4. Paper end sensor bracket [C] (Hook x1).
5. Paper end sensor [D] (Hooks x 2, x 1).
6. Paper length sensor bracket [E] (Hook x 1, x 1).
7. Paper length sensor [F] (Hooks x 2, x 1).
8. Paper width switch [G] ( x 1, Harness clamp x 1, x 1).
B833 10 SM
1.10 PAPER HEIGHT SENSORS, LIFT MOTOR
[A] [B]
[C]
[D]
B833R933.BMP
B833R924.BMP

2. Remove the bypass tray covers. ( 1.2)
3. Remove the feed tray. ( 1.3)
Paper Height Sensors
1. Paper Height Sensor 1 [A] (Hooks x 3, x 1)
2. Paper Height Sensor 2 [B] (Hooks x 3, x 1)
3. Paper Height Sensor 3 [C] (Hooks x 3, x 1)
Multi Bypass
B833
Lift Motor Tray
1. Remove screws ( x6) then push lift motor [D] to loosen its frame.
2. Raise the loosened frame slightly to remove the lift motor ( x2, x1)
SM 11 B833
DETAILS
2. DETAILS
2.1 TRAY LIFT
[D] [E]
[C] [F]
[A]
[G]
[B]
B833D901.WMF
When the tray lift switch is pressed, the lift motor [A] switches on and pushes the lift
plate [B] against the bottom of the feed tray until the top of the stack is at the
correct feed position.
NOTE: If there is paper in the bypass tray when the main machine has just been
switched on, the lift motor will turn on and lift the stack to the feed position.
As paper is fed, the pick-up roller [C] lowers until it activates the lift sensor which
switches on the lift motor again to raise the stack to the feed level again. ( 0)
As the bottom plate shaft rotates and raises the bottom plate, the actuator [D]
lowers and activates paper height sensor 1 [E] and then paper height sensor 2 [F]
as the bottom plate continues to rise. With the tray full, the actuator remains upright
and deactivates neither paper height sensor. During continuous feed, the actuator
rotates downward through three positions, deactivating the first sensor, then both
sensors, then only the second sensor. These states are used to report the amount
of paper on the operation panel.
SN1 SN2 Paper Remaining Status

OFF OFF 100% (Full)
ON OFF 90%
ON ON 50%
OFF ON 25%
After the last sheet feeds, the paper end sensor [G] below the feed tray detects
that the tray is empty.
NOTE: When you re-load the tray with paper, be sure to press the tray lift button to
raise the bottom of the tray so the stack is at the correct feed position.
B833 12 SM
DETAILS
2.2 PAPER FEED [F]

[G]
[D] [A]
[C]
[H]
[E]
[B]
B833D003.WMF
Feed
The bypass tray can hold 500 sheets of standard weight paper.
The bypass tray uses the standard FRR (Feed and Reverse Roller) feed system.
Handling Paper> Paper Feed Methods> Forward and Reverse Roller
(FRR)
When the job starts, the feed motor [A] switches on and rotates the pick-up roller
[B]. At the same time, the pick-up solenoid [not shown] switches on and lowers the
pick-up roller. The lift motor [C] switches on to raise the stack until the top of the
stack reaches the correct feed level. At that time, the paper pushes the pick-up
roller down. When the actuator [not shown] goes out of the lift sensor [not shown],
the lift motor stops.
Multi Bypass
The pick-up roller picks up and feeds the first sheet to the feed roller [D] and
separation roller [E]. When the feed sensor [not shown] detects the leading edge of
B833
Tray
the sheet, the pick-up solenoid raises the pick-up roller and the feed roller feeds
the sheet.
NOTE: Unlike the separation rollers in the LCT, the separation roller always
remains in contact with the feed roller above.
The transport motor [F] then feeds the paper into the bypass tray, and the relay
motor [G] feeds the paper out of the bypass tray, and into the machine through the
LCT.
Tray Lift
When the pick-up roller [B] lowers far enough to go into the lift sensor, the lift motor
switches on to raise the bottom plate until the actuator goes out of the lift sensor
again and switches off the lift motor. This movement is repeated to maintain the
correct height of the stack for paper feed.
Actuator [H] is used by the height sensors, to detect the amount of remaining paper.
SM 13 B833
DETAILS
2.3 PAPER SIZE DETECTION
[C] [B]
[A] B833D002.WMF
The side fences [A] can be adjusted to standard and non-standard paper sizes.
Paper size is measured with the paper width switch [B] and the paper length
sensor [C].
When the side fences are moved to match the paper width, four feelers inside the
paper width switch [B] slide along the wiring patterns on the paper width switch
terminal plate. The status of each feeler is read to determine whether it is High (in
contact with a pattern wire) or Low (not in contact with a wire).
The paper length sensor reading (ON or OFF) is used with the paper width reading
to determine the paper size. For more details about how the paper size is
determined, see the paper size detection table on the next page.
The paper end sensor [C] de-activates when the last sheet is fed, reports that the
paper tray is empty, and halts the job.
B833 14 SM
DETAILS
Paper Size Detection Table

Paper Width SW Length Area
Paper Size
1 2 3 4 5 Sensor NA EU
12" x 18" O O
Large 13" x 19" H H H H L L P P
320 x 340 mm P P
A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm L O O
H H H L L
A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm H O O
DLT SEF 11" x 17" L O O
H H H L H
LT LEF 11" x 81/2" H O O
B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm L O O
H H L L H
B5 LEF 257 x 182 mm H O O
A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm P O
L
LT SEF 81/2" x 11" O P
H H L H H
A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm P O
H
HLT LEF 81/2" x 51/2" O P
B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm P P
H L L H H L
F SEF 8" x 13" O O
A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm H L H H H H O O
HLT SEF 51/2 " x 81/2 " L L H H H H O O
B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm P P
A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm O O
L H H H H H
Post- 100 x 148 mm P P
card
Table Key
The paper size switch consists of 5 feelers that slide along the wiring patterns
of the paper width switch terminal plate when the side fences are manually
1, 2, 3, 4,
adjusted to fit the size of the paper loaded in the tray. The H, L status of each
and 5
feeler is determined by whether the feeler is in contact with the wire of a
pattern.
H High (5 V) (Inactive)
Multi Bypass
L Low (0 V) (Active)
B833
The machine determines the paper size automatically by reading the output of Tray
O
the paper size switches and the paper length sensor.
The machine cannot detect the paper size automatically. The user must select
P
the paper size manually before starting the job. See below.
Selecting the Paper Size for Undetectable Sizes

Press the [Tray Paper Settings] key on the operation panel to select paper sizes
that are not detected automatically by the combination of paper size and paper
length sensor readings (marked “P” in the table above and any other paper size
not listed that requires pulling out the paper tray extension).
NOTE: Mixed paper sizes cannot be loaded into the bypass tray. Loading paper of
different sizes will cause a paper jam.
SM 15 B833
3. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

3.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
7 8 9
5 6 10
11
3 4
12
2
1
16 13
15 14
B833D951.WMF
1. Transport Roller 3 9. Transport motor

2. Relay Sensor 10. Pick-up Roller
3. Relay Motor 11. Paper Height Sensor 1
4. Transport Roller 2 12. Paper Height Sensor 2
5. Transport Roller 1 13. Lift Plate Actuator
6. Paper Feed Sensor 14. Lift Plate
7. Paper Feed Roller 15. Separation Roller
8. Lift Sensor 16. Paper Feed Motor
B833 16 SM

3.2.1 LAYOUT
3 4 5
2
1 6
7

12
9 8
11
10 B833D002.WMF
1. Relay Sensor
2. Relay Motor
3. Pick-up Solenoid
4. Transport Motor
5. Feed Motor
6. Lift Motor
7. Bypass Unit Control Board
8. Paper Length Sensor
9. Paper Width Switch
10. Paper End Sensor
Multi Bypass
11. Tray Lift Switch
12. Paper Feed Sensor
B833
Tray
Lift Sensor
Tray Lower Limit Sensor
Paper Near End Sensor
Paper End Sensor
SM 17 B833
3.2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT SUMMARY

Motors
M1 Feed Motor Drives the paper feed roller in the feed mechanism.
M2 Lift Motor Raises and lowers the bottom plate below the paper stack.
M3 Relay Motor Drives the relay rollers that feed the paper from the bypass tray into
the feed path of the LCT below.
M4 Transport Motor Drives the transport roller of the bypass tray that pulls the paper out
of the tray and sends it to the relay roller.
PCB
PCB1 Bypass Unit Control Board Controls operation of all bypass unit electrical components.
Sensors
S1 Lift Sensor Detects when the paper in the bypass tray is at the proper height
for paper feed.
S2 Tray Lower Limit Sensor Detects when the tray is at its lowest possible position.
S3 Paper End Sensor Informs the copier when the paper in the bypass tray has run
out.
S4 Paper Feed Sensor Detects the copy paper coming to the 4th paper feed roller and
checks for misfeeds.
S5 Paper Height Sensor 1 Paper end sensor. The paper height sensor pair (1 and 2) work
together to monitor the height of the paper stack in the bypass
tray.
S6 Paper Height Sensor 2 Paper near end sensor. The paper height sensor pair (1 and 2)
work together to monitor the height of the paper stack in the
bypass tray.
S7 Paper Length Sensor Used with the paper width switch to determine paper size. This
sensor is activated when paper is set for short edge feed. For
example, when the paper width switch detects A4 width and this
sensor is off, the machine determines A4 is set for long edge
feed. When A4 width is detected and the paper length sensor is
on, then the machine determines that A3 is loaded for short
edge feed.
S8 Relay Sensor Detects jams in the paper path after paper is fed from the feed
roller..
Solenoids
SOL1 Pick-up Solenoid Controls up-down movement of the pick-up roller in the bypass
tray.
Switches
SW1 Tray Lift Switch Switches the tray lift motor on and off to raise and lower the
bottom plate of the tray to the feed position. This switch must be
pressed to start paper feed.
SW2 Paper Width Switches A slide switch connected to the side fences. When the side
fences are moved to match the paper width, four feelers inside
the paper size switch slide along wiring patterns of a terminal
plate. The wire pattern detected determines the paper width.
B833 18 SM
3.3 DRIVE LAYOUT 5

4
3
6
2
1
7
8
11
10 9 B833D003.WMF
1. Transport Roller 2
2. Transport Roller 1
3. Grip Roller
4. Relay Motor
5. Transport Motor
6. Feed Motor
7. Lift Motor
8. Lift Plate
9. Pick-up Roller
10. Separation Roller
11. Feed Roller Multi Bypass
B833
Tray
SM 19 B833
BOOKLET FINISHER SR5020
D434
None
BOOKLET FINISHER SR5020 D434
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 COMMON PROCEDURES ........................................................................... 1
1.1.1 OVERVIEW.......................................................................................... 1
1.1.2 COVERS.............................................................................................. 3
Rear Upper Cover ................................................................................... 3
Rear Lower Cover ................................................................................... 3
Lower Inner Cover: Rb10, Rb11.............................................................. 5
Center Inner Cover: Rb14, Rb16............................................................. 5
Upper Inner Cover: Rb2, Rb8.................................................................. 6
Front Door ............................................................................................... 7
Corner Strip Cover .................................................................................. 7
Top Rear Cover....................................................................................... 8
Shift Tray Jogger Unit.............................................................................. 8
Left Upper Cover ..................................................................................... 9
Proof Tray................................................................................................ 9
Top "L" Cover ........................................................................................ 10
Right Upper Panel ................................................................................. 11
Right Lower Panel ................................................................................. 11
Shift Tray ............................................................................................... 12
Booklet Tray .......................................................................................... 12
1.1.3 BOOKLET UNIT................................................................................. 12
Booklet Stapler ...................................................................................... 12
Booklet Unit ........................................................................................... 13
Handling and Moving the Booklet Unit .................................................. 17
1.1.4 SIDE FENCE ..................................................................................... 17
Exit Roller Cover ................................................................................... 17
Shift Tray, Booklet Tray ......................................................................... 18
Shift Tray Base...................................................................................... 19
Left Lower Cover, Booklet Tray Actuator Arm ....................................... 22
End Fence ............................................................................................. 23
1.1.5 DRAG ROLLER UNIT ........................................................................ 25
SM i D434
1.2 HORIZONTAL PAPER FEED ..................................................................... 27
1.2.1 ENTRANCE ....................................................................................... 27
Entrance Roller Motor ........................................................................... 27
Entrance Sensor.................................................................................... 29
1.2.2 REGISTRATION ................................................................................ 30
Registration Motor ................................................................................. 30
Horizontal Transport Motor.................................................................... 31
1.2.3 EXIT ................................................................................................... 33
Shift Tray Exit Motor.............................................................................. 33
1.3 PUNCH UNIT .............................................................................................. 35
1.3.1 PUNCH MOTORS AND SENSORS .................................................. 35
Punch Movement Motor ........................................................................ 35
Punch Unit HP Sensor .......................................................................... 36
Punch Drive Motor................................................................................. 36
Punch RPS Sensor ............................................................................... 37
Punch-out Hopper Full Sensor .............................................................. 38
1.4 PROOF TRAY............................................................................................. 39
1.4.1 PROOF TRAY MOTORS ................................................................... 39
Proof Tray JG Motor.............................................................................. 39
Proof Tray Vertical Transport Motor ...................................................... 40
Proof Tray Exit Motor ............................................................................ 42
1.4.2 PROOF TRAY SENSORS ................................................................. 43
Proof Tray JG HP Sensor...................................................................... 43
Proof Tray Exit Sensor, Proof Tray Full Sensor..................................... 44
1.5 SHIFT TRAY ............................................................................................... 47
1.5.1 SHIFT TRAY SIDE-TO-SIDE MOVEMENT ....................................... 47
Shift Motor ............................................................................................. 47
Shift Tray HP Sensors (Front, Rear) ..................................................... 48
1.5.2 SHIFT TRAY EXIT ............................................................................. 49
Shift Tray Exit Motor.............................................................................. 49
Shift Tray Exit Sensors (Long and Short) .............................................. 50
1.5.3 DRAG ROLLER MOTORS, SENSORS ............................................. 53
Drag Roller Motor .................................................................................. 53
Drag Drive Motor ................................................................................... 54
Drag Roller HP Sensor .......................................................................... 55
1.5.4 SHIFT TRAY JOGGER UNIT............................................................. 56
D434 ii SM
Shift Jogger Motor ................................................................................. 56
Shift Tray Jogger Fence HP Sensor...................................................... 57
Shift Jogger Retraction Motor................................................................ 58
Shift Jogger Fence Retract HP Sensor ................................................. 59
1.5.5 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION ................................................................ 60
Shift Tray Lift Motor ............................................................................... 60
Paper Height Sensors 1, 2, 3 (Shift, Staple, Z-Fold) ............................. 62
Paper Height Sensor (TE), Shift Tray Upper Limit Switch ..................... 63
Shift Tray Full Sensors 1, 2, 3, 4 (500) .................................................. 65
1.6 PRE-STACKER........................................................................................... 67
1.6.1 PRE-STACKER MOTORS................................................................. 67
Pre-Stack Motor .................................................................................... 67
Pre-Stack Release Motor ...................................................................... 68
1.6.2 PRE-STACKER SENSORS ............................................................... 70
Pre-stack Roller HP Sensor................................................................... 70
1.7 CORNER STAPLER UNIT.......................................................................... 72
1.7.1 CORNER STAPLER UNIT ENTRANCE ............................................ 72
Stapler JG Motor ................................................................................... 72
Stapler JG HP Sensor ........................................................................... 73
Stapling Tray Entrance Sensor.............................................................. 73
Stapling Tray Entrance Motor................................................................ 75
Stapling Tray Paper Sensor .................................................................. 76
1.7.2 CORNER STAPLER SIDE-TO-SIDE JOGGING................................ 77
Front Jogger Fence Motor ..................................................................... 77
Jogger Fence HP Sensor (Front) .......................................................... 79
Rear Jogger Fence Motor ..................................................................... 80
Jogger Fence HP Sensor (Rear) ........................................................... 82
1.7.3 CORNER STAPLING BOTTOM/TOP JOGGING............................... 82
Positioning Roller Rotation Motor .......................................................... 82
Positioning Roller Motor ........................................................................ 84
Positioning Roller HP Sensor ................................................................ 85
Corner Stapler Bottom Fence Motor...................................................... 86
Bottom Fence HP Sensor...................................................................... 87
Corner Stapler Top Fence Motor........................................................... 88
Top Fence HP Sensor ........................................................................... 90
1.7.4 CORNER STAPLING EDGE PRESS BEFORE STAPLING .............. 91
SM iii D434
Edge Press Motor/Sensor Plate ............................................................ 91
Stack Plate Motor, Stack Plate HP Sensor (Rear)................................. 93
Stack Plate Motor, Stack Plate HP Sensor (Center).............................. 95
Stack Plate Motor, Stack Plate HP Sensor (Front) ................................ 98
1.7.5 CORNER STAPLING....................................................................... 100
Corner Stapler ..................................................................................... 100
Corner Stapler Movement Motor ......................................................... 102
Stapler Rotation Motor ........................................................................ 103
Staple Trimmings Hopper Full/Set Sensors......................................... 104
Stapler Movement Sensors ................................................................. 106
1.7.6 CORNER STAPLED STACK FEED OUT ........................................ 108
Stack Transport Unit HP Sensor ......................................................... 108
Stack Transport Motor......................................................................... 109
Stack Feed-Out Belt Motor .................................................................. 110
Stack Feed-Out Belt HP Sensor.......................................................... 111
Stack Junction Gate Motor .................................................................. 112
Stack JG HP Sensor ........................................................................... 113
1.7.7 CORNER STAPLED STACKS EXIT TO SHIFT TRAY .................... 114
Exit Guide Motor.................................................................................. 114
Exit Guide HP Sensor ......................................................................... 116
1.8 BOOKLET UNIT........................................................................................ 117
1.8.1 BOOKLET STAPLER....................................................................... 117
1.8.2 BOOKLET UNIT TRANSPORT, ENTRANCE .................................. 118
Fold Unit Entrance Sensor .................................................................. 118
1.8.3 BOOKLET SIDE-TO-SIDE JOGGING ............................................. 118
Booklet Stapler Side Fence Motor....................................................... 118
Booklet Stapler Side Fence HP Sensor (Front) ................................... 119
Booklet Stapler Jogger HP Sensor (Rear)........................................... 120
1.8.4 BOOKLET BOTTOM/TOP JOGGING .............................................. 120
Booklet Stapler Bottom Fence Motor................................................... 120
Booklet Stapler Bottom Fence HP Sensor .......................................... 121
Booklet Stapler Top Fence Motor........................................................ 122
Booklet Top Fence HP Sensor ............................................................ 123
1.8.5 BOOKLET PRESS FOR STAPLING................................................ 124
Booklet Stapler Clamp Roller Motor, Booklet Unit Exit Sensor............ 124
Booklet Stapler Clamp Roller Sensor .................................................. 130
D434 iv SM
1.8.6 BOOKLET FOLDING ....................................................................... 132
Fold Plate Motor .................................................................................. 132
Fold Plate Cam HP Sensor ................................................................. 133
Fold Plate HP Sensor .......................................................................... 133
1.8.7 BOOKLET EXIT, BOOKLET TRAY.................................................. 135
Fold Roller Motor................................................................................. 135
Booklet Stapler Exit Sensor................................................................. 136
Booklet Staple Tray Full Sensors (Upper/Lower) ................................ 136
1.9 BOARDS................................................................................................... 139
1.9.1 SUB BOARD.................................................................................... 139
1.9.2 MAIN BOARD .................................................................................. 139
1.9.3 PUNCH UNIT PCB .......................................................................... 142
1.9.4 SHIFT TRAY JOGGER UNIT PCB .................................................. 142
1.9.5 PSU ................................................................................................. 143
1.10 SWITCHES ......................................................................................... 144
1.10.1 FRONT DOOR SWITCH ............................................................ 144
1.10.2 BREAKER SWITCH ................................................................... 144
1.10.3 EMERGENCY SHIFT TRAY STOP SWITCH............................. 145
1.11 ROLLERS AND BRUSHES................................................................. 147
1.11.1 ROLLERS................................................................................... 147
Drag Roller .......................................................................................... 147
Positioning Roller ................................................................................ 147
Alignment Brush Roller........................................................................ 148
1.11.2 DISCHARGE BRUSHES............................................................ 150
Shift Tray Exit ...................................................................................... 150
Corner Stapler Entrance...................................................................... 150
Booklet Unit Exit .................................................................................. 150
1.12 SPECIAL ADJUSTMENTS.................................................................. 152
1.12.1 HORIZONTAL SKEW................................................................. 152
[A] Adjustment: Rear Fence Low......................................................... 153
[B] Adjustment: Front Fence Low ........................................................ 154
1.12.2 VERTICAL SKEW ...................................................................... 155
1.12.3 BOTTOM FENCE REPLACEMENT ........................................... 156
2. DETAILS ......................................................................................160
2.1 PAPER PATH ........................................................................................... 160
SM v D434
2.2 PROOF TRAY, STAPLER JUNCTION GATES ........................................ 162
2.3 PUNCH UNIT ............................................................................................ 163
2.3.1 PUNCH UNIT DRIVE ....................................................................... 163
2.3.2 PUNCH-OUT COLLECTION............................................................ 165
2.4 PRE-STACKING ....................................................................................... 166
2.4.1 PAPER SIZES A4 AND SMALLER.................................................. 166
2.4.2 PAPER SIZES B4 AND LARGER.................................................... 166
2.5 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING .................................................... 168
2.6 STAPLING ................................................................................................ 170
2.7 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT................................................................... 171
2.8 STAPLER.................................................................................................. 173
2.9 FEED-OUT................................................................................................ 175
2.10 PAPER EXIT ....................................................................................... 176
2.11 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION ................................................................. 177
2.11.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................ 177
2.11.2 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION: STAND-BY MODE......................... 179
2.11.3 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION: SHIFT MODE ................................ 180
2.11.4 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION: STAPLE MODE ............................. 181
2.11.5 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION: Z-FOLDED PAPER ....................... 182
2.11.6 SHIFT TRAY PAPER HEIGHT SENSORS ................................ 183
2.12 SHIFT TRAY SIDE-TO-SIDE MOVEMENT......................................... 184
2.13 SHIFT TRAY JOGGER UNIT .............................................................. 185
2.13.1 JOGGER UNIT MECHANICAL LAYOUT ................................... 185
2.13.2 JOGGER UNIT DRIVE ............................................................... 186
2.14 BOOKLET UNIT .................................................................................. 187
2.14.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................ 187
2.14.2 FOLDING, STAPLING OPERATION.......................................... 189
2.15 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS............................................................ 196
2.15.1 GENERAL LAYOUT ................................................................... 196
2.15.2 MOTORS.................................................................................... 197
Main Motors......................................................................................... 197
Paper Transport Motors ...................................................................... 198
Operation Motors................................................................................. 199
2.15.3 SENSORS.................................................................................. 200
Paper Path Sensors ............................................................................ 200
Sensors around the Shift Tray, Trimmings Hopper ............................. 201
D434 vi SM
Shift Tray Jogger Unit.......................................................................... 202
2.15.4 CORNER STAPLER .................................................................. 203
2.15.5 BOOKLET STAPLER ................................................................. 206
2.15.6 PUNCH UNIT ............................................................................. 207
2.15.7 BOARDS, SWITCHES ............................................................... 208
2.15.8 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT SUMMARY.................................. 208
SM vii D434
Read This First
Safety, Conventions, Trademarks
Conventions
Common Terms
This is a list of symbols and abbreviations used in this manual.
Core Tech Manual
Screw
Connector
E-ring
C-ring
= Harness clamp
FFC Flexible Film Cable
JG Junction Gate
LE Leading Edge of paper
LEF Long Edge Feed
SEF Short Edge Feed
TE Trailing Edge of paper
S31E The "Emitter" sensor of a sensor pair
S31R The "Receptor" sensor of a sensor pair

The notations "SEF" and "LEF" describe the direction of paper feed, with the arrows
indicating paper feed direction.
Warnings, Cautions, Notes


could result in minor or moderate injury or damage to the finisher or other property.

loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine.
General Safety Instructions
For your safety, please read this manual carefully before you use this product. Keep this
manual handy for future reference.
Safety Information
Always obey the following safety precautions when using this product.
Safety During Operation
Switches and Symbols
Responsibilities of the Customer Engineer
Reference Material for Maintenance
Maintenance shall be done using the special tools and procedures prescribed for
maintenance of the machine described in the reference materials (service manuals,
technical bulletins, operating instructions, and safety guidelines for customer
engineers).
In regard to other safety issues not described in this document, all customer engineers
shall strictly obey procedures and recommendations described the “CE Safety Guide”.
Use only consumable supplies and replacement parts designed for use of the
machine.
Before Installation, Maintenance
Power
Always disconnect the power plug before doing any maintenance procedure. After
switching off the machine, power is still supplied to the main machine and other
devices. To prevent electrical shock, switch the machine off, wait for a few
seconds, then unplug the machine from the power source.
Before you do any checks or adjustments after turning the machine off, work
carefully to avoid injury. After removing covers or opening the machine to do
checks or adjustments, never touch electrical components or moving parts (gears,
timing belts, etc.).
After turning the machine on with any cover removed, keep your hands away from
electrical components and moving parts. Never touch the cover of the fusing unit,
gears, timing belts, etc.
Installation, Disassembly, and Adjustments
After installation, maintenance, or adjustment, always check the operation of the

machine to make sure that it is operating normally. This ensures that all shipping
materials, protective materials, wires and tags, metal brackets, etc., removed for
installation, have been removed and that no tools remain inside the machine. This
also ensures that all release interlock switches have been restored to normal
operation.
Never use your fingers to check moving parts causing spurious noise. Never use
your fingers to lubricate moving parts while the machine is operating.
Special Tools
Use only standard tools approved for machine maintenance.

For special adjustments, use only the special tools and lubricants described in the
service manual. Using tools incorrectly, or using tools that could damage parts,
could damage the machine or cause injuries.
During Maintenance
General
Before you begin a maintenance procedure: 1) Switch the machine off, 2)

Disconnect the power plug from the power source, 3) Allow the machine to cool for
at least 10 minutes.
Avoid touching the components inside the machine that are labeled as hot
surfaces.
Safety Devices
Never remove any safety device unless it requires replacement. Always replace
safety devices immediately.
Never do any procedure that defeats the function of any safety device.
Modification or removal of a safety device (fuse, switch, etc.) could lead to a fire
and personal injury. Always test the operation of the machine to ensure that it is
operating normally and safely after removal and replacement of any safety device.
For replacements use only the correct fuses or circuit breakers rated for use with
the machine. Using replacement devices not designed for use with the machine
could lead to a fire and personal injuries.
Organic Cleaners
During preventive maintenance, never use any organic cleaners (alcohol, etc.)
other than those described in the service manual.
Make sure the room is well ventilated before using any organic cleaner. Use
organic solvents in small amounts to avoid breathing the fumes and becoming
nauseous.
Switch the machine off, unplug it, and allow it to cool before doing preventive
maintenance. To avoid fire or explosion, never use an organic cleaner near any
part that generates heat.
Wash your hands thoroughly after cleaning parts with an organic cleaner to
contamination of food, drinks, etc. which could cause illness.
Clean the floor completely after accidental spillage of silicone oil or other materials
to prevent slippery surfaces that could cause accidents leading to hand or leg
injuries. Use “My Ace” Silicone Oil Remover (or dry rags) to soak up spills. For
more details, please refer to Technical Bulletin “Silicone Oil Removal” (A024-50).
Ozone Filters
Always replace ozone filters as soon as their service life expires (as described in
the service manual).
An excessive amount of ozone can build up around machines that use ozone
filters if they are not replaced at the prescribed time. Excessive ozone could cause
personnel working around the machine to feel unwell.
Power Plug and Power Cord
Before servicing the machine (especially when responding to a service call),

always make sure that the power plug has been inserted completely into the
power source. A partially inserted plug could lead to heat generation (due to a
power surge caused by high resistance) and cause a fire or other problems.
Always check the power plug and make sure that it is free of dust and lint. Clean it
if necessary. A dirty plug can generate heat which could cause a fire.
Inspect the length of the power cord for cuts or other damage. Replace the power
cord if necessary. A frayed or otherwise damaged power cord can cause a short
circuit which could lead to a fire or personal injury from electrical shock.
Check the length of the power cord between the machine and power supply. Make
sure the power cord is not coiled or wrapped around any object such as a table leg.
Coiling the power cord can cause excessive heat to build up and could cause a
fire.
Make sure that the area around the power source is free of obstacles so the power
cord can be removed quickly in case of an emergency.
Make sure that the power cord is grounded (earthed) at the power source with the
ground wire on the plug.
Connect the power cord directly into the power source. Never use an extension
cord.
When you disconnect the power plug from the power source, always pull on the
plug, not the cable.
After Installation, Servicing

Disposal of Used Items
Always dispose of used items (developer, toner, toner cartridges, OPC drums,
etc.) in accordance with the local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of
such items.
To protect the environment, never dispose of this product or any kind of waste
from consumables at a household waste collection point. Dispose of these items
at one of our dealers or at an authorized collection site.
Points to Confirm with Operators
remove.
machine.
Confirm that operators have read and understand all the safety instructions described
in the operating instructions.
plug, not the cord) if any of the following events occur: 1) something has spilled into the
product, 2) service or repair of the product is necessary, 3) the product cover has been
damaged.
machine.
Safety Instructions for this Machine

1. The installation must be done by trained service technicians.
2. This machine weighs 316 kg. (695 lb.). At least four persons are required to remove
the machine from its pallet and position it for installation.
3. To prevent fire hazards never use flammable solvents around the machine.
4. Never place any object on the machine.
5. If anything falls into the machine, turn off the main power switch on the right side of the
machine, then disconnect the power cord from the power source.
6. Locate the machine on a sturdy flat surface where it will not be exposed to excessive
vibration.
7. To avoid fire hazard, confirm that the ventilation ports are not blocked, so air can flow
freely.
8. Gas generated by the molten glue can irritate the eyes, throat, and nose. The machine
should always be used in a well ventilated room.
9. To avoid the dangers of fire and electrical shock, make sure that the machine is never
exposed to:
Excessive high temperatures and/or humidity
Dust
Water
Direct sunlight
Open flame
Corrosive gases
Trademarks
those marks.
Common Procedures
1.1.1 OVERVIEW
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
SM 1 D434
Common Procedures
[A] Open the front door open

[B] Adjustable caster
[C] Pull the stack/stapler unit out (pull handle Rb12)
1. Inner covers:
D434 2 SM
Common Procedures
[A] Upper: Rb2, Rb8

[B] Center: Rb14, Rb16
[C] Lower Rb10, Rb11
1.1.2 COVERS
Rear Upper Cover
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Rear upper cover ( x5)
The rear upper cover must be removed before the rear lower cover.
Rear Lower Cover

Preparation
Rear upper cover
SM 3 D434
Common Procedures
1. Rear lower cover ( x4)

The screw near the power connection point is difficult to see.
Re-installation
1. Engage both tabs on the bottom of the rear lower cover before fastening the screws.
D434 4 SM
Common Procedures
Lower Inner Cover: Rb10, Rb11
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Remove handles Rb11, Rb12 ( x1 each, Pin x1 each)
2. Make sure that the pins [A] are removed and stored with the screws.
Remove the cover ( x2, Tabs x2)
Center Inner Cover: Rb14, Rb16

Preparation
SM 5 D434
Common Procedures
Lower inner cover
1. Remove:
[A] Rb16
[B] Rb 14 ( x1)
[C] Cover ( x4)
Upper Inner Cover: Rb2, Rb8
1. Remove:
[A] Rb2, Rb8.
If these tab releases are stiff, use the point of a sharp tool to release these knobs, then
pull them off. Work carefully to avoid breaking the tab releases.
[B] Cover ( x5)
D434 6 SM
Common Procedures
Front Door
Finisher
1. Remove [A] ( x1)
Booklet
SR5020
D434
2. Raise the hinge pin and bracket [B] out of the top of the door and pull the door away.
3. Lift the door off its bottom post.
Corner Strip Cover
1. Remove the top and bottom screws [1], [2] ( x2).

2. Disconnect the tabs at the top and bottom.
3. Twist the cover away from the corner.
SM 7 D434
Common Procedures
Top Rear Cover
1. Remove screws from the cover [A] ( x2).
2. Slowly disconnect the tabs of cover [A].
Shift Tray Jogger Unit
1. Remove:
[A] Jogger unit cover ( x2)
[B] Jogger unit screws ( x2)
D434 8 SM
Common Procedures
2. At the left rear corner, disconnect the jogger unit { and emergency shift tray stop
switch (= x2, x2).
3. Lift the jogger unit [A] off (Hooks x2).
Left Upper Cover

Preparation
Shift tray jogger unit cover
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
Shift tray jogger unit
D434
1. At the rear corner, make sure that the connector [A] of the harness running through the
cover is disconnected.
2. Remove the cover [B] ( x2),.
Proof Tray
Preparation
Left upper cover
SM 9 D434
Common Procedures
1. Remove proof tray [A] ( x2)
Top "L" Cover

Preparation
Left upper cover
Proof tray
1. Top tray screws [A] ( x4)
2. Disengage tabs:
[A] Front
[B] Right
D434 10 SM
Common Procedures
Right Upper Panel
1. Remove the right upper panel [A] ( x4)
Right Lower Panel
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
The right lower panel covers the PSU, which retains residual voltage after the
system is switched off.
Before removing the right lower panel for any procedure, switch the machine off
and wait 30 min. for the charge on the PSU to discharge.
1. Remove right lower panel [A] ( x6)
SM 11 D434
Common Procedures
Shift Tray
1. While supporting the tray with one hand, pull gear [A] toward you to release the tray.
2. Lower the tray [B] slowly until it stops, then remove it. ( x4)
Booklet Tray
1. Just lift and pull the booklet tray [A] away from the side.
1.1.3 BOOKLET UNIT

Booklet Stapler
The booklet stapler weighs about 3 kg (6.6 lb.)
Preparation
Open the front door.
Pull stack/stapler unit out with Rb12
D434 12 SM
Common Procedures
1. Remove both booklet staplers.

2. Remove booklet stapler unit cover [A] ( x2)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
3. Remove stapler unit [A] ( x1, x4)
4. Make sure connector [B] is disconnected.
5. Remove the stapler unit with its handle [C].
Booklet Unit
Preparation
Open the front door.
Front door
Corner strip cover
Lower inner cover Rb10, Rb11
Booklet stapler (recommended)
SM 13 D434
Common Procedures
The booklet unit weighs about 18 kg (40 lb.) with the booklet stapler installed.
The booklet stapler weighs about 3 kg (6.6 lb.)
The booklet unit is lighter and easier to remove and re-install with the booklet
stapler removed.
1. Make sure that the stack/staple unit is closed.

2. Locate the two motors attached to the rear of the stack/staple unit.
3. Disconnect the two motors {, ( x2).

4. Disconnect the connectors of the other harnesses attached to the rear of the
stack/staple unit at , ~, (= x2, x2).
D434 14 SM
Common Procedures
5. Push the stack/staple unit [A] out about halfway, until you can see the two black
connectors.
6. Disconnect the connectors [B] ( x2).
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
7. Pull the stack/staple unit out until it stops.
SM 15 D434
Common Procedures
8. Remove:
[A] Rear ( x2)
[B] Front ( x2)
9. Grip the unit [A] at { and , slide it to the right, and set it down on the floor.
D434 16 SM
Common Procedures
Handling and Moving the Booklet Unit
Finisher
The metal edges of the booklet unit are sharp and can easily cut your hands or
Booklet
SR5020
D434
fingers. Always handle the unit carefully.
1. Always lift the booklet unit with your hands positioned at { and .
2. Never attempt to lift the booklet unit by the edges (shown above by the red dotted
lines).
1.1.4 SIDE FENCE

Preparation
Shift tray jogger unit.
Pull stack/stapler unit out with handle Rb12.
Exit Roller Cover
This is the exit roller cover [A].
SM 17 D434
Common Procedures
1. Remove:
[A] Rear ( x2)
[B] Front ( x2)
2. Remove the cover.
Shift Tray, Booklet Tray
1. Remove the booklet tray [A].
D434 18 SM
Common Procedures
2. Support the shift tray with your hand.

3. At the left rear corner, pull the gear [A] toward to release the tray, then lower the tray.
4. Remove the screws [B] (x3)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
5. Support the tray [A] with your hand to prevent it from falling, then remove the last screw.
( x1)
Shift Tray Base
This is the shift tray base [A].
SM 19 D434
Common Procedures
1. Rear cover [A] ( x1).

2. Slide the cover off. You do not need to remove the screw.
3. Front cover [A] ( x1)

4. Slide the cover off. You do not need to remove the screw.
5. Front belt clamp [A] ( x1)
D434 20 SM
Common Procedures
6. Rear belt clamp [A] ( x1)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
7. At the front, pull the belt [A] out and set it behind the plate.
8. Front base plate [A] ( x2)
SM 21 D434
Common Procedures
9. Disconnect the rear end of the base [A] from the side fence (you do not need to
remove the plate).
Left Lower Cover, Booklet Tray Actuator Arm
1. Half-turn sensor harness [A] (= x6, x1)
2. Rear cover [A] ( x3)
D434 22 SM
Common Procedures
3. Booklet tray actuator arm [A] ( x2)
End Fence
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Disconnect:
[A] Motor (= x 1, x1)
[B] Half-turn sensor (= x 1, x1)
SM 23 D434
Common Procedures
2. Rear:
[A] Top ( x1)
[B] Center ( x1)
[C] Bottom ( x1)
3. Front:
[A] Top ( x1)
[B] Center ( x1)
[C] Bottom ( x1)
Re-installation
1. When you re-attach the exit roller cover [A]:

Make sure the small mylar { is set as shown above.
Make sure the large mylars and } are set as shown above.
D434 24 SM
Common Procedures
1.1.5 DRAG ROLLER UNIT

Preparation
Side fence
This is the drag roller unit [A].
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Harness connectors (= x7)
2. Connectors (= x1, x2)
SM 25 D434
Common Procedures
3. Motor harnesses ( x2)
4. Remove:
[A] Front ( x2)
[B] Rear ( x2)
5. Remove the drag roller unit [A].
D434 26 SM
Horizontal Paper Feed
1.2 HORIZONTAL PAPER FEED
1.2.1 ENTRANCE
Entrance Roller Motor
Preparation
Rear upper cover
Rear lower cover
Right upper panel
Sub board
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
The entrance roller motor is under the entrance paper guide.
SM 27 D434
1. Disconnect and remove the main board [A] ( x4, Ground connectors x2, x All,
x All) so you can access the motor bracket [B].
2. Disconnect the motor bracket [A] ( x2, Timing belt x1, Spring x1).
3. From inside the unit, pull the bracket [A] (with the motor attached) through the hole.
D434 28 SM
4. Remove the motor [A] from the bracket ( x 2).
Entrance Sensor
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
The entrance sensor port is above the paper guide.
1. Remove:
[B] Sensor ( x1, Pawls x5)
SM 29 D434
1.2.2 REGISTRATION
Registration Motor
Preparation
Rear upper cover
Right upper panel
Sub board
The registration motor is behind the sub board.
1. Disconnect motor bracket [A] ( x2, x1, Belt x1)
D434 30 SM
2. Remove motor [A] ( x2)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
Horizontal Transport Motor
D434
Preparation
Rear upper cover
The horizontal transport motor is in the center.
SM 31 D434
1. Disconnect motor [A] ( x2)
2. Disconnect the motor bracket:

[A] Left hook
[B] Right hook
3. Disconnect motor [A] (Belt x1, x1)

4. Remove bracket [B] ( x2)
D434 32 SM
1.2.3 EXIT
Shift Tray Exit Motor
Preparation
Rear upper cover
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
The shift tray exit motor is at the rear left corner.
1. Disconnect motor [A] ( x2, = x2)
SM 33 D434
2. Disconnect motor bracket [A] (Hook x1, x 1)
3. Motor bracket [A] ( x2)
D434 34 SM
Punch Unit
1.3 PUNCH UNIT
1.3.1 PUNCH MOTORS AND SENSORS

Punch Movement Motor
Preparation
Punch unit
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Punch movement motor bracket [A] ( x1)
2. Remove:
[A] Spring x1
[B] Bracket ( x1)
SM 35 D434
Punch Unit
3. Disconnect motor [A] (= x1, x1)
Punch Unit HP Sensor

Preparation
Punch unit
1. Remove:
Punch Drive Motor

Preparation
Rear upper cover
D434 36 SM
Punch Unit
1. Disconnect:
[A] Motor (= x1, x1)
[B] Bracket ( x2)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
2. Remove motor [A].
Punch RPS Sensor

Preparation
Rear upper cover
1. Sensor [A] (= x1, x1, Pawls x5)
SM 37 D434
Punch Unit
Punch-out Hopper Full Sensor

Preparation
Remove the right upper panel
1. Sensor swing plate [A] (Spring x1, x1, = x1, x1)
2. Sensor ( x1)
D434 38 SM
Proof Tray
1.4 PROOF TRAY
1.4.1 PROOF TRAY MOTORS

Proof Tray JG Motor
Preparation
Rear upper cover
Punch unit PCB
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
The proof tray JG motor is located here.
1. Disconnect motor [A] (= x4, x2)
SM 39 D434
Proof Tray
2. Bracket of the motor [A] ( x2)
3. Remove:
[A] Motor with bracket
[B] Bracket ( x2)
Proof Tray Vertical Transport Motor
D434 40 SM
Proof Tray
The proof tray vertical transport motor is located here, partially covered by the punch unit
PCB.
Preparation
Rear upper cover
Top rear cover
Punch unit PCB
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Bracket of the motor [A] ( x2)
2. Pull out motor [A] (Hook x1, Belt x1, x1)
SM 41 D434
Proof Tray
3. Remove bracket [A] ( x2)
Proof Tray Exit Motor

Preparation
Rear cover
Top rear cover
The proof tray exit motor is located here.
D434 42 SM
Proof Tray
1. Motor bracket [A] ( x2, Hook x1)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
2. Remove the motor [A] and bracket (Belt x1, x1. x2)
1.4.2 PROOF TRAY SENSORS

Proof Tray JG HP Sensor
Preparation
Rear upper cover
1. Remove sensor bracket [A] and sensor ( x1, x1, Pawls x5)
SM 43 D434
Proof Tray
Re-installation
1. Turn the proof JG motor [A] gear to move the actuator to the left if the sensor is difficult
to re-install.
Proof Tray Exit Sensor, Proof Tray Full Sensor

Preparation
Upper inner cover
Rear top cover
Left upper cover
Proof tray
These sensors are mounted on the same bracket under the paper path cover.
D434 44 SM
Proof Tray
1. At the front, disconnect the shaft [A] of plate Rb5. ( x1)

2. Remove Rb5 [B]
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
3. Use a short screwdriver to remove bracket plate [A]. ( x1)
4. Use a pencil or marker to mark the color and location of the harnesses.
5. Disconnect a standoff { to create slack in the harnesses.
6. Disconnect the bracket and sensors [A] (= x4, x2).
SM 45 D434
Proof Tray
7. Remove:
[A] Tray full sensor ( x1)
[B] Tray exit sensor (Pawls x5)
D434 46 SM
Shift Tray
1.5 SHIFT TRAY
1.5.1 SHIFT TRAY SIDE-TO-SIDE MOVEMENT

Shift Motor
Preparation
Side fence
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
The shift motor is visible inside the machine, but the side fence must be removed for
servicing this motor.
1. Lay the side fence on a flat surface.

2. Remove bracket [A] ( x4, Hook x1)
SM 47 D434
Shift Tray
3. Turn the bracket over and remove the motor [A] ( x2, Belt x1)
Shift Tray HP Sensors (Front, Rear)

These sensors are mounted on the same bracket as the shift motor.
Preparation
Side fence
1. Remove sensor bracket [A] ( x1).
2. Remove sensors ( x2, = x3, Pawls 5 each)
D434 48 SM
Shift Tray
1.5.2 SHIFT TRAY EXIT

Shift Tray Exit Motor
Preparation
Rear upper cover
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
The shift tray exit motor is at the rear left corner.
1. Disconnect motor [A] ( x2, = x2)
SM 49 D434
Shift Tray
2. Disconnect motor bracket [A] (Hook x1)
Shift Tray Exit Sensors (Long and Short)

Preparation
Proof tray
D434 50 SM
Shift Tray
1. Lift arm [A] ( x1).
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
2. At the front, remove the bushing ( x1).
3. At the rear, remove:

[A] Gear ( x1, Belts x2)
SM 51 D434
Shift Tray
[B] Bushing ( x1)
4. At the rear, disconnect the sensor harness.

5. Pull it though the hole into the machine.
6. Pull the plate assembly out from the front of the machine.
7. Lay the assembly on a flat surface.

8. Remove the plate [A].
D434 52 SM
Shift Tray
9. Remove:
[A] Exit sensor (long) (Tab x1, x1)
[B] Exit sensor (short) (Tab x1, x1))
1.5.3 DRAG ROLLER MOTORS, SENSORS
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
Drag Roller Motor
The drag roller motor is visible inside the machine, but the side fence and drag roller unit
must be removed to service this motor.
Preparation
Side fence
Drag roller unit
SM 53 D434
Shift Tray
1. Disconnect motor bracket [A] ( x2).

2. Turn the drag roller unit over and remove the motor [B].
3. Remove motor [A] (= x1, x1).
Drag Drive Motor
The drag roller motor is visible inside the machine, but the side fence and drag roller unit
must be removed to service this motor.
D434 54 SM
Shift Tray
Preparation
Side fence
Drag roller unit
1. Turn the drag roller unit on its side with the face of the motor down.
2. Remove the motor [A] ( x2).
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
Drag Roller HP Sensor D434
Preparation
Side fence
Drag roller unit
SM 55 D434
Shift Tray
1. Remove:
1.5.4 SHIFT TRAY JOGGER UNIT

Shift Jogger Motor
This motor is on top of the shift tray jogger unit, near the center.
Preparation
D434 56 SM
Shift Tray
This is the location of the motor with the shift jogger unit removed.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Turn the unit over and disconnect the motor ( x2, Belt x1).
Shift Tray Jogger Fence HP Sensor

Preparation
SM 57 D434
Shift Tray
1. Remove sensor [A] ( x1, Pawls x5)
Shift Jogger Retraction Motor
This is the motor on the end of the shift tray jogger unit.
Preparation
1. Disconnect the motor harness [A] (= x1, x1)
D434 58 SM
Shift Tray
2. Disconnect the retraction HP sensor on the same bracket as the motor [A] (= x1)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
3. Disconnect motor bracket [A] (= x1, x2)
Shift Jogger Fence Retract HP Sensor

Preparation
SM 59 D434
Shift Tray
If it is difficult to remove the sensor directly from the frame (or re-install), do
the procedure in the previous section to remove the shift jogger retraction
motor bracket.
1.5.5 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION

Shift Tray Lift Motor
Preparation
Rear upper cover
Rear top cover
Proof tray
D434 60 SM
Shift Tray
The shift tray lift motor is near the left rear corner.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Disconnect the motor drive board ( x1).
2. Remove:
[A] Rear ( x1)
SM 61 D434
Shift Tray
[B] Front ( x1)
3. Pull the motor and drive board motor out.
Paper Height Sensors 1, 2, 3 (Shift, Staple, Z-Fold)

Preparation
Proof tray
1. Remove the protector plate [A] ( x1).
2. Remove feeler [A] ( x1).
D434 62 SM
Shift Tray
3. Remove sensor bracket [A] ( x1, Standoffs x2)

4. Sensors ( x1 each)
{ Paper Height Sensor 1: Staple Mode
Paper Height Sensor 2: Shift Mode
} Paper Height Sensor 3: Z-Fold Mode
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
Paper Height Sensor (TE), Shift Tray Upper Limit Switch
D434
The actuator [A] of the paper height sensor performs two functions:
First, it rises and actuates the Paper Height Sensor (TE) [B] to detect tray full.
Second, if the actuator rises far enough through the gap of the interrupt sensor (TE) it
will trip the arm [C] of a micro-switch [D]. This is a fail-safe device to switch the finisher
off if one or more other sensors fail.
Preparation
Side fence
Drag roller assembly
Paper Height Sensor (TE)
SM 63 D434
Shift Tray
1. Remove sensor plate [A] ( x2, = x2)
2. Sensor ( x1, Pawls x5)

Shift Tray Upper Limit Switch
1. Turn the drag roller unit [A] over so that you can see the micro-switch [B].
D434 64 SM
Shift Tray
2. Remove the switch [A] from the frame (= x2, x1)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
3. Disconnect the switch ( x2)
Shift Tray Full Sensors 1, 2, 3, 4 (500)

The tray full sensors are all mounted on the same vertical stay at the left rear corner of the
finisher:
Shift Tray Full Sensor (500)
Preparation
Rear upper cover
Rear lower panel
SM 65 D434
Shift Tray
1. Remove the vertical stay cover ( x3).
2. The four sensors, ( x1 each, Pawls x5 each)

{ Shift Tray Full Sensor (500)
} Shift Tray Full Sensor (1500)
~ Shift Tray Full Sensor (2500)
D434 66 SM
Pre-Stacker
1.6 PRE-STACKER
1.6.1 PRE-STACKER MOTORS
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
With the right upper panel removed, the pre-stack motor is visible from the right side of the
finisher below the lock bar.
Pre-Stack Motor
Preparation
Rear upper cover
Right upper panel
Rear lower panel
Sub board
Main board
Right lower plate
The motor does not hang on a bracket. Work carefully and do not allow it to
fall after you remove the last screw.
SM 67 D434
Pre-Stacker
1. Rear [A] ( x2, Belt x1)

2. Front [B]: Remove the motor ( x1)
Pre-Stack Release Motor
D434 68 SM
Pre-Stacker
The pre-stack motor is only partially visible behind the sub board and main board.
Preparation
Rear upper cover
Right upper panel
Rear lower panel
Sub board
Main board
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. At the rear, disconnect the motor ( x1).
2. Disconnect the drive assembly cam and cam follower at [A] (Teflon gear x1, x1, Belt
x1).
3. Remove the motor bracket ( x2).
SM 69 D434
Pre-Stacker
4. Remove motor [A] ( x2)

Re-installation
1. If the Teflon gear [A] will not lock in place, behind the frame pull the shaft of the
pre-stack roller [B] toward the motor.
1.6.2 PRE-STACKER SENSORS

Pre-stack Roller HP Sensor
Preparation
Rear upper cover
Rear lower panel
Sub board
Main board
D434 70 SM
Pre-Stacker
1. Disconnect sensor harness [A] ( x1)

2. Remove sensor bracket [B] ( x1)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
3. Sensor (Pawls x5)
SM 71 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
1.7 CORNER STAPLER UNIT
1.7.1 CORNER STAPLER UNIT ENTRANCE

Stapler JG Motor
The stapler junction gate motor is behind the punch unit PCB.
Preparation
Rear upper cover
Punch unit PCB
1. Open the harness clamps of the motor [A] (= x3)

2. Disconnect the motor at [B] ( x1)
D434 72 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
3. Remove motor bracket [A] ( x2)

Slowly, pull the bracket away.
Make sure the Teflon collar [B] does not fall off the end of the junction gate shaft.
Remove it so that it does not accidentally slip off the end of the shaft.
Stapler JG HP Sensor
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
Preparation
D434
Rear upper cover
Punch unit PCB
1. Remove sensor bracket [A] ( x1, x).

2. Sensor (Pawls x5).
Stapling Tray Entrance Sensor

Preparation
Right lower panel
Pull out the stack/staple unit
SM 73 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
The stapling tray entrance sensor is under the bracket [A] at the right rear corner of the
stack/staple unit.
1. .At the back of the stack/staple unit, disconnect the sensor at [B] ( x1)
2. Remove bracket [A] ( x2)
3. Remove sensor [A] ( x1, x1)
D434 74 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
Stapling Tray Entrance Motor
The stapling tray entrance motor is on the back of the stack/staple unit.
Finisher
Preparation
Booklet
SR5020
D434
Rear upper cover
Rear lower panel
Sub board
Main board
1. Remove motor [A] ( x1, x2)
SM 75 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
2. Remove motor [A] ( x2).
Stapling Tray Paper Sensor

Preparation
Remove the booklet unit ( p.12)
The stapling tray paper sensor shares the same bracket with the top fence HP
sensor.
Use a marker to mark one of the harnesses to prevent incorrect correction at
re-installation.
The stapling tray paper sensor is on bracket [A].
D434 76 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
1. Remove and disconnect bracket [A] ( x, = x5, x2)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
2. Remove the paper sensor [A] (the photosensor) ( x1)
The other sensor is the top fence HP sensor.
1.7.2 CORNER STAPLER SIDE-TO-SIDE JOGGING

The front jogger fence motor is behind the front plate of the stack/staple unit.
Preparation
SM 77 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
1. Loosen screw [A] to release the belt tension ( x1).

2. Disconnect motor [B] (= x1, x1, x1)]
3. Remove motor [A] (= x1, Belt 1).

Re-installation
D434 78 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
1. After re-installing the motor, be sure to re-tighten the belt screw.

Make sure the belt is tight.
The tension of the belt can be adjusted to compensate for stretching in the belt
that may occur when it reaches the end of its service life.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
Jogger Fence HP Sensor (Front)
Preparation
1. Disconnect:
[A] Spring x1
[B] x1
[C] Pawls x5
SM 79 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
The rear jogger fence motor is mounted on the rear plate of the stack/staple unit.
Preparation
1. Loosen screw [A] to release the belt tension ( x1).
D434 80 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
2. Disconnect motor [A] (= x1, x1, x2).
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
Re-installation
1. After re-installing the motor, be sure to re-tighten the belt screw.

Make sure the belt is tight.
SM 81 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
The tension of the belt can be adjusted to compensate for stretching in the belt
that may occur when it reaches the end of its service life.
Jogger Fence HP Sensor (Rear)

Preparation
1. Disconnect and remove the sensor:

{ = x1
= x1
} x1
~ Pawls x5
1.7.3 CORNER STAPLING BOTTOM/TOP JOGGING

Positioning Roller Rotation Motor
The positioning roller rotation motor is under the motor cover on the right side of the
D434 82 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
stack/staple unit.
Preparation
Open the front door
Pull out the stack/staple unit with handle Rb12
1. Remove motor cover [A] ( x2)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
2. Remove motor [A] (= x1, x1, x2)
SM 83 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
Positioning Roller Motor
The positioning roller motor is under the motor cover on the right side of the stack/staple
unit.
Preparation
Open the front door
Right lower panel
1. Remove motor cover [A] ( x2)
D434 84 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
2. Remove motor [A] ( x1, x2, Belt x1)
Positioning Roller HP Sensor

Preparation
Open the front door
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Remove motor cover [A] ( x2).
SM 85 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
Corner Stapler Bottom Fence Motor
The corner stapler bottom fence motor is near the center of the stack/staple unit.
Preparation
1. Remove motor [A] ( x1, x2).
D434 86 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
2. Separate motor [A] from the bracket ( x2).
Bottom Fence HP Sensor

Preparation
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
The bottom fence HP sensor shares the same bracket with the stack feed-out belt
HP sensor. Use a marker to mark one of the harnesses to avoid incorrect
connection at re-installation.
1. Remove bracket [A] ( x1, = x1)
SM 87 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
2. Disconnect the bottom fence HP sensor { (= x1, x2, Pawls x5).

The bottom fence HP sensor { (the interrupt sensor without the feeler) is on the same
bracket as the (sensor with feeler attached).
Corner Stapler Top Fence Motor
The corner stapler top fence motor is on the rear panel of the corner stapler unit.
Preparation
Rear upper cover
Rear lower cover
D434 88 SM
Corner Stapler Unit

2. Push the stack/staple unit [B] into the finisher until it stops and locks.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
3. Remove the belt { and screw . ( x1, Belt x1)
4. Loosen screw } slightly.
Do not remove screw }! The motor will fall if you remove this screw.
SM 89 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
5. While supporting the motor [A] with your right hand to prevent the motor from falling,
remove the remaining screw from behind the panel ( x1).
Top Fence HP Sensor

Preparation
The top fence HP sensor is on bracket [A].
1. Remove and disconnect bracket [A] ( x, = x5, x2)
D434 90 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
2. Remove the top fence HP sensor [A] (the photointerrupter sensor with the feeler ( x1)
The other sensor is the stapling tray paper sensor.
1.7.4 CORNER STAPLING EDGE PRESS BEFORE STAPLING

Edge Press Motor/Sensor Plate
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
The removal of this motor/sensor plate is a common procedure for the next three
procedures below.
Preparation
Open the front door
Right lower panel
1. Remove cover [A] ( x1)
SM 91 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
2. At the back, disconnect the motors and sensors {, , } ( x3, x3)
3. Remove:
[A] Rear ( x2)
[B] Front ( x2)
4. Remove the plate [A] and set it on a flat surface.

{ Front motor, sensor, plunger
Center motor, sensor, plunger
} Rear motor, sensor, plunger
D434 92 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
Stack Plate Motor, Stack Plate HP Sensor (Rear)
Finisher
The rear stack plate motor is under the motor cover with the front and center stack motor.
Booklet
SR5020
D434
Preparation
Stack Plate Motor (Rear)
1. Depress plunger [A] to see the other screw.

2. Remove both screws ( x2).
3. Turn the plate over.
4. Remove motor [B] ( x1, = x1)
SM 93 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
Stack Plate HP Sensor (Rear)
1. Rotate the gear and belt to move actuator [A] out of the gap of the sensor [B]
D434 94 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
3. Disconnect the sensor at [A] ( x1).

5. Remove sensor [B] (Pawls x5).
Stack Plate Motor, Stack Plate HP Sensor (Center)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
The center stack plate motor is under the motor cover with the front and rear stack motors.
Preparation
Stack Plate Motor (Center)
1. Rotate the gear clockwise to raise the plunger [A] and relieve the tension on the spring
[B].
2. Remove spring [B].
SM 95 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
3. Disconnect shafts { and and slide them out ( x2).

5. Remove the screws ( x2).
D434 96 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
6. Remove the motor (= x1, x1).

Stack Plate HP Sensor (Center)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Rotate the gear to move actuator [A] out of the gap [B].
3. Disconnect the sensor at [C]
4. Remove sensor [A] (Pawls x5)
SM 97 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
Stack Plate Motor, Stack Plate HP Sensor (Front)
Preparation
Stack Plate Motor (Front)
1. Depress plunger [A] so you can see the screw.

2. Remove the screws. ( x2)
D434 98 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
3. Remove motor [A] (= x1, x1, Belt x1).

Stack Plate HP Sensor (Front)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Rotate the gear to move plunger [A] out of the gap of the sensor [B].
SM 99 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
3. Disconnect the sensor at [A] ( x1).

4. Remove sensor [B] Pawls x5).
1.7.5 CORNER STAPLING

Corner Stapler
Preparation
Pull the stack/staple unit with handle Rb12
1. Remove the stapler cartridge [A].
D434 100 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
3. Disconnect the stapler [A] ( x2).

4. Lift the stapler off its posts but do NOT pull it away.
This is still one harness connected inside the stapler.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
5. Disconnect harness [A] (= x3, x1)
SM 101 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
Corner Stapler Movement Motor
The corner stapler movement motor is at the bottom of the corner stapler unit.
Preparation
1. On the left [A], disconnect the motor ( x1).

2. On the right [B], remove the motor ( x2, Belt x1)
D434 102 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
Stapler Rotation Motor
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
You can see the stapler rotation motor on the bottom of the corner stapler unit next to the D434
corner stapler.
Preparation
Open the front door
SM 103 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
1. Disconnect the motor at [A] ( x1).

2. Remove the motor at [B] ( x2, Belt x1).
Staple Trimmings Hopper Full/Set Sensors

Preparation
Open the front door
Rear upper cover
Rear lower panel
Trimmings Hopper Unit
D434 104 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
1. Remove the staple trimmings hopper.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
2. Free the harness [A] and disconnect it from the main board [B] (= x11, x1).
3. Gather the disconnected harness [A].

4. Disconnect the trimmings collection unit [B] ( x2).
SM 105 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
5. Disconnect tab [A] (Tab x1, = x2).

6. Release hinge shaft [B] ( x1).
7. Open the unit.
8. Detach:
{ Hopper set sensor (Pawls x5)
Hopper full sensor
Stapler Movement Sensors

Common procedures
Corner Stapler HP Sensor
Corner Stapler Rotation HP Sensor (Rear)
Corner Stapler Rotation HP Sensor (Front)
Preparation
Pull out the stack/staple unit with handle Rb12.
Corner stapler
D434 106 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
1. Push the stapler to the rear [A].

2. Remove the screw of the stapler guide rail [B] ( x1).
3. Push the guide rail [C] to the rear and remove it.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
4. Remove spring [A].
5. Loosen screw [B] (do not remove it).
6. Rotate the plate down to relieve tension on the belt.
7. Disconnect the belt at the front and back.

8. Lift the stapler mount [A] off its rails and turn it toward the rear so you can see the back
of the mount. The mount is on two steel rollers { and that rest on the bottom rail of
SM 107 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
the corner stapler unit.

Three sensors are on this bracket:
{ Rotation HP sensor (rear) ( x1, Pawls x5)
Rotation HP sensor (front) ( x1, Pawls x5)
} Stapler HP sensor ( x1, Pawls x5)
Re-installation
1. When you set the stapler mount on its rails, make sure the belt [A] is not tangled and
above the two rollers.
1.7.6 CORNER STAPLED STACK FEED OUT

Stack Transport Unit HP Sensor
Preparation
Rear upper cover
1. Remove the stacker transport motor
D434 108 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
2. Remove sensor bracket and sensor [A] ( x1).

3. Remove the sensor ( x1, Pawls x5)
Stack Transport Motor

Preparation
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
Rear upper cover
D434
Rear lower cover
SM 109 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
Stack Feed-Out Belt Motor
The stack feed-out belt motor is behind the front plate of the corner stack/staple unit.
Preparation
1. Behind the front plate [A], disconnect the motor ( x1).
D434 110 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
2. On the face of the front plate [B], remove the screws ( x2)
3. Remove the motor (Belt x1).

4. Separate the bracket and motor [A] ( x2).
Stack Feed-Out Belt HP Sensor

Preparation
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Remove bracket [A] ( x1, = x1)
SM 111 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
2. Disconnect the stack feed-out belt HP sensor (= x1, x2, Pawls x5).
The bottom fence HP sensor { (the photointerrupter without the feeler) is on the same
bracket as the stack feed-out belt HP sensor (sensor with feeler attached).
Stack Junction Gate Motor
The stack junction gate motor is on the back of the finisher.

Preparation
Rear upper cover
D434 112 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
2. Separate the bracket and motor [A] ( x2).
Stack JG HP Sensor
Preparation
Rear upper cover
SM 113 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
1. If the actuator [A] is in the gap of the sensor, rotate gear and belt [B] until the actuator
is out of the gap.
2. Remove sensor bracket [C] ( x1).
3. Remove sensor [A] ( x1, Pawls x5).
1.7.7 CORNER STAPLED STACKS EXIT TO SHIFT TRAY

Exit Guide Motor
The exit guide motor assembly is at the left rear corner of the finisher.
Preparation
Proof tray
D434 114 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
1. Disconnect the harnesses (= x2, x1).
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
2. Disconnect sensor harness [A] (= x3, x1)
3. Disconnect and remove rocker arm [A] ( x1).
SM 115 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
4. Remove the exit guide plate assembly [A] ( x2).
5. Disconnect motor [A] ( x2, Belt x1)

6. Separate the motor [B] and bracket ( x2).
Exit Guide HP Sensor

Preparation
Proof tray
1. Remove the exit guide motor assembly (see the previous procedure)
1. Remove sensor bracket [A] ( x1, x1)

2. Remove sensor [B] (Pawls x5).
D434 116 SM
Booklet Unit
1.8 BOOKLET UNIT
1.8.1 BOOKLET STAPLER

Preparation
Remove the booklet unit ( p.12).
This procedure describes removal of the booklet stapler after the booklet unit has
been removed.
Actually, the booklet stapler can be easily removed before removing the booklet
unit.
Removing the booklet stapler from the booklet stapler unit is recommended. This
makes the booklet unit lighter and easier to handle.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Remove cover [A] ( x2).
2. Remove the stapler unit [B] ( x4, x1)
3. Lift the stapler unit [A] out with its handle.

4. Four sensors are behind the stapler unit:
{ Rear jogger fence HP sensor
Front jogger fence HP sensor
} Bottom fence HP sensor
~ Folder unit entrance sensor
SM 117 D434
Booklet Unit
1.8.2 BOOKLET UNIT TRANSPORT, ENTRANCE

Fold Unit Entrance Sensor
Preparation
Booklet stapler

2. Remove sensor [B] ( x1, Pawls x5)
1.8.3 BOOKLET SIDE-TO-SIDE JOGGING

Booklet Stapler Side Fence Motor
The booklet stapler side fence motor is on the back of the booklet unit.
Preparation
D434 118 SM
Booklet Unit
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
Booklet Stapler Side Fence HP Sensor (Front)

Preparation
Booklet stapler
1. Remove:
SM 119 D434
Booklet Unit
Booklet Stapler Jogger HP Sensor (Rear)

Preparation
Booklet stapler
1. Remove:
1.8.4 BOOKLET BOTTOM/TOP JOGGING

Booklet Stapler Bottom Fence Motor
The booklet stapler bottom fence motor is on the back of the booklet unit.
Preparation
D434 120 SM
Booklet Unit
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
2. Separate the motor [A] from the bracket ( x2).
Booklet Stapler Bottom Fence HP Sensor

Preparation
Booklet stapler
The bottom fence HP sensor is fastened to the right plate of the booklet unit.
SM 121 D434
Booklet Unit
1. On the right side, remove brace [A] so that you can see the sensor pawls ( x2).
2. Release the pawls [B] and push them through the plate (Pawls x5).
3. Disconnect the sensor ( x1).
Booklet Stapler Top Fence Motor
The top fence motor and sensor are on top of the booklet unit.
D434 122 SM
Booklet Unit
Preparation
1. Remove sensor bracket [A] ( x1, x1)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
2. Separate motor [A] from the bracket ( x2)
Booklet Top Fence HP Sensor

Preparation

2. Remove sensor [B] (= x1, x1, Pawls x5)
SM 123 D434
Booklet Unit
1.8.5 BOOKLET PRESS FOR STAPLING

Booklet Stapler Clamp Roller Motor, Booklet Unit Exit Sensor
The clamp roller motor { and exit sensor cannot be removed until the motor base has
been removed.
Preparation
Motor Base Plate
1. Remove cover [A] ( x2).
D434 124 SM
Booklet Unit
2. Disconnect sensor bracket [A] and harness [B] ( x1, = x2, x1).
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
3. Disconnect motor harness [A] (= x6, x1).
4. Pull belt { until you can see through the hole that the edge of the actuator } below
the hole is aligned as shown.
The edge of the actuator and the line on the left side of the hole must be aligned.
This releases the clamp roller so that there is no pressure on the base plate.
SM 125 D434
Booklet Unit
5. Remove:
[A] Rear ( x2)
[B] Front ( x3)
6. Remove base plate [A].

7. Remove end-piece [B].
Exit Sensor
D434 126 SM
Booklet Unit
A guide shaft blocks access to the exit sensor bracket [A].
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Remove guide shaft screw [A] ( x1).
2. Rotate then slide the guide shaft [B] to the rear until you have enough space to remove
the bracket screw. (The guide does not need to be removed.)
3. Use a short screwdriver to remove the exit sensor bracket [A] ( x1).
4. Disconnect the exit sensor [B] ( x1, Pawls x5).
SM 127 D434
Booklet Unit
Clamp Roller Motor

Preparation
Motor base plate
1. Lay the motor base plate [A] on a flat surface.
2. Turn the base plate over.

3. Remove motor [A] ( x2, Belt x1).
Re-installation
To make sure there is no pressure on the base plate, pull belt { until you can see
D434 128 SM
Booklet Unit
through the hole that the edge of the actuator } below the hole is aligned as shown.
Turn gear [A] so that you can see the cut-out. The post of the linkage must be
re-inserted here when the motor base plate is re-installed.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
After the motor base plate [A] has been re-installed, the linkage will not be straight. It
will slant slightly from rear to front. This is normal.
SM 129 D434
Booklet Unit
Confirm that the ends of the vertical shafts fit correctly through the holes in the motor
base plate before you re-attach any screws.
Re-attach end-piece [A] at the front before you re-attach any other screws.
Booklet Stapler Clamp Roller Sensor

Preparation
D434 130 SM
Booklet Unit
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
3. Remove sensor [A] ( x1, Pawls x5).
SM 131 D434
Booklet Unit
1.8.6 BOOKLET FOLDING

Fold Plate Motor
The fold plate motor is on the back of the booklet unit, below the fold roller motor.
Preparation
1. Remove motor [A] ( x2, Belt x1)
D434 132 SM
Booklet Unit
Fold Plate Cam HP Sensor

Preparation
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
Fold roller motor (described in the previous section)
1. Remove sensor bracket [A] ( x1, = x1, x1).

2. Sensor (Pawls x5)
Fold Plate HP Sensor

Preparation
SM 133 D434
Booklet Unit
1. Remove:
[A] Rear ( x2)
[B] Front ( x2)
2. Remove cross-brace [A] (= x2, x1)
3. Sensor [A] (Pawls x5)
D434 134 SM
Booklet Unit
1.8.7 BOOKLET EXIT, BOOKLET TRAY

Fold Roller Motor
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
The fold roller motor is on the back of the booklet unit, above the fold plate motor.
Preparation
Remove the booklet unit ( p.117 "Booklet Stapler").
1. Remove motor [A] ( x2, Belt x1)
SM 135 D434
Booklet Unit
Booklet Stapler Exit Sensor

See "Booklet Stapler Clamp Roller Motor, Booklet Unit Exit Sensor" ( p.12).
Booklet Staple Tray Full Sensors (Upper/Lower)

These sensors are on the same bracket.
Preparation
Open the front door
Pull out the stack/staple unit with handle Rb12.
Right lower panel
Rear upper tray
1. Raise the shift tray if it is down.

2. At the top of the left rear corner, pull gear [A] out while supporting the tray [B] with your
other hand, then push the tray up.
D434 136 SM
Booklet Unit
3. Remove the booklet tray [A].

4. Remove the left lower cover [B] ( x3).
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
5. Remove the booklet tray actuator arm [A] ( x2).
6. Inside the finisher, open one or two clamps to create some slack in the harness. (=
x2)
SM 137 D434
Booklet Unit
7. Remove sensor bracket [A] ( x2)

{ Upper sensor (= x2, x1)
Lower sensor (= x1, x1)
D434 138 SM
Boards
1.9 BOARDS
1.9.1 SUB BOARD

The sub board can be removed without removing the main board.
Preparation
Rear upper cover
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Disconnect the harnesses ( x10).
2. Remove the sub board:
Screws {, ( x2)
Standoffs x3, }, ~,
3. Raise the board and disconnect it from the main board below.
1.9.2 MAIN BOARD

Preparation
Rear upper cover
Rear lower panel
Sub board
SM 139 D434
Boards
1. The sub board { and main board are on the back of the finisher.
2. Remove the sub board.
3. Disconnect the main board harnesses ( x38).
4. On the left, disconnect grid wires [A] and harnesses ( x2, = x5).
D434 140 SM
Boards
5. Open harness clamps:

[A] Top (= x3)
[B] Bottom (= x5)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
6. Remove the board bracket:
[A] Left ( x2)
[B] Top ( x1)
[C] Right ( x1)
SM 141 D434
Boards
7. Separate the board from the bracket ( x8)
1.9.3 PUNCH UNIT PCB
1. Remove the punch unit PCB ( x6, Standoffs x4).
1.9.4 SHIFT TRAY JOGGER UNIT PCB

Preparation
D434 142 SM
Boards
1. Lay the shift jogger unit [A] on a flat surface.

2. Disconnect motor [B]. ( x1)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
3. Remove PCB [A] ( x5, x2).
1.9.5 PSU
Preparation
Switch the system off.
Disconnect the finisher from its power source.
Wait at least 30 minutes for the PSU to cool.
Right lower panel
1. Remove the PSU board ( x6, x4)
SM 143 D434
Switches
1.10 SWITCHES
1.10.1 FRONT DOOR SWITCH

Preparation
Open the front door
Upper inner cover
1. Locate the door switch [A] on the front.

2. Inside the finisher, disconnect switch [B] ( x4).
3. Pinch both sides of the switch and push it out.
1.10.2 BREAKER SWITCH

Preparation
Switch the system off.
Disconnect the finisher from its power source.
Rear upper cover
D434 144 SM
Switches
Rear lower cover
1. Remove mounting bracket [A] ( x3).

2. Disconnect breaker switch [B] ( x4)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
3. Remove breaker switch [A] ( x2)
1.10.3 EMERGENCY SHIFT TRAY STOP SWITCH

Preparation
Left upper cover
SM 145 D434
Switches
The switch [A] is on the front end of the left upper cover.
1. Turn the cover over.

2. Remove the switch [A] ( x2, x1).
D434 146 SM
Rollers and Brushes
1.11 ROLLERS AND BRUSHES
1.11.1 ROLLERS
Drag Roller
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Replace:
[A] Rear ( x1, Belt x1)
[B] Front ( x1, Belt x1)
Positioning Roller
Preparation
Open the front door
1. Remove motor cover [A] ( x2).
SM 147 D434
Rollers and Brushes
2. Replace sponge roller [A] ( x1, Belt x1)
Alignment Brush Roller

Preparation
Open the front door
Lower inner cover Rb10, Rb11
Center inner cover Rb14, Rb 16
Right lower panel
Rear
1. Remove gear [A].

2. Remove gear and bushing (Gear x1, Belt x1, Bushing x1)
Front
D434 148 SM
Rollers and Brushes
1. Remove the bushing [A] ( x1).

2. Remove the alignment brush roller.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
Re-installation
1. The end of the shaft with the flat bevel is the rear end of the shaft where the gear and
belt must be re-attached.
SM 149 D434
Rollers and Brushes
1.11.2 DISCHARGE BRUSHES

Shift Tray Exit
1. Remove discharge brush [A] ( x2).
Corner Stapler Entrance

Preparation
Open the front door
2. Raise Rb13 [A].

3. Remove discharge brush [B] ( x2)
Booklet Unit Exit

Preparation
Remove booklet unit ( p.12).
D434 150 SM
Rollers and Brushes
The discharge brush [A] is on the left side of the booklet unit.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Remove:
[A] Rear ( x2)
[B] Front ( x2)
SM 151 D434
Special Adjustments
1.12 SPECIAL ADJUSTMENTS
1.12.1 HORIZONTAL SKEW

The booklet unit is adjusted for optimum performance before the finisher is shipped from
the factory. Do this adjustment only if the edges of folded booklets are not even.
1. Run a fold/staple job through the booklet unit with A3 (or DLT) paper.
2. Hold the folded sheet with the creased side pointing down and face-up (the same way
that it came out of the finisher).
3. Referring to the diagram above, determine if the skew is [A] or [B].

[A] indicates that the rear fence is low and must be raised.
[B] indicates that the front fence is low and must be raised.
Preparation
Pull the stack/staple unit out with handle Rb12
Remove the lower inner cover Rb10, Rb11
D434 152 SM
Special Adjustments
1. Before doing any adjustment:
Rotate the knob counter-clockwise { so that it is loose.
Rotate the knob clockwise until you feel some resistance, then stop.
2. Remove the screw.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
There is only one screw to remove. Check both holes.
The screw may be at the front or at the rear, depending on where it was
attached before shipping from the factory.
[A] Adjustment: Rear Fence Low
1. For [A] type skew, turn the adjustment screw on the front of the booklet unit to the left
(clockwise) to raise the rear fence.
Every notch adjusts the height 0.1 mm.
SM 153 D434
Special Adjustments
Turning the adjustment screw to the right may the rear fence so the holes at the rear
will no longer be aligned.
2. Re-attach the screw in the front hole where the holes are aligned.
[B] Adjustment: Front Fence Low
1. For [B] type skew, turn the adjustment screw on the front of the booklet unit to the
right (clockwise) to raise the front fence.
D434 154 SM
Special Adjustments
2. Re-attach the screw at the front hole.
1.12.2 VERTICAL SKEW

The booklet unit is adjusted for optimum performance before the finisher is shipped from
the factory. Do this adjustment only if the edges of folded booklets are not even.
1. Switch the main machine and do a test run for booklet folding with either A3 or DLT
paper
This procedure shows you how to test and adjust vertical skew for A3/DLT
paper.
This same adjustment can be done for other paper sizes as well with SP6201.
2. Look at the paper and determine what kind of skew (if any is present).
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
3. Referring to the diagram, determine if the skew is positive or negative.

4. Measure the amount of skew.
5. Enter the SP mode
Europe, Asia: Use SP6201-1 (this is for A3 paper).
North America: Use SP 6201-7 (this is for DLT paper).
The illustration above shows the effects of +/- adjustment with SP6201.
The vertical arrows show the direction of paper feed.
SM 155 D434
Special Adjustments
6. Enter one-half the measured amount of skew.
Example: If the measure amount of skew is -1.2 mm, enter -0.6 mm
The range for measurement is –2.0 mm to +2.0 mm in 0.2 mm steps for every
notch adjustment.
7. Exit the SP mode, do another test print and repeat the adjustment procedure if
necessary.
1.12.3 BOTTOM FENCE REPLACEMENT

Before You Begin
The bottom fences can be replaced together or together.
Only replacement of the front fence is described here. The replacement procedure for
the rear bottom fence is the same.
Preparation
Remove the booklet unit ( p.117 "Booklet Stapler")
1. Look at the corner staple unit from the left side:

[A] Rear bottom fence
[B] Front bottom fence
D434 156 SM
Special Adjustments
2. Use a socket wrench or socket driver to remove the bottom fence [A] ( x1).
These screws are very tight, so we recommend use of a socket wrench or

socket driver to avoid damaging the screw heads.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
This shows the front bottom fence removed.
The mount where the new bottom fence will be attached has a scale on each side { and .
SM 157 D434
Special Adjustments
1. Attach both the rear and front screws.
Do not tighten the front screw.
Align the rear screw with the center line of the rear scale { and tighten it slightly.
Leave the front screw loose.
2. On the right side, set a sheet of A3 (or DLT) paper in the tray.
3. Look under the unit to confirm that the edge of the paper is flat and level on the side
fence.
D434 158 SM
Special Adjustments
4. Align the front end of the fence at with the center line of its scale and tighten the front
screw.
5. Check the alignment of the paper again.
6. If the paper is slightly out of alignment, adjust the front of the bottom fence to the paper
and tighten the front screw.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
SM 159 D434
Paper Path
2. DETAILS
2.1 PAPER PATH
Straight-Through
Paper enters the finisher at {, continues past both closed junction gates, and exits the
finisher onto the shift tray .
Proof Tray
Paper enters the finisher at {. The staple tray junction gate remains closed, the proof tray
junction gate opens and guides the paper into the vertical paper path. The paper exits the
finisher onto the proof tray }.
Corner Stapling
Paper enters the finisher at {. The staple tray junction gate opens and guides the paper
down to the pre-stacker ~. Paper (up to 5 sheets) is held in the pre-stacker long enough for
the downstream stack to be stapled. The paper enters the corner stapling unit where it is
aligned (by the top fence, bottom fence, and side fences) and then stapled. The feed-out
belt raises the stack. The exit rollers feed the stack onto the shift tray .
D434 160 SM
Paper Path
Booklet Folding, Stapling

Paper enters the finisher at {. The staple tray junction gate opens and guides the paper
down to the pre-stacker ~. Paper (up to 5 sheets) is held in the pre-stacker long enough for
the downstream stack to be jogged and stapled. The paper enters the corner stapling unit
where it is aligned by the top fence, bottom fence, and side fences. The feed-out belt
raises the stack. The stack junction gate opens and guides to the stack to the booklet unit
. The booklet unit staples and folds the paper in the center. The booklet unit exit rollers
feed the paper onto the booklet tray .
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
SM 161 D434
Proof Tray, Stapler Junction Gates
2.2 PROOF TRAY, STAPLER JUNCTION GATES
Depending on the finishing mode, the copies are directed up, straight through, or down by
the combinations of opened and closed junction gates.
Selected Operation Mode

Motor/Gate
Proof tray Shift Staple
[A] Proof tray JG motor ON Off Off
[B] Proof tray junction gate OPEN Closed Closed
[C] Stapler junction gate Closed Closed OPEN
[D] Stapler JG motor Off Off ON
D434 162 SM
Punch Unit
2.3 PUNCH UNIT
2.3.1 PUNCH UNIT DRIVE
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
The punch unit movement motor moves the punch unit above the paper (centered in the
paper path) to the correct punch position.
The optimum position is determined by input from the side-to-side registration sensor
mounted above the paper path. This sensor unit is equipped with a CIS (Contact Image
Sensor) mechanism.
While it is not in use the punch unit resides 7.5 mm to the front of center. This is the standy
position (home position) of the punch unit. When the CIS unit detects a sheet of paper in
the paper path below, it signals the punch unit PCB which switches on the punch
movement motor and moves the punch unit far enough to compensate for any diffence
between the present position of the paper and the correct position for punching.
SM 163 D434
Punch Unit
Next, the punch unit, a straight punch (not a rotator punch) punches the paper. The punch
hammers are driven by the punch drive motor.
After it punches the paper the punch movement motor returns the punch unit to its home
position. The punch unit HP sensor detects the actuator on the side of the punch unit and
switches off the punch movement motor when the unit reaches its home position. The
punch unit waits here for the next sheet.
The following diagram summarizes operation of the punch unit above the paper path.
D434 164 SM
Punch Unit
2.3.2 PUNCH-OUT COLLECTION
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
Punch-outs are collected in the punch-out hopper [A] positioned under the punch unit.
When the level of the punch-outs in the hopper rises as far as the hole [B] in the hopper,
the punch hopper full sensor [C] turns on, stops the job, and triggers a message on the
operation to indicate that the hopper is full and must be removed and emptied.
The job resumes automatically after the hopper is emptied and returned to the finisher.
The punch hopper full sensor also functions as the hopper set sensor. When the hopper is
not in the finisher, or if it is not inserted completely, the spring loaded sensor arm rotates up
and to the right with the punch-out sensor away from the hole in the hopper holder and a
message is displayed. The message in this case is the same as the hopper full message.
SM 165 D434
Pre-Stacking
2.4 PRE-STACKING
In the staple mode paper is guided from the horizontal feed path to the corner staple unit
below by the the stapler junction gate. But before the first sheets of paper reach the
stapling tray, they are stopped and shunted into the pre-stacker where they are held long
enough for the stack ahead to be aligned and stapled.
2.4.1 PAPER SIZES A4 AND SMALLER
The first sheet (red line in the drawing above) is directed in the pre-stack paper path by the
staple junction gate. The sheet brushes past the spring loaded pre-stack junction gate. The
weight of the paper allows it to push past the junction gate and then the spring attached to
the gate pulls it closed.
The pre-stack paper sensor detects each sheet of paper that enters the pre-stack paper
path. The sensor switches on the pre-stack motor that rotates the 1st and 2nd pre-stack
rollers to feed the leading edge of the paper the prescribed distance (a).
The motor stops, reverseses, and the rollers feed the paper under the pre-stacker junction
gate and into the shunt of the pre-stacker unit where the leading edge of the paper stops at
the nip of the 1st pre-stack rollers (b).
Next, the 2nd sheet (blue line in the drawing above) feeds (c). When it reaches the 1st
pre-stack rollers, the pre-stack roller motor switches on and the 1st and 2nd sheets feed
together (d). The pre-stack motor reverses again and both sheets are fed up into the shunt.
This cycle can repeat up to 5 times until finally, after one additional sheet feeds, all 6 of the
sheets are fed together to the corner stapling tray.
Up to 4 sheets are held in the pre-stack unit for stapling at one corner.
Up to 5 sheets are held in the pre-stack unit for stapling at two places on the edge of
the stack.
2.4.2 PAPER SIZES B4 AND LARGER

The sequence of events in the pre-stacker unit for large paper sizes is the same as that for
D434 166 SM
Pre-Stacking
A4 and smaller sizes with one important exception.
Before large paper sizes are fed in staple mode, the pre-stack release motor switches on
and pulls the drive roller of the 1st pre-stack roller pair away from its idle roller (a). The
forward and reverse feeding is performed by the pre-stack motor driving the 2nd pre-stack
rollers and feeding the paper only as far as the nip of the 2nd pre-stack rollers. The nip of
the 1st pre-stack rollers remains open.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
Reverse feeding the leading edges as far as the 2nd pre-stack rollers saves time. (Reverse
and forward feeding the leading edges as far as the 1st pre-stack rollers would require
more time.)
SM 167 D434
Jogger Unit Paper Positioning
2.5 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING
In the staple mode, as every sheet of paper arrives in the jogger unit, it is vertically and
horizontally aligned, then the staple edge is pressed flat to ensure the edge of the stack is
aligned correctly for stapling.
Vertical Paper Alignment: After the trailing edge of the copy passes the staple tray
entrance sensor [A], the positioning roller motor [B] is energized to push the positioning
roller [C] into contact with the paper. The positioning roller and alignment brush roller [D]
rotate to push the paper back and align the trailing edge of the paper against the bottom
fence [E].
Horizontal Paper Alignment: When the jog starts the jogger motor [F] turns on and the
jogger fences [G] move to the wait position slightly wider than the selected paper size on
both sides. When the trailing edge of the paper passes the staple tray entrance sensor, the
jogger motor moves the jogger fences closer to the paper. Next, the jogger motor turns on,
both jogger fences move against the sides of thestack to align it, then side fences return to
the wait position.
Paper Stack Correction: After the paper is aligned in the stapler tray, the left [H], center [I],
D434 168 SM
Jogger Unit Paper Positioning
and right [J] stack plate motors switch on briefly and drive the front stack, center stack, and
rear stack plates against the edge of the stack to flatten the edge completely against the
staple tray for stapling. When the next copy paper turns on the stapler entrance sensor, the
stack plate motors turn on and return to their home positions. The home positions are
detected by stack plate HP sensors , , .
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
SM 169 D434
Stapling
2.6 STAPLING
Here is the operation sequence for jogging and stapling:
{ Paper enters the tray from the pre-stacker.
Bottom fence rises to catch the paper.
Top fence descends as far as the edge of the paper.
Positioning roller starts rotating and descends, feeding each sheet down.
Alignment roller (a brush roller) also feeds the paper toward the bottom fence to

align the edge.
The bottom fence motor lowers the aligned stack to the stapling position.
The corner stapler staples the stack.
D434 170 SM
Stapler Unit Movement
2.7 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
Side-to-Side
D434
The stapler motor [A] moves the stapler [B] from side to side. After the start key is pressed,
the stapler moves from its home position to the stapling position.
If two-staple-position mode is selected, for the first stack the stapler moves to the rear
stapling position first, staples, moves to the front position, staples and waits at the front. For
the second stack, the stapler staples the front corner first, then moves to the rear corner
and staples.
For continuous stapling jobs, the corners are stapled rear then front for the odd number
stacks and stapled front then rear for even number stacks.
After the job is completed, the stapler returns to its home position. This is detected by the
stapler HP sensor [C].
SM 171 D434
Stapler Unit Movement
Rotation (1)
In the oblique staple position mode, the stapler rotation motor [A] rotates the stapler unit [B]
45° to counterclockwise after it moves to the stapling position.
Rotation (2)
When the staple end condition arises, the stapler motor moves the stapler to the front and
the stapler rotation motor rotates the stapler unit to clockwise to remove the staple cartridge
[C]. This allows the user to add new staples.
Once the staples have been installed, and the front door closed, the stapler unit returns to
its home position.
Sensors
Two sensors [D] and [E] detect the angle of the stapler. There are three positions:
horizontal, 45 degrees, 75 degrees.
D434 172 SM
Stapler
2.8 STAPLER
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
When the staple cartridge is locked and in position, actuator [A] deactivates the cartridge
set sensor [B] and the stapler is ready for operation.
When aligned copies are brought to the stapling position by the positioning roller and
jogger fences, the staple hammer motor [C] starts stapling.
During stapling, the stapler trims off the excess length of the staples. This length of the
trimmings depends on the number of copies in the set. They will be very small for a stack
containing 100 sheets.
The staple trimmings drop into the trap door [D] inside the stapler. When the stapler unit
returns to its home position, solenoid [E] energizes opens the trap door.
The staple trimmings drop into the staple trimmings hopper [F].
The staple trimmings hopper descends as it fills, until actuator [G] activates the staple
trimmings hopper full sensor [H]. A message asks the user to empty the staple trimmings.
SM 173 D434
Stapler
The stapler has a staple end sensor [A] and cartridge set sensor [B]. When the staple
cartridge is inserted, it pushes the actuator [C] into the gap of the cartridge set sensor. This
tells the machine the stapler is ready for operation.
When a staple end or no cartridge condition is detected, a message is displayed advising
the operator to install a staple cartridge. If this condition is detected during a copy job, the
indication will appear, and the copy job will stop.
The staple cartridge has a clinch area [D] where jammed staples collect. The operator can
remove the jammed staples from the clinch area by raising and lowering bracket lever [E].
D434 174 SM
Feed-Out
2.9 FEED-OUT
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
After the copies have been stapled, the stack feed-out motor [A] starts.
D434
The pawl [B] on the stack feed-out belt [C] transports the set of stapled copies up and feeds
it to the shift tray exit roller [D].
When stapling starts, the exit guide motor [E] opens the upper exit guide [F], which
includes the upper shift tray exit roller [G], in order to feed out the leading edge of the copy
set smoothly.
The exit guide motor turns on again at the prescribed time after stapling finishes, and the
upper exit guide plate is lowered. Then the shift tray exit roller takes over the stack
feed-out.
The on-off timing of the exit guide motor is detected by the exit guide open sensor [H].
The stack-feed-out motor turns off when the pawl actuates the stack feed-out belt home
position sensor [I].
SM 175 D434
Paper Exit
2.10 PAPER EXIT
The drag roller assembly [A] is fastened to a plate [B] on a shaft by a spring [C]. The cam
[D], in contact with the bottom of the plate, is connected to the drag drive motor [E] via a
timing belt.
The drag drive motor and timing belt rotate the cam against the bottom of the plate to move
the rollers forward and back with each sheet ejected onto the shift tray.
The drag roller motor [F] drives the shaft [G] that rotates the drag rollers counter-clockwise
as the rollers move back. The simultaneous rotation and backward movement of the roller
assembly pulls each sheet back toward the copier to align the edges of the stack on the
shift tray.
The actuator [H] is mounted on the cam and rotating with both rotating clockwise) and
detects the roller assembly home position when the actuator leaves the gap of the drag
drive HP sensor [I] and signals the machine that the rollers are at the home position. The
machine uses this information to control paper feed timing and confirm that the mechanism
is operating correctly. The cam and actuator make one complete rotation for every sheet
fed out of the machine onto the shift tray.
D434 176 SM
Shift Tray Operation
2.11 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION
2.11.1 OVERVIEW
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
The movement of the shift tray is controlled by four sensors , , , and and a feeler [A]
with two actuators [B] and [C].
The notched actuator [B] is used with sensors and .
The flat actuator [C] is used with sensor .
Sensor is provided with its own actuator [D].
The operation mode determines which sensor is used to control the movement of the shift
tray.
Sensor Names
No. Name
Paper Height Sensor – Staple Mode
Paper Height Sensor – Standby Mode
Paper Height Sensor – Z-Fold Full
SM 177 D434
Paper Height Sensor – Shift/Z-Fold
Sensors and Operation Modes
Mode Function
Sensor detects the amount of paper on the shift tray in shift mode
Shift
to control operation of the tray lift motor.
Sensor detects the amount of paper on the shift tray in staple

Staple
mode to control the tray lift motor.
When the machine is turned on, Sensor is used to position the tray
at the standby position and keep it there when the shift is not in use
or when the proof tray (proof tray) is used.
If the shift tray is not attached to the machine (if it has been removed
Standby
for servicing, for example), if the machine is switched on the tray
mount will push up the feeler and switch off Sensor to switch off
the tray lift motor. (Sensor cannot operate if the tray has been
removed.)
Z-Fold, Z-Fold Sensor detects the height of the tray when the output includes
D434 178 SM
Staple Z-folded sheets with and without stapling.

Sensor detects when the tray is full when the output includes
Z-folded sheets with and without stapling.
2.11.2 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION: STAND-BY MODE
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
Standby Mode
When the machine is switched on:
1. The shift tray lift motor switches on and lowers the tray.
2. The feeler [A] descends and raises the hooked actuator [B] out of the gap of Sensor .
3. When Sensor cannot detect the actuator this reverses the shift tray motor.
4. The shift tray lift motor raises the shift tray and pushes up the feeler, the actuator
descends into the gap of Sensor .
5. When Sensor detects the actuator this stops the shift tray lift motor with the shift tray
at the standby position.
This sequence repeats every time the machine is powered on.
Sensor also switches off the shift tray lift motor:
When the machine is switched on with the shift tray removed for servicing.
When the machine is switched on without the shift tray attached to the side of the
finisher:
SM 179 D434
1. The shift tray mount will push the feeler [A] up until the actuator [B] enters the gap of
Sensor .
2. When Sensor detects the actuator this switches the shift tray motor OFF and stops
the tray.
Sensor cannot operate with the shift tray removed so Sensor is used to switch
off the shift tray motor and stop the shift tray mount.
2.11.3 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION: SHIFT MODE
Sensor and its feeler [A] and actuator [B] control the movement of the shift tray when
paper is output in the shift mode:
1. Paper is output to the tray.
2. As the height of the stack increases, this pushes up the feeler [A].
3. When Sensor detects the actuator [B] of the ascending feeler, this switches the tray
lift motor ON.
4. The tray lift motor lowers the tray until the feeler descends far enough to raise the
actuator out of the gap of Sensor .
5. When Sensor can no longer detect the actuator, this switches the motor OFF, and
stops the tray.
The sequence repeats until the end of the job or until the tray becomes full.
D434 180 SM
2.11.4 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION: STAPLE MODE
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
Sensor , feeler [A] and its notched actuator [B] control the movement of the shift tray
when paper is output to the shift tray in the staple mode:
1. A stapled stack is output to the tray.
2. The tray lift motor switches ON and lowers the tray the prescribed distance.
3. Next, the tray lift motor raises the tray and feeler [A] until actuator [B] leaves the gap of
Sensor .
4. When the actuator [b] leaves the gap of sensor , and the sensor can no longer detect
the actuator this switches the tray lift motor OFF and stops the tray.
This sequence repeats every time a stack is output to the tray until the end of the job or
until the tray becomes full.
SM 181 D434
2.11.5 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION: Z-FOLDED PAPER
Sensor and its feeler [A] and actuator [B], and Sensor with its feeler [C] and flat
actuator [D] control the movement of the shift tray when Z-folded paper is output to the shift
tray.
1. Z-folded paper is output to the tray.
2. As the height of the stack increases, this pushes up feeler [A] of Sensor .
3. When the actuator [B] of the ascending feeler enters the gap of Sensor , this
switches the tray lift motor ON.
4. The tray lift motor lowers the tray until the feeler descends far enough to raise the
actuator out of the gap of Sensor .
5. When the actuator leaves the gap of Sensor , this switches the motor OFF, and stops
the tray.
6. Steps 1 to 5 repeat until the top of the paper stack pushes feeler [C] up and actuator
[C] into the gap of Sensor .
7. When the actuator enters the gap of Sensor , this signals that the tray is full and
stops the job.
D434 182 SM
2.11.6 SHIFT TRAY PAPER HEIGHT SENSORS
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
This machine has four shift tray full sensors mounted near the left rear rail of the shift tray.
When the actuator enters the gap of the sensor assigned to the paper size in use, this
signals approximately how much paper is on the tray.
Shift Tray Full Sensor Detects Tray Full For:
{ 500 A5, HLT paper (500 sheets).
1000 SR_A3 (320 x 450 mm) paper (1000 sheets).
} 1500 A3, DLT paper (1500 sheets).
~ 2500 A4, LT paper (2500 sheets).
SM 183 D434
Shift Tray Side-To-Side Movement
2.12 SHIFT TRAY SIDE-TO-SIDE MOVEMENT
In shift mode, the shift tray [A] moves from side to side between sets to stagger the sets to
make them easier to separate.
The horizontal position of the shift tray is controlled by the shift motor [B] and shift gear disk
[C]. After one set of copies is made and delivered to the shift tray, the shift motor turns on,
driving the shift gear disk and the shaft [D]. The end fence [E] is positioned by the shaft,
creating the side-to-side movement.
The next set of copies is then delivered. The motor turns on, repeating the same process
and moving the tray back to the previous position.
The disk is rotated alternately clockwise and counter-clockwise through an arc of 180
degrees.
The notches cut into the shift gear disk control the operation of the shift motor, using shift
tray half-turn sensors [F] and [G].
If the job ends with the disk at with only one sensor deactivated, the motor rotates the
disk to the position where both sensors are deactivated. This is the home position.
D434 184 SM
2.13.1 JOGGER UNIT MECHANICAL LAYOUT
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
2. Shift Tray Jogger Motor Timing Belt
4. Shift Tray Jogger Fence Timing Belt
5. Shift Tray Jogger Fences
7. Shift Tray Jogger Retract HP Sensor
SM 185 D434
2.13.2 JOGGER UNIT DRIVE
After the first sheet exits, the shift tray jogger motor [A] switches on and rotates the jogger
timing belt [B], gear [C] and jogger fence timing belt [D]. This closes the jogger fences [E]
against the sides of the first sheet to align it and stops. Next, the motor reverses to open
the fences for the next sheet. The jogger motor alternates its direction of rotation to open
and close the jogger fences. The timing is prescribed by the width of the paper selected for
the job.
At the end of the job, the actuator [F] activates the shift tray jogger HP sensor [G] which
shuts off the jogger motor and starts the jogger fence retraction motor [H].
The jogger fence retraction motor rotates the shaft which raises the jogger fences and
lowers the actuator [I] into the slot of the jogger fence retraction HP sensor [J]. The
activated sensor turns off the jogger fence retraction motor and the jogger fences remain at
the raised position.
D434 186 SM
Booklet Unit
2.14 BOOKLET UNIT
2.14.1 OVERVIEW
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
Rotates up, descends and tamps the top of the stack to align the
Booklet top fence
stack vertically against the bottom fence.
Booklet side fences (Not shown) Align the sides of the stack (front-to-rear).
Bottom fence catches the stack. Aligns the stack vertically with the
Booklet bottom
top fence. Also lowers and raises the stack to the stapling position
fence
and folding postion after stapling.
Feed the stack into the booklet unit. After the stack is in the booklet
Clamp roller pair unit the clamp roller releases the booklet so it can be positioned for
stapling and folding.
SM 187 D434
Booklet Unit
Booklet stapler unit Staples the booklet with two staples at the center fold.
Pushes the fold plate into the center of the stack toward the nip of
Fold plate
the fold rollers.
Fold rollers Fold the stack along its spine after stapling.
The crease roller runs rear to front, then front to rear to sharpen the
Crease roller
crease in the fold created by the fold plate and fold rollers.
Exit rollers Feed the booklet out of the booklet unit onto the booklet tray.
Sensors
Corner stapler entrance sensor
Detects the stack when it enters the corner stapling tray. This triggers positioning
and top/bottom jogging on the corner stapling tray before the stack is sent to the
booklet unit.
Stack feed-out belt HP sensor
Detects the home position of the stack feed-out belt that feeds the stack from the
corner stapling tray into the booklet unit.
Booklet top fence sensor
Detects the home position of the booklet top fence.
Fold unit entrance sensor
Detects each stack as it enters the booklet unit.
Fold plate HP sensor
Detects when the fold plate is in and out of its home position.
Booklet bottom fence HP sensor
Detects when the bottom fence is in and out of its home position.
Exit sensor
Detects each folding and stapled booklet as it leaves the booklet unit.
D434 188 SM
Booklet Unit
2.14.2 FOLDING, STAPLING OPERATION
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
The stack is fed onto the stapling tray of the corner stapler unit where the sides of the stack
are aligned by the side fences and the top and bottom aligned by the top and bottom
fences [A]. The stack feed-out belt motor turns on and swings the stack feed-out belt pawl
[B] up between the bottom fences and catches the edge of the stack and raises it upward.
The stack JG motor switches on and closes the stack junction gate just before the top of
the stack reaches the top of the stapling tray. This guides the stack into the vertical path of
the booklet unit.
SM 189 D434
Booklet Unit
The booklet unit entrance sensor detects the stack in the booklet unit and triggers the
following sequence.
After the stack enters the booklet unit the stack JG motor reverses and opens the stack
junction gate.
The bottom fence motor switches on and lowers the bottom fence to the stapling
position. The stapling position is prescribed by the size of the paper.
The clamp rollers feed the booklet down to the bottom fence. The stack transport
motor stops and the clamp rollers stop.
The booklet unit bottom fence [A] stops stack here for stapling.
D434 190 SM
Booklet Unit
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
The clamp roller motor switches on and retracts the clamp roller [A] to open the nip of
the clamp rollers.
The booklet stapler side fence motor switches on and aligns the sides of the stack (not
shown above).
The top fence motor switches on and the top fence [B] rotates up, swings down, and
tamps the top of the stack to align the top and bottom edge.
The booklet stapler staples the stack in the center [C] at two locations.
SM 191 D434
Booklet Unit
The top fence motor reverses and returns the top fence to its home position [A]. The
top fence HP sensor detects the top fence and switches off the top fence motor.
The bottom fence motor switches on and raises the stapled stack to the folding position,
centering the stack on the edge of the fold plate. Once again, this position is prescribed
by the size of the paper.
D434 192 SM
Booklet Unit
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
The fold plate motor and fold roller motors switch on.
The fold plate motor pushes the center [A] of the stack into the nip of the rotating folder
rollers [B].
SM 193 D434
Booklet Unit
The fold roller motor and fold rollers [A] (controlled by a cam) rotate long enough to
feed the folded edge as far as the crease roller.
The fold rollers retract, the fold plate returns to its home position, and the bottom plate
returns to its home position.
The crease roller motor switches on and drives the crease roller [B] along the length of
the fold from rear to front, reverses, and drives the roller front to rear. The motor
switches off after the crease roller returns to its home position at the rear.
D434 194 SM
Booklet Unit
1. Timing Belt 4. Creases Roller movable range

2. Guide Shaft 5. Crease Roller
3. Guide Plate 6. Spring
Here is a side view of the crease roller mechanism.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
The spring loaded crease roller mounted on a steel guide shaft applies pressure to the
D434
stapled and folded edge as it is driven rear to front and the front to rear.
Finally, the fold rollers [A] once again clamp the booklet and together with the exit rollers [B]
feed the booklet out of the booklet unit onto the booklet tray.
SM 195 D434
Electrical Components
2.15.1 GENERAL LAYOUT
1. Proof Tray 11. Feed-Out Belt
2. Vertical Paper Path 12. Corner Stapler
3. Proof Tray Junction Gate 13. Trimmings Hopper Unit
4. Staple Tray Junction Gate 14. Booklet Unit
5. Finisher Entrance 15. Booklet Bottom Fence
6. Pre-Stack Tray 16. Booklet Tray
7. Corner Stapler Unit 17. Fold Rollers
8. Corner Staple Tray 18. Booklet Top Fence
9. Positioning Roller 19. Shift Tray
10. Bottom Fence 20. Shift Tray Jogger Unit
D434 196 SM
2.15.2 MOTORS
Main Motors
These are the main motors, viewed from the rear with the rear covers removed.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Registration Motor 5. Horizontal Transport Motor
2. Proof Tray Vertical Transport Motor 6. Pre-Stack Motor
3. Proof Tray Exit Motor 7. Entrance Roller Motor
4. Shift Tray Exit Motor
SM 197 D434
Paper Transport Motors
1. Entrance Roller Motor 10. Booklet Stapler Clamp Roller Motor
2. Registration Motor 11. Fold Roller Motor
3. Horizontal Transport Motor 12. Fold Plate Motor
4. Proof Tray Vertical Transport Motor 13. Booklet Side Fence Motors (x2)
5. Proof Tray Exit Motor 14. Booklet Bottom Fence Motor
6. Shift Tray Exit Motor 15. Stack Feed-Out Belt Motor
7. Stack Transport Motor 16. Stapling Tray Entrance Motor
8. Stack JG Motor 17. Pre-Stack Motor
9. Booklet Stapler Top Fence Motor 18. Positioning Roller Rotation Motor
D434 198 SM
Operation Motors
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Stapler JG Motor 9. Stack Transport Motor
2. Proof Tray JG Motor 10. Shift Motor
3. Stack JG Motor 11. Stapler Movement Motor
4. Tray Lift Motor 12. Stapler Rotation Motor
5. Shift Jogger Motor 13. Edge Press Motors (x3)
6. Shift Jogger Retraction Motor 14. Positioning Roller Motor
7. Drag Roller Drive Motor 15. Pre-Stack Release Motor
8. Drag Roller Motor
SM 199 D434
2.15.3 SENSORS
Paper Path Sensors
1. Entrance Sensor 5. Proof Tray Exit Sensor
2. Pre-Stack Paper Sensor 6. Proof Tray Full Sensor
3. Stapler JG HP Sensor 7. Shift Tray Exit Sensor: Short
4. Proof Tray HP JG Sensor 8. Shift Tray Exit Sensor: Long
D434 200 SM
Sensors around the Shift Tray, Trimmings Hopper
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Tray Lift Motor 9. Shift Motor
2. Drag Drive Motor 10. Shift Tray Full Sensor (500)
3. Drag Roller Motor 11. Shift Tray Full Sensor (1000)
4. Drag Roller HP Sensor 12. Shift Tray Full Sensor (1500)
5. Shift Tray Upper Limit Switch 13. Shift Tray Full Sensor (2500)
6. Paper Height Sensor (TE) 14. Trimmings Hopper Set Sensor
7. Shift Tray HP Sensor: Front 15. Trimmings Hopper Full Sensor
8. Shift Tray HP Sensor: Rear
SM 201 D434
3. Shift Tray Jogger Retract HP Sensor
4. Shift Tray Jogger Unit PCB
D434 202 SM
2.15.4 CORNER STAPLER
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Stack JG HP Sensor 6. Top Fence HP Sensor
2. Stack JG Motor 7. Corner Stapler Top Fence Motor
3. Stack Transport Motor 8. Stapling Tray Paper Sensor
4. Stack Transport Unit HP Sensor 9. Feed-Out Belt HP Sensor
5. Stack Transport Motor 10. Stack Feed-Out Belt Motor
SM 203 D434
1. Positioning Roller Rotation Motor 7. Stack Plate Motor: Rear
2. Positioning Roller Motor 8. Stack Plate HP Sensor: Center
3. Positioning Roller HP Sensor 9. Stack Plate Motor: Rear
4. Stapling Tray Entrance Motor 10. Stack Plate Motor HP Sensor: Front
5. Stapling Tray Entrance Sensor 11. Stack Plate Motor: Front
6. Stack Plate HP Sensor: Rear
D434 204 SM
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Bottom Fence Motor 7. Stapler Rotation Motor
2. Rear Jogger Fence HP Sensor 8. Stapler HP Sensor
3. Rear Jogger Fence Motor 9. Rotation HP Sensor: Front
4. Bottom Fence HP Sensor 10. Rotation HP Sensor: Rear
5. Corner Stapler Movement Motor 11. Front Fence Jogger Motor
6. Trimmings Trap Door Solenoid 12. Front Fence HP Sensor
SM 205 D434
2.15.5 BOOKLET STAPLER
1. Bottom Fence Motor 9. Clamp Roller Motor
2. Booklet Stapler Side Fence Motor 10. Side Fence HP Sensor: Rear
3. Fold Plate Motor 11. Booklet Stapler (S2)
4. Fold Roller Motor 12. Booklet Unit Entrance Sensor
5. Side Fence HP Sensor: Rear 13. Booklet Stapler (S2)
6. Top Fence Sensor 14. Booklet Stapler Tray Full Sensor: Upper
7. Bottom Fence HP Sensor 15. Booklet Stapler Tray Full Sensor: Lower
8. Top Fence Motor 16. Booklet Unit Exit Sensor
D434 206 SM
2.15.6 PUNCH UNIT
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Punch Unit PCB 6. Punch Blade HP Sensor
2. Punch RPS Sensor 7. Punch Registration Sensor
3. Punch Drive Motor 8. Punch-out Hopper Full Sensor
4. Punch Unit HP Sensor 9. CIS
5. Punch Movement Motor
SM 207 D434
2.15.7 BOARDS, SWITCHES
1. Main Board
2. Sub Board
3. Front Door Switch
4. Emergency Shift Tray Stop Switch
5. PSU
6. Breaker Switch
Motors
Proof Tray Vertical Drives the transport rollers in the vertical paper path from
M36
Transport Motor the proof tray junction gate to the proof tray exit.
D434 208 SM
Switches the punch mechanism for number of holes

M43 Punch Switch Motor
selected for punching. (EU punch unit only.)
Drives the crank mechanism that moves the shift tray to

M11 Shift Motor
the rear and front.
M6 Shift Tray Exit Motor Drives the shift tray exit rollers.
Moves the shift jogger fences forward and back during

M7 Shift Jogger Motor alignment of the front and back edges of the stack on the
shift tray.
Shift Jogger Rotates the shift jogger fences up during alignment of the
M8
Retraction Motor front and back edges of the stack on the shift tray.
M10 Drag Roller Motor Rotates the drag roller.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
M9 Drag Drive Motor Moves the drag roller left and right.
D434
M1 Shift Tray Lift Motor Raises and lowers the shift tray.
Operates the junction gate that guides paper to the shift

M3 Stapler JG Motor
tray or to the stapler unit.
Stapling Tray
M23 Drives the rollers that feed paper into the stapling tray.
Entrance Motor
Front Jogger Fence Operates the front jogger fence when the paper stack is
M17
Motor aligned (front/back) on the stapling tray.
Rear Jogger Fence Operates the rear jogger fence when the paper stack is
M16
Motor aligned (front/back) on the stapling tray.
Positioning Roller Drives the rotation of the positioning roller above the
M21
Rotation Motor stapling tray.
Positioning Roller
M22 Operates the position roller above the stapling tray.
Motor
Operates the jogger fence at the leading edge to align the

Booklet Stapler
M30 leading edge of the stack in the direction of paper feed for
Bottom Fence Motor
stapling in the booklet stapler unit.
SM 209 D434
Bottom Fence Lift Operates the bottom fence that lifts the stack on the
M12
Motor stapling tray.
Operates the pressure plate that presses against trailing

Stack Plate Motor
M18 edge of the stack on the stapling tray just before the stack
(Rear)
is stapled.

Stack Plate Motor
(Center)
is stapled.

Stack Plate Motor
(Front)
is stapled.
Corner Stapler Moves the corner stapler toward the rear (and to the
M27
Movement Motor front?).
Stapler Rotation
M26 Rotates the corner stapling for diagonal stapling.
Motor
Stack Feed-Out Belt Drives the feed-out belt that feeds corner stapled paper to
M14
Motor the shift tray.
M4 Exit Guide Motor Opens and closes the exit guide.
Operates the junction gate that guides paper into the

M24 Stack JG Motor
booklet stapler.
Stack Transport Drives the transport rollers that feed stacks into the
M25
Motor booklet stapler feed path.
Stack Transport Unit Lifts and releases rollers that feed the stack to the booklet
M13
Motor stapler.
Booklet Stapler Side Operates the jogger fences that align the front and back
M31
Fence Motor edges of the stack for stapling in the booklet stapler unit.
Booklet Stapler Operates the jogger fence that aligns the trailing edge of
M32
Bottom Fence Motor the stack for stapling in the booklet stapler unit.
M15 Booklet Stapler Top Operates the top fence that aligns the leading edge of the
D434 210 SM
Fence Motor paper stack on the stapling tray.
Operates the fold plate pushed into the center of the stack
M33 Fold Plate Motor
to start center folding.
Operates the roller that folds the stack into halves during
M34 Fold Roller Motor
center folding in the folder unit.
Entrance Roller
M38 Drives the entrance roller.
Motor
M37 Registration Motor Drives the registration roller.
Horizontal Transport Drives the transport roller on the downstream side of the
M5
Motor punch unit.
Punch Movement Operates the left/right and front/back movement of the

M41
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
Motor punch unit.
D434
M42 Punch Drive Motor Drives the paper punch mechanism inside the punch unit.
Operates the junction gate that guides paper to the shift

M2 Proof Tray JG Motor
tray or to the upper tray.
M35 Proof Tray Exit Motor Operates the rollers that feed paper to the proof tray.
M40 Pre-Stack Motor Drives the pre-stack roller.
Pre-Stack Release Moves the pre-stack roller to relieve feed (transport)

M39
Motor pressure on the stack.
Corner Stapler Motor: This is the relay connector to the harness of the stapling
M
CN411 mechanism of the corner stapler.
Corner Stapler Motor: This is the relay connector to the signal harness of the
M
CN413 corner stapler.
Moves the booklet stapler transport roller to release

Booklet Stapler
M29 pressure on the stack. Also drives the horizontal fold
Clamp Roller Motor
roller.
SM 211 D434
Boards
PCB1 Main Board Performs overall control of the finisher.
Controls paper feed system motors and booklet stapling

PCB4 Sub Board
motors.
The board that contains the drive circuitry to control the

PCB5 Punch Control Board
punch unit.
PCB2 PSU Steps down power source voltage to 24V power supply.
Shift Tray Jogger

PCB3 Controls the shift jogger fence motors.
Unit PCB
This is the relay board between CIS and punch control

PCB6 CRB
board.
Sensors
The encoder that detects the number of rotations of the

S58 Punch RPS Sensor
punch drive motor.
Shift Tray HP Sensor The HP sensor that detects the tray at its front HP
S30
(Front) position.
Shift Tray HP Sensor

S31 The HP sensor that detects the tray at its rear HP position.
(Rear)
Shift Tray Exit

S5 Detects paper as it is fed to the shift tray in staple mode.
Sensor (Long)
Shift Tray Exit

S6 Detects paper as it is fed to the shift tray.
Sensor (Short)
Detects the actuator on the rear shift jogger fence and

Shift Tray Jogger HP switches off the shift jogger motor and signals to turn on
S11
Sensor the shift jogger left motor to raise the fences at the end of
a job.
S12 Shift Jogger Fence Detects the home positions of the shift jogger fences after
D434 212 SM
Retract HP Sensor they raised up during alignment of the front and back
edges of the stack on the shift tray.
Drag Roller HP Detects when the drag roller at the shift tray exit is in or
S29
Sensor out of its home position.
Paper Height Sensor Functions as the paper height sensor in shift mode to
S8
(Shift) adjust height of the shift tray. Used in shift mode only.
Paper Height Sensor Functions as the paper height sensor in staple mode to
S9
(Staple) adjust height of the shift tray. Used in staple mode only.
Paper Height Sensor

S28 Detects the height of the stack on the shift tray.
(TE)
Used in combination with two other paper height sensors

Paper Height Sensor
S10 (shift and staple paper height sensors) to detect the height
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
(Z-Fold)
D434
of the stacked paper on the shift tray.
Shift Tray Full Sensor Detects when the shift tray is full of A5, HLT paper (500
S33
(500) sheets).
Shift Tray Full Sensor Detects when the shift tray is full of SR_A3 paper (1000
S32
(1000) sheets).
Shift Tray Full Sensor Detects when the shift tray is full of A3, DLT paper (1500
S24
(1500) sheets).
Shift Tray Full Sensor Detects when the shift tray is full of A4, LT paper (2500
S25
(2500) sheets).
Stapler JG HP Detects when the stapling junction gate (shift tray/stapling

S35
Sensor tray) is in or out of its home position.
Stapling Tray Detects each sheet of paper as it passes the entrance to

S43
Entrance Sensor the stapling tray.
Stapling Tray Paper

S42 Detects paper in the stapling tray.
Sensor
Positioning Roller HP Detects when the positioning roller above the stapling tray
S49
Sensor is at its home position.
SM 213 D434
Detects when the bottom fence that holds the trailing edge
Bottom Fence HP
S38 at the bottom of the stapler unit is in or out of its home
Sensor
position.
Detects when the top fence that jogs the leading edge of
Top Fence HP
S41 the stack in the stapling tray is in or out of its home
Sensor
position.
Stack Plate HP At the rear of the bottom fence of the stapling tray, detects
S46
Sensor (Rear) when the bottom fence is in or out of its home position.
At the center of the bottom fence of the stapling tray,

Stack Plate HP
S45 detects when the bottom fence is in or out of its home
Sensor (Center)
position.
Stack Plate HP At the front of the bottom fence of the stapling tray, detects
S44
Sensor (Front) when the bottom fence is in or out of its home position.
Stapler Rotation HP Detects when the corner stapler is rotated to its home
S52
Sensor (Rear) position at the rear.
Stapler Rotation HP Detects when the corner stapler is in its home position at
S51
Sensor (Front) the front.
Staple Trimmings
S13 Detects when the staple trimmings hopper is full.
Hopper Full Sensor
Staple Trimmings Detects when the staple trimmings hopper is set and
S14
Hopper Set Sensor removed.
Stack Transport Unit

S47 Detects when the transport unit is at its home position.
HP Sensor
Stack Feed-Out Belt Detects when the pawl on the stack feed-out belt is in or
S37
HP Sensor out of its home position.
S48 Stack JG HP Sensor Detects when the stack JG plate is at its home position.
Fold Unit Entrance

S23 Detects when a stack arrives in the booklet stapler.
Sensor
S15 Booklet Stapler Side Detects when the front jogger fence that aligns the front
D434 214 SM
Fence HP Sensor edge of the stack for booklet stapling is in or out of its
(Front) home position.
Booklet Stapler Detects when the rear jogger fence that aligns the trailing
S17 Jogger HP Sensor edge of the stack for booklet stapling is in or out of its
(Rear) home position.
Booklet Stapler Detects when the trailing edge fence that aligns the
S16 Bottom Fence HP trailing edge of the stack on the booklet stapling tray is in
Sensor or out of its home position.
Detects when the pawl that aligns the stack in the booklet
Booklet Top Fence
S19 stapler in the direction of paper feed is in or out of its
HP Sensor
home position.
Fold Plate Cam HP Detects when the cam that operates the fold plate is in or
S22
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
Sensor out of its home position.
D434
Fold Plate HP Detects when the fold plate in the booklet stapler unit is in
S18
Sensor or out of its home position.
Booklet Stapler Exit Detects when paper passes between the fold roller and
S21
Sensor the booklet stapler exit.
S3 Entrance Sensor
Exit Guide HP
S7 Detects when the exit guide plate is at its home position.
Sensor
Punch Blade HP Detects when the punch blade in or out of its home
S57
Sensor position.
Punch Vertical Mounted above the paper path in the punch unit, detects
S55
Registration Sensor the passing of the paper below.
Punchout Hopper Detects when the punch-out hopper is full and when the
S53
Full Sensor hopper is out of the finisher.
Proof Tray JG HP Detects when the proof tray junction gate (proof tray/shift
S34
Sensor tray) is in or out of its home position.
S1 Proof Tray Exit Detects each sheet of paper as it exits onto the proof tray.
SM 215 D434
Sensor
Proof Tray Full

S2 Detects when the proof tray is full.
Sensor
Pre-Stack Paper
S36 Detects paper at the pre-stack position.
Sensor
Corner Stapler HP
S50 Detects when the corner stapler is at its home position.
Sensor
Booklet Stapler
Detects when the booklet stapler transport roller has been
S20 Clamp Roller HP
moved to release pressure on the stack.
Sensor
Booklet Tray Full Operates with the upper booklet tray full sensor to detect
S27
Sensor (Lower) when the booklet output tray is full.
Booklet Tray Full Operates with the lower booklet tray full sensor to detect
S26
Sensor (Upper) when the booklet output tray is full.
Solenoid
Operates the shutter that opens and closes the chute

SOL1 Shutter Solenoid where staple trimmings drop to the staple trimmings
hopper below.
Switches
Changes the type and number of punch holes, based on

SW5 Punch Switch
the selection.
Shift Tray Upper Cuts the power to the shift tray lift motor if the shift tray
SW1
Limit Switch reaches its maximum height (due to a malfunction).
Cuts the 24V power supply to the finisher when the front
SW3 Front Door Switch
door is opened.
SW4 Breaker Switch Trips and shuts off power immediately if a short circuit
D434 216 SM
occurs in the finisher.
Emergency Stop
SW2 Stops the shift tray and lowers it.
Switch
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
SM 217 D434
HIGH CAPACITY STACKER SK5010
D447
None
1
HIGH CAPACITY STACKER SK5010
D447
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1.1 ROLL-AWAY CART D456.................................................................... 1
1.1.2 COVERS.............................................................................................. 2
Door and Cover Names........................................................................... 2
Rear Lower Cover, Rear Upper Cover .................................................... 4
Corner Cover........................................................................................... 4
Left Exit Cover Plate................................................................................ 5
Left Cover................................................................................................ 5
Front Door ............................................................................................... 6
Top Door ................................................................................................. 7
Front Right Cover .................................................................................... 8
Right Inner Cover .................................................................................... 8
Front Door Bottom Hinge Cover .............................................................. 9
Front Left Cover ...................................................................................... 9
Left Inner Cover..................................................................................... 10
Top Center Cover.................................................................................. 11
Top Front Cover .................................................................................... 11
Proof Tray.............................................................................................. 12
Top Rear Cover..................................................................................... 13
1.1.3 JOGGER UNIT .................................................................................. 14
Jogger Unit Removal............................................................................. 14
Main Jogger Cover Plate ....................................................................... 17
1.2 STRAIGHT PAPER PATH .......................................................................... 20
1.2.1 MOTORS ........................................................................................... 20
Entrance Motor...................................................................................... 20
Transport Motor..................................................................................... 21
1.2.2 SENSORS ......................................................................................... 22
Entrance Sensor.................................................................................... 22
SM i D447
Common Procedures
Transport Sensor................................................................................... 23
Exit Sensor ............................................................................................ 24
1.3 PROOF TRAY............................................................................................. 25
1.3.1 MOTORS ........................................................................................... 25
Proof Tray JG Motor.............................................................................. 25
Proof Tray Exit Motor ............................................................................ 26
1.3.2 SENSORS ......................................................................................... 28
Proof Tray JG HP Sensor...................................................................... 28
Proof Tray Exit Sensor, Proof Tray Full Sensor..................................... 29
1.4 SHIFT TRAY ............................................................................................... 32
1.4.1 PAPER SHIFT OPERATION ............................................................. 32
Shift Tray JG Motor ............................................................................... 32
Shift Tray JG HP Sensor ....................................................................... 33
Shift Motor, Shift HP Sensor.................................................................. 34
Shift Exit Motor ...................................................................................... 36
Shift Tray Exit Sensor, Paper Height Sensor......................................... 39
1.4.2 PAPER JOGGING ............................................................................. 43
Main Jogger Front Fence Motor, Front Fence HP Sensor..................... 43
Main Jogger Rear Fence Motor, Rear Fence HP Sensor...................... 45
Main Jogger Fence Retraction Motor, Fence Retraction HP Sensor..... 47
LE Stopper Motor, LE Stopper HP Sensor ............................................ 49
Sub Jogger Motor.................................................................................. 51
Sub Jogger HP Sensor.......................................................................... 52
1.4.3 SHIFT TRAY LIFT CONTROL ........................................................... 54
Roll Away Cart Set SW ......................................................................... 54
Shift Tray Paper Sensor ........................................................................ 55
Tray Lift Motor ....................................................................................... 56
Paper Height Sensor ............................................................................. 60
Tray High Limit SW ............................................................................... 61
Tray Guard Sensors 1, 2 ....................................................................... 62
Tray Full Sensors 1, 2, 3, 4 ................................................................... 63
Tray Full Sensor 4, Tray Low Limit Sensor, Tray Low Limit Switch....... 65
1.4.4 SHIFT TRAY POSITION ADJUSTMENT ........................................... 68
Check for Skew ..................................................................................... 68
Front-to-Rear Adjustment ...................................................................... 69
Left-to-Right Adjustment........................................................................ 74
D447 ii SM
1.4.5 PADDLE ROLLER ............................................................................. 78
Paddle Roller Cleaning.......................................................................... 78
Replacing Paddles ................................................................................ 79
1.4.6 CLEANING EXIT, SHIFT ROLLER SHAFT ....................................... 82
1.4.7 ANTI-STATIC BRUSH REPLACEMENT............................................ 84
1.5 SWITCHES, SOLENOID............................................................................. 86
1.5.1 DOOR SWITCHES ............................................................................ 86
Front Door SW ...................................................................................... 86
Top Door SW......................................................................................... 87
1.5.2 BREAKER SWITCH, SOLENOID ...................................................... 88
Breaker Switch ...................................................................................... 88
Front Door Lock SOL ............................................................................ 90
1.6 FANS .......................................................................................................... 93
1.6.1 ENTRANCE FAN MOTORS .............................................................. 93
1.6.2 PCB COOLING FAN .......................................................................... 97
1.7 BOARDS..................................................................................................... 98
1.7.1 MAIN BOARD .................................................................................... 98
1.7.2 PSU ................................................................................................... 99
1.7.3 OPERATION PANEL PCB............................................................... 101
2. DETAILS ......................................................................................103
2.1 OVERVIEW............................................................................................... 103
2.1.1 MAIN MOTORS ............................................................................... 103
2.1.2 SENSORS ....................................................................................... 104
Paper Path, Paper Height Sensors ..................................................... 104
Sensors, Boards, Solenoid .................................................................. 105
2.1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ........................................................ 106
2.1.4 PAPER PATH .................................................................................. 111
2.1.5 JOGGER UNIT ................................................................................ 112
2.2 PAPER PATH ........................................................................................... 113
2.2.1 PAPER PATH MOTORS.................................................................. 113
2.2.2 PAPER PATH SENSORS................................................................ 114
2.3 PAPER SHIFT AND ALIGNMENT ............................................................ 115
2.3.1 PAPER SHIFT ................................................................................. 115
2.3.2 PAPER ALIGNMENT: JOGGING .................................................... 116
Leading Edge ...................................................................................... 116
SM iii D447
Common Procedures
Main, Sub Jogger ................................................................................ 117

Jog points: Smaller Than 300 mm....................................................... 118
Jog points: 300 mm and Larger........................................................... 119
2.4 SHIFT TRAY LIFT AND HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT..................................... 120
D447 iv SM
Read This First
Conventions
Common Terms
Core Tech Manual
Screw
Connector
E-ring
C-ring
= Harness clamp
JG Junction Gate
LEF Long Edge Feed
SEF Short Edge Feed




Safety Information
engineers).
Use only consumable supplies and replacement parts designed for use of the machine.
Power
devices. To prevent electrical shock, switch the machine off, wait for a few seconds,
then unplug the machine from the power source.
carefully to avoid injury. After removing covers or opening the machine to do checks
or adjustments, never touch electrical components or moving parts (gears, timing
belts, etc.).

operation.
Special Tools

During Maintenance
General

Avoid touching the components inside the machine that are labeled as hot surfaces.
Safety Devices
Never do any procedure that defeats the function of any safety device. Modification
or removal of a safety device (fuse, switch, etc.) could lead to a fire and personal
injury. Always test the operation of the machine to ensure that it is operating
normally and safely after removal and replacement of any safety device.
Organic Cleaners
Make sure the room is well ventilated before using any organic cleaner. Use organic
solvents in small amounts to avoid breathing the fumes and becoming nauseous.
maintenance. To avoid fire or explosion, never use an organic cleaner near any part
that generates heat.
injuries. Use “My Ace” Silicone Oil Remover (or dry rags) to soak up spills. For more
details, please refer to Technical Bulletin “Silicone Oil Removal” (A024-50).
Ozone Filters
An excessive amount of ozone can build up around machines that use ozone filters
if they are not replaced at the prescribed time. Excessive ozone could cause
Before servicing the machine (especially when responding to a service call), always
make sure that the power plug has been inserted completely into the power source.
A partially inserted plug could lead to heat generation (due to a power surge caused
by high resistance) and cause a fire or other problems.
Always check the power plug and make sure that it is free of dust and lint. Clean it if
necessary. A dirty plug can generate heat which could cause a fire.
Coiling the power cord can cause excessive heat to build up and could cause a fire.
cord.

Always dispose of used items (developer, toner, toner cartridges, OPC drums, etc.)
in accordance with the local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of such
items.
To protect the environment, never dispose of this product or any kind of waste from
consumables at a household waste collection point. Dispose of these items at one
of our dealers or at an authorized collection site.
remove.
machine.
Confirm that operators have read and understand all the safety instructions described in
the operating instructions.
damaged.
machine.

2. This machine weighs 316 kg. (695 lb.). At least four persons are required to remove the
machine from its pallet and position it for installation.
vibration.
freely.
exposed to:
Dust
Water
Direct sunlight
Open flame
Corrosive gases
Trademarks
those marks.
Common Procedures
1.1.1 ROLL-AWAY CART D456
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
To prevent damage to the tray switches at the back of the machine, always remove
the tray cart before moving the stacker unit.
Always remove the cart before servicing.
2. Pull out the cart.
SM 1 D447
Common Procedures
1.1.2 COVERS
Door and Cover Names
Front Door ( x1)
Bottom Hinge Cover ( x1)
Front Left Cover ( x2)
Front Right Cover ( x2)
Top Door ("L" Pins x2)
Top Front Cover ( x2)
Top Center Cover ( x2)
Proof Tray ( x2)
Top Rear Cover ( x2)r
D447 2 SM
Common Procedures
Exit Cover Plate ( x2)
High Capacity
Left Cover ( x4)
SK5010
Stacker
D447
Rear Upper Cover ( x4)
Rear Lower Cover ( x4)
Corner Cover ( x4)
SM 3 D447
Common Procedures
Rear Lower Cover, Rear Upper Cover
1. The rear lower cover should be removed before the rear upper cover.
2. Rear lower cover [A] ( x4)
3. Rear upper cover [B] ( x4)
Corner Cover
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Rear lower cover
Rear upper cover
D447 4 SM
Common Procedures
1. Corner cover [A] ( x4)
Left Exit Cover Plate
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
If a peripheral unit has been installed downstream of the stacker, this cover was removed at
D447
installation.
1. Left exit cover plate [A] ( x2)
Left Cover
Preparation
Remove the left exit cover plate
SM 5 D447
Common Procedures
1. Left cover [A] ( x4)
Remove the last screw carefully. The left cover may fall suddenly because there are
no hooks holding it in place.
Never place your hand or fingers below the bottom edge of the cover when
removing it.
Front Door

2. Remove screw [A] ( x1)
D447 6 SM
Common Procedures
3. Raise hinge [B] out of the hole at the top of the door.
4. Pull the door off the bottom hinge.
Top Door
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
1. Open the top door.
2. Remove the "L" hinges from the right and left ends of the door.
3. Pull the door away from the stacker.

4. You may want to re-insert the "L" hinges in their holes { and so that they do not get
misplaced.
SM 7 D447
Common Procedures
Front Right Cover
1. Front right cover [A] ( x2).

2. Push cover [B] to the right to remove it. (You do not need to remove the lock hasp.)
Right Inner Cover

Preparation
Remove the front right cover
1. Right inner cover [A] ( x4). (You do not need to remove knob [B].)
D447 8 SM
Common Procedures
Front Door Bottom Hinge Cover
1. Hinge cover [A] ( x1)
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
2. Pull the cover away from the hinge.
Front Left Cover

Preparation
Remove these parts:
Front door
Front door bottom hinge cover
SM 9 D447
Common Procedures
1. Front left cover [A] ( x2)
Left Inner Cover

Preparation
Remove these parts:
Front door
Front door bottom hinge cover
Front left cover
1. Left inner cover [A] ( x4)
D447 10 SM
Common Procedures
Top Center Cover
1. Top center cover [A] ( x2)
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
2. Pull the cover to the right to remove it.
Top Front Cover

Preparation
Remove these parts:
Right inner cover
Left inner cover
Top center cover
SM 11 D447
Common Procedures
1. Top front cover [A] ( x2)
2. Disconnect the tabs on the right and left ends of the cover.
3. Turn the cover over and disconnect the operation panel PCB ( x1).
Proof Tray
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Left exit cover plate
Left cover
D447 12 SM
Common Procedures
1. Proof tray [A] ( x2)
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
2. Slowly pull the proof tray off the top of the stacker.
Top Rear Cover
1. Top rear cover [A] ( x2)
SM 13 D447
Common Procedures
2. Release the tabs on both ends.
1.1.3 JOGGER UNIT

Jogger Unit Removal
The jogger unit must be removed at these times:
To service the motors and sensors of the jogger unit
To access other areas of the stacker for other procedures
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Right inner cover
Rear lower tray
Rear upper tray
Rear
1. At the rear, you must remove three screws and disconnect five connectors.
2. Remove the screw on the right through the frame cutout [A] ( x3)
D447 14 SM
Common Procedures
3. Disconnect:
[A] Center: Harnesses {, , } ( x3)
[B] Right: Harnesses ~, ( x2)
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
4. Remove the four steel jogger unit legs.
Front
SM 15 D447
Common Procedures
5. Disconnect the jogger unit ( x4).

The jogger unit is held in place by four hooks. It will not fall after the screws have been
removed.
6. Remove the lock plate [A] ( x2).
7. Screw each leg into the bottom of the jogger unit [A].
D447 16 SM
Common Procedures
8. Grip one leg at the front {, and one at the rear .

9. Push the jogger unit to the left } to disengage the hooks.
10. Slowly lower the jogger unit to the right ~ and pull it out of the stacker.
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
11. Set the jogger unit on a flat surface.
Main Jogger Cover Plate

The main jogger cover plate must be removed to service these parts:
Main jogger front fence motor and HP sensor
Main jogger rear fence motor and HP sensor
Shift tray paper sensor
Rear
SM 17 D447
Common Procedures
1. Disconnect the rear fence HP sensor harness [A] ( x1, = x4).
2. Disconnect the rear fence motor [A] ( x1, = x3).

Front
3. Disconnect the dual harness [A] for the main jogger fence retraction HP sensor and
front fence HP sensor ( x2, = x7).
4. Disconnect the front fence motor harness [A] ( x1, = x3).
D447 18 SM
Common Procedures
5. Remove the plate:

[A] Front ( x1)
[B] Rear ( x1)
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
SM 19 D447
Straight Paper Path
1.2 STRAIGHT PAPER PATH
1.2.1 MOTORS
Entrance Motor
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Rear lower cover
Rear upper cover
1. Motor bracket [A] ( x1, x2, Hook x1, Belt x1)
D447 20 SM
Straight Paper Path
2. Separate the motor and the bracket ( x2)
Transport Motor
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Rear lower cover
Rear upper cover
SM 21 D447
Straight Paper Path
1.2.2 SENSORS
Entrance Sensor
The entrance sensor is on the right side of the stacker.
1. Sensor bracket [A] ( x1, x1

2. Sensor [B] Pawls x5)
D447 22 SM
Straight Paper Path
Transport Sensor
Preparation
Remove the jogger unit
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
You can see the sensor bracket on the bottom of the transport plate from inside the stacker.
1. Sensor bracket [A] ( x1)
SM 23 D447
Straight Paper Path
2. Sensor plate [A] and sensor [B] (= x1, x1, x1, Pawls x5)
Exit Sensor
Preparation
Remove the exit cover plate
The illustration below shows the left cover removed, but this is not required.

2. Sensor [B] ( x1, Pawls x5)
D447 24 SM
Proof Tray
1.3 PROOF TRAY
1.3.1 MOTORS
Proof Tray JG Motor
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Rear lower cover
Rear upper cover
1. Motor bracket [A] ( x1, x2)
SM 25 D447
Proof Tray
Proof Tray Exit Motor
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Rear lower cover
Rear upper cover
D447 26 SM
Proof Tray
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
SM 27 D447
Proof Tray
1.3.2 SENSORS
Proof Tray JG HP Sensor
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Rear lower cover
Rear upper cover

D447 28 SM
Proof Tray
Proof Tray Exit Sensor, Proof Tray Full Sensor
Proof Tray Full Sensor Located above the proof tray,.
Proof Tray Exit Sensor Shown with the top center cover removed.
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
Preparation
D447
Remove these parts:
Rear lower cover
Rear upper cover
Proof tray
Top center cover
Top rear cover
Common Procedure
1. Plate [A] must be removed,
SM 29 D447
Proof Tray
2. Remove:
[A] Front ( x2)
[B] Rear ( x2, = x1) (Opening the harness clamp creates slack in the harness and
allows free movement of the plate.)
3. Pull away the cover plate.

4. Remove the tray full sensor, or the tray exit sensor. See below.
Tray Full Sensor

D447 30 SM
Proof Tray
3. Sensor [A] (= x1, x1, x1)

Tray Exit Sensor
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
1. Remove the lower bracket screw [A], not the upper screw (= x2, x1).
2. Sensor [A] ( x1, Pawls x5)
SM 31 D447
Shift Tray
1.4 SHIFT TRAY
1.4.1 PAPER SHIFT OPERATION

Shift Tray JG Motor
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Rear lower cover
Rear upper cover
1. Slowly remove motor bracket [A] ( x1, x, 2)
D447 32 SM
Shift Tray
2. Remove this Teflon sleeve [B] so that it does not fall.
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
Shift Tray JG HP Sensor
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Rear lower cover
SM 33 D447
Shift Tray
Rear upper cover
1. Sensor bracket [A] (= x1, x1).

Shift Motor, Shift HP Sensor
Shift Motor
Shift HP Sensor
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Rear lower cover
Rear upper cover
D447 34 SM
Shift Tray
Common
1. Disconnect motor bracket [A] ( x1, x2, = x1)
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
2. Remove motor bracket [A] ( x2)
Shift Motor
SM 35 D447
Shift Tray
1. Separate the bracket and the motor ( x2)

Shift Roller Sensor
Shift Exit Motor
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Rear lower cover
Rear upper cover
D447 36 SM
Shift Tray
1. Plates { and must be removed.
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
2. Remove plate {.
[A] Top ( x2)
[B] Bottom ( x2)
3. Remove plate ( x6, Hook x1)
SM 37 D447
Shift Tray
4. Remove plate [A] ( x1)
5. Disconnect motor bracket [A] ( x2)
6. Push the shaft [A] out of the hole and remove motor bracket [B].
D447 38 SM
Shift Tray
Shift Tray Exit Sensor, Paper Height Sensor
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
Both sensors are difficult to see.
Shift Tray Exit

Under the plate.
Sensor
Right side, under the right plate facing the interior of the
Paper Height Sensor
machine.
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Rear lower cover
Rear upper cover
Jogger unit
Common
SM 39 D447
Shift Tray
2. Cover [A] must be removed.
3. Disconnect tray high limit switch [A] ( x1, = x5)
D447 40 SM
Shift Tray
4. Disconnect the cover:

[A] Front ( x3)
[B] Rear ( x1)
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
5. Remove the cover [A].
Paper Height Sensor
1. Paper height sensor [A] ( x2, = x1, Pawls x5)

Shift Entrance Sensor
SM 41 D447
Shift Tray
1. Remove roller [A]. The roller is spring loaded. Just push it to the rear and disconnect at
the front.
2. Use a short screwdriver to remove sensor bracket [A] ( x1)
D447 42 SM
Shift Tray
1.4.2 PAPER JOGGING

Main Jogger Front Fence Motor, Front Fence HP Sensor
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
Main Jogger Front Fence Motor
Main Jogger Front Fence HP Sensor
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Jogger unit
Main jogger cover plate
Front Fence Motor
SM 43 D447
Shift Tray
1. Motor bracket [A] ( x2, x1, Belt x1)

Front Fence Jogger HP Sensor
D447 44 SM
Shift Tray
Main Jogger Rear Fence Motor, Rear Fence HP Sensor
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
Main Jogger Rear Fence Motor
Main Jogger Rear Fence HP Sensor
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Jogger unit
Rear Fence Motor
1. Motor bracket [A] ( x2, x1, Belt x1)
SM 45 D447
Shift Tray

Rear Fence HP Sensor
D447 46 SM
Shift Tray
Main Jogger Fence Retraction Motor, Fence Retraction HP Sensor
High Capacity
Preparation
SK5010
Stacker
D447
Remove these parts:
Jogger unit
Fence Retraction Motor
1. Disconnect the front fence retraction HP sensor harness [A] ( x1, = x3).
SM 47 D447
Shift Tray
2. Disconnect the front fence retraction motor harness [A] ( x1, = x3).

Fence Retraction HP Sensor
D447 48 SM
Shift Tray
LE Stopper Motor, LE Stopper HP Sensor
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
LE Stopper Motor
LE Stopper HP Sensor
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Jogger unit
LE Stopper Motor
SM 49 D447
Shift Tray

LE Stopper HP Sensor
D447 50 SM
Shift Tray
Sub Jogger Motor
Preparation
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
1. Disconnect these harnesses:
[A] Sub jogger fence HP sensor ( x1, = x1)
[B] Tray guard sensor 1 ( x1, = x1)
[C] Tray guard sensor 2 ( x1, = x1)
[D] Sub jogger motor ( x1, = x1)
SM 51 D447
Shift Tray
3. Motor [A] ( x1, Belt x1, x1)
Sub Jogger HP Sensor

Preparation
D447 52 SM
Shift Tray
1. Disconnect pulley [A] and belt. ( x1, Pulley x1, Belt x1)
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
SM 53 D447
Shift Tray
1.4.3 SHIFT TRAY LIFT CONTROL

Roll Away Cart Set SW
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Cart
Rear lower cover
1. Switch [A] ( x1)
D447 54 SM
Shift Tray
2. Switch [A] ( x2)
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
3. Depress the clamps on both sides of switch [A] and separate the switch from clamp [B].
Shift Tray Paper Sensor
Preparation
Remove these parts:
SM 55 D447
Shift Tray
Jogger unit
1. Disconnect sensor bracket [A] and rails { and ( x4).

2. Slide the rails to the rear.
3. Remove sensor [B] ( x1, Pawls x5)
Tray Lift Motor
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Rear lower cover
Rear upper cover
D447 56 SM
Shift Tray
1. Plates { and must be removed.
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
2. Remove plate {.
[A] Top ( x2)
[B] Bottom ( x2)
3. Remove belt cover plate | ( x6, Hook x1).
SM 57 D447
Shift Tray
4. Disconnect motor bracket [A] ( x4)
5. Disconnect the belt below the motor (Belt x1)
Re-installation
Whenever the belt cover plate has been removed, you should check and re-set the tension
on the transverse belt before re-attaching the belt cover plate.
D447 58 SM
Shift Tray
This is the belt tension adjustment mechanism.
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
1. Remove spring [1].
2. Loosen screw [2] (do not remove it) to raise the tension bracket to the left.
3. Hang the belt cover plate [A] on the hook {.

4. Make sure the bearings | and } are snug in the holes.
SM 59 D447
Shift Tray
5. Attach screws {, , }, ~ and tighten.

6. Attach screws , but do not tighten.
7. Re-attach the removed spring .
8. Above the spring, pull the tension bracket down [1] as far as it will go, and tighten
tension screw [2]
9. Tighten all the screws ( x6).
Paper Height Sensor

The paper height sensor is mounted on the same bracket as the shift entrance sensor.
D447 60 SM
Shift Tray
For details about this procedure, please refer to Shift Tray Exit Sensor, Paper Height Sensor.
( xref)
Tray High Limit SW
High Capacity
This switch is on the right side of the stacker.
SK5010
Stacker
D447
2. Disconnect switch [A] ( x1, = x2)
SM 61 D447
Shift Tray
3. Remove switch [A] ( x2).
Tray Guard Sensors 1, 2
Preparation
Tray Guard Sensor 1
D447 62 SM
Shift Tray
1. Sensor [A] 5302 ( x1, Pawls x5)

Tray Guard Sensor 2
1. Sensor [A] 5302 ( x1, Pawls x5)
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
Tray Full Sensors 1, 2, 3, 4
D447
There are four tray full sensors mounted on the same vertical support:
{ Tray Full Sensor 1: 25%
SM 63 D447
Shift Tray
Tray Full Sensor 2: 50%
} Tray Full Sensor 3: 75%
~ Tray Full Sensor 4: 100%
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Rear lower cover
Rear upper cover
Left cover
Tray Full Sensors 1, 2, 3
1. The pawls of these sensors are visible behind the frame ( x1, Pawls x5 each)
Tray Full Sensor 4
See the next procedure below.
D447 64 SM
Shift Tray
Tray Full Sensor 4, Tray Low Limit Sensor, Tray Low Limit Switch
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
Tray Full Sensor 4 100%
Tray Low Limit Sensor
Tray Low Limit Switch
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Rear lower cover
Left cover
SM 65 D447
Shift Tray
1. Right side [A]:

Ground wire { ( x1)
Bracket ( x1)
2. Left side [B]:
Bracket } ( x1)
3. Open the clamps (= x2)
D447 66 SM
Shift Tray
4. Use a short screwdriver to move the left lower screw, then remove the other screws at
each corner of the plate. ( x4)
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
5. Remove (in any order):

Tray Full Sensor 4 100% {
Tray Low Limit Sensor
Tray Low Limit Switch }
SM 67 D447
Shift Tray
1.4.4 SHIFT TRAY POSITION ADJUSTMENT

The shift tray timing belts can be adjusted to ensure that the shift tray is level:
Front-to-rear. This adjustment is done first.
Left-to-right. This adjustment is done after front-to-rear adjustment.
Always do the front-to-rear adjustment first on both sides, then do the left-to-right
adjustment.
Never do the front-to-rear adjustments without later checking and setting the
left-to-right alignment of the tray.
Check for Skew

Right Side
1. Press the button on the stacker operation panel to lower the shift tray.
2. Open the front door and pull out the tray cart.
3. Check the front-to-rear alignment of the tray.
Front left, below stacker exit
Front right, below stacker entrance
D447 68 SM
Shift Tray
4. Check the alignment of the left and right sides of the tray brackets.
5. Determine if the brackets are at the same level:
Front-to-back
Left-to-right
High Capacity
If the brackets are at the same level, no adjustment is required.
SK5010
Stacker
D447
Front-to-Rear Adjustment
1. Remove:
Top door (Pins x2).
Front right cover ( x2)
Right inner cover [A] ( x4)
SM 69 D447
Shift Tray
2. Remove the right vertical stay [A] ( x2, x1)
3. Remove the screws of the front door switch bracket [A] ( x2). You do not need to
remove the bracket.
D447 70 SM
Shift Tray
4. Loosen the tension on the belt:

Loosen screw [A].
High Capacity
The tension bracket [B] will rise.
SK5010
Stacker
D447
Tighten screw [A].
5. Adjust the belt:

If the front end is low, pull up the left side of the belt [1] to raise the front.
If the front end is high, pull up the right side of the belt [2] to lower the front.
Every notch adjustment (you will be able to hear it click) adjusts the height of the
front by 5 mm.
SM 71 D447
Shift Tray
6. Re-set the belt tension:

Loosen screw [A].
Pull down the spring [B] to apply tension to the belt.
Tighten screw [A] with the bracket pulled down.
Left Side
1. Remove:
Top front door ("L" x2)
Front door
Front door bottom hinge cover ( x1)
Left front cover ( x2)
2. Loosen the tension on the belt:
D447 72 SM
Shift Tray
Loosen tension screw [A].
The tension bracket [B] will rise.
Tighten screw [A].
High Capacity
3. Adjust the belt:
SK5010
Stacker
D447
If the front end is low, pull up the left side of the belt [1] to raise the front.
If the front end is high, pull up the right side of the belt [2] to lower the front.
Every notch adjustment (you will be able to hear it click) adjusts the height of the
front by 5 mm.
4. Set the belt tension:

Loosen screw [A].
Pull down the spring [B] to apply tension to the belt.
Tighten screw [A] with the bracket down.
SM 73 D447
Shift Tray
Left-to-Right Adjustment
1. Check the lines inside the stacker to determine if the tray is slanting to the left or right.
2. Remove:
Rear lower cover ( x4)
Rear upper cover ( x4)
Corner cover ( x4)
3. Remove the vertical stay [A] ( x4).
4. Remove the rear timing belt cover plate [A] ( x6).
5. Release the tension on the timing belt:

Remove spring [1].
D447 74 SM
Shift Tray
Loosen tension screw [2].
Slide bracket [3] up to the left.
6. Adjust the belt position:

To lower the right side of the tray below the stacker entrance, pull the belt in the
High Capacity
direction of the arrow at [A] while rotating the top of the tray lift motor [B]
SK5010
Stacker
D447
counter-clockwise.
To raise the right side of the tray below the stacker entrance, pull the belt in the
direction of the arrow at [A] while rotating the top of the tray lift motor {B] clockwise.
Re-installation
Whenever the belt cover plate has been removed, you should check and re-set the tension
on the transverse belt before re-attaching the belt cover plate.
SM 75 D447
Shift Tray
This is the belt tension adjustment mechanism.
1. Remove spring [1].

2. Loosen screw [2] (do not remove it) to raise the tension bracket to the left.
3. Hang the belt cover plate [A] on the hook {.

4. Make sure the bearings and } are snug in the holes.
D447 76 SM
Shift Tray
5. Attach screws {, , }, ~ and tighten.

6. Attach screws , but do not tighten.
7. Re-attach the removed spring .
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
8. Above the spring, pull the tension bracket down [1] as far as it will go and tighten tension
screw [2]
9. Tighten all the screws ( x6).
SM 77 D447
Shift Tray
1.4.5 PADDLE ROLLER

Paddle Roller Cleaning
Preparation
Open the front door
Remove the roll-away cart
1. You can see the paddles at six locations behind on the right side between the jogger
fences.
2. Use a dry cloth to clean:

[A] Top and bottom surfaces of each paddle
[B] Tip of each paddle
D447 78 SM
Shift Tray
3. Rotate the exit roller [A] to expose the next paddle [B].
4. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 at each location until all the paddles have been cleaned.
There are four paddles at each of the six locations where the paddles are exposed.
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
Replacing Paddles
D447
Removing the Paddle Roller
2. With the plate removed, you can see the paddle roller [A].
SM 79 D447
Shift Tray
3. A spring is attached to the left end of the paddle roller shaft [A].
4. A groove in the shaft coupling [B] on the right is set on a straight pin that drives the
roller.
5. Use your finger or the tip of a flat screwdriver to push the coupling [A] to the front and
disconnect it from its drive pin.
6. Lift the roller up and pull it out.
D447 80 SM
Shift Tray
7. Place the paddle roller on a clean, flat surface.

Replacing Paddles
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
1. To remove an old paddle, twist the paddle slightly to the right and pull it out of its slot.
2. To attach a new paddle [A], insert the right end first then twist to the left until its left tab
locks in place.
3. Make sure that the new paddle [B] is straight and firmly set.
Re-installing the Paddle Roller
SM 81 D447
Shift Tray
1. First, set the left of the paddle roller shaft [A] in it its hole. Make sure that it is completely
inserted.
2. Push the coupling [A] to the left and set it on the tip of the pin coupling [B].
3. Rotate the coupling [C] until the pin snaps into its groove.
4. Rotate the roller with your hand to make sure that it is set properly.
1.4.6 CLEANING EXIT, SHIFT ROLLER SHAFT

Preparation
Open the front door
D447 82 SM
Shift Tray
1. You can see the roller shaft exposed at six locations above the paddles of the paddle
roller.
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
2. Use a soft dry cloth to clean the shaft at the first cutout.
SM 83 D447
Shift Tray
3. Rotate the exit roller [A] and push it from side to side while holding the cloth in place.
4. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 at each location.
5. Clean the rollers [A] and [B].
1.4.7 ANTI-STATIC BRUSH REPLACEMENT

Preparation
Open the front door
1. You can see the anti-static brush [A] between the jogger fences.
D447 84 SM
Shift Tray
2. Remove the anti-static brush [A] ( x2).
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
SM 85 D447
Switches, Solenoid
1.5 SWITCHES, SOLENOID
1.5.1 DOOR SWITCHES

Front Door SW
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Top front cover off
Top center cover off
1. Loosen connectors [A] ( x2)
D447 86 SM
Switches, Solenoid
2. Depress releases [B] on both sides of the switch and remove ( x2).
Top Door SW
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Top front cover off
Top center cover off
SM 87 D447
Switches, Solenoid
1. Remove bracket [A] ( x4).

2. Disconnect switch [B] ( x1)
3. Depress releases [A] then remove switch [B].
1.5.2 BREAKER SWITCH, SOLENOID

Breaker Switch
Preparation
Remove the rear lower cover
D447 88 SM
Switches, Solenoid
1. Right side [A]:

Ground wire { ( x1)
Bracket ( x1)
2. Left side [B]:
Bracket } ( x1)
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
3. Disconnect breaker switch [A] ( x2)
4. Disconnect and remove breaker switch [A] ( x4)
SM 89 D447
Switches, Solenoid
Front Door Lock SOL
Preparation
Open the front door
Remove the front right cover
1. Plate [A] must be removed.
D447 90 SM
Switches, Solenoid
2. Disconnect the solenoid at the top ( x1, = x3)
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
3. Remove the plate:
[A] Top ( x2)
[B] Bottom ( x2)
4. Cover plate [A] ( x2)
SM 91 D447
Switches, Solenoid

6. Remove the solenoid [A] ( x2)
D447 92 SM
Fans
1.6 FANS
1.6.1 ENTRANCE FAN MOTORS
High Capacity
Below the stacker entrance, three fan motors are mounted on the same plate:
SK5010
Stacker
D447
Fan 1 Motor
Fan 2 Motor
Fan 3 Motor
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Rear lower cover
Rear upper cover
Open the front door
Right inner cover
Top center cover
SM 93 D447
Fans
2. Disconnect the motor mount.

[A] Front ( x2)
[B] Rear ( x2)
3. Remove the cover plate screws:

[A] Front ( x1)
[B] Rear ( x1)
4. Raise cover plate [A] as high as possible.

5. Disconnect the harnesses and fans to clear the area in front of the motor mount [B] (=
x5, x3).
D447 94 SM
Fans
6. Disconnect entrance sensor bracket [A] and pull it aside ( x1, = x3)
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
7. Trace gray harness [A] to its connector near the main board.
8. Disconnect ( x1, = x 1)
9. Pull the gray harness back through the hole
SM 95 D447
Fans
10. Disconnect front door switch harness [A] to create some slack in the white harness (=
x2, x2)
11. Pull out fan motor mount [A].
12. Each fan motor is fastened with two screws ( x2)
D447 96 SM
Fans
1.6.2 PCB COOLING FAN
Preparation
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
1. Remove cooling fan [A] from the PCU ( x2, x1)
SM 97 D447
Boards
1.7 BOARDS
1.7.1 MAIN BOARD
Preparation
1. Remove brace [A] ( x3)
D447 98 SM
Boards
2. Remove the main board ( x28, x6)
1.7.2 PSU
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
Preparation
1. Disconnect the PSU at the bottom ( x3)
SM 99 D447
Boards
2. Remove the PSU ( x5, Standoff x1)
3. Bayonet connectors ( x2).

These connectors may be too stiff to disconnect before removing the board.
Disconnect them after removing the board.
D447 100 SM
Boards
1.7.3 OPERATION PANEL PCB
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
Preparation
D447
Remove the top front cover
1. Turn over the top front cover [A].

2. Under the LED display, remove plate [B] ( x2)
3. Spring plate [A] ( x2)
SM 101 D447
Boards
4. PCB [B] ( x2)
D447 102 SM
Overview
2. DETAILS
2.1 OVERVIEW
2.1.1 MAIN MOTORS
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
1. Transport Motor
2. Proof Tray Exit Motor
3. Proof Tray JG Motor
4. Entrance Motor
5. Shift Tray JG Motor
6. Front, Rear Jogger Fence Motors x2
7. Main Jogger Fence Retraction Motor
SM 103 D447
Overview
8. Tray Lift Motor
9. Shift Exit Motor
10. Shift Motor
11. Sub Jogger Motor
12. LE Stopper Motor
2.1.2 SENSORS
Paper Path, Paper Height Sensors
1. Entrance Sensor 10. Tray Guard Sensors 1, 2
2. Proof Tray Exit Sensor 11. Sub Jogger Fence HP Sensor
3. Proof Tray Full Sensor 12. Tray Full Sensor 1 25%
4. Transport Sensor 13. Tray Full Sensor 2 50%
D447 104 SM
Overview
5. Exit Sensor 14. Tray Full Sensor 3 75%
6. Shift Tray Exit Sensor 15. Tray Full Sensor 4 100 %
7. Tray High Limit Switch 16. Tray Lower Limit Sensor
8. Paper Height Sensor 17. Tray Lower Limit Switch
9. Shift Tray Paper Sensor
Sensors, Boards, Solenoid
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
1. Tray Lift Motor 8. Tray Full Sensor 4 100%
2. Main Board 9. Front Door Switch
3. Cart Set Sensor 10. Tray Full Sensor 3 75%
4. Front Door Lock Solenoid 11. Tray Full Sensor 2 50%
5. PSU 12. Top Door Switch
6. Tray Low Limit Switch 13. Tray Full Sensor 1 25%
7. Tray Low Limit Sensor 14. Operation Panel PCB
SM 105 D447
Overview
2.1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Motors
Drives the entrance rollers that feed each sheet of

M01 Entrance Motor
paper as it enters the stacker.
Opens the shift junction gate that directs paper the shift
M02 Shift Tray JG Motor tray. Paper goes past this junction gate when it is
closed to the proof tray or stacker exit.
Drives the transport rollers that feed paper through the

M03 Transport Motor
finisher between the entrance and exit.
Drives the shift exit rollers that output paper to the shift
M04 Shift Exit Motor
tray.
Moves the shift roller set (drive roller and idle roller) to
the front and back. For every other document set, the
M05 Shift Motor
shift roller will take each sheet of paper and move it to
the front so every other stack is staggered.
Drives the proof tray exit roller that outputs each sheet
M06 Proof Tray Exit Motor
of paper to the proof tray on top of the stacker.
Opens the shift junction gate that directs the paper to

the proof tray on top of the stacker. When this gate is
M07 Proof Tray JG Motor
closed, paper goes past this gate and goes to the
stacker exit.
Moves the front jogger fence of the main jogger unit

Main Jogger Front
M08 that aligns the front edge of the paper on the shift tray
Fence Motor
(near the front corner of the trailing edge).
Moves the rear jogger fence of the main jogger unit that
Main Jogger Rear
M09 aligns the rear edge of the paper on the shift tray (near
Fence Motor
the rear corner of the trailing edge).
D447 106 SM
Overview
Motors
Raises both the rear and front jogger fences of the main
Main Jogger Fence jogger unit after each set is output to the shift tray and
M10
Retraction Motor aligned. The fences are raised to position them for the
next shifted set.
This is the small cooling fan mounted on the left lower

M11 PSU Cooling Fan
corner of the PSU. It cools the area around the PSU.
Moves the leading edge stopper to the leading edge of

the paper on the shift tray and stops. The leading edge
M12 LE Stopper Motor of each sheet of paper is aligned against this stationary
stopper. This aligns the stack in the direction of paper
feed.
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
Operates the front and back fences of the sub jogger.
D447
The sub jogger is used to align either the front or rear
edge of the stack near the front or rear corner at the LE
M13 Sub Jogger Motor stopper. This motor controls the movement of both the
front and rear fence with a single belt. (The front and
rear fence of the main jogger unit have independent
motors and drive belts.)
Raises and lowers the shift tray mounted on the

M14 Tray Lift Motor
roll-away cart.
M15 Fan 1 Motor

These fans cool the area directly below the stacker
M16 Fan 2 Motor entrance where paper enters the stacker and the shift
tray.
M17 Fan 3 Motor
Sensors
Detects each sheet of paper as it enters the

S01 Entrance Sensor stacker. Also signals a jam if the paper fails to
arrive or leave within the prescribed time.
S02 Shift Tray Exit Sensor Detects each sheet of paper as it enters the shift
SM 107 D447
Overview
Sensors
tray. Also signals a jam if the paper fails to arrive

or leave within the prescribed time.
Detects each sheet of paper as it is output to the

S03 Proof Tray Exit Sensor proof tray. Also signals a jam if the paper fails to
arrive or leave within the prescribed time.
When this photo-sensor detects the top of the

S04 Proof Tray Full Sensor stack in the proof tray, it signals that the proof tray
is full and stops the stacking operation.
Detects the height of the paper stack on the shift

S05 Paper Height Sensor tray. The readings of this sensor are used to keep
the tray at its optimum height for paper stacking.
Detects the shift tray junction gate when it reaches

S08 Shift Tray JG HP Sensor its home position and switches off the shift tray JG
motor.
Detects the proof tray junction gate when it

Proof Tray JG HP
S09 reaches its home position and switches off the
Sensor
proof tray JG motor.
Detects the home position of the shift rollers and

S10 Shift HP Sensor
switches off the shift motor.
Detects the home position of the front fence of the

S11 Front Fence HP Sensor main jogger unit and switches off the front fence
jogger motor.
Detects the home position of the rear fence of the

S12 Rear Fence HP Sensor main jogger unit and switches off the rear fence
jogger motor.
Detects the home position of the front and rear

Jogger Fence fences after they have been lowered by the main
S13
Retraction HP Sensor jogger fence retraction motor and switches off the
retraction motor.
D447 108 SM
Overview
Sensors
Detects the presence absence of paper on the

S14 Shift Tray Paper Sensor
shift tray.
S15 Tray Guard Sensor 1 Switches off the stacker if the top of the stack
pushes up the front or back plate and actuates the
sensor. This stops stacker output (the
S16 Tray Guard Sensor 2 straight-through and proof paper paths can still be
used.)
Detects paper as it exits to the finisher

S17 Exit Sensor
downstream.
Monitors the passage of each sheet of paper in the
High Capacity
S18 Transport Sensor feed path between the entrance and exit of the
SK5010
Stacker
stacker.
D447
Detects the leading edge stopper when it reaches
S19 LE Stopper HP Sensor its home position and switches off the LE stopper
motor
Detects the sub jogger when it reaches its home

S20 Sub Jogger HP Sensor
position and switches off the sub jogger motor.
S21 Tray Full Sensor 1: 25% Detects when the shift tray is 25% full.
Tray Full Sensor 4: Detects when the shift tray is 100% full. Signals
S24
100% tray full and shuts down the stacker.
Detects the low limit of the shift tray and signals

S25 Tray Low Limit Sensor
that the tray must be removed.
Boards
PCB1 Main Board Performs overall control of the stacker.
SM 109 D447
Overview
Boards
Steps down power source voltage to 24V power

PCB2 PSU
supply.
Controls the buttons used for manual operation of the

Operation Panel
PCB3 stacker tray, and contains the LEDs that indicate the
PCB
status of the stacker.
Solenoid
Front Door Lock Keeps the front door of the stacker locked so it cannot
SOL1
SOL be opened while the stacker is operating.
Switches
Detects when the top door is open. While the top door
SW1 Top Door SW is open, the power supply to the proof tray and
straight-through paper path remains off.
Detects when the front door is opened. While the

SW2 Front Door SW front door is open, the power supply to the tray lift
motor and the stacker drive system remains off.
A micro-switch that detects the high limit for shift tray

SW3 Tray High Limit SW operation and cuts power to the tray lift motor to shut it
off.
Detects the lower limit for shift tray operation and cuts
SW4 Tray Low Limit SW
power to the tray lift motor to shut it off.
Detects when the tray cart is in the stacker. If the tray

Roll Away Cart Set cart is not set inside the stacker, the power supply to
SW5
SW the tray lift motor and the stacker drive system
remains off.
Shuts down the operation of the stacker in the event

SW6 Breaker Switch
of a power surge.
D447 110 SM
Overview
2.1.4 PAPER PATH
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
1. Fan 1, 2, 3 Motors 7. Shift HP Sensor
2. Shift Tray Exit Sensor 8. Proof Tray JG Motor
3. Tray High Limit Switch 9. Proof Tray Exit Sensor
4. Paper Height Sensor 10. Proof Tray Full Sensor
5. Shift Tray JG Motor 11. Transport Sensor
6. Shift Motor 12. Exit Sensor
SM 111 D447
Overview
2.1.5 JOGGER UNIT
1. Main Jogger Rear Fence Motor 8. Tray Guard Sensor 1
2. Rear Fence HP Sensor 9. Sub Jogger Fence Motor
3. Shift Tray Paper Sensor 10. LE Stopper HP Sensor
4. Main Jogger Front Fence Motor 11. LE Stopper Motor
5. Front Fence HP Sensor 12. Sub Jogger Fence HP Sensor
Main Jogger Fence Retraction HP

6. 13. Tray Guard Sensor 2
Sensor
7. Main Jogger Fence Retraction Motor
D447 112 SM
Paper Path
2.2 PAPER PATH
2.2.1 PAPER PATH MOTORS
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
These are the motors that drive the rollers of the stacker:
[1] Entrance motor. Drives the entrance rollers and other transport rollers that feed the
paper straight through the stacker to the transport motor.
[2] Shift tray exit motor. Drives the rollers that feed paper from the shift tray junction
gate onto the shift tray.
[3] Proof tray exit motor. Drives the rollers that feed paper up from the proof tray
junction gate to the proof tray on top of the stacker.
[4] Transport motor. Drives the rollers that feed paper out of the stacker from the
straight-through paper path.
This is a cross-sectional view of the paper feed motors.

The entrance motor [1] drives not only the entrance roller but several other feed rollers as
SM 113 D447
Paper Path
well.
The shift tray junction gate [2] is opened by the shift tray junction gate motor [3]. When the
junction gate is opened, paper is guided to the shift tray. The shift tray exit motor [4] drives
the shift rollers that feed the paper onto the shift tray. When the shift tray junction gate is
closed, paper passes over to the proof tray junction gate.
The proof tray junction gate [5] is closed by the proof junction gate motor [6]. When the gate
is closed paper passes over the junction gate into the paper path for the proof tray [7] above.
The proof tray exit motor [8] drives the rollers in the paper path to the proof tray. When the
proof tray junction gate is open, the paper passes below to the stacker exit.
Once the paper has passed both junction gates the paper will be fed by the rollers driven by
the transport motor [9] until it exits the stacker at [10].
2.2.2 PAPER PATH SENSORS
There are five main sensors at critical points in the paper paths. Each sensor detects the
leading and trailing edge of each sheet of paper as it passes. If the paper fails to arrive (late
error) or leave (lag error) within the prescribed time interval. the sensor will signal a jam.
{ Entrance sensor
| Shift tray exit sensor
} Proof tray exit sensor
~ Transport sensor
Exit sensor
D447 114 SM
Paper Shift and Alignment
2.3 PAPER SHIFT AND ALIGNMENT
2.3.1 PAPER SHIFT
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
In the shift mode, the paper is fed past the open shift tray junction gate and onto the shift
tray.
1. When the first set { starts to feed:
The leading edge of the paper is fed into the nip of the shift rollers (drive and idle
roller pair.)
After the trailing edge of the sheet leaves the nip of the upstream rollers, the shift
motor [1] switches on.
The belt pushes the shift rollers [2] with the paper still feeding between them to the
front and stops.
The paper feeds onto the tray at the forward position.
The shift motor reverses and rotates the belt until the shift rollers return to the home
position. The shift HP sensor [3] detects the home position of the rollers and
This sequence repeats for the 1st set until the last sheet has been fed.
The amount of shift from the center is fixed at 10 mm. (This cannot be adjusted.)
1. When the second set | starts to feed:
SM 115 D447
The leading edge of the paper is fed into the nip of the shift rollers (drive and idle
roller pair.)
After the trailing edge of the sheet leaves the nip of the upstream rollers, the shift
motor [1] switches on.
The belt pulls the shift rollers [2] with the paper still feeding between them to the
rear and stops.
The paper feeds onto the tray at the rear position.
The shift motor reverses and rotates the belt until the shift rollers return the home
position. The shift HP sensor [3] detects the home position of the rollers and
This sequence repeats for the 2nd set until the last sheet has been fed.
The amount of shift from the center is fixed at 10 mm. (This cannot be adjusted.)
2.3.2 PAPER ALIGNMENT: JOGGING

Leading Edge
To keep the leading edges of the stacks aligned:

At the start of a job in the shift mode the LE stopper motor [1] switches on.
The belt moves the leading edge stopper { to a position 15 mm away from the leading
edge of the paper selected for the job..
The leading edge stopper moves right and left to align the leading edge of each sheet
as it is fed.
At the end of the job the LE stopper motor reverses, and the belt moves the leading
edge stopper to its home position.
D447 116 SM
When the LE stopper HP sensor detects the stopper at its home position, this switches
off the motor.
Main, Sub Jogger
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
The following parts comprise the main jogger which operates the front fence { and rear
D447
fence |:
[1] Front fence motor
[2] Front fence HP sensor
[3] Rear fence motor
[4] Rear fence HP sensor
The movements of the front fence { and rear fence | during jogging (paper edge
alignment) are controlled independently by two separate motors.
Unlike the main jogger fences the front fence } and rear fence ~ of the sub jogger unit are
controlled by one motor, the sub jogger fence motor [5]. The motor switches on, and the belt
drives the fences in. The motor reverses and when the sub jogger HP sensor [6] detects the
fences at their home positions, it switches off the sub jogger fence motor.
The main jogger is also provided with a fence retraction mechanism that raises front and
rear fences after each set has been aligned. The main jogger fence retraction motor [1]
switches on and raises both the front fence { and rear fence | together after the edge of
each set is aligned. The motor reverses and lowers both fences, the fence retraction HP
sensor [2] detects the home position of the fences and switches off the motor. The sub
jogger has no such mechanism.
SM 117 D447
Jog points: Smaller Than 300 mm
The jogger unit uses only the main jogger to align paper sizes smaller than 300 mm. The
sub jogger does not operate.
Set 1
The shift motor switches on and off, moving the shift rollers and each sheet 10 mm to
the rear.
The leading edge of each shifted sheet output to the shift tray is aligned by the leading
edge stopper {.
The main jogger rear and front jogger fence motors switch on and push the rear and
front fence against the shifted edge of the stack at | and }.
The front fence moves on top of the stack below. The front fence is light so it does not
interfere with the top sheet of the stack below.
After the last sheet of the set has fed and been aligned, the main jogger retraction motor
raises both fences and positions them at the front for the next set.
Set 2
When the next set (blue above) is output to the shift tray in shift mode:
The shift motor switches on and off, moving the shift rollers and each sheet 10 mm to
the front.
The leading edge of each shifted sheet output to the shift tray is aligned by the leading
edge stopper ~.
The main jogger front fence and rear fence motors switch on and push the front and
rear fence against the edges of the stack at and .
The rear fence moves on top of the stack below. The rear fence is light so it does not
interfere with the top sheet of the stack below.
After the last sheet of the set has fed and been aligned, the main jogger retraction motor
raises both fences and positions them at the rear for the next set.
At the end of the job, the rear and front fence motors reverse and move the rear and front
fences back to the home position and stop.
The stack is jogged at three points: at the leading edge by the LE stopper, and at the front
and rear of the trailing edge by the main jogger unit.
D447 118 SM
Jog points: 300 mm and Larger
The jogger unit uses both the main jogger and one fence of the sub jogger to align papers
sizes 300 mm and larger.
Set 1
The set (red above) is shifted and output to the tray.
High Capacity
The LE stopper { jogs the leading edge of the stack.
SK5010
Stacker
D447
The front and rear jogger fences | align the front and rear of the trailing edge. (This is
the same operation as for smaller paper sizes.)
The sub jogger fence motor switches on and moves its front and rear fence. Only the
rear fence } touches the rear corner of the stack near the LE stopper. The front fence ~
also moves but does not touch the front edge of the stack. (There is only one sub jogger
motor so both sub jogger fences move.)
The paper is aligned at four points: at the leading edge by the LE stopper, at the front and
rear corners of the trailing edge by the main jogger fences, and at the rear corner near the
leading edge by the sub jogger rear fence.
Set 2
The set (blue above) is shifted and output to the tray..
The LE stopper jogs the leading edge of the stack.
The main jogger fences align the paper at the front and rear of the trailing edge. (This
is the same operation as for smaller paper sizes.)
The sub jogger fence motor switches on and moves both the front and rear fence. Only
the front fence touches the front corner of the stack near the LE stopper. The rear
fence also moves but does not touch the rear edge of the stack. (There is only one
sub jogger motor so both sub jogger fences move.)
The paper is aligned at four points: at the leading edge by the LE stopper, at the front and
rear corners of the trailing edge by the main jogger fences, and at the front corner near the
leading edge by the sub jogger front fence.
SM 119 D447
Shift Tray Lift and Height Adjustment
2.4 SHIFT TRAY LIFT AND HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
1. Tray Lift Motor
2. Paper Tray
3. Shift Tray Paper Sensor (in jogger unit)
4. Paper Height Sensor
5. Tray High Limit Switch (micro-switch)
6. Tray Guard Sensors 1, 2
7. Tray Full Sensors 1, 2, 3, 4 (25%, 50%, 75%, 100%)
8. Tray Low Limit Sensor
9. Tray Low Limit Switch (micro-switch)
Sensor, Switch Summary

The tray lift motor [1] raises and lowers the paper tray [2].
The shift paper sensor [3] is mounted in the jogger unit.
D447 120 SM
When there is no paper on the tray its actuator falls into a cutout on the tray and signals
no paper on the tray.
When there is paper on the tray (at least one sheet) the actuator remains up signaling
paper on the tray.
When the top of the stack grows high enough as paper is output onto the tray, the actuator
enters the gap of the paper height sensor [4]. This signals the tray lift motor to lower the tray
the prescribed distance so the tray can accept more paper. This sequence of is repeated
until the tray is full.
The tray upper limit switch [5] is mounted behind the paper height sensor. If the edge of the
tray (not the stack) raises high to push up the actuator along the length of the tray edge, this
will trigger the micro-switch, signal the high limit of the tray switch off the stacking operation.
There are two tray guard sensors [6] mounted side by side in the jogger unit. Each sensor is
mounted above a swinging plate with an actuator on top. If the top of the stack pushes up
either plate far enough to activate either sensor, this will shut down operation of the stacker
High Capacity
immediately. These sensors are also fail safe mechanisms. If stack on the tray skews and
SK5010
Stacker
D447
either the paper height sensor or tray high limit switch fail to detect the top of the stack, one
of the guard sensors will trigger a signal to shut down the stacker. This prevents the top of
the stack (or empty) tray from striking the bottom of the paper transport plates above and
causing damage.
The four tray full sensors [7] signal the status of the tray on the main machine operation
panel at each stage: 25% full, 50% full, 75% full, 100% full. When the actuator on the tray
reaches tray full sensor 4 (100%) the stacking operation will stop, signaling the operator that
the cart is full and must be emptied.
The tray low limit sensor [8] signals when the tray is down (the cart can be removed).
The tray low limit switch [9] will shut down the stacker if the edge of the tray hits this
micro-switch. This is one additional fail-safe mechanism designed to shut down the stacker
if either sensor above (Tray Full 4, Tray Low Limit Sensor) fails to signal tray full.
Power Off
At the end of the job:
The tray does not lower.
The operator must press the DOWN button on the stacker operation panel to lower the
tray and remove the paper stacked on the cart.
Power ON
If there is no paper on the tray:
The shift paper sensor [3] detects no paper.
SM 121 D447
The tray lift motor raises the tray until the paper height sensor [4] is pushed up far
enough to detect the top of the tray and then stops.
The tray lift motor reverses and lowers the tray to the start position.
If there is paper on the tray:
The shift paper sensor [3] detects paper.
The tray lift motor raises the tray until the paper height sensor [4] detects the top of the
tray and then stops.
The tray lift motor reverses and lowers the tray far enough to accept more paper.
D447 122 SM
LCIT RT5030
D452
None
LCIT RT5030 D452
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 DOOR AND COVERS................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 FRONT DOOR AND COVERS ............................................................ 1
1.1.2 INNER COVERS.................................................................................. 1
Inner Upper Cover................................................................................... 1
Inner Lower Cover................................................................................... 2
1.2 TRAYS .......................................................................................................... 3
1.2.1 TOP TRAY (TRAY 4) ........................................................................... 3
1.2.2 MIDDLE TRAY (TRAY 5) ..................................................................... 3
1.2.3 BOTTOM TRAY (TRAY 6) ................................................................... 4
1.3 PAPER FEED ............................................................................................... 6
1.3.1 PAPER FEED UNIT ............................................................................. 6
For the Paper Feed Unit in the Top Tray................................................. 6
For the Paper Feed Unit in the Middle Tray ............................................ 7
For the Paper Feed Unit in the Bottom Tray............................................ 8
1.3.2 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION AND PICKUP ROLLERS................... 10
Top Tray ................................................................................................ 10
Middle or Bottom Tray ........................................................................... 10
1.4 LCT MOTORS............................................................................................. 12
1.4.1 PAPER FEED, GRIP MOTORS......................................................... 12
1.4.2 6TH LIFT MOTOR ............................................................................. 13
1.4.3 4TH TRANSPORT MOTOR............................................................... 13
1.4.5 LCT EXIT MOTOR............................................................................. 15
1.4.7 4TH, 5TH LIFT MOTORS .................................................................. 17
1.4.8 COOLING FAN .................................................................................. 17
1.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ................................................................... 19
1.5.1 PAPER FEED AND END SENSORS................................................. 19
When reinstalling the sensor bracket .................................................... 19
1.5.2 LIFT SENSOR ................................................................................... 19
SM i D452
1.5.3 IMAGE POSITION SENSOR BOARD, EXIT SENSOR ..................... 20
Image Position Sensor .......................................................................... 20
Image Position Sensor Board................................................................ 21
Exit Sensor ............................................................................................ 21
1.5.4 PAPER HEIGHT SENSORS, PAPER SIZE SENSORS .................... 21
1.5.5 MAIN CONTROL BOARD.................................................................. 22
Main Control Board ............................................................................... 22
Main Control Board Bracket .................................................................. 22
1.6 ADJUSTMENT ............................................................................................ 24
1.6.1 SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT.............................................. 24
1.6.2 ADJUSTING IMAGE POSITION SENSOR STRENGTH AND
SIDE-TO-SIDE REGISTRATION ................................................................ 24
1.6.3 DOUBLE FEED PROBLEM FROM THE LCT.................................... 26
Changing the upper limit of the paper stack in the LCT tray.................. 26
2. DETAILS ........................................................................................28
2.1 MECHANICAL OVERVIEW ........................................................................ 28
2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................ 28
2.1.2 DRIVE LAYOUT................................................................................. 30
2.1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS .......................................................... 32
2.1.4 A4/LT LCT B832 LAYOUT (WITH BYPASS) ..................................... 35
Motors ................................................................................................... 37
PCBs ..................................................................................................... 38
Sensors ................................................................................................. 38
Solenoids............................................................................................... 43
Switches ................................................................................................ 44
Other ..................................................................................................... 44
2.2 PAPER HANDLING .................................................................................... 45
2.2.1 PAPER FEED ROLLERS................................................................... 45
2.2.2 PAPER FEED MOTORS.................................................................... 46
2.2.3 PICK-UP AND FEED ......................................................................... 47
2.2.4 TRAY DETECTION............................................................................ 47
2.2.5 LIFT MECHANISM............................................................................. 48
2.2.6 LIFT SENSOR ................................................................................... 49
2.2.7 PAPER SIZE DETECTION ................................................................ 49
D452 ii SM
2.2.8 REMAINING PAPER DETECTION.................................................... 50
2.2.9 PAPER END DETECTION................................................................. 51
2.2.10 IMAGE POSITION CORRECTION............................................... 52
SM iii D452
Door and Covers
1.1 DOOR AND COVERS
1.1.1 FRONT DOOR AND COVERS
[A] Top cover ( x 4).

[B] Front door ( x 1).
While lifting the top cover, remove the snap ring and front door.
[C] Rear cover ( x 6).
[D] Right cover ( x 6).
[E] Paper slot cover ( x 2).
1.1.2 INNER COVERS

Inner Upper Cover
2. Pull out the top tray and middle tray.
SM 1 D452
Door and Covers
3. Remove:
[A] Knobs (x 2) ( x 1 each)
[B] Inner upper cover ( x 2)
Inner Lower Cover

2. Pull out the middle tray and bottom tray.
3. Remove:
[A] Inner lower cover ( x 2)
D452 2 SM
Trays
1.2 TRAYS
1.2.1 TOP TRAY (TRAY 4)

2. Pull open the top tray [B] until it stops.
3. Lift the top tray [A] out of the drawer (black screw x 4).
1.2.2 MIDDLE TRAY (TRAY 5)

SM 3 D452
Trays
2. Pull open the middle tray [A] until it stops.
3. Lift the middle tray [A] out of the drawer ( x 4, black screw x 2).
1.2.3 BOTTOM TRAY (TRAY 6)

2. Pull open the bottom tray [A] until it stops.
D452 4 SM
Trays
3. Lift the bottom tray [A] out of the drawer ( x 4, black screw x 2).
SM 5 D452
Paper Feed
1.3 PAPER FEED
1.3.1 PAPER FEED UNIT

For the Paper Feed Unit in the Top Tray
2. Inner upper cover ( Inner Covers)
3. Rear cover ( Front Door and Covers)
4. Top tray ( Top Tray (Tray 4))
5. Cover bracket [A] ( x 4)
6. Push the slide rails [A] into the machine.
D452 6 SM
Paper Feed
7. Remove the screw [A] at the rear, indicated by the triangle mark.
8. Stay [A] ( x 2)
9. Pull the paper feed unit [B], and then move it to the lower right side ( x 2).
10. Paper feed unit [A]
For the Paper Feed Unit in the Middle Tray

4. Middle tray ( Middle Tray (Tray 5))
SM 7 D452
Paper Feed
6. Remove the screw [A] at the rear, indicated by the triangle mark.
7. Pull out the top tray [A].

8. Pull the paper feed unit with stay [B], and then move it to the lower right side ( x 2,
black screw x 2).
9. Stay [C] (step screw x 2)
10. Paper feed unit [D]
For the Paper Feed Unit in the Bottom Tray

D452 8 SM
Paper Feed
4. Bottom tray ( Bottom Tray (Tray 6))
6. Remove the screw [A] indicated by the triangle mark at the rear.
7. Pull out the middle tray.

8. Pull the paper feed unit with stay [A], and then move it to the right-lower side ( x 2,
black screw x 2).
9. Stay [B] (step screw x 2)
SM 9 D452
Paper Feed
10. Paper feed unit [C]
1.3.2 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION AND PICKUP ROLLERS
Before doing this procedure, turn off the main machine and disconnect it from its
power source.
Top Tray
1. Top tray ( Top Tray (Tray 4))
2. Remove:
[A]: Paper feed roller ( x 1)
[B]: Separation roller ( x 1)
[C]: Pickup roller ( x 1)
Middle or Bottom Tray

1. Middle tray or Bottom tray ( Middle Tray (Tray 5) or Bottom Tray (Tray 6))
2. Inner upper cover for the middle tray or Inner lower cover for the bottom tray ( Inner
Covers)
D452 10 SM
Paper Feed
3. Tray side plate [A] (black screw x 4).
4. Pull the paper feed unit [A].

5. Remove:
[B]: Paper feed roller ( x 1)
[C]: Separation roller ( x 1)
[D]: Pickup roller ( x 1)
SM 11 D452
LCT Motors
1.4 LCT MOTORS
1.4.1 PAPER FEED, GRIP MOTORS
Each paper feed unit has a paper feed motor and a grip motor . The removal procedure
is the same for each feed tray.
Remove:
[A] Motor unit ( x4, x2)
[A] Springs (x 2), First, loosen the screws (x2)

[B] Paper feed motor ( x2)
D452 12 SM
LCT Motors
[C] Grip motor ( x2)

Reinstallation
Attach the tension spring, then tighten the screws to tighten the belts.
1.4.2 6TH LIFT MOTOR
Remove:
Rear cover ( Front Door and Covers)
Right cover ( Front Door and Covers)
[A] 6th lift motor ( x 4, x1)
1.4.3 4TH TRANSPORT MOTOR
Remove:
Rear cover ( Front Door and Covers
[A] 4th Transport motor unit ( x 5, x 1).
SM 13 D452
LCT Motors
[B] Spring (x1). First, loosen screw ( x 1).
[A] 4th transport motor ( x2, Timing belt x1)

Reinstallation
Be sure that the tension spring is connected, then tighten the screw .
Remove:
[A] Motor unit ( x4, x 1).
D452 14 SM
LCT Motors
[A] 5th Transport motor ( x2, Timing belt x1)

Reinstallation
1.4.5 LCT EXIT MOTOR
Remove:
SM 15 D452
LCT Motors
[A] Spring (x1). First, loosen screw ( x 1).

[B] LCT exit motor ( x2, Timing belt x1)
Reinstallation
Remove:
D452 16 SM
LCT Motors
[A] LCT exit motor ( x2, Timing belt x1)

Reinstallation
1.4.7 4TH, 5TH LIFT MOTORS
1. Remove:
Main control board bracket ( Main Control Board)
[A] 4th lift motor ( x3, x 1)
[B] 5th lift motor ( x3, x 1)
1.4.8 COOLING FAN

SM 17 D452
LCT Motors
2. Cooling fan [A] ( x 2, = x 1, x 1)
When reinstalling the cooling fan, make sure that the cooling fan is installed with
its decals facing upward.
D452 18 SM
1.5.1 PAPER FEED AND END SENSORS

1. Paper feed unit ( Paper Feed Unit)
2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, = x 3, x 1)
3. Remove:
[A]: Paper feed sensor (hooks)
[B]: Paper end sensor (hooks)
When reinstalling the sensor bracket

Make sure that the white connector is connected to the paper feed sensor and the red
connector is connected to the paper end sensor.
1.5.2 LIFT SENSOR

SM 19 D452
3. Lift sensor [A] (hooks)
1.5.3 IMAGE POSITION SENSOR BOARD, EXIT SENSOR

1. Disconnect the LCT from the copier.
2. Remove:
D452 20 SM
[A] Harness cover ( x1, = x1)

[B] Image position sensor unit ( x1, = x1, x1)
[C] Stopper ( x1)
[D] Image position sensor
After replacing the image position sensor, do the procedure for image position sensor
adjustment. ( Adjusting Image Position Sensor Strength and Side-To-Side
Registration)
Image Position Sensor Board

1. Remove:
[E] Image position sensor board ( x2, = x1, x 2)
Exit Sensor
1. Remove:
[F] Exit sensor unit ( x1, x1, = x 1)
[G] Exit sensor
1.5.4 PAPER HEIGHT SENSORS, PAPER SIZE SENSORS
Remove:
Right cover ( Front Door and Covers)
[A] Paper height sensor unit (= x2, x 1, x 4).
[B] Paper height sensors (Hooks x 4 each)
[C] Paper size sensors ( x 1 each)
SM 21 D452
1.5.5 MAIN CONTROL BOARD

Main Control Board
Remove:
[A] Main control board ( x 7, Standoffs x 1, x All)
Main Control Board Bracket

1. Bracket [A] ( x 3)
D452 22 SM
2. Main control board bracket [A] ( x 8, = x 3, x All)
SM 23 D452
Adjustment
1.6 ADJUSTMENT
1.6.1 SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT
Normally the side registration of the image can be adjusted with SP1002 004-006
(Side-to-Side Registration – Tray 4, 5, 6). When the punch hole positions are not aligned
from a particular feed station, adjust the side registration by changing the tray cover
position for the tray, as described below. Then adjust the side registration of the image with
SP1002.
1. Pull out the tray.
1. Change the screw positions [A] at both the right and left sides as shown.
Adjustment range: 0 ± 2.0 mm adjustment step: 0.5 mm/step

SIDE-TO-SIDE REGISTRATION
1. Turn off the main power of the main machine.
D452 24 SM
Adjustment
1. Disconnect the LCT from the mainframe with the LCT [A] separated from the
mainframe, reconnect the LCT cable to the mainframe.
[C].
5. Enter the SP mode and do SP1910-002 (CIS Image Position Adjustment: LED
Strength - LCT). This calibrates the amount of light to be emitted from the CIS.
6. Do SP1909 002 (CIS Image Position Adjustment: PWM After Adjustment - LCT).
If the displayed value is between 10 (Ah) and 40 (28h), the CIS is calibrated
If the value is outside this range, do SP 1910-002 and 1909-002 again. If the value
8. Reinstall the LCT to the side of the copier.
10. Do "0111-4 to -7" for Trays 4, 5, 6, 7 and set the value for each tray to "Off".
Do SP2902-003, select Pattern 27, then print the trimming pattern.
6, and 7.
Print the trimming pattern from each tray of the LCT and from the bypass tray (if
installed).
SM 25 D452
Adjustment
mm. If it is not 2 mm, adjust with SP1002-004 to -007, depending on which tray is
not within the specified 2 mm.
13. Do SP1912-002 (CIS Image Position Adjustment: Normal Paper). This sets the CIS for
16. Once again, do "0111-4 to -7" (CIS Image Position Adjustment: Feed Setting) and reset
the values for Trays 4, 5, 6, and 7 to "On".
1.6.3 DOUBLE FEED PROBLEM FROM THE LCT

If double feed occurs several times when paper is fed from an LCT, try to change the upper
limit of the paper stack in the LCT tray
Changing the upper limit of the paper stack in the LCT tray
Changing the upper limit of the paper stack in the LCT tray can improve paper separation
for the paper stack in the LCT tray.
D452 26 SM
Adjustment
1. Remove the paper feed unit of the LCT unit ( Paper Feed Unit).
2. Loosen the screw on the lift sensor bracket [A].
3. Move the bracket 0.7 mm in the arrow direction as shown above.
4. Tighten the screw on the lift sensor bracket [A].
To return the upper limit position to the default position, move the paper lift sensor
bracket 0.7 mm to the opposite side.
Return the upper limit position to the default if a paper jam occurs at the paper
feed sensor in the LCT.
SM 27 D452
Mechanical Overview
2. DETAILS
2.1 MECHANICAL OVERVIEW
2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
D452 28 SM
Mechanical Overview
1. 4th Paper Feed Unit *1
2. 5th Paper Feed Unit
4. 4th Tray Drive Belt
7. Lower Transport Rollers
8. Horizontal Transport Roller
9. LCT Exit roller
10. Upper Transport Rollers
11. Feed Slot (from Bypass Tray)
SM 29 D452
Mechanical Overview
2.1.2 DRIVE LAYOUT
D452 30 SM
Mechanical Overview
1. 4th Lift Motor
2. 5th Lift Motor
3. 6th Lift Motor
4. 6th Paper Feed Motor
5. 6th Grip Motor
6. 6th Transport Motor
8. 5th Grip Motor
9. LCT Exit Motor
12. 4th Grip Motor
SM 31 D452
Mechanical Overview
D452 32 SM
Mechanical Overview
1. LCT Image Position Sensor
2. Exit Sensor
3. 5th Transport Sensor
4. Image Position Sensor Board
5. 4th Relay Sensor
7. 4th Paper Height Sensor
8. 4th Paper Size Sensors
9. 4th Paper Height Sensor 3
23. Door Safety Switch
24. 6th Separation Solenoid
25. 6th Paper End Sensor
26. 6th Paper Feed Sensor
27. 6th Lift Sensor
28. 6th Pick-up Solenoid
SM 33 D452
Mechanical Overview
Items 24, 25, 26, 27 and 28 are duplicated in the 4th and 5th units.
1. 5th Transport Motor 9. 5th Lift Motor
2. 4th Transport Motor 10. 6th Paper Feed Motor
3. 4th Grip Motor 11. 6th Lift Motor
4. 4th Paper Feed Motor 12. Anti-Condensation Heaters
5. 5th Grip Motor 13. Cooling Fan
6. 5th Paper Feed Motor 14. 6th Grip Motor
7. 4th Lift Motor 15. 6th Transport Motor
8. Main Control Board 16. LCT Exit Motor
D452 34 SM
Mechanical Overview
2.1.4 A4/LT LCT B832 LAYOUT (WITH BYPASS)
SM 35 D452
Mechanical Overview
1. Paper Feed Motor (Bypass)
2. Paper Feed Sensor (Bypass)
3. Grip Motor (Bypass)
4. Transport Sensor (Bypass)
5. Transport Motor (Bypass)
8. 4th Grip Motor
11. 4th Relay Sensor
14. 5th Grip Motor
19. 6th Grip Motor
22. LCT Exit Motor
23. LCT Exit Sensor
D452 36 SM
Mechanical Overview

Motors
4th Grip
M1 Drives the separation roller and the grip roller of the 4th tray.
Motor
M2 4th Lift Motor Drives the bottom plate of the 4th tray up and down.
4th Paper Drives the pick-roller and feed roller that picks up each sheet and
M3
Feed Motor starts to feed it out of the 4th tray.
4th Transport Drives the rollers in the vertical feed path that feed the paper from
M4
Motor the 4th tray to the LCT exit motor.
5th Grip
Motor
M6 5th Lift Motor Drives the bottom plate of the 5th tray up and down.
M7
5th Transport Drives the transport rollers in the vertical feed path that feed the
M8
Motor paper from the 4th tray and the 5th tray to the LCT exit motor.
6th Grip
Motor
M10 6th Lift Motor Drives the 5th tray up and down.
M11
6th Transport Drives the rollers in the vertical feed path that feed the paper from
M12
Motor the 6th tray to the LCT exit motor.
LCT Exit
M13 Feeds the paper out the LCT and into the entrance of the copier.
Motor
SM 37 D452
Mechanical Overview
PCBs
Main
PCB1 Control Controls the operation of all motors and sensors in the LCT unit.
Board
Image Operates the CIS sensor (performs waveform correction) in the LCT.
Position The CRB (CIS Relay Board) and CIS sensor perform side-to-side
PCB2
Sensor image correction. The CRB and CIS are a single unit. The CRB is
Board not a separate board.
Sensors
4th Lift Detects when the paper in the 4th tray is at the correct height for
S1
Sensor paper feed and switches the 4th lift motor off.
4th Paper
S2 Detects when the last sheet feeds from the 4th tray.
End Sensor
4th Paper Detects the paper when it arrives at the 4th paper feed roller and
S3
Feed Sensor checks for misfeeds.
4th Paper
S4 Height 4th from the bottom of the 4th tray, detects stack height: 100%
Sensor 1
4th Paper
Sensor 2
4th Paper
Sensor 3
D452 38 SM
Mechanical Overview
4th Paper
4th from the bottom of the 4th tray, detects stack height: 25% and
S7 Height
signals near-end.
Sensor 4
4th Paper
Length Detects the length of the paper in the 4th tray (used in combination
S8
Sensor with the paper width sensors).
(B834)
4th Paper
1 of a set of 3 sensors that detect the width of the paper in the 4th
S9 Width Sensor
tray.
1 (B834)
4th Paper
S10 Width Sensor
tray.
2 (B834)
4th Paper
S11 Width Sensor
tray.
3 (B834)
4th Paper
S12 Size Sensor 1
tray.
(B832)
4th Paper
S13 Size Sensor 2
tray.
(B832)
4th Paper
S14 Size Sensor 3
tray.
(B832)
Detects the leading and trailing edges of the paper in the paper path
4th Relay
S15 near the bottom of the 4th tray. Checks the timing of the feed and
Sensor
signals a jam if the paper is late or lags at this location.
S16 4th Relay Detects the leading and trailing edges of the paper in the paper path
SM 39 D452
Mechanical Overview
Sensor - near the top of the 4th tray. Checks the timing of the feed and
Upper (B834) signals a jam if the paper is late or lags at this location.
4th Transport Detects jams in the paper path where the transport motor feeds the
S17
Sensor paper from the 4th tray.
S18
5th Paper
End Sensor
S20
5th Paper
Sensor 1
5th Paper
Sensor 2
5th Paper
Sensor 3
5th Paper
S24 Height
signals near-end.
Sensor 4
5th Paper
S25
(B834)
5th Paper
S26 Width Sensor
tray.
1 (B834)
D452 40 SM
Mechanical Overview
5th Paper
S27 Width Sensor
tray.
2 (B834)
5th Paper
S28 Width Sensor
tray.
3 (B834)
5th Paper
S29 Size Sensor 1
tray.
(B832)
5th Paper
S30 Size Sensor 2
tray.
(B832)
5th Paper
S31 Size Sensor 3
tray.
(B832)
5th Relay Detects the leading and trailing edges of the paper in the paper path
S32 Sensor near the 5th tray. Checks the timing of the feed and signals a jam if
(B834) the paper is late or lags at this location.
S33
S34
6th Paper
End Sensor
S36
6th Paper
Sensor 1
SM 41 D452
Mechanical Overview
6th Paper
Sensor 2
6th Paper
Sensor 3
6th Paper
S40 Height
signals near-end.
Sensor 4
6th Paper
S41
(B834)
6th Paper
S42 Width Sensor
tray.
1 (B834)
6th Paper
S43 Width Sensor
tray.
2 (B834)
6th Paper
S44 Width Sensor
tray.
3 (B834)
6th Paper
S45 Size Sensor 1
tray.
(B832)
6th Paper
S46 Size Sensor 2
tray.
(B832)
S47 6th Paper 1 of a set of 3 sensors that detect the width of the paper in the 6th
D452 42 SM
Mechanical Overview
Size Sensor 3 tray.

(B832)
6th Relay Detects the leading and trailing edges of the paper in the paper path
S48 Sensor near the 6th tray. Checks the timing of the feed and signals a jam if
(B834) the paper is late or lags at this location.
S49
LCT Exit
S50 Detects jams at the exit of the LCT unit.
Sensor
Mounted on the CRB (CIS Relay Board), this contact image sensor
LCT Image
detects the side-to-side edges of the paper in the paper path. The
S51 Position
machine uses this information to correct the position of the image
Sensor
when the lasers fire.
Solenoids
Engages/disengages rotation of the pick-up roller in the 4th

SOL1 4th Pick-up Solenoid
tray.
4th Separation Controls up-down movement of the separation roller in the

SOL2
Solenoid 4th tray.

tray.
Controls up-down movement of the separation roller in the

SOL4 5th Separation SOL
5th tray.

tray.
SOL6 6th Separation Controls up-down movement of the separation roller in the
SM 43 D452
Mechanical Overview
Solenoid 6th tray.
Switches
Door Safety An interlock safety switch that detects when the front door is
SW1
Switch opened and closed.
Other
H1, Anti-Condensation Evaporates moisture around the trays in the LCT (230V
H2 Heaters 18W).
D452 44 SM
Paper Handling
2.2 PAPER HANDLING
This LCT has three paper tray feed stations:

The 4th and 5th tray each hold 1,000 sheets of paper. The 6th tray holds 2,550 sheets of
paper. Total: 4,550 sheets
Each tray contains four rollers:
[A] Pick-up roller
[B] Paper feed roller
[C] Separation roller
[D] Grip roller
The pick-up roller, paper feed roller, and separation roller are a standard FRR
paper feed system.
SM 45 D452
Paper Handling
2.2.2 PAPER FEED MOTORS
Two stepper motors control the paper feed drive:

[A] Paper feed motor
[B] Grip motor
The paper feed motor drives the pick-up roller [C] and the paper feed roller [D].
The grip motor drives the grip roller [E] that feeds the paper out of the tray, and the
separation roller [F].
D452 46 SM
Paper Handling
2.2.3 PICK-UP AND FEED
When a paper feed station is not selected:

Separation roller solenoid [A] is de-activated
Separation roller [B] turns freely.
When the paper feed station is selected for a job:
Paper feed motor [C] and grip motor [D] turn on.
When the feed motor [C] turns on, it drives the feed roller [E]. It also drives the pick-up
roller [F] because the pick-up roller is linked to the feed roller by an idle gear.
When the separation solenoid [A] turns on, the separation roller [B] contacts the paper feed
roller [E] and turns with the feed roller, unless more than one sheet of paper is fed. The
three trays of the LCT unit use the standard FRR mechanism.
When the paper feed motor turns on, the pick-up solenoid turns on and the pick-up roller
[F] lowers until it contacts the top sheet of the paper stack and then sends it to the paper
feed and separation rollers.
When the paper feed sensor detects the leading edge of the paper, the paper feed motor
switches off, the pick-up roller lifts, and the grip rollers [G] feed the paper out of the tray.
2.2.4 TRAY DETECTION

When a tray is set in the machine, the tray detection method used depends on the tray:
The upper tray and middle tray are detected when any one of the paper size switch
signals is low.
The lower tray is detected when the switch 1 signal of the paper size switch is low.
SM 47 D452
Paper Handling
2.2.5 LIFT MECHANISM
When the machine detects that the paper tray is set in the machine, the tray lift motor [A]
rotates and the coupling gear [B] on the tray lift motor engages the pin [C] of the lift drive
shaft [D]. The tray drive belts [E] are connected to the tray bottom plate [F] and are driven
by the tray lift motor via the lift drive shaft [D] and tray drive pulleys [G]. When the lift motor
turns counterclockwise, the tray bottom plate [F] moves up. The tray goes up until the top
of the paper stack pushes up the pick-up roller and the lift sensor in the feed unit is
de-activated.
When the actuator [H] on the rear end of the bottom plate activates the paper height
sensors [I], the remaining paper capacity is detected. ( Remaining Paper Detection)
When pulling out the tray, the coupling gear [B] separates from the pin [C], so that the tray
bottom plate moves downward. In the bottom tray, the damper [J] lets the tray bottom plate
drop slowly.
D452 48 SM
Paper Handling
2.2.6 LIFT SENSOR
When the lift motor turns on, the pick-up solenoid [A] activates to lower the pick-up roller [B].
When the top sheet of paper reaches the proper paper feed level, the paper pushes up the
pick-up roller and the actuator [C] on the pick-up roller supporter [D] de-activates the lift
sensor [E] to stop the lift motor.
After several paper feeds, the paper level gradually lowers, then the lift sensor is activated
and the lift motor turns on again until the lift sensor is de-activated again.
SM 49 D452
Paper Handling
A4-LEF B5-LEF A5-LEF A5-SEF LT-LEF HLT-LEF HTL-SEF
SW1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1
SW2 1 0 1 0 0 0 1
SW3 1 1 0 1 0 0 0
1: HIGH, 0: LOW
Top Tray (Tray 4) and Middle Tray (Tray 5)
For the top and middle trays, the paper size switch [A] detects the paper size. The paper
size switch contains three microswitches. The paper size switch is actuated by an actuator
plate [B] at the rear of the tray. Each paper size has its own unique combination as shown
in the table and the CPU determines the paper size by the combination.
Bottom Tray (Tray 6)
The bottom tray has the same switch as the top and middle trays. However, it is only used
for detecting when the tray is pushed in.
For the bottom tray, the paper size must be selected with SP5019-007:
2.2.8 REMAINING PAPER DETECTION
The amount of paper remaining in the tray is detected by the three paper height
photo-interrupter sensors on the left rail as the bottom plate rises. Five states, determined
by the position of the actuator are possible.
1. With the actuator [A] below paper height sensor 1 [B], no sensor is actuated and the
display indicates 100%.
D452 50 SM
Paper Handling
2. When the actuator passes paper height sensor 1 [B] , the display indicates 75% of the
paper supply remaining.
3. When the actuator passes paper height sensor 2 [C], the display indicates 50% of the
4. When the actuator passes paper height sensor 3 [D], the display indicates 25% of the
When the actuator enters the gap of the near end sensor [E], the machine
signals near end.
Finally, when the last sheet feeds, the paper end sensor signals that the tray is empty. (
Paper End Detection)
2.2.9 PAPER END DETECTION
The paper end sensor [A] detects the top sheet of the paper in the tray by monitoring the
reflected light. When the paper tray runs out of paper, the paper end sensor does not
receive the reflected light due to the cutout [B]. Then, the tray lift motor rotates backwards 2
seconds to drop the tray bottom plate.
SM 51 D452
Paper Handling
The image position sensor [A] is located in the LCT paper path above the paper path and in
front of the LCT exit rollers. (This sensor is mounted on its own control board.)
The sensor is a CIS (Contact Image Sensor). It checks the side edges of each sheet as it
passes, and feeds this information back to the machine.
D452 52 SM
LCIT RT5040
D453
45 01/05/2011 “Air Assist Fan is used” description revised.
LCIT RT5040 D453
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 REMOVING TRAYS...................................................................................... 1
1.2 DOOR AND COVERS................................................................................... 3
1.2.1 DOOR AND COVERS.......................................................................... 3
1.2.2 INNER COVERS.................................................................................. 3
Inner Upper Cover................................................................................... 3
Inner Lower Cover................................................................................... 4
1.3 PAPER FEED ............................................................................................... 5
1.3.1 PAPER FEED UNIT ............................................................................. 5
When reinstalling the paper feed unit ...................................................... 6
1.3.2 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION AND PICKUP ROLLERS..................... 6
Top Tray (Tray 4) .................................................................................... 6
Middle Tray (Tray 5) ................................................................................ 8
Bottom Tray (Tray 6) ............................................................................. 10
1.4 LCT MOTORS............................................................................................. 13
1.4.1 TRANSPORT MOTORS, LCT EXIT MOTOR .................................... 13
4th, 5th, and 6th Transport Motors , , ........................................... 13
LCT Exit Motor ................................................................................... 13
1.4.2 FEED MOTORS/GRIP MOTORS ...................................................... 14
Reinstallation......................................................................................... 14
1.4.3 LIFT MOTORS................................................................................... 15
4th, 6th Lift Motors................................................................................. 15
5th Lift Motor ......................................................................................... 15
1.4.4 COOLING FAN .................................................................................. 16
1.5.1 PAPER FEED AND END SENSORS................................................. 17
When reinstalling the sensor bracket .................................................... 17
1.5.2 LIFT SENSOR ................................................................................... 18
1.5.3 LCT EXIT SENSOR ........................................................................... 19
1.5.4 PAPER PATH SENSORS.................................................................. 19
Removing the Vertical Feed Unit........................................................... 19
SM i D453
1.5.5 4TH TRANSPORT, 4TH RELAY UPPER, LOWER SENSORS......... 22
1.5.6 5TH RELAY SENSOR, 5TH TRANSPORT SENSOR ....................... 22
1.5.7 6TH RELAY SENSOR, 6TH TRANSPORT........................................ 23
1.5.8 MAIN CONTROL BOARD.................................................................. 23
1.5.9 PAPER HEIGHT, PAPER WIDTH SENSORS ................................... 24
Paper Height Sensors ........................................................................... 24
Paper Width Sensors ............................................................................ 24
1.6 ADJUSTMENT ............................................................................................ 25
1.6.1 SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT.............................................. 25
1.6.2 IMAGE POSITION BOARD AND SENSOR ....................................... 26
Image Position Sensor .......................................................................... 26
Image Position Sensor Board................................................................ 26
SIDE-TO-SIDE REGISTRATION ................................................................ 26
1.6.4 DOUBLE FEED PROBLEM FROM LCT ............................................ 28
2. DETAILS ........................................................................................30
2.1 MECHANICAL OVERVIEW ........................................................................ 30
2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................ 30
2.1.2 DRIVE LAYOUT................................................................................. 31
2.1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS .......................................................... 32
2.1.4 A3/DLT LCT B834 LAYOUT (WITH BYPASS)................................... 34
2.2 PAPER HANDLING .................................................................................... 43
2.2.1 PAPER FEED ROLLERS................................................................... 43
2.2.2 PAPER FEED MOTORS.................................................................... 44
2.2.3 PAPER SEPARATION....................................................................... 44
2.2.4 PAPER DETECTION/LIFT................................................................. 45
Mechanism ............................................................................................ 45
Detection ............................................................................................... 45
Lift ......................................................................................................... 46
2.2.5 LIFT SENSOR ................................................................................... 46
2.2.6 PAPER SIZE DETECTION ................................................................ 47
2.2.7 REMAINING PAPER DETECTION.................................................... 49
2.2.8 AIR-ASSISTED FEED MECHANISM................................................. 50
2.2.9 PAPER END DETECTION................................................................. 50
D453 ii SM
2.2.10 IMAGE POSITION CORRECTION............................................... 51
SM iii D453
Removing Trays
1.1 REMOVING TRAYS
Tray 5 weighs 27 kg (60 lb) empty. Trays 4 and 6 weigh 20 kg (44 lb) each empty.
To prevent damage to the tray and personal injury, never attempt to lift a tray alone
or without attaching the carrying handles, especially if a tray is loaded with paper.
LCIT RT5040
Two people on each side of the tray should lift the carrying handles together to lift
D453
and move the tray.
Never remove the tray if the LCT has not been docked to the copier. Removing the
tray while the LCT is standing alone can unbalance the LCT and cause it to fall
over.
Only one set of carrying handles is attached to the side of Tray 5. Follow the
procedure below to attach and use these handles to move Tray 4, 5, or 6.
1. Pull the tray [A] out of the LCT until it stops.

2. Remove the screws from the right rail [B] ( x3)
3. Remove the screws from the left rail [D] ( x3)
You do not need to remove screw for the stopper pin bracket at the back of the
left rail.
SM 1 D453
Removing Trays
4. Remove carrying handles [A] and [B] from the right side of the tray ( x 2 ea.)
5. Use the same screws to attach the carrying handles at and .
6. With one person on each side of the tray, lift it carefully and remove it from the rails.
D453 2 SM
Door and Covers
1.2 DOOR AND COVERS
1.2.1 DOOR AND COVERS
LCIT RT5040
D453
The frame is held together by 8 blue screws.
To avoid weakening or warping the shape of the frame, never remove these blue
screws.
The upper inner cover must be removed before the top cover.
Remove:
1. Right cover ( x 6).
2. Right rear cover ( x 6).
3. Left rear cover ( x 6)
4. Top cover ( x 5).
5. Front door ( x 1).
While lifting the top cover, remove the snap ring and front door.
1. Paper slot cover ( x 2)
1.2.2 INNER COVERS

Inner Upper Cover
SM 3 D453
Door and Covers
2. Pull out the top and middle trays.
3. Pull down the U1 lever [A].

4. Remove:
[B] Knob (x 1)
[C] Inner upper cover ( x2)
Inner Lower Cover

2. Pull out the middle and bottom trays.
3. Inner lower cover [A] ( x 2)
D453 4 SM
Paper Feed
1.3 PAPER FEED
1.3.1 PAPER FEED UNIT

1. Pull out the top, middle or bottom tray.
2. Inner upper or lower cover ( Inner Covers)
For the paper feed unit in the top tray or middle tray, remove the inner upper cover.
For the paper feed unit in the bottom tray, remove the inner lower cover.
LCIT RT5040
D453
3. Pull the paper feed unit [A] (black screw x 2).
4. Stopper bracket [B] ( x 1)
5. Pull the paper feed unit [A] out fully, and then lift it.
SM 5 D453
Paper Feed
When reinstalling the paper feed unit
When reinstalling the paper feed unit, align the cutout in the slide rail with the stud screw,
and then install the paper feed unit.
1.3.2 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION AND PICKUP ROLLERS

Top Tray (Tray 4)
power source.

2. Pull out the top tray [B] until it stops.
D453 6 SM
Paper Feed
LCIT RT5040
D453
3. Side plate [A] (black screw x 2)
4. Pull the paper feed unit [A].
5. Slide the sensor bracket [A] to the front (black screw x 1).
Note the original position of this bracket. It must be re-installed at its original
position.
SM 7 D453
Paper Feed
6. Remove:
Middle Tray (Tray 5)
power source.

2. Pull out the middle tray [B].
D453 8 SM
Paper Feed
LCIT RT5040
D453
position.
SM 9 D453
Paper Feed
6. Remove:
Bottom Tray (Tray 6)
power source.

2. Pull out the bottom tray [B].
D453 10 SM
Paper Feed
LCIT RT5040
D453
3. Paper end fence [A] if it is stored here.
SM 11 D453
Paper Feed
position.
7. Remove:
D453 12 SM
LCT Motors
1.4 LCT MOTORS
1.4.1 TRANSPORT MOTORS, LCT EXIT MOTOR

4th, 5th, and 6th Transport Motors , ,
LCIT RT5040
D453
Remove:
Left rear cover ( Door and Covers)
[A] Motor unit ( x1, Timing belt x1, x2)
[B] Motor ( x2)
LCT Exit Motor
Remove:
[A] Motor unit ( x1, Timing belt x1, x3)
[B] Motor ( x2)
SM 13 D453
LCT Motors
1.4.2 FEED MOTORS/GRIP MOTORS
Each paper feed unit has a pick-up feed motor and a grip motor . The removal
procedure is the same for each feed tray.
1. Left rear cover ( Door and Covers)
2. Use a small screwdriver to turn the shaft [A] so the pin can slip out of the keyhole.
3. Motor unit [B] ( x4, = x2, x2)
4. Remove:
[A]: Springs (x2). First, loosen the screws (x2) , .
[B]: Paper feed motor ( x2, Timing belt x1)
[C]: Grip motor ( x2, Timing belt x1)
Reinstallation
Attach the tension spring, then tighten the screws to tighten the belts.
D453 14 SM
LCT Motors
1.4.3 LIFT MOTORS

4th, 6th Lift Motors
The procedure for removing the 4th and 6th lift motors is the same.
LCIT RT5040
D453
Remove:
[A]: Motor unit ( x 3, x1).
[B]: 4th (or 6th) lift motor ( x4, Clip x1, Coupling x1, Spring x1)
5th Lift Motor

2. Motor unit [A] ( x 5, x1)
SM 15 D453
LCT Motors
3. 5th lift motor [A] ( x 2)
1.4.4 COOLING FAN

2. Fan bracket [A] ( x 2, = x 1, x 1)
3. Cooling fan [A] ( x 2)
When reinstalling the cooling fan, make sure that the cooling fan is installed with
its decals facing upward.
D453 16 SM
1.5.1 PAPER FEED AND END SENSORS

1. Pull out the paper feed unit ( Paper Feed Unit)
LCIT RT5040
D453
2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, black screw x 1, = x 1, x 2)
3. Remove:
[A]: Paper feed sensor (hooks)
[B]: Paper end sensor (hooks)
When reinstalling the sensor bracket

Make sure that the white connector is connected to the paper feed sensor and the red
connector is connected to the paper end sensor.
SM 17 D453
Use two holes [A] when attaching the sensor bracket. Do not use the hole [B].
1.5.2 LIFT SENSOR

3. Lift sensor [A] (hooks)
D453 18 SM
1.5.3 LCT EXIT SENSOR
LCIT RT5040
D453
Disconnect the LCT from the copier.
[A] Exit sensor unit( x 1, x 1).
[B] Exit sensor
1.5.4 PAPER PATH SENSORS

Removing the Vertical Feed Unit

2. Remove:
Inner upper cover ( Inner Covers)
SM 19 D453
Inner lower cover ( Inner Covers)
3. Disconnect the harness clamps and (= x 2).
4. Disconnect the motor harnesses , , (= x 3, x 11).
D453 20 SM
LCIT RT5040
D453
5. Remove:
[A]: Upper stay ( x 2)
[B]: Lower stay ( x 2)
6. Vertical feed unit [A] ( x 6)
SM 21 D453
1.5.5 4TH TRANSPORT, 4TH RELAY UPPER, LOWER

SENSORS
1. Vertical feed unit. ( Vertical Feed Unit)

2. Remove:
[A]: 4th Transport sensor ( x 1, x 1)
[B]: 4th Relay sensor – upper ( x 1, x 1)
[C]: 4th Relay sensor – lower ( x 1, x 1)
1.5.6 5TH RELAY SENSOR, 5TH TRANSPORT SENSOR

2. Remove:
[A]: 5th Relay sensor ( x 1, x 1)
D453 22 SM
[B]: 5th Transport sensor ( x 1, x 1)
1.5.7 6TH RELAY SENSOR, 6TH TRANSPORT
LCIT RT5040
D453
2. Remove:
[A]: 6th Relay sensor ( x 1, x 1)
[B]: 6th Transport sensor ( x 1, x 1)
1.5.8 MAIN CONTROL BOARD

1. Rear covers ( Door and Covers)
2. Main control board [A] ( x 7, Standoffs x 1, x All).
SM 23 D453
1.5.9 PAPER HEIGHT, PAPER WIDTH SENSORS

Paper Height Sensors
1. Rear left cover ( Door and Covers)

2. Remove:
[A]: Paper height sensor unit ( x 2, x 4).
[B]: Clamp bracket ( x 2)
[C]Paper height sensors (x 4) (Hooks x 2 each)
Paper Width Sensors
1. Rear left cover ( Door and Covers)

2. Remove:
[A]: Paper width sensor unit ( x 2, x 3)
[B]: Paper width sensors (x 3) (Hooks x 2 each)
D453 24 SM
Adjustment
1.6 ADJUSTMENT
1.6.1 SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT
LCIT RT5040
D453
Normally the side registration of the image can be adjusted with SP1002-004 to -006
(Side-to-Side Registration – Tray 4, 5, 6). When the punch hole positions are not aligned
from a particular feed station, adjust the side registration by changing the tray cover
position for the tray, as described below. Then adjust the side registration of the image with
the SP1002.
1. Pull out the tray.
2. Change the screw positions [A] at both the right and left sides as shown.
Adjustment range: 0 ± 2.0 mm adjustment step: 0.5 mm/step
SM 25 D453
Adjustment
1.6.2 IMAGE POSITION BOARD AND SENSOR

[A] Image position sensor unit ( x 2, x 1)
[B] Stopper ( x 1)
[C] Image position sensor
After replacing the image position sensor, do the procedure for image position sensor
adjustment. ( Adjusting Image Position Sensor Strength and Side-to-side
Registration)
Image Position Sensor Board

[D] Cover ( x 2, = x 2)
[E] Image position sensor board ( x 2, x 2, = x 2)

SIDE-TO-SIDE REGISTRATION
2. Disconnect the LCT from the mainframe.
D453 26 SM
Adjustment
LCIT RT5040
D453
3. With the LCT [A] separated from the mainframe, reconnect the LCT cable to the
mainframe.
[C].
7. Enter the SP mode and do SP1910-002 (CIS Image Position Adjustment: LED
Strength - LCT). This calibrates the amount of light to be emitted from the CIS.
8. Do SP1909-002 (CIS Image Position Adjustment: PWM After Adjustment - LCT).
If the displayed value is between 10 (Ah) and 40 (28h), the CIS is calibrated
If the value is outside this range, do SP 1910-002 and 1909-002 again. If the value
10. Reinstall the LCT to the side of the copier.
12. Do "0111-4 to -7" for Trays 4, 5, 6, 7 and set the value for each tray to "Off".
Do SP2902-003, select Pattern 27, then print the trimming pattern.
SM 27 D453
Adjustment
6, and 7.
Print the trimming pattern from each tray of the LCT and from the bypass tray (if
installed).
mm. If it is not 2 mm, adjust with SP1002-004 to -007, depending on which tray is
not within the specified 2 mm.
15. Do SP1912-002 (CIS Image Position Adjustment: Normal Paper). This sets the CIS for
18. Once again, do "0111-4 to -7" (CIS Image Position Adjustment: Feed Setting) and reset
the values for Trays 4, 5, 6, and 7 to "On".
1.6.4 DOUBLE FEED PROBLEM FROM LCT

If double feed occurs several times when paper is fed from an LCT (tray 4, 5, or 6), try to
change the upper limit of the paper stack in the LCT tray
Changing the upper limit of the paper stack in the LCT tray can improve paper separation
for the paper stack in the LCT tray.
D453 28 SM
Adjustment
LCIT RT5040
D453
1. Remove the paper feed unit of the LCT unit ( Paper Feed Unit).
2. Loosen the screw on the paper lift sensor bracket [A].
3. Move the bracket 0.5 mm in the arrow direction as shown above.
4. Tighten the screw on the paper lift sensor bracket [A].
To return the upper limit position to the default position, move the paper lift sensor
bracket 0.5 mm to the opposite side.
Return the upper limit position to the default if a paper jam occurs at the paper
feed sensor in the LCT.
SM 29 D453
Mechanical Overview
2. DETAILS
2.1 MECHANICAL OVERVIEW
2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1. 4th Paper Feed Unit*

1. Lower Transport Rollers
2. Horizontal Transport Roller
3. LCT Exit roller
4. Upper Transport Rollers
5. Feed Slot (from Bypass Tray)
* Each feed unit has 1 paper feed motor that drives the pick-up roller and paper feed roller,
and 1 grip motor that drives the separation roller and grip roller.
D453 30 SM
Mechanical Overview
2.1.2 DRIVE LAYOUT
LCIT RT5040
D453
1. 4th Lift Motor
1. 5th Grip Motor
2. 5th Lift Motor
3. 6th Lift Motor
3. LCT Exit Motor
5. 6th Grip Motor
5. 4th Grip Motor
SM 31 D453
Mechanical Overview
1. LCT Exit Sensor 1. 6th Paper Width Sensor 3

2. 4th Relay Sensor 2. 6th Paper Width Sensor 2
3. Image Position Sensor Board 3. 5th Paper Length Sensor
4. 4th Relay Sensor - Upper 4. 6th Paper Width Sensor 1
5. 4th Transport Sensor 5. 6th Paper Height Sensor 4
6. 4th Paper Height Sensor 4 6. 6th Paper Height Sensor 3
7. 4th Paper Height Sensor 3 7. 6th Paper Length Sensor
10. 4th Paper Width Sensor 3 10. 6th Transport Sensor
11. 4th Paper Width Sensor 2 11. Door Safety Switch
12. 4th Paper Width Sensor 1 12. 6th Paper End Sensor
13. 5th Paper Width Sensor 3 13. 6th Paper Feed Sensor
14. 5th Paper Width Sensor 2 14. 6th Lift Sensor
15. 5th Paper Width Sensor 1 15. 6th Pick-up Solenoid
D453 32 SM
Mechanical Overview
16. 4th Paper Length Sensor 16. 6th Relay Sensor

17. 5th Paper Height Sensor 4 17. 5th Transport Sensor
18. 5th Paper Height Sensor 3 18. 5th Relay Sensor
19. 5th Paper Height Sensor 2 19. LCT Image Position Sensor
LCIT RT5040
D453
1. 5th Transport Motor 10 5th Lift Motor
2. 4th Transport Motor 11. 6th Paper Feed Motor
3. 4th Grip Motor 12. 6th Lift Motor
4. 4th Paper Feed Motor 13. Anti-Condensation Heaters
5. 5th Grip Motor 14. 6th Grip Motor
6. 5th Paper Feed Motor 15. 6th Transport Motor
7. LCIT Cooling Fan 16. LCT Exit Motor
8. 4th Lift Motor 17. Tray Front Fan
9. Main Control Board 18. Tray Rear Fan
Each of the three trays is provided with a front fan (17) and rear fan (18).
SM 33 D453
Mechanical Overview
2.1.4 A3/DLT LCT B834 LAYOUT (WITH BYPASS)
1. Paper Feed Motor Bypass) 1. 5th Paper Feed Sensor

2. Paper Feed Sensor Bypass) 2. 5th Grip Motor
3. Grip Motor Bypass) 3. 5th Transport Motor
4. Transport Sensor Bypass) 4. 5th Transport Sensor
5. Transport Motor Bypass) 5. 6th Paper feed Motor
6. 4th Paper Feed Motor 6. 6th Paper Feed Sensor
7. 4th Paper Feed Sensor 7. 6th Grip Motor
8. 4th Grip Motor 8. 6th Transport Sensor
9. 4th Transport Sensor 9. 6th Transport Motor
10. 4th Transport Motor 10. 6th Relay Sensor
11. 4th Relay Sensor – Upper 11. 5th Relay Sensor
12. 4th Relay Sensor – Lower 12. LCT Exit Motor
13. 5th Paper feed Motor 13. LCT Exit Sensor
D453 34 SM
Mechanical Overview
Motors
Drives the separation roller and the grip roller of

M1 4th Grip Motor
the 4th tray.
Drives the bottom plate of the 4th tray up and
LCIT RT5040
M2 4th Lift Motor
down.
D453
Drives the pick-roller and feed roller that picks up
M3 4th Paper Feed Motor
each sheet and starts to feed it out of the 4th tray.
Drives the rollers in the vertical feed path that feed

M4 4th Transport Motor
the paper from the 4th tray to the LCT exit motor.

M5 5th Grip Motor
the 5th tray.
Drives the bottom plate of the 5th tray up and

M6 5th Lift Motor
down.

Drives the transport rollers in the vertical feed path

M8 5th Transport Motor that feed the paper from the 4th tray and the 5th
tray to the LCT exit motor.

M9 6th Grip Motor
the 6th tray.
M10 6th Lift Motor Drives the 5th tray up and down.

Drives the rollers in the vertical feed path that feed

M12 6th Transport Motor
the paper from the 6th tray to the LCT exit motor.
SM 35 D453
Mechanical Overview
Motors
Feeds the paper out the LCT and into the entrance
M13 LCT Exit Motor
of the copier.
PCBs
Controls the operation of all motors and

PCB1 Main Control Board
sensors in the LCT unit.
Operates the CIS sensor (performs

waveform correction) the LCT. The CRB (CIS
Relay Board) and CIS sensor perform
PCB2 Image Position Sensor Board
side-to-side image correction. The CRB and
CIS are a single unit. The CRB is not a
separate board.
Sensors
Detects when the paper in the 4th tray is

S1 4th Lift Sensor at the correct height for paper feed and
switches the 4th lift motor off.
Detects when the last sheet feeds from

S2 4th Paper End Sensor
the 4th tray.
Detects the paper when it arrives at the

S3 4th Paper Feed Sensor 4th paper feed roller and checks for
misfeeds.
4th from the bottom of the 4th tray, detects

S4 4th Paper Height Sensor 1
stack height: 100%
D453 36 SM
Mechanical Overview
Sensors

stack height: 75%

stack height: 50%
LCIT RT5040
D453
stack height: 25% and signals near-end.
Detects the length of the paper in the 4th

S8 4th Paper Length Sensor (B834) tray (used in combination with the paper
width sensors).
1 of a set of 3 sensors that detect the

S9 4th Paper Width Sensor 1 (B834)
width of the paper in the 4th tray.



S12 4th Paper Size Sensor 1 (B832)


Detects the leading and trailing edges of

the paper in the paper path near the
S15 4th Relay Sensor bottom of the 4th tray. Checks the timing
of the feed and signals a jam if the paper
is late or lags at this location.
SM 37 D453
Mechanical Overview
Sensors

the paper in the paper path near the top of
S16 4th Relay Sensor - Upper (B834) the 4th tray. Checks the timing of the feed
and signals a jam if the paper is late or
lags at this location.
Detects jams in the paper path where the

S17 4th Transport Sensor transport motor feeds the paper from the
4th tray.


the 5th tray.
Detects the paper when it arrives at the

S20 5th Paper Feed Sensor 5th paper feed roller and checks for
misfeeds.

stack height: 100%

stack height: 75%

stack height: 50%


width sensors).
D453 38 SM
Mechanical Overview
Sensors


LCIT RT5040
D453




the paper in the paper path near the 5th
S32 5th Relay Sensor (B834) tray. Checks the timing of the feed and
signals a jam if the paper is late or lags at
this location.

5th tray.


the 6th tray.
S36 6th Paper Feed Sensor Detects the paper when it arrives at the
SM 39 D453
Mechanical Overview
Sensors
6th paper feed roller and checks for

misfeeds.

stack height: 100%

stack height: 75%

stack height: 50%


width sensors).






D453 40 SM
Mechanical Overview
Sensors

the paper in the paper path near the 6th
S48 6th Relay Sensor (B834) tray. Checks the timing of the feed and
signals a jam if the paper is late or lags at
this location.
LCIT RT5040
D453
6th tray.
S50 LCT Exit Sensor Detects jams at the exit of the LCT unit.
Mounted on the CRB (CIS Relay Board),

this contact image sensor detects the
side-to-side edges of the paper in the
S51 LCT Image Position Sensor
paper path. The machine uses this
information to correct the position of the
image when the lasers fire.
Solenoids
Engages/disengages rotation of the

pick-up roller in the 4th tray.


SM 41 D453
Mechanical Overview
Switches
An interlock safety switch that detects

SW1 Door Safety Switch
when the front door is opened and closed.
Other
H1, Evaporates moisture around the trays in

Anti-Condensation Heaters
H2 the LCT (230V 18W).
D453 42 SM
Paper Handling
2.2 PAPER HANDLING
LCIT RT5040
D453
This LCT has three paper tray feed stations:
The 4th and 6th tray each hold 1,000 sheets of paper. The 5th tray holds 2,000 sheets of
paper. Total: 4,000 sheets
Each tray contains four rollers:
[A]: Pick-up roller
[B]: Paper feed roller
[C]: Separation roller
[D]: Grip roller
The pick-up roller, paper feed roller, and separation roller are a standard FRR
paper feed system.
SM 43 D453
Paper Handling
2.2.2 PAPER FEED MOTORS
Two stepper motors control the paper feed drive:

[A] Paper feed motor
[B] Grip motor
The paper feed motor drives the pick-up roller [C] and the paper feed roller [D].
The grip motor drives the grip roller [E] that feeds the paper out of the tray, and the
separation roller [F].
2.2.3 PAPER SEPARATION
When the paper feed station is selected for a job, the paper feed motor [B] and grip motor
[C] turn on.
When the feed motor [B] turns on, it drives the feed roller [D]. It also drives the pick-up
D453 44 SM
Rev. 01/05/2010 Paper Handling
roller [E] because the pick-up roller is linked to the feed roller by an idle gear.
When the paper feed station is set in the mainframe, the separation lift lever rises. As a
result, the separation roller [A] contacts the paper feed roller [D] and turns with the feed
roller, unless more than one sheet of paper is fed. The two trays of the LCT unit use the
standard FRR mechanism.
When the paper feed motor turns on after the pick-up solenoid has turned on, the
pick-up roller [E] lowers until it contacts the top sheet of the paper stack and then
sends it to the paper feed and separation rollers.
If the air assist fan is NOT used:
LCIT RT5040
When the paper feed sensor [F] detects the leading edge of the paper, the paper feed
D453
motor switches OFF, the pick-up roller lifts, and the grip rollers [G] feed the paper out of
the tray.
If the air assist fan is used:
⇒ When the paper feed sensor [F] detects the leading edge of the paper, the paper feed
motor switches OFF and the pick-up roller is lowered. Then the feed motor switches
ON, the paper transport sensor detects the paper, and paper feed motor turns OFF, the
pick-up roller lifts, and the grip rollers [G] feed the paper out of the tray.
2.2.4 PAPER DETECTION/LIFT

Mechanism
Detection
When the tray set in the machine, the tray is detected by the drawer connector on the back
side of the tray.
SM 45 D453
Paper Handling
Lift
When the machine detects that the paper tray is set in the machine:
The tray lift motor [A] rotates forward
Coupling gear [B] on the tray lift motor engages pin [C] of the lift drive shaft.
The tray drive belts [D], connected to the tray bottom plate [E], are driven by the tray lift
motor via the lift drive shaft and tray lift pulleys [F].
When the lift motor rotates forward, the tray bottom plate [E] rises. The tray rises until
the top of the paper stack pushes up the pick-up roller and the lift sensor in the feed
unit is de-activated.
When the actuator [G] on the rear end of the bottom plate activates the paper height
sensors [H], the remaining paper capacity is detected.
When the tray is pulled out:
Coupling gear [B] separates from pin [C] and the tray bottom plate goes down.
A damper [I] slows the descent of the bottom plate. For the B834, all three trays have
this damper.
2.2.5 LIFT SENSOR
When the lift motor turns on, the pick-up solenoid [A] activates to lower the pick-up roller [B].
When the top sheet of paper reaches the proper paper feed level, the paper pushes up the
pick-up roller and the actuator [C] on the pick-up roller supporter [D] de-activates the lift
sensor [E] to stop the lift motor.
After several paper feeds, the paper level gradually lowers, then the lift sensor is activated
and the lift motor turns on again until the lift sensor is de-activated again.
D453 46 SM
Paper Handling
LCIT RT5040
D453
W3 Paper Width Sensor 3
L1 Paper Length Sensor
Each tray has three paper width sensors and one paper length sensor. The illustration
above shows how four sensors are arranged in the tray.
This table describes how the three width sensors and one length sensor are used to
determine the paper size in the 4th, 5th, and 6th paper trays.
Length
Width Sensors Area
Paper Size Sensor
W1 W2 W3 L1 NA EU
12"×18" YES YES
Large Size 13"×19" L L L H NO NO
320×450 mm NO NO
SM 47 D453
Paper Handling
A3 SEF 297×420 mm L L H H YES YES
A4 LEF 297×210 mm L L H L YES YES
DLT SEF 11"×17" L H L H YES YES
LT LEF 11"×8½" L H L L YES YES
B4 SEF 257×364 mm L H H H YES YES
B5 LEF 257×182 mm L H H L YES YES
A4 SEF 210×297 mm H L L H NO YES
LT SEF 8½"×11" H L L H YES NO
A5 LEF 210×148 mm H L L L NO YES
HLT LEF 8½"×5½" H L L L YES NO
B5 SEF 182×257 mm H L H H NO NO
F SEF 8"×13" H L H H YES YES
A5 SEF 148×210 mm H H L L YES YES
HLT SEF 5½"×8½" H H H L YES YES
YES: Detected automatically

NO: Not detected automatically. Requires size setting change with the "Tray Paper Setting"
key on the copier operation panel to detect the desired paper size.
H: Sensor OFF
L: Sensor ON
D453 48 SM
Paper Handling
2.2.7 REMAINING PAPER DETECTION
LCIT RT5040
D453
[A] Paper Height Sensor Actuator
[B] 4th Paper Height Sensor 4
[C] 4th Paper Height Sensor 3
[D] 4th Paper Height Sensor 2
[E] 4th Paper Height Sensor 1 (Near End)
Each tray has four paper height sensors. The illustration above shows the paper height
sensors in the 4th tray. This arrangement is duplicated in the 5th and 6th trays.
The amount of paper remaining in the tray is detected by the three paper height
photo-interrupter sensors on the left rail as the bottom plate rises. Five states, determined
by the position of the actuator [A] are possible.
1. With the actuator [A] below paper height sensor 4 [B], no sensor is actuated and the
display indicates 100%.
2. When the actuator passes paper height sensor 4 [B] , the display indicates 75% of the
3. When the actuator passes paper height sensor 3 [C], the display indicates 50% of the
4. When the actuator passes paper height sensor 2 [D], the display indicates 25% of the
When the actuator enters the gap of the near end sensor [E] and the paper
SM 49 D453
Paper Handling
height sensor 2 [D] does not detect the actuator, the machine signals near
end.
5. Finally, when the last sheet feeds, the paper end sensor signals that the tray is empty.
2.2.8 AIR-ASSISTED FEED MECHANISM
Two air assist fans [A] and [B] comprise the air assist mechanism.
The air flow created by the opposing fans floats the first sheet off the top of the stack. This
assists in the separation of the top sheet from the sheet below and prevents
double-feeding.
This only works when feeding the following paper types: Thick 2, Thick 3, Special 2, coated
paper 1, coated paper 2 and coated paper 3.
2.2.9 PAPER END DETECTION
The paper end sensor [A] detects the top sheet of the paper in the tray by monitoring the
D453 50 SM
Paper Handling
reflected light. When the paper tray runs out of paper, the paper end sensor does not
receive the reflected light due to the cutout [B]. Then, the tray lift motor rotates backwards 2
seconds to drop the tray bottom plate.
LCIT RT5040
D453
The image position sensor [A] is located in the LCT paper path above the paper path and in
front of the LCT exit rollers. (This sensor is mounted on its own control board.)
The sensor is a CIS (Contact Image Sensor). It checks the side edges of each sheet as it
passes, and feeds this information back to the machine.
SM 51 D453
MULTI-FOLDING UNIT FD5000
D454
None
MULTI-FOLDING UNIT FD5000 D454
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 EXTERIOR AND INNER COVERS ............................................................... 1
1.1.1 FRONT DOOR UPPER COVER.......................................................... 1
1.1.2 TOP COVER........................................................................................ 2
1.1.3 INNER UPPER COVER....................................................................... 2
1.1.4 FRONT DOOR..................................................................................... 3
1.1.5 FOLDING UNIT COVER ...................................................................... 3
1.1.6 INNER LOWER COVER ...................................................................... 4
1.1.7 REAR UPPER COVER ........................................................................ 4
1.1.8 REAR LOWER COVER ....................................................................... 4
1.1.9 TOP REAR COVER ............................................................................. 5
1.1.10 TOP TRAY ..................................................................................... 5
1.1.11 TOP TRAY RIGHT COVER............................................................ 5
1.1.12 PULLING OUT THE FOLDING UNIT DRAWER ............................ 6
1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS: REAR SIDE ................................................ 7
1.2.1 MAIN BOARD ...................................................................................... 7
1.2.2 HORIZONTAL TRANSPORT MOTOR ................................................ 7
1.2.3 TOP TRAY EXIT MOTOR.................................................................... 8
1.2.4 TOP TRAY TRANSPORT MOTOR...................................................... 8
1.2.5 ENTRANCE JG (JUNCTION GATE) MOTOR ................................... 10
1.2.6 DYNAMIC ROLLER LIFT MOTOR .................................................... 10
1.2.7 CREASE MOTOR.............................................................................. 11
1.2.8 DYNAMIC ROLLER TRANSPORT MOTOR...................................... 12
1.2.9 REGISTRATION ROLLER RELEASE MOTOR ................................. 12
1.2.10 REGISTRATION ROLLER TRANSPORT MOTOR...................... 13
1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS: 1ST STOPPER......................................... 15
1.3.1 FOLD PLATE MOTOR....................................................................... 15
1.3.2 DIRECT-SEND JG MOTOR............................................................... 15
1.3.3 1ST FOLD MOTOR ........................................................................... 17
1.3.4 FM6 PAWL MOTOR .......................................................................... 17
1.3.5 2ND FOLD MOTOR........................................................................... 18
SM i D454
1.3.6 JOGGER FENCE MOTOR ................................................................ 19
1.3.7 1ST STOPPER UNIT ......................................................................... 19
1.3.8 POSITIONING ROLLER MOTOR...................................................... 21
1.3.9 1ST STOPPER MOTOR .................................................................... 22
1.3.10 JOGGER FENCE HP SENSOR ................................................... 23
1.3.11 POSITIONING ROLLER HP SENSOR......................................... 23
1.3.12 1ST STOPPER PAPER SENSOR ............................................... 24
1.3.13 1ST STOPPER HP SENSOR....................................................... 25
1.3.14 REGISTRATION SENSOR .......................................................... 25
1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS: 2ND STOPPER ........................................ 27
1.4.1 2ND STOPPER UNIT ........................................................................ 27
1.4.2 2ND STOPPER MOTOR ................................................................... 29
1.4.3 2ND STOPPER HP SENSOR............................................................ 29
1.4.4 2ND STOPPER PAPER SENSOR .................................................... 30
1.4.5 BYPASS EXIT PAPER SENSOR ...................................................... 31
1.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS: 3RD STOPPER ........................................ 32
1.5.1 3RD STOPPER UNIT ........................................................................ 32
1.5.2 3RD STOPPER MOTOR ................................................................... 33
1.5.3 3RD STOPPER PAPER SENSOR .................................................... 34
1.5.4 3RD STOPPER HP SENSOR............................................................ 34
1.5.5 DIRECT-SEND JG (JUNCTION GATE) HP SENSOR....................... 35
1.5.6 REGISTRATION ROLLER HP SENSOR........................................... 35
1.5.7 FOLD PLATE HP SENSOR ............................................................... 36
1.5.8 ENTRANCE JG (JUNCTION GATE) HP SENSOR ........................... 37
1.5.9 TOP TRAY EXIT SENSOR ................................................................ 37
1.5.10 ENTRANCE SENSOR.................................................................. 38
1.5.11 TOP TRAY EXIT SENSOR .......................................................... 39
1.6 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS: MAIN 1 ..................................................... 40
1.6.1 TOP TRAY FULL SENSOR (E) ......................................................... 40
1.6.2 TOP TRAY FULL SENSOR (R) ......................................................... 41
1.6.3 VERTICAL PATH PAPER SENSOR.................................................. 41
1.6.4 HORIZONTAL PATH PAPER SENSOR ............................................ 42
1.6.5 HORIZONTAL PATH EXIT SENSOR ................................................ 42
1.6.6 DISCHARGE BRUSH 1 ..................................................................... 43
1.6.7 DISCHARGE BRUSH 2 ..................................................................... 43
1.6.8 DISCHARGE BRUSH 3 ..................................................................... 44
D454 ii SM
1.6.9 PSU ................................................................................................... 44
1.6.10 FIRST FOLD UNIT ....................................................................... 45
1.6.11 DYNAMIC ROLLER HP SENSOR ............................................... 48
1.7 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS: MAIN 2 ..................................................... 49
1.7.1 BYPASS ENTRANCE PAPER SENSOR........................................... 49
Reinstalling the bypass entrance paper sensor..................................... 51
1.7.2 FIRST/ SECOND/ THIRD FOLD ROLLER......................................... 51
1.7.3 FOURTH / FIFTH FOLD ROLLER ..................................................... 54
1.7.4 CREASE ROLLERS .......................................................................... 58
Crease Rollers: Idle Rollers................................................................... 58
Crease Rollers: Drive Rollers ................................................................ 60
1.8 FOLD ADJUSTMENTS ............................................................................... 63
1.8.1 FINE FOLD ADJUSTMENT ............................................................... 63
Before You Begin .................................................................................. 63
FM1 Z-Folding ....................................................................................... 63
FM2 Half Fold........................................................................................ 65
FM3 Letter Fold-out............................................................................... 68
FM4 Letter Fold-in ................................................................................. 70
FM5 Double Parallel Fold ...................................................................... 72
FM6 Gate Fold ...................................................................................... 74
1.9 SKEW ADJUSTMENT ................................................................................ 77
1.9.1 MANUAL ADJUSTMENTS BY SERVICE TECHNICIAN ................... 77
Before You Begin .................................................................................. 77
Front and Rear ...................................................................................... 77
Skew Correction Reference Diagrams and Table ................................. 79
General Procedure ................................................................................ 81
Stopper Adjustment Procedures............................................................ 83
2. DETAILS ........................................................................................87
2.1 OVERVIEW................................................................................................. 87
2.1.1 MOTORS, ROLLERS ........................................................................ 87
2.1.2 JUNCTION GATES, JUNCTION GATE SOLENOIDS ....................... 88
2.1.3 STOPPERS, STOPPER MOTORS.................................................... 89
2.2 PAPER PATH ............................................................................................. 90
2.2.1 PAPER REGISTRATION ................................................................... 90
2.2.2 PRE-STACKING ................................................................................ 91
SM iii D454
2.2.3 JUNCTION GATES............................................................................ 97
Entrance Junction Gates ....................................................................... 97
Direct Send Junction Gate .................................................................... 99
Bypass Junction Gate ......................................................................... 100
Exit, Reverse, and Top Tray Junction Gates ....................................... 101
2.3 PAPER FOLDING ..................................................................................... 103
2.3.1 FLEX-NIP FOLDING ........................................................................ 103
2.3.2 STOPPER LOCATIONS .................................................................. 104
2.3.3 FOLDING METHODS ...................................................................... 104
FM1 Z-Folding ..................................................................................... 105
FM2 Half Fold...................................................................................... 106
FM3 Letter Fold-out............................................................................. 107
FM4 Letter Fold-in ............................................................................... 108
FM5 Double Parallel Fold .................................................................... 109
FM6 Gate Fold .................................................................................... 109
Fold Adjustments with SP Codes ........................................................ 111
2.3.4 CREASE ROLLERS ........................................................................ 113
2.4 TRAY FULL............................................................................................... 114
2.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ................................................................. 115
2.5.1 TRANSPORT SENSORS ................................................................ 115
2.5.2 OPERATION SENSORS ................................................................. 116
2.5.3 MOTORS, SOLENOIDS .................................................................. 117
2.5.4 PAPER TRANSPORT MOTORS ..................................................... 118
2.5.5 FOLD MOTORS............................................................................... 119
2.5.6 MOTORS, SOLENOIDS AROUND THE TOP TRAY ....................... 120
2.5.7 MOTORS, SENSORS TOP ............................................................. 121
2.5.8 MOTORS, SENSORS BOTTOM ..................................................... 122
2.5.9 SENSORS AROUND TOP TRAY .................................................... 123
2.5.10 FOLD MOTORS, SENSORS, SOLENOIDS............................... 124
2.5.11 BOARDS, SWITCHES, FAN ...................................................... 126
2.5.12 COMPONENT LIST ................................................................... 126
D454 iv SM
Read This First
Conventions
Common Terms
Core Tech Manual
Screw
Connector
E-ring
C-ring
= Harness clamp
JG Junction Gate
LEF Long Edge Feed
SEF Short Edge Feed




Safety Information
engineers).

Power
belts, etc.).
operation.
Special Tools

During Maintenance
General

Safety Devices
Organic Cleaners
Ozone Filters
cord.

items.
remove.
machine.
damaged.
machine.
vibration.
freely.
exposed to:
Dust
Water
Direct sunlight
Open flame
Corrosive gases
Trademarks
those marks.
Exterior and Inner Covers
1.1 EXTERIOR AND INNER COVERS
1.1.1 FRONT DOOR UPPER COVER
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
2. Hinge cover [A] ( x 1)
3. Cross-piece [A] ( x 2)
SM 1 D454
Replacement and Adjustment
4. Front door upper cover [A] ( x 2)
1.1.2 TOP COVER

2. Hinge cover ( p.1 "Front Door Upper Cover")
3. Cross-piece ( p.1 "Front Door Upper Cover")
4. Top cover [A] ( x 2)
1.1.3 INNER UPPER COVER

1. Top cover ( p.2)
D454 2 SM
2. Remove the knobs [A] ( x 1 each).

3. Inner upper cover [B] ( x 2)
Release the hooks [C] to remove the inner upper cover.
1.1.4 FRONT DOOR

1. Top cover ( p.2)
2. Inner upper cover ( p.2)
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
3. Remove the screw [A].
4. Loosen three screws [B].
5. Lift up the hinge bracket [C].
6. Front door [D]
1.1.5 FOLDING UNIT COVER

2. Remove the knob [A] ( x 1).

3. Remove four knobs [B] ( x 1 each).
4. Folding unit cover [C] ( x 3, hook x 2)
SM 3 D454
1.1.6 INNER LOWER COVER

2. Inner lower cover [A] ( x 1, hook)
1.1.7 REAR UPPER COVER
1. Rear upper cover [A] ( x 4)
1.1.8 REAR LOWER COVER

1. Rear upper cover ( p.4)
D454 4 SM
2. Rear lower cover [A] ( x 3)
1.1.9 TOP REAR COVER

2. Top rear cover [A] ( x 4)
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
1.1.10 TOP TRAY
D454
1. Top rear cover ( p.5)
2. Inner upper cover ( p.2)
3. Release the hook [A], and remove the top tray [B] ( x 1).
1.1.11 TOP TRAY RIGHT COVER

1. Top tray ( p.5)
SM 5 D454
2. Top tray right cover [A] ( x 1)
1.1.12 PULLING OUT THE FOLDING UNIT DRAWER
1. Open the front door [A]

2. Pull out the folding unit drawer [B].
D454 6 SM
Electrical Components: Rear Side
1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS: REAR SIDE
1.2.1 MAIN BOARD

Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
2. Main board [A] ( x all, x 7)
1.2.2 HORIZONTAL TRANSPORT MOTOR

3. Horizontal transport motor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 2)
SM 7 D454
4. Horizontal transport motor [A] ( x 2)
1.2.3 TOP TRAY EXIT MOTOR

3. Top tray exit motor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 2)
4. Top tray exit motor [A] ( x 2)
1.2.4 TOP TRAY TRANSPORT MOTOR

D454 8 SM
3. Main board bracket [A] ( x all, x 5, ground cable x 1)
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
4. Top tray transport motor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 2)
5. Top tray transport motor [A] ( x 2)
SM 9 D454
1.2.5 ENTRANCE JG (JUNCTION GATE) MOTOR

2. Entrance JG motor [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 2)
1.2.6 DYNAMIC ROLLER LIFT MOTOR

3. Main board bracket ( p.8 "Top Tray Transport Motor")
4. Rear upper stay [A] ( x 3, x 6)
D454 10 SM
5. Dynamic roller lift motor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 2)
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
6. Dynamic roller lift motor [A] ( x 2)
1.2.7 CREASE MOTOR

2. Rear lower cover ( p.4)
5. Crease motor [A] ( x 2, x 4)
SM 11 D454
1.2.8 DYNAMIC ROLLER TRANSPORT MOTOR

2. Dynamic roller transport motor bracket [A]( x 1, x 2)
3. Dynamic roller transport motor ( x 2)
1.2.9 REGISTRATION ROLLER RELEASE MOTOR

D454 12 SM
3. Registration roller release motor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 2)
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
4. Registration roller release motor [A] ( x 2)
1.2.10 REGISTRATION ROLLER TRANSPORT MOTOR

SM 13 D454
3. Registration roller transport motor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 2)
4. Registration roller transport motor [A] ( x 2)
D454 14 SM
Electrical Components: 1st Stopper
1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS: 1ST STOPPER
1.3.1 FOLD PLATE MOTOR

Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
3. Fold plate motor bracket [A] ( x 3, x 1, x 2)
4. Fold plate motor [A] ( x 2)
1.3.2 DIRECT-SEND JG MOTOR

SM 15 D454
3. Rear lower stay [A] ( x 5, x 2)
4. Direct-Send JG motor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 2)
5. Direct-Send JG motor [A] ( x 2)
D454 16 SM
1.3.3 1ST FOLD MOTOR

Multi-Folding
3. 1st fold motor [A] ( x 1, x 4)
Unit FD5000
D454
1.3.4 FM6 PAWL MOTOR
3. FM6 pawl motor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 2)
SM 17 D454
4. FM6 pawl motor [A] ( x 2)
1.3.5 2ND FOLD MOTOR

3. 2nd fold motor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 3)
4. 2nd fold motor [A] ( x 2)
D454 18 SM
1.3.6 JOGGER FENCE MOTOR

1. Pull out the folding unit drawer ( p.6).
2. Jogger fence motor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 2)
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
3. Jogger fence motor [A] ( x 2)
1.3.7 1ST STOPPER UNIT

1. Folding unit cover ( p.3)
SM 19 D454
4. Drawer stopper [A] ( x 1)
5. Belt tension bracket [A] ( x 2)
6. Release two clamps [A].

7. Disconnect two connectors [B].
8. Remove two screws [A].
D454 20 SM

11. Pull out the folding unit drawer ( p.6).
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
12. Hold the 1st stopper unit [A], and then remove it ( x 2).
The 1st stopper unit cannot hang the folding unit drawer without the two screws.
If you remove the 1st stopper unit without any support, the 1st stopper unit can
fall and be broken.
1.3.8 POSITIONING ROLLER MOTOR

1. 1st stopper unit ( p.19)
SM 21 D454
2. Positioning roller motor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 2)
3. Positioning roller motor [A] ( x 2)
1.3.9 1ST STOPPER MOTOR

D454 22 SM
2. 1st stopper motor [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 2)
1.3.10 JOGGER FENCE HP SENSOR

2. Jogger fence motor bracket [A] ( x 2)
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
3. Jogger fence timing belt bracket [A] ( x 2)
4. Jogger fence HP sensor [A] (hooks, x 1)
1.3.11 POSITIONING ROLLER HP SENSOR

SM 23 D454
2. Positioning Roller HP sensor [A] (hooks, x 1)
1.3.12 1ST STOPPER PAPER SENSOR

2. 1st stopper paper sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)
3. 1st stopper paper sensor [A] (hooks)
D454 24 SM
1.3.13 1ST STOPPER HP SENSOR

Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
2. 1st stopper HP sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)
D454
3. 1st stopper HP sensor [A] (hooks)
1.3.14 REGISTRATION SENSOR

1. Pull out the folding unit drawer ( Pull Out the Folding Unit Drawer)
SM 25 D454
2. Jam removal door [A] ( x 3, x 1, x 1)
3. Registration sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)

4. Registration sensor [B] (hooks, x 1)
D454 26 SM
Electrical Components: 2nd Stopper
1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS: 2ND STOPPER
1.4.1 2ND STOPPER UNIT

2. Jam removal door ( p.25 "Registration Sensor")
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
3. Remove two screws [A] at the rear side of the folding unit drawer.
4. Remove the spring [A] for the solenoid spring [B] for the guide plate.
5. Remove the arm [C] for the guide plate.
SM 27 D454
6. Release the clamp [A] and disconnect two connectors [B].

7. Pull out the folding unit drawer.
8. Top stay [A] ( x 3)
9. Move down the 2nd stopper unit [A] a little bit ( x 2).
D454 28 SM
10. Open the jam removal door [A], and then remove the 2nd stopper unit [B].
1.4.2 2ND STOPPER MOTOR

1. 2nd stopper unit ( p.27)
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
2. 2nd stopper motor [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 2)
1.4.3 2ND STOPPER HP SENSOR

SM 29 D454
2. 2nd stopper HP sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)
3. 2nd stopper HP sensor [A] (hooks, x 1)
1.4.4 2ND STOPPER PAPER SENSOR

2. 2nd stopper paper sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)
D454 30 SM
3. 2nd stopper paper sensor [A] ( x 1)
1.4.5 BYPASS EXIT PAPER SENSOR
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
3. Bypass exit paper sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)
4. Bypass exit paper sensor [A] ( x 1)
SM 31 D454
1.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS: 3RD STOPPER
1.5.1 3RD STOPPER UNIT

4. Drawer stopper [A] ( x 1)
5. Release the clamp [A].

7. 2nd fold motor bracket ( p.18 "2nd Fold Motor")
D454 32 SM
Electrical Components: 3rd Stopper
8. Remove two screws [A].
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
9. Hold the 3rd stopper unit [A], and then remove it ( x 2).
The 3rd stopper unit cannot hang the folding unit drawer without the two screws.
If you remove the 1st stopper unit without any support, the 3rd stopper unit can
fall and be broken.
1.5.2 3RD STOPPER MOTOR

1. 3rd stopper unit ( p.32)
2. 3rd stopper motor [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 2)
SM 33 D454
1.5.3 3RD STOPPER PAPER SENSOR

2. 3rd stopper paper sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)
3. 3rd stopper paper sensor [A] ( x 1)
1.5.4 3RD STOPPER HP SENSOR

2. 3rd stopper HP sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)
D454 34 SM
3. 3rd stopper HP sensor [A] ( x 1)
1.5.5 DIRECT-SEND JG (JUNCTION GATE) HP SENSOR

Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
3. Direct-Send JG HP sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1)
4. Direct-Send JG HP sensor [A] (hooks)
1.5.6 REGISTRATION ROLLER HP SENSOR

SM 35 D454
3. Registration roller HP sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1)
4. Registration roller HP sensor [A] (hooks)
1.5.7 FOLD PLATE HP SENSOR

D454 36 SM
3. Fold plate HP sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1)
4. Fold plate HP sensor [A] (hooks)
1.5.8 ENTRANCE JG (JUNCTION GATE) HP SENSOR
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
2. Entrance JG HP sensor [A] (hooks, x 1)
1.5.9 TOP TRAY EXIT SENSOR

1. Top cover ( p.2)
SM 37 D454
2. Top tray exit sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)
3. Top tray exit sensor [A] ( x 1)
1.5.10 ENTRANCE SENSOR
1. Entrance sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)
D454 38 SM
2. Entrance sensor [A] (hooks, x 1)
1.5.11 TOP TRAY EXIT SENSOR

1. Top tray right cover ( p.5)
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
2. Top tray exit sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)
3. Top tray exit sensor [A] (hooks, x 1)
SM 39 D454
1.6 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS: MAIN 1
1.6.1 TOP TRAY FULL SENSOR (E)

1. Top tray ( p.5)
2. Paper exit cover [A] ( x 1)
3. Top tray full sensor (E) bracket ( x 1)
4. Top tray full sensor (E) [A] ( x 1, x 1)
D454 40 SM
Electrical Components: Main 1
1.6.2 TOP TRAY FULL SENSOR (R)

1. Top tray ( p.5)
2. Top tray full sensor (R) [A] ( x 1, x 1)
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
1.6.3 VERTICAL PATH PAPER SENSOR
D454
1. Top tray ( p.5)
2. Remove the bracket ( x 5)
3. Vertical path paper sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks)
SM 41 D454
1.6.4 HORIZONTAL PATH PAPER SENSOR

1. Top tray ( p.5)
3. Horizontal path paper sensor [A] ( x 1)
1.6.5 HORIZONTAL PATH EXIT SENSOR

1. Top tray ( p.5)
D454 42 SM
3. Horizontal path exit sensor ( [A] x 1)
1.6.6 DISCHARGE BRUSH 1

1. Top cover ( p.2)
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
2. Discharge brush 1 [A] ( x 2)

1. Top tray ( p.5)
SM 43 D454
1.6.9 PSU
1. Left lower bracket ( x 6)
D454 44 SM
2. PSU [A] ( x 6, x 4)
1.6.10 FIRST FOLD UNIT
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
2. Jam removal door [A] ( x 1, x 3, x 1)
3. Remove two guide plates [A] (each x 2)
SM 45 D454
4. Registration roller transport motor bracket [A] ( p.13 "Registration Roller Transport
Motor")
5. Registration roller release motor bracket [B] ( p.12 "Registration Roller Release
Motor")
6. Fold plate motor bracket [C] ( p.15 "Fold Plate Motor")
7. Timing belt of the 1st plate motor [D]
8. Remove three screws on the rear side.
D454 46 SM
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
9. Disconnect four harnesses [A] on the rear side.
SM 47 D454
11. Lower guide plate [A], keep the upper guide plate [B] up a little and remove the first fold
unit ( x 3, snap fit [C] x 1)
1.6.11 DYNAMIC ROLLER HP SENSOR

1. First fold unit ( p.45)
2. Dynamic roller HP sensor bracket ( x 1)
3. Dynamic roller HP sensor [A] ( x 1)
D454 48 SM
1.7 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS: MAIN 2
1.7.1 BYPASS ENTRANCE PAPER SENSOR

Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
4. Disconnect the bypass entrance paper sensor harness [A] from the connector [B] (= x
2).
5. Remove the clip [A] for the bypass entrance guide plate.
SM 49 D454
6. Push the bypass entrance guide plate [A] to the rear, then slide it to the left, and remove
it.
7. Bypass entrance paper sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)
8. Bypass entrance paper sensor [A] (= x 1, x 1, x 1)
D454 50 SM
Reinstalling the bypass entrance paper sensor
Put the harness of the bypass entrance paper sensor through the hole [A] in the rear frame
of the drawer.
1.7.2 FIRST/ SECOND/ THIRD FOLD ROLLER
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
1. First fold unit ( p.45)
D454
2. Tension bracket [A] (spring x 1, x 1)
3. Rear bracket [B] ( x 3)
4. Remove the gear [A] ( x 1)
SM 51 D454
5. Guide plate [A] ( x 1)
6. Remove the spring [A] at the front side.

7. Remove six gears (clip x 1 each)
8. Remove the links [A] (clip x 1 each).
D454 52 SM
9. Tension bracket [A] ( x 1)

10. Remove the front bracket [B] ( x 2).
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
11. Third fold roller with the guide plate [A]
12. Remove the guide plate [B].
13. Second fold roller [C].
14. Remove the gear [A] ( x 1), and then the first fold roller [B].
SM 53 D454
1.7.3 FOURTH / FIFTH FOLD ROLLER

3. Drawer stopper ( p.32 "3rd Stopper Unit")
4. Remove the links [A] on the front side (clip x 2 each).

5. Remove four gears [B].
6. Remove the links [A] (pin x 1 each)

7. Remove the gear [B] ( x 1), and the gear [C] (timing belt x 1).
D454 54 SM
8. Remove the spring [A] and the tension bracket [B] ( x 1).
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
9. Left lower bracket ( x 6)
10. Lift up the hook [A] to release the guide plate shaft [B].
11. Move the guide plate shaft [B] to the front side (arrow direction), and then remove the
guide plate [C].
SM 55 D454
12. Remove the cam [A] on the front side.

13. Fold roller fixing front plate [B] ( x 3)
14. 2nd fold motor [A] ( p.18)

15. 2nd fold pulley gear [B] ( x 1) and idle gear
16. Timing belt [C]
17. Spring [D]
18. FM6 pawl motor [E] ( p.17)
19. Pulley gear [F]
D454 56 SM
20. 1st fold motor [A] ( p.17)
21. FM6 pawl HP sensor bracket [B]
22. FM6 pawl cam gear [C]
23. Release the tension bracket [D], and then remove the transmission pulley gear [E] (pin x
1)
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
24. Remove the entrance guide plate [A] at the 2nd fold unit ( x 4).
D454
25. Hold the fourth fold roller cam [A] at the rear of the drawer unit.
26. Pull the fourth fold roller [B] to the front side .
27. Keep the FM6 pawl [C] open, and then remove the fourth fold roller .
Hold the holder [A] when pulling the fourth fold roller [B] in the direction.
SM 57 D454
28. Remove the fifth fold roller [A].
1.7.4 CREASE ROLLERS

Crease Rollers: Idle Rollers
1. Folding Unit Cover ( p.3)
2. Drawer stopper ( p.32 "3rd Stopper Unit")
3. Pull out the folding unit drawer fully ( p.6).
4. Crease jam removal door [A]

5. Tension springs [B] (front: 4, rear: 4)
The lowest spring should be a black one when reinstalling the springs.
D454 58 SM
6. Tension brackets [A] ( x 1 each/ front: 4, rear: 4)
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
There are two types of tension brackets at the crease roller area. The difference
between these brackets is the number of screw holes ([A]: one hole, [B]: two holes).
Attach a bracket [A] with one hole to the crease roller frame with one hole.
Attach a bracket [B] with two holes to the crease roller frame with two holes.
7. Magnet attachment bracket [A] ( x 1)
SM 59 D454
8. Crease rollers: idle rollers [A]
Crease Rollers: Drive Rollers

1. Crease Rollers: Idle Rollers (described above)
5. Rear upper stay ( p.10 "Dynamic Roller Lift Motor")
6. Drawer connector bracket [A] ( x 3)

7. Crease motor ( p.11)
D454 60 SM
8. Crease path guide plate [A] ( x 5)
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
9. Crease roller pulley gears [A] ( x 1 each)
10. Crease roller fixing plate [A] ( x 2)
SM 61 D454
11. Crease rollers: drive rollers [A]
D454 62 SM
Fold Adjustments
1.8 FOLD ADJUSTMENTS
1.8.1 FINE FOLD ADJUSTMENT

Before You Begin
The fold positions can be adjusted in the User Tools (Operators, Skilled Operators) and the
engine SP mode.
Mode Fold User Tools*1 SP
FM1 1st 0501 Adjust Z-fold Position 1 6750
2nd 0502 Adjust Z-fold Position 2 6751
FM2 1st 0503 Adjust Half Fold Position 6752
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
FM3 1st 0504 Adjust Letter Fold-out Position 1 6753
D454
2nd 0505 Adjust Letter Fold-out Position 2 6754
FM4 1st 0506 Adjust Letter Fold-in Position 1 6755
2nd 0507 Adjust Letter Fold-in Position 2 6756
FM5 1st 0508 Adjust Double Parallel Fold Position 1 6757
2nd 0509 Adjust Double Parallel Fold Position 2 6758
FM6 1st 0510 Adjust Gate Fold Position 1 6759
2nd 0511 Adjust Gate Fold Position 2 6760
3rd 0512 Adjust Gate Fold Position 3 6761
*1: These numbers are the same for Operators and Skilled Operators.
FM1 Z-Folding
User Tool Adjustment (Operator, Skilled Operator)
The following standard adjustment of "S" can be done by the operator or skilled operator in
the User Tools mode. Only "S" can be adjusted by the operator, as shown in the table below.
SM 63 D454
Size Setting Default Range
A3 SEF S 2 mm 2 to 25 mm
B4 SEF S 2 mm 2 to 17 mm
A4 SEF S 2 mm 2 to 17 mm
DLT S 2 mm 2 to 20 mm
LG S 2 mm 2 to 17 mm
LT SEF S 2 mm 2 to 17 mm
Other S 2 mm 2 to 17 mm
Pitch Adj. 1 mm
Engine SP Adjustment
The following fine adjustment of "S" and "L" can be done by the customer engineer in the SP
mode. "L" can be adjusted only for the paper sizes listed in the table below.
D454 64 SM
Fold Adjustments
Size Setting Default Range Setting Default Range
A3 SEF S 0 mm ±4 mm L 0 mm ±4 mm
B4 SEF S 0 mm ±4 mm L 0 mm ±4 mm
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
A4 SEF S 0 mm ±4 mm L 0 mm ±4 mm
DLT S 0 mm ±4 mm L 0 mm ±4 mm
LG S 0 mm ±4 mm L 0 mm ±4 mm
LT SEF S 0 mm ±4 mm L 0 mm ±4 mm
12"x18" S 0 mm ±4 mm L 0 mm ±4 mm
8-Kai S 0 mm ±4 mm L 0 mm ±4 mm
Other S 0 mm ±4 mm L 0 mm ±4 mm
Pitch Adj. 0.2 mm
FM2 Half Fold

The following standard adjustment of "S" can be done by the operator or skilled operator in
the User Tools mode. Only "S" can be adjusted by the operator, as shown in the table below.
SM 65 D454
A3 SEF S 0 mm ±10 mm
B4 SEF S 0 mm ±10 mm
DLT S 0 mm ±10 mm
LG S 0 mm ±10 mm
LT SEF S 0 mm ±10 mm
Other S 0 mm ±10 mm
Pitch Adj. ±1 mm
Notes
No folding adjustment can be done for 13"x19.2", 13"x19", 12.6"x19.2"
The following fine adjustment of "S" can be done by the customer engineer in the SP mode.
D454 66 SM
Fold Adjustments
13"x19.2" S 0 mm ±4 mm
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
13"x19" S 0 mm ±4 mm
D454
12.6"x19.2" S 0 mm ±4 mm
12.6"x18.5" S 0 mm ±4 mm
13"x18" S 0 mm ±4 mm
SR A3 (320x450 mm) S 0 mm ±4 mm
SR A4 (225x320 mm) S 0 mm ±4 mm
226x310 mm S 0 mm ±4 mm
310x432 mm S 0 mm ±4 mm
DLT S 0 mm ±4 mm
LG S 0 mm ±4 mm
SM 67 D454
LT SEF S 0 mm ±4 mm
12"x18" S 0 mm ±4 mm
8-Kai S 0 mm ±4 mm
Other S 0 mm ±4 mm
Pitch Adj. 0.2 mm
FM3 Letter Fold-out

The following standard adjustment of "S1" can be done by the operator or skilled operator in
the User Tools mode. Only "S1" can be adjusted by the operator, as shown in the table
below.
A3 SEF S1 0 mm ±10 mm --- --- ---
B4 SEF S1 0 mm ±10 mm --- --- ---
A4 SEF S1 0 mm ±10 mm --- --- ---
DLT S1 0 mm ±10 mm --- --- ---
LG S1 0 mm ±10 mm --- --- ---
D454 68 SM
Fold Adjustments
LT SEF S1 0 mm ±10 mm --- --- ---
Other S1 0 mm ±10 mm --- --- ---
Pitch Adj. 1 mm
The following fine adjustment of "S2" and "L" can be done by the customer engineer in the
SP mode.
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
A3 SEF L 0 mm ±4 mm S2 0 mm ±4 mm
B4 SEF L 0 mm ±4 mm S2 0 mm ±4 mm
A4 SEF L 0 mm ±4 mm S2 0 mm ±4 mm
B5 SEF L 0 mm ±3 mm S2 0 mm ±3 mm
DLT L 0 mm ±4 mm S2 0 mm ±4 mm
LG L 0 mm ±4 mm S2 0 mm ±4 mm
LT SEF L 0 mm ±4 mm S2 0 mm ±4 mm
12"x18" L 0 mm ±4 mm S2 0 mm ±4 mm
SM 69 D454
8-Kai L 0 mm ±4 mm S2 0 mm ±4 mm
Other L 0 mm ±4 mm S2 0 mm ±4 mm
Pitch Adj. 0.2 mm
FM4 Letter Fold-in

the User Tools mode. Only "S1" can be adjusted by the operator as shown in the table
below.
A3 SEF S1 2 mm 2 to 7 mm --- --- ---
B4 SEF S1 2 mm 2 to 7 mm --- --- ---
A4 SEF S1 2 mm 2 to 7 mm --- --- ---
DLT S1 2 mm 2 to 7 mm --- --- ---
LG S1 2 mm 2 to 7 mm --- --- ---
LT SEF S1 2 mm 2 to 7 mm --- --- ---
D454 70 SM
Fold Adjustments
Other S1 2 mm 2 to 7 mm --- --- ---
Pitch Adj. 1 mm
The following fine adjustment of "L1" and "L2" can be done by the customer engineer in the
SP mode.
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
A3 SEF L1 0 mm ±4 mm S1 0 mm ±4 mm
B4 SEF L1 0 mm ±4 mm S1 0 mm ±4 mm
A4 SEF L1 0 mm ±4 mm S1 0 mm ±4 mm
B5 SEF L1 0 mm ±4 mm S1 0 mm ±4 mm
DLT L1 0 mm ±4 mm S1 0 mm ±4 mm
LG L1 0 mm ±4 mm S1 0 mm ±4 mm
LT SEF L1 0 mm ±4 mm S1 0 mm ±4 mm
12"x18" L1 0 mm ±4 mm S1 0 mm ±4 mm
8-Kai L1 0 mm ±4 mm S1 0 mm ±4 mm
SM 71 D454
Other L1 0 mm ±4 mm S1 0 mm ±4 mm
Pitch Adj. 0.2 mm
FM5 Double Parallel Fold

the User Tools mode. Only "S1" can be adjusted by the operator as shown in the table
below.
A3 SEF S1 0 mm ±10 mm
B4 SEF S1 0 mm ±10 mm
DLT S1 0 mm ±10 mm
LG S1 0 mm ±10 mm
D454 72 SM
Fold Adjustments
LT SEF S1 0 mm ±10 mm
Other S1 0 mm ±10 mm
Pitch Adj. 1 mm
The following fine adjustment of "S1" and "S2" can be done by the customer engineer in the
SP mode.
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
Size Setting Default Range Setting Default Range D454
A3 SEF S1 0 mm ±4 mm S2 0 mm ±4 mm
B4 SEF S1 0 mm ±4 mm S2 0 mm ±4 mm
A4 SEF S1 0 mm ±4 mm S2 0 mm ±4 mm
B5 SEF S1 0 mm ±4 mm S2 0 mm ±4 mm
DLT S1 0 mm ±4 mm S2 0 mm ±4 mm
LG S1 0 mm ±4 mm S2 0 mm ±4 mm
SM 73 D454
LT SEF S1 0 mm ±4 mm S2 0 mm ±4 mm
12"x18" S1 0 mm ±4 mm S2 0 mm ±4 mm
8-Kai S1 0 mm ±4 mm S2 0 mm ±4 mm
Other S1 0 mm ±4 mm S2 0 mm ±4 mm
Pitch Adj. 0.2 mm
FM6 Gate Fold

The following standard adjustment of "S1" and "S2" can be done by the operator or skilled
operator in the User Tools mode.
A3 SEF S1, S2 2 mm 2 to 12 mm
B4 SEF S1, S2 2 mm 2 to 12 mm
A4 SEF S1, S2 2 mm 2 to 12 mm
DLT S1, S2 2 mm 2 to 12 mm
LG S1, S2 2 mm 2 to 12 mm
LT SEF S1, S2 2 mm 2 to 12 mm
D454 74 SM
Fold Adjustments
Other S1, S2 2 mm 2 to 12 mm
Pitch Adj. 1 mm
The following fine adjustment of "S1", "S2", and "S3" can be done by the customer engineer
in the SP mode.
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
DLT S1 0 mm ±4 mm
LG S1 0 mm ±4 mm
8-Kai S1 0 mm ±4 mm
Pitch Adj. 0.2 mm
SM 75 D454
DLT S2 0 mm ±4 mm
LG S2 0 mm ±4 mm
Pitch Adj. 0.2 mm
DLT S3 0 mm ±4 mm
LG S3 0 mm ±4 mm
12"x18" S3 0 mm ±4 mm
Pitch Adj. 0.2 mm
D454 76 SM
Skew Adjustment
1.9 SKEW ADJUSTMENT
1.9.1 MANUAL ADJUSTMENTS BY SERVICE TECHNICIAN

Before You Begin
These adjustments can be done by the service technician adjusting the set and adjustment
screws on the multi-folder unit.
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
The illustration above shows the positions of the three stoppers inside the machine. The
positioning of the stoppers is critical because this determines the types of folding.
Front and Rear

The terms "Front" and "Rear" are critical to understanding how paper is skewing during
folding. These terms are defined relative to the positioning of the paper in the paper path as
it feeds and exits.
"High" means the distance from the nip of the fold roller to the stopper is too far on one
end of the fence.
"Low" means the distance from the nip of the fold roller to the stopper is too short.
SM 77 D454
Two examples are shown below.

Example 1: High (Stopper Too Far From The Nip)
The black arrow shows the direction of paper feed from right to left. When the skew sheet is
opened the Front edge is longer than the Rear edge.
Example 2: FM2: Low (Stopper to Close to the Nip)
D454 78 SM
Skew Adjustment
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
The black arrow shows the direction of paper feed from right to left. When the skew sheet is
opened the Front edge is shorter than the Rear edge.
Skew Correction Reference Diagrams and Table

Skew Correction Reference Diagrams
Key
Symbol/Color What It Means
{ Stopper 1 needs adjustment
Stopper 2 needs adjustment
} Stopper 3 needs adjustment
Blue line Peak fold (points left)
Green line Valley fold (points right)
SM 79 D454
D454 80 SM
Skew Adjustment
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
General Procedure
D454
1. Retrieve the first folded paper from the top of the multi-folder. The first sheet is on the
bottom of the stack.
2. If a fold is skewed, spread the paper out in the direction of paper feed shown in the
diagrams above.
3. Carefully measure the distances between the folds between L1, L2, L3.
4. Compare the Front and Rear measurements.
5. Refer to the table below to determine where the paper is skewing and what type of
adjustment is required.
Skew Correction Reference Table
SM 81 D454
L1 L2 L3 S1 S2 S3
FM1 --- F Long F Long --- Lower F Raise F
--- F Short F Short --- Raise F Lower F
FM2 F Long --- --- Raise F --- ---
F Short --- --- Lower F --- ---
FM3 F Long F Long --- Raise F Lower F ---
F Short F Short --- Lower F Raise F ---
FM6 F Long F Long F Long Lower F Lower F Raise F
F Short F Short F Short Raise F Raise F Lower F
Table Key
You must refer to the "Skew Correction Reference Diagrams". The following abbreviations
are used in the table above.
Term What It Means
F Long Front measurement of L1, L2, or L3 is longer than Rear..
F Short Front measurement of L1, L2, or L3 is shorter than Rear..
S1, S2, S3 Refers to Stopper 1, Stopper 2, Stopper. In the diagrams these are
annotated as: {, , } respectively.
Raise F Raise the front end of the stopper fence. For more, see below.
Lower F Lower the front end of the stopper fence. For more, see below.
D454 82 SM
Skew Adjustment
Example: FM1 (Z-fold)
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
First, compare the L2 measurements.
D454
In this example, imagine that L2 is longer at the front than at the rear.
Look at the table, in the row for FM1, and the column for L2.
‘F Long’ means Front measurement longer than Rear
‘F Short’ means Rear measurement longer than Front
L2 is longer at the front, so we have an ‘F Long’ situation.
Then look at the next line, below ‘F Long’. It says ‘Lower F on S2’.
This means you must lower the front end of stopper 2.
Then, compare the L3 measurements.
In this example, imagine that L3 is longer at the front than at the rear.
Look at the table, in the row for FM1, and the column for L3.
‘F Long’ means Front measurement longer than Rear
‘F Short’ means Rear measurement longer than Front
L3 is longer at the front, so we have an ‘F Long’ situation again.
Then look at the next line, below ‘F Long’. It says ‘Raise F on S3’.
This means you must raise the front end of stopper 3.
Stopper Adjustment Procedures

1. Use the "Skew Correction Reference Diagrams" and "Skew Correction Reference
Table" in the previous section to determine the location of the skew and which stopper
needs adjustment.
2. Now you are ready to do the adjustment on the multi-folder unit.
SM 83 D454
3. The illustration above shows the location for each stopper adjustment.
Each stopper is equipped with two screws.
The black plastic screw is the Set screw and the metal silver screw is the
Adjustment screw.
4. Remove the Set screw.
D454 84 SM
Skew Adjustment
5. Turn the Adjustment screw to do the adjustment for the stopper.

1st, 3rd Stopper
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
Turn the Adjustment screw clockwise to lower the front end of the fence.
D454
-or-
Turn the Adjustment screw counter-clockwise to raise the front of the fence.
2nd Stopper
Turn the Adjustment screw clockwise to raise the front end of the fence.
-or-
Turn the Adjustment screw counter-clockwise to lower the front of the fence.
6. Fasten the Set screw in the hole of the diagonal cutout near the hole where you
removed it.
The diagonal cut may be above or below the original hole, depending on which
SM 85 D454
stopper you are adjusting.
The photo above shows the Set screw for Stopper 2.
7. Tighten the Set screw so the plate holds the adjustment.
D454 86 SM
Overview
2. DETAILS
2.1 OVERVIEW
2.1.1 MOTORS, ROLLERS
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
The illustration above shows the roller groups and their related motors.
SM 87 D454
Details
2.1.2 JUNCTION GATES, JUNCTION GATE SOLENOIDS
The illustration above shows the paper path junction gates and the solenoids and motors
that operate them.
D454 88 SM
Overview
2.1.3 STOPPERS, STOPPER MOTORS
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
The illustration above shows the stoppers and the motors that operate them.
SM 89 D454
Details
2.2 PAPER PATH
2.2.1 PAPER REGISTRATION
When paper is fed to the pre-stacker, the position of each sheet in the paper path is adjusted
to correct skew:
Leading edge of the sheet hits the registration roller and stops.
The upstream rollers continue to rotate 5 mm.
The leading edge of the paper buckles against the stationary registration roller to correct
skew.
The registration roller starts rotating again after the paper has been straightened in the
paper path.
D454 90 SM
Paper Path
2.2.2 PRE-STACKING
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
Up to three sheets of paper can be pre-stacked for folding.
The left illustration shows the parts that operate during pre-stacking.
The paper enters the machine [A].
The lower entrance junction gate [B] opens and guides the paper to the TE stop pawl
[C].
The paper pushes the TE stop pawl aside so it can pass.
SM 91 D454
Details
The dynamic roller [A] raises after the leading edge of the paper passes the TE stop pawl [B].
The TE stop pawl returns to its home position [C] after the trailing edge of the sheet passes.
After the trailing edge of the paper passes the dynamic roller, the positioning roller [D] starts
to rotate and feeds the paper as far as stopper 1 [E].
D454 92 SM
Paper Path
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
The dynamic roller [A] lowers when the leading edge reaches stopper 1 [B] within the time
prescribed for feeding for the size of the paper selected for the job.
The TE stop pawl [C] presses on the 1st sheet to prevent the leading edge of the 2nd sheet
from hitting it. The operation sequence for stacking the 2nd and 3rd sheets is the same as
that of the 1st sheet.
SM 93 D454
Details
The dynamic roller [A] raises after the leading edge of the 3rd (and last sheet) passes the TE
stop pawl. The position roller [B] rotates twice only after the last sheet has been pre-stacked.
D454 94 SM
Paper Path
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
After the last sheet has been pre-stacked, the TE stop pawl [A] lowers and the sheets are
jogged vertically (top to bottom).
Next, with the TE stop pawl pressing down on the trailing edges of the stacked sheets, the
stack [B] is jogged horizontally (front to back).
SM 95 D454
Details
Finally, after all three sheets have been pre-stacked and jogged, the fold blade [A] pushes
the stacked sheets into the nip of the fold rollers [B].
D454 96 SM
Paper Path
2.2.3 JUNCTION GATES
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
Entrance Junction Gates
SM 97 D454
Details
There are two junction gates in the paper path at the entrance of the multi-folder.
Both junction gates remain at their home positions when paper is fed straight through the
multi-fold unit to the next unit downstream.
When folding is selected, the lower entrance junction gate raises and guides the paper to
the fold units below:
Upper entrance junction gate remains at default position.
Lower junction gate rotates up and guides paper down.
When draft copies are sent to the top tray:

The upper entrance junction gate rotates down.
The lower junction gate remains at default position.
D454 98 SM
Paper Path
Direct Send Junction Gate
This is the direct send junction gate at its home position.
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
The junction gate rotates to the right and paper is sent downstream without passing stopper
2. This is down for FM2 mode only when the paper is folded into equal halves.
The illustration above shows the actual location and appearance of the direct send junction
gate.
SM 99 D454
Details
For all fold modes other than FM2 (Half Fold) the direct send junction gate remains at its
home position.
For FM2 the direct send junction gate motor rotates the junction gate [B] to position [C].
After the job is finished the motor rotates the junction gate back to its home position [A].
For the other fold modes (FM1, FM3 to FM6) the junction gate remains at its home position
and does not touch the paper.
Bypass Junction Gate
This is the bypass junction gate at its home position.
D454 100 SM
Paper Path
When FM1 (Z-fold) or FM6 (Gate Fold) is selected, the bypass junction gate raises and
allows paper to pass to folder unit 2.
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
For fold modes other than FM1, FM6 the bypass junction gate remains at it default position.
Paper passes over the top of the bypass junction gate and into the bypass paper path.
Exit, Reverse, and Top Tray Junction Gates
These three junction gates are shown above at their default positions.
SM 101 D454
Details
For straight-through paper feed the junction gates remain at their home positions. Paper
passes straight through the multi-folder to the next peripheral unit downstream.
All three junction gates operate to guide folded paper to the top tray:
Exit junction gate rotates left
Reverse junction gate raises
Top tray junction gate lowers
This sequence guides the folded paper to the top tray.
Note: Only Z-folded paper is allowed to exit the multi-folder and pass downstream to other
peripheral units. In this case, the junction gates remain at their default positions. The exit
junction gate sensor (5) guides the paper toward the multi-folder exit above.
D454 102 SM
Paper Folding
2.3 PAPER FOLDING
2.3.1 FLEX-NIP FOLDING
This machine uses the flex-nip method to fold paper.

In this method of folding a stopper fence { is raised or lowered to the correct height for the
size of the paper and the type of fold to be done. A sheet of paper | descends, hits the
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
stopper and stops. However, the upstream rollers continue to rotate. This causes the paper
D454
~ to bulge and flex toward the nip of the rotating fold rollers on the left. When the paper
reaches the rotating rollers it feeds into the nip. The rollers catch the paper, pull it into the nip,
and form the fold.
In this machine:
There are three fold stoppers placed at strategic positions in the fold path.
Not all the stoppers are used for folding. Only the stoppers needed for the type of
folding are used.
When two or more sheets are fed together, a fold assist plate { pushes the flexed paper
toward the rotating fold rollers. The fold plate is used only when more than one sheet of
paper is fed at a time. Up to three sheets can be fed.
SM 103 D454
Details
2.3.2 STOPPER LOCATIONS
The illustration above shows the stopper locations. Note the locations of Stopper 1, Stopper
2, and Stopper 3.
2.3.3 FOLDING METHODS

There are six Folding Methods (FM):
FM1 Z-Folding
FM2 Half Fold
FM3 Letter Fold-out
FM4 Letter Fold-in
D454 104 SM
Paper Folding
FM6 Gate Fold
FM1 Z-Folding
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
In Fold Method 1 (FM1):
The leading edge of the paper feeds into the nip of fold rollers { and |.
The paper is stopped by Fold Stopper 2. The paper flexes toward the nip of fold rollers
| and } which performs the first fold.
Next, the paper is stopped by Fold Stopper 3. The paper flexes toward the nip of fold
rollers ~ and which performs the second fold and feeds the paper into the exit path.
Fold Stopper 1 is not used.
SM 105 D454
Details
FM2 Half Fold

The leading edge of the paper is stopped by Fold Stopper 1.
The paper flexes toward the nip of fold rollers { and | which performs the first fold and
feeds the folded edge of the paper into the nip of fold rollers | and }.
Fold rollers | and } feed the paper into the exit path.
Fold Stoppers 2, and 3 are not used.
D454 106 SM
Paper Folding
FM3 Letter Fold-out
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
The paper flexes toward the nip of fold rollers { and | which performs the first fold.
Fold Stopper 2 stops the paper and flexes it into the nip of fold rollers | and }.
Fold rollers | and } perform the second crease and feed the folded paper in exit path.
Fold Stoppers 3 is not used.
SM 107 D454
Details
FM4 Letter Fold-in

FM3 and FM4 follow the same sequence but the resultant fold is different:
In FM3 Fold Stopper 1 is positioned high so a short length of paper is allowed to feed
before flexing toward the nip starts.
In FM4 Fold Stopper 1 is positioned low so a long length of paper is allowed to feed
before flexing toward the hip starts.
This positioning of Fold Stopper 1 accounts for the difference in folding at the next nip.
D454 108 SM
Paper Folding
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
FM3, FM4, and FM5 follow the same sequence but the resultant fold is different:
In FM5 Fold Stopper 1 is positioned so the paper will fold into halves when it enters the
first nip.
This critical positioning of Fold Stopper 1 accounts for the difference in folding at the
next nip.
FM6 Gate Fold
SM 109 D454
Details

Fold rollers | and } perform the second fold and feed the folded paper to Stopper 3.
Fold Stopper 3 stops the paper and flexes it into the nip of fold roller ~ and .
Fold roller ~ and form the third crease and feed the folding paper into the exit path.
All three stoppers are used with this method.
A mechanism is provided to prevent the leading edge from catching and folding over on itself
[A] when the 3rd fold is done.
D454 110 SM
Paper Folding
Operation sequence for folding three sheets:
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
At power on (initialization) the FM6 junction gate [A] moves to home position.
D454
The three sheets are pre-stacked then the first two folds are done
The FM6 stop pawl moves to the operation position [B].
[A] After the 2nd fold the sheet(s) are sent to the 3rd stopper for the last fold.
The leading edge of the sheets(s) hit stopper 3 and the upstream rollers continue
[B]
rotate (equivalent to 18 mm of feed) to flex paper toward the fold rollers.
The edge of the FM6 pawl is raised to flatten the leading edge so it cannot bend
[C]
back on itself as the paper enters the nip of the fold rollers.
[D] When the 3rd fold starts the FM6 pawl returns to its home position.
Fold Adjustments with SP Codes

The fold positions can be adjusted in the User Tools (Operators, Skilled Operators) and the
engine SP mode.
SM 111 D454
Details
Mode Name Fold User Tools*1 SP*2
FM1 Z-Fold 1st 0501 6750
2nd 0502 6751
FM2 Equal Halves 1st 0503 6752
FM3 LT Fold Out 1st 0504 6753
2nd 0505 6754
FM4 LT Fold In 1st 0506 6755
2nd 0507 6756
FM5 Double Parallel 1st 0508 6757
2nd 0509 6758
FM6 Gate Fold 1st 0510 6759
2nd 0511 6760
3rd 0512 6761
*1: These numbers are the same for Operators, Skilled Operators.
*2: The ranges for these SP codes are the same: [-4 to +4 / 0 / 0.2 mm]
D454 112 SM
Paper Folding
2.3.4 CREASE ROLLERS
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
The amount of pressure exerted by the crease rollers can be adjusted. This can be done to
eliminate splitting that can occur with coated paper and other types of media. The
adjustment is a manual adjustment done on springs.]
Adjustment range
R1 R2 R3 R4
Default Load 26 N 45 N
Load Adjustment Possible (Hook 4 mm Distance) -4.5 N -9.5 N
A projection fixed in slot and attached to a spring shortens the length to roller can be lowered.
There are four crease rollers. Springs at the front and rear ends of each roller can be
adjusted.
SM 113 D454
Details
2.4 TRAY FULL
A pair sensors are used to detect the tray full condition. At the start of every job:
Tray full sensor (Emitter) [A] emits a signal to tray full sensor (Receptor) [B].
As long as the signal remains unbroken the multi-folder will continue to operate and
feed folded paper to the top of the unit [C].
When the top of the stack grows high enough to interrupt the signal between the tray full
sensors [D], this will signal the machine to shut down the line temporarily.
After the operator removes the stack from the top tray, folding and paper exit will
resume.
D454 114 SM
2.5.1 TRANSPORT SENSORS
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
SM 115 D454
Details
2.5.2 OPERATION SENSORS
D454 116 SM
2.5.3 MOTORS, SOLENOIDS
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
SM 117 D454
Details
2.5.4 PAPER TRANSPORT MOTORS
1. Horizontal Transport Motor 7. 2nd Fold Motor
2. Top Tray Exit Motor 8. 1st Fold Motor
3. Top Tray Transport Motor 9. Fold Plate Motor
4. Dynamic Roller Lift Motor 10. Registration Roller Release Motor
5. Crease Motor 11. Dynamic Roller Transport Motor
6. FM6 Pawl Motor 12. Registration Roller Transport Motor
D454 118 SM
2.5.5 FOLD MOTORS
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
1. Entrance JG Motor
2. Direct Send JG Motor
4. Stopper 3 Motor
5. Stopper 1 Motor
6. Jogger Fence Motor
7. Stopper 2 Motor
SM 119 D454
Details
2.5.6 MOTORS, SOLENOIDS AROUND THE TOP TRAY
1. Horizontal Transport Motor
2. Top Tray Exit Motor
3. Reverse JG Solenoid
4. Exit JG Solenoid
5. Top Tray Transport Motor
6. Entrance JG Solenoid
7. Top Tray JG Solenoid
D454 120 SM
2.5.7 MOTORS, SENSORS TOP
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
1. Dynamic Roller Lift Motor
2. Dynamic Roller Transport Motor
3. Dynamic Roller HP Sensor
4. Fold Plate Motor
5. Registration Sensor
SM 121 D454
Details
2.5.8 MOTORS, SENSORS BOTTOM
1. Registration Roller Release Motor
2. Jogger Fence HP Sensor
3. Fold Plate HP Sensor
4. FM6 Pawl HP Sensor
5. 1st Fold Motor
7. Direct Send JG HP Sensor
8. Registration Roller Transport Motor
D454 122 SM
2.5.9 SENSORS AROUND TOP TRAY
1. Top Tray Full Sensor (R)
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
2. Entrance JG HP Sensor
D454
3. Top Tray Full Sensor (E)
4. Top Tray Exit Sensor
5. Top Tray Paper Path Sensor
6. Entrance Sensor
7. Horizontal Path Paper Sensor
8. Vertical Path Paper Sensor
9. Horizontal Path Exit Sensor
SM 123 D454
Details
2.5.10 FOLD MOTORS, SENSORS, SOLENOIDS
1. Stopper 2 Motor 8. Stopper 1 HP Sensor
2. Stopper 2 HP Sensor 9. Stopper 3 Paper Sensor
3. Jogger Fence Motor 10. Stopper 3 HP Sensor
4. Stopper 2 Paper Sensor 11. Stopper 3 Motor
5. Stopper 1 Paper Sensor 12. Positioning Roller Motor
6. Positioning Roller HP Sensor 13. Direct Send JG Motor
7. Stopper 1 Motor 14. LE Stop Pawl Solenoid
D454 124 SM
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
1. Bypass Entrance Paper Sensor
D454
2. Bypass Exit Paper Sensor
3. FM6 Pawl HP Sensor
4. 2nd Fold Motor
5. FM6 Pawl Motor
6. Bypass JG Solenoid
7. Crease Motor
SM 125 D454
Details
2.5.11 BOARDS, SWITCHES, FAN
1. Main Board
3. PSU
4. PSU Fan
5. Breaker Switch
2.5.12 COMPONENT LIST
Motors
Operates the entrance junction that directs

paper from the upstream device to the 1)
M Entrance JG Motor
horizontal paper path, 2) paper fold path, 3)
top tray.
D454 126 SM
Motors
Drives the transport rollers that feed unfolded

M Top Tray Transport Motor paper to the downstream unit. Reverses and
feeds folded paper to the folded paper tray.
Drives the entrance roller at the entrance

where the paper from the upstream device is
received. Drives the exit roller that feeds the
M Horizontal Transport Motor
paper out to the downstream unit. Drives
other transport rollers in the horizontal paper
path.
Drives the exit roller that feeds paper into the

M Top Tray Exit Motor
top tray.
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
M 1st Fold Motor Drives the 1st fold roller.
D454
Moves the jogger fence according to the
M Jogger Fence Motor
width of the paper to align its edges.
Operates the positioning roller when the

M Positioning Roller Motor paper strikes stopper 1 when more that one
sheet of paper is stacked for folding.
Moves Stopper 1 to the correct position for

M Stopper 1 Motor
folding according to the paper size.
Operates the fold plate for the first fold during

M Fold Plate Motor multi-sheet folding. Operates Stopper 1 1
during Z-folding.
Releases the pressure of the registration

Registration Roller Release
M roller so paper can be stacked for multi-sheet
Motor
folding.
Raises and lowers the dynamic roller to the

M Dynamic Roller Lift Motor
correct position for folding.

M Stopper 2 Motor
SM 127 D454
Details
Motors
Dynamic Roller Transport

M Drives the Dynamic roller.
Motor
Registration Roller Transport

M Drives the registration roller.
Motor
Operates the direct send junction gate to the

M Direct-Send JG Motor
Stopper 2.
Drives the double-flap pawl that prevents

bending of the leading edge when the 3rd fold
M FM6 Pawl Motor
is executed for FM6 folding (Fourths with 2
Flaps In)

M Stopper 3 Motor
Drives 3rd fold roller. Reverses when the

M 2nd Fold Motor
paper does not pass through the 3rd fold unit.
M Crease Motor Drives the crease rollers.
Sensors
Checks for the presence of paper at power

on. Detects paper jams at the exit of the
S Top Tray Exit Sensor
top tray. Used to create timing for control
of paper fed to the top tray.

on. Detects paper jams of paper fed from
S Entrance Sensor the upstream unit. Used to create timing
for operation of the shift roller during
multiple-sheet folding.
Detects when the entrance junction gate is

S Entrance JG HP Sensor
in and out of its home position.
D454 128 SM
Sensors

S Horizontal Path Paper Sensor
on.

S Top Tray Paper Path Sensor on. Also checks for jams during paper
feed.
S Top Tray Full Sensor (E) Detects when the top tray is full.
S Top Tray Full Sensor (R) Detects when the top tray is full.

on. Checks for paper jams when paper
S Horizontal Path Exit Sensor exits to the downstream unit. Used to
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
create timing for paper exit to the
D454
downstream unit.

S Vertical Path Paper Sensor
on.
Detects when the jog roller is in and out of

S Positioning Roller HP Sensor
its home position.

on. Also checks for jams during paper
S Stopper 1 Paper Sensor
feed. Detects the condition of the stacked
sheets during multi-sheet folding.
Detects when Stopper 1 is in and out of its

S Stopper 1 HP Sensor
home position.
Detects when jogger fence is in and out of

S Jogger Fence HP Sensor
its home position.
Detects when the FM! pawl is in and out of

S FM6 Pawl HP Sensor
its home position.

S Registration Sensor
SM 129 D454
Details
Sensors
feed. Used to create timing for registration

buckle adjustment during paper feed.
Detects the condition of the stacked
sheets during multi-sheet folding.
Detects when registration roller is in and

S Registration Roller HP Sensor
out of its home position.
Detects when dynamic roller is in and out

S Dynamic Roller HP Sensor
of its home position.
Detects when the fold plate is in and out of

S Fold Plate HP Sensor
its home position.
Detects when the direct-send junction gate

S Direct-Send JG HP Sensor
is in and out of its home position.

S Stopper 2 Paper Sensor
feed. Used to create operation timing of
the LE pawl solenoid.

home position.

S Bypass Exit Paper Sensor
on.

S Bypass Entrance Paper Sensor
on.

S Stopper 3 Paper Sensor feed. Used to create the timing that
operates the 2nd fold motor during FM6
folding..

home position.
D454 130 SM
Switches
SW Breaker Switch -
Detects when the front door is opened or closed. When

Front Door
SW the front door is opened the interlock switch cuts off the
Switch (SW1)
24V power supply.
Solenoids
Operates the junction gate that sends the

paper to the top tray after the direction of the
SOL Top Tray JG Solenoid
paper has been reversed up and out of the
horizontal paper path.
Multi-Folding
Unit FD5000
D454
Operates the exit junction gate that directs
paper from the multi-fold unit to the exit for
SOL Exit JG Solenoid
the downstream unit or to the exit for the
folded paper tray.
Operates the junction gate that opens the

SOL Reverse JG Solenoid horizontal feed path to paper sent from the
fold crease unit.
Operates the pawl that prevents bending of

SOL LE Stop Pawl Solenoid the leading edge while the paper is being
folded in the 2nd fold unit.
Operates the bypass junction gate which

SOL Bypass JG Solenoid directs paper from the 2nd fold unit to either
the bypass or the 3rd fold unit.
Boards
Supplies the 24V power for the operation of the motors and
PCB PSU
solenoids, and the 5V power for the main board and sensors.
PCB PSU Fan Cools the PSU.
SM 131 D454
Details
Boards
Controls operation of the motors, solenoids, sensors, and

PCB Main Board
interface with the main machine.
D454 132 SM
TRIMMER UNIT TR5020
D455
None
TRIMMER UNIT TR5020 D455
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN ......................................................................... 2
1.1.2 COVERS, TRAY UNIT, DOOR ............................................................ 2
Rear Cover .............................................................................................. 2
Left Upper Cover ..................................................................................... 2
Top Cover................................................................................................ 2
Door ........................................................................................................ 2
Left Lower Cover ..................................................................................... 2
Tray Unit.................................................................................................. 2
1.1.3 FEED UNIT .......................................................................................... 2
1.1.4 TRIM POSITIONING UNIT .................................................................. 2
1.1.5 TRANSPORT UNIT ............................................................................. 2
1.2 TRIMMING BLADE, BLADE CRADLE .......................................................... 2
1.2.1 TRIMMING BLADE COVER ................................................................ 2
1.2.2 TRIMMING BLADE .............................................................................. 2
1.2.3 BLADE CRADLE.................................................................................. 2
1.3 MOTORS ...................................................................................................... 2
1.3.1 CUTTER MOTOR ................................................................................ 2
1.3.2 FEED UNIT .......................................................................................... 2
Feed Motor .............................................................................................. 2
Cut Position Motor................................................................................... 2
Press Stopper Motor ............................................................................... 2
Press Roller Motor................................................................................... 2
1.3.4 TRANSPORT UNIT ............................................................................. 2
Exit Motor ................................................................................................ 2
1.3.5 TRAY UNIT .......................................................................................... 2
Tray Motor ............................................................................................... 2
1.4 SENSORS, SWITCHES................................................................................ 2
1.4.1 FEED UNIT .......................................................................................... 2
SM i D455
Entrance Sensor...................................................................................... 2
Stopper Assembly HP Sensor ................................................................. 2
Press Stopper HP Sensor ....................................................................... 2
Press Roller HP Sensor .......................................................................... 2
Stopper Sensor ....................................................................................... 2
1.4.3 TRIMMING UNIT ................................................................................. 2
Scrap Hopper Full Sensor ....................................................................... 2
Scrap Hopper HP Sensor ........................................................................ 2
Trimming Blade HP Sensor ..................................................................... 2
1.4.4 TRANSPORT UNIT ............................................................................. 2
Exit Sensor .............................................................................................. 2
1.4.5 TRAY UNIT .......................................................................................... 2
Booklet Sensor 1 ..................................................................................... 2
Booklet Sensor 3 ..................................................................................... 2
Exit Sensor .............................................................................................. 2
1.4.6 SWITCHES .......................................................................................... 2
Door Switch ............................................................................................. 2
Breaker Switch ........................................................................................ 2
1.5 BOARDS....................................................................................................... 2
1.5.1 MAIN BOARD ...................................................................................... 2
1.5.2 VOLTAGE REGULATOR..................................................................... 2
2. DETAILS ..........................................................................................2
2.1 OVERVIEW................................................................................................... 2
2.2 MOTORS AND SENSORS ........................................................................... 2
2.3 OPERATION ................................................................................................. 2
2.3.1 LAYOUT............................................................................................... 2
2.3.2 OPERATION FLOW ............................................................................ 2
General ................................................................................................... 2
Booklet Feed ........................................................................................... 2
Positioning the Booklet for Trimming....................................................... 2
Trimming ................................................................................................. 2
Booklet Feed-out ..................................................................................... 2
Output Tray ............................................................................................. 2
Limitless Output....................................................................................... 2
D455 ii SM
Read This First
Conventions
Common Terms
Core Tech Manual
Screw
Connector
E-ring
C-ring
= Harness clamp
JG Junction Gate
LEF Long Edge Feed
SEF Short Edge Feed





Safety Information
engineers).

Power
belts, etc.).
operation.
Special Tools

During Maintenance
General

Safety Devices
Organic Cleaners
Ozone Filters
cord.

items.
remove.
machine.
damaged.
machine.

vibration.
freely.
exposed to:
Dust
Water
Direct sunlight
Open flame
Corrosive gases
Trademarks
those marks.
Common Procedures
1.1.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
Remove the covers, door, and tray in this order for major maintenance and cleaning:
{ Rear cover ( x3)
Left upper cover ( x2)
} Top cover ( x5)
~ Front door ( x4)
Left bottom cover ( x2)
Tray unit ( x2, x2)
SM 1 D455
Common Procedures
1.1.2 COVERS, TRAY UNIT, DOOR

Rear Cover
1. Rear cover [A] ( x3)

2. Raise the bottom [B] to separate the metal tabs at the top.
3. Pull I/F connector [A] through the hole.

Re-installation
1. Be sure to engage the tabs on the top edge of the rear cover before re-attaching the
D455 2 SM
Common Procedures
bottom screws.
Left Upper Cover
1. Left upper cover [A] ( x2)
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
2. Slowly pull the top away slowly and disengage the two tabs below.
Top Cover
Preparation
Rear cover ( x3)
SM 3 D455
Common Procedures
1. Remove six screws that hold the top cover [A].

2. Remove screws at:
[A] Left ( x2)
[B] Rear ( x1)
D455 4 SM
Common Procedures
[C] Front ( x2)
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
3. Lift the top cover off.
Door
Preparation (recommended)
Rear cover ( x3)
Top cover ( x6)
SM 5 D455
Common Procedures
2. Remove top hinge [A] ( x2).

3. Lift the door off the post of its bottom hinge.
Left Lower Cover

Preparation
Door ( x2)
D455 6 SM
Common Procedures
1. Left lower cover [A] ( x2)
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
2. Slowly pull the cover away and disengage both tabs from the holes below.
Tray Unit
Preparation
Door ( x2)
Left lower cover ( x2)
SM 7 D455
Common Procedures
1. Remove two connectors at the left rear corner ( x2).
2. Remove two screws below the tray [A] ( x2).
3. Grip both sides of the tray [A], lift it straight up to disengage the four metal hooks from
their holes, then pull the tray away from the side of the trimmer unit.
D455 8 SM
Common Procedures
1.1.3 FEED UNIT

Preparation
Rear cover ( x3)
Top cover ( x5)
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
1. Rotate lever A1 [A] clockwise to lower the feed unit.
2. Disconnect feed motor [B] ( x1, Standoff x1)
3. Disconnect arm [A] ( x2).
SM 9 D455
Common Procedures
4. Grip lever A1 [A] with your left hand, and place your right hand at [B] under the feed unit.
5. Under the feed unit, look at the front where the arm roller and swing plate [C] are
connected.
6. While slowly raising the transport plate with your right hand, rotate lever A1 toward you
until the roller is aligned with the gap at [A].
7. While still holding the feed unit, rotate lever A1 down to separate the roller and swing
plate at [B]. This separates the rollers from the swing plates at the front and back.
D455 10 SM
Common Procedures
8. At the rear end of shaft [A], remove the e-ring ( x1).
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
9. At the front end of the shaft [A], remove the e-ring ( x1).
10. Pull off the bushing [B].
A harness is still connected below the feed unit. Do not try to pull the feed unit
away from the trimmer unit.
SM 11 D455
Common Procedures
11. Slowly lift the feed unit [A] and set it down against the trimmer unit as shown.
12. Disconnect and remove the sensor bracket [A] ( x1).
The feed unit [A] is now completely separated from the trimmer unit.
1.1.4 TRIM POSITIONING UNIT

Preparation
Rear cover ( x3)
Top cover ( x5)
Door ( x2)
Tray unit ( x2, x2)
D455 12 SM
Common Procedures
1. Disconnect sensor [A] and pull the harness out through the hole ( x1).
Trimmer Unit
2. Press in the releases on both sides of sensor [B], push it through its hole, then do the
TR5020
D455
same for sensor [C].
3. Remove the left cover plate:
[A] Left ( x7)

[B] Front ( x2)
SM 13 D455
Common Procedures
[C] Rear ( x2)

[D] Remove the plate
4. Open the harness clamps and pull out the harnesses (= x5).
5. Close the harness clamps to prevent entangling the loose harnesses when the unit is
removed.
6. Disconnect the harnesses connectors ( x4)
7. Disconnect the unit:
D455 14 SM
Common Procedures
[A] Front ( x2)

[B] Rear ( x2)
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
8. Pull the harnesses [A] out from behind the shaft.
9. Lift the trim position unit [B] straight up and remove it.
1.1.5 TRANSPORT UNIT

Preparation
Remove the trim positioning unit
SM 15 D455
Common Procedures
1. Connectors [A] and [B] ( x2)
2. At the front [A], disconnect the swing frame shaft ( x1).

3. At the rear [B], while supporting the middle of the unit with your right hand, disconnect
the shaft ( x1).
4. Raise the unit [A] with both hands until it is level.

5. Look at the rear where the roller [B] is connected to the swing frame.
6. While holding lever A1 at the front, move the unit and pull the roller out of the gap at [B].
D455 16 SM
Common Procedures
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
7. Pull the transport unit away from the trimmer unit and set it on a flat surface.
Re-installation
To set the transport unit on its rollers:

At the front, set the roller in the cut-out in the swing frame [B].
At the rear, set the roller in its cut-out [A].
SM 17 D455
Trimming Blade, Blade Cradle
1.2 TRIMMING BLADE, BLADE CRADLE
1.2.1 TRIMMING BLADE COVER

Preparation
Rear cover ( x3)
Top cover ( x5)
The trimming blade [A] cover protects the trimming blade

1. Disconnect the trimming blade cover in this order:
[A] Side, bottom screws
D455 18 SM
[A] Rear ( x1)

[B] Front ( x2)
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
2. Separate the arm [A] from the bracket while you remove the cover.
3. The cleaning blade [B] is exposed.
The blade is extremely sharp.

Work carefully around the edge [C] of the blade and handle it carefully after it has
been removed.
1.2.2 TRIMMING BLADE

Preparation
Rear cover ( x3)
Top cover ( x5)
Trimming blade cover ( x5)
SM 19 D455
1. Look for the handle [A], which is attached to the frame of the trimmer unit.
2. Remove the handle [A] ( x2)
3. Open the feed unit [A].
D455 20 SM
Remove the screws of the guard plate [A] ( x2).
The guard plate is permanently attached to the blade; it will not come off after
the screws have been removed.
1. Use the guard plate screws to attach the handle [B] to the side of the guard plate ( x2).
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
2. Use the Allen key (provided with the new blade) to remove the blade hex screws.
The blade is compressed by these screws and three very strong springs.
Insert the Allen key into the first hex screw [A].
Attach an adjustable wrench [B] as shown.
Raise the wrench to relieve tension on the springs.
Loosen each screw a full turn each to gradually relieve the tension on each screw.
Continue to loosen each screw in turns to remove them.
The screws should be removed gradually.

To avoid stripping the threads of the other holes or screws, never remove any
screw completely before the others.
SM 21 D455
3. Grip the handle [A] and slowly lift the blade off the heads of the large hex bolts [B] and
[C].
Obey local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of items like the used
trimming blade.
Re-installation
1. Grip the new blade by the handle [A] and set it on the heads [B] and [C] of the hex bolts.
2. Position the screw [A] at the first hole.
D455 22 SM
3. Raise the plate with the wrench [B].
4. Insert the first screw in the hole, then turn it until the screw is firmly attached. Do not
tighten it completely.
5. Start the other two screws in their holes while continuing to relieve tension on the
springs with the wrench.
6. After all the screws have been attached, tighten them one by one by about one full turn
until they are all tightened completely.
7. Attach the provided mylar to the new blade.
1.2.3 BLADE CRADLE

Preparation
Trimming blade cover ( x5)
Trimming blade ( x3)
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
1. Use an Allen key to remove the hex bolts of the blade cradle [A] ( x8)
2. Remove the cradle and set it on a flat surface.
Obey local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of items like the blade
cradle.
SM 23 D455
Motors
1.3 MOTORS
1.3.1 CUTTER MOTOR
Removing the cutter motor [A] is a dangerous procedure.

Never attempt to remove the cutter motor.
If the cutter motor fails, the trimmer unit must be replaced.
1.3.2 FEED UNIT

Feed Motor
Preparation
Remove the paper feed unit
1. Motor connector [A] ( x1)
D455 24 SM
Motors
2. Motor [A] ( x2)

Re-installation
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
1. Position the motor behind the frame.
2. Align the Teflon tooth [A] with its notch.
3. Press the motor against the frame and re-fasten the screws ( x2).
The tooth must be seated properly in its notch, so that the motor mount is flat
against the back of the frame.
If the screws are re-attached while the tooth is out of the notch, the motor will not be
straight and the gears will not mesh properly.

Cut Position Motor
Preparation
Trim positioning unit ( p.2)
SM 25 D455
Motors
1. Motor connector [A] ( x1)
2. Remove the screws on the other side, then remove the motor [A] ( x2).
Press Stopper Motor

Preparation
D455 26 SM
Motors
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
The press stopper motor is under the trim positioning unit.
1. Turn over the trim positioning unit so that you can see the motor.
2. Remove bracket screws { and . ( x2)

3. Pull away the bracket [A] with the motor.
SM 27 D455
Motors
4. Disconnect the motor ( x1).
5. Remove the motor from the bracket ( x2).
Press Roller Motor

Preparation
D455 28 SM
Motors
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
The press roller motor is visible from the top of the trim positioning unit, near the center.
1. Move the stopper assembly [A] away from the motor [B].
SM 29 D455
Motors
2. Remove the two standoffs.
3. Remove the motor ( x1, x2).
D455 30 SM
Motors
Re-installation

Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455

Exit Motor
Preparation
Transport unit ( p.2)
SM 31 D455
Motors
The exit motor is under the left, rear corner of the transport unit.
1. Turn the transport unit over so that you can see the motor [A].
2. Disconnect the motor at [B] ( x1).
D455 32 SM
Motors

Re-installation
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
1.3.5 TRAY UNIT

Tray Motor
Preparation
SM 33 D455
Motors

Tray unit ( x2, x2)
The tray motor is on the bottom of the tray unit and covered by the bottom plate. (The photo
above shows the tray unit with bottom plate removed.)
1. Lay the tray unit upside down on a flat surface.

2. Remove bottom cover [A] ( x 6) so that you can see the motor [B].
3. Remove side panel [A]
D455 34 SM
Motors
4. Disconnect motor bracket [A] ( x4).
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
5. Remove bottom end cover [A] ( x4).
SM 35 D455
Motors
6. Remove screws {, , } ( x3).

7. Disconnect sensor bracket [A] ( x2)
8. Disconnect sensor [B] ( x1)
9. Disconnect motor [A] ( x1).

10. Pull harness [B] through the hole.
D455 36 SM
Motors

Re-installation

Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
SM 37 D455
Sensors, Switches
1.4 SENSORS, SWITCHES
1.4.1 FEED UNIT

Entrance Sensor
Preparation
Feed unit ( p.2)
1. Disconnect and remove the sensor [A] (Standoff x1, x1, Pawls x5)

Stopper Assembly HP Sensor
Preparation
D455 38 SM
Sensors, Switches
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
The stopper assembly HP sensor is at the rear of the trim positioning unit.
1. Disconnect sensor [A] ( x1, Pawls x5).
Press Stopper HP Sensor

Preparation
The press stopper HP sensor [A] is located near the left, rear corner of the trim positioning
SM 39 D455
Sensors, Switches
unit.
1. Remove clamp screw [A] ( x1). This creates enough slack in the harness so that you
can detach and re-attach the sensor connector.
2. Disconnect the sensor ( x1, Pawls x5).
Press Roller HP Sensor

Preparation
D455 40 SM
Sensors, Switches
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
The press roller HP sensor [A] is on the side, facing down.
1. Free the harness [A] (Standoffs x2, = x1). This creates enough slack in the harness so
that you can detach and re-attach the sensor connector.
SM 41 D455
Sensors, Switches
2. Remove the sensor ( x1, Pawls x5).
Stopper Sensor
Preparation
This sensor is on the right side of the trim positioning unit, below the center.
D455 42 SM
Sensors, Switches
Trimmer Unit
1. Turn the trim positioning unit over so that you can see the sensor [A].
TR5020
D455
2. Free the harness [A] (Standoffs x2, x1). This creates enough slack in the harness so
that you can disconnect and re-connect the sensor.
SM 43 D455
Sensors, Switches
3. Disconnect the sensor bracket [A] and sensor harness [B] ( x2, x1).
4. Remove the sensor and actuator (Pawls x5).
1.4.3 TRIMMING UNIT

Scrap Hopper Full Sensor
Preparation
Feed unit ( p.2).
The scrap hopper full sensor is visible on the right side of the trimmer unit, below the
entrance.
D455 44 SM
Sensors, Switches
1. Disconnect the plate [A] ( x2).
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
2. Disconnect the harness and remove plate [A] (= x1).
3. Disconnect sensor [A] ( x1).
SM 45 D455
Sensors, Switches
4. Remove the sensor and bracket [A] ( x2).
Scrap Hopper HP Sensor
Preparation
Rear cover ( p.2 "Covers, Tray Unit, Door")
D455 46 SM
Sensors, Switches
2. Disconnect and remove sensor [A] (Standoffs x2, x1, Pawls x5).
Trimming Blade HP Sensor

Preparation
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
Trim position unit ( p.2)
D455
The trimming blade HP sensor is located inside the trimming motor box, next to the blade
motor.
SM 47 D455
Sensors, Switches
1. Remove blade motor cover [A] ( x3).
2. Remove sensor bracket [A] ( x1, = x1)
3. Disconnect and remove the sensor ( x1, Pawls x5)
D455 48 SM
Sensors, Switches

Exit Sensor
Preparation
Trim position unit ( p.2)
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
The exit sensor is under the transport unit.
1. Turn the transport unit over so that you can see the sensor.
2. Disconnect sensor bracket [A] ( x1).
SM 49 D455
Sensors, Switches
3. Disconnect and remove sensor [A] (Standoff x1, x1, Pawls x5)
1.4.5 TRAY UNIT

Booklet Sensor 1
Preparation
Left upper cover ( x2) ( p.2 "Covers, Tray Unit, Door")
D455 50 SM
Sensors, Switches
2. Disconnect and remove sensor [A] ( x1, Pawls x5)
Booklet Sensor 3
Preparation
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
Tray unit ( x2, x2)
This sensor is under the bottom end plate of the tray unit.
SM 51 D455
Sensors, Switches
1. Remove the bottom end cover [A] ( x4).

3. Remove harness clamp screws {, , } ( x3).
D455 52 SM
Sensors, Switches
4. Remove the sensor [A] ( x1, Pawls x5).
Exit Sensor
Preparation
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
Tray unit ( x2, x2)
D455
The exit sensor is located under the bottom cover of the tray unit.
1. Lay the tray unit upside down on a flat surface.

2. Remove bottom cover [A] ( x6) so that you can see the sensor [B].
SM 53 D455
Sensors, Switches
3. Disconnect sensor bracket [A] and sensor [B] ( x1, x1).
4. Remove the sensor (Pawls x5)
1.4.6 SWITCHES
Door Switch
1. Open the front door and locate the switch [A].
D455 54 SM
Sensors, Switches
Trimmer Unit
2. Remove switch bracket [A] ( x2).
TR5020
D455
3. On the side, pull out three standoffs to free the harness [A]. This creates enough slack
in the harness so that you can disconnect and reconnect the harness connectors.
4. Disconnect the switch [B] ( x2).
SM 55 D455
Sensors, Switches
5. Remove switch cover [A] ( x2).
6. Press in on both sides of the switch [A].

7. Push the switch through the bracket and remove it.
D455 56 SM
Sensors, Switches
Breaker Switch
Preparation
1. Locate the breaker switch [A] at the rear.
Trimmer Unit
2. Disconnect the switch bracket [B] ( x2).
TR5020
D455
3. Disconnect breaker switch [A] ( x4).
SM 57 D455
Sensors, Switches
4. At each corner, press down the release and push the corner out.
5. Pull the switch out of the bracket.
D455 58 SM
Boards
1.5 BOARDS
1.5.1 MAIN BOARD

Preparation
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
The main board [A] is on the left.
1. Remove the main board ( x14, x4).
SM 59 D455
Boards
1.5.2 VOLTAGE REGULATOR

Preparation
The voltage regulator [A] is the board on the right, covered by the wire mesh
D455 60 SM
Boards
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
1. Disconnect the board:
[A] Top ( x2)
[B] Bottom ( x1)
2. Detach the board bracket:

[A] Top ( x3)
[B] Bottom ( x2)
SM 61 D455
Boards
3. Lay the screen on a flat surface.
4. Remove the screen:

[A] Left side ( x2).
[B] Right side ( x2).
5. Remove the board ( x1).
D455 62 SM
Overview
2. DETAILS
2.1 OVERVIEW
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
1 Feed Unit
Sends the stack from the upstream unit to the transport unit.
2 Trim Positioning Unit
Determines the cutting position for the paper.
3. Trimming Unit
Trims the edge of the stack.
4 Paper Scrap Hopper
Holds the paper trimmed by the cutter blade from the edge of the stack.
5 Transport Unit
Takes the paper from the feed unit and sends it to the cut position unit.
6 Tray Unit
Collects and holds the stacks after trimming.
The trimmer unit receives folded and stapled booklets from the Booklet Finisher SR5020
D434-17 and trims their fore edges.
The trimmer unit can be connected only to the Booklet Finisher D434-17.
The trimmer unit handles stapled booklets only.
Due to its length and configuration, the trimmer unit must be installed as the last
peripheral downstream of the main machine and Booklet Finisher D434-17.
SM 63 D455
Motors and Sensors
2.2 MOTORS AND SENSORS
No. Part Function
1. Cut Position Motor Positions the stack for trimming.
Stopper assembly HP Detects when the trim unit is in or out of its home
2.
Sensor position.
Press Stopper HP Detects when the stopper and pressure plate are in and
3.
Sensor out of their home positions.
The motor that raises and lowers the stopper plate to the
4. Press Stopper Motor prescribed position where the plate applies pressure to
the folded leading edge of the stack.
5. Main Board The PCB that controls the operation of the unit.
Raises and lowers the press roller at the entrance of the

6. Press Roller Motor
cut position unit to set the trimming position.
D455 64 SM
Motors and Sensors
No. Part Function
Drives the rollers at the entrance of the unit that feed

7. Feed Motor
paper sent from the upstream unit.
Press Roller HP Detects when the press roller is in and out of its home
8.
Sensor positions.
Detects the paper and confirms that it has entered the

9. Entrance Sensor
paper path of the unit.
Detects the leading edge of the stack before the stack

10. Stopper Sensor
touches the stopper.
Scrap Hopper Full

11. Detects when the paper scrap hopper is full.
Sensor
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
Detects when the front door is opened or closed, and
D455
12. Door Switch switches off the DC24V power supply to the unit when
the door is opened and restores it when it is closed.
Scrap Hopper HP Detects when the scrap hopper is in or out of its home
13.
Sensor position.
14. Trimming Blade Motor Drives the operation of the cutter unit.
Trimming Blade HP Detects when the cutter unit blade is in and out of its
15.
Sensor home positions.
The 2nd switch that detects when the output tray is full
16. Booklet Sensor 2
(2).
The 3rd switch that detects when the output tray is full
(3).
18. Tray Motor Drives the tray transport belt.
19. Power Inlet Connection point for AC power cord.
Trips and immediately cuts the power supply to the unit if

20. Breaker Switch
a short circuit occurs in the unit.
21. Voltage Regulator The power of stable voltage supplied to the main control
SM 65 D455
Motors and Sensors
No. Part Function
board after AC to DC conversion.
The sensor that confirms the exit of each trimmed stack

22. Exit Sensor
from the unit.
The motor that drives the rollers that send the trimmed
23. Exit Motor
stacks out of the unit onto the output tray.
The 1st switch that detects when the output tray is full
(1).
D455 66 SM
Operation
2.3 OPERATION
2.3.1 LAYOUT
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
1 Press Stopper Motor 16 Trimming Unit
2 Press Stopper HP Sensor 17 Trimming Blade HP Sensor
3 Stopper assembly HP Sensor 18 Trimming Blade Motor
4 Press Roller Motor 19 Exit Motor
5 Press Roller HP Sensor 20 Booklet Sensor 2
6 Upper Feed Guide 21 Tray Unit
7 Feed Unit 22 Tray Motor
8 Entrance Sensor 23 Booklet Sensor 3
9 Lower Feed Guide 24 Cut Positioning Unit
10 Entrance Guide 25 Exit Sensor
11 Feed Motor 26 Stopper Sensor
12 Scrap Hopper Full Sensor 27 Booklet Sensor 1 Arm
SM 67 D455
Operation
13 Door Switch 28 Booklet Sensor 1
14 Scrap Hopper 29 Cut Position Motor
15 Scrap Hopper HP Sensor
2.3.2 OPERATION FLOW

General
The trimmer is installed on the left side of the Booklet Finisher (D434).
[1] Trimmer unit
[2] Front door
[3] Output tray
Front door open shows:

[1] Door switch
[2] Trimming scrap hopper
[3] Feed unit plate handle
[4] Transport unit plate handle
D455 68 SM
Operation
For jam removal:

The feed unit plate handle [1] lowers to the feed plate.
The transport plate handle [2] lowers the transport plate.
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
The operator removes the hopper [1] to empty it when it becomes full of paper scraps
trimmed from the booklets.
There are two hopper sensors:

Hopper full sensor [1] (a photo-sensor) detects when the hopper is full.
Hopper set sensor [2] detects when the hopper is set.
SM 69 D455
Operation
A breaker switch [1] is on the rear cover next to the power connection point.
Booklet Feed
Booklets are fed one at a time. When a booklet enters the trimmer:
The entrance sensor [1] actuator is pushed down by the leading edge of the booklet..
The entrance motor [2] turns on and rotates the feed rollers [3].
The rubber bands of the 2nd feed roller [1] feed the leading edge of the booklet on the left.
The feed roller assembly is mounted on a shaft [2] so the rollers can swing freely up and
D455 70 SM
Operation
down to accommodate the thickness of the booklet.
The rollers of the 1st feed roller [3] will not contact the surface of the booklet unless it is very
thick.
Positioning the Booklet for Trimming
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
The stopper assembly [1] (shown at the home position) is mounted on two rails and driven
by two belts. The cut positioning motor drives the belts.
When the entrance sensor goes ON:

The cut positioning motor [1] switches on and moves the stopper assembly [2] to the
left.
The press roller motor [3] goes ON and lowers two rollers [4] onto the transport belt
The exit motor (not shown) below the transport belt goes ON and drives the transport
belts { and .
SM 71 D455
Operation
The stopper sensor [1] goes ON when the leading edge of the booklet trips the actuator of
the stopper sensor on the bottom of the stopper assembly.
Next, the press stopper motor [1] goes ON and lowers the stopper [2] then the stopper plate
[3] onto the leading edge of the booklet.
The stopper plate [1] goes down first. This stops the booklet aligns the booklet when the
leading edge of the booklet hits it. The exit motor switches off and stops the transport
belts.
The stopper plate [3] goes down next. This clamps the leading edge for moving to the
cut position and trimming.
The press roller motor switches on and raises the press rollers on the right (see
previous illustration).
D455 72 SM
Operation
Next, the cut positioning motor [1] goes ON and moves the stopper assembly [2] to the
trimming position on the right (the position is prescribed by the size of the paper selected for
the job) and stops.
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
The press roller motor [1] goes ON and lowers the press rollers [2] onto the booklet. The
press rollers compress the trailing edge of the booklet for trimming.
Trimming
When the cut positioning motor goes OFF, the trimming motor goes ON and drives the
trimming blade down.
SM 73 D455
Operation
The trimming blade [1] (a guillotine blade) descends, trims the edge, and the scraps fall into
the hopper below.
The trimming blade motor [1] reverses. The trimming blade HP sensor [2] detects the blade
actuator at its home position and switches off the trimming blade motor.
After the trimming blade returns to its home position, the press stopper motor [1] goes ON,
raises the stopper and plate to their home positions.
The press/stopper HP sensor [2] detects the home position and switches off the motor. This
clears the feed path so the booklet can exit the trimmer.
D455 74 SM
Operation
The press rollers { and remain down for feed out. They will function as feed rollers
opposing the booklet and transport belt below.
Booklet Feed-out
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
The exit motor [1] switches on, drives the transport belts, and starts to feed the booklet out of
the trimmer.
The leading edge of the booklet [1] depresses the exit sensor actuator [2].
SM 75 D455
Operation
The press roller motor [1] switches on and raises the press rollers to their home positions.
The press roller HP sensor [2] detects the home position and switches off the motor.
The cut position motor [1] switches on and returns the stopper assembly [2] to its home
position. The stopper assembly HP sensor (not shown) detects the home position and
switches off the motor.
The booklet exits the trimmer.
D455 76 SM
Operation
Output Tray
[1] is booklet sensor 2. When the booklet [2] exits it depresses booklet sensor 2.
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
The tray motor inside the tray switches on and moves each booklet slightly to the left as
each booklet exits the trimmer.
When the leading edge of the first booklet reaches left end of the tray this activates booklet
sensor 3 [1].
SM 77 D455
Operation
The trimmer will continue to feed booklets until there are enough booklets at the trimmer exit
to raise the actuators [1] and activate booklet sensor 1.
When all three booklet sensors are activated, this signals that the tray is full and stops the
trimmer. The booklets on the tray must be removed for the operation to continue.
Limitless Output
The trimmer can be set up for limitless output.
1. First, remove the end stopper from the output tray.
D455 78 SM
Operation
2. Next, disable booklet sensor 3. This requires a service call by a trained service
Trimmer Unit
technician to disconnect the sensor.
TR5020
D455
With booklet sensor 3 disabled, the trimmer will not detect tray full.
The trimmer will operate continuously without interruption. The booklets will fall off
the end of the tray into a container placed at the end of the tray.
SM 79 D455
DECURL UNIT DU5000
D457
None
DECURL UNIT DU5000 D457
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1.1 PREPARATION FOR SAFE SERVICING............................................ 1
Disconnecting the Downstream Unit ....................................................... 1
Disconnecting the De-curl Unit ................................................................ 3
Stabilizing the De-curl Unit ...................................................................... 5
1.1.2 DE-CURL ROLLER UNIT .................................................................... 8
1.1.3 REAR COVERS................................................................................... 9
1.1.4 FRONT DOOR................................................................................... 11
1.1.5 PURGE TRAY.................................................................................... 12
1.2 MOTORS .................................................................................................... 13
1.2.1 DE-CURL PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT MOTOR ............................... 13
1.2.2 TRANSPORT MOTOR....................................................................... 14
1.3 SENSORS .................................................................................................. 18
1.3.1 DE-CURL ROLLER HP SENSOR...................................................... 18
1.3.2 ENTRANCE SENSOR ....................................................................... 21
1.3.3 EXIT SENSOR................................................................................... 22
1.3.4 PURGE TRAY PAPER SENSORS 1, 2, 3 ......................................... 24
1.3.5 DE-CURL ROLLER UNIT SET SENSOR .......................................... 25
1.4 SOLENOIDS ............................................................................................... 27
1.4.1 EXIT GUIDE SOLENOID ................................................................... 27
1.4.2 PAPER PATH JG SOLENOID ........................................................... 30
1.5 MAIN BOARD ............................................................................................. 34
1.6 OTHER ....................................................................................................... 36
1.6.1 DISCHARGE BRUSH ........................................................................ 36
1.6.2 REMOVING THE PURGE TRAY ....................................................... 36
1.6.3 FRONT DOOR SWITCH, INNER LED BOARD ................................. 38
2. DETAILS ........................................................................................42
2.1 OVERVIEW................................................................................................. 42
2.1.1 DUAL FUNCTION.............................................................................. 42
2.1.2 MAIN AREAS..................................................................................... 43
SM 1 D457
2.1.3 PAPER PATH .................................................................................... 44
2.2 OPERATION FLOW.................................................................................... 45
2.3 ELIMINATING PAPER CURL ..................................................................... 47
2.3.1 DE-CURL ROLLER UNIT .................................................................. 47
De-curl Roller Unit Installation ............................................................... 47
Paper Curl Correction: Concave Curl .................................................... 47
Paper Curl Correction: Convex Curl ...................................................... 48
Paper Guide Positioning........................................................................ 49
2.3.2 DE-CURL PRESSURE MECHANISM ............................................... 50
Roller Pressure...................................................................................... 50
Soft Roller Home Position ..................................................................... 51
Metal Roller Drive.................................................................................. 52
2.4 PAPER PURGE .......................................................................................... 53
D457 2 SM
Read This First
Conventions
Common Terms
Core Tech Manual
Screw
Connector
E-ring
C-ring
= Harness clamp
JG Junction Gate
LEF Long Edge Feed
SEF Short Edge Feed




Safety Information
engineers).
Use only consumable supplies and replacement parts designed for use of the
machine.¥

Power
belts, etc.).

operation.
Special Tools

During Maintenance
General

Safety Devices
Organic Cleaners
Ozone Filters
cord.

items.
remove.
machine.
damaged.
machine.
vibration.
freely.
exposed to:
Dust
Water
Direct sunlight
Open flame
Corrosive gases
Trademarks
those marks.
Common Procedures
1.1.1 PREPARATION FOR SAFE SERVICING
Decurl Unit
DU5000
D457
The De-curl Unit is top heavy, has an extremely narrow base, and can fall easily.
Always attach the stabilizers before servicing the De-curl Unit.
Never leave the De-curl Unit unattended in the work area without the stabilizers {
and attached.
The stabilizers must be installed on the left and right sides as shown above.
Disconnecting the Downstream Unit
SM 1 D457
Common Procedures
1. Disconnect the De-curl Unit [A] and the downstream unit [B] from the main machine.
2. Remove the rear cover of the unit downstream of the De-curl Unit.
3. At the right rear corner, remove the docking bracket screw [A].
4. Open the front door of the downstream unit.

5. Remove the lock bar screw [A] ( x1).
6. Pull the lock bar out until it stops.
7. Pull the downstream unit away from the De-curl Unit.
8. Push the lock bar in and re-attach the screw removed in Step 5 so that you do not lose
it.
D457 2 SM
Common Procedures
Disconnecting the De-curl Unit
1. Remove the joint bracket [A] from the left side of De-curl Unit (x4).
The corners and edges of the joint bracket are sharp.

Remove the joint bracket to prevent injury while working around the De-curl
Decurl Unit
Unit.
DU5000
D457
We recommend that you ask someone to hold the top of the de-curl unit while
you attach the stabilizers. (This procedure requires about 10 minutes.)
2. On the left side, remove:

[A] Stabilizer leg (x2 Knob screws)
[B] Stabilizer leg (x2, Knob screws)
SM 3 D457
Common Procedures
3. Set the stabilizers and the knob screws aside.
4. Open the front door of the De-curl Unit.

5. Remove the lock bar screw [A] ( x1)
D457 4 SM
Common Procedures
7. Pull the De-curl Unit away from the main machine until you can see the ends of the joint
bracket [A], then stop.
8. Push in the lock bar, and re-attach the screw that you removed in Step 5 so that you will
not lose it.
Decurl Unit
DU5000
Stabilizing the De-curl Unit
D457
1. For each stabilizer:.

Loosen screw [A] (do not remove it) so that the bracket moves freely from side to
side.
Do not loosen the other screw!
SM 5 D457
Common Procedures
2. Pull the right rear corner [A] of the De-curl Unit a short distance away from the main
machine.
3. Set one stabilizer [A] under the rear left side, with the bracket [B] aligned with hole [C].
4. On the right side:

Align the bracket [A] with the hole.
Hook the bracket onto the frame with the holes aligned.
Use a knob screw [B] to fasten the bracket.
D457 6 SM
Common Procedures
5. On the left side:

Attach knob screw [A]
Tighten screw [B]
Decurl Unit
DU5000
D457
6. Pull the right front corner [A] of the De-curl Unit a short distance away from the main
machine.
7. Do Steps 3 to 5 to attach the other stabilizer to the right side of the unit.
8. The De-curl Unit can now be moved safely for servicing.
SM 7 D457
Common Procedures
1.1.2 DE-CURL ROLLER UNIT

2. Push K2 [A] to the left.
3. Unscrew the chained screw [B] (leave the chain attached).
4. Pull out the de-curl roller unit [A] until it stops.

5. Push the release lever [B] to the left.
D457 8 SM
Common Procedures
6. Remove the de-curl roller unit.
1.1.3 REAR COVERS
Decurl Unit
DU5000
D457
The rear upper cover { must be removed before the rear lower cover .
SM 9 D457
Common Procedures
1. Remove the rear upper cover [A] ( x4)
2. Remove the screws of the rear lower cover [A] ( x2)

3. Pull the top [B] of the cover away.
4. Disconnect the bottom holes from the posts.

Re-installation
1. The holes in the top edge of the rear lower cover are recessed, as shown above.
2. Engage the holes in the bottom of the cover with the posts below before re-attaching the
D457 10 SM
Common Procedures
screws at the top.
1.1.4 FRONT DOOR
Decurl Unit
DU5000
D457
1. Remove the clamp ( x1)
2. Raise the bottom of the door [A] to lift it off its bottom post.
3. Lower the top of the door [B] to remove it from its top post.
SM 11 D457
Common Procedures
1.1.5 PURGE TRAY

2. Grip K5 and slowly pull out the purge tray [A] until it stops and locks. The bottom of the
tray should be parallel to the floor.
3. Open the small flap tray [A] to make it easier to remove small paper sizes (postcards,
etc.)
D457 12 SM
Motors
1.2 MOTORS
1.2.1 DE-CURL PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT MOTOR

Preparation
Put both stabilizers on ( "Stabilizing the De-curl Unit" in p.1 "Preparation for Safe
Servicing")
Pull the de-curl roller unit out
Decurl Unit
DU5000
D457
The De-curl Pressure Adjustment Motor is on the right side, behind the bracket.
1. Remove the screws [A] ( x2).

2. Disconnect timing belt [B].
SM 13 D457
Motors
3. Pull the motor [A] out from the side from behind the bracket.
4. Disconnect the motor ( x1).
1.2.2 TRANSPORT MOTOR

Preparation
Servicing")
Take the rear upper cover off
D457 14 SM
Motors
Decurl Unit
DU5000
D457
The transport motor [A] is under the rear top edge of the unit.
1. Remove the cover brace [A] ( x2).

2. Disconnect the motor [B] (= x1, x1)
SM 15 D457
Motors
3. Disconnect the motor bracket [A] ( x2).
4. From the rear, raise the motor bracket, slide it up then to the right to disengage the hook
[A] (as shown above), then remove the bracket and motor from the other side.
D457 16 SM
Motors
5. Disconnect the motor from its bracket ( x2).
Decurl Unit
DU5000
D457
SM 17 D457
Sensors
1.3 SENSORS
1.3.1 DE-CURL ROLLER HP SENSOR

Preparation
Servicing")
Take the transport motor out
The de-curler roller HP sensor [A] is located on the right side at the rear.
1. Free the harness [A] (= x1)
D457 18 SM
Sensors
2. Remove the screw where the transport motor was removed.
Decurl Unit
DU5000
D457
3. Pull out bracket [A].
4. Disconnect the sensor [B] ( x1, Pawls x3)
Re-installation
SM 19 D457
Sensors
1. When re-attaching the bracket:

Confirm that hooks [A] and [B] are firmly inserted and locked in place.
The sensor will fail to operate correctly if the bracket is not positioned correctly.
2. Check the front of the unit where the de-curl roller unit was removed.
3. The plunger [A] should not be visible.
If the depressor is down and visible, it will interfere with the re-installation of the
de-curl roller unit.
D457 20 SM
Sensors
4. To raise the depressor, rotate the timing belt [A] and drive gear of the De-curl Pressure
Adjustment Motor until you can no longer see the plunger at [B].
1.3.2 ENTRANCE SENSOR
Decurl Unit
Preparation
DU5000
D457
Put both stabilizers on ( xref)
The entrance sensor [A] is on the right side, behind the center of the paper guide [B].
SM 21 D457
Sensors
1. Remove the paper guide [A] ( x2).
2. Remove
[A] Entrance sensor bracket (= x1, x2)
[B] Entrance sensor ( x1)
1.3.3 EXIT SENSOR

Preparation
Put both stabilizers on ( xref)
D457 22 SM
Sensors
The exit sensor [A] is on the left side behind the discharge brush [B].
Decurl Unit
DU5000
D457
1. Remove the discharge brush [A] ( x2).
2. Remove the exit sensor bracket [A] ( x2).
SM 23 D457
Sensors
3. Disconnect the sensor ( x1, Pawls x3)
1.3.4 PURGE TRAY PAPER SENSORS 1, 2, 3

Preparation
Servicing")
2. Pull handle K5 to pull out the purge tray until it stops.
3. You can see the three sensors from either the left or right side.
The illustration above shows the sensors viewed from the right side.
The sensors are easier to clean and replace from the right side.
D457 24 SM
Sensors
4. Purge tray paper sensors {, , } ( x1, x1 each)
1.3.5 DE-CURL ROLLER UNIT SET SENSOR
Decurl Unit
Preparation
DU5000
D457
Servicing")
The de-curl roller unit set sensor [A] is on the rear side.
1. Make sure the de-curl roller unit is out.
SM 25 D457
Sensors
2. Remove:
[B] Sensor ( x1, Pawls x 3)
D457 26 SM
Solenoids
1.4 SOLENOIDS
1.4.1 EXIT GUIDE SOLENOID

Preparation
Servicing")
Decurl Unit
DU5000
D457
The exit guide solenoid [A] and plunger [B] are at the left rear corner.
SM 27 D457
Solenoids
1. Press up the bottom of the plunger [A] to drop the exit guide. (This relieves tension on
the plunger and spring.)
2. Remove cover brace [A] ( x2).
D457 28 SM
Solenoids
3. Disconnect the solenoid [A] (= x2, x1)
Decurl Unit
DU5000
D457
4. Loosen plunger screw [A] ( x1).

5. Remove three screws {, , } ( x3).
SM 29 D457
Solenoids
6. Remove the solenoid [A].
7. Set the bracket on a flat surface.

8. Turn it over, remove the screws, and disconnect the bracket from the solenoid.
1.4.2 PAPER PATH JG SOLENOID

Preparation
Servicing")
D457 30 SM
Solenoids
Decurl Unit
DU5000
D457
The path junction gate solenoid [A] and plunger [B] are at the rear, below the transport motor
1. Disconnect the harness [A] of the solenoid (= x1).
SM 31 D457
Solenoids
2. Remove plunger collar [A] ( x1).
3. Disconnect the solenoid from the bracket [A] ( x2).
D457 32 SM
Solenoids
Decurl Unit
4. Pull the solenoid [A] out from the top.
DU5000
D457
5. Disconnect plunger spring [A] from the junction gate [B] and remove the plunger from
the bottom.
SM 33 D457
Main Board
1.5 MAIN BOARD
Preparation
Servicing")
The main board [A] is on the rear, just above the top of the rear bottom cover.
D457 34 SM
Main Board
1. Remove cover brace [A] ( x3)
Decurl Unit
DU5000
D457
2. Remove the main board [A] ( x4, x4, Standoff x1)
SM 35 D457
Other
1.6 OTHER
1.6.1 DISCHARGE BRUSH

Preparation
Servicing")
The discharge brush is on the left side of the De-curl Unit.

1. Remove the discharge brush [A] ( x2).
1.6.2 REMOVING THE PURGE TRAY

Preparation
Servicing")
Take the front door off
1. Pull out the purge tray [A] until you can see the screw.
D457 36 SM
Other
2. Remove screw [B] ( x1).
3. Remove the screw and bracket.
Decurl Unit
DU5000
D457
4. Raise the tray [A] to rotate it up slightly and disengage it from its rail and rollers below.
5. Remove the tray.
Re-installation
1. Set the stopper on the top rear corner [A] of the tray behind the stopper of the top rail.
SM 37 D457
Other
2. Set the bottom rear corner [A] of the tray in the rail.
3. Press down the roller [B] and slide the tray into the De-curl Unit.
4. At [A] behind the door, slide the stopper through the slot {.
5. Set the hook in the hole and push it down.
6. At the front [B] with the purge tray pulled out, re-attach the screw.
1.6.3 FRONT DOOR SWITCH, INNER LED BOARD

D457 38 SM
Other
Decurl Unit
DU5000
D457
The front door switch [A] is next to handle K5 of the purge tray.
2. Pinch the side releases of the magnet [A] and remove it.
SM 39 D457
Other
4. Remove the switch bracket [A] ( x2).
D457 40 SM
Other
5. Disconnect the switch [A] ( x2).
Decurl Unit
DU5000
D457
6. Remove the LED PCB [B] ( x2, x1)
SM 41 D457
Overview
2. DETAILS
2.1 OVERVIEW
2.1.1 DUAL FUNCTION
The de-curl unit is the first peripheral unit downstream of the main machine in the wide
selection of stackers and finishers available for this model.
A special connector is provided on the left side of the main machine exclusively for the
de-curl unit. For this reason the de-curl unit must be the first peripheral device downstream
of the main machine.
The de-curl unit has two functions:

Removing curl from paper. A soft roller, pressed onto a hard metal roller, form a wide
nip that corrects paper curl as each sheet passes between them. The pressure of the
D457 42 SM
Overview
soft roller against the metal roller can be adjusted through 5 steps on the operation
panel of the main machine to increase or reduce the pressure between these rollers.
Eliminating paper curl is crucial to efficient operation of the high-capacity stacker
installed downstream..
Purging paper from the paper when jams occur. The paper feed path for this
system is very long if the maximum number of peripheral devices is installed. The
de-curl unit is designed to reduce the number of paper jam locations by dropping a
"trapdoor" in the paper feed path after a jam occurs and shunting pages from the main
machine into a purge tray below the de-curl unit.
2.1.2 MAIN AREAS
Decurl Unit
DU5000
D457
The three main areas of the unit are:

{ De-curl mechanism. Contains the de-curl pressure adjustment motor, cam, cam follower,
and lever that apply pressure to the rollers. The de-curl pressure adjustment motor applies
pressure to the soft roller against the metal roller.
De-curl roller unit. Contains the soft roller and hard roller. Every sheet of paper passes
through the nip of these rollers. This is where paper curl is removed. The de-curler roller unit
set sensor detects when the de-curl roller unit is in or out of the unit. The unit will not operate
unless the de-curl roller unit is in.
SM 43 D457
Overview
} Purge tray. When a jam occurs downstream paper drops down into the purge tray. The
capacity of the purge tray is limited and paper must be removed manually by the operator
after every jam.
The entrance sensor detects paper as it enters the unit and switches on the transport motor.
The transport motor drives the paper feed path rollers in the unit.
The exit guide solenoid drops the exit plate when a jam occurs. This has a "trapdoor" effect
that drops paper that has fed past the junction gate into the purge tray. The path junction
gate solenoid opens the junction gate that guides paper from the main machine into the
purge tray after an error occurs down line.
2.1.3 PAPER PATH
The paper [1] enters the de-curl unit.

The entrance sensor [2] detects the leading and trailing edge of the paper from the main
machine. The entrance rollers [3] feed the paper into the de-curl unit.
The paper goes through the nip of the metal roller [4] and soft roller [5]. The exit rollers [6]
feed the paper out of the de-curl unit.
The exit sensor [7] detects the leading and trailing edge of the paper as it exits the de-curl
unit and passes to the next unit downstream.
D457 44 SM
Operation Flow
2.2 OPERATION FLOW
The main board, connected directly to the main machine via the I/F harness, communicates
with the main machine and controls operation of the de-curl unit.
Before a job can begin:
The front door switch detects the front door closed.
The de-curl roller unit set sensor detects that the de-curl roller unit is installed in the
de-curl unit and set for operation.
Before the job starts:
On the operation panel of the main machine, the operator selects the amount of
pressure to be applied at the nip of the metal roller and soft roller to correct paper curl.
The soft roller HP sensor detects the home position of the soft roller. The home position
is used as the starting point ("0") for measuring the amount of pressure applied to the
soft roller.
Decurl Unit
DU5000
When the job starts:
D457
The de-curl pressure adjustment motor switches on and applies the selected pressure
to the nip of the metal roller and soft roller.
The entrance sensor detects the arrival of paper from the main machine and switches
on the de-curl transport motor. The entrance sensor counts pulses between the leading
and trailing edge of each sheet to check paper jams.
The transport motor [1] drives all the rollers in the de-curl unit: [2] Entrance roller, [3]
metal roller in the de-curl roller unit, [4] Exit roller.
Each sheet of paper passes through the nip of the metal roller and soft roller. The paper
de-curler mechanism controls the size and depth of the nip between the metal roller and
soft roller.
SM 45 D457
Operation Flow
The exit sensor detects each sheet of paper as it leaves the de-curl unit and passes to
the next unit downstream.
If a jam occurs at any point downstream of the de-curl unit and main machine this triggers
the paper purge operation :
The front door jam LED lights. This signals that a jam has occurred downstream.
The exit guide solenoid switches on and drops the exit guide of the de-curl unit. Paper
that has already passed the paper path junction gate near the entrance of the de-curl
unit falls into the purge tray.
As the next sheet enters the de-curl unit the purge tray JG solenoid opens the junction
gate. This shunts paper fed from the main machine into the purge tray of the de-curl unit.
The junction gate remains open until the last sheet exits the main machine. Paper that
collects in the purge tray must be removed by the operator.
One or more purge tray paper sensor detects paper in the purge tray. The inner jam
LED lights. This alerts the operator that there is paper in the purge tray.
After the job ends:
If no error has occurred the transport motor and de-curl pressure adjustment motors
switch off.
If an error has occurred the motors switch off and the operator must pull out the purge
tray and remove the purged sheets. The capacity of the purge tray is limited to only 10
sheets.
D457 46 SM
Eliminating Paper Curl
2.3 ELIMINATING PAPER CURL
2.3.1 DE-CURL ROLLER UNIT

De-curl Roller Unit Installation
Decurl Unit
DU5000
D457
The de-curl roller unit can removed from the machine, turned upside down, and re-installed
so the soft roller (the black sponge roller) is above or below the metal roller.
Paper Curl Correction: Concave Curl
This example shows paper with its ends curled up to form a concave curl. The de-curl roller
unit must be installed in the de-curl unit with the soft roller above the metal roller to correct
this type of curl.
The edge of the paper passes over the guide plate [1] and into the nip of the metal roller [2]
and the soft roller [3].
SM 47 D457
Pressing the soft roller and metal roller together the surface of the soft roller to form the
convex nip.
The metal roller drives the soft roller.
The force applied to the soft roller by the metal roller is determined by the operation of
the de-curl pressure adjustment motor.
When the paper passes between the rollers, the convex nip bends the concave curl in the
opposite direction. This eliminates the curl.
The amount of pressure that the metal roller applies to the soft roller can be
adjusted through five steps with a User Tool adjustment.
Paper Curl Correction: Convex Curl
This example shows paper with its ends curled down to form a convex curl. The de-curl
roller unit must be installed in the de-curl unit with the soft roller below the metal roller to
correct this type of curl.
The edge of the paper passes below the guide plate [1] and into the nip of the metal roller [2]
and the soft roller [3].
Pressing the soft roller and metal roller together the surface of the soft roller to form the
concave nip.
The metal roller drives the soft roller.
The force applied to the soft roller by the metal roller is determined by the operation of
the de-curl pressure adjustment motor.
When the paper passes between the rollers, the concave nip bends the convex curl in the
opposite direction. This eliminates the curl.
D457 48 SM
Paper Guide Positioning
Decurl Unit
DU5000
D457
A very simple mechanism keeps the position of the paper guide at the same position,
regardless of whether the de-curl roller unit is installed with the soft roller on the top or the
bottom.
When the de-curl roller unit is installed with the soft roller on top:
The paper guide [A] is raised by a sliding plate [B].
When the de-curl roller unit is inserted, the guide rail forces the beveled edge of the up
and pushes the guide plate up into position.
The guide plate drops when the de-curl unit is removed from the machine.
When the de-curl unit is installed with the soft roller on the bottom:
A spring positions the paper guide [C].
The sliding plate [D] protrudes through a cutout in the rail. No pressure is applied to the
paper guide.
SM 49 D457
2.3.2 DE-CURL PRESSURE MECHANISM

Roller Pressure
The de-curl pressure adjustment motor [1] drives a worm gear [2] that rotates a large cam
[3].
The number of rotations of the worm gear by the motor is determined by pressure setting
selected on the operation panel of the main machine. This determines the amount of
pressure applied to correct the paper curl.
The cam presses down the arm [4] (cam follower) mounted on frame [5] (a shaft) which in
turn applies pressure to the roller plate [6]. The roller plate is attached to a linkage that
presses the soft roller [7] and metal roller [8] together. This forms the wide nip that eliminates
paper curl from the paper passing between the entrance rollers [9] and exit rollers [10].
D457 50 SM
Soft Roller Home Position
Decurl Unit
At the end of a job, the de-curl pressure adjustment motor [1] reverses and returns the cam
DU5000
D457
[2] to its home position. The feeler [3] of the soft roller HP sensor [4] detects when the cam,
cam follower, and soft roller have returned to their home positions and turns the motor off.
Returning the soft roller to its home position at the end of each job sets the soft roller at the
zero adjustment position to provide a starting point for accurate pressure adjustment in the
next job.
The roller plate [1], slide plate [2], and linkage [3] comprise the mechanism that press the
soft roller and metal roller together, regardless of whether the de-curl roller unit is installed
with the soft roller on above or below the metal roller.
SM 51 D457
When the de-curl roller unit is installed with the soft roller above the metal roller, the
force from the de-curl pressure adjustment mechanism is applied directly to the roller
plate of the soft roller.
When the de-curl roller unit is installed with the soft roller below the metal roller, the
force from the de-curl adjustment mechanism is applied to a slide plate via a linkage
that raises the roller plate and metal roller against the soft roller above.
Metal Roller Drive

The metal roller is the drive roller, and the soft roller is the idle roller.
The metal roller drive is comprised of the metal roller, a forward gear [1], and reverse gear
[2]. The metal roller is driven by either gear, depending on how the de-curl roller unit is
installed in the machine (soft roller above, or soft roller below the metal roller).
D457 52 SM
Paper Purge
2.4 PAPER PURGE
The front door jam LED [1] lights as soon as an error occurs downstream.
Decurl Unit
DU5000
D457
The exit plate solenoid [1] switches on and drops the exit plate [2]. The sheet of paper that
has already passed over the purge tray junction gate drops into the purge tray. (If this first
sheet has already entered the nip of the entrance rollers of the next unit downstream, you
will have to clear the jam at the downstream unit.)
SM 53 D457
Paper Purge
Once the trailing edge of the paper that was passing over the junction gate when the error
occurred moves past the entrance sensor [1], the purge tray junction gate solenoid [2]
switches on and opens the purge tray junction gate [3]. The solenoid remains on until all
paper fed from the main machine goes into the purge tray below. After the last sheet goes
into the purge tray, the solenoid goes off and the junction gate closes.
One or more of the purge tray sensors [4] detect paper in the purge tray. This switches on
inner jam LED to indicate that there is paper in the purge tray. (This LED is not visible unless
the front door is open.) The LED alerts the operator that paper is in the purge tray and must
be removed.
The operator opens the purge tray [1] and removes the paper. A small plate [2] can be
opened for to remove smaller paper sizes (postcards, etc.) The purge tray has a capacity of
D457 54 SM
Paper Purge
only 10 sheets so it must be emptied immediately. The operator must re-set the exit tray by
raising K3 [3].
Decurl Unit
DU5000
D457
SM 55 D457
1. Transport Motor 8. Inner Jam LED
2. Purge Tray JG Solenoid 9. Purge Tray Sensors (x3)
3. Soft Roller HP Sensor 10. Exit Sensor
4. De-curl Pressure Adjustment Motor 11. Main Board
5. Entrance Sensor 12. De-curl Unit Set Sensor
6. Front Door Jam LED 13. Exit Guide Solenoid
D457 56 SM
Motors
Operates the cam that presses the metal roller into the
De-curl Pressure soft roller. The nip between the metal roller and soft
M2
Adjustment Motor roller is where curl is corrected. The more pressure
applied by the metal roller, the wider and deeper the nip.
Drives the entrance roller, exit roller, and metal roller in

M1 Transport Motor the de-curl roller unit (the metal roller drives the soft
roller.
Sensors
Detects whether or not the de-curl roller unit

S7 De-curl Roller Unit Set Sensor
is set and ready for operation.
Decurl Unit
DU5000
D457
Detects the arrival of paper upstream of the
entrance roller. Switches on the de-curl
S1 Entrance Sensor transport motor. Also counts pulses between
the leading and trailing edge of each sheet
to check paper jams.
Detects each sheet of paper as it leaves the

S3 Exit Sensor de-curl unit and passes to the next unit
downstream.
S4 Purge Tray Paper Sensor 1 Detect the presence (or absence) of paper
inside the purge tray. If one or more of these
S5 Purge Tray Paper Sensor 2
three sensors detect paper, this signals that
there is paper in the tray and the inner jam
S6 Purge Tray Paper Sensor 3
LED lights.
Detects the home position of the soft roller.

The home position is used as the starting
point ("0") for measuring the amount of
S2 Soft Roller HP Sensor
pressure applied to the soft roller. One of 5
levels of pressure can be selected on the
main machine operation panel.
SM 57 D457
Solenoid
Drops the exit guide of the de-curl unit when a

jam occurs at any point downstream of the de-curl
SOL2 Exit Guide Solenoid
unit. Paper that has already passed the paper
path junction gate falls into the purge tray.
Opens the junction gate that shunts paper fed

from the main machine as soon as a jam occurs
SOL1 Purge Tray JG Solenoid
at any point downstream. Paper that collects in
the purge tray must be removed by the operator.
LED
Lights when a jam occurs in any peripheral unit in

LED1 Front Door Jam LED
the system paper feed path.
Lights when there is paper in the purge tray. The

LED2 Inner Jam LED front door of the de-curl unit must be open to see
this sensor.
Switch
An interlock switch that detects when the front door is

SW1 Front Door Switch open and closed. Opening the front door cuts the 24V
power supply to the de-curl unit.
Board
Controls operation of the de-curl unit and communicates

PCB1 Main Board
directly with the main machine via the I/F connector.
D457 58 SM

rfg040208 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

rfg040208 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

rfg040208 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

D059/D060/D061

NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including

© 2009 RICOH Americas Corporation. All rights reserved.

Untrained and uncertified users utilizing

Ricoh Americas Corporation

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

4.13 SC TABLES: 7XX-5 .......................................................................... 4-168

B830 FINISHER SR5000

B833 MULTI BYPASS TRAY BY5000

D434 BOOKLET FINISHER SR5020

D447 HIGH CAPACITY STACKER SK5010

D452 LCIT RT5030

D454 MULTI-FOLDING UNIT FD5000

D455 TRIMMER UNIT TR5020

D457 DECURL UNIT DU5000

D391/D392 PERFECT BINDER GB5000/RING BINDER

OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS

 The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced.

CONVENTIONS AND TRADEMARKS

Symbol What it means

 Core Tech Manual

SWITCHES AND SYMBOLS

 A Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Warning

 A Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Caution

 Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds, damage to originals,

Page Date Added/Updated/New

1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

1.1.2 POWER REQUIREMENTS

1.1.3 MACHINE LEVEL

1. Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level

2. Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level

1.1.4 CONFIGURATION RULES

[1] Main Machine (D059/D060/D061)

[2] LCIT RT5030 (D452-17)

[3] LCIT RT5040 (D453-17)

[4] Multi Bypass Tray BY5000 (B833-17)

[5] Decurl Unit DU5000 (D457-17)

[6] Transit Pass Unit Type GB5000 (D391-19)

[7] Perfect Binder GB5000 (D391-17)

[8] Cover Interposer Tray Type GB5000 (D391-18)

[9] Cover Interposer Tray CI5010 (B835)

[10] Multi-Folding Unit FD5000 (D454-17)

[11] Ring Binder RB5000 (D392-17)

[12] High Capacity Stacker SK5010 (D447-17)

[14] Punch Unit PU5020 NA, EU, SC (D449-17, -27, 28)

[15] Trimmer Unit TR5020 (D455-17)

Rules for This Configuration

[1] Main Machine (D059/D060/D061)

[2] LCIT RT5030 (D452-17)

[3] LCIT RT5040 (D453-17)

[4] Multi Bypass Tray BY5000 (B833-17)

[5] Decurl Unit DU5000 (D457-17)

[6] Transit Pass Unit Type GB5000 (D391-19)

[7] Perfect Binder GB5000 (D391-17)

[8] Cover Interposer Tray Type GB5000 (D391-18)

[9] Cover Interposer Tray CI5010 (B835)

[10] Multi-Folding Unit FD5000 (D454-17)

[11] Ring Binder RB5000 (D392-17)

The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced.

Core Tech Manual

A Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Warning

A Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Caution

Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds, damage to originals,